Skip to main content

Full text of "Te Karere"

See other formats 


Te  Karere 

Established  in  1907 
Wahanga    36  Hanuere,    1942  Nama    1 

Matthew    Cowley  Tumuaki    Mihana 

Kelly  Harris  Etita 

Eru    T.    Kupa       Kaiwhakamaori 

Waimate   Anaru  Kaiwhakamaori 

"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  whakatapua  hei  hapai  ake  i  te  izvi  Maori  hi 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-nui.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  THE  BUSINESS  PRINTING 
WORKS  LTD.,  55  Albert  Street,  Auckland,  CI,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00   per   year;   $4.00   for   five   years;   $10.00   for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


CONTENTS 

Editorial —  Page 

More   Welfare  Work   for   1942    4 

Special    Features 

The  Lord  I  lath  Shewn  Us  8 

Mo  Te  Mutunga  0  Te  Ao  11 

Km  Te  Whakahokinga  Mai  0  Te  Rongo  Pau   27 

Church  Features 

Church   Welfare    Programme    <> 

Sunday  School    13 

Primarj        17 

Mutual    Improvement   Association     22 

lini    I  .mi    Programme    23 

Xcws  from  the  Field   


TE   KARERE 


1  [anucre,  \{)A2 


Editorial 


MORE  WELFARE  WORK  FOR  1942 

"//  has  always  been  a  cardinal  teaching  with  the  Latter- 
day  Saints  that  a  religion  that  has  not  the  power  to  save 

people  temporally  and  make  them  prosperous  and  happy  here 
cannot  be  depended  upon  to  save  them  spiritually  and  exalt 
them  in  the  life  to  come." — Joseph  F.  Smith. 

During  the  year  1941  an  endeavour  has  been  made  in 
the  Mission  to  gel  the  Church  Welfare-  Programme  under 
way.  It  is  appreciated  by  all  Church  members  that  the  wel- 
fare of  our  people  is  just  as  vitally  important  in  New  Zealand 
as  in  the  United  States,  or  any  other  pari  of  the  world 
where  the  Saints  reside.  As  a  beginning  it  was  suggested 
that  the  homo  of  the  people  and  the  chapels  of  the  branches 
he  made  more  beautiful.  It  was  also  suggested  that  our 
tithe>  and  fast  offerings  he  increased;  not  necessarily  in 
the  .-(.mount  each  individual  paid,  except  in  the  matter  of  fast 
offerings,  hut  especially  by  an  increase  in  the  number  of 
people  giving  of  their  substance.  The  instructions  of  the 
First  Presidency  of  the  Church,  with  respect  to  keeping 
free  from  debt  and  saving  both  money  and  commodities  for 
future  use,  were  also  repeated.  Other  projects  such  as  re- 
modeling old  clothes  and  the  planting  of  vegetable  gardens 
have  been  considered. 

It  has  been  encouraging  indeed  to  see  the  improvements 
that  have  been  made  throughout  the  Mission  in  the  beautify- 
ing of  the  chapels  and  many  of  the  homes.  At  least  three  of 
our  branches  are  rapidly  becoming  the  most  attractive  Maori 
communities  in  New  Zealand.  There  has  been  a  consider- 
able increase  in  the  payment  of  fast  offerings  and  in  several 
districts   there   has   also   been   an   increase   in    the   tithes. 

The  start  that  has  been  made  in  the  welfare  work  is 
gratifying,  hut  it  is  only  a  start  and  greater  efforts  must  he 
put  forth  in  1942.  Everyone  is  welcome  to  offer  sugges- 
tions for  the  Welfare  Programme,  and  it  is  earnestly  desired 
that  even  one  will  give  heed  to  the  instructions  that  will  be 


Hanuere,  1942  TE  KARERE 

sent  out  from  time  to  time  by  the  Welfare  Committee  of 
the  Mission. 

The  New  Year  will  commence  with  the  destructive 
forces  of  the  world  closer  to  New  Zealand  than  ever  before 
in  all  the  history  of  this  fair  land.  No  one  can  predict  what 
the  morrow  will  bring.  We  must  be  prepared  for  the  days 
ahead. 

Man's  greatest  duty  is  his  duty  to  man.  When  man 
responds  to  that  duty  he  has  discovered  the  ways  and  means 
for  remedying  the  ills  of  a  war-torn  world.  "Am  I  my 
brother's  keeper?"  said  Cain.  This  attitude  of  a  single  indi- 
vidual in  the  early  days  of  society  so  distorted  human  values 
that  humanity  has  never  recovered.  There  must  be  a  re- 
adjustment oc  human  values  before  man's  conception  of 
eternal  values  can  be  realized. 

This  is  the  life  span  appointed  by  the  Almighty  as  the 
testing  ground  for  the  saving  power  of  the  Gospel.  This  is 
the  time  and  here  is  the  place  for  every  individual  to  start 
building  for  the  eternities.  This  mortal  existence  cannot 
be  divorced  from  eternal  life.  If  man  is  to  be  eternal 
hereafter  he  is  eternal  now. 

The  Welfare  Programme  of  the  Church  will  give  us  a 
better  understanding  of  man's  relationship  to  man  and  to 
Deity  than  any  ideal  or  "New  Deal"  of  these  times. 

It  is  the  duty  of  every  Latter-day  Saint  to  become  a 
part  of  thai   Programme  in  L942. 

— Matthew  Cowley. 

EXCERPT   FROM    ELDER    LEE'S   ACCEPTANCE    ADDRESS 
<  ( General  ( 'onferen<  e,  April  6,  1941  I 

1  ask  for  your  Eaith  and  prayers,  that  as  the  years  come  ami  go 
I  may  he  the  witness  that  one  who  is  called  to  this  position  i^  expected 
t<«  he.  Will  you  pray  that  that  mighl  be  a  fruition  of  my  activity 
among  you.  I  have  loved  you.  1  have  come  to  know  you  intimately. 
Your  problems,  thank  tin-  Lord,  have  been  my  problems,  because  1 
know,  as  you  know,  what  it  means  to  walk  when  you  have  not  the 
in"ii<  \  to  ride.  I  know  what  it  means  t<>  i-"  without  meals  to  hn>  a 
book  to  go  to  the  i  niversity.  I  thank  God  now  for  these  experiences. 
I   have  loved  you  because  oi  your  devotion  and  faith.    Instructor, 


TE  KARERE 


Hanuere,  1(M2 


Church  Welfare  Programme 

By  111  Pere  Amaru,  A.B.,  MA. 


Wi  Pere  Amaru 


|  The  author  expresses  his  appreciation  to  President 
Cowley,  Brother  Kelly  Harris  and  Sister  Cowley  far 
their  helpful  suggestions  and  assistance  in  the  prepara- 
tion of  this  article.) 

The  time  has  come  For  us  to  take  stock  of 

our  efforts  in  the  Welfare  Programme  and  see 
whether  we  have  accomplished  anything  towards 
reaching  the  objective  for  which  the  General 
Authorities  had  instituted  this  work — for  the  up- 
lifting of  the  Saints. 

Although  I  have  not  received  direct  reports 
from  the  Branches  as  yet,  it  is  evident  from  in- 
formation received  at  Headquarters  that  several 
Branches  have  not  only  brought  into  effect  one 
phase  or  another  of  the  assigned  projects,  but 
that  these  Branches  have  adopted  other  projects 
which  they  are  pursuing  with  enthusiasm. 

It  is  extremely  gratifying  to  your  Mission  President  and  Wel- 
fare Supervisor  to  have  this  information,  hut  in  order  to  present  a 
comprehensive  report  upon  the  results  of  our  welfare  work  to  the 
people  per  the  medium  of  this  paper,  a  questionnaire  and  report 
blank  will  be  sent  to  every  Branch  secretary. 

If  any  member  of  the  Mission  has  any  suggestions  or  ideas 
regarding  welfare  work  within  the  Church  we  shall  be  grateful  if 
such  members  would  write  to  the  Mission  President.  Some  mem- 
bers may  have  photos  of  their  beautification  work — or  any  other 
work,  individual  or  Branch  welfare — particularly  comparative  photo- 
graphs of  the  home  or  chapel  before  and  after  welfare  work  had  been 
applied. 

The  mere  fact  that  the  four  initial  projects  of  the  Welfare  Pro- 
gramme for  the  Mission  were  assigned  for  the  six  months  ending 
December  31st,  1941,  does  not  imply  that  we  have  finished  with  those 
aspects  of  welfare.  On  the  contrary,  we  shall  strive  to  make  our 
homes  still  more  beautiful  and  more  pleasant  to  live  in  ;  we  shall 
endeavour  to  increase  still  further  the  number  of  people  paying  tithes 
and  fast  offerings ;  we  shall  work  even  harder  to  stay  out  of  debt ; 
and,  we  shall  work  ever  harder  to  grow  more  foodstuffs,  and  to 
preserve  and  store  our  surplus. 

A  question  has  been  raised  regarding  the  advisability  or  in- 
advisability  of  a  branch  or  community  store-house.  The  primary 
purpose  of  the  store-house  is  for  the  storage  of  branch  produce 
derived  from  the  tenths  received  (some  Saints  may  not  have  money 
to  pay  tithes  on  their  potato  and  kumara  crops  and  the  bags  of  pro- 


Hanuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  7 

duce  they  thus  donate  shall  be  stored  here)    from  Branch  projects 
as  such,  and  from  the  Relief  Society  and  other  bodies. 

It  is  advocated,  however,  that  each  family  store  away  their  own 
surplus  foodstuffs.  Each  home  should  have  a  store-room  which 
they  shall  endeavour  to  fill  with  preserved  produce  from  their  own 
gardens. 

WELFARE  PROJECTS  FOR  1942 

The  three  Welfare  Projects  for  1942  are : — 

1.  We  shall  improve  our  health. 

(a)  Every    Mormon    will    submit    himself    for   a   thorough 
medical  and  dental  overhaul. 

(b)  Every   Mormon   will   adopt   better  and   more   healthful 
eating  habits. 

(i)    Abstain   from  hot-water  and   milk  and   drink  cold 

water  or  cold  milk. 

(ii)  Abstain  from  white  bread  at  least  for  one  week  in 

each  month,  and  to  eat  more  whole-wheat  or  wheat-germ 

bread. 

(iii)  Abstain  from  eating  meat  at  least  three  days  each 

week,  and  substitute  fish,  Maori  sea  foods,  etc. 

(iv)   Eat  some  form  of  raw  fruit  or  vegetables  every 

day. 

2.  We  shall  have  winter  vegetables.    (The  Chinese  can  grow  and 
sell  vegetables  in  winter,  why  ean't  we?) 

fa)    Plant   carrots,  beetroot,   silverbeet,  etc. 

(i)  Information  available  upon  request  from  our 
Special  department  dealing  with  gardening,  etc..  by 
writing  to  the  "Small-Garden  Director/1  Te  Karere, 
Box  72,  Auckland. 

3.  We  shall   work   with   the    Relief   Society    in  a   tree  and   shrub 

growing  project. 

(a)    Each  Branch  shall  grow  trees  and  shrubs  around  their 

chapels,    each    one   to   be   dedicated    t<»   the    memory    of    a 

departed    member. 

(I))    Each  home  .shall  grow  more  trees   fur  he;mt  ihca.  inn,   for 

shelter,  For  firewo<  >d,  etc. 


HOUND    VOLI'AIK   OK   "TK    KARKRE,"    L943 

A    limited   number  of    bound    volumes  of   the    l"ll    LSSUe  of 

Te  Karere  is  now  available.     Place   your  orders  as  soon  as 
possible  with  Te  Karere,  Box  72,  Auckland.     Price  8    . 


8  l  E  ECARERE  Hanuere,  1942 

The  Lord  Hath  Shewn  Us 

By  Elder  A.  D.  Amadio 

In  Genesis,  chapter  41.  is  a  story  taken  from  the  life  of  Joseph, 
son  of  Jacob,  while  he  was  in  prison  in  Egypt,  and  which,  I  believe 
carries  a  message  and  a  warning  to  us. 

The  scene  opens  with  Pharaoh,  ruler  n\  Egypt,  having  dreamed 
two  dreams,  which  none  of  his  wise  men  or  magicians  could  inter- 
pret. While  the  court  of  Pharaoh  was  much  concerned  about  the 
lack  of  an  interpretation  for  these  dreams,  the  chief  butler  told 
Pharaoh  of  Joseph's  ability  as  an  interpreter  of  dreams.  Pharaoh 
called  for  Joseph  and  asked  him  about  his  power  to  solve  dreams, 
but  Joseph  humbly  denied  having  any  personal  ability,  saying,  "It 
is  not  in  me:  Cod  shall  give  Phara oh  an  answer 
of  peace."  Pharaoh  then  unfolded  his  dream, 
saying:  "In  my  dream,  behold,  T  stood  upon 
the  hank  of  a  river,  And  behold,  there  came 
up  out  of  the  river  seven  kine,  fat-fleshed  and 
well  favoured;  and  they  \v<\  in  a  meadow: 
And  behold,  seven  other  kine  came  up  after 
them,  poor  and  very  ill-favoured  and  lean- 
fleshed,  Mich  as  T  never  saw  in  the  land  of 
Egypt  for  badness.  And  the  lean  and  ill- 
favoured  kine  did  eat  up  the  first  seven  fat 
kine.  And  when  they  had  eaten  them  up  it 
could  not  be  known  that  they  had  eaten  them, 
but  they  were  still  ill-favoured,  as  at  the  be- 
ginning;  So  T  woke." 

r™  i      1  •  r    11  u  a       i    T     Quorum    of   Twelve   Apos- 

Ihe  second  dream  is  as  follows:  And  L  ties,  called  at  the  April 
saw  in  my  dream,  and  behold,  seven  ears  came   (J,nf,ll"'"n.i;,111-  h<'';»;'" 

ManaRintf    Director   of    the 

up  on  one  stalk,  t nil  and  good;  And  heboid,  Church  Welfare  Pro- 
seven  ears  withered,  thin,  and  blasted  with  the  ^sltton  he  still  'retains, 
east  wind,  sprang  up  after  them.  And  the  thin  S^ibfiit^to^he *<£££ 

ears  devoured  the  seven  srood  ears."  in*  out  of  the  win  of  God. 

.  .  .  The    new    Apostle    was 

Joseph  s  interpretation  oi  the  dreams  is  bom  March  2s.  1899,  in 
well  known,  but  to  freshen  our  memories  it  is   ha^een  one'of  eoitinu! 

briefly  as   follows:  The  seven   fat  kine  and  the   ous  faithful  service  in  the 

Church. 

seven    good    ears    represent    seven    years    ot 

plenty,  and  the  seven  lean  kine  and  seven  poor  ears  <>\  corn  repre- 
sent seven  years  of  famine.  Joseph  advised  Pharaoh  to  store  his 
wheat  in  the  years  of  plenty  for  use  during  the  famine.  This  was 
done   and   the    fulfilment   of   the   dreams   was   immediate. 

In  Joseph's  reply  to  Pharaoh  are  remarks  which  are  of  interest 
and  use  to  us.  In  the  25th  verse  he  said  :  "God  hath  shewed  Pharaoh 
what  He  is  about  to  do";  this  is  repeated  in  the  28th  verse.  In  the 
32nd   verse   he   said,   "And   for  that   the  dream   was  doubled    unto 


Hanuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  9 

Pharaoh  twice;  it  is  because  the  thing  is  established  by  God,  and 
God  mill  shortly  bring  it  to  pass." 

We  have  here  an  example  of  the  Lord  over-ruling  in  the  destiny 
of  nations,  so  that  the  distressed  might  be  relieved  and  His  words 
fulfilled.  It  is  an  example  of  how  God  informs  us  of  things  to 
come.  The  Lord  has  ever  warned  His  people  of  catastrophies  to 
come,  but  rarely  does  he  put  a  dictator  or  a  Pharaoh  in  charge  to 
see  that  His  warnings  are  heeded. 

We  have  several  instances  of  the  Lord  through  His  servants 
in  this  last  dispensation,  warning  us  of  events  to  come,  and  of  our 
people  taking  no  heed.  Joseph  Smith,  while  in  Kirtland,  warned  the 
brethren  about  speculation,  but  many,  including  some  of  the  leaders, 
were  caught  in  the  crash  of  1837.  When  he  first  came  to  the  Salt 
Lake  Valley  Brigham  Young  advised  the  saints  to  save  their  food, 
for  famine  might  come;  and  yet  nine  years  later,  in  1856,  Heber  C. 
Kimball,  in  the  midst  of  the  famine,  reminded  the  saints  that  both 
the  Prophet  and  Brigham  Young  had  warned  them  time  and  again 
to  save  their  food  and  grain.  He  especially  advised  them  to  keep 
their  own  personal  storehouses  full.  Again  and  closer  to  home,  you 
will  remember  that  many  of  us  got  caught  in  the  last  slump,  although 
we  had  been  warned  not  to  speculate.  I  can  well  remember  our  late 
President  John  E.  Magleby  confessing  that  if  he  had  taken  the 
advice  of  the  Church  leaders  and  not  speculated,  he  would  have  been 
comfortably  situated  financially. 

Our  Church  has  recently  built  in  Salt  Lake  City  new  grain  ele- 
vators, which,  along  with  their  old  containers,  arc  capable  of  storing 
approximately  500,000  bushels  of  wheat.  The  Church  Welfare 
office  has  warehouses  to  hold  the  other  food  and  clothing  for  our 
people.  I  have  not  space  to  write  of  all  the  Church  has  collected, 
of  the  cords  of  wood,  the  inns  of  coal,  the  bushels  of  maize  and 
oats,  the  thousands  of  cans  and  jars  of  preserved  fruit  and  vege- 
tables, the  tins  of  meat,  the  tons  of  potatoes,  the  boots  and  shoes, 
the  clothing  and  hats,  the  furniture,  or  the  hundreds  n\  other  useful 
things  our  people  may  need. 

Let  ns.  however,  not  make  the  mistake  of  thinking  that,  because 
our  Church  in  /ion  or  our  Branch  in  this  Dominion  has  supplies  in 
their  storehouses,  that  we  have  no  responsibility.  The  Church  is 
doing  this  for  an  example  to  our  people,  and  for  the  benefit  of  those 
who  arc  unable  to  lay  in  supplies. 

I 'resident  J.  Reuben  Clark,  Jnr.,  some  time  before  war  broke 
out,  told  us  to  ia\  in  ;i  year's  suppl)  of  fuel  and  food  in  prepara- 
tion for  difficult  times  ahead.  Elder  John  A.  Widstoe,  ^\  the  Coun- 
cil of  the  Twelve  ApOStleS,  told  ns  to  watch  OUt  for  famine,  because 
it  killed  more  people  than  wars.      (  )iheis  of  our  leaders  have  advised 

us  to  gel  "in  oi  debt  and  sta\  that  way.  riii-  importance  of  being 
prepared  Has  been  stressed  l»>  the  addition  of  Managing  Director  ^( 
the  Church  Welfare  Programme,  Elder  Harold  B.  lee.  to  the  Coun 

dl  of  the  T\vel\  e. 


10  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1942 

We  have  been  told  by  our  Leaders  that  after  this  war,  if  not 
sooner,  we  will  have  serious  dislocation  of  trade  with  consequent 
unemployment,  even  famine.  Like  a  big  red  danger  signal,  we  have 
the  spectacle  of  serious  food  shortages  in  Europe. 

Up  to  date  I  feel  that  the  efforts  of  our  leaders  have  been  to 
some  extent  thwarted  or  sabotaged  by  the  belief  of  mam-  of  our 
people  that —  "it  cannot  happen  here."  A  further  belief  is  held  by 
some  of  our  Maori  brethren,  that  they  can  revert  to  their  ancient  style 
of  living  and  eating.  Both  these  outlooks  constitute  wishful  think- 
ing. Every  nation  in  Europe  said  "it  could  not  happen  here."  yet 
their  food  has  been  confiscated,  their  trade  dislocated,  and  their  coun- 
tries over-run. 

During  the  slump  when  many  of  our  Maori  people  were  seri- 
ously short  of  food  and  clothing,  I  do  not  seem  to  remember  any 
considerable  reversion  to  the  ancient  way  of  living.  It  is  also  a 
good  thing  to  remember  that  the  Maori  would  have  hot  competition 
from  the  Pakeha  if  it  came  to  a  scramble  for  food.  The  history 
of  the  Pakeha  reveals  that  in  desperate  circumstances  he  has  re- 
sorted to  eating  rats  and  mice,  so  do  not  think  that  such  delicacies  as 
eels,  shelfish  or  puha  would  go  amiss. 

Brethren  and  sisters,  let  us  push  on  with  our  storehouses,  both 
Branch  and  home,  and  hope  that  we  will  not  need  their  contents  for 
ourselves,  but  that  wre  shall  be  able  to  feed  and  clothe  the  widows, 
and  fatherless,  and  strangers  within  our  gates.  But  if  shortages 
should  occur,  let  us  be  prepared,  for  "God  hath  shewn  us  the  thing 
He  is  about  to  do." 

"Endorsed  without  reservation  or  amendment  as  a  very  timely 

and  purposeful  article   bearing  in   every  aspeet   upon    the   Welfare 
Programme  of  the  Mission." — (Signed)   W.  P.  Amaru. 


HUI    TAU    MUSIC 

The  Choir  Contest  numbers  this  year  are: — 
"Grant  Us  Peace  O  Lord,"  by  Evan  Stephens. 
"There'll  Always  Be  An  England,"   M.I. A.   Men's  Chorus. 
"Soldiers'    Chorus." 

Junior  Quartette,   "Sweet  and  Low." 
In    place    of    the    Men's    Quartette    we    will    have    a    MIXED 

QUARTETTE,   "Grant   Us   Peace  O  Lord." 
Ladies'    Chorus,    "The   Stranger   of   Galilee." 
Ladies'   Trio,   "Still   May   the   Valleys   Smile." 
Junior    Trio,    "In    An    Eighteenth    Century    Drawing-room." 

For  any  of  the  above  music,  write  to  Walter  Smith,  Lewis 
R.  Eadys  Building,  Queen  Street,  Auckland,  for  the  minimum 
numbers  required  and  it  will  be  sent  to  you  immediately. 

WALTER   SMITH, 

Hui  Tau  Music  Director. 


Hanuere,  1942  TE  KARERE 

Mo  Te  Mutunga  O  Te  Ao 

Na  Erata  Lauritzen 

Na  te  Etita. — Ko  enei  korero  i  tuhia  mo  te  MBMmmmm 
timatanga  o  te  tau  hoa,  1919,  ara  i  muri  iho  o  te 
pakanga  nui  o  1914-1918.  Tera  pea  nga  whakaaro 
o  etahi  o  tatou  ka  hoki  ki  aua  wa.  He  pono  ka 
nui  nga  whakaaro  e  pupu  ake  i  nga  whakaarotanga 
a  te  tang  at  a  mo  enei  ra,  nga  ra  o  nga  whawhai  e 
pa  nei  kia  tatou  i  naianei. 

Kua  tae  mai  te  tau  hou.  Kua  pahure  te 
tau  tawhito  ki  muri.  Ko  a  tatou  mahi  katoa 
i  tera  tau  kua  tuhituhia,  kua  hiritia  ake.  Me 
he  mea  he  mahi  he  ta  tetahi  i  te  tau  1918, 
kahore  nei  i  whakatikaina  e  ia,  kahore  ona 
wahi  i  taua  tau  mo  te  whakatika  inaianei. 
Heoi  ano  te  mea  mana  ara  ma  tatou  katoa, 
ko  tenei  te  tau  hou  a  1919.  E  rite  ana  ia 
ki  tetahi  pukapuka,  e  hou  katoa  ana  nga 
wharangi,  kahore  he  mea  kei  runga,  a  ko  tatou 
nga  kai-tuhituhi  mo  taua  pukapuka.  Kei  a  tatou  te  tikanga  mo  nga 
mea  katoa  e  tuhituhi  ai  tatou.  E  toru  rau  e  ono  tekau  ma  rima,  nga 
wharangi.  E  hoa  ma,  me  whakaki  tatou  i  tenei  pukapuka  a  nama 
1919  ki  nga  mea  pai,  ki  nga  mea  e  whakahari  i  te  ngakau  ina  kore- 
rotia  e  tatou  i  nga  tau  e  haere  ake  nei,  ina  korerotia  a  te  ra  whaka- 
mutunga  ano  hoki. 

Na,  i  te  mea  kua  whakahuatia  taua  ra,  te  ra  whakamutunga,  kia 
rapu  tatou,  tera  pea  e  kite  tatou  ko  a  hea  tenei  ra.  Ehara  i  te  mea 
e  whakaaro  ana  ahau  ka  mohio  tatou  ki  te  tino  wa,  e  kaha  ai  tatou  ki 
te  ki  hei  tenei  ra,  hei  tera  ra  ranei,  te  mutunga,  no  te  mea,  e  ki  ana 
te  Karaiti,  "Otiia,  kahore  tetahi  tangata  e  matau  ki  taua  ra,  ki  taua 
haora,  kahore  nga  anahera  o  te  rangi,  kahore  te  Tama,  ko  te  Matua 
anake.  Kia  tupato,  kia  mataara,  me  te  inoi  ano:  kahore  hoki  koutou 
e  matau  ki  te  wa,  ko  a  hea  ranei."  (Maka  13:  32-33.)  Engari  e  taea 
ana  e  tatou  te  titiro  atu  ki  nga  tohu  o  enei  wa,  ki  nga  tuhituhinga 
ano  hoki  o  nga  poropiti  o  te  Atua. 

I  te  tuatahi  me  korero  tatou  i  a  Ruka  21:8-11.  "A  ka  mea 
ia,  kia  mahara  kei  mamingatia  koutou:  he  tokomaha  hoki  e  haere  mai 
i  runga  i  toku  ingoa,  e  mea,  ko  ahau  ia;  a  kua  tata  te  taima:  na,  kei 
haere  i  muri  i  a  ratou.  Na,  ka  rongo  koutou  ki  nga  taua,  ki  nga 
whakaoho,  kaua  e  mataku:  kua  takoto  hoki  te  tikanga  mo  enei  mea 
kia  matua  puta  mai ;  taihoa  ia  te  mutunga.  Katahi  ia  ka  mea  ki  a 
ratou,  ka  whakatika  tetahi  iwi  ki  tetahi  iwi,  tetahi  ranuatiiatan.ua 
ki  tetahi  rangatiratanga;  a  e  nui  nga  ru  i  te  tini  o  n.ua  wahi,  me  n.ua 
wa  o  te  mate-kai,  me  nga  mate  uruta;  me  n.ua  mataku  hoki.  me  n.ua 
tohu  nui  o  te  rangi."  Me  Ruka  21  :  25-27.  "Na  ka  whai  tohu  te  ra  te 
marama,  me  nga  whetu :  a  i  runga  i  te  wlienua  lie  pawora  no  n.ua 
tauiwi,  he  tuniatatenga J  me  te  haruru  ano  te  moana,  te  n.uaru;  ka 
hemo  ano  nga  tangata  i  to  mataku.  i  to  tarin.ua  atu  ki  n.ua  mea  e  puta 
mai  ana  ki  to  ao :  e  tlgaueue  hoki  n.ua  mea  kaha  0  nga  ran.ui.  Ko 
reira  ano  ratou  kite  ai  i  to  Tama  a  to  tangata  e  haere  mai  ana  i  runga 
i  te  kapua,  me  to  kaha  ano,  me  to  kororia  nui."  Na  6  hia  ranoi  0  enei 
o  onoi  tohu   kua  puta  mai?       Kua   puta   mai   ranoi   n.ua    Karaiti   toka.    nua 

mea  e  haere  mai  noi,  e  mea  ai,  "Ko  ahau  ia."     Ao.  ko  nua  mea  pera 

kua    puta     mai.       Koi     Awhorika     totahi     pakoha     o     nioa     nei,     ko     ia    te 

Karaiti.     Kei   Akarana,  am.   hoki   totahi  e   pera  ana.   waihoW   kahore 
o  kore  tenei  ahuatanga  I  waenganul  i  nga   Maori.     No  reira  ko  tera 

wahi    kua    tutuki;    Wainoki    ko    nga   whawhai    o    totahi    iwi.    ki    totahi    iwi. 


12  TE  KARERE  Humere,  1942 

nga  mea  whakaoho,  nga  ru,  nga  po  mate-kai,  nga  mate  uruta,  kua 
puta  katoa  i  enei  wa.  I  a  Tihema  kua  pahure  nei  i  Amerika  tetahi  ru 
nui.  Kahore  tona  rite  mai  i  te  wa  o  te  Karaiti.  I  whakangaueuetia 
Amerika  katoa,  te  rawhiti  tae  mai  ki  te  hauauru,  i  te  tonga  tae  atu  ki 
te  nota.  He  maha  atu  ano  hoki  nga  ru  i  a  Oropi,  i  a  Avvherika,  i  a 
Niu  Tireni  ano  hoki  i  tenei  tau  kua  pahure  ake  nei.  Kua  rongo 
katoa  tatou  ki  te  mate-kai  kei  a  Tiamani,  kei  a  Ateria,  kei  a  Romenia, 
me  etahi  atu  wahi.  No  naianei  tonu  tetahi  mate  uruta  i  pa  mai  ki  a 
tatou.  Ko  nga  mea  e  toe  ana  ko  nga  tohu  o  te  rangi.  Kotahi  mea 
miharo  i  puta  i  te  rangi  i  tenei  Hune  kua  pahure  ake  nei.  Ko  tenei 
mea  i  kitea  e  nga  tangata  titiro  whetu  o  Amerika  me  Ingarangi.  I  te 
waru  o  nga  ra  o  Hune  i  kitea  e  ratou  tetahi  whetu  hou,  he  mea  paku 
rawa  atu,  kahore  e  kitea  e  te  kanohi  maori,  engari  ma  te  pai  karahe 
anake,otir  a  i  te  iwa  o  nga  ra  o  Hune,  kua  nui  rawa  atu  tenei  whetu, 
kua  rite  ki  a  Ahirere,  me  nga  whetu  pera.  Nui  noa  atu  te  miharo  o 
nga  tangata  mohio,  e  titiro  nei  i  nga  whetu.  Mai  i  taua  taima,  kua 
iti  haere  taua  whetu.  Kahore  ahau  kia  rongo  i  tenei  marama,  kei 
te  pehea.  Tera  atu  etahi  tohu  o  te  rangi  e  toe  ana,  te  whakapouri- 
tanga  o  te  ra,  me  te  marama,  me  etahi  atu  tohu.  No  reira  e  hoa  ma  ki 
taku  titiro  atu,  kua  tata  rawa  te  taima  mo  te  putanga  mai  a  te  "Tama 
a  te  tangata  i  runga  i  te  kapua,  me  te  kaha  ano,  me  te  kororia  nui." 
Engari  ko  te  mutunga  koia  tera  o  te  ao?  Kahore.  Kei  muri  i  tera 
te  kotahi  mano  tau  o  te  rangimarie  me  te  pai  ki  runga  i  te  ao.  Ko 
te  wa  tera  e  noho  ai  te  Karaiti  ki  runga  i  te  ao,  a  ka  kingi  tahi  a  la 
me  Tana  hunga  tapu.  Tirohia  a  Raniera  2:44-45,  me  Raniera  7:27. 
A  taua  wa  ka  hereherea  a  Hatana,  mutu  noa  te  mano  tau,  a  hei  reira 
ka  tukua  a  ia  kia  haere  ano  i  waenganui  i  nga  iwi  mo  tetahi  wa  poto. 
Hei  muri  te  whakamutunga  o  te  ao  ko  reira,  ka  tahuna  ai  nga  mea  kino 
katoa  ki  te  kapura.  Ko  nga  hunga  tapu,  nga  mea  i  u  tonu,  ka  whaka- 
orangia,  ka  tangohia  ake  ki  te  rangi  ki  te  tutaki  i  te  Karaiti.  Hei 
muri  i  tenei  te  aranga  o  nga  mea  katoa  i  ora  i  runga  i  te  ao  nei,  te 
hunga  nui  me  te  hunga  ririki,  ko  te  aranga  tuarua  tenei.  Ko  te  mea 
tuatahi  i  oti  ai  i  te  timatanga  o  te  mano  tau.  Hei  muri  i  te  aranga 
tuarua,  te  whakawakanga  nui.  A  taua  taima  kua  hou  te  rangi  me  te 
whenua.  Ko  reira  e  hoki  iho  mai  a  Hiruharama  Hou.  Ka  nohoia  te  ao 
e  te  hunga  tika  e  whiwhi  ai  i  te  kororia  tuatahi  a  te  Atua. 

Ko  enei  ano  etahi  mea  e  tautoko  nei  i  to  tatou  whakapono,  kua 
tata  te  taima  mo  te  taenga  tuarua  mai  a  te  Karaiti.  "E  ono  hoki  nga 
ra  i  hanga  ai  e  Ihowa,  te  rangi,  me  te  whenua,  te  moana,  me  nga  mea 
katoa  i  roto,  a  okioki  ana  i  te  ra  whitu:  no  reira  i  whakapaingia  ai  te  ra 
hapati  e  Ihowa,  a  whakatapua  ana."  Ma  nga  tuhituhinga  a  te  poropiti 
a  Hohepa  Mete,  ka  marama  tatou  e  rite  ana  te  kotahi  mano  tau  a  te 
tangata  ki  te  ra  kotahi  o  te  Atua.  Katahi  tatou  ka  marama.  ko  tenei 
mano  tau  o  te  rangimarie  e  korerotia  nei,  he  Ra  Hapati  tera.  Pena, 
ko  te  Ra  Hapati  tenei  mano  tau  kia  pahemo  te  ono  mano  tau  i  i  te 
hanganga  i  a  Arama,  ka  tika  ia  kia  timata.  No  reira  kia  whika  tatou 
i  nga  tau  mai  i  a  Arama.  Kahore  pea  e  tino  tika  te  otinga,  no  te  mea 
kei  te  ahua  he  etahi  wahi  o  te  whakamaoritanga  mai  i  te  hanganga 
o  te  ao  tae  mai  ki  naianei.  Hanganga  me  te  Takanga  o  te  Tangata 
Tau  tuatahi.  Te  Waipuke  nui  1652,  whanautanga  o  Aperahama  2004, 
Putanga  atu  o  Iharaira  i  Ihipa  2509,  meatanga  o  Rawiri  hei  kingi 
mo  Iharaira  2951,  whakaraunga  o  nga  Hurai  ki  Papurona  3394,  whaka- 
otinga  a  Maraki  Poropiti  i  nga  Karaipiture  o  te  Kawenata  Tawhito 
3576,  whanautanga  o  te  Karaiti  e  4000  tau  mai  i  te  putanga  o  Arama  i 
te  Kaari  o  Ereni.  Mai  i  taua  taima  tae  mai  ki  tenei  wa  e  1919,  ara  e 
5919  tau  mai  i  te  timatanga.  Me  he  mea  i  tika  enei  whika  a  te  pakeha, 
me  taku  whakaaro  kia  oti  te  ono  mano  tau  i  te  timatanga  e  tae  mai  te 
Karaiti,  e  waru  tekau  ma  tahi  nga  tau  e  toe  ana.  Engari  e  hoa  ma 
ki  taku  whakaaro  ake  e  he  ana  enei  whika,  he  roa  rawa  tera.  E  whaka- 
pono ana  ahau  he  tata  rawa  te  taima,  no  te  mea,  i  mea  ai  te  poropiti, 
a  Hohepa  Mete,  i  te  wa  e  ora  ana  a  ia,  kei  te  ora  etahi  tangata  i  taua 


Hanuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  13 

taima  e  ora  nei,  a  tae  no  ki  te  taenga  tuarua  mai  o  to  tatou  Kai- 
whakaora.  Ka  whitu  tekau  ma  wha  tau  inaianei  i  tona  matenga  atu. 
No  reira  e  te  Hunga  Tapu  kia  mataara  tatou.  Ahakoa  he  wa  kino 
enei,  ka  poroa  enei  wa  i  waenga  e  te  Atua,  he  whakaaro  mo  te  hunga 
tika. 

ERATA  J.  D.  LAURITZEN 

SUNDAY  SCHOOL 


Theme — 

"OUR  HOMES   AND   CHAPELS   SHALL  BE   BEAUTIFUL" 
"For  Zion  must  increase  in  beauty  and  in  Holiness;  her  borders 
must  be  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened;  yea  verily  I  say 
unto  you.    Zion  must  arise  and  put  on  her  beautiful  garments." 

— Doctrine  &  Covenants  82 :  14. 


SACRAMENT  GEM 
How  great  the  wisdom  and  the  love 

That  filled  the  courts  on  high, 
And  sent  the  Saviour  from  above 

To  suffer,  bleed  and  die. 

CONCERT  RECITATION 
Luke  16:  15. 

"And  he  said  unto  them,  Ye  are  they  which  justify  yourselves 
before  men;  but  God  knoweth  your  hearts;  for  that  which  is  highly 
esteemed  among  men  is  abomination  in  the  sight  of  God." 

KORERO  A  NGAKAU 
Ruka  16:  15. 

"Na  ko  tana  meatanga  kia  ratou,  K<>  koutou  te  hunga  e  whaka- 
tikatika  ana  ia  koutou  ano  i  te  aroaro  <>  nga  tangata;  ko  te  \m;i 
la  e  matau  ana  kj  o  koutou  ngakau  :  ko  te  tnea  nui  hold  ki  nga  tangata 
hei  mea  whakarihariha  ki  te  aroaro  o  te  Atua." 

SINGING   PRACTICE 
Suggest  that   llui  Tan  Choir  numbers  be  practised.    Where  a 
school  is  too  small  and  Is  nol   therefore  actively  interested  in  the 
llui  Tau  choral  numbers,  practise  suitable  hymns. 

DISTRICT  SUPERINTENDENTS 

Would  all  District  Superintendents  of  Sunda)  Schools,  and 
where  there  is  no  Districl  Superintendent,  the  District  President 
acts  in  that  capacity,  send  tmmediatel)  to  Mission  Headquarters  the 
in  formation  asked  hereunder : — 


14  TE  ECARERE  Ilanucre,  1942 

Number  of  Sunday  Schools  in  District  at  cud  of  /ear  1(M0 

Number  of  Sunday  Schools  in  District  at  end  of  year  1941 

Number  of  visits  made  by  Superintendency  during   1941    

Number  of  Officers  and  Teachers  in  District   Superintendency  liv- 
ing  Word   of    Wisdom Paying    Tithing   ......... 

Number  of  Officers  and  Teachers  in   District   living  Word  of   Wis- 
dom    Paying  Tithing 

Kindly  send  in  the  above  information  before  January  10,  1942. 

KINDERGARTEN.     Thought:  "Faith  and  Prayer." 
"Christ    Walks    On    the    Sea."     (Matt.    14.) 
"Israelites    Crossing    the    Red    Sea."      (Exodus    13    and    14) 
"Naaman,  the  Leper."     (2  Kings  5) 

PRIMARY. 

"The  Ten  Commandments."    (Exodus   19   and  20).     Thought:   "The 

Lord  teaches  His  children  how  to  serve  Him." 
"A   Golden   Calf."    (Exodus   32   to    34.)     Thought:   "To   God,   Our 

Heavenly  Father,  we  owe  all  our  worship." 
"Living   to   Bless   Others."    (Book  of   Ruth)     Thought:   "The  Lord 

remembers  a  kind  and  loving  heart." 

CHURCH  HISTORY. 

"Storm  on  the  Ocean."  (1  Nephi  18:10-25)  Thought:  "Forgive- 
ness." Facts  about  the  lesson:  The  voyage  begins  pleasantly — Nephi's 
brothers  become  rude — are  reproved  by  him — they  rebel  and  bind 
Nephi — a  terrible  storm — threatened  with  destruction — Nephi  is  loosed 
— forgives   his   brothers — storm  abates — arrival   at  the   promised   land. 

"Nephites  and  Lamanites."  (2  Nephi  5)  Thought:  "Reward  for 
obedience."  Facts  about  the  lesson:  Separation  of  the  colony  into  two 
peoples — curse  placed  on  the  Lamanites — God  prospers  the  Nephites. 

"King  Benjamin's  Preaching."  (Mosiah  2  to  4)  Thought: 
"Humility."  Facts  about  the  lesson:  King  Benjamin — his  humility — 
he  preaches  to  his  people — tells  of  Christ's  coming — the  people  covenant 
to  do  the  will  of  God. 

A  &  B  DEPARTMENTS. 

"The  Story  of  Jacob" — The  Blessing  Seeker.  (Genesis  25  to  27) 
What  to  look  for.  Characteristics  of  Esau  and  Jacob — Jacob's  scheme 
to  get  the  birthright — Rebekah's  instructions  to  Jacob  in  order  that 
he  might  gain  the  Patriarchal  blessing — The  blessings  of  Esau  and 
Jacob — Esau's  unworthiness  of  blessing — He  despised  it — He  sold  it — 
He  married  among  the  Canaanites — He  was  a  murderer  at  heart.  Prob- 
lems: How  do  the  qualities  of  Esau  and  Jacob  invariably  affect  our 
home  life?  What  relative  value  did  the  two  brothers  place  upon  the 
birthright?  What  were  the  feelings  within  the  family  after  Jacob 
gained  the  greater  blessing?  What  are  your  birthrights?  How  are 
birthrights  often  sold  for  less  than  a  mess  of  pottage? 

Note. — If  the  lesson  is  too  short  to  cover  the  month  the  teachers 
are  advised  to  formulate  some  plan  v/hereby  the  students  may  be  given 
an  opportunity  to  give  talks  in  the  class  on  some  of  the  ancestors  of 
Jacob. 

C.   &   D  DEPARTMENTS. 

"On  the  Way  to  and  in  Galilee." — Jesus  begins  the  organization 
of  His  Church.  (Mark  2  and  3,  Matthew  9  and  12,  Luke  5  and  6.) 
Problem:  What  did  Jesus  wish  to  illustrate  by  the  new  wine  and  old 


Hanuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  15 

bottles,  etc?  What  is  meant  by  "the  Sabbath  was  made  for  man  and 
not  man  for  the  Sabbath"?  What  in  this  lesson  shows  that  rituals  have 
a  place  in  the  gospel  plan  only  as  they  benefit  man? 

"The  Sermon  on  the  Mount."    (Matt.   5:  1-16  and  Luke   6:20-36.) 

GOSPEL  DOCTRINE. 

"Manasseh  and  Josiah."  (2  Kings  21  to  23  and  2  Chronicles  33  to 
35.)  Helps — Manasseh's  impious  reign — his  ruin  foretold — Amnion's 
reign — Josiah  sixteenth  king  of  Judah — religious  degradation  of  the 
people — restoration  of  the  temple  and  the  ark — Book  of  the  Law  dis- 
covered— the  prophetess  Huldah — destruction  of  the  idols — the  great 
passover — death   of  Josiah. 

"The  Capture  of  Jerusalem."  (2  Kings  23  and  24,  Jeremiah  7,  9, 
10,   13,  22,  25,  26  and  36.) 

MAORI   CLASS. 

RATAPU   TUATAHI 

Nga  hua  o  te  takanga  atu.  Na  te  hara  o  tatou  matua  i  whiwhi  ai 
ki  te  whakamatauranga  o  te  mohiotanga  ki  te  pai  ki  te  kino,  kaore  nei 
raua  i  mohio  i  mua  atu,  i  te  wa  o  te  harakoretanga.  Te  tukunga  iho 
o  te  takanga  atu  he  hua  kino  rawa  mehemea  i  taua  wa  tonu  ka  whiti 
atu  raua  i  to  raua  ahua  ki  te  oranga  mutunga  kore  kahore  i  ripeneta, 
kahore  he  whakamarietanga.  I  te  kaha  pouri  i  muri  mai  o  to  raua 
mohiotanga  mo  te  rereketanga  o  to  raua  ahuatanga,  i  to  raua  mohio- 
tanga, i  te  maramatanga  mo  nga  painga  o  te  rakau  o  te  ora,  no  reira 
ka  whirinaki  pera  o  raua  mahara  kia  watea,  ma  te  kainga  o  te  kai 
o  te  oranga  tonutanga.  I  te  aroha  kia  raua  ka  meatia  kia  kore  raua 
e  kai. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  Na  te  aha  o  tatou  matua  i  whiwhi  ki  te  matauranga  ki  te  pai, 
ki  te  kino? 

2.  He   aha  te  tukunga   iho   o   te  takanga   atu? 

3.  He   aha   i   kore   ai   e   tukua  kia  kai   i  te   hua   o   te   rakau   o   te 
orangatanga? 

RATAPU    TUARUA 
Mo    te    peinga    atu    ia    Arama    raua    ko    Iwi.      Nga    kupu    a    to    Kai- 

hanga  mo  te  take  i  peia  atu  ai  a  Arama  raua  ko  Iwi  i  Erene  e  marama 
ana:  "Na,  ka  mea  a  Ihowa  te  Atua,  nana,  kua  riU'  nei  te  tangata  ki 
tetahi  o  tatou,  te  mohio  ki  te  pai  ki  te  kino;  na.  kei  totoro  atu  toiia 
ringa  aianei,  kei  tango  i  etahi  o  nga  hua  o  te  rakau,  kei  kai.  a  ka 
ora  tonu,  koia  i  tonoa  ai  ia  e  thowa,  e  to  Atua  i  to  kari  i  Erene,  hoi 
ngaki  i  to  oneone,  i  tangohia  mai  nei  ia  i  reira.  Beoi  peia  ana  e  la  to 
tangata ;  a  whakanohoia  ana  ki  te  taha  ki  to  rawhiti  o  te  kari  o  Erene 
etahi  kerupima  mo  tetahi  hoari  mura  lie  mea  piupiu  hei  tiaki  i  to  hua- 

rahi   ki   to    rakau    0   te    ora." 
Nga   Patai: 

i.    lie  aha  te  kupu  a  ihowa  mo  («■  tangata? 

2.     Ho  aha  i   whakanohoia  ai   ho  krrupinui   he   hoari   inura  ki  to  taha 
rawhiti  0  Krono? 

RATAPU   TUATORU 
Ta    Arami    te    poropiti    Niwhai.       1     mamma    tonu    a    Arami    mo    to 

tukunga  iho  mo  i  kainga  e  Arama  raua  h"  i^i  to  hua  o  to  rakau  o  to 

ora;    o    whai    ako    nei    tana    whakainarania    mo    taua    take:    "Na.    ka    kilo 

taua  kua  rite  to  tangata   ki  to   Atua,  !>•  mohio  ki  to  pai  ki  to  kino, 

na,  kei  totoro  atu  tona  ruma  koi  tangO  I  to  to  rakau  0  to  ora.  koi 
kai.   a   ka   ora   tonu.    ka    whakanohoia   <•   to    Ariki    o    to    Atua.   totalu    koru 


1"  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1942 

pima  me  tetahi  hoari  mura,  kia  kore  ai  ia  e  tango  i  etahi  <>  nga  hua, 
a  penei  ka  kite  tana  tera  ano  he  wa  i  tukua  ki  te  tangata  kia  ripeneta, 
koia  he  wa  whakamatautau  he  wa  kia  ripeneta  me  te  mahi  ki  te  Atua. 
Ina  hold   mehemea  i  totoro  wawe  atu  te  ringa  o  Arama,   mehemea  i 

tango  i  to  te  rakau  o  te  ora,  penei  kua  ora  tonu  la,  ake,  ake,  ki  te 
ritenga  o  te  kupu  a  te  Atua,  kua  kore  hoki  ona  wa  mo  te  ripeneta,  a 
ko  te  kupu  ano  hoki  a  te  Atua  kua  kore  e  mana,  to  te  whakaoranga 
tikanga  kua  whakakorea  atu. 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  Pehea  ta  Arami   whakamarama  mo  te  kore  o  Arama  raua  ko 
Iwi  i  tukua  kia  kai  i  te  hua  o  te  ora? 

2.  Mehemea  i  kainga  te  hua  ka  pehea  a  Arama  me  Iwi? 

RATAPU   TUAWHA 

Te  huanga  tonu  ake  o  te  takanga  atu  ko  te  whakaurunga  mai  o  te 
materaate  me  ona  paanga  mauiui  katoa,  hore  ake  te  ahua  tuatahi  o  te 
matekore.  Pa  tika  tonu  mai  kia  Arama  nga  hua  o  te  hara  i  te  titohea 
me  te  poururu  o  te  whenua,  huakore  o  te  oneone  hore  rawa  i  rite  ki 
te  ataahua  me  whai  hua  o  Erene.  I  te  wahi  o  nga  mea  papai  me  nga 
tupu  whai  take,  kua  ara  he  tataramoa  me  nga  pungitangita;  a  me 
mau  tonu  te  mahi  a  te  tangata  me  te  pangia  hoki  o  te  ngenge  mauiui 
a  tinana,  ki  te  ngaki  hoki  i  te  whenua  e  riro  mai  ai  he  kai  e  rite  ana. 
I  tau  iho  ki  runga  kia  Iwi  nga  whiu  o  te  tinana  matemate;  nga  niamae- 
tanga  me  nga  pouritanga  kua  tirohia  nei  inaianei  ko  to  te  wahine  tonu 
ahua  i  pa  kia  ia,  i  meatia  hoki  ia  hei  raro  i  te  mana  o  tana  tane. 
I  te  mea  kua  kamere  atu  to  raua  ahua  tuatahi  o  te  harakoretanga, 
kua  whakama  i  to  raua  tu  tahanga  a  ka  hanga  e  te  Ariki  he  kakahu 
hiako  mo  raua.  I  runga  ngatahi  i  te  tane  me  te  wahine  te  toronga 
mai  o  te  whiu  o  te  mate  wairua;  no  taua  ra  tonu  hoki  raua  ka  peia  atu 
i  Erene,  a  ka  maka  atu  i  te  aroaro  o  te  Ariki.  Te  nakahi  i  te  mea 
kua  rite  nei  ia  ia  a  Hatana  hiahia  kua  tau  ki  raro  i  te  riri  o  te  Atua, 
kua  waiho  kia  ngokingoki  i  roto  i  te  puehu  mo  ake  tonu  atu,  kia 
pangia  hoki  i  te  hoariritanga  i  roto  o  nga  ngakau  o  nga  tamariki  a 
Iwi  me  o  ratou  whakatupuranga  kua  kiia  ra  kia  pera. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  He  aha  i  pa  tonu  mai  kia  Arama  raua  ko  Iwi  i  muri  o  to  raua 
takanga   atu? 

2.  Whakatakina    nga    mamaetanga   me    nga   pouritanga   i    pa    kia 
Arama  me  Iwi? 

3.  He  aha  te  whiu  a  wairua  i  pa  ngatahi  mai  kia  raua? 

SERVICE  NEWS 

Following  is  a  telegram  received  from  Minister  of  Defence:  "Much 
regret  to  inform  you  that  your  son,  26045  Pte.  Mohi  Tarawhiti,  has 
been  reported  wounded.  The  Prime  Minister  desires  me  to  convey  to  you 
on  behalf  of  the  Government  his  sincere  wishes  for  a  speedy  recovery." 

Newspaper  reports  to  hand  tell  of  the  death  from  wounds  of  2nd 
Lieut.  W.  H.  MacKay,  who  is  very  well  known  to  many  people,  and  will 
be  remembered  for  his  participation  in  the  Hui  Tau  1940  M.I. A.  Parade 
competitions. 

Pte.  Dennis  Hammon,  son  of  Henry  Hammon,  Gisborne,  is  an- 
nounced among  the  wounded. 

"Te  Karere"  wishes  to  convey  to  the  relatives  and  loved  ones  of  the 
above,  and  the  many  others  who  have  fallen  and  been  wounded  in  this 
war,  the  deepest  sympathy,  and  as  the  Minister  of  Defence  conveys, 
sincere  wishes   and   prayers  for  the  speedy  recovery   of  the  wounded. 


Hanuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  17 

PRIMARY 

FIRST  WEEK 

Objective: 

Help  the  children  to  appreciate  the  goodness  of  our  Heavenly 
Pather  by  calling  attention  to  the  awakening  of  trees  and  flowers  and 
the  return  of  the  birds. 

Lesson   Story: 

It  was  Tommy's  turn  to  tend  little  sister.  Every  morning  since 
the  snow  had  melted  and  the  sun  had  begun  to  shine,  Tommy  and  his 
sister  Caroline  took  turns  wheeling  baby  sister  out  in  the  sunshine. 
Mother  said  she  was  glad  Heavenly  Father  sent  the  sunshine  because 
it  made  baby  sister  grow  strong  and  rosy  cheeked.  Usually  Tommy 
just  loved  to  tend  the  baby,  but  this  afternoon  he  wanted  to  watch 
some  boys  fly  a  kite  in  a  vacant  lot.  He  wanted  so  much  to  watch 
the  boys  that  he  wasn't  very  nice  about  tending  baby  sister. 

As  he  wheeled  the  buggy  up  and  down  the  sidewalk,  instead  of 
there  being  a  bright,  happy  smile  on  his  face,  he  looked  like  a  little 
scowley  owl.  Mother  had  told  Tommy  to  wheel  baby  around  the  block 
so  he  pushed  the  buggy  along  the  sidewalk  and  kept  scowling  because 
he  was  so  cross  and  unhappy. 

Suddenly  he  heard  something. 

"Cheer-up,  cheer-up.  Cheer  eee,  cheer  eee!"  it  seemed  to  say. 
Tommy  looked  up  where  the  sound  came  from.  There  was  a  lovely 
Robin  Redbreast.  It  was  the  first  robin  Tommy  had  seen  for  a  long, 
long  time.  He  forgot,  for  a  moment  to  be  cross,  he  was  so  glad  to 
see  Robin  Redbreast.  Robin  had  such  a  sweet,  happy  song,  it  made 
Tommy  feel  better  just  to  hear  him.  Then  he  saw  another  robin  come 
flying  with  a  feather  in  her  beak,  and  he  knew  that  they  were  building 
a  nest  in  the  tree  right  close  to  the  sidewalk. 

"What  fun  it  will  be  to  watch  you  build  your  nest,"  thought 
Tommy.  "I  shall  watch  you  all  summer  long  and  perhaps  some  day 
I  shall  see  some  baby  birds  fly  out  of  this  tree." 

He  pushed  the  baby  buggy  on  until  he  heard  baby  sister  inside 
start  to  say,  "A  goo,  a  goo,  a  goo!"  Then  he  saw  something  very 
beautiful  flying  right  over  the  baby  buggy.  It  was  an  orange  some- 
thing with  black  spots.  It  had  been  asleep  all  winter  long  and  had 
just  awakened  now  that  the  sun  was  shining  again.  What  do  you 
think  it  was?     (Show  picture  of  a  butterfly.) 

"See  the  pretty  butterfly,  baby,"  said  Tommy.  "It  wants  to  fly 
away  because  Heavenly  Father  gave  it  wings  to  fly  with,"  and  they 
watched   it  until   it  flew  right  up   over  the  tree  tops. 

As  Tommy  wheeled  the  baby  buggy  around  a  corner  he  saw  some- 
thing green  like  this  (show  bulb)   pushing  up  through  the  ground.    He 

stopped    pushing   the    lniggy.      "Look,    baby,"    he    said.      "Soon    this    will 
have  a   lovely  flower  on.      These  are  spring  flowers  already  coming  up." 

But  baby  was  getting  sleepy  bo  Tommy  pushed  the  buggy  on, 

Then  BOmething  as  blue  as  the  sky   flew  right   in   front   of  them  and 

lit  on  a  fence  nearby.     It  was  a  bluebird.     (Show  picture.) 

"Oh,   you    pretty,    pretty    bluebird/'   said   Tommy.       "Where   did   you 

come   from?" 

The     bluebird     Only     answered,     "('here,     cheee!" 

The   bird   COUld    not    tell   Tommy   so   he   had   to   think   about    where    it 

got  its  coat.     "It's  just  the  colour  of  the  sky."  thought  Tommy, 

Then    he   began    to   think   of   ;iii    the  beautiful    things    Heavenly 

Pather    had    made       the    bright    sunshine,    that    made    him    BO    warm       the 
robin    with    its    sued      .one;      the    spring    flowers    that    soon    would    come 

the  bluebird  with  it    pretty  blue  coat   (show  pictures  as  each  is  men- 
tioned)   and   even   the   wind   that    helps  so   much. 


18  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1942 

When  Tommy  thought  of  all  these  lovely  things  that  Heavenly 
Father  had  made  to  make  him  happy  he  was  ashamed  that  he  had 
been  so  cross. 

Instead  of  looking  like  a  scowley  owl,  he  had  a  bright,  happy 
smile  on  his  face  when  he  got  back  home. 

SECOND  WEEK 

COURAGE  TO  DO  RIGHT 
Objective: 

If  we  sincerely  try  to  do  right  our  Heavenly  Father  will  help  us. 

Suggestions    for    Teaching: 

The  truth  to  be  taught  through  this  lesson  is  one  that  should  be 
impressed  early  in  the  life  of  the  child.  Consider  it  carefully.  Be 
sure  you  believe  it  yourself.  Perhaps  you  can  think  of  personal  ex- 
periences that  prove  it. 

Here  are  some  thoughts  that  may  stimulate  your  thinking:  There 
are  many  heroes  in  the  world.  Some  have  shown  great  coinage  in 
battle.  Some  have  risked  their  lives  to  save  others  in  floods  and  fires 
and  storms,  and  have  done  it  without  complaint  and  without  wishing 
for  reward. 

But  there  are  greater  heroes  even  than  these.  The  boy  or  girl 
who  can  do  his  or  her  daily  duty  in  the  right  way,  never  afraid  to  do 
right,  no  matter  what  the  result  will  be,  and  without  complaining,  is 
braver  than  those  who  do  daring  deeds.  The  very  best  kind  of  courage 
is  the  kind  that  never  fears  to  do  right.  The  only  thing  to  be  afraid 
of  is  doing  wrong. 

THREE    PRINCES    WHO    SHOWED    COURAGE 

Our  last  Bible  story  was  about  Daniel  one  of  the  four  boys  who 
was  taken  from  his  home  to  the  country  of  the  king  who  prayed  to 
images   of   wood   and   stone. 

This  story  is  about  King  Nebuchadnezzar  and  Daniel's  three 
friends,  Meshach,  Shadrach  and  Abednego.  They  had  become  great 
men  now,  and  helped  the  king  rule  over  the  county. 

Nebuchadnezzar  was  a  very  rich  king  and  had  princes  and  rulers 
for  his  servants.  These  servants  wanted  to  please  their  King  so  they 
praised  him  and  told  him  how  great  he  was. 

Nebuchadnezzar  heard  himself  praised  so  much  that  very  soon  he  . 
began  to  think  only  of  his  own  riches  and  power  and  forgot  all  about 
our  Heavenly  Father.  Then  he  did  just  the  same  thing  that  many 
kings  before  had  done.  He  built  a  gorgeous  image  of  shining  yellow 
gold.  He  set  it  on  a  plain,  a  field  with  no  trees  on  it.  Then  he  called 
all  the  most  important  people  in  the  kingdom,  the  princes,  the  governors 
and  the  rulers,  to  come  and  see  the  image  he  had  set  up.  From  all 
the  country  round  they  came,  and  when  they  were  gathered  together 
they  stood  before  the  great  image. 

Among  them  were — whom  do  you  think?  Yes.  Shadrach,  Mes- 
hach and  Abednego.  The  Bible  does  not  say  that  Daniel  was  there. 
He  was  probably  in  another  part  of  the  country. 

On  one  side  of  the  great  image  there  were  men  with  musical 
instruments.  They  were  not  playing,  they  were  waiting  and  listen- 
ing to  hear  what  the  king  wanted  them  to  do  in  honour  of  his  won- 
derful image.  Soon  a  messenger  of  the  king  came  out  before  the 
people.  He  called  in  a  loud  voice  that  all  might  hear:  "To  you  it  is 
commanded,  0  people,  that  at  what  time  ye  hear  the  sound  of  any  kind 
of  music,  ye  fall  down  on  your  knees  and  worship  the  golden  image 
that  Nebuchadnezzar,  the  king,  hath  set  up.  And  whosoever  falleth 
not  down  and  worshippeth  shall  the  same  hour  be  cast  into  the  midst 
of  a  burning  fiery  furnace."      The  king  gave  the  command.      The  musi- 


Hanuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  19 

cians  began  to  play,  and  as  soon  as  the  music  was  heard  by  the  people, 
they  all  fell  down  and  worshipped  the  golden  image  that  Nebuchad- 
nezzar had  set  up  I  said  "all,"  but  there  were  three  who  did  not  bow 
down  to  the  image.  They  stood  up  straight  and  looked  before  them. 
Can  you  tell  their  names?  They  heard  the  music  and  they  knew  the 
punishment  which  would  come  to  those  who  disobeyed.  But  these 
good  men  would  not  obey  the  king  for  they  loved  God,  our  Heavenly 
Father,  and  would  worship  no  other. 

Some  of  the  princes  went  near  to  the  king  and  said:  "O  king, 
there  are  certain  men  thou  hast  set  over  part  of  thy  kingdom,  Shad- 
rach,  Meshach  and  Abednego.  These  men  have  disobeyed  thee.  They 
do  not  serve  thy  gods,  nor  worship  the  golden  image  which  thou  hast 
set  up." 

Then  Nebuchadnezzar  was  angry  and  commanded  that  these  three 
men  be  brought  to  him.  He  spoke  to  them  and  said:  "Is  it  true,  O 
Shadrach,  Meshach  and  Abednego,  that  you  serve  not  my  gods  nor 
worship  the  golden  image  I  have  set  up?  Now  if  you  be  ready  when 
you  hear  the  sound  of  music  and  fall  down  and  worship  the  image 
which  I  have  made,  all  will  be  well  with  you.  But  if  you  worship  not 
you  shall  be  cast  the  same  hour  into  the  midst  of  a  burning  fiery  fur- 
nace, and  who  is  that  God  that  shall  deliver  thee  out  of  mine  hands?" 

But  they  trusted  in  their  God  and  stood  up  boldly  and  answered, 
"Our  God  whom  we  serve  is  able  to  deliver  us  from  the  burning  fiery 
furnace,  and  He  will  deliver  us  out  of  thine  hand,  O  King.  But  if  not, 
be  it  known  unto  thee,  O  King,  that  we  will  not  serve  thy  gods,  nor 
worship  the  golden  image  which  thou  hast  set  up." 

When  the  king  heard  their  brave  answer  he  was  very  angry.  He 
was  so  angry  he  commanded  that  the  furnace  be  heated  seven  times 
hotter  than  usual.  Then  he  commanded  that  the  three  princes  be  cast 
into   the  furnace. 

In  a  few  minutes  Nebuchadnezzar  called  out  to  his  men  and  said, 
"Did  we  not  cast  three  men  bound  into  the  fire?" 

They   answered,   "True,    O   King." 

Then  Nebuchadnezzar  said,  "Lo,  I  see  four  men  walking  in  the 
midst  of  the  fire  and  they  are  not  hurt,  and  the  fourth  man  is  like  unto 
the    Son    of    God." 

Nebuchadnezzar  then  went  to  the  furnace  and  cried,  "Shadrach. 
Meshach  and  Abednego,  ye  servants  of  God,  come  forth,  come  hither." 
And  they  came  out  from  the  midst  of  the  fire. 

Then  the  king  and  all  the  peoplq  who  were  fathered  together,  saw 
the  three  men  as  strong  and  well  as  they  were  before  they  were  east 
into  the  furnace.  They  were  not  hurt.  Not  a  hair  of  their  heads  was 
singed,  not  even  the  smell  of  ftre  was  upon  them.  Then  Nebuchad- 
nezzar spoke  and  said,  "Blessed  be  the  God  of  Shadrach,  Meshach  and 
Abednego,  who  hath  sent  His  angel,  and  delivered  His  servants  thai 
trusted  in  Him." 

Then  he  sen!  forth  a  command  that  no  "nr  should  speak  against 
the  God  who  delivered  His  children  from  the  fiery  furnace. 

So  the  king  gave  even  higher  places  to  these  three  brave  men  who 
dared  to  do   right. 

THIRD  WEEK 

THE  SICK  HEALED 
Objective: 

To    help    the    children    to    feed    and    know    that    (iod    is    the    givei    Of 

all  blessings  and  that  we  musi   put  our  trust  in  Him. 

Suggestions    for    Teaching: 

"Faith  is  a  mystical  ladder  by  which  we  climb  to  success.     Faith 

will  make  one  start  upward,  live  upward,  think  upward,  crow  upward, 
and   achieve    upward." 


20  TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1942 

"We  must  believe  before  we  can  achieve." 

"When  we  question  we  falter,  when  we  doubt  we  stop,  be  it  spiri- 
tually,  socially   or  commercially." 

••.Man's   faith   in   himself  is  but  a  reflection  of  Divine  faith." 

In  the  last  lessons  you  have  talked  with  the  children  about  Jesus 
as  a  great  eeacher.  You  have  impressed  them  with  the  truths  He 
taught  through  the  story.  In  this  lesson  you  will  give  the  children  a 
knowledge  of  some  of  the  things  Jesus  did  and  help  to  increase  their 
faith  in  His  power. 

It  might  be  well  to  assign  at  least  two  of  the  stories  to  two  of 
the  older  children  and  let  them  tell  them  to  the  class.  The  assign- 
ments should  of  course  be  made  in  plenty  of  time  for  good  preparation. 
Lesson    Stories: 

JESUS  CURES  THE  MAN  AT  THE  POOL  OF  BETHESDA 

(Text:  John   5:  1-13) 

We  read  that  Jesus,  after  calling  Matthew  to  be  one  of  His  dis- 
ciples, went  up  into  Jerusalem  to  the  feast  of  the  Jews.  Now  there 
was  at  Jerusalem,  by  the  sheep  gate,  a  pool  of  water  called  the  pool 
of  Bethesda.  Around  it  were  built  fine  porches,  in  which  lay  a  great 
number  of  persons  who  were  sick,  or  blind  or  lame.  They  waited  here 
because  at  certain  times  the  water  moved,  as  if  someone  had  stirred  it 
or  troubled  it.  And  these  people  thought  that  whoever  went  into 
the  water  first  after  it  was  troubled,  was  made  well  of  whatever  disease 
he  had.  And  a  man  was  there  who  had  been  sick  thirty-eight  years. 
Jesus  saw  him,  and  learning  how  long  he  had  been  sick,  pitied  him, 
And  He  said  to  him,  "Wilt  thou  be  made  well?" 

The  man  answered,  "I  have  no  one  when  the  water  is  troubled, 
to  help  me  into  the  pool;  while  I  am  trying  to  get  down  to  it  another 
steps  in  before  me,   and  I  am  too  late." 

Jesus  said  to  him,  "Rise,  take  up  thy  bed  and  walk."  And  imme- 
diately the  man  was  made  well,  and  took  up  his  bed  and  walked. 

JESUS    HEALS    THE    BLIND    MAN 

Text:  Mark  10:  46-52 

Jesus  went  from  one  town  to  another  speaking  to  the  people; 
and  always  a  great  crowd  came  out  to  hear  him.  Many  followed  him 
to   the   next  town,   to   hear  more   of   his   sayings. 

As  he  went  out  of  Jericho  with  his  friends  and  a  great  number 
of  people,  blind  Bartimaeus  sat  by  the  wayside  begging. 

When  the  blind  man  heard  the  voices  and  the  sound  of  many 
feet  approaching,  he  asked  of  those  who  stood  near  him,  "Who  is  com- 
ing?     What  do  I  hear?" 

They  answered  him  and  said,   "Jesus  is  passing  by." 

When  he  heard  that  it  was  Jesus,  he  began  to  cry  out  and  say, 
"Jesus,  son  of  David,  have  mercy  on  me." 

Those  about  him  spoke  roughtly  to  him,  and  said:  "Hold  your 
peace.      It  is  not  fit  that  you  should  stop  here." 

But  the  blind  man  cried  the  more,  "Jesus,  son  of  David,  have 
mercy  on   me." 

Jesus  stood  still,  and  said,  "Who  is  it  that  calls  me?" 

His  friends  answered,  "It  is  a  blind  man,  who  sits  by  the  wayside 
begging." 

Then  said  Jesus,  "Call  him  to  me."  They  called  the  blind  man, 
saying  to  him,  "Be  of  good  comfort,  rise:    He  calls  you." 

The  blind  man  rose,  and  cast  away  his  cloak,  that  he  might  move 
the  quicker,  and  came  to  Jesus. 

Jesus  said  to  him,  "What  is  your  wish  that  I  should  do  to  you?" 

The  blind  man  said  to  Him,  "Lord,  that  I  may  receive  my  sight." 


Hanuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  21 

"And  Jesus  said  unto  him,  'Receive  thy  sight:  Thy  faith  hath 
saved  thee." 

"And  immediately  he  received  his  sight,  and  followed  Him,  glori- 
fying God :  and  all  the  people,  when  they  saw  it,  gave  praise  unto  God." 

FOURTH  WEEK 

THE   HAPPY   PLAY   HOUR 
Objective: 

The  play  hour  is  another  opportunity  for  the  happy  association 
of  teacher  and  children. 

Suggestions  for  Teaching: 

If  we  can  teach  the  boys  and  girls  to  play  together,  freely  and 
with  fairness  to  one  another,  we  shall  make  men  fit  to  live  and  work 
together  in  society.  What  they  learn  matters  less  than  how  they  learn 
it.  The  great  thing  is  the  bringing  out  of  individual  character  so  that 
it  will  find  its  place  in  social  harmony." 

Lesson    Story: 

THE   LITTLE   STEAM   ENGINE   THAT   COULD 

A  little  steam  engine  had  a  long  train  of  cars  to  pull.  She  went 
along  very  well  till  she  came  to  a  steep  hill.  But  then,  no  matter  how 
hard  she  tried,  she  could  not  move  the  long  train  of  cars.  She  pulled, 
and  she  pulled.  She  puffed,  and  she  puffed.  She  backed  and  started  off 
again.  Choo,  choo!  Choo,  choo!  But  no!  The  cars  would  not  go  up 
the  hill. 

At  last  she  left  the  train  and  started  up  the  track  alone.  Do  you 
think  she  had  stopped  working?      No,  indeed!      She  was  going  for  help. 

"Surely  I  can  find  someone  to   help  me." 

Over  the  hill  and  up  the  track  went  the  little  steam  engine.  Choo, 
choo!   Choo,  choo!   Choo,   choo!   Choo,  choo! 

Pretty  soon  she  saw  a  big  steam  engine  standing  on  a  side  track. 
He  looked  very  big  and  strong.  Running  alongside,  she  looked  up 
and  said: 

"Will  you  help  me  over  the  hill  with  my  train  of  cars?  It  is  so 
long  and  so  heavy  that  I  can't  get  it  over." 

The  big  engine  looked  down  at  the  little  steam  engine.  Then  he 
said: 

"Don't  you  see  that  I  am  through  my  day's  work?  I  have  been 
all  rubbed  and  scoured  ready  for  my  next  run.      No,  I  cannot  help  you." 

The  little  engine  was  sorry  but  she  went  on.  Choo,  chool  (Mum., 
choo!     Choo,  choo!    Choo,  choo! 

Soon  she  came  to  a  second  big  engine  standing  on  a  side  track. 
Be  was  puffing  and  puffing  as  if  he  were  tired. 

"He  may  help  me,"  thought  the  little  strain  engine.  She  ran 
alongside    and    asked: 

"Will  you  help  me  bring  my  train  of  cars  over  the  hill?     It   is 

so   long  and   so   heavy   that    I    can't    gel    it    over." 

The  second  big  engine  answered—"!  have  just  come  In  from  ■ 
long  run.  I)<»n't  you  see  how  tired  1  am?  Can't  you  get  stone  other 
engine  to  help  you  this  time?" 

"I'll    try,      said    the    little    steam    engine;    and    off   she    went.       Choo. 

choo !     <  Ihoo,  choo !     <  Ihoo,  choo !     <  Shoo,  choo  I 

After  awhile  she  came  to  i  little  steam  engine  just  like  herself. 

She    ran    alongside   and    said  : 

"Will    yon    help    me    Over    thi    hill    with    my    train    of    car   '.'       !• 

so  long  and  bo  heavy  that   I  can't  get   it  over, 

"Yes,  indeed'"    aid  the  second  little    team  engine,     rn  '" 

to    help    you,    it"    •     can." 


TE    KARERE  Hanuere,  1942 

So  the  little  steam  engines  started  back  to  where  the  train  of 
cars  had  been  standing  all  this  time.  One  little  steam  engine  went  to 
the   head  of  the  train   and  the  other  to  the   end   of   it. 

Puff,   puff!    Chug,   chug!    Choo,   choo!      Off  they  started! 

Slowly  the  cars  began  to  move.  Slowly  they  climbed  the  steep 
hill.     As  they  climbed,  each  little  steam  engine  began  to  sing: 

"I-think-I-can!  I-think-I-can!  I-think-I-can!  I-think-I-can!  I- 
think-I-can!      I-think-I-can!      I-think-I-can!      I-think-I-can! 

And  they  did!  Very  soon,  they  were  over  the  hill  and  going 
down  the  other  side. 

Now  they  were  on  the  plain  again;  and  the  little  steam  engine 
could  pull  her  train  herself.  So  she  thanked  the  little  engine  who  had 
come  to  help  her,  and  said  goodbye. 

And   as   she  went  merrily  on  her  way,   she  sang  to  herself: 

"I-thought-I-could!  I-thought-I-could!  I-thought-I-could!  I- 
thought-I-could!  I-thought-I-could!  I-thought-I-could!  I-thought-I- 
could!      I-thought-I-could! 

Mutual  Improvement  Association 

HUITAU  PROGRAMME 

DON'T   QUIT 

Success  is  failure  turned  inside  out, 

The  silver  tint  on  the  cloud  of  doubt. 

And  you  never  can  tell  how  close  you  are; 

It  may  be  near — and  it  may  be  far. 

So  stick  to  the  fight  when  you're  hardest  hit. 

It's  when  things  seem  worst  that  you  must  not  quit. 
Compliments  of  the  season  to  all  the  Mutual  workers  from  your 
Board  Officers.  We  wish  you  all  to  absorb  the  message  of  our  open- 
ing poem  for  there  is  an  urgent  need  of  closer  co-operation  and  better 
understanding  between  all  M.I. A.  workers  in  order  that  the  work  may 
progress  in  these  days  of  much  disturbance.  The  months  following 
our  Huitau  has  been  months  of  inactivity  in  many  branches,  as  shown 
by  the  omission  of  the  monthly  reports ;  insomuch  our  reports  for  the 
year  fell  far  below  last  year's.  We  must  make  every  endeavour  to 
overcome  this  laxness  (or  is  it  "laxity"?),  for  these  are  times  when 
we  should  be  more  attentive  to  the  duties  given  us  to  advance  the 
Kingdom  of  God  here  upon  the  earth  lest  we  offend  our  Heavenly 
Father  and  bring  condemnation  upon  ourselves.     So  don't  Quit! 


Times 

Times 

Times 

Times 

Branches 

Reported 

Reported 

Branches 

Reported 

Reported 

Y.M.M.I.A. 

This  Year. 

Last  Year. 

Y.W.M.I.A. 

This  Year. 

Last  Year. 

Huria 

4 

5 

Awarua 

7 

5 

Kaikohe 

2 

6 

Kaikohe 

3 

5 

Matakowhai 

5 

6 

Kaikou 

6 

0 

Korongata 

7 

0 

Korongata 

7 

8 

Tamaki 

3 

6 

Huria 

4 

3 

Waikare 

1 

0 

Matakowhai 

2 

4 

Total  Branc 

hes  report 

ed  this  year 

Tamaki 

6 

6 

— 6.  Total  Branches  reported  this  year 

Branches  reported   last   year — 13.  — 7. 

Branches   reported   last   year — 14. 
(These  reports  are  taken  as  from  Nov.  1,  1940,  to  Oct.  31,  1941.) 

It  can  be  seen  by  this  chart  only  one-half  of  the  Branches  are 
active  compared  to  last  year's.      Wake  Up  and  Live! 


:rr\M  Dl  I!  P  f'M  I  A 


Korongata    .  . 

£25 

10 

0 

Huntly 

Te    Hauke    .  . 

£21 

10 

0 

Huria 

Tamaki 

£9 

10 

0 

TOTAL 

Hanuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  23 

GOLD  AND  GREEN  BALLS 

The  Board  desires  to  thank  all  the  Associations  who  have  contri- 
buted towards  the  Mission  Board's  finances.  According  to  all  reports 
the  Balls  maintained  their  usual  high  standard  and  success.  Branches 
who  have  sent  in  their  donations  to  date  are: 

£24   15      7 

£4     0      0 

£85      5      7 

We  wish  to  remind  all  Branches  that  have  not  as  yet  sent  in  their 
third  donation  to  do  so  as  soon  as  possible.  Once  again  we  thank 
you  all. 

MEMBERSHIP 

Our  financial  membership  for  the  past  season  totalled  365  com- 
pared to  624  for  the  season  previous.  Let  the  New  Year  resolution 
for  every  Branch  in  the  Mission  be  100  per  cent.  Membership  and 
improved  Monthly  Reporting.  The  1942  cards  will  be  ready  early  this 
month  (January).  The  fee  will  still  be  one  shilling  per  member  and 
the  same  system  of  sending  the  tickets  out  to  the  Branches  accordinng 
to  the  orders  being  accompanied  with  the  equivalent  cash  amount,  will 
be  strictly  followed.  (Please  note  that  all  fees  will  be  credited  to 
your  Huitau  Queen  candidate.) 

OPENING  DATE 

It  is  our  desire  that  all  Branches  commence  their  Mutuals  on  the 
second  Tuesday  in  February,  1942.  Remember  first  impressions  are 
very  important  and  is  left  to  you  officers  to  plan  an  appropriate  one 
suitable  to  your  social   conditions. 

HUITAU  PROGRAMME 

Rules    and    Regulations: 

1.  All  Mutual  members  who  wish  to  compete  in  various  contests  must 
present   their   membership    cards   upon    demand. 

2.  All  contestants  must  be  financial  members  of  an  organised  Mutual 
Branch  and  must  have  attended  at  least  three  (3)  Mutual  meetings 
in  1942.  Practise  or  activity  nights  are  not  considered  as  Mutual 
meetings. 

3.  Persons  representing  a  Branch  Mutual  must  have  resided  continu- 
ously in  that  branch  for  at  least  one  month  prior  to   Huitau. 

4.  Persons  residing  where  there  is  no  organized  Mutual,  who  wish  to 
enter  Huitau  competitions,  may  do  so  by  obtaining  permission  from 
the  Mission  M.I. A.  Presidency  at  least  two  weeks  before  Huitau. 
Each  Mutual  group  may  enter  contestants  in  any  or  all  o\'  the 
competitions;  but  only  one  entry  of  an  individual  or  team  will  be 
allowed   in   each   contest. 

5.  Branch  M.I. A.  officials  must  present  to  the  Mission  M.I. A.  Secre- 
tary, care  of  Box  61,   Dannevirke,  the  Dames  o\'  the  competitors 

and  the  events  in  which  each  will  compete,  one  week  before   Huitau. 

(Date  will  be  announced  Later.)    Entries  submitted  later  than  the 

dead-line  date  will   Dot    be  accepted.     Please  rememhor. 

6.  Each    Branch    Mutual    may    enter   one    candidate    to    Compete    foi   the 

honour  of  being  elected  Queen  of  the  1942  Huitau.     Bntry  fee  will 

be    ten    shilling's    (10/-).      Votes    will    he    awarded    en    the    following 

basis: — 


24 


TE  KARERE 


Hanucrc.  1942 


200  votes  will 
100 
5 

50 

25 

15 
100 
300 
500 
100 


be  given  for  each  Queen  Entry. 
Marae  Ticket. 


Contest  Entry. 
First-place  Award. 

Second-place  Award. 
Third-place  Award. 
One-year   Karere    Subscription. 
Five-year    Karere    Subscription 
Life   Subscription. 
Membership  Card  purchased. 


MIXED   CONTESTS 

1.  Play — "Ma's  New  Boarders."     Fourpence  per  copy  (4d). 

2.  Parade — (Interhouse   Standards). 

3.  Dance — "Old-time  Mazurka."     (35  years  and  upwards.) 

4.  Tennis — Men's    Singles,    Doubles.      (2/6    each   entry.) 

Women's  Singles  and  Doubles.     (2/6  each  entry.) 
Mixed  Doubles.     (2/6  entry.) 

5.  Haka    and    Action    Song. 

6.  Dance.      (Gold  and  Green   Caprice.) 

7.  Queen  Voting. 

1.  Oration.      Theme.  M.  MEN 

2.  Horseshoe  Pitching. 

4.  Chorus,   "Soldiers'   Chorus."      (8   to   16   singers) 

5.  Quartette   (mixed),  "Grant  Us  Peace  O  Lord." 

6.  Athletics. 

7.  Steed  Cup.      (Tennis  Open  Challenge) 

EXPLORERS 

1.  Quartette,  "Sweet  and  Low." 

2.  Handcraft    (To   be   announced   later) 

3.  Athletics. 

ADULTS  AND   GLEANERS 

1.  Oration.     Theme. 

2.  Junior   Girls'   Trio.     (In   an    18th   Century   drawing-room). 

3.  Chorus,   "Stranger  of   Galilee."    (9   to    15   contestants). 

4.  Trio,   "Still  May  the  Valleys  Smile." 

5.  Poi  Dance.    (Open  short  Poi) 

6.  Basketball   (5  a-side). 

1.  Cooking.  GLEANERS 

2.  Athletics. 

3.  Sewing. 

4.  Knitting — Balaclava   Cap   and    Mittens.    (Khaki   if   possible.) 

ADULTS 

1.  Rongopai.    (Own  choice,  but  must  be  short.) 

2.  Knitting — Knitted  Woollen  Socks.    (Khaki  if  possible.) 

1.  Cooking.  JUNIOR  GIRLS 

2.  Sewing. 

3.  Trio. 

4.  Story.      Short   Maori   legend.      Own    choice. 

5.  Elocution,    "Maori   Hymn   to   the   Creator," 

(See  inside  front  cover.) 

6.  Basketball    (7   players). 

7.  Athletics. 

8.  Knitting — Scarves.     (Khaki  if  possible.) 


by   Henry   M.    Stowell. 


Hanuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  25 

SCOUTS 

1.  Handycraft  Work. 

2.  Aerial  Runway. 

3.  Signalling:  Morse  and  Semaphore. 

4.  Fire-lighting   and   Billy  Boiling. 

5.  Flagpole   Raising. 

All  knitted  articles  are  to  be  handed  in  to  the  M.I. A.  Board  after 
the  judging  at  Hui  Tau,  and  they  will  be  sent  overseas  for  members  of 
the  Maori  Batallion. 

This  programme  is  subjected  to  further  alterations  and  all  officers 
are  advised  to  watch  for  further  announcements  through  "Te  Karere." 

Wishing  You  All  a  Happy  New  Year. 

M.I.A.    Board. 

COOKING  FOR  HUITAU 

Arranged  by  Heni  Tengaio 


Adults: 


FRUIT   CAKE    (for  Overseas) 


1  lb.  Butter,  1  lb  Flour,  1  lb.  Sugar,  10  Eggs,  2  wineglasses  Brandy, 
Nutmeg,  Cloves,  Mall  and  mixed  Spice  to  taste,  2  lbs.  Raisins  and 
Currants. 

Cream  the  butter  and  the  sugar,  add  eggs  one  at  a  time,  beating 
well  after  each  egg  has  been  added.  Stir  in  the  dry  ingredients  and 
lastly  add  the  fruit  and  brandy.  Bake  in  a  moderate  oven  for  five  or 
six  hours.      This  cake  will  keep  for  a  year. 

BANANA   CHUTNEY 

3  lbs.  Apples,  2  lbs.  Bananas,  I  lb.  preserved  Ginger,  1  lb.  Raisins, 
2 \  pints  Vinegar,  I  oz.  Cayenne,  I  lb.  Salt,  lh  lbs.  Onions,  11  lbs. 
Brown  Sugar. 

Chop  up  ingredients,  put  everything  in  pan  and  boil  for  2  hours. 

QUINCE    CONSERVE 

10  large  Quinces  cut  into  pieces,  3  quarts  of  cold  water.  Boil 
until    it   jellies. 

Gleaner    Girls: 

CHOCOLATE    AND    WALNUT    CAKE 

■l  ozs.  light  brown  Sugar,  3  ozs,  Butter,  6  ozs.  Flour,  2  Eggs,  2  tea* 
spoons  Cocoa,  8  tablespoons  Milk,  2  teaspoons  Baking  Powder,  I  cup 
Walnuts.  Bea1  Bugar  and  butter  to  a  cream,  add  eggs  one  at  a  time, 
giving  the  mixture  a  good  beating,  stir  in  other  Ingredients  and  cook 
in  greased  tin   for  hall  hour. 

[cing.     I  cup  [cing  Sugar,  2  teaspoons  Cocoa,  few  drops  Vanilla, 

I    CUP    Walnuts. 

PRESERVED   RHUBARB 

Boil  for  20  minute  a  syrup  of  sugar  and  water  in  quantities  of  I 
cup  sugar  to  l  <-up  water.    Place  rhubarbi    In  pn  nd  pack 

tight;  put  in  over  long  enough  to  heat  jars  thoroughly.     When  heated, 


26 


TE  KARERE 


i  [anuere,  1(J42 


pour  in  the  syrup  after  allowing  20  minutes  for  boiling,  fill  the  jars  up, 
screw  down  at  once  and  stand  them  on  their  lids  until  cold  and  make 
sure   they   are   airtight. 

BANANA   JAM 

12  large  Bananas,  4  Lemons,  6  Oranges,  Sugar.  Large,  coarse 
bananas  not  too  ripe  should  be  used,  and  the  little  slices  should  remain 
whole.  Put  into  rather  thin  rounds.  To  each  pound  of  sliced  bananas 
add  31b.  of  sugar,  the  strained  juice  and  pulp  of  the  oranges  and 
lemons.      Boil   slowly  for  three-quarters  of   an   hour. 


Girls 


GOOD  SPONGE  CAKE 


4  Eggs,  1  teacup  Sugar,  1  teacup  Flour,  1  oz.  Butter,  1  teaspoon 
Baking  Powder.  Melt  butter,  beat  in  with  sugar  and  eggs  till  light  and 
frothy.  Stir  in  flour  and  powder.  Bake  in  flat  dish  quickly.  Turn  out 
en  damp  towel  or  paper  with  icing  sugar  sprinkled  over  it,  roll  at  once. 
(Can  undo  roll  when  cool  and  spread  jam  or  filling  in  it,  does  not  crack 
then.) 

YO-YO   3 

6  ozs.  Flour,  2  ozs.  Custard  Powder,  2  ozs.  Icing  Sugar,  k  teaspoon 
Baking  Powder,  \  lb.  Butter.  Cream  butter  and  sugar,  add  other 
ingredients.  Roll  into  balls  and  press  with  a  fork,  put  together  with 
butter    icing. 

Bee-Hive: 

GEMS 

3  ozs.  Butter,  2  ozs.  Sugar,  I  teaspoon  Soda  dissolved  in  5  table- 
spoons Milk,  1  small  cup  Flour,  1  teaspoon  Cream  of  Tartar,  1  Egg. 
Cream  butter  and  sugar  well,  add  egg  then  milk  and  soda  and  lastly 
flour   and   salt.      Bake   them   in   gem   irons. 

FUDGE 

2  cups  Sugar,  I  cup  Milk,  1  tablespoon  Butter,  1  tablespoon  Cocoa. 
Boil  about  10  minutes  or  until  it  becomes  thick,  take  off  fire  and  beat 
well  until  it  is  very  thick.    Pour  out  into  buttered  dish. 


Left  :     Here     VI 

Elder  Jones,  \vh;> 
left  these  shores  a 
little  over  a  year 
uk",  as  he  graduates 
from  flying  school 
He  is  only  one  of 
many  of  the  mission? 
aril  >  who  have  re- 
cent ly  returned  to 
Zion  now  serving  in 
one  of  the  armed  ser- 
vices of  the  Allies. 

Right:  Elder  Thos. 
Karena,  president  of 
the  Ohiti  -  Omahu 

Branch  in  Hawke's 
Bay,  is  now  overseas 
with  the  Maori 
Batallion. 


Hanuere,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


27 


Ko  Te  Whakahokinga  Mai 
O  Te  Rongo  Pai 

(''Te  Karere,"  Noema  21,  1917) 

(Ko  enei  tuhinga  e  whai  ake  nei  he  whakamaori- 
tango  o  tetahi  pukapuka  e  kiia  nei  ko  "Cowley's  Talks 
on  Doctrine"  he  mea  tuhi  na  Matiaha  F.  Kauri  no  te  Pa 
Tote,  kna  mate.  Na  tana  tama,  na  Erata  Matin  Kauri  i 
■whakamaori  ia  ia  i  konei  i  mua.) 

Ma  enei  kupu,  ara  "Te  Whakahokinga  mai  o  te 
Rongo-pai,"  ka  mohio  ai  tatou  ki  tona  tikanga,  ko 
tenei;  ko  te  whakatunga  ano  o  te  Hahi  a  te  Karaiti 
ki  runga  i  te  whenua;  me  te  Rongo-pai  hoki  i  roto 
i  tona  ahua  tuatahi,  me  ona  kaha,  me  ona  ahua  Elder  Cowley 
katoa.  Ko  te  hahi  kia  whai  apotoro,  kia  whai  poro- 
piti, tera  noa  ake  nga  apiha  katoa  i  whakanohoia  ki  roto  e  te  Karaiti, 
hei  whakahaere  i  nga  mahi  i  raro  i  nga  tohutohu  o  te  wairua  whaka- 
kitenga  no  te  Atua;  me  te  Hunga  Tapu  kia  whiwhi  ano  i  nga  homai- 
tanga  me  nga  manaakitanga  a  te  Wairua  Tapu  kia  peratia  me  nga 
wa  onamata.  Tera  pea  ka  puta  ake  te  whakaaro  i  roto  i  te  tangata, 
na  enei  kupu  hoki  kua  oti  nei  te  tuhi,  i  tangohia  te  Rongo-pai  i  te 
ao  i  muri  iho  i  te  mahi  o  te  Kai  Whakaora  i  runga  i  te  whenua. 

Mehemea  ka  ata  korero  nga  tangata  i  te  Paipera  mo  o  ratou  whaka- 
aro ake,  me  te  whakarite  hoki  i  nga  hua  o  te  Rongo-pai,  kei  reira  e 
mau  ana,  ki  nga  karakia  karaitiana  o  enei  wa  e  kore  e  tau  te  tikanga 
mo  te  tautohe,  kia  mohio  ai  ratou  kua  oti  ranei  tetahi  takanga  nui 
te  puta  mai  ki  te   ao   i  muri  iho  i  a  te  Karaiti. 

Otiia,  kia  awhinatia  nga  tangata  whai  whakaaro,  kia  ahua  marama 
hoki  te  "Tikanga  o  te  Whakahokinga  mai,"  ka  matua  tuhituhi  i  etahi 
karaipiture  me  etahi  korero  a  nga  tangata  o  te  ao  e  whakaatu  ana  kua 
takoto  nga  poropititanga  mo  te  whakarerenga  i  te  whakapono  tika, 
a  kua  tutuki  hoki,  rite  tonu  ki  ta  te  kupu  i  mea  ai. 

"Ko  tenei  ta  koutou  e  mohio  ai  i  tuatahi,  kahore  he  poropititanga 
o  te  karaipiture  nona  ake  ona  tikanga.  Ehara  hoki  i  te  mea  na  te 
tangata  i  pai  ake  i  puta  mai  ai  te  poropititanga  i  mua,  engari  he  mea 
whakamahara  na  te  Wairua  Tapu  i  korero  ai  nga  tangata  tapu  a  te 
Atua."      (11  Pita  1:  20-21.) 

Me  mahara  tonu  tatou  ki  enei  kupu,  me  whakapono  hoki  ki  nga 
korero  o  te  Kai  Whakaora  me  nga  poropiti,  he  korero  tika  tonu.  ka 
mea  a  Ihu  ki  Ana  Apotoro:  "Ko  reira  ano  he  tokomaha  e  he,  a  ka 
tuku  etahi  i  etahi,  ka  kino  ano  etahi  ki  etahi.  He  tokomaha  an<>  Qga 
poropiti  teka  e  whakatika,  a  he  tokomaha  e  mamingatia  o  ratou.  A. 
i  te  kino  ka  hua,  ka  matoke  haere  te  aroha  o  te  tokomaha."  (Matin 
24:  10-12.) 

E  tautokongia  ana  tenei  poropititanga  o  te  Bfihaia  e  Maka  raua 
ko  Ruka.  Ko  enei  ano  hoki  nga  kupu  a  Pita  mo  tana  tikanga  ano: 
"Na,   he   poropiti   teka   ano   i   mua   i   roto   I   te   iwi,   he     pera  ano  me 

kai    whakaako  teka  e   puta  ake  a   mua   i   roto   i  a  koutou;   ma   enei   6   mau 

puku  mai  nga  tirorehanga  whakangaro,  ho  arhakakahore  na  ratou  i  to 

Ariki   i   hokonn  ai   ratou,   a   ho   mea   hohoro   tonu   to   whakamvaro!!  . 

takina  iho  e  ratou  ki  a  ratou  ano.     He  tokomaha  ano  hoki  >•  ara  i  ta 
ratou  tikanga  taikaha;  ma  enei  ano  to  ara  o  to  pono  ka  korerotia  kinotia 

ai.       Ho    apo    moni    hoki    6    tito    kupu    ai    ratou    km    \\h;ii    taOttga    ai    ratou 
i  a  koutou;  nonamata  to  tukunga  mo  ratou  ki  to  ho,  6  kore  ano  «•  wliaka- 

roa;  kahore  hoki  ho  moo  o  to  ratou  whakangaromanga."  i  1 1  Pita 


TE  KARERE  Hanuere,  1942 

Ko  tenei  e  whai  ake  aei  na  Boani  te  Apotoro,  "Xa,  kia  mahara 
ki  te  wahi  i  taka  iho  ai  koe,  ripeneta,  niahia  hold  nga  main  o  mua; 
ki  te  kahore,  hohoro  toku  haere  atu  ki  a  koe,  ka  nekehia  atu  e  ahau 
tou  tuian.ua  rama  i  tuna  wahi.  ki  te  kore  koe  e  ripeneta,"  (Whaka- 
kitenga  - :  5.) 

Ko  nga  poropititanga  hold  a  Paora:  "E  mohio  ana  hold  ahau 
ki  tenei,  ka  nro  ahau,  tera  e  puta  ki  a  koutou  nga  wuruhi  nanakia, 
c  kore  aei  e  tohu  i  te  kahui.  A  ka  whakatika  ano  etahi  tangata  i  roto 
i  a  koutou,  korero  ai  i  nga  mea  parori  ke,  kukume  ai  i  nga  akonga  hei 
whai  i  a  ratou."    (Nga  Mahi  20:29-30.) 

"Na  he  mea  tenei  na  matou  ki  a  koutou,  e  oku  teina,  mo  te  taenga 
mai  o  to  tatou  Ariki  0  Ihu  Karaiti.  nio  to  tatou  huihuinga  atu  aim  ki  a 
ia;  kei  whakaoioia  wawetia  o  koutou  hinengaro;  kei  ohorere  i  ta  te 
wairua  ranei,  i  ta  te  kupu  ranei,  i  ta  te  pukapuka  ranei  e  kiia  ana  na 
matou  i  tuhituhi,  kei  mea  ka  tata  te  ra  o  te  Karaiti.  Kei  tinihangatia 
koutou  i  tetahi  mea  e  te  tangata:  e  kore  hoki  e  tae  wawe  mai,  kia 
matua  tae  mai  te  takanga  atu.  kia  whakakitea  mai  ano  hoki  te  tangata 
o  te  hara.  te  tama  a  te  whakangaromanga."     (11   Teharonika   2:1-3.) 

Ta  Paora  ki  a  Timoti:  "Tenei  ake  hoki  ko  te  wa  e  kore  ai  ratou 
e  whakarongo  ki  te  whakaakoranga  tika;  heoi  ka  riro  i  o  ratou  hiahia 
ake,  ka  apohia  e  ratou  he  kai  whakaako,  he  taringa  minamina  hoki  no 
ratou;  a  ka  tahuri  ke  o  ratou  taringa  i  te  pono,  ka  anga  atu  ki  nga 
korero  tito  noa."      (11  Timoti  4:  3-4.) 

Mo  tenei  whakarerenga  nui  i  te  pono  ka  mea  a  Ihaia:  "Kua  poke 
ano  te  whenua  i  raro  i  ona  tangata,  kua  takahia  hoki  nga  ture,  whaka- 
taka  ana  e  ratou  te  kawenata  onamata.  Na  reira  i  kainga  ai  te  whenua 
e  te  kanga,  mokemoke  iho  ona  tangata;  na  reira  i  wera  ai  nga  tangata 
o  te  whenua,  a  he  torutoru  te  hunga  i  toe."    (Ihaia  24:  5-6.) 

( taria  te  roanga) 

NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 

The  following  is  a  letter  from  a  former  New  Zealander,  which  should  be  of 
interest  as  it  contains  much  that  will  help  build  us  in  the  faith  and  knowledge  that 
the    Gospel    is    true. 

Inglewood,     California. 

My  subscription  to  "Te  Karere"  ran  out  a  while  back  so  I  do  not  know  to 
whom  I  am  writing  as  its  Editor.  My  mother  says  she  is  sending  it  to  me,  how- 
ever, so  I  do  not  want  to  deprive  her  of  that  pleasure  by  sending  my  own  sub- 
scription.     I    will    say    I    have    missed    the    publication    very    much. 

This  morning  my  thoughts  went  back  as  they  often  do  to  the  Saints  in  New 
Zealand,  and  as  always  my  heart  was  touched  when  I  think  of  them,  without  the 
support  and  help  of  the  missionaries  whom  they  loved  so  much.  I  have  felt  that 
those  of  us  who  are  here,  enjoying  the  wonderful  blessings  that  this  land  offers, 
would  be  very  thoughtless  indeed  if  we  did  not  keep  in  touch  with  you,  our  brothers 
and  si  ters  in  the  Gospel,  for  whom  we  have  so  much  love  and  respect.  So  that 
;,<on  I  am  taking  a  little  time  out  to  write  this  letter,  thinking  that  you  may 
be    interested    to   hear    of    some    of    the    things    we    are    doing    here. 

Pirsl  of  all.  I  would  like  to  tell  you  news  of  some  of  the  missionaries  who 
are  living  here  in  Southern  California  Several  months  ago  a  small  group  of  N.Z. 
Elders  put  their  heads  together  and  organized  a  group  (as  yet  unnamed)  consisting 
of  Latter-day  Saints  living  in  this  locality  who  are  interested  in  New  Zealand.  Most 
of  them,  of  course,  are  Elders,  but  between  you  and  I,  the  wives  and  girl  friends 
play  an  important  part  also.  These  girls  have  given  their  wholehearted  support 
to  the  group,  they  are  intensely  interested  in  New  Zealand,  and  all  hope  some  day 
to  visit  there.  They  know  many  of  the  Saints  of  New  Zealand  by  name,  and 
speak  of  them  as  if  they  really  knew  them.  To  date  the  group  have  had  a  gathering 
at  which  a  "hangi"  was  responsible  for  a  lot  of  food  disappearing  in  record  time, 
a  weinnie  hake  at  the  beach  where  weinnies  and  marshamellows  were  toasted  in  sur- 
prising quantities,  and  also  a  party  given  by  our  good  friend  Sister  Mary  Hall  Bean. 
Since  this  last  function,  Mary  has  been  ill  and  was  operated  on  at  the  "Good 
Samaritan"  Hospital  here  in  Los  Angeles.  From  last  reports  she  is  doing  fine. 
Our  next  function  will  be  a  dance  at  the  "Palladium,"  a  Hollywood  night-spot  opposite 
Earl  Carroll's  on  Sunset  Boulevard.  We  have  in  our  group  the  following  members: 
Mrs.  Mary   Hall   Bean  and  her  family,  Elders   Taylor  Later,   Ted   Kindred,   Lloyd  Allen, 


r:fiM  m  n  i-  <  :i  1 1  x 


Hanuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  29 

Robert  Simpson,  John  B.  Grant,  Haven  R.  Burningham,  Barry  Wride  (as  yet  un- 
married), Marcellas  Lewis  and  Sister  Lewis,  Rulon  Smith  and  Sister  Smith,  Wilford 
Goodwill  and  Sister  Goodwill,  Garn  Dastrup  and  Sister  Dastrup,  Boley  Bigler  and 
Sister  Bigler,  Jack  Le  Roy  Westover  and  Vera  Anderson  Westover,  William  Hall 
and  Sister  Hall,  Julius  Madsen  and  Sister  Madsen,  Stanford  Eird  and  Sister  Bird, 
Alex  Burnett  and  Anne  Burnett.  The  group  is  growing  rapidly.  Elder  Bird  has 
been  elected  President,  Boley  Bigler  Vice-President  and  Alex  Burnett  Secretary. 
The   term   of   these   officers    expire   every    six   months. 

Last  week  I  attended  the  fourth  meeting  of  the  Inglewood  Ward  Relief  Society 
since  the  opening  of  the  new  Chapel  last  month.  This  Ward  is  very  fortunate  in 
meeting  in  a  beautiful  building  with  one  large  room  especially  set  aside  for  the 
Relief  Society.  They  have  bought  their  own  piano  with  funds  raised  by  themselves. 
There  must  have  been  50-55  members  present.  I  would  like  to  tell  you  of  the 
wonderful  spirit  that  prevailed  at  this  meeting,  one  of  the  many  similar  ones  held 
in  other  Wards  of  the  Church.  The  first  part  of  the  lesson  was  presented  by  a 
humble  little  English  lady  who  was  a  convert  to  the  Church.  She  presented  the 
lesson  in  simple  works,  she  was  shy  and  nervous,  but  the  members  of  the  class 
were  behind  her  and  she  knew  it.  She  gave  an  outstanding  lesson.  The  theology 
was  presented  by  the  mother  of  a  young  girl  who  is  in  the  Central  States  mission 
as  a  missionary.  The  testimonies  which  were  borne  brought  tears  to  many  eyes. 
We  had  representatives  from  many  countries — a  sister  from  Norway,  one  from  Scot- 
land, Sweden  and  England,  each  speaking  with  the  accent  peculiar  to  her  native  land 
— testifying  to  their  knowledge  of  the  truth  of  this  Gospel,  the  joy  and  contentment 
that  it  brought  them. 

I  wish  I  could  tell  you  of  the  work  these  women  are  doing.  They  are  teaching 
home  crafts  to  many  new  members.  Last  spring  they  bottled  800  quarts  of  marma- 
lade for  the  Welfare  Plan.  They  make  an  average  of  3  quilts  a  month,  rennovate 
dresses,  etc.,  for  children  and  distribute  them  to  the  poor  and  needy.  They  are 
called  upon  several  times  a  month  to  cook  for  a  banquet  of  from  200  to  700 
people,  they  arrange  huge  bazaars  to  raise  money  for  building  purposes ;  they  visit 
and  help  the  sick  of  the  Ward  regularly;  they  contribute  cookies,  pies  and  cakes 
to  various  parties  which  are  given  each  we-ek ;  they  help  keep  the  Ward  house  and 
chapel   clean   and    beautiful. 

Many  of  these  sisters  work  to  support  themselves  and  their  children,  some  are 
well-to-do,  but  when  they  meet  in  Relief  Society  to  work  or  play,  they  are  all  as 
one,  a  happy,  busy  group  of  mothers  and  wives.  These  accomplishments  and  efforts 
of  the  Relief  Society  are  almost  taken  for  granted  here  because  they  are  carried 
on  in  every  Ward  of  the  Church  all  the  time,  but  I  know  what  an  inspiration  and 
help  they  would  be  to  those  of  us  who  have  not  witnessed  the  successful  function- 
ing of  the  various  organizations  of  our  Church.  They  are  a  living  testimony  of 
the  divine  inspiration   which   motivated   the  beginnings   of  our  auxiliary   organizations. 

My  wonder  never  ceases,  my  joy  is  uncontrolled  at  the  experiences  I  have  had 
in  this  land.  The  Saints  in  all  the  foreign  missions  are  called  upon  to  undergo 
many  hardships  at  this  time.  They  are  making  sacrifices  and  they  are  demonstrating 
the  strength  of  their  testimonies  just  as  the  early  pioneers  did.  They  are  standing 
and  fighting  alone.  The  Saints  in  Zion  think  of  them,  they  pray  for  them  and 
they  arc  proud  of  them.  At  each  Conference  in  Salt  Lake  City,  reference  is  made  to 
the  creditable  work  being  done  in  the  missions.  I  would  like  to  send  my  love  to  the 
Saints  1  know  in  New  Zealand  and  also  to  those  I  do  not  know.  We  pray  in  our 
homes  and  in  our  churches  that  God  will  give  you  strength  to  carry  on  the  work 
where    the    Missionaries'    planned    that    it    should    go. 

Yours  sincerely, 

ANNE  ROHNER  BURNETT 

AUCKLAND    BRANCH  week      in      November     in      the     Y.W.C.A., 

Reported    by    Ivan    P.    Reid  Auckland,     provided     an     opportunity     for 

v                   *  President      Cowley      to      speak      about      the 

Activities     in     the      Branch     during  the         Church      Welfare     and     how     it     could     and 

last   80   days   started   oir   with   the   Relief       would    i>e   ■    means   "i"   physical   salvation 

Bazaar,    which    netted    approxi-       for  all  i pie,  using  ai  evidence  the  pro- 

mately     £20:      (Incidentally     there     were       gramme  as   is   being  carried  out    in   Zion. 

non.     of    Sister    Douglas's    cakes    left    after  Brother     WilVre     Amaru.    Church     Welfare 

the    I'm-  i    20    minute  .)  Supervisor,   created   unite   s    sensation    In 

Wedding  bells   were  heard   when   Gene-  bis    talks    on    Maori    Welfare.      i 

alogi  t    George  Chamberlain  and   Florence  mons   were  eertainl]    to   the  fore  in   this 

Goodwin    were    pledged    to    "honour    and  Conference  as    Bro.    Koi  Tarawa 

obey,    etc./'   at    the    Auckland    Chapel    on  renor    of    the    Maori    Section    and    Kelly 

r    291  h.    when    President    Cowley  Harris  as  Secretary  also  spoke  on   Maori 

officiated.      "Te     Karere"     extends     best  education. 

wishes    to     Elder    Chamberlain    and    his  n.ro<    Rosser    Perrott    will   continue   bis 

bride  for  a  long  and  happy   life  together.  train  lapal       We    loos    for- 

Ci .    id. nt     and    ■  i  ter    Co*  lej     i  ii  Ited  « ard 

Wellington  and  attended  the  Branch  Con-  for  we  have  certainly    missed  him  during 

ference,  where  they  enjoyed  the    ipirit   of  the   past    tive  <>r   its   are* 

the    people    very    much    Indeed       A na  ,\  ren   well  built  rouna  man  who  earns 

thoss  present  were  Brother  and  Sister  ,,,,,,,.  regularly  to  meetim  some  three 
Imadio    ami    Brother    Blllman 

The    recent     Dominion     Reoon  truotion  advantage    la    his    2nd    lieutenant 

Conference  (interim)   bold  durina   the  Is   I  form    N  Z.R.    when    be    attended    meeting 


30 


TE  KARERE 


Hanuere,  1942 


last  week.  We  speak  of  Vernon  New- 
combe,  and  extend  the  hand  df  Fellow- 
ship anil  brotherhood  to  him,  and  to  all 
who    may    be    in    the   services. 

Ml  Nan  MiHitiuruc  (iMC  Buehai 
birth  to  a  lovely  baby  girl  last  last 
month  at  a  Valley  Road  Maternity  Home. 
Both  mother  and  daughter  are  doing  well. 
Ernest  (better  known  as  Monty),  now 
-«i\  ini:    overseas,    will    sure    be    proud    of 

bis  daughter. 

Curio-OOllector  Bro.  William  Mincher 
still  makes  it  to  Chureh  every  Sunday 
night  before  start  irur  time  despite  the 
fact  that  he  is  over  80,  and  suffered  a 
severe  stroke  attack  two  years  ago.  Last 
month  Bro.  Mincher  was  late  for  the  7th 
time  in  10  years.  The  Mincher  home  is 
two  miles  from  the  Church  and  he 
shuffles  every  inch  of  the  way  there  and 
back.  We  could  all  take  a  lesson  in  dili- 
gence from   good   brother. 

OVERSEAS 

Elder  Leo  B.  Sharp's  death  occurred 
suddenly  after  an  illness  of  a  few  days. 
Brother  Sharp  will  be  remembered  by 
many  of  this  land,  and  in  particular  by 
the  many  M.A.C.  students  who  attended 
"Our  Alma  Mater"  during  his  term  as 
Principal  from  1921  on,  when  both  he 
and  Sister  Sharp  were  called  to  labour 
in    the    New    Zealand    mission. 

"Te  Karere"  and  the  people  who  knew 
and  loved  Brother  Sharp  express  regret 
and  extend  sympathy  to  Sister  Sharp 
and  her  family  of  two  daughters, 
Marianne  and  Rebecca  and  two  sons,  Hal 
Turner  and  Hugh  Leo,  in  their  loss.  May 
his  memory  be  ever  with  us  to  help  keep 
the   faith. 

MANAWATU    DISTRICT 
By    Polly    Wi    Neera 

This  month  and  last  month  have  cer- 
tainly been  full  of  activities  for  our  dis- 
trict officers.  Bro.  and  Sister  Peneamine 
Wi  Neera  have  visited  the  Saints  up  this 
district  on  several  occasions,  and  on  one 
occasion  conducted  a  funeral  service  at 
Hokio  Beach,  Levin,  that  of  Sis.  Packer, 
where  a  large  number  of  relatives  and 
friends  were  gathered  to  mourn  the  !o>s 
of  this  d«ar  sister  whose  husband  is 
serving   with   the   fighting  forces  overseas. 

Koputaroa  and  Ohau  are  two  new 
places  where  the  gospel  light  is  being 
carried  to,  and  we  feel  sure  that  a  few 
more  visits  to  these  places  will  result 
in   work   well   done. 

Members  of  the  Wellington  Relief  So- 
ciety visited  the  Porirua  Branch  on 
Armistice  Day  and  held  a  very  success- 
ful and   inspirational  meeting. 

Private  Madsen  Wi  Neera  of  Papa- 
kura,  is  now  home  on  leave.  The  army 
sure  works  their  wonders  to  perform. 
Anyway  we  wish  Madsen  and  all  the  boys 
good     luck    and    all    the    best. 

On  the  night  of  December  the  2nd  and 
3rd  the  Ngati  Poneke  Young  Maori  Club 
of  Wellington  put  over  two  very  suc- 
cessful concerts  at  the  Town  Hall  to 
raise  money  for  the  purpose  of  enter- 
taining invalided  soldiers  of  the  Maori 
Battalion  returning  on  hospital  boats,  and 
for    all     Maori     Welfare    purposes.      Much 


praise  was  given  to  the  Maori  OH'k.i- 
Cadetl  now  training  in  Trentham.  who 
gave  choruses  and  thrilled  the  audi. -no- 
with     their     harmonious     singing.      One    of 

the  Officer-Cadets  i-  Bro.  Kiki  Smith, 
who  hails  from  the  Nuhaka  Branch,  and 
the    people   of   Nuhaka    can    well   be   proud 

of    this    fine    young    man.     Another    one    of 

the  Officer-Cadets  was  Bro.  Lou  Paul  of 
Auckland,  once  a  1ZB  artist  of  that  town. 
His  solos  were  well  received  and  greatly 
sppreeiated.  By  the  time  you  receive  this 
news,  they  will  all  have  received  their 
commissions  as  lieutenants. 
That's    all.    folks! 

MAROMAKU  DISTRICT 
By    Lois    Going. 

Many  friends  and  relatives  of  Brother 
Raymond  Going  gathered  together  at 
Several  places  to  honour  him  as  he  fare- 
wells New  Zealand  before  going  overseas. 
The  functions  so  held  were  very  appre- 
ciable gatherings,  especially  so  at  Maro- 
maku  and  the  one  sponsored  by  the  Pipi- 
wai    and     Kaikou    people. 

Brother  Stan  Hay  is  now  training  for 
active   service   overseas. 

WAIKATO    DISTRICT 
By    Davy    Ormsby 
The     Waikato     District     Hui     held     at 

Puketapu,  November  22nd  and  23rd,  com- 
menced in  the  afternoon  at  approximately 
1  p.m.  with  a  Sunday  School  Officers  ami 
Teachers'  Instruction  Meeting  under  the 
direction    of    Kelly    Harris. 

Later  on  in  the  day.  the  Primary  and 
Mutuals  presented  their  programm.  - 
under  the  direction  of  Sister  Percy  Hill 
and  Brother  Douglas  Whatu.  These  meet- 
ings were  very  well  patronised.  Sunday 
morning  at  6  a.m.  the  Whakapapa  held 
an  instruction  meeting,  and  so  on  during 
the  day  the  meetings  commenced  at  the 
appointed  times.  Priesthood  and  Relief 
Society  at  8  o'clock,  Sunday  School  at 
10.30,  Branch  Presidents'  meeting  with 
District  and  Mission  Presidency  at  12.30. 
Kauwhau  meeting  at  2  p.m.  Kai.  and 
then  the  concluding  meetings  combined 
under  the  direction  of  the  Relief  Society 
and    Priesthood. 

All  the  meetings  were  presided  over  by 
President  Cowley,  except  the  early  Satur- 
day afternoon  and  Relief  Society  meet- 
in.'-  Sundav  morning.  The  District  Presi- 
dency and  their  aides  did  well  in  their 
direction  of  the  meetings  and  prepara- 
tions for  the  Hui.  Much  appreciation  is 
led  to  the  marae  folks  for  their 
verj  substantial  contribution  to  the  suc- 
Conference. 

BIRTHS 

Mr.  and  Mrs.  William  Coffey  (nee 
Kathleen  Williams)  of  the  Apahi  Branch 
are  the  proud  parents  of  a  son,  born  to 
them    October    7th,     1941,    at    Kawakawa. 

Brother  and  Sister  J.  R.  Robinson  of 
Palmerston  North  announce  the  arrival 
of  a    1031b   son. 

MATENGA 

Mangu  Meroiti  o  Putaruru  i  mate  i  te 
10  o  Noema,  1941,  a  na  Ihaka  Hohaia  i 
whakahaere  nga  karakiatanga  mona.  I 
te    13   o   nga   ra   ka   tapukena. 


-<r\M  ni  n  C  m  I  S 


Wahanga  36  Pepuere,    1942  Nama  2 


MART 


All  heaven  was  rose  and  golden, 

The    clouds    were    reft    apart. 
Earth's    holiest    dawn    in    dazzling 
white 
Came    forth    from    Heaven's    own 
heart. 
And    never,    since    on    Eden 

Creations  glory  lay 
Had  ever  garden  of  the  Lord 
Beheld    so    fair    a    day. 


Her  eyes  were  blurred  with  weeping, 

Her  trailing  steps  were  slow; 
The   cross  she   bore   within   her 

Transfixed   her   soul    with   woe. 
One  only  goal  before  her 

Loomed  through  her  spirit's  gloom, 
As  in  the   early  morning 

She   sought  the  guarded  tomb. 


But  down  the  lilied  pathway 

A  kingly  presence   came. 
A  seamless  garment  clothed  Him, 

His  face   was   clear   as   flame, 
And    in    His   hands   were   nailprints, 

And  on  His  brow  were  scars, 
But  in  His  eyes  a  light  of  love 

Beyond  the   light  of  stars. 


For  fears  she  could  not  see  Him, 

As   o'er  the   path    He   came. 
Till,   like    remembered    music, 

He    called    her    by    her    name; 
Then   swift    her  soul  to  answer. 

The  Lord  of  life  she  knew. 
Her  breast  unbarred  its  prison  gates 

To  let  the  Easter  through. 

Such  light  of  revelation 

As  bathed  her  being  then, 
It  comes  anew  wherever  Christ 

Is  known  indeed  of  men; 
Such  glory  on  the  pathway, 

It  falls  again  on  all 
Who  hear  the  King  in  blessing 

And  hasten  at  His  call. 

Rise,  King  of  grace  and  glory, 

This    hallowed    Easter-tide, 
Nor  from  thy  ransomed  people 

Let  even  death  divide; 
For  yet  again  doth  heaven 

Throw  all  its  gates  apart 
And  send  the  Sacred  Easter 

Straight    from    its    glowing    heart. 

— Margaret  E.   Sangster. 


-0^(7^Q^6^0^o^Q^G^ 


Te  Karere 

Established  in  1907 
Wahanga   36  Pepuere,    1942  Nama   2 

Matthew    Cowley  Tumuaki    Mihana 

Kelly  Harris  Etita 

Eru   T.    Kupa       Kaiwhakamaori 

Waimate    Anaru  Kaiwhakamaori 

"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  whakatapua  hei  hapai  ake  i  te  iwi  Maori  ki 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-niii.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  THE  BUSINESS  PRINTING 
WORKS  LTD.,  55  Albert  Street,  Auckland,  CI,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:   $1.00    per   year;    $4.00    for   five    years;    $10.00    for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


CONTENTS 

! 

Editorial — 

Page 

J6 

Special    Features — 

Mormonism  and  Man 

1  [e  Matenga  

Ko  Te  Whakahokinga 

M.n  (i  Te  Rongo   Pai 

i 

Church   Features — 



in  laj    S<  hool 

ii 

* 

Mews  from  the  Field 
II 

Tl    KARERE 


Pepuere,  1942 


Editorial 


HOME    DEFENSE 


What  is  the  meaning  of  this  "Home  Defense"  we  read 
so  much  about  in  the  daily  papers  and  hear  discussed  to 
such  great  lengths  in  public  assemblies  and  over  the  air? 
Defense  of  what?  For  what  arc-  we  blacking  out  our  com- 
munities, industrial  buildings  and  houses?  Why  all  this 
digging  of  trenches  and  shelters  in  public  domains  and  pri- 
vate yards,  and  placing  within  immediate  reach  a  bucket  full 
of  water  and  a  shovel  full  of  sand. 

As  the  enemy  approaches  our  shores  are  we  at  long  last 
arousing  ourselves  to  the  necessity  <>f  preparing  defenses 
against  a  threatening  invasion  <>t"  forces  that  may  disturb 
the  tenor  of  our  carefree  ways  of  living?  Are  these  precau- 
tions intended  to  defend  our  homes  and  preserve  our  insti- 
tutions, those  palladia  of  liberty  and  human  rights  which 
we  hold  as  sacred?  Or  are  we  concerned  only  with  the 
preservation  of  life  and  the  protection  of  propert)  ':  There 
is  a  difference  in  these  objectives. 

The  defense  of  home  and  the  God-given  rights  of  man 
implies  more  than  the  mere  preservation  of  life  and  the  pro- 
tection of  property.  Sky-scrapers  teeming  with  industry 
may  be  reduced  to  ashes  by  the  incendiary  bomb;  lives  may 
be  ruthlessly  crushed  beneath  the  juggernauts  of  modern 
warfare:  the  hovel  of  the  metropolitan  slum  area  may 
crumble  from  its  own  decay  and  the  marble  palace  may  dis 
integrate   from  the  tremor-  of  tin-  earth  upon   which  it   was 

ilidly  built;  yet  in  spite  of  all  these  destructive  forces 
the  home  will  be  preserved  and  our  free  institutions  will 
survive. 

The  demolition  of  the  house  will  not  necessarily  destro} 
the  home,  nor  wall  the  destruction  of  the  home  cause  the 
fall  of  the  house.  Paradoxical  though  it  may  sound,  tin 
ravages  of  war.  more  often  than  not.  add  stability  to  the 
home;  and  more  homes  crumble  during  times  of  peace,  with- 
out the  firing  of  a  gun  or  the  dropping  of  a  bomb,  than 
when  nations  are  at  each  other's  throats. 


Pepuere,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


37 


The  family  unit  is  the  foundation  of  the  home.  This 
foundation  is  built  upon  a  declaration  of  peace ;  not  a  declara- 
tion of  peace  between  nations,  but  a  sacred  covenant  between 
two  individuals.  This  covenant  is  commonly  known  as  mar- 
riage. There  may  be  family  units  without  homes — indeed 
there  are  too  many  of  them  in  the  world — but  there  could 
never  be  a  home  without  the  family  unit. 

In  "Home  Defense"  the  first  line  of  defense  must  be 
within  the  home  itself.  Blackouts,  trenches,  water  and  sand 
are  but  secondary  precautions.  The  "Home  Defense"  within 
the  home  begins  with  the  two  parties  to  the  marriage  coven- 
ant;  the  husband  and  wife,  the  father  and  mother.  If  the 
terms  and  covenants  of  their  marital  contract  are  held  invio- 
late the  "Home  Defense"  becomes  impregnable ;  the  home 
is  built  of  material  that  cannot  be  destroyed.  Add  to  this 
constancy  between  the  contracting  parties,  the  devotion  of 
children  to  parents ;  the  love  of  parents  for  children ;  the 
respect  of  children  for  their  elders,  whether  within  or  with- 
out the  home;  a  partnership  between  parents  that  will  not 
permit  of  deceit  nor  distrust;  obedience  to  the  laws  of  the 
land;  industry  and  self  reliance;  these  and  kindred  virtues, 
supported  by  religious  forces  which  produce  healthy  bodies 
and  solid  characters,  are  the  defenses  within  the  home  which 
will  forever  protect  it  against  invasion  or  destruction. 

Without  these  simple  virtues  the  home  lacks  stability, 
and  without  them  it  cannot  be  defended.  Without  the-  family 
unit  within  the  home  our  "Home  Defense"  precautions  will 
neither  save  our  homes  nor  preserve  the  sanctity  of  our 

freedom. 

Look  to  the  defenses  within  your  home. 

—MATTHEW  COWLEY. 


"If   there   is  anv    man    who  OUght    to   merit    the  curse  of 

Almight)  God  it  is  the  man  who  neglects  the  mother  of  his 

child,  the  wife  of  his  bosom,  the  one  win*  has  made  sacrifice 

of  her  very  life  for  him  and  his  children."     President  Joseph 
F.  Smith. 


38  TE  KARERE  Pepuere,  1542 

ACTIVE  RELIGION 

The  Church  for  Man. — The  good  of  man  is  the  objective  of 
the  authoritative  Church.  The  principles  of  truth,  comprised  by 
true  religion,  arc  Eor  the  benefit  and  guidance  of  man  in  his  daily 
acts.  The  Church,  itself,  is  organized  so  that  the  members  and  all 
humanity  may  profit  from  the  Gospel  in  their  daily  and  various  walks 
through  life.  Man  is  the  most  important  thing  on  earth.  All  in- 
stitutions of  real  worth  are  for  the  welfare  of  humanity.  The 
greatest  possible  service  to  God,  by  church  or  individual,  is  to  help 
perfect   man — oneself   and   others. 

The  Church,  therefore  must  find  ways  and  means  for  helping 
its  members  in  all  the  labours  of  their  lives.  m  developing  their 
latent  powers,  and  in  supplying  their  natural  and  proper  wants. 

The  Key  of  Activity. — Love  and  service 
full  life,  are  begotten  by  activity  in  a  cause. 
The  Church  therefore  offers  full  activity  pro- 
grammes, adapted  to  the  needs  of  the  mem- 
bers of  varying  ages  and  desires.  The  doctrine 
of  a  self-governing  Church  makes  such  help 
particularly  possible.  Tt  is  an  accepted  prin- 
ciple of  the  Church  that  every  member  in  it 
should  he  given  a  task  to  do,  a  place  to  fill,  a 
service  to  render.  The  Church  of  Jesus  Christ 
of  Latter-day  Saints  has  been  very  successful 
in  keeping  its  members  active,  and  much  of  its 
remarkable   strength   has   resulted,   therefrom. 

Priesthood  Organizations. — All  male  mem- 
bers of  the  Church,  of  righteous  life  and  suf- 
ficient age,  have  the  Priesthood  conferred  upon 
them.  The  absence  of  the  Priesthood  class  places  the  govern- 
ment of  the  Church  in  the  hands  of  the  memhers.  The  Priesthood 
is  organized  according  to  its  grades  into  groups,  known  as  quorums. 
These  meet  weekly  to  study  important  subjects  in  sacred  or  profane 
fields  and  to  consider  one  another's  welfare,  as  well  as  the  needs  of 
the  Church.  Educational  and  social,  indoor  and  outdoor  activities 
characterize  the  Priesthood  programmes  of  the  Church.  By  these 
means,  the  spirit  of  brotherhood,  with  mutual  helpfulness,  is  de- 
veloped—the great  need  of  the  world  to-day.  Thus,  also,  are  the 
men  of  the  Church  qualified  for  their  service  in  the  Church. 

The  opportunity  of  officiating  regularly  in  the  meetings  and 
ordinances  of  the  Church,  and  the  vast  missionary  system,  voluntary 
and  unpaid,  develop  men  who  know  the  Gospel  and  how  to 
administer  it. 

The  Relief  Society. — This  organization  for  the  mature  women 
of  the  Church   furnishes  much  wholesome  activity,  through  study, 


Elder  Widtsoe 


nnM  di  ii  C  m  i  i 


Pepuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  39 

work  and  social  intercourse.  The  lesson  subjects  inform  the  women 
of  Gospel  principles  and  keep  them  abreast  with  world  movements. 
The  members  conduct  bazaars,  excursions,  social  evenings,  and  a 
variety  of  other  activities  for  the  advancement  of  women.  The  sick 
and  the  poor  are  looked  after  by  this  organization.  It  is  moved 
upon  by  the  spirit  of  charity  and  progress. 

The  Relief  Society  is  one  of  the  oldest,  if  not  the  oldest,  exist- 
ing women's  societies  in  the  world.  It  has  a  splendid  record  of 
outstanding  service. 

The  Sunday  School. — This  is  an  organization  for  all  members 
of  the  Church.  It  meets  every  Sunday  for  a  period  of  about  one 
and  one-half  hours.  It  is  essentially  a  school,  a  theological  school, 
in  which  Gospel  principles  are  taught  to  the  whole  membership  of 
the  Church.  Carefully  prepared  courses  of  study,  adapted  to  the 
increasing  intelligence  of  children,  or  to  the  riper  experience  of 
adults,  rotating  progressively  from  year  to  year,  train  all  Church 
members  in  the  principles  of  the  plan  of  salvation  and  their  applica- 
tion to  everyday  affairs. 

The  Mutual  Improvement  Association. — This  association  is  in- 
tended primarily  for  the  young  men  and  women  of  the  Church, 
although  provision  is  made  for  persons  from  fourteen  years  to  old 
age.  It  is  essentially  a  school  of  applied  religion.  It  has  in  charge 
the  recreational  activities  of  the  Church,  as  especially  befitting  youth. 
It  also  conducts  study  courses  of  high  interest,  and  various  divisions 
of  it  furnish  acceptable  activities  to  those  of  various  ages.  Like  the 
other  organizations,  it  meets  weekly  with  frequent  special  excur- 
sions, social   evenings,  or  enlightening  and  enjoyable  programmes. 

The  M.I. A.,  as  it  is  commonly  called,  is  divided  into  the  Young 
Men's  and  the  Young  Women's  M.I. A.  Each  division  frequently 
meet-  separately  to  conduct  fitting  programmes. 

The  Y. M.M.I. A.  provides  separate  divisions  For  th(5se  of  vari- 
ous ages:  Boy  Scouts,  up  to  15  years;  Cubs.  15-17  years;  M-Men, 
17-23  years;  and  the  joint  adult  class   for  the  older  people. 

The  Y. W.M.I. A.  provides  corresponding  divisions;  Beehive 
( rirls,  up  in  1  5  years ;  Junior  ( rirls,  15-17;  ( rleaner  ( rirls,  17  _'.}  years, 
and  the  joint  adull  class  for  older  people. 

'I  he  detailed  activities  in  these  various  divisions  are  intensely 
interesting  to  the  groups  in  question.  Membership  in  the  Ml. A.  is 
a  fascinating  ach  enture. 

'/'//<•  Primary  Organization.-  -This  organization  is  intended  for 

week  da\     instruction    and    play    of    children    under    II    wars    of    age. 

Small  groups  "I  children  meet  weekl}  in  the  Church  or  in  a  home, 
where  under  tin'  loving  leadership  of  a  teacher,  also  a  volunteer  mem- 
ber of  the  (  hurch,  the  Fourfold  themes  of  the  Primar)  exercises  are 
engaged  in:    The  Spiritual  Theme;  the  Ethical  Theme;  the  Health 


40  TE  KARERE  Pcpuerc,  1942 

Theme;  and  me  Play  Theme.  There  are  suitable  divisions  for 
children  of  various  ages. 

The  Primary  work  has  a  fine  uplifting  effect  upon  children. 
The  lessons  learned  remain  with  them  throughout  life. 

Genealogical  Class. — Adults  who  are  interested  in  the  gathering 
of  their  genealogies  arc  provided  help  and  inspiration  for  their  work 

by  this  class.  The  interest  in  genealogy  is  derived  from  the  doctrine 
of  the  Church  pertaining  to  the  salvation  for  the  dead.  If  the 
ordinances  of  the  (iosj>el  are  to  be  performed  for  the  dead,  the  names 
and  vital  data  of  the  dead  must  be  known.  Since  each  member  is 
partly  responsible  for  the  dead  of  his  own  family,  everyone  becomes 
to  some  degree  interested  in  his  family  genealogy.  The  genealogical 
class   furnishes  an  attractive  activity  to  mane  Church  members. 

Official  Participation. — These  many  organizations,  and  others 
maintained  by  the  Church,  require  a  small  army  of  official  members. 
The  Church  is  divided  into  small  units  known  as  wards  or  hranches. 
In  each  of  these  all  the  foregoing  organizations  exist,  as  far  as  pos- 
sible.  Each  organization  has  a  presiding  officer  with  two  counsellors; 
a  secretary  with  an  assistant,  and  a  corps  of  teachers  and  other 
helpers.  These  official  families  are  drawn  from  the  rank  and  file 
of  the  membership.  There  is  in  such  service  an  activity  of  peculiar 
merit,  for  it  develops  the  power  of  initiative  and  leadership  and  gives 
practice  in  teaching  and  public  speaking.  The  majority  of  the  mem- 
bers of  the  Church,  in  addition  to  belonging  to  one  or  more,  are 
officers  of  some  of  those  organizations.  The  widespread  benefits 
of  this  system  are  inestimable. 

Open  to  All. — Membership  in  the  Church  is  not  necessary  for 
membership  in  the  so-called  auxiliary  organizations.  All  arc  invited 
to  join,  and  all  who  enter  into  the  work  with  spirit,  derive  much 
benefit  therefrom. 

Ybu  are  invited  to  meet  these  organizations  and  to  become  a 
member. 


GENEALOGY 

By 

Teao 

Wirihana 

THE 

WAY   TO 

PERFECTION 

Cottage 

Mee 

tings    for 

February 

Feb 

.     5- 
12- 
19- 
26- 

—Lesson 
-Lesson 
-Lesson 
-Lesson 

15, 
16, 
17, 
18, 

"The 
"The 
"The 
"Ephi 

Seed  of   Cain." 

Seed  of  Cain  after  the  Flood." 
Law  of  Promogeniture." 
raim  and  his  Blessings." 

All 

Genealogical   lessons 
reports  and  records 

will 
should 

continue   throughout   the 
be  sent  to  the  Mission 

year. 
Office. 

Pepuere,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


41 


Mormonism  and  Man 

By  Douglas  Whatu  Apiti. 

Mormonism  gives  a  clear  and  definite  answer  to  the  great  ques- 
tion propounded  by  Psalms  8:4-5,  which  states:  "What  is  man  that 
thou  art  mindful  of  him  and  the  son  of  man  that  thou  visitest  him: 
For  thou  hast  made  him  a  little  lower  than  the  angels  and  hast  crowned 
him  with  glory  and  honour."  We  answer^  man  is  the  child  of  God,  the 
offspring  of  Deity,  the  object  of  his  infinite  love  and  the  centre  of  his 
affections.  The  Almighty  has  declared  it  to  be  His  work  and  His 
glory  to  bring  to  pass  the  immortality  and  eternal  life  of  man,  and 
therefore  he  is  ever  mindful  of  him.  The  value  of  every  philosophy, 
the  contribution  of  every  age  must  be  measured  by  its  effect  upon 
man's  advancement.  The  worth  of  the  human  being  and  its  dignity  is 
the  basic  doctrine  underlying  the  religion  of  the  Latter-day  Saints; 
it  is  the  dominating  idea  that  runs  through  the  whole  structure.  This 
religion  is  practical  and  makes  a  lofty  appeal  to  men;  it  answers  their 
questions  and  offers  a  philosophy  of  life 
that  satisfies  them,  while  its  programme 
holds  them.  There  are  several  reasons  why 
we  as  Latter-day  Saints  know  that  it  does 

First,  it  is  practical  and  deals  with 
everyday  problems ;  it  is  religion  on  week 
days,  in  working  clothes,  as  well  as  on  the 
Sabbath,  while  running  through  its  entire 
history,  enveloping  its  very  structure  and 
engineering  its  plans  and  purposes,  is  the 
spirit  of  co-operation  and  usefulness.  An 
outstanding  example  of  this  is  the  Church 
Welfare  Programme.  None  shall  go  hun- 
gry, unsheltered  or  without  the  necessities 
of  the  body,  and  those  who  are  able  to 
work,  do  so,  those  who  are  unable,  are 
taken  care  of.  No  able  bodied  man  is  to 
feed  upon  the  labours  of  others.  This  pro- 
gramme is  an  expression  of  religion  and 
an  interpretation  of  the  Gospel  of  the 
Master  in  terms  of  service.  The  solution 
of  this  problem  can  only  be  brought  about  by  practical  application  of 
that  principle — "Love  thy  neighbour  as  thyself."  Secondly,  this  is  a 
cheerful  religion  and  is  built  upon  the  philosophy  that  "Men  are  that 
they  might  have  joy."  It  is  only  when  men  are  happy,  hopeful  and 
confidenl  can  they  give  of  their  best,  and  with  that  giving,  cornea  joy, 
freedom  of  conscience,  realization  of  life  well  lived,  victory  over  temp- 
tation,  worthy  achievement,  service  to  others  and  complete  faith  in 
God  and  the  certainty  of  eternal  life.  No  philosophy  in  the  world 
Can  better  this,  and  no  idea  of  life  can  offer  greater  happiness.  Mor- 
monism is  a  cheerful   religion,  practical  and  all  actions,   not   diction. 

Thirdly,  it  lengthens  life  through  a  programme  of  living  revealed 

to   Joseph    Smith    as   a   divine    law    of    health.       This   discourages   the    use 
of    tea.    coffee,    tohaCCO    and    liquor,    and    advises    moderation     in    most 

things.     It  embraces  a  practical  value  which  commends  it  to  the  con- 
science and   common  sense  of  all   men.       If   it    v\a-   uni\. \T  ally   ol 
it    would    save    money,    enrich    more    lives,    create    more    harmony,    happi- 
ness and  gladness  and  swell  the  hearts  of  humanity  more  than  any   plan 

proposed  by  statesmen  or  government. 

Fourthly,    it    glvefl   ■    man   a    place    in    tin-   scheme   of    thine--   and    re 
real      his   Origin,    his   destiny    and    possible    achievement  Because    man 

is   the   child    of    God,    it    i      the    tak    of    religion    to    assist    him    to    become 


Six  years  ago  this  coming 
March  12th,  President  Emile 
C.  Dunn,  his  wife  and  two 
children  arrived  in  Tonga, 
succeeding  President  Wiberg 
as  Mission  President.  Since 
that  time  many  things  have 
happened,  another  child  was 
born  to  them — war  creating 
chaos  and  destruction — mis- 
sionaries recalled  to  Zion. 
All  these  things  left  Pre- 
sident Dunn  and  his  family 
still  doing  the  will  of  God. 
Now  we  are  happy  that  Sis- 
ter Dunn  and  her  three  chil- 
dren are  here  with  us  in  New 
Zealand,  and  pray  thai  Presi- 
dent Dunn  and  the  Saints 
under  his  direction  may  al- 
ways have  the  guiding  hand 
of  our  Master  with  them  in 
these    trying    times. 


42  TE  KARERE  Pepuere,  L942 

like  His  heavenly  father,  to  give  him  an  opportunity  to  work  and 
face  life's  problems  and  to  cultivate  the  virtues  that  underly  sound 
living. 

Fifthly,  we  believe  the  Mormon  Church  provides  adequate  scope  to 
train  men  in  leadership,  in  service,  and  builds  character  and  person- 
ality. To  do  this,  three  things  are  fundament:  (1)  To  find  those  pos- 
sessing potential  powers;  (2)  to  provide  opportunities  for  training  these 
potential  leaders,  and  (3)  the  ability  to  inspire  them  to  higher  goals. 
Mormonism  has  the  genius  for  doing  all  three,  as  its  records  can  testily. 

Sixthly,  is  the  priesthood  which  is  the  strength  and  power  of  the 
Church  and  this  authority  is  limited  and  guarded  in  a  definite  and 
unusual  way.  Every  worthy  Mormon  male  may  hold  and  exercise  the 
priesthood,  and  there  is  no  clergy  class  nor  is  it  reserved  for  a  select 
few.  Its  highest  privileges  are  within  the  reach  of  the  humblest  and 
at  the  same  time  it  plants  in  his  soul  a  love  for  and  loyalty  to  his 
Church  that  nothing  else  can  do.  The  condition  under  which  this 
authority  can  be  exercised,  the  only  purpose  for  which  it  can  be  used, 
the  only  way  in  which  it  can  be  made  effective,  is  through  righteousness. 

Seventhly,  Mormonism  gives  a  clear  answer  to  the  eternal  question: 
"If  a  man  die,  shall  he  live  again?"  Revelations  prove  that  man's 
spirit  is  immortal,  and  at  death  it  goes  to  the  spirit  world.  "The 
spirits  of  all  men,  whether  good  or  bad  are  taken  home  to  God  who 
gave  them  life"  is  found  in  Alma  40:  11. 

The  righteous  are  received  into  a  state  of  happiness,  of  rest  and 
peace  and  here  they  remain  until  the  resurrection,  which  is  as  universal 
as  death  itself,  and  all  shall  come  forth  from  the  grave  with  purified, 
immortal  bodies,  the  home  of  their  immortal  spirits. 

The  great  object  of  Mormonism  is  to  establish  the  brotherhood 
of  man,  to  save  the  races,  to  substitute  compulsion  with  persuasion, 
arrogance  with  love,  and  intolerance  with  charity.  The  world  is  in 
sore  need  of  this  spirit,  to  uplift  men,  straight  their  troubles  and  ease 
the  warring  elements  of  society — a  spirit  that  is  destined  to  bring 
"Peace   and   goodwill   to   men." 

HE    MATENGA 

I  te  26  o  nga  ra  o  Tihema  1941  ka  mate 
a  Haami  Paraima  i  Onehunga.  Ko  ona  tau 
e  73,  ko  tona  whanati  i  mahue  iho  ko  tana 
svahine  me  ana  tamariki  tokorima.  He  nui 
hoki   ona   mokopuna. 

He  kaumatua  kaha  ia  i  roto  i  nga  mahi  o 
te  rongopai  taea  noatia  te  wa  i  mate  ai  ia.  Ko 
ia  tetahi  o  nga  kaunihera  o  te  Timuakitanga 
o  taku   Peka  i   Mangere. 

Tae  nga  tangata  maha  ki  tona  tangihanga, 
i  reira  hoki  te  Timuaki  o  te  Mihana,  a  i  roto 
i   ana  korero  i   puta  i  aia  etahi   kupu  whaka- 
Haami  Paraima         miharo    mo    tenei     koroua    tae    noa    ki    tana 
whanau. 
I  te  ratapu  ka  nehua  ia  ki  te  urupa  Maori  i  Mangere. 
Heoi  ra  kua  mohio  mai  koutou  nga  mea  e  mohio  ana  ki  tenei 
kaumatua.     Haere  ra  e  koro.     Ko  te  Atua  te  mea  e  mohio  pai  ana 
ki  te  wahi  hei  taunga  atu  mou  i  tua  o  te  arai. 

— Tangataiti  Tc'ito,  Timuaki  Peka. 


nnM  Dl  II  f  f'M  I  ■ 


Pepuere,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


43 


KO  TE  WHAKAHOKINGA  MAI 
O  TE  RONGO  PAI 

("Te  Karere,"  Noema  21,   1917) 

(Ko  enei  tuhinga  e  whai  ake  net  he  whakamaori- 
tanga  o  tctahi  pukapuka  e  kiia  nei  ko  "Cowley's 
Talks  on  Doctrine"  he  mea  tuhi  na  Matiaha  F. 
Kauri  no  te  Pa  Tote,  kua  mate.  Na  tana  tama,  na 
Erata  Matin  Kauri  i  whakamaori  iaiai  konei  i  niua.) 
(Roanga  tuatahi) 

Ko    nga    rarangi    karaipiture    kua    whaka- 
huatia  ake  nei  hei  whakaatu  i  te  ahua  o   nga 
whakakotiti  ketanga  i  roto  i  te  Hahi.     "Ko  te 
whare  e  wehe  ana  ki  a  ia  ano  e  kore  e  tu."  Na 
M    .     K       .  ko  nga  poropititanga  e  whai  ake  nei  hei  whaka- 

Matiu  Kauri  marama  i  nga  tukino  tanga  o  te  hunga  o  waho 

ki  te  iwi  o  te  Atua.  "Ko  reira  koutou  tukua  ai  kia  tukinotia,  a  whaka- 
matea  koutou;  e  whakakinongia  e  nga  iwi  katoa,  he  whakaaro  hoki  ki 
toku  ingoa."  (Matiu  24:9.)  Kei  roto  ano  hoki  tenei  poropititanga  a 
te  Mihaia  i  te  tekau  ma  toru  o  nga  upoko  o  Maka,  te  iwa  o  nga  rarangi; 
me  tetahi  ano  kei  te  tekau  ma  ono  o  nga  upoko  o  Hoani,  te  tahi  me 
te  rua  o   nga  rarangi. 

I  a  Hoani  te  Apotoro  e  korero  ana  mo  te  Kararehe  i  whiwhi  i 
tona  mana  i  te  Tarakona,  ka  mea  ia:  "I  tukua  ano  ki  a  ia  kia  whawhai 
ki  te  Hunga  Tapu,  kia  taea  hoki  ratou  e  ia:  i  hoatu  ano  ki  a  ia  he  mana 
ki  nga  hapu  katoa,  ki  nga  reo,  ki  nga  iwi." 

Ka  kite  tatou  i  roto  i  nga  pukapuka  e  kiia  nei  he  hitori  (history) 
kua  tutuki  tonu  enei  poropititanga.  Tae  noa  mai  ki  te  iwa  tekau  ma 
ono  o  nga  tau  i  muri  iho  i  a  te  Karaiti,  te  tau  i  panaia  a  Hoani  ki  te 
Motu  a  Patamo,  kua  whakamatea  katoatia  nga  Apotoro,  a  kua  kore 
ra  ano  he  riwhi  mo  ratou,  hei  whakahaere  tonu  i  nga  mahi  o  te  Hahi 
a  te  Karaiti.  Me  te  Hunga  Tapu  ano  hoki  i  whakamatea,  i  whaka- 
mararatia  .  Mehemea  ka  korero  tatou  i  nga  pukapuka  o  Mohaima 
(Mosheim)  e  whakaatu  nei  i  nga  ahua  o  nga  hahi,  o  ratou  putake  me 
era  atu  ano  hoki,  me  nga  pukapuka  o  etahi  atu  tangata  mohio  ki  enei 
tikanga,  ka  mohio  tonu  tatou  i  riro  te  iwi  Karaitiana  i  raro  i  nga  iwi 
whakapono  ki  nga  atua  Maori,  a  mutu  ra  ano  nga  manaakitanga  <>  to 
Wairua  Tapu  i  runga  i  te  tuawhenua  kei  te  Rawhiti.  "A  nui  atu 
to  nga  tangata  aroha  ki  te  pouri  i  to  ratou  ki  to  maraniatan.ua.'*  X" 
reira  i  whakaparahakotia  e  ratou  nga  tikanga  \vliaka<>ra. 
I  Turin  /<■  roanga  ) 


Left  :  Sergt.-Major  <  Elder) 
Katene.  recently 
awarded  the  Militarj  Medal 
for  conspicuou  w  ork  in  t  he 
Greece  and  Crete  cam- 
paigns, is  to  be  joined  by 
in  [gter,  w  Ikitoi  ta  Ka1  <■"'■ 
i  ria  iii  i  in  ervini  I  heir 
country.  H<>ti>  "i 
young      people     hold      verj 

invi,    ii,,-   Ideal i 

1    i  heir  ( Ihurch,  e  bich 
,     ex<  mplifled  bj    I  heir  livei 

,•,      I  I,.-    ,■      ihlli,  nil      .,u,l      ,-\  il 
I  line 


44  TE  KARERE  Pepuere,  1942 

SUNDAY  SCHOOL 


Theme— 

"OUR   HOMES   AND   CHAPELS   SHALL   BE   BEAUTIFUL" 
"For  Zion  must  increase  in  beauty  and  in  Holiness;  her  borders 
must  be  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened;  yea  verily  I  say 
unto  you.    Zion  )tiust  arise  and  put   <>n  her  beautiful  garments." 

— Doctrine  &  Covenants  82:14. 

SACRAMENT  GEM 

While  of  these  emblems  we  partake 
In  Jesus'  name  and  for  His  sake — 

Let  us  remember  and  be  sure 

Our  hearts  and  heads  are  clean  and  pure. 

CONCERT  RECITATION 

1  Peter  1:  18-19. 

"For  as  much  as  ye  know  that  ye  were  not  redeemed  with  cor- 
ruptible things,  as  silver  and  gold,  from  you  vain  conversation  re- 
ceived by  tradition  from  your  fathers;  but  with  the  preeious  blood  of 
Christ,  as  of  a  lamb  without  blemish  and  spot." 

KORERO    A    NGAKAU 
7  Pita  1:  18-19. 

"Kia  mahara  ehara  nga  mea  pirau,  te  hiriwa,  te  koura,  i  te  utu 
mo  koutou,  i  puta  mai  ai  i  a  koutou  ritenga  tekateka  i  whakarerea 
mai  e  nga  niatua :  Engari  he  toto  utu  nui  me  te  mea  no  te  reme 
koha-kore,  poke-kore,  ara,  no  te  Karaiti." 

SINGING 

It  is  the  responsibility  of  the  School  Chorister,  with  the  assist- 
ance of  the  accompanist,  to  teach  new  songs,  and  teach  them   well. 

LESSONS 

KINDERGARTEN.     Thought:   "Courage." 

"The   Three   Hebrew   Children."      (Daniel    3) 

"Daniel    In    the   Lion's    Den."       (Daniel    6) 

"David    and    Jonathan."      (1    Samuel    20) 
PRIMARY. 

"A  Home  in  the  Temple."    (1   Samuel   1   to   3.)      Thought:  "Little 
children  can  serve  the  Lord." 

"The   First   King    of    Israel."    (Samuel   8   to    10.)     Thought:    "The 
Lord's  Spirit  can  change  our  Hearts." 

"Two  Soldiers  Against  An  Army."    (1  Samuel  14)      Thought:  "The 
Power  of  God  is  Greater  than  an  Army  of  Soldiers." 
CHURCH  HISTORY. 

"The  People  of  Zeniff."  (Mosiah  9  to  11.)  Thought:  "Prosperity 
often  causes  people  to  forget  God."  Facts  about  the  lesson.  The 
people  are  greatly  prospered — their  prosperity  leads  to  wickedness — 
they  become  drunkards — war  with  the  Lamanites — the  Nephites  vic- 
torious— boast  of  their  own  strength. 


Pepuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  45 

"Abinadi,  The  Prophet."  (Mosiah  11  to  21)  Thought:  "Prophecy, 
and  it  being  fulfilled."  Abinadi  prophesies — he  is  rejected — finishes 
his  testimony — is  put  to  death  by  fire — prophesies  concerning  his  per- 
secutors— the  Nephites  oppressed  by  the  Lamanites — heavy  taxes  im- 
posed— king  Noah  flees — burned  by  his  followers — Nephites  humbled. 

A  &  B  DEPARTMENTS. 

"The  Story  of  Jacob" — His  Life  in  Haran."  (Genesis  27  to  30.) 
What  to  look  for.  The  reasons  why  Jacob  fled  to  Haran.  Jacob's 
sacred  vow  with  God  at  Bethel.  The  meeting  of  Jacob  and  Rachel 
and  the  contract  with  Laban.  The  personnel  of  Jacob's  family  at 
Haran.  The  agreement  between  Jacob  and  Laban  pertaining  to  their 
flocks.  Problems:  What  was  Jacob's  dream  at  Bethel?  Show  wherein 
Jacob  won,  in  spite  of  Laban's  failure  to  keep  his  promises?  In  what 
ways  did  the  Lord  bless  Jacob  while  in  Haran?  How  did  Jacob  get 
his  four  wives?      What  does  Genesis  28:20-22  mean  to  you? 

Note. — If  the  lesson  is  too  short  to  cover  the  month,  teachers  are 
asked  to  organize  their  class  into  missionaries  to  contact  members  of 
the  Church  who  should  be  attending  their  Sunday  School  Class.  Dis- 
cuss ways  and  means  to  keep  your  classes  interesting  and  vitally  alive. 
Keep  your  membership  up. 

C  &  D  DEPARTMENTS. 

"The  Sermon  on  the  Mount."  Continue  with  this  lesson  until  com- 
pleted.    (Matthew  5,  6  and  7;  Luke  6.) 

GOSPEL  DOCTRINE. 

"Ezekiel,  the  Prophet  Captive."  (Ezekiel  1  to  7  and  24.)  Helps — 
The  call  of  Ezekiel — the  vision  of  the  cherubim  and  of  the  glory  of 
God — the  prophet  commissioned — given  a  roll  to  eat — encouragement 
to  the  prophet — the  siege  of  Jerusalem  and  the  captivity  predicted — 
the  nature  of  the  judgments — their  purpose — the  doom  of  Israel — the 
destruction  of  Jerusalem  foretold. 
MAORI  CLASS. 

RATAPU   TUATAHI 

KUA  RITE  MAI  HE  WHAKAMARIETANGA.— Xga  tamariki  a 
te  Atua  kua  uru  nei  ki  te  kikokiko  kaore  i  waiho  iho  e  la  kia  noho 
kaore  he  tumanakotanga.  I  hoatu  e  ia  era  atu  whakahaunga  kia 
Arama.  E  mea  ana  kia  hoatu  whakahere  i  runga  i  te  ingoa  o  te  Tama 
Kotahi,  me  te  whakaari  atu  he  hokonga  mona  me  ona  mi  katoa  e 
whakarite  ana  i  nga  tikanga  katoa  kua  whakahaua  hoi  pupuiitan.ua.  E 
whiwhi  ai  ki  te  utu  wikitoria  i  runga  i  te  kaha  ki  te  takahi  i  te  kino 
he  mea  whakamarama  ki  o  tatou  niatua  tuatahi,  a  koa  ana  raua.  I 
mea  Arama  "Kia  whakapaingia  te  ingoa  o  te  Atua.  no  te  mea,  no  toku 
takanga  i  tuwhera  ai  oku  kanohi,  a  ka  whai  liari  ahau  i  rotd  i  tenei 
oranga,  a  i  roto  i  te  kikokiko  tera  ahau  e  kite  i  te  Alma.  A  i  rongo 
hold  a  Iwi  i  enei  mea  katoa,  a  koa  ana,  ka  mea — Me  i  kore  to  taua 
takanga,  e  kore   rawa   taua   e   whai    uii,   a   kua   kore   i    mohio   ki   te   pai   ki 

te  kino  me  te  hari  o  to  taua  hokonga,  me  te  oranga  tonutanga  e  nomai 

noi  o  te  Atua  ki  nga  mea  katoa  e  ngohongoho  ana." 
Nija    Patai: 

1.  He  tumanakotanga  ano  ranei  i  nomai  e  te  Atua  ki  ana  tamariki 

0    te    kikokiko? 

2.  Be  aha  era  atu  whakahaunga  I  hoatu  kia  Arama? 

.'{.     He  aha   nga   mea   i    rongO   a    I  w  i    a    koa   ana? 

RATAPU  TUARUA 
KAORE    I    PUTA    NOA    \i.\i    TE   TAKANGA,     E   he   ana   k.   te 

whakaaro  iho  to  haram-a  o   I  w  i   rami  ko   Arama   i   puta  ohorere   mai   ki   to 

Kai  hanga.     Na  runga  I  tona  mohiotanga  Atua  ■  mua  kua  mohio  ke  te 


AG  TE  KARERE  Pepuere,  1942 

Atua  he  aha  te  tukunga  iho  o  te  whakawai  a  Hatana  i  a  Iwi ;  te  pehea- 
tanga  hold  0  Arama  i  iun.ua  i  taua  ahua.  Tera  ano  hoki,  e  pono  ana, 
kua  kitea  atu  ko  te  takanga  he  hikonga  e  ahei  te  kukume  mai  i  te 
tangata  kia  tutuki  ki  te  mohiotanga  ki  te  pai  ki  te  kino,  kia  noho  ai  kei 
a  ia  ake  te  tikan.ua  ki  te  hopu  i  tetahi  o  enei,  kia  noho  rite  ai  ma  roto 
atu  i  nga  mohiotanga  i  whiwhi  i  te  nohoanga  i  te  kikokiko.  Kia  whaka- 
teiteitia  kia  pera  me  te  tauira  mo  ona  mahi  pai  i  roto  i  tona  hanganga. 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  I  ohorere  ranei  te  Matua  i  te  takanga  o  Iwi  raua  ko  Arama? 

2.  Whakamaramatia  he  aha  i  mohio  ai  te  Atua  ka  pera  te  ahua 
mo   Iwi   raua   ko   Arama? 

3.  He  aha  te  tikanga  kua  kitea  atu  mo  te  takanga? 

RATAPU   TUATORU 

TE  KORORIA  0  TE  ATUA.  No  te  mea,  nana,  ko  tenei  taku  mahi 
me  taku  kororia — ara,  te  whakaputa  mai  i  te  mate  kore  me  te  oranga- 
tonutanga  o  nga  tangata  e  ai  ta  te  Ariki  puku  kia  Mohi.  Ko  ta  te 
Atua  tikanga  ko  te  whakatakoto  atu  e  ahei  ai  ana  tamariki  wairua  o 
nga  rangi  te  whawha  atu  e  mahi  a  i  ia  wairua  me  te  wahi  e  riro  mai 
ai  e  hara  ko  te  hokonga  mai  anake  i  te  mate  engari  ano  ko  te  whaka- 
oranga  tae  atu  ki  te  whakateiteitanga,  me  nga  mana  o  te  kakenga 
haeretanga,  mutunga  kore  me  nga  hua.  No  reira  e  ahei  ana  ko  nga 
huanga  wairua  a  te  Atua  kia  mahue  atu  nga  wahi  o  to  ratou  tai- 
tamarikitanga  a  kia  uru  atu  ki  te  kuranga  o  nga  mohiotanga  o  te 
kikokiko  te  paorotanga,  te  tuunga  atu  me  te  pehanga  o  te  kino,  rite 
pu  ki  te  ahua  maha  o  te  kaha  o  to  ratou  whakapono.  E  kore  rawa  a 
Arama  raua  ko  Iwi  e  noho  hei  matua  mo  nga  tamariki  o  te  kikokiko 
mehemea  raua  i  kore  rawa  e  uru  ki  te  kikokiko.  Te  whakakikokiko- 
tanga  he  wahi  nui  tonu  i  roto  i  te  tauira  a  te  Atua  mo  te  whenua  me 
nga  tangata  kua  rite  mai  he  kai  noho  mo  runga,  a  hei  huarahi  atu 
e  whakahaeretia  ai  te  kikokikotanga.  Ka  whakanohoia  e  te  Atua  ki 
mua  ki  nga  matua  o  te  iwi,  he  ture,  me  te  mohio  ano  hoki  he  aha  te 
tukunga  iho. 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  He  aha  te  mahi  me  te  kororia  o  te  Atua? 

2.  Me  pehea  e  whiwhi  ai  i  te  whakaoranga  me  te  whakateitei- 
tanga? 

3.  E  noho  ranei  a  Arama  raua  ko  Iwi  hei  matua  mo  nga  tamariki 
kikokiko,  mehemea  raua  kahore  i  taka  mai  ki  te  ahuatanga  o  te 
kikokiko? 

RATAPU  TUAWHA 
TA  IWI  WAHI.  E  whakatutuki  ana  a  Iwi  i  nga  mahi  a  te  Atua 
i  a  ia  i  whai  wahi  ki  nga  mea  i  tupono  a  tuku  iho  ki  te  takanga  atu. 
Otira,  i  a  ia  i  pa  nei  ki  enei  mea  ki  te  hua  rakau  i  rahuitia  e  hara  i  te 
mea  he  whakaaro  nona  hei  whakatutuki  mana  i  enei  mea,  engari  he 
mahi  poka  ke  i  te  whakahau  a  te  Atua,  i  raru  nei  i  nga  kupu  whaka- 
teka  a  Hatana,  i  tutuki  ana  ta  te  Atua  whakaaro  i  tona  whakawainga 
ia  Iwi  otira,  i  whakaaro  ke  a  Hatana  ki  te  whakararuraru  i  ta  te  Atua 
tauira.  I  tino  tuturu  te  korerotanga  mai:  Kihai  ia  i  mohio  ki  nga 
whakaaro  o  te  Atua  no  reira  ia  i  anga  ai  ki  te  whakangaro  i  te  ao. 
Otira,  tona  mahi  rewera  kore  rawa  i  noho  hei  hikoinga  atu  ki  te 
whakangaromanga  engari  hei  whakatupu  i  te  tauira  mo  te  piki  haere 
o  te  tangata  mo  ake  tonu  atu.  Ko  to  Arama  wahi  i  roto  i  tenei  mea 
nui  i  rereke  noa  ake  te  painga  i  ta  tona  wahine;  kaore  ia  i  taea  te 
maminga,  engari  nana  marike  i  ata  whiriwhiri  ki  te  whakarite  i  ta 
Iwi  i  pai  ai,  kia  taea  ai  e  ia  te  whakarite  nga  whakamaunga  atu  a  tona 
Kai-hanga  mo  te  tangata.  Ko  ia  nei  ko  Arama  kua  whakaritea  hei 
Peteriaka  tuatahi  mo  ratou.  Ahakoa  ano  nga  heanga  o  te  tangata  e 
ahei  te  whakahuri  hei  whakatutuki  i  nga  whakaaro  nui.      Te  matenga 


Fepuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  47 

o  te  Karaiti  hei  whakahere  he  mea  whakarite  mai  no  mua  atu  ra  ano 
i  te  orokohanga  o  te  ao,  ahakoa  ano  a  Hura  nana  ia  i  tuku  me  nga 
Hurae  hoki  na  ratou  nei  i  ahei  ai  te  whakarite  te  ripekatanga  o  te 
Tama  a  te  Atua,  kaore  i  heke  iho  to  ratou  hara  i  roto  i  tenei  kohuru 
whakarihariha. 
Nga  Patai: 

1.  He  aha  te  mea  nui  i  rite  i  a  Iwi  i  tona  wahi  i  roto  i  tenei  take? 

2.  Ta  Iwi  me  ta  te  Rewera  wahi  i  roto  i  tenei  raruraru,  he  mea 
ata  waihanga  atu  ranei  na  raua  hei  whakatutuki  i  o  te  Atua 
whakaaro? 

PRIMARY 

FIRST  WEEK 

NIGHT   AND   DAY 
Objective: 

Be  thankful  to  Heavenly  Father  for  the  restful  night  and  for  the 
day  in  which  to  work  and  play. 
Approach: 

This  will  be  your  first  opportunity  after  the  New  Year  vacation  to 
talk  with  the  children  about  the  happy  time  they  enjoyed  during  the 
holidays.  Let  them  tell  the  things  they  did  to  make  others  happy. 
From  this  point,  which  should  take  only  a  few  minutes,  lead  the  children 
to  the  thought  that  Heavenly  Father  has  done  many  things  to  make 
our  world  a  lovely  place  for  us. 

When  our  Heavenly  Father  first  made  the  beautiful  earth  for  us 
to  live  upon,  where  we  could  work  and  play,  everything  was  darkness. 
There  was  no  light,  neither  sun  in  the  day  nor  moon  and  sfc 
night.  Then  Father  in  Heaven  said,  "Let  there  be  light"  and  there  was 
light.  He  called  the  light  day,  and  the  darkness  night.  Father  in 
Heaven  made  two  great  lights.  What  did  He  make  to  give  us  light  in 
the  day?  What  did  he  make  to  give  us  light  at  night?  What  else  did 
He  make  to  shine  for  us  at  night'.' 

Let  the  children  say: 

"God  our  Father  made  the  night 
Made  the   moon   and   stars  BO   bright." 

Talk  with  the  children  about  the  night  time,  How  good  it  is  to 
go   to   l>ad   and   close  our  eyes   in   sleep! 

Your  body  rests  and  grows  while  you  arc  asleep.     While  you  deep, 

your   arms   and    legs   arc   getting   ready   to   work   and    play   the   m\t    day. 

Your  oars  and  eyes  arc  resting,  too.     H"  you  want  to  grow  Btrong,  you 

must  go  to   hod  early  and   let    your   body   Pesl    and  grow. 

While  we  sleep  we  know  that  Heavenly  Father  is  watching  over  us. 

Sln.u    a    picture   of   B    little   girl    Bleeping   and   tell    this    lovely   story: 
The    light    had    just    heen    put    out.    and    the    little    girl    w  a>    rather 
afraid   of  the  dark.       Hut    presently    Bhe     aw    the   blight    moon  out    of  hei 
window,    and    she    asked    her    mother.    "Is    the    moon    God'fl    light?" 

"Yes/1  the  mother  replied";  the  moon  and  M:ir  are  all  God'fl 
lights." 


"Will    Co. 

blow  out    His  light   and  go  t.»  Bleep, 

tOO?"    she 

again. 

"No,    my 

child/'    replied   the    mother;   "God'i 

ighta    are     .. 

burning." 

'•Well,       ,,,< 

afraid." 

our  Fath< 

.the,/'    said    the    eh, id.    "while    God' 

awake,    I'm    not 

r  in  heaven  lovea  little  children.     H< 

has  promised  to 

take    care    of    > 

on,    and    He    will.       He    will    take    rare 

>f  >ou  alws 

48  TE  KARERE  IVpuere,  1942 

when   you   are   asleep,   when   you   are   awake,   when   you   are   afraid   or 
lonely,   when  you  are  playing  or  working. 

"There's  nothing  in  the  world  to  fear, 
For  Heavenly  Father  will  be  near; 
I  am  His  little  child  and  He 
Will  keep  me  safe  as  safe  can  be 
In  work  and  play, 
By  night  and  day." 
We  know  that  Heavenly  Father  will  watch  over  us.     But  what  do 
we  do  before  we  go  to  bed?      The  children  may  suggest  several  things; 
be  sure  they  remember  to  say  their  prayers,  that  they  ask  Heavenly 
Father  to  watch  over  them  and  that  they  say  "Thank  you"  to  Him. 

AFRAID   OF   THE  DARK 
Story: 

Little  Sally  sat  on  the  floor  dressing  her  paper  dolls.  Sally's  older 
sister,  Betty,  was  reading  a  book.  Betty  went  to  school,  and  had 
learned  to  read,  but  Sally,  who  was  only  five,  could  not  read  at  all. 
Darkness  was  falling  and  the  clock  on  the  mantel  struck  eight.  Sally's 
eyes  looked  very  sleepy.      She  yawned. 

"Time  for  my  little  girl  to  go  to  bed,"   said   Mother. 

"Is  Betty  coming  with  me?"  asked  Sally. 

"Oh  Mother,"  cried  Betty,  "please  let  me  finish  this  story  first. 
I'm  not  sleepy.     May  I  please?" 

"Yes,  Betty,"  replied  Mother;  "you  may  stay  up  until  nine  to- 
night, but  I  want  Sally  to  go  right  to  bed  because  she's  just  a  little 
girl,  and  she  needs  plenty  of  sleep." 

Sally  put  her  paper  dolls  away,  undressed  herself,  brushed  her 
teeth  and  washed  her  face  and  hands.  Then  she  said  her  prayers 
at  kind  Mother's  knee,  and  was  tucked  into  bed. 

As  little  Sally  lay  in  bed,  she  listened  to  the  last  sleepy  twitters 
of  the  birds.  She  watched  the  shadows  in  the  room  as  they  grew 
longer  and  blacker.  Soon  it  was  quite  dark,  and  Sally  heard  a  strange 
noise.  It  was  only  the  wind  brushing  through  the  trees,  but  it 
frightened  Sally.  She  looked  around  at  all  the  black  shadows  in  the 
room,  and  wished  that  she  were  not  alone  in  the  dark. 

Sally  shut  her  eyes  and  tried  to  go  to  sleep,  but  she  could  not. 
"If  only  Betty  would  come,"  she  thought,  "then  I  would  not  be  afraid!" 

After  awhile,  Sally  jumped  out  of  bed  and  ran  to  her  mother. 

"Mother,  dear,"  she  cried,  "I'm  so  frightened!  Please  turn  on 
the  light.      Then  I  can  go  to  sleep." 

"But  what  are  you  afraid  of,  dear?" 

"Oh,  I  don't  know,"  wailed  little  Sally;  "but  I  don't  like  the  long 
shadows  and  the  darkness.      Please,  please  turn  on  the  light." 

"Come  and  sit  on  my  lap,"  said  Mother,  "I  want  to  tell  you  some- 
thing." 

Sally  climbed  into  her  mother's  lap. 

"You   said  your  prayers  to-night,    Sally.      Don't  you  remember?" 

"Yes,   Mother." 

"And  when  you  ask  your  Heavenly  Father  to  take  care  of  you, 
you  have  nothing  to  fear,  for  He  will  watch  over  your  little  bed  all 
night  long.  Do  you  think  the  little  birds  in  their  nests  are  afraid  of 
the  dark?" 

"I  don't  know,"  said  Sally.  "Does  God  watch  over  them,  too?" 

"Yes,  dear.  God  loves  and  watches  over  all  of  us.  He  sends 
fresh  breezes  at  night,  so  that  we  will  sleep  better,  and  perhaps  to  rock 
the  baby  birds  to  sleep!" 

Little  Sally  kissed  her  mother,  went  back  to  bed,  and  was  no 
longer  afraid  of  the  night  wind  nor  the  gentle  darkness. 


Pepuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  49 

SECOND  WEEK 

OUR  TONGUES 
Objective: 

To  teach  the  children  to  think  before  they  speak,  and  guard  their 
tongues. 

And  now  let  us  talk  about  our  tongues.  In  the  first  place  they 
help  us  a  great  deal.  Tell  me  how?  Try  to  say  "mother"  without 
using  your  tongue.  Try  to  say  "handkerchief."  Can  you  think  of 
other  words?  Now  tell  me  one  of  the  other  words?  Now  tell  me  one 
of  the  most  important  ways  that  our  tongues  help  us.  Our  Heavenly 
Father  is  very  kind  to  give  us  so  many  things  to  make  us  happy.  We 
talked  about  keeping  our  teeth  clean,  have  you  ever  thought  how  we 
might  keep   our  tongues  clean? 

I  heard  about  a  boy  who  used  his  tongue  to  say  a  very  naughty 
word.  His  mother  took  some  soap  and  water  and  a  small  clean  cloth 
and  washed  his  tongue.  How  would  that  help?  What  would  be  a 
better  way  to  take  care  of  your  tongue.  One  girl  said  she  bit  her  own 
tongue  when  she  started  to  say  cross  words.  This  little  poem  tells  us 
a  good  way  to  keep  our  tongues  from  saying  things  we  shouldn't  say. 
Let  us  all  learn  it. 

If  there's  a  cross  word  wants  to  be  said, 

Don't  let  it  my  child,  don't  let  it, 
But  speak  two  pleasant  ones  quick  instead, 
And  that  will  help  you  forget  it. 
THE  LITTLE  RED  TONGUE 

Once  upon  a  time  there  lived  a  little  red  tongue.  It  had  a  nice 
little  red  house  all  its  own,  and  two  rows  of  white  teeth,  whose  duty 
it  was  to  close  tightly  together  so  as  to  prevent  the  disagreeable,  angry 
words  from  slipping  out  from  the  little  red  tongue.  But  alas,  the 
little  white  teeth  neglected  their  duty,  and  this  little  red  tongue,  who 
belonged  to  a  little  girl  called  Emma,  was  very  much  disliked  by  every- 
body, so  much  that  the  other  little  girls  wouldn't  let  Emma,  who  owned 
it,  play  with  them,  or  listen  to  the  stories  they  would  tell  each  other 
when  it  was  too  cold  for  them  te  go  out  and  play;  so  the  little  red 
tongue  said  angrier  words  and  quarrelled  a  great  deal  more  than  any 
tongue,  it  is  to  be  hoped,  ever  before  had  done. 

One  day  when  Emma  was  sitting  alone  on  a  bench  under  a  tree, 
watching  all  the  other  children  at  play,  and  the  little  red  tongue  had 
grown  tired  of  saying  disagreeable  things  when  there  was  no  one  to 
hear  them,  and  so  was  taking  a  rest,  Emma  heard  a  very  small  voice 
say,  "Emma!"  Emma  looked  all  around  her,  then  up  at  the  sky  and 
down  on  the  ground,  but  she  couldn't  see  anyone. 

"You  can't  see  me,"  said  the  voice,  just  as  if  Emma   had   asked. 

"Where  are  you?" 

"I  am  inside  your  heart.  I  have  come  to  tell  you  thai  you  are 
not  really  nasty  and  disagreeable,  as  they  say  you  are,  bul  it  is  thai 
little  red  tongue  of  yours.  Now.  suppose  you  try  to  cure  its  habit  of 
Baying  angry,  disagreeable  and   untruthful  things,  and  every  time  it 

docs,    just   give    it   a   good,    hard    bite,    and   then    make    it    sa\    Something 

kind  and  pleasant,  and  sec  what  a  difference  thai  will  make.     Remem- 
ber this: 

"The  hoy  or  girl  who  really  tries 

To  make  a  tongue  behave,   is  wise." 
"That's   very   good    advico,    Kiiinia,    though    it    may    not    be    poetry." 

And    the    voice   censed   speaking  as  suddenly   as   it    commenced. 

In    spite    of    her    naughty    little    red    tongae    Emma    WM    at    heart    a 

wise   little   girl,   and   she   thought    she   would   try   the    funny   advic. 

her   by   tin-  small   voice.       And   she  did   try   hard,   and    it    \\:e-  a   very   tore 

little   red  tongue  before  it    had  learned  only  to  say   nice,   pleasant   tilings 

to    people;    but     it    did    learn    in    time. 


50  TE  KARERE  Pepuere,  1942 

THIRD  WEEK 

TAKING   CARE    OF   YOUR   MOUTH 
Objective: 

To  build  up  an  attitude  toward  keeping  the  teeth  clean  and  guard- 
ing the  tongue. 
Prayer: 

Let  the  children  bow  their  heads  and  say  the  folPtyving  gem: 
"Thank  you  Heavenly  Father, 

For  flowers  and  birds  that  sing, 
For  home  and  food  and  cothes  we  wear, 
Thanks   for   everything." 

Suggestions: 

Through  these  lessons  we  are  helping  the  children  to  a  deeper 
appreciation  of  God  and  His  gifts.  We  have  observed  that  the  trees, 
the  grass,  and  the  flowers,  in  fact  all  things  about  us  grow  stronger 
and   bigger  with  proper  care. 

God  has  made  us  like  the  flowers,  the  trees,  and  the  grass,  to 
grow,  gather  strength  and  blossom.  With  His  gifts  to  us,  however, 
He  has  given  us  a  responsibility.  We  must  work  with  Him  and  for 
Him  in  order  to  be  strong  and  well. 

The  privileges  and  opportunities  of  the  Primary  teacher  are  un- 
limited for  the  directing,  encouraging  and  inspiring  the  children  to 
form  valuable  health  habits  and  right  wholesome  attitudes  toward  the 
care   of  their  bodies  and  their  minds. 

OUR   TEETH 
Approach: 

Have  you  ever  noticed  how  many  parts  of  your  body  have  more 
than  one  kind  of  work  to  do?  Can  you  tell  two  things  your  nose 
does  for  you?  (It  is  for  smelling  and  also  for  warming  and  cleaning 
the  air  you  breathe.)  Wha't  do  your  fingernails  do?  (They  protect 
the  ends  of  your  fingers  and  make  it  easier  to  pick  up  things.)  Now 
let  us  think  about  our  mouths.  What  do  they  do  for  us?  Food  is 
taken  into  the  mouth.  It  is  tasted,  chewed  and  swallowed.  Your 
mouth  helps  you  to  talk  and  laugh.  Your  teeth  are  made  for  biting 
and  chewing  food.  They  also  help  you  to  talk.  They  help  to  make 
you  beautiful,  too.  It's  easy  for  germs  to  get  into  your  body  through 
your  mouth.  So  you  can  see  that  your  mouth  is  very  important. 
There  are  two  things  in  your  mouth  that  are  very  useful.  What  are 
they?  Let  us  talk  about  our  teeth  first.  What  very  important 
thing  should  we  remember  about  our  teeth?  What  do  we  do  to  keep 
them  clean?    Suppose  I  tell  you  that  dirty  teeth  often  make  people  ill. 

You  have  two  sets  of  teeth,  the  upper  and  the  lower.  They  are 
built  so  that  they  will  grind  food  into  very  small  pieces  before  you 
swallow  it.  When  you  chew  your  food  little  pieces  break  off  and  stick 
between  your  teeth.  If  these  bits  of  food  are  not  brushed  away  they 
decompose  and  holes  are  apt  to  come  in  the  teeth. 

When  you  have  a  toothache  there  is  usually  a  hole  in  your  tooth, 
so  if  you  keep  the  holes  out  of  your  teeth  you  will  not  have  the  tooth- 
ache. 

If  you  take  two  apples,  one  good  and  the  other  with  a  spot  on  it, 
and  put  them  together  for  a  few  days,  the  good  one  spoils  too.  Your 
teeth  are  like  apples.  If  one  gets  a  hole  in  it  the  one  next  to  it  will 
get  a  hole  in  it,  too.  When  a  hole  gets  started,  it  grows  deeper  and 
deeper  until  it  reaches  the  nerve.     Then  the  tooth  aches. 

There  are  three  good  reasons  for  brushing  our  teeth  morning  and 
night,  they  are:  Clean  teeth  helps  us  to  keep  sickness  away,  tooth- 
ache away,  and  helps  us  to  be  better  looking.  Let  the  children  learn 
these  three  reasons. 


Pepuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  51 

The  teacher  might  learn  the  poem  "Tooth  Bugs"  and  say  it  to  the 
children.  They  will  get  a  lot  of  fun  out  of  it,  and  perhaps  they  will 
want  to  say  part  of  it  if  theteacher  says  it  a  second  time.  For  instance, 
the  children  will  say,  "I  do  not  want  to  clean  my  teeth,"  and  the 
teacher  will  say,   "A  little  boy  once  cried,"   and  so   on. 

TOOTH  BUGS 

"I  do  not  want  to  clean  my  teeth," 

A  little  boy  once  cried. 
"I've  washed  my  face  and  combed  my  hair, 

That's  quite  enough,"  he  sighed. 
Some  tooth-bugs  hiding  in  his  mouth 

Began  to  dance  in  glee; 
"At  last  we've  found  a  home,"  they  cried 

"We  do  not  have  to  flee!" 
"This  boy  has  such  a  nice  warm  mouth, 

We'll  linger  here  all  night; 
His  teeth  are  filled  with  bits  of  food, 

We'll  eat  with  all  our  might!" 
The  small  boy  heard  their  shouts  of  glee; 

"Get  out  of  here!"  he  cried; 
He  grabbed  his  brush  and  scrubbed  and  scrubbed 

Till  every  tooth-bug  died. 
Let  the   children   sing  the   following  to   the   tune,    "Here   We   Go 
'Round  the  Mulberry  Bush." 

"This  is  the  way  we  brush  our  teeth, 
Brush  our  teeth,  bursh  our  teeth. 

This  is  the  way  we  brush  our  teeth, 
So  early  in  the  morning." 

FOURTH  WEEK 

WILLING  OBEDIENCE 
Objective: 

To  create  in  the  children  a  desire  to  obey  their  parents  willingly. 
Approach: 

As  a  basis  for  conversation   you   might  tell  the    following  story: 
One    Monday,    Steve,    who    had    been    at    church    the    day    b< 
thought  he  would  have  a  church  of  his  own.      He  got  his   lour  sisters 
to  be  the  congregation.      He  stood  on   a  stool   and   spoke   very   loudly. 
This  is  part  of  the  sermon  that   ho  preached: 

"This  is  to  be  a  'mind  mother'  sermon.  There  are  two  ways  in 
which  you  ought  to  mind  everything  she  says.  Mind  her  the  very  first 
time  she  speaks.  When  mother  says,  '.Mary,  please  bring  me  some 
eoal  or  water,'  or  'run  to  the  store,'  don't  answer,  in  just  a  minute. 
mother.'  Little  folks'  minutes  are  a  great  deal  Longer  than  the  one 
the  dock  ticks  off.  When  you  say  'yes'  with  your  lips,  Baj  'yi-'  with 
your  hands  and    feet.      Don't    say  'yes'   and  act    'no.'      Saying  \\  - 

minute,'   is  not   obeying,   but   doing  'yes'   is. 

"Mind  cheerfully.    Don'1  scowl  when  you  have  to  drop  a  book,  or 

whine    because    yOU    Can'1    gO    ami    play.     You    wouldn't    own    a    d 
minded    you    with    his    ears    laid    hack,    growling    and    snapping.       A 

oughl  to  mind  a  great  deal  better  than  a  d< 

That    was  Steve's  sermon.       Why  do   you   think   it    was  a  good   one'.' 

JONAH    AND   THE    SNOWSTORM 
"Now   remember,  children,  not  to  go  any  farther  than  Carl* 

called     Mrs.     Balton,    a        he    watched    the    twin-    mount     old     Trie, 

turn  out   of  the  yard. 


52  TE  KARERE  Pepuerc,  1942 

"Don't  worry,  Mother,  we  will  remember,"  answered  Mary  as  she 
clung  tightly  to  Cary  as  Prince  started  on  a  trot  that  set  her  bouncing. 

"Why  did  Mother  have  to  say  that,"  growled  Cary,  "suppose  all 
the  nuts  are  gone  up  at  Carlton's.  We  could  have  gone  some  place 
else  and  found  some." 

"You  look  here,  Cary  Barton,  Mother  said  no  farther  than  Carl- 
ton's, and  that  is  as  far  as  we  are  going.  Besides  it  looks  like  a 
storm." 

They  soon  reached  Carlton's  to  find  as  Cary  had  feared,  that  most 
of  the  nuts  had  been  gathered.  He  grumbled  and  complained  and 
tried  to  coax  Mary  to  go  on  up  the  canyon  to  the  deserted  Pixley  ranch 
where  great  black  walnut  trees  grew.  But  Mary  would  not  go.  She 
scurried  about  and  found  enough  nuts  to  partly  fill  their  sack  and  then 
untied  their  horse  and  made   Cary  climb  into  the  saddle. 

"Come  on  old  grumbler,"  she  said,  "see  how  black  the  sky  is.  We 
will  have  to  hurry  if  we  beat  that  storm." 

As  she  spoke  the  wind  began  to  blow  bringing  the  first  fluttering 
snowflakes  with  it.  Before  they  were  half  way  home  a  blizzard  raged 
about  them;  and  they  took  shelter  in  an  old  shed  that  stood  by  the 
road.  Even  old  Prince  seemed  to  enjoy  being  out  of  the  storm  and 
began  muching  some  straw  that  was  piled  in  the  shed. 

Mary  made  herself  comfortable  by  hollowing  out  a  nest  in  the 
straw.  "I'm  glad  we  didn't  disobey  Mother,"  she  said.  "What  would 
we  have  done  if  we  had  gone  up  the  canyon  to  Pixley's?" 

Cary  grinned  sheepishly,  "It's  a  good  thing  we  didn't  go.  Ugh! 
it's  getting  cold.     Move  over  so  I  can  get  in  that  straw." 

Silence  reigned  in  the  old  shed  as  the  children  watched  the  storm 
cover  the  ground  with  a  sheet  of  white. 

Cary  at  last  broke  the  silence.  "What  are  you  so  quiet  for,  Mary, 
are  you  mad  at  me?" 

"Of  course  not,  silly.  I  was  just  thinking  about  a  story  I  read 
the  other  day  about  a  man  who  disobeyed  God  and  what  happened. 
Want  to   hear   about  him?" 

"Sure.  Go  ahead  and  tell  me.  Guess  you're  hoping  I'll  learn  a 
lesson  or  something  out  of  it,"  said  Cary  with  an  impish  grin. 

"Think  you're  smart  don't  you.  But  you  need  something  to  hold 
you  down  beside  me.  You  just  about  wear  me  out.  It's  tough  being 
a  twin  to  a  human  dynamo  that  never  knows  when  to  stop,"  said  Mary 
with  a  chuckle,  remembering  some  of  the  funny  predicaments  Cary 
had  got  them  into. 

"On  with  the  story,  big  girl,"  mumbled  Cary. 

"Jonah,  a  Hebrew  prophet,  was  commanded  by  God  to  go  to  the 
Assyrian  city  of  Ninevah  to  warn  the  people  there  that  they  were 
doomed  to  punishment  because  of  their  sins.  Disobeying  the  Divine 
Will,  he  went  to  Joppa  and  boarded  a  ship  that  went  down  in  the 
opposite  direction.  He  went  down  into  the  lower  part  of  the  ship  and 
fell  asleep.  A  great  storm  arose  and  the  waves  dashed  against  the 
boat  as  if  they  would  tear  it  to  pieces.  The  sailors  did  everything  they 
could  to  ride  out  of  the  storm  to  the  land,  but  the  ship  was  at  the 
mercy  of  the  waves.  Finally  theydecided  that  the  reason  for  the 
terrible  storm  was  that  someone  on  the  ship  had  done  wrong. 

"The  captain  of  the  ship  went  below  and  awakened  Jonah  and 
told  him  they  were  going  to  cast  lots  to  find  out  who  was  the  cause 
of  the  terrible  storm.  The  lot  fell  to  Jonah  and  the  sailors  decided 
to  throw  him  into  the  sea.  Jonah  agreed  because  he  knew  that  God 
had  sent  the  storm.  As  soon  as  Jonah  had  been  thrown  overboard, 
the  storm  ceased,  Jonah  did  not  drown;  but  a  large  fish  which  appeared 
swallowed  him.  For  three  days  Jonah  lay  in  the  fish,  praying  for  for- 
giveness and  God  made  the  fish  throw  Jonah  up  on  dry  land.  Then 
once  more  God  told  him  to  go  to  Ninevah,  and  Jonah  lost  no  time 
getting  there. 


Pepuere,  1942  TE  KARERE  53 

"Ninevah  was  a  beautiful  city  of  palaces,  parks,  shops,  and  vine- 
yards.    It  was  so  large  that  it  took  three  days  to  walk  around  it. 

"When  Jonah  cried  repentance  unto  the  people,  saying  that  in 
forty  days  their  city  would  be  destroyed,  to  his  surprise,  they  listened 
to  him  and  became  very,  very  sorry.  They  prayed  to  God  to  spare 
them,  and  God  heard  their  petitions  and  blessed  them." 

"And  the  moral  is,"  said  Cary  rather  humbly  for  him,  "that  we 
had  better  get  moving  or  Mother  will  think  we  have  disobeyed  her  and 
feel  bad,  and  I  can't  stand  that  hurt  disappointed  look  that  comes 
into  her  eyes." 

NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 

OVERSEAS 

News  was  received  recently  of  the  death  of  Sister  Dorothy  P.  Smith,  formerly  of 
Palmerston  North.  Particulars  are  now  to  hand  about  the  tragedy.  We  quote 
excerpts    from    "Deseret    News,"    Tuesday,    November    4,    1941: — 

CHURCH  WORKER  KILLED.— Grave  tragedy  descended  on  this  town  (Preston, 
Idaho)  October  24,  when  death  violently  snuffed  out  the  life  of  one  of  the  com- 
munity's newest  yet  most  dearly-loved  members.  Two  other  persons  were  injured 
in    the    accident,    one    seriously. 

Dorothy  P.  Smith  was  fatally  injured  and  her  husband,  Weston  J.  Smith,  received 
cuts  and  fractures  and  a  cerebral  hemorrhage  in  an  automobile  collision  near  Rich- 
mond,   Utah,    15    miles    south    of    Preston. 

Her  body  lay  in  state  at  the  home  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Bryant  C.  Mecham  of 
Preston,  where  hundreds  of  friends  and  fellow-Church  worker-  came  to  pay  their 
last  respects. 

Funeral  services  were  conducted  in  the  Preston  Second  Ward  Chapel.  I  I 
27th,  by  Bishop  Howard  Hall.  Opening  music  was  presented  by  the  choir,  followed 
by  invocation  by  Mr.  Mecham;  Margaret  M.  Smith  sang  "Last  Prayer,"  after  which 
a  vocal  duet  was  rendered.  Speakers  were  Leo  Peterson,  president  of  the  Second 
Ward  M.I. A.,  W.  W.  Speirs,  business  associate  of  Mr.  Smith,  Carl  H.  Cutler  of  the 
Franklin  Stake  Presidency,  and  Elder  Rufus  K.  Hardy  of  tin  First  Council  of 
Seventy.      Benediction    by    Alvin    Maughan    following    a    closing    choral    number. 

Internment  was  in  the  Preston  Cemetery,  where  Robert  Beesley  dedicated  the 
grave.  Following  completion  of  last  rites,  Mrs.  Beesley  (nee  Eunice  D.  Smith,  only 
dauKhtcr    of    deceased)     and    her    husband    met    at     the     Mecham     home    in    a     testimony 

meeting    with    elders    who   have   Berved   as    missionaries    in    \\w    Zealand. 

AUCKLAND    DISTRICT  fective,      in      fact,      thai      former      Primarj 

Reported    by    Ivan    P.    Reid  Secretary       Rona       Attenborough.       Mend 

v  *  Heather    Cuthbertson    and     friend     Marie 

Despite     war     conditions     many     of     the  Tangyee     have     thought     it     wise     to     offer 

Auckland     peopli     managed    to    travel    on  their    services    to    the    R.M       \    \ 

lummer    vacations.     Pal    Rei    and    family  tor<    entering  the  Bervice   they  await    the 

ed    to    Rotorua,    where    Sister    Rei  pleasure   of   the  Selection   Committee  and 

with    her    folk-.      Kere    Morris    was         then     the    medical    examiner.-,     etc. 

in      Gisborne      lor      Christmas;      Morgan  Lag1     )inu>     William      Burnge     was     in 

Clarke    up    north    al     Whangarei;    Charles  Auckland     he     ws       a     corporal     in     the 

Billman    in    Wellington    and    in    the    Wal-  R.N.Z.A.P.,    hut    since    his    transfer    from 

on    to    Hobsonville    he    now    .Ions    the 

,: ■■■•    ""  uniform    and    insignia   of   a    Pilo 

the      Whangapaps      Peninsula.       Mission  Bill  is   qoI   ■   (Uer,  bul    la  attached  to  the 

Secretarj    K< tllj    Harri     reluctantly    ipent  administration  stall  commit- 

■    auiel    Christi  i  ■■  llani,         ,,,,,    ,),,.    hard    was 

,  I  Quayle,    but    they    were  .,,_,,       R 

'""      "v  many.  |p    ;(m|    „,.Mmi.    ,,„  m    down    ,„.,.,,, 

Battle-dressed    Bill    B  well    In    hit    endeavour    to  \ 

be  unlucky.     Ju  i    when  he  land     himself  pilot    at     Whenua] 

*"*  from      II.,-,  I  th«      new 


[all]    at    weel 


Fiel)    ar<  '  the      roud    par. 


which    I  Bill    with 


born    t..    th.-ni 


:"""""'    "'     '«■    •'    ••'      '  "         ii  i    •  ni  V  :    fo  u    *r<    doim 


indeed. 


How. 

e,  will 
all   indication     ha  should  MANAWATI     DISTRICT 

i...    pro  id    -I    i"      promotl  in     for    ;  • 


'•■  i    month   in   th. 


t .. ■.    ii   ii.-.     nothini   to  d 

\.i.-i.i  w 
"uv  the  citj    ■   "war  I 


TE  KARERE 


Pepucre,  1(>42 


and    the    weather    was    ideal.     The 
spirit    of    the    meeting    was    truly    made 

manifest  and  the  speeches  were  inspira- 
tional. We  bope  that  this  is  only  the 
beginning  of  events  of  this  kind  and 
that  in  the  future  such  gathering!  will 
be   better   known  and   held   more  often. 

Well,  who  do  you  think  Wellington 
bad     the     privilege     of     welcoming     Ias1 

month'.'      None    other    than     Bro.     Sydney 
Christy      from     away     up     Nuhaka.        Hope 
yon   enjoyed    your   stay    Bro.   Chris; 
if    it    was    only    a    couple    of    days    and    the 
weather    was    not    the    best. 

aturday  night  in  December  \\ . 
aside  to  honour  another  of  the  lads  from 
Porirua,  Pte.  Madsen  Wi  Neera.  Decora- 
tions of  red.  white  and  blue  hung  in 
tlie  local  hall  with  the  Union  Jack  and 
the  Stars  and  Stripes  occupying  a  con- 
spicuous position.  The  now  famous  V 
for  victory  adorned  the  huge  mirrors  at 
tin  emi  of  the  hall.  European  and 
Maori  friends  gathered  on  this  evening 
resentations  were  made  by  the 
R.S.A.  and  also  the  people.  Items  in- 
cluded tap  dancing  by  Si  an  Wi  Neera 
and  baritone  solos  by  Dan  Hopa.  A 
novelty  of  tin-  evening  was  in  the  way 
of  Madsen's  Xmas  Cake,  which  was  de- 
corated with  red.  white  and  blue  icing 
with  the  V  in  the  centre  and  khaki-clad 
soldiers  forming  a  circle  round  the  edge 
made  by  Madsen's  sisters.  This  was  cut 
and  passed  around  during  the  course  of 
the  evening.  In  attendance  was  Sister 
Wiki  Katene,  a  counsellor  on  the  Mis- 
sion M.I. A.  Board,  the  daughter  of  Bro. 
and  Sister  George  Katene.  Snr.,  who  is 
as  with  the  V.A.D. 
corpse  to  do  her  duty  along  with  the 
rest  of  the  girls  and  boys  who  have 
already  gone.  Presentations  and  speeches 
of  farewell  were  also  made  on  her  behalf. 

On  the  following  Sunday  morning  Sis- 
ter "Wiki  took  a  prominent  part  in  a  wel- 
come home  reception  for  27  of  the  Maori 
boys  who  recently  returned.  They  ar- 
rived at  the  Sydney  Street  Hall  at  11.20 
a.m.,  where  they  were  greeted  by  all 
present  with  sad  but  joyful  hearts.  Be- 
ing the  Sabbath  day.  service  was  fittingly 
conducted  by  the  Rev.  Paora  Temuera. 
Mr.  Hapi  Love  of  Wellington  was  the 
first  speaker,  then  members  of  the  Ngati 
Poneke  Club  rendered  an  action  song  "E 
aha  kei  taku  uma."  Sir  A.  T.  Ngata 
then  introduced  the  Hon.  the  Prime 
Minister,  who  welcomed  the  boys  home 
on  behalf  of  the  people  of  the  Dominion 
and  spoke  highly  of  the  Maori  Battalion 
who  have  made  themselves  famous  in 
battle  all  over  the  world.  The  Hon.  the 
Minister  of  Defence,  Mr.  Jones,  was  next 
speaker;  the  Hon.  Mr.  Mason,  Acting 
Native  Minister;  then  the  club  members 
rendered  another  action  song,  after 
which  Chief  Judge  Shepherd  of  the 
Native  Land  Court  spoke;  Mr.  Tai  Mit- 
chell of  Rotorua  and  Mr.  M.  R.  Jones 
of  the  West  Coast,  Secretary  to  the 
Native    Minister    also    spoke. 

At  this  stage  Sir  A.  T.  Ngata  intro- 
duced Sister  Wiki  Katene  and  mentioned 
•hat    she    is    a    sister    to    Sergeant-Major 


Katene,  Jnr.,  who  was  decorated 
for  gallantn  in  the  Greek  campaign  and 
-aid  that  both  brother  and  sister  were 
bringing  great  honour-  to  their  family  and 
people.  He  then  called  on  Lady  Pomare 
who  pro  ented  Sister  Wiki.  on  behalf  <>f 
the  (duh  members  and  th<  Maori  people 
of  Wellington,  with  a  richly  leathered 
<4jbm^j I i i * '_'  bag  a  truly  magnificent  gift. 
st^^  Wiki  replied  and  said:  "I  wish  to 
thank  you  all  from  the  bottom  of  my 
heart,  who  are  responsible  for  presenting 
me  with  this  travelling-bag     a  rerj 

ful  gift  indeed,  and  one  that  1  will  trea- 
sure highly.  I  have  the  honour  of  being 
chosen   to  j'.o   forth   to  represent    not   only 

my     people     hut     also     my     race,     and     1     r<> 
with     the     comforting    thought    that     your 
faith    and    prayers    will    he   with    me   all    'he 
way     through.       I     hope     that     whatever     1 
will    do    will    make    you    all    proud    i 
fur    I    go    forward    now    to    do    my    duty    to 
my      Cod.      my      king     and      my      country. 
(Applause.)        Once     again     my     si. 
thanks     to     you     all     for    this     wonderful 
token    yoi     have    presented    me   with,   and 
1     hall  treasure  it  in  rememl 
all."        Sir     A.     T.     Ngata     then     sanj 
pari    ra,"    with    the    help    of   the   club    mem- 
bers,   a    composition    by    Paraire    Ton 
of   the   Hawke's    Bay   district. 

on   behalf  of 

i  lie  returned  boy  and  greeted  the  people 
on  the  warm  way  they  had  been  wel- 
comed. He  gave  a  brief  resume  of  what 
was  being  done  "over  there"  and  spoke 
of  the  name  the  Maori  hoys  had  won  for 
themselves  on  the  battlefield.  He  then 
introduced  about  the  most  pope. ! 
in  the  battalion,  Pte.  Amohou  oi 
rua,  the  composer  of  "Maori  Ba1 
marching  song,  who  was  received  with 
great  enthusiasm  by  the  crowd.  Captain 
Te  Punga  said  that  this  song  had  been 
an  inspiration  to  them  on  many  an  oc- 
casion. Pte.  Amohou  then  spoke,  after 
which  he  led  the  returned  boys  in  his 
famous  song.  He  then  expressed  his  de- 
sire to  sing,  especially  for  Sister  Wiki, 
a  song  he  had  composed  (by  special  re- 
quest) for  the  N.Z.  nurses  with  the 
fighting  forces  overseas,  "N.Z.A.N.S.." 
and  with  the  help  of  the  boys  it  went 
over  very  successfully  and  received  the 
wholehearted  approval  of  the  thrilled 
listeners. 

Dinner  was  n<  \t  on  the  programme 
and  was  appreciated  immensely  by  the 
boys  and  all  present.  The  dishes  served 
varied  from  mutton-bird,  puha,  tuna  and 
preserved  toheroa,  to  ice  cream  and  soft 
drinks,  etc.  The  time  came  for  the  de- 
parture of  our  guests,  and  the  club  mem- 
bers rendered  an  action  song,  after  which 
■  tie  joined  in  the  sinking  of  "Auld 
Lang  Syne."  Sir  A.  T.  Ngata  then  led 
"Ka  Mate!  Ka  Mate!  Kaora!  Kaora!"  and 
finally  the  National  Anthem.  So  far  this 
is  the  biggest  crowd  of  boys  to  return 
and  on  this  occasion  the  largest  gather- 
ing of  people  turned  out  to  welcome  them 
under  perfect   weather   conditions. 

That's    all,    folks!     Goodbye    now. 


Expirations  of  Subscriptions 


All  Branch  Presidents  are  asked  to  take  a  complete 
and  accurate  survey  of  all  who  are  subscribing  to  "Te 
Karere"  in  their  Branches.  This  survey  will  be  used  as  a 
basis  for  the  1942  "Te  Karere  In  Every  Home"  campaign 
(L.D.S.  homes).  Read  this  page  of  your  last  issue.  All 
"Te  Karere"  correspondents  and  agents  are  asked  to  co- 
operate wholeheartedly  with  Branch  Presidents  in  this 
campaign. 

Results  that  come  to  hand  will  be  published  as  they 
come.  Work  hard  folks;  we  need  your  help  as  we  hope 
you  WILL  and  DO  need  "Te  Karere." 

To  Our  Overseas  Subscribers. — "Te  Karere"  will  be 
sent  to  all  who  are  at  present  on  our  subscription  list,  and 
those  whose  expirations  come  due  will  be  notified,  and  they 
are  asked  to  forward  their  subscription  dues  to  Elder  Barrv 
T.  Wride  or  Elder  A.  J.  Burnett,  412  So,  La  Brea,  Ingle- 
wood,  California.     Thank  you. 

Instead  of  sending  out  individual  notices  of  expira- 
tions we  are  here  printing  the  names  of  subscribers  to  whom 
we  are  grateful  for  their  past  support  of  "Te  Karere,"  and 
trust  that  they  find  it  worthwhile  enough  to  renew  their 
subscriptions   as   soon   as   possible. 

We  are  asking  the  assistance  of  all  readers  to  bring 
to  the  notice  of  past  subscribers  the  lapse  of  their  sub- 
scriptions. From  time  to  time  out  of  a  long  expiration 
list  will  be  published  the  names  and  last-known  addresses  of 
former  subscribers  in  the  hope  that  some  kind  friend  will 
make  it  possible  for  "Te  Karere"  to  be  sent  to  them. 


JANUARY,   1942 


Apiti,    John     YV .       Horotainui 
Aroria,    Tatana       Waikato 
Akuhata.    Mci       Opapa,    H.li. 
Beezley,    Mrs.    Etasie      Waikato 
Briggs,   Mrs.   Allan      Hastings 
Bryan,   George   Riki      Hauraki 
Collin  i,    Thomas     Auck land 
Conner,    Irs      Hauraki 
Clark.    Allan    W.     Auckland 
Frampton,   Mrs.  c.   E.     Taranaki 

Sirs.    E£.     Onehunga 
1 1  ii.i.i.    M  r  .   Taui  ■ 
Hohaia,    Mrs.    Rum      Matangirau 
Hun.    William      Ngaruawahia 
Hud  on,   Mr      P      Opotiki 
Kama ii.   Am    I,.      Korongata 
Kapis  n'.i.     w  i  ni.i  1 1      \  i  i.i 

K  1 1 1 1 1 1       1 1 1 1    til 

Kiro     Mi       Rangl      Kaikohc 

Kohu,  Sam     Judea 

Kup.i.   Kgamotu      Ha 

Ma.    I,.    Polls    K        rah( 

Matenga,    L       Waipul 

Iftati  ona      i  aikeku      Whataw  hata 

Maun  .  ii.   0     R       Kaikohc 


Mikaere,    George     Judea 
Mikaere,   Ratoro      Waikato 
Onekawa,     Molly      Korongata 
Ormaby,    Mrs.    Charles      Ta 
Paki,    Rore     Huntly 
Paraha,    Walter      Kaikou 
r<  ntecoal .    Rose     Auckland 
Potae,   Hine   H.      Waipawa,    H.B, 
Raihania,   Tumanako     Opapa,    h  B 
K.irr-i.    Lucy     deceased 
Randell,    T.     Thamea 
Ritchie,    Aubrj      Auckland 
Shortland,     Harriel      Pipiwai 
Smith.    Rebecca     Nuhaka 
Solomon 

'I'ai  aw  hill.      KiO        M  mil  1\ 

Te    Una.    m.       Tupana      whata- 

M  ha  I  a 

I  | 

Tengaic  haka 

\s  adham      klai  k  land 

w  at<  .  ■      •  !  irua 

Wineera,     Mec      Porirua 


FOLLOWING   COUNSEL 


The  Latter-day  Saints  arc  a  greatly  blessed  people. 
The  restoration  of  the  Gospel,  the  organization  of  the 
Church  of  Jesus  Christ  again  bn  the  earth,  with  the  return 
of  the  Priesthood  and  the  resignation  «»t'  "prophets,  seers, 
and  revelators"  have  brought  within  our  reach  the  advice 
and  counsel  of  the  chosen  servants  of  the  Lord  who  act 
and  speak  through  inspiration. 

The  history  of  the  Church,  from  the  beginning,  is  replete 
with  evidence  of  the  fact  that  Saints  who  seek  and  follow 
the  counsel  of  those  in  authority  in  the  Church  are  blessed 
and  prosper. 

The  counsel  to  the  Saints  to-day  is  to  gel  out  of  debt; 
to  stay  out  of  debt;  to  set  their  houses  in  order:  to  improve 
and  beautify  their  homes  as  their  means  will  permit;  to 
provide  food  and  clothing  ahead  for  emergencies;  to  keep 
the  commandments  of  God  and  then  place  themselves  in  a 
position  to  claim  and  receive  the  blessings  which  are  promised 
to  the   faithful. 

These  are  times  that  try  the  souls  of  men.  Strong 
he-arts  quake  with  fear.  The  world  cries.  "Peace,  peace, 
hut  there  is  no  peace."  Present  conditions  are  hut  the  ful- 
filment of  prophecy.  Latter-day  Saints  have  been  taught 
to  expect  them  and  to  prepare  for  them. 

The  most  practical  and  most  effective  preparation  is  t<> 
follow  the  counsel  of  Church  Leaders.  Never  at  any  time  in 
the  history  of  the  Church  have  the  people  been  misled  Dp 
their  leaders.  Those  who  have  followed  counsel  have  been 
rewarded  and  hlesscd.  Those  who  have  not.  have  paid 
the  penalty  of  their  folly. 

These  are  times  when  we  all  need  the  best  counsel  we 
can  get.  To  Latter-day  Saints,  undoubtedly,  the  hest  coun- 
sel from  any  source  is  the  counsel  of  God's  chosen  servants. 
Every  Latter-day  Saint  should  gladly  seek  and  follow  it. 

— Improvement  lira. 


830,  Joseph  Smith,  under  divine  guidance,  organised 
Church  of  Jesu    Christ  of  Latter-das  Saints, 


_^_  ■igniiiiu.-i 


THE  ARTICLES  OF  FAITH 

OF  THE  CHURCH  OF  JESUS  CHRIST  OF 
LATTER-DAY  SAINTS 


1.  We  believe  in  God,  the  Eternal  Father,  and  in  His  Son, 
Jesus  Christ,  and  in  the  Holy  Ghost. 

2.  We  believe  that  men  will  be  punished  for  their  own  sins, 
and  not  for  Adam's  trangression. 

3.  We  believe  that  through  the  Atonement  of  Christ,  all 
mankind  may  be  saved,  by  obedience  to  the  laws  and  ordinances 
of  the  Gospel. 

4.  We  believe  that  the  first  principles  and  ordinances  of 
the  Gospel  are:  first,  Faith  in  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ;  second, 
Repentance;  third.  Baptism  by  immersion  for  the  remission  of 
sins;  fourth,  Laying-  on  of  hands  for  the  gift  of  the  Holy 
Ghost. 

5.  We  believe  that  a  man  must  be  called  of  God,  by  pro- 
phecy, and  by  the  laying  on  of  hands,  by  those  who  are  in 
authority  to  preach  the  Gospel  and  administer  in  the  ordinances 
thereof. 

6.  We  believe  in  the  same  organization  that  existed  in  the 
Primitive  Church,  viz.,  apostles,  prophets,  pastors,  teachers, 
evangelists,  etc. 

7.  We  believe  in  the  gift  of  tongues,  prophecy,  revelation, 
visions,  healing,  intrepretation  of  tongues,  etc. 

8.  We  believe  the  Bible  to  be  the  word  of  God  as  far  as  it 
is  translated  correctly;  we  also  believe  the  Book  of  Mormon 
to  be  the  word  of  God. 

9.  We  believe  all  that  God  has  revealed,  all  that  He  does 
now  reveal,  and  we  believe  that  He  will  yet  reveal  many  great 
and  important  things  pertaining  to  the  Kingdom  of  God. 

10.  We  believe  in  the  literal  gathering  of  Israel  and  in  the 
restoration  of  the  Ten  Tribes;  that  Zion  will  be  built  upon 
the  American  continent;  that  Christ  will  reign  personally  upon 
the  earth;  and,  that  the  earth  will  be  renewed  and  receive 
its  paradisiacal  glory. 

11.  We  claim  the  privilege  of  worshipping  Almighty  God 
according  to  the  dictates  of  our  own  conscience,  and  allow  all 
men  the  same  privilege,  let  them  worship  how,  where,  or  what 
they  may. 

12.  We  believe  in  being  subject  to  kings,  presidents,  rulers 
and  magistrates,  in  obeying,  honouring,  and  sustaining  the  law. 

13.  We  believe  in  being  honest,  true,  chaste,  benevolent, 
virtuous,  and  in  doing  good  to  all  men;  indeed,  we  may  say 
that  we  follow  the  admonition  of  Paul — We  believe  all  things, 
we  hope  all  things,  we  have  endured  many  things,  and  hope  to 
be  able  to  endure  all  things.  If  there  is  anything  virtuous, 
lovely,  or  of  good  report  or  praiseworthy,  we  seek  after  these 
things.  — Joseph  Smith. 


Te  Karero 


Established  in  1907  VA 


Wahanga  36  Aperira,   1942  Nama  4 

Matthew    Cowley  Tumuaki    Mihana 

Kelly  Harris  Etita 

Eru   T.    Kupa       Kaiwhakamaori 

Waimate   Anaru  Kaiwhakamaori 

"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  whakatapua  hei  hapai  ake  i  te  iwi  Maori  ki 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-nui.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  THE  BUSINESS  PRINTING 
WORKS  LTD.,  55  Albert  Street,  Auckland,  CI,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00    per   year;    $4.00   for   five   years;    $10.00    for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


Editorial — 

By    Kelly     Harris 

CONTENTS 

Page 
....    92 

Special    Features — 

From   Presidenl  Grant  t< 

lie    I  I  ui    Tail    Alio     

>  ( )ur  Soldiers   

94 

95 

98 

1  [c  Matenga   

.    104 

ami    119 

Church   Features — 

Mutual    Improvement    As 
Sunday   School 

101 

LOS 

.      120 

Cover    Motif — 

u      of  the  founding   ol 
ir hen  '"H   thou    hi       hou Id  • 
Ipatf  in   Hi     < .> 
Allowed   i"  u»oi    hip 

ii  honouring   the  One  bun 
t  be  Church   In   thii   diep 
with  th<      i  •  1 1 1 1 
nd  enjoy 

.     lunc 

.   .  ihI.  :i\  our 
the  prh  "i<  v<     "i  '••  Ini 

TE   KARERE 


Aperira,  L942 


Editorial  .  .  . 


Lei  not  our  people  consider  themselves  belonging  to 
the  "untouchable"  class.  Let  them  not  say  that  "it  cannot 
happen  to  us."  These  sentiments  are  but  echoes  of  van- 
quished and  ravaged  peoples  and  countries. 

As  members  of  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter- 
day  Saints,  knowing  that  we  live  in  the  "last  dispensation." 
and  knowing  that  the  Church  is  true,  knowing  that  this  is 
Christ's  Church  and  we  I  lis  people,  arc-  inclined  in  these 
troublous  times  to  let  things  go  and  leave  it  up  to  the  Lord 
to  save  us  because  we  claim  to  be  I  lis.  Drop  this  pas- 
sive listless  faith  in  Christ.  Drop  these  thoughts  of  com- 
placency.    Don't  flatter  ourselves. 

Christ's  statement  when  upon  the  earth,  "ye  must  he 
more  righteous  than  the  scribes  and  pharisees,"  is  applicable 
to  us  in  these  days. 

Idle  history  of  Christ's  teachings  and  its  effects  Upon 
the  world  is  tied  up  in  the  life  of  righteousness  against  that 
of  unrighteousness.  In  this  life  of  unrighteousness  and 
righteousness  are  depicted  in  this  period  of  misery,  hate 
and  war,  the  teachings  of  good  and  evil.  It  is  needli 
say  that  the  "evil"  is  within  our  boundaries.  What  little 
of  the  good  we  have  in  our  midst  is  not  potent  enough  to 
act  as  the  "leaven"  that  raiseth  the  whole  dough — the  one 
righteous  of  a  Sodom  or  Gommorrah  necessary  to  save  it 
according  to  the  petition  of  Abraham,  and  the  Will  of  Cod. 
There  is  a  need,  more  so  now,  because  we  see  the  concen- 
trated power  for  destruction  of  the  evils  of  liquor  and 
tobacco.  Read  your  own  newspapers;  see  in  your  own 
home  towns,  in  your  own  lives  and  those  about  you,  the 
evidences  of  the  damage  done  by  our  own  people,  in 
sabotaging  their  own  lives  as  well  as  others. 

As  Latter-day  Saint-,  we  know  better  and  should  be 
able  to  live  what  we  know.  That  is  the  faith  spoken  of  by 
Christ  as  that — "of  a  mustard  seed,  which  could  remove 
mountains" — knowing  what  to  do  and  doing  it. 

We  can  serve  our  country  and  our  God  by  living  the 
Gospel.  This  way  we  are  girding  about  ourselves  the 
armour  or  righteousness  -which  is  the  armour  of  God.  Who 
among  men  can  withstand  and  fight  successfully  against 
such  i  tower. 

To  remind  us  of  our  obligation  to  ourselves,  our  coun- 
try and  our  God,  a  few  excerpts  pertinent  to  our  salvation 
from  various  sources  both  secular  and  divine,  is  given  you. 


Aperira,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


93 


"Strong  drinks  are  not  for  the  belly,  but  for  the  wash- 
ing of  your  bodies.  And  again,  tobacco  is  not  for  the  body, 
neither  for  the  belly,  and  is  not  good  for  man,  but  is  an 
herb  for  bruises  and  all  sick  cattle,  to  be  used  with  judgment 
and    skill."— Doc.    &   Cov.   89:7-8. 

"...  All  men  everywhere  must  repent,  or  they  can  in 
no  wise  inherit  the  Kingdom  of  God,  for  no  unclean  thing 
can  dwell  there,  or  dwell  in  His  presence ;  for,  in  the  lan- 
guage of  Adam,  Man  of  Holiness  is  His  name.  .  .  .  " — !\  of 
G.P.,  Moses  6:57. 

"I  call  heaven  and  earth  to  record  this  day  against  you, 
that  I  have  set  before  vou  life  and  death.  Therefore  choose 
life."— Deut.  30:  19. 

"For  this  is  the  love  of  God,  that  we  keep  His  command- 
ments:  and  His  commandments  are  not  grievous — For  what- 
r  is  born  of  God  overcometh  the  world." — 1  John  5  :3-4. 

"...  We  shall  be  like  Him,  for  we  shall  see  Him  as 
I  [e  is.  And  every  man  that  hath  this  hope  in  Him  purifieth 
himself.  .  .  .  " — 1  John  3:2-3. 

wise   in   the  days   of   your   probation:   strip   your- 

3  of  all  uncleanness;  ask  not,  that  ye  may  consume  it  on 
your  lusts,  but  ask  with  a  firmness  unshaken,  that  ye  will 
yield  to  no  temptation,  but  that  ye  will  serve  the  true  and 
living  God." — Mormon  9:28. 

"Never  advance  the  pay  of  a  cigarette  smoker,  never 
advance  him,  never  again  will  he  be  as  much  of  a  man  as  he 
is  now;   id's   future  lies  behind  him." — Hubbard. 

"No  man  or  boy  who  smokes  cigarettes  can  work  in  my 
laboratory.  There  are  enough  degenerates  in  the  world  with- 
out manufacturing  more  by  means  of  cigarettes."  Thomas 
Edison. 

"A  thirteen-year-old  boy,  taken  to  a  hospital,  was  asked 
by  a  nurse:  'Who  taught  you  to  smoke?'  'My  brother.' 
'II-  should  be  in  gaol.'     'lb-  is.'    replied  the  lad."     Era. 

"Liquor  is  the  root  of  7?  per  cent,  of  broken  bones  in 
America  to-day."     Judge  Westropp. 

"Drink  has  been  more  destructive  than  war.  pestilence 
and   famine  combined."     <  iladstone. 

ers  arc  safer  when  roads  are  dry;  roads  are 
when  drivers  are  dry."     Safer.)  Journal. 

"Liquor  and  tobacco  are  twin  curses,  the)  injure  health, 
home  pin-  c.  and    freedom."     Warning    \ 

"Are  men  nutt)  because  the)  dunk.  <>i  do  the)  drink  be- 
<  .in  <  they're  nutt) ."     I  tokmw  u. 

Remember,  we  serve  our  countr)  best  when  \\<-  serve 
ourselves  as  <  rod's  children, 

Kl  l  I  \    HARRIS. 


94 


TE  KARERE 


Aperira,  1942 


Pres.   Heber  J.  Grant 


FROM  PRESIDENT  GRANT 
TO  OUR  SOLDIERS 

(An  excerpt  from  the  Closing  Conference 

Address  of   President    Heber  J.    Grant, 

October,  1941.) 

I  understand  there  arc  a  lot  of  our 
boys  here  to-day  that  arc  in  the  ami}'. 
I  hope  and  pray  and  plead  that  every  boy 
will  fee]  in  his  heart:  "I  want  to  know 
what  is  right  and  clean  and  pure  and 
holy,  and  I  want  God  to  help  me."  I 
want  every  Latter-day  Saint  soldier  to 
get  down  on  his  knees  and  pray  God  to 
help  him  to  lead  a  clean  life,  and  to  preach 
the  Gospel  while  he  is  in  the  army.  The  army,  as  a  rule,  is  a 
demoralizer  of  the  morals  of  men.  to  a  very  great  extent.  They 
think:  "Oh,  well;  we  are  going  to  he  killed  anyway — let's  have  a 
h — 1  of  a  good  time."  Do  not  wish  for  any  such  good  time;  there 
is  no  good  time  anywhere  for  any  human  being  except  by  doing 
good  and  doing  right.  There  is  a  peace,  a.  joy,  and  a  happiness  that 
comes  from  doing  right  that  nothing  else  can  compare  with.  There 
are  no  people  in  all  the  world  that  are  as  happy  and  as  contented 
as  the  true  Latter-day  Saints,  and  there  are  no  people  that  are  much 
more  miserable  than  those  that  finally  apostatize.  I  have  met  them 
and  I  have  not  forgotten  when  one  man  laughed  at  me  because  I 
believed  firmly  in  the  Church,  and  its  principles  and  doctrines.  He 
said  that  anyone  who  believed  in  such  things  lacked  intelligence. 
This  man  was  an  apostate.  I  was  able  even  as  a  boy  to  say  to  him  : 
"The  life  of  the  apostate  is  a  greater  testimony  to  me  than  anything 
else  of  the  divinity  of  the  work  in  which  I  am  engaged,  except  the 
teaching  of  my  beloved  mother.  I  have  seen  good  men  change  and 
become  had  men  and  then  apostatize,  hut  I  have  never  known  a  good 
man,  a  tithe-payer,  an  observer  of  the  Word  of  Wisdom,  to  ever 
apostatize. 

Xow,  I  pray  the  Lord  to  hless  our  hoys.  I  give  them  my 
blessing,  and  I  have  the  right  to  bless  them,  and  I  promise  them  that 
if  they  will  he  prayerful,  God  will  give  them  joy  even  in  the  army, 
if  they  will  live  sweet  and  clean  lives.  I  do  hope  and  pray  that 
they  will  he  like  the  Lamanites  who  were  converted  and  who  when 
they  went  into  war  none  of  them  lost  their  lives.  A  marvellous  story 
that  you  will  find  in  the  Book  of  Mormon. 

■  I  want  to  say  that  I  love  the  Latter-day  Saints,  and  I  love  the 
word  of  God ;  and  I  want  you  to  know  that  I  thank  God  that  the 
Gospel  is  one  of  forgiveness. 


Aperira,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


95 


HE  HUI  TAU  ANO 

TE  WHAKATAPUNGA  O  TE  KARETI 
HE  AHA  TE  MAHI  ALA  TATOU 

Na  Kelly  Harris 

I  roto  i  enei  wa  o  nga  ra  whakamutunga,  e  rongo  nei  tatou,  e 
kite  nei  hoki  i  nga  tohu  i  poropititia  e  nga  poropiti  o  mua,  ka  tino 
mohio  tatou,  ae  ra  he  Reo  tohu  no  Runga  e  whakahaere  ana  i  te 
Rongopai  pono  i  runga  i  te  mata  o  te  whenua.  Kahore  he  Hui  Tau 
mo  tatou  o  tend  Mihana  i  tenei  tau.  He  aha  te  take?  Na  te  "pono- 
nga"  a  te  Atua  Kaha  Rawa  i  inoi  ki  tona  Matua  i  te  Rangi  mo  tenei 
take  i  roto  i  enei  wa,  kia  whakaaturia  mai  ki  aia  Tona  hiahia  mo  te 
tika  kia  tu  ranei  he  Hui  Tau,  kahore  ranei.  Kua  mohio  tatou  inai- 
anei  ki  te  korero  a  te  Timuaki  o  te  Mihana.  "I  runga  i  nga  ahua- 
tanga  o  te  pakanga  nei,  e  tika  ana  ko  tatou  te  Hunga  Tapu  te  I  lahi 

tuatahi  ki  te  tautoko  i  te  Kawanatanga  i     

runga  i  ana  whakahaere  mo  te  ora  o  te 
iwi  me  te  whenua,  noreira,  kahore  he  Hui 
Tau  mo  tatou,  i  te  mea  e  kore  e  taea  e 
tatou  te  whakahuihui  te  tini  tangata  me 
nga  raruraru  mo  nga  kai  me  era  atu  raru- 
raru  e  whai  ana  i  te   Hui." 

E  te  iwi,  e  rua  nga  Hui  Tau  i  nai- 
anci  i  roto  i  te  tckau  tau  kua  pahemo, 
kahore  tatou  i  whakahonore.  Te  tuatahi 
ko  te  Mui  Tau  i  tohungia  kia  tu  ki  \u- 
haka  i  te  1937.  Xa  te  mate  (infantile 
paralysis)  tera  i  whakakore  i  raro  i  te 
mana  o  te  Kawanatanga.    Kaati  ko  te  rua 

tenei. 

I  runga  i  tenei  ahuatanga,  i  whakaaro 
ahau  tera  pea  e  whiwhi  tatou  ki  etahi 
whakaaro  pai  a  wairua  ina  hoki  o  tatou 
mahara  ki  etahi  o  nga   Mui    Tau  o  mua. 

Tcia.  pea  ko  te  I  Im  Tan  i  tu  ki  Puke  Tapu  i  te  wa  i  konei  te  Vpotoro, 
Elder  David  (  ».  McKa)  ?  E  hoa  ma,  kaore  he  korero  i  tenei  wa  mo 
tana  llui.  I\a  hoki  ke  atu  tatou  ki  te  llui  Tan  i  tu  ki  Korongata, 
Hastings,  i  te  tau  1913J  i  te  wa  i  whakatapua  e  Timuaki  Romney 
te  ECareti.  Te  take  i  whiriwhiria  tenei  Hui  hei  man  maharatanga  ma 
tatou,  kia  uru  mai  ano  tetahi  wairua  hihiko,  rangatira,  mahaki,  toa 
whakawhetai  hoki  ki  to  tatou  Matua  i  te  Rangi  mona  i  manaaki  ia 

tatOU  ki  tana   kura   inc  ana  hua.       E  koutOU  e  nga  in.itua  0  nga  tama- 

ii ki  tuatahi  i  haere  ki  tc  M.  \  <     na  koutou  tenei  Hui  Tan  1" 
koutou  na  nga  tamariki  katoa  i  haere  ki  tana  Kura  i   awhina  tenei. 
llui  Tau.     He   llui  Tau     a  wairua.     He   llui    fau  kia  titiro  tatou 


SERVICE    PICTURES   I 

It  is  the  desire  of  Te  \ 
Karere  to  be  a  means  of  I 
expressing  the  apprecia-  ; 
tion  and  honour  due  to  j 
our  soldiers,  sailors  and  : 
airmen  who  may  be  - 
ing  their  country  and  ! 
people  in  the  battle  of  j 
liberty   and   freedom. 

With  this  in  mind,  we 
are  asking  that  relatives 
and  friends  who  have  pic- 
tures of  their  "Service" 
boys,  sons,  daughters, 
brothers,  fathers  and  ; 
sweethearts,    to    send    in  j 

their      names       |  S<r\  ice  I 

and     good     pictures     for 
publication  in   Te  K  a 


TE  KARERE 


Aperira,  1942 


katoa  ki  nga  ra  kua  pahemo.  Kia  titiro  ki  o  tatou  mahi.  He  aha 
nga  kiko  0  ana  mahi.  He  alia  aku  painga  ki  aku  niatua.  lie  aha 
aku  painga  ki  aku  tamariki.  He  aha  taku  painga  hei  arohatanga  mo 
te  Matua  ki  ahau.  Ko  enei  katoa  nga  whakaaro,  ara  etahi,  ka  pupu 
ake  i  roto  i  te  ngakau,  pea.  Ko  te  hiahia  ra,  kia  pera.  E  hara  i  te 
mea  kia  tahuri  whakamuri  tatou.  kahore,  engari,  kia  kite  ano  tatou 
ia  tatou,  pera  ano  i  tetahi  atu  e  kite-  ana  ia  tatou.  Mehemea  e  kino 
ana  to  tatou  alma  i  roto  i  nga  tan  e  rua-tekau-ma-iwa  kua  mutu  ake 
nei,  ko  te  tino  putake  o  tenei  llui  Tan  1942,  kia  pai  tatou  inaianei 
a  haere  ake  nei  nga  ra.  Kei  ia  koutou,  kei  ia  tatou  ano  te  tikanga, 
ina  hiahia  tatou  katou  kia  kitea  mai,  kia  mohiotia  i  roto  i  te  mahi  i 
te  whakapono,  i  te  pakanga  i  te  aha  rami  he  tangata  pai,  kino  ranei, 
ko  tatou  ano  tera.  kahore  he  tangata  ke. 


Te    ahua    o    nga    mahi    i    te    kareti,    i    mua. 

Ko  enei  nga  \va  e  tino  mohiotia.  ko  wai.  ko  wai  nga  tino  akonga 
o  te  Karaiti.  Ko  enei  nga  wa  ma  te  whakapono  me  te  mahi  e  whaka- 
ora  te  tangata.  Ko  enei  nga  wa  e  rite  tuturu  ai  ta  te  karaipiture  e 
kii  ra — "koia  e  u  ana  ki  te  mutunga,  koia  ka  whiwhi  ki  t<  rangatira- 
tanga  o  te  Atua."  No  reira  e  te  iwi,  e  nga  kai  titiro  o  nga  wharangi 
o  Te  Karere,  ko  tatou  ano  ko  te  tangata  enei.  Kia  manawanui,  kia 
kaha,  kei  ia  tatou  te  nuinga  o  te  mahi  mo  tatou  ake,  kahore  i  tetahi 
atu. 

Ko  te  Hui  Tau  i  tu  ki  Korongata  ia  Aperira  te  4  ki  te  0  o  te  tau 
1913  i  powhiritia  e  Timuaki  Hugh  Geddes  o  te  Pariha  o  Haki  Pei 
i  te  mea  i  whakaritea  kia  whakatapua  te  Kareti  i  tana  llui.  He  tino 
Hui  Tau  nui  tenei.  Kei  te  whai  ake  nei  nga  korero  a  te  "Hawke's 
Bay  Herald,"  April  7.  1913,  mo  tana  whakatapunga,  ara,  he  whaka- 
maoritanga  o  nga  korero  pakeha  i  puta  i  taua  pepa. 


Aperira,  1942  TE  KARERE  97 

TE   KARETI   MOROMOXA   KI    BRIDGE   PA 

"Ko  te  karakia  whakatapunga." 

I  tu  i  nanahi  te  huihuinga  e  whakanui  ana  i  tetahi  mea  e  tino 
nui  ana  ki  te  Mihana  o  Xiu  Tireni  o  te  Hahi  o  Ihu  Karaiti  o  te 
Hunga  Tapu  o  nga  Ra  o  Muri  Xei,  ki  Korongata,  e  tata  ana  ki  Here- 
taunga,  ina  i  whakatapua  ai  te  Agricultural  College  kua  oti  nei  te 
hanga  hou.  Ahakoa  te  makariri,  te  kino  hoki  o  te  rangi,  i  huihui 
mai  etahi  mano  tangata,  nga  pakeha  me  nga  Maori. 

Ko  O.  D.  Romney,  Timuaki  o  te  Mihana  te  kaiwhakahaere  o  te 
karakia  whakatapunga  i  whaJcamine  ki  waho.  I  korero  ia  i  roto  i  te 
reo  Maori  no  muri  mai  i  karangatia  e  ia  a  Prof.  Johnson,  kai-whaka- 
haere  o  te  Kareti  mana  etahi  kupu  mo  runga  i  nga  ahua  o  tend 
Kareti  e  whakatuwheratia  ana  nei  e  ratou. 

I  ki  mai  ia  i  whakaturia  te  Hahi  i  runga  i  te  whenua  mo  nga 
tau  e  wa.ru  tekau  ma  toru.  I  whakaarahia  hoki  e  ratou  etahi  atu 
Kareti  ki  roto  ki  nga  Teiti  Huihui  o  Amerika,  a  kei  Mehiko,  Kanata 
me  etahi  atu  wahi  etahi  atu  Kareti.  engari  ko  tenei  te  tuatahi  kei  Xiu 
Tireni.  Ko  nga  Kareti  inaianei,  e  toru  tekau  ma  warn.  Ko  enei 
Kareti  i  whakamonitia  e  te  Hahi,  a  hoatu  noa  ana  ia  tau  ia  tau  e 
75,000  tara  (dollars)  mo  te  awhinatanga  ki  enei  kura.  I  a  ia  i  mahi 
roa  i  te  mahi  kauwhau  i  rongo  ia  he  nui  ke  atu  nga  ripoata  mo 
runga  i  te  moe  punarua.  Ko  tenei  whakaaro,  i  ki  atu  ia.  e  he  ana. 
H  kore  e  taea  e  te  Hahi  te  tuku  te  moe  punarua.  Ko  t<  take  nui, 
ko  te  akoranga  o  nga  tangata.  me  te  matauranga  haere  o  te  tangata- 
tanga.  I  pataitia  te  patai  ki  aia,  ko  te  Kareti  ma  nga  tamariki  Maori 
riahi  anake,  kahore  ranei?  Ko  tona  kupu  whakahoki,  kahore. 
Maori  kei  waho  i  te  Hahi,  e  rite  ana  ta  ratou  powhiri  ki 
nga  mema  o  te  Mahi,  a  i  tenei  wahi  hoki  i  mea  ra  ia,  ko  etahi 
tamariki  tuatahi  i  urn  mai  ki  te  kura,  ko  nga  mema  no  waho.  I 
pataitia  hoki  te  patai  ki  aia,  ko  te  Kareti  ma  nga  pakeha,  kahore  ranei? 
Ko  tona  whakautu  hoki  ki  unci  patai,  kahore.  Ko  te  whak; 
te  Hahi  kei  nga  pakeha  nga  tikanga  pai  atu  mo  te  akor 
Maori.  Ko  te  ahua  o  te  Kareti  he  lake  aroha  noa  me  te  atawhai 
tetahi  ki  tetahi.  Ka  utua  e  ia  Lamaiti  e  Ia  tamaiti  kotahi  tekau  ma 
rua  pauma  ia  tau  mo  La  ratou  kai  me  ta  ratou  matauranga.  E  kaha  ana 
•  powhiri  mai  i  nga  tangata  katoa  e  noho  mai  nei  me  te  tono 
atu  ma  ia  tangata  ma  ia  Langata  kahore  ano  kia  matakitaki  i  roto  i 
nga  whare  o  te  Kura.  kia  haere  ki  te  titiro  haere. 

I  korero  hoki  a  Wi  Takana  ki  nga  Maori. 


M.l.A.   NOTICE.-  Th«    Mission   M.l.A.  Office  baa 
Cold    and    Crccn    li.ill    contribution    from    th<-    Nubaka    Branca    M.l.A. 

which     is    the    larcest     amount     v<t     r«-c«-i  vt-d. 

+  +  * 

ACKNOWLEDGMENT   »(    racaipl    ol    Primary   contribution!   from 
HorotauBfa,    WbangaroJ    diati  Bay   district   and  GI.il' 

Many,    many     thanks. 


TE  KARERE  Aperira,  1942 

AN   ANNIVERSARY 
By  i  I.  Dudley  Amadio 

The  latter  part  of  March  and  the  early  days  of  April  mark  the 
106th  anniversary  of  the  end  of  an  epoch  and  beginning  of  a  dispensa- 
tion. Undoubtedly  the  great  events  which  occurred  during  those  two 
weeks  of  the  year  1836  have  a  significance  for  the  people  of  this 
country,  and  the  Latter-day  Saints  in  particular,  that  cannot  be  too 
greatly   emphasised.      Throughout  eternity  will  their  influence  be  felt. 

The  story  can  only  be  told  by  giving  a  short  history  of  pertinent 
events.  During  the  first  five  days  of  January,  1831,  revelations  were 
given  to  the  Prophet  Joseph  Smith  from  the  Lord  (D.  &  C.  38:32; 
39:15)  commanding  the  Saints  to  gather  to  Ohio,  where  they  were 
to  be  empowered  from  on  high,  and  to  receive  a  blessing,  such  as  was 
not  known  among  the  children  of  men.  In  December  of  the  following 
year,  when  the  Saints  had  largely  complied  with  the  instruction  to 
gather  to  Ohio  a  further  command  was  received  from  the  Lord 
(88:  119)  to  build  a  temple  at  Kirtland,  Ohio.  A  start  on  this  project 
was  not  commenced  during  the  next  six  months,  so 
the  Lord  reproved  the  Saints  for  their  tardiness 
saying  that  He  "designed  to  endow  His  chosen  ones 
with  power"  in  the  Temple.  The  Saints  at  this 
time  were  few  and  poor,  yet  they  laboured  for  the 
best  part  of  three  years  to  erect  this  House  of  the 
Lord,  costing  about  £13,000  in  cash  and  untold  lab- 
our besides.  The  story  of  their  suffering  and  self- 
sacrifice  would  fill  many  volumes. 

At  length  the  Temple  was  completed  and  on 
March  27,  1836,  the  Prophet  Joseph  dedicated  the 
building  with  a  beautiful  prayer  recorded  in  the 
Doctrine  and  Covenants  (109).  It  was  indeed  a 
memorable  day  for  the  Saints  assembled,  for  they 
were  filled  with  a  feeling  of  joy  and  gratitude,  not 
to  mention  expectation,  in  which  they  were  not 
disappointed.  A  great  many  heavenly  manifesta- 
tions were  given  to  them  and  their  leaders;  some 
saw  angels,  some  tongues  of  fire,  others  prophesied,  A.  D.  Amadio 
some    spoke    in    tongues,    others    interpreted;    even 

the  people  of  the  neighbourhood  heard  a  noise  like  the  rushing  of  wind 
from  within  the  building  and  saw  a  bright  light  like  a  pillar  of  fire  rest 
on  the  Temple  without.  So  that  all  might  participate  in  the  ceremony 
of  dedication,  the  service  was  repeated  many  times  on  the  following 
days.  The  manifestations  of  the  first  day  of  dedication  were  continued 
until  all  realised  that  they  had  indeed  received  a  blessing  such  as  man 
had  not  known  for  2,000  years.  The  prophet  described  it  as  a  veritable 
pentecost. 

Looking  back  on  these  days  from  a  historical  viewpoint,  the  dedi- 
cation of  the  Kirtland  Temple  seems  to  mark  the  end  of  the  initiatory 
stage  of  Church  establishment.  The  Lord  had  restored  His  gospel, 
given  the  Saints  His  priesthood  and  had  guided  the  Prophet  until  he 
had  established  a  wonderful  organization.  Joseph  Smith  had  indeed 
proved  himself  a  prophet  of  the  Living  God.  To  climax,  as  it  were, 
this  phase,  a  temple,  which  was  unlike  any  we  have  now,  was  built 
to  the  design  of  the  Lord  for  one  purpose,  and  one  only,  and  that,  to 
endow  his  chosen  one's  with  power.  The  receiving  of  this  power  seems 
to  almost  inaugurate  a  new  dispensation,  so  vast  and  far-reaching  were 
to  be  its  effects. 


Aperira,  1942  TE  KARERE  99 

After  Sacrament  meeting  on  the  afternoon  of  April  3,  1836,  in  the 
Temple,  Joseph  Smith  and  Oliver  Cowdrey  retired  behind  the  pulpit 
(the  curtain  being  lowered  to  give  them  privacy)  to  engage  in  silent 
prayer.  They  record  (Sec.  110)  that  the  veil  was  taken  from  their 
eyes,  and  they  saw  the  Saviour  standing  on  the  breastwork  of  the  pul- 
pit. He  told  them  that  their  sins  were  forgiven  them :  that  He  had 
accepted  the  temple  and  that  tens  of  thousands  should  rejoice  because 
of  the  blessing  Joseph  and  Oliver  should  receive  in  that  house. 

This  glorious  vision  soon  closed,  but  the  heavens  were  again  opened 
and  Moses  appeared  and  restored  to  them  the  keys  of  Gathering  of 
Israel.  After  this  Elias  appeared  and  committed  to  them  the  dispen- 
sation of  the  Gospel  of  Abraham.  Elijah  the  prophet  followed  and 
conferred  upon  them  the  keys  of  the  turning  of  the  hearts  of  the  chil- 
dren to  the  fathers.  No  comment  of  mine  could  effectively  describe 
the  wonder  of  these  visions,  their  effect  on  Joseph  and  Oliver  or  the 
joy  that  was  theirs  in  knowing  that  the  Lord  had  accepted  their  efforts 
and  had  given  them  further  keys  and  powers.  I  do  not  know  of  anyone 
ever  having  such  remarkable  visions  as  these  two  men. 

Within  a  year  of  these  events,  the  apostles  of  the  Lord  had  estab- 
lished the  first  foreign  mission  of  the  Church  in  England,  and  the  work 
of  gathering  Israel  from  among  the  nations  had  started.  This  was  a 
new  departure  in  Church  progress,  in  this  or  any  other  Church,  and 
the  saying  "that  My  sheep  heareth  my  voice  and  will  follow  m< 
emphasised  by  the  thousands  that  were  baptized  in  England  and  went 
over  to  America. 

Other  foreign  missions  were  organized  and  the  gospel  of  the 
Latter-day  Saints  has  rolled  forth  around  the  earth  to  the  continents 
and  isles  of  the  sea,  until  there  is  hardly  a  civilized  land  that  has  nut 
heard   it. 

In  the  Pacific  Islands  and  New  Zealand,  a  branch  of  the  House 
of  Joseph  whose  seed  should  "spread  over  the  wall"  have  been  found 
and  they  have  accepted  the  Word  of  the  Lord  gladly.  The  remnants 
of  the  House  of  Israel  have  been  diligently  sought  out  from  among 
the  nations,  and  the  great  gathering  to  which  the  prophets 
Testament  looked   forward,    is   being   brought   about. 

The  mission  of  Elijah  mentioned  in  Malaehi  4  :  6-6  had  lung  been 
and  still  is  a  subject  of  debate  among  Christian  congregations.  The 
Lord,  however,  soon  revealed  to  tin  Prophet  Joseph  Smith  the  answer 
to  this  long-discussed  question. 

The  principle  or  doctrine  of  salvation  for  'he  dead,  as  well  as  the 
living,  was  restored  by  Elijah,  and  the  hearts  of  the  children  of  to-day 
;  nod  toward  their  fathers  down  tl  t,  when  tin 

in    it-    purity    Was    I101    to    lie    found    upon   the    earth. 

The  Saints  were  instructed  to  search  out  their  genealogies,  ami 
then  to  he  baptised  for  their  dead,  so  thai  the  dead  "might  live  .. 

fiod  in  the  spiril  but  be  judged  according  to  men  in  the  flesh." 
Eight  temples  of  a  different  design  to  that  at  Kirtland  and  for  the 
purpose  of   performing    baptisms  and   endowments   for  the  livii 

dead    have    hern    built.      The    Saints    have    performed    this   work   and    the 
work    of    sealing    themselves    to     their    dead,     until     to-day     more    than 

15,000,000  ordinances  have  been  performed  in  tin-  temples.     Th< 
intends  that  all  those  win.  have  died,  not  knowing  the  fullness  of  His 

Gospel    in    this    life,    shall    hear    it     in    the    Bpirit     world.       By    this    means 
and    by    our    vicaiiou      bapti    I  '    mankind    will    ! 

opportunity  of  obeying  I  h<    I  people 

will     tand  a     one  muted   family,  sealed  one  to  the  other  ami  to  life 
e\  erla  I  me. 

Verily  tin    i    an  annivei  ary  to  remember. 


LOO  TE  KARERE  Aperira,  1942 

Mutual  Improvement  Association 

M.I.A.  THEME  1942 

Doctrine  &  Covenants  82:10:  "I,  the  Lord,  am 
bound  when  ye  do  what  I  say;  but  when  you  do  not  what  I 
say,  ye  have  no  Promise." 

With  the  last  issue  of  Te  Karere,  a  supplement  for  the  benefit 
of  the  local  M.I.A.  members  was  published  containing  the  beginning 

of  the  "1{)12  Mutual  Lessons."  Because  of  the  financial  burden 
entailed  in  the  publication  of  those  lessons,  the  Mutual  Presidencies 
have  decided  to  forego  the  printing  of  those  lessons.  However,  the 
lessons  for  tin-  "Boy  Scouts  and  Bee-Hive  Girls"  will  be  contained 
in  this  i>sue  along  with  the  "Firsl  Aid"  lesson  that  is  to  be  used 
by  all  classes  every  SECOND  TUESDAY  of  each  month.  The 
Adult  Class  is  to  continue  on  with  the  "Way  to  Perfection"  as  their 
text,  and  the  other  classes  are  to  use  the  Manuals  l'UO-41  which 
most  Mutuals  have. 

All  Branches  are  asked  to  send  in  their  "Knitting"  that  was  to 
have  been  displayed  at  Hui  Tau  and  then  collected  for  despatch  oxer- 
seas  for  the  Maori  Batallion.  Kindly  send  these  gifts  and  articles 
to  Una  Thompson,  Box  61,  Dannevirke,  as  soon  as  possible,  and  not 
later  than   the   end   of   April,    1942. 

Because  of  the  lateness  and  irregularity  of  mails  arriving  from 
America  the  M.I.A.  Theme  for  the  year  1940-41  was  printed  in  the 

ssue  of  Te  Karere  for  observance  throughout  the  Mission,  how- 
ever, since  that  time,  information  has  come  to  hand  advising  of  the 
new   M.I.A.   Theme    for    1942. 


//   is   regrettable   thai    death    is  a   parting   that    brings  ) 
with  it  a  sorrow  and  pain  so  deep  that  its  mark  is  indelibly 
left. 

The  death  has  occurred  of  Mrs.  Mary  Ann  Duckworth,  \ 

beloved    mother    of    Sybil    (Auckland    M.I.A.    member    for  | 

many  years,  participating  in  M.I.A.  activities  at  Hui  Taus)  J 

and  Alan   (now  overseas),  at  Auckland,  March   16th,  1942.  J 

President   Cowley  was  in   charge  of  funeral  services.    Mrs.  J 

Duckworth's  death  leaves  Sybil  and  her  father,  Mr.  Richard  J 
Bealey,  and  Alan  motherless. 


"Te  Karere"  expresses  sincere  condolences  and  sym- 
pathy, with  a  prayer  for  an  understanding  that  death  is  but 
a    parting. 


Aperira,  1942  TE  KARERE  101 

SUNDAY   SCHOOL 

Theme — 

"OUR  HOMES   AND   CHAPELS   SHALL   BE  BEAUTIFUL" 
"For  Zion  must  increase  in  beauty  and  in  Holiness ;  her  borders 
must  be  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened;  yea  verily  I  say 
unto  you.    Zion  must  arise  and  put  on  her  beautiful  garments." 

— Doctrine  &  Covenants  82 :  14. 


COXCERT  RECITATION 
(Jala  fiat  is  5:  25-26. 

"If  we  live  in  the  Spirit,  let  us  also  walk  in  the  Spirit.  Let  us 
not  be  desirous  of  vainglory,  provoking  one  another,  envying  one 
another." 

KORERO  A  NGAKAU 
Karatia  5:  25-26. 

"Ki  te  mea  e  ora  ana  tatou  i  roto  i  te  Wairua,  kia  haere  ano 
tatou  i  roto  i  te  Wairua.  Kei  whaia  e  tatou  te  kororia  huakore,  te 
whakapataritari  tetahi  ki  tetahi,  te  hae  tetahi  ki  tetahi." 

SACRAMENT  GEM 
"Forget  not,  brother,  thou  hast  sinned. 

And  sinful  yet  may'st  be; 
Deal  gently  with  the  erring  heart, 

As  God  has  dealt  with  thee." 

LESSONS 
KINDERGARTEN   (4  to  5  years).     Thought:  "Obedience  to  Laws  of 

Cod." 
"Fasting."    (Matthew  4  and  6) 

"Tithes    and    Offerings."     I  Malaehi    3;    -Mark    1 L' ;    Luke    21) 
"Word   of   Wisdom."    (Doc.    and   COV.    89.     Dan.    ll 

PRIMARY   (6  to  9  years). 

"A    Friend    in    Need."      (1    Samuel     L8    to    20).     Thought:    "Blea 

follow  true   friendship." 
"A  Noble  Foe."    (l   Samuel  24-26)       Thought:  "Blessed  are  the 

merciful." 
"A  Wayward  Son."    ri  Samuel    L5  L8)      Thought:   "A   sinful  life 

is   not   a   safe   one." 

CHURCH   HISTORY   I  10  and  11  yi 

"Alma,  The  Younger."   (Alma    1-14)     Thought:  "Change  in  char- 
acter  wrought    by   conversion."     Pacts:   Alma'-   changed   life 
preaches  to   multil  thousands  to  a  knowledge 

of  God. 

"Alma     and     Amulrk."     i.Yliiia     11)        Thought!     "God     I" 

anl  .'"     Fa  I  \  ma  and  Amulek 

mliali     believert    burned  Alma    and    Amulek    Imprisoned 

treated  cruellj      pri  lima  and  Amulek  delivered. 
\  A  B  DEPARTMENT! 

"The  Story  <>i  Joseph."  (Gen,  B7)  What  to  look  for:  Why  Jo 

brothers  hated  him.    Three  n  errand  to  Dothan.    The 

plan     to   get    rid    of   Jo  eph.       Problems!     w  •  ph   called   a 

dreamer?    Which  of  •'<•  eph1  end? 


102  TE  KARERE  Aperira,  1942 

"A  Leader  in  Slavery."  (Gen.  •">'(.»)  What  to  look  for:  Potiphar's 
idea  <>r  belief  about  Joseph.  Joseph's  answer  to  Potiphar's  wife.  False 
accusations    or    statements    against    Joseph.       Joseph's    treatment    by 

Potiphar.  Problems:  Why  was  Potiphar's  house  Messed?  What  was 
Joseph's  position  in  Potiphar's  house?  What  reasons  can  you  give 
tor  God's  being  with  Joseph?  What  important  position  did  Potiphar 
hold?      Which   of  the  ten   commandments   did   Potiphar's  wife  violate? 

"A  Leader  in  Prison."  ((Jen.  40  and  41)  What  to  look  for:  The 
hut  lei's  dream  and  the  interpretation.  The  baker's  dream  and  the 
interpretation.  Pharaoh's  dream  and  the  interpretation.  The  dream 
interpreted  by  Joseph  fulfifilled.  Problems:  What  were  the  duties  of 
the  butler  and  the  baker  in  the  King's  house?  How  was  it  that 
Joseph  came  before  Pharaoh?  What  did  Pharaoh  say  to  Joseph  when 
he  was  brought  before  him?  What  was  Joseph's  answer? 
C  DEPARTMENT    (20  to  25  years). 

"Teaching  by  Parables  on  the  Sea  of  Galilee  near  Capernum." 
(Matt.  13.  Mark  4)  Problems:  What  is  the  coming  fate  of  the  wicked 
and  the  reward  of  the  righteous  as  illustrated  by  these  parables? 
Illustrate  the  wisdom  of  parting  with  worldly  things  if  necessary  to 
make  sure  of  a  place  in  the  Kingdom  of  Heaven?  Discuss  the  signifi- 
cance of  the  parable  of  the  mustard  seed  and  of  the  Kingdom  of  Heaven 
in  the  light  of  this  thought — "The  lesson  is  between  the  minute  begin- 
ning and  the  great  ending." 

"Crossing  the  Sea  of  Galilee  and  on  its  South-east  Coast." 
(Matthew  8;  Mark  4:  35-41  and  5;  Luke  8)  Problems:  What  evidence 
have  we  in  this  lesson  that  faith  is  a  principle  of  power?  Show  how 
these  and  similar  events  should  strengthen  our  faith  in  the  protecting 
power  of  our  Saviour.  What  evidence  have  we  that  the  spirit^  banished 
with  Satan  crave  a  body?  What  have  you  learned  from  this  lesson 
that  shows  that  the  disciples  had  a  very  vague  idea  as  to  who  Christ 
is  and  the  nature  and  strength  of  His  position? 

"Again  in  Capernum  and  Nazareth."  (Continue  on  with  Mark  5; 
Luke  8  and  Matthew  9)  Problems:  What  evidence  does  this  lesson  give 
that  Christ  was  gradually  gaining  popularity?  Why  was  Jesus  unable 
to  do  many  miracles  in  Nazareth?  (Read  Ether  12:  6,  12,  18)  How  do 
you  account  for  the  reception  given  Jesus  in  Nazareth?  Show  that 
the  blessings  of  God  are  predicated  on  faith? 
GOSPEL   DOCTRINE    (Others  not  already  assigned). 

"The  Destruction  of  Jerusalem"  B.C.  599-588.  (22  Kings  24 
and  25;  2  Chronicles  36:  11-21;  Jeremiah  21:  1-8,  28,  34,  37,  39,  52.) 
Helps — Hananiah's  false  prophecy — Zedekiah's  inquiry  of  the  Lord — 
The  Lord  Himself  to  fight  against  Judah — Zedekiah's  fate  foretold — 
Jeremiah  imprisoned — the  king's  interview  with  the  prophet — Jeremiah 
cast  into  a  dungeon — Jerusalem  destroyed — Judah  carried  into  captivity. 
MAORI  CLASS. 

RATAPU   TUATAHI 

TE  AHUA  O  TE  WHAKAMARIETANGA.  I  te  mea  ko  te  whiu 
mo  te  hara  i  pa  mai  ki  te  ao  na  roto  mai  i  te  mahi  a  te  tangata  kotahi, 
he  tino  mea  he  rawa  kia  tukua  te  katoa  kia  mau  tonu  te  mamaetanga 
mutunga  kore  ka  homai  ano  he  whakaoranga.  Noreira  te  whakaaringa 
mai  o  te  whakahere  o  Ihu  Karaiti,  he  mea  whakarite  hei  takawaenga 
mo  te  ture  i  takahia,  kua  tino  ea  ta  te  whakawakanga  i  kite  mai  ai  kua- 
watea  hoki  te  aroha  noa  ki  te  whakahere  i  ona  painga  ki  runga  i  nga 
wairua  o  te  tangata.  Nga  wahi  katoa  o  te  tauira  kororia,  e  ahei  ai  te 
whakarite  i  te  whakaoranga  mo  te  hapu  tangata,  e  kore  pea  e  marama 
rawa  ki  te  tangata,  engari  kua  mohio  te  tangata,  na  roto  i  ana  rapunga 
hukari  noa,  kia  kitea  e  ia  te  ahuatanga  o  ia  mea  o  te  ao,  ko  tona 
mana    o    te    mohiotanga   e    whaiti   noa    ana,    a   e    whakaae   ana   ia   ina 


Aperira,  1942  TE  KARERE  103 

whakakahoretia  tona  tutukitanga  i  te  mea  kaore  ia  i  te  mohio  ki  tona 
putake  mai,  tera  e  hapa  i  aia  tana  kereeme  he  matau  ia  ki  te  tirotiro 
me  te  whiriwhiri. 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  I  te  mea  kua  tau  te  hara  ki  te  whenua  i  runga  i  ta  te  tangata 
kotahi,  he  aha  te  mea  i  whakaaria  noa  mai  hei  whakatatu  i 
te  ture? 

2.  He  aha  te  tauira  kororia? 

3.  I  roto  i  a  te  tangata  kimikimihanga  i  nga  ahuatanga  o  te  ao, 
he  aha  te  mea  i  kitea  iho   e  ia? 

RATAPU    TUARUA 

Ahakoa  ano  te  marama  o  te  tauira  o  te  hokonga  mai,  i  ona  ahua- 
tanga he  mea  hohonu  rawa  ki  ta  te  whakaaro  kikokiko  tena  mea  me 
tena  mea.  I  tuhi  a  Timuaki  Teira  i  mea:  "I  roto  i  tetahi  huarahi  ngaro, 
koremohiotia  ka  riro  ia  Ihu  te  pikautanga  tera  nei  e  eke  ki  runga  i  a 
Arama;  a  e  ahei  ai  te  tutuki  ma  roto  ke  atu  i  tona  takawaenga  a  na 
runga  i  tana  pikaunga  i  o  ratou  pouritanga  me  te  hapai  ake  iaratou  i 
roto  i  nga  raruraru  me  te  amo  i  o  ratou  heanga  me  o  ratou  hara.  I 
roto  i  tetahi  ahua  kaore  nei  e  mohiotia,  e  taea  te  whakamarama,  kua 
pikautia  e  ia  te  taumahatanga  o  nga  hara  o  te  ao  katoa,  e  hara  i  te 
mea  ko  to  Arama  anake,  engari  ko  tona  huanga  katoa,  a  i  roto  i 
tana  meanga  i  tenei,  kua  whakatuwheratia  e  ia  te  kingitanga  o  te  rangi, 
e  hara  hoki  ki  te  hunga  whakapono  anake,  ki  te  hunga  whakarite  i  nga 
ture  a  te  Atua,  engari  te  hunga  nuku  atu  i  te  hawhe  o  te  whanau 
tangata,  i  mate  i  mua  atu  i  te  ekenga  o  ratou  tau  ki  te  pakaritanga, 
hui  atu  hoki  ki  te  hunga  mohoao,  kore  whakapono  ki  te  Atua,  i  te  mea 
i  mate  ture  kore  ratou  a  ma  roto  ake  i  tona  takawaenga  ratou  ara  ake 
ai  i  roto  i  te  ture  kore,  a  ka  whai  wahi  i  runga  i  to  ratou  kaha  me 
nga  mahi  i  runga  hoki  i  te  tirohanga  e  tika  ana,  kia  whiwhi  ki  nga 
manaakitanga  o  tona  whakamarietanga. 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  He  pehea  ki  ta  te  whakaaro  kikokiko  tena  mea  me  tena  mea  o 

te  tauira  o  te  hokonga  mai? 

2.  Pehea  nga  kupu   a  Timuaki   Teira? 

3.  Whakamaramatia  te  wahi  o  te  whakatuwheratan.ua  o  te  rangi 
me  te  whakawhiwhinga  o  te  hunga  mohoao,  whakaponokore  ki 
te    Atua? 

RATAPU   TUATORU 

Ahakoa  kahore  i  tatu  rawa  to  tatou  mohiotanga  ki  te  tauira 

hokonga   mai    ma    roto    i    te    mahi    minita    a    te    Karaiti    i    ona    ahuatam'.a 

katoa;  e  kore  rawa  <•  taea  e  tatou  te  whakakore  me  tioho  ra  ana  tatou 

he   hunga   kore   Atua;   no   te   nica   e   tU    marama    mai    ami    he   wahi    tuturu 

no  nga  whakaakoranga  o  katoa  o  nga  karaipiture.  Ko  te  tino  mea 
nui  o  te  wairua  <>  te  poropititanga  me  te  whakakitenga  me  te  tino 
whakaaturanga  nui  i  roto  i  a  te  Atua  vrhakaaturanga  ki  te  tangt 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  I  roto  i  te  mohiotanga  kua  whiwhi  nei  tatou  e  ahei  ana  ranei 
kia  whakakahoretia  e  tatou  ana  mea? 

2.  He  aha  i  kore  ai  «•  ahei  e  tatou  te  whakakahoi 

•'!.    I lo  aha  t <•  mea  e  I  u  marama  mai  ana'.' 

RATAPU    TUAWHA 

TE  WHAKAMARIETANGA,     Ki  te  tokomaha  he  mea  tino  w\ 

imiIi.ii"  kia  noho  be  whakahere  nana  ake   nei   i  mea,  ■  ta  te  I 
kotahi.  kia  waihotia  hei  mea  <•  ahei  ai  te  hoko  nga  Iwi  katoa. 
i  tenei  tae  atu  ki  era  atu  mea.  kaore  e  marama  ana  te  karaipiture,  i 
roto  I  te  w.miii.i  ..  te  whakamaoritai  karaipiture.    Nfga  tuhi 

tuhinga  tapu  o  nga  wu  onamata,  me  nga  whakapuakatangi 


104  TE  KARERE  Aperira,  1942 

tanua  a  nga  poropiti  o  nga  ra  o  muri  mi,  nga  kupu  tuku  iho  a  te 
tangata,  nga  tikanga  whakahere,  ahakoa  hoki  nga  mea  poke  a  te  hunga 
Atua  whakapakoko,  e  whakaum  katoa  ki  te  whakaaro  he  whakamarie- 

tanga  a  tetahi  mo  tetahi.  Kahore  rawa  te  Atua  e  turi  ki  te  whakaac 
i  te  whakahere  a  tetahi  he  mea  whakamana  nei  ia  e  nga  mea  kahori 

nei   e  taea  e   ratou  ake  te   whakarite  taua   tikanga. 
Nga   Patai: 

1.  He  aha  te  mea  whakamiharo  ki  etahi? 

2.  E  marama  ana  ano  ranei  ta  nga  karaipiture  mo  tenei? 

3.  E  turi   ranei  te   Atua  ki  te   whakahere   a  tetahi? 


HE    MATENGA 

EDWARD   TORU   PITMAN 

I  te  11  o  nga  ra  o  Hanuere  ka  mate  a  Brother  Edward  Toru  Pitman 
ki  te  hohipera  o  Akarana.  No  te  12  o  nga  ra  ka  haria  mai  ki  te  takoto- 
ranga  tupapaku   i   Onehunga,   whanga  ai  ki  te  tanumanga. 

He  nui  ona  huanga  me  ona  hoa  i  tae  mai  kia  kite  ia  ia,  Maori, 
Pakeha.  Ko  tana  whanau  i  whakarerea  iho  e  ia,  ko  tana  wahine  me 
ana  tamariki   tokorima. 

Na  te  Timuaki  o  te  Mihana  na  Matiu  Kauri  i  whakariterite  nga 
mea  katoa.  I  te  13  o  ngara  i  te  tahi  o  nga  haora  ka  tu  te  karakia  ki 
te  chapel  i  reira  nei  te  tinana  e  takoto  ana.  Ko  te  Timuaki  te  Timuaki 
i  noho,  a  na  Teito  Tangataiti  i  whakahaere.  I  muri  i  te  himene  me 
te  inoi  whakapuare  ka  whai  korero  te  Timuaki  o  te  Takiwa,  a  Elder 
W.  R.  Perrott,  i  muri  ko  te  Timuaki  o  te  Mihana,  a  Matiu  Kauri,  muri 
mai  ko  Rev.  Panapa.  I  roto  i  nga  korero  he  nui  nga  putake  nunui  i 
puta  mai  e  pa  ana  mo  tenei  mea  mo  te  mate  me  nga  mahi  pai  a  tenei 
tuakana.  Kia  Rev.  Panapa,  he  nui  ona  whakamihi  ki  nga  korero  a 
te  Timuaki.  I  te  mutunga  o  te  hui  ka  haere  te  minenga  ki  te  urupa  i 
Mangere.      Na  Kelly  Harris  i  whakatapu  te  rua. 

"He  tangata  kaha  a  Toru  Pitimana  i  roto  i  nga  tikanga  o  te  Rongo- 
pai.  No  reira  e  to  matou  hoa,  haere  atu  ra.  Tera  kei  te  Atua  nui  i 
te  Rangi  he  taunga  atu  mou." 

Ko  ona  turanga  i  roto  i  te  Peka  o  Mangere,   Takiwa  o  Akarana, 

he  Kaunihera  tuarua  o  te  Peka,  a  he  Timuaki  hoki  o  te  Kura  Hapati. 

— Na  Teito  Tangataiti,  Timuaki  Peka  i  ripoata. 

♦ 
RELIEF    SOCIETY    CENTENNIAL 

From  reports  to  hand  is  evidenced  the  widespread  celebra-  j 
tions  throughout  the  Mission.  We  feel  very  gratified  indeed  ♦ 
at  the  activities  in  preparing  and  holding  the  Centennial  Anni- 
versary of  the  Relief  Society.  We  urge  the  sisters,  and  all  j 
who  have  part  in  these  celebrations  to  put  forth  their  best  j 
efforts  in  honouring  the  cause  of  the  "mothers  in  Israel." 

As  yet  there  has  been  only  one  entry  received  by  Sister  » 
Cowley  for  the  Poem  Contest,  and  none  for  the  Short  Story  J 
Contest.  The  entry  for  the  poem  was  received  from  Bro. 
John  Apiti  of  the  Hoeotainui  Branch,  and  we  feel  that  his  I 
effort,  as  good  as  it  is,  should  only  be  the  first  of  many  more 
from  the  "sisters  of  the  Relief  Society."  We  commend  Bro.  » 
j         Apiti  for  his  faithfulness  and  endeavour  in  answering  the  call        ♦ 

for  poems,   and   we   urge  the   "sisters"   and   other  brethren  to 
j        avail   themselves   of  this   opportunity   to   put   to   writing  their        » 
!        thoughts  on  the  Relief  Society  and  any  other  kindred  subject. 
— Relief  Society  Mission  Board. 


Aperira,  1942  TE  KARERE  105 

PRIMARY 

FIRST  WEEK 

Objective: 

Impress  upon  the  children  that  "Honesty  is  the  best  policy"  and 
peace  of  mind  comes  to  those  who  keep   God's  commandments. 

WHAT  ONE  BALL  COST 
Lesson    Story: 

Ralph  Wheeler  was  only  a  little  boy,  employed  in  the  office  of  a 
wealthy  lawyer.  One  evil  day,  in  dusting  his  master's  desk,  he  came 
across  a  silver  dime,  half  hidden,  under  the  corner  of  a  big,  leather- 
bound  law  book.  He  hesitated  a  minute,  picked  up  the  coin,  laid  it 
down  again  and  went  on  dusting.  But  the  temptation  was  too  strong. 
When  he  was  ready  to  leave  the  office  he  dropped  the  dime  into  his 
pocket,  trying  to  silence  the  voice  of  conscience  with  the  thought  that 
he  could  not  know  to  whom  it  really  belonged,  as  his  master  received 
so  many  clients  at  the  desk  during  the  day. 

"No  one  will  miss  such  a  little  coin,"  he  mused,  "and  it  ain't  worth 
while   to   return   it.      It   doesn't   really   amount   to   anything,    anyway." 

Nevertheless,  it  was  with  a  very  guilty  air,  not  at  all  like  his  usual 
free  and  jaunty  manner,  that  he  made  his  way  to  the  top  store  on  the 
corner,  where  certain  very  well-made  balls  had  been  displayed  for  ten 
cents.  He  came  out  presently,  with  one  in  his  hands,  turning  it  round 
and  round  and  admiring  it  as  he  walked  down  the  crowded  street. 

"That's  a  fine  ball  you  have  there!" 

Ralph  jumped  as  if  he  had  been  struck.  The  voice  was  his  em- 
ployer's, kind  and  sympathetic,  as  usual,  but  for  the  first  time  in  the 
history  of  their  acquaintance  he  could  not  meet  the  kind,   brown   eyes. 

IT  PAYS  TO  BE  HONEST. 

Then  it  pays  to  be  honest.  There  are  rewards  OH  earth  as  well 
as  on  high.  Thirty  years  ago  there  was  a  young  girl  by  the  name  of 
Miss  Burch,  in  Ashford,  England,  who  stood  in  a  crowd  in  London. 
watching  the  arrival  of  the  guests  at  one  of  the  queen's  receptions, 
she  saw  an  old  man  suddenly  begin  to  stagger,  and  fall  to  the  ground. 
otln  rs  thought  he  was  intoxicated,  bu1  she  tenderly  lifted  his  head,  giv- 
ing him  some  water.  Soon  he  revived,  and  told  hei  that  ho  had  boon 
taken  suddenly  ill.  He  took  her  address,  and  -aid  he  would  never 
forget  her  kindness.  Twelve  years  passed,  when  one  day  a  letter  came 
to  her  asking  her  to  call  at  a  certain  lawyers.  There  she  learned  that 
the  old  gentleman  had  died,  and  had  left  hoi-  over  seven  thousand 
dollars.     This  was  a  large  reward  for  a  glass  of  water  and  a  helping 

hand    in    the    hour    of    vv<\.    much    more    ni"iiey    than    usually    eomes    in 

such  a  way.     Hut   God's  reward  was  doubtless  far  beyond  this.     It   is 
always  large,  and  h   is  Burely  given  t<>  everyone  who  is  pure  and  true. 

LITTLE  SCOTCH  GRANITE 

A   /.ION'S   i;oy   ANI>   A   /.ION'S   GIRL 
(Have  the  two  children  on  opposite  Bides  of  th«-  platform.     They 

talk    to    each    other    as    tiny    t.ll    the    following    Btory.) 
Boy  :   Jusi    what    doe      it    no  an    t  <>    he    hoi 

Girl:  oh.  i  knov   that  an  ww.     To  be  hon<  -   what  you 

mean,     you  knovi     speak  the  truth,  be  'air,  do  the  right  thins       \ 
bonei  t  per  on  never  eh< 

Boy:    Like    the    boy    in    Little    Scotch    Granite.     Have    you 
heard  tin-  story? 

Girl:    Ye  .  and  I  lov<    ;t.     You  tell  it.  and  if  you  forget  myl 
I'll   remind   y6u, 


106  TE  KARERE  Aperira,  1942 

Boy:  Alberta  and  John  Lee  weir'  delighted  when  their  little 
Scotch  cousin  came  to  live  with  them.     He  was  little,  but  very  bright 

and  full  of  fun.  He  could  tell  some  curious  things  about  his  home  in 
Scotland  and   his  voyage  across  the  ocean.     He  was  as   far  advanced 

in  his  studies  as  they  were  and.  the  first  day  he  went  to  school  they 
thought  him  remarkably  good.  He  wasted  no  time  in  play  when  he 
should  have  been  studying  and  he  advanced   rapidly. 

Before  the  close  of  school,  the  teacher  called  the  roll  and  the 
ihildrei)  began  to  answer  Ten."  When  Willie  understood  that  he  was 
"ten"  if  he  had  not  whispered  during  the  day,  he  replied:  "I  have 
whispered."  "As  many  as  ten  times?"  asked  the  teacher.  "I  sup- 
pose so,"  answered  Willie.  "Then  I  shall  mark  you  zero,"  said  the 
teacher,  sternly,   "and  that  is  a  great  disgrace." 

After  school  John  said  "Why,  I  did  not  see  you  whisper  once." 
"Well,  I  did,"  said  Willie.  "I  saw  others  doing  it  and  so  I  asked  to 
borrow  a  book,  then  I  asked  a  boy  for  a  pencil,  another  for  a  knife, 
and  I  did  several  such  things.  I  supposed  it  was  allowed."  "Oh,  we 
all  do  it,"  said  Alberta,  reddening.  "There  isn't  any  sense  in  the  old 
rule,  and  nobody  can  keep  it;  nobody  does."  "I  will,  or  else  I  will 
say  1  haven't,"  said  Willie.  "Do  you  suppose  I  will  tell  ten  lies  in 
one  heap?"  "Oh,  we  don't  call  them  lies,"  muttered  John.  "There 
wouldn't  be  a  credit  among  us  at  night  if  we  were  so  strict."  "What 
of  that,  if  you  tell  the  truth?"  said  Willie,  bravely. 

Girl:  In  a  short  time  the  class  all  saw  how  it  was  with  Willie.  He 
studied  hard,  played  with  all  his  might  in  playtime,  but  according  to 
his  reports,  he  lost  more  credits  than  any  of  the  others.  After  some 
time,  more  of  the  class  began  answering  "nine"  and  "eight"  oftener 
than  they  used  to ;  and  yet  the  schoolroom  seemed  to  have  grown 
quieter.  Sometimes,  when  Willie  Grant's  mark  was  even  lower  than 
usual,  the  teacher  would  smile,  but  said  no  more  of  disgrace.  Willie 
never  preached  at  them  or  told  tales;  but  somehow  it  made  them 
ashamed  of  themselves,  to  see  that  this  sturdy  blue-eyed  Scotch  boy 
must   tell    the    truth. 

They  talked  about  him  and  named  him  "Scotch  Granite,"  he  was 
so  firm  about  a  promise,  but  they  all  loved  him  too. 

Boy:  Yes,  if  you  remember,  at  the  end  of  the  term  Willie's  name 
was  very  low  down  on  the  credit  list.  When  it  was  read  he  had  hard 
work  not  to  cry;  for  he  had  tried  very  hard  to  be  perfect.  But  the 
very  last  thing  that  closing  day  was  a  speech  by  the  teacher,  who  told 
of  once  seeing  a  man  muffled  in  a  cloak.  He  was  passing  him  with- 
out a  look  when  he  was  told  the  man  was  a  General  and  a  great  hero. 
"The  signs  of  his  rank  were  hidden  but  the  hero  was  there,"  said 
the  teacher.  "And  now,  children,  you  will  see  what  I  mean  when  I 
give  a  present  to  the  most  faithful  boy  in  school,  the  one  who  really 
stands   highest   in    deportment.      Who   shall   have    it?" 

"Little  Scotch  Granite!"  shouted  all  the  children  at  once;  for  the 
boy  whose  name  was  so  low  on  the  credit  list  had  made  truth  noble 
in  their  eyes. 

SECOND  WEEK 

COURAGE   TO   DO  THE   RIGHT 
Objective: 

To  help  the  boys  and  girls  to  realize  the  responsibility  of  making 
the  right  choices;  for  on  the  right  kind  of  choice  both  success  and  hap- 
piness  depends. 
Lesson   Story: 

PLUCKED 

Billy  Lane  had  been  knocked  down  and  trampled  on  by  the  car- 
riage  horses  of   a   young  gentleman,   who,   after  learning   of  the  poor 


Aperira,  1942  TE  KARERE  107 

quarters  and  poverty  of  the  fatherless  family,  had  taken  Billy  into 
his  own  home,  that  he  might  be  given  proper  care. 

A  month  later  before  a  blazing  coal  fire  in  a  luxurious  chamber, 
sat  side  by  side  the  injured  boy  and  his  youthful  host.  The  former, 
thin  and  pale  as  he  leaned  back  on  the  soft  pillows;  the  other,  hand- 
some and  full  of  health,  gazed  at  him  with  compassion  in  his  eyes,  and 
yet  at  the  same  time  with  a  certain  cheerfulness. 

"So  you're  a  printer's  boy,  are  you,  Billy?" 

"Yes,  sir." 

"And  you  are  anxious  to  go  back  to  your  work,  I  suppose?  Isn't 
it  rather  dirty  business,  though?" 

"Yes,  sir;  you  get  pretty  black  sometimes.  But  I  can  earn  six 
dollars  a  week — more  than  any  other  boy  there." 

"Six  dollars  a  week?  Whew!"  and  the  young  gentleman  leaned 
back  in  mock  astonishment. 

Then  followed  a  pause,  occupied  by  the  invalid  in  silent  contem- 
plation of  the  handsome  face  opposite.  He  had  long  been  profoundly 
curious  about  the  gilt  buttons  which  decorated  the  young  gentleman's 
clothing,  and  he  had  wondered  at  times  if  his  hero  had  ever  been  in 
war. 

He  had  even  pictured  to  himself  many  battle  scenes  in  which  this 
supposed  young  warrior  had  wrought  valiant  deeds.  So  this  question 
came  naturally: 

"Are  you   in  the   army  sir?" 

"Army?"  cried  the  other  with  a  burst  of  laughter. 

"Army?  in  the  army?  Well  that  is  amusing!  No,  no,  I'm  too 
precious  to  the  family.  They  wouldn't  let  me  show  myself  to  an 
enemy;  but  to  console  me  they  send  me  to  a  military  academy,  where 
we  play  with  guns  without  powder,  and  camp  out  when  the  weather  is 
mild.      You  notice  these  brass  buttons,  I  suppose?" 

"Yes,   sir." 

"They  look  fierce,  don't  they?  They  make  you  say.  ilello!  there's 
an  officer  from  the  front,'  and  you  guess  that  I'm  a  great  man.  eh? 

"Well,  you're  mistaken;  badly  mistaken.  I  don't  think  I've  the 
courage  of  a  fly.  I  used  to  be  brave,  but  in  one  way  or  the  other, 
I'm  afraid  I've  got  entirely  over  it.  I'm  in  a  fright  at  this  very 
moment." 

"Fright,  sir?  At  what?"  said  Billy,  looking  around  apprehensively. 

"O,  it's  nothing  of  that  kind."  and  the  young  man   laughed  again. 

"It's  an  examination  for  the  junior  class  at  the  academy.  I've 
I. con    plucked   once,  and   I'm  tolerably   sure  that    I   shall   meet    the   same 

I  his  year." 

"Plucked,  sir?"  ventured  Billy  in  a  half  whisper. 

"Yes,     plucked.       Don't     you     km>w    what     thai     means?       It     means 

that  if  you  don'1  answer  a  certain  proportion  of  printed  questions  about 

your  Studies  Correctly,  On  a  certain  day.  you  won't  be  allowed  to  go 
into    the    next     class    ahead,    hut.    on    the    Contrary,    they    pull    out     your 

wing  feathers  (figuratively  speaking)  and  make  you  hop  around  in 
the  same  place  for  another  year.     Then  they  let  you  try  again. 

sir." 

"Well.  then.  I've  been  plucked  once,  and  I  d< 
••I  can't  tell;  I  may  be;  I  must     aj   it  look    that  way  now.     i 
i  there'll  be  a  frightful  howl  all  through  the  family  at  my  stupidity; 

hut      it'll     be     their     own     fault.        Naturally.     I'm     m-     studenl      and     they 

houldn't  have  put  me  where  I  could  run  such  risks,  it'll  be  rather 
hard  on  the  old  foil,  .  e  pecially.  I'd  give  ■  thousand  dollar  if  I  could 
only  gel  ■  squinl  at  the  examination  papers  in  advance.     I 

j ie.  and  come  out   with  colours  flying  and  drum-  bet 

Tin    was    aid  in  ■  tone  that  waa  hardly  earnest,  yet  there 
trace  of  desperation   in   the  words  that   seemed   to  make  them   moan 

more    t  han    men-    carol, •    -    hant  i-v. 


108  TE  KARERE  Aperira,  1942 

Billy  but  dimly  comprehended  his  companion.  His  mind  was 
prepossessed  with  the  idea  and  mystery  of  the  "military,"  a  fetish  to 
which  every  boy  bows,  and  he  had  on  the  tip  of  his  tongue  a  thousand 
questions  which  he  burned  to  ask. 

He  ventured   one:    "What  are  the  letters  on  your  buttons,   sir?" 

"Letters,"  said  the  other,  fingering  those  on  his  waist  with  careless 
contempt,   "which  represent  the  name  of  our  college." 

"There  was  a  gentleman  in  our  office  last  April  that  had  buttons 
just  like  those  all  over  him,"  cried  Billy  with  eagerness,  a  little  proud 
to  give  some  information  in  his  turn. 

"Was  there?"  returned  the  young  gentleman,  half  absently.  But 
in  another  second  he  cried,  with  a  sudden  start,  "Was  there,  though? 
What,  in  your  printing  office?  Was  he  a  grey-haired  man,  with  his 
whiskers  cropped  close,  and  who  carried  himself  like  a  frozen  ramrod?" 

"Yes  sir,  yes  sir.  And  he  spoke  in  a  loud,  sharp  voice  that  made 
all  the  fellows  turn  'round  from  their  cases.  He  came  up  to  my 
machine,   and  I  heard  him  ask  the  old  man" — 

"Who?" 

"The  old  man — the  boss." 

"The  boss.      Well,   well,  go   on." 

"I  heard  him   ask  if  I  was  honest." 

"Well,  and  what  did  the  boss  say  to  that?" 

"O,  not  much,   sir;  he  never  says  a  great  deal.    And  then" — 

"No,  no!  but  what  did  he  say?  Tell  me;  you  shouldn't  be  back- 
ward about  such  things.      Come,  out  with  it." 

Billy  blushed  and  replied,  "He  said,  'As  honest  as  the  days  are 
long.'  " 

"WThew!"  ejaculated  the  other,  with  a  satirical  smile,  and  he  fell 
once  more  to  beating  the  coals  with  the  poker. 

"As  honest  as  the  days  are  long" — that  meant  irreproachably  and 
immovably  faithful;  also  that  others  knew  he  was  faithful.  It  must 
require  no  little  hardihood  to  attempt  to  make  such  a  boy  violate  his 
trust. 

The  boy  whose  affections  he  had  won  by  his  kindness  had,  per- 
haps, the  power  to  procure  him  at  least  a  proof  sheet  of  the  examina- 
tion papers,  and  thus  enable  him  to  prepare  himself  on  the  questions 
of  the  coming  trial.  He  had  readily  conjectured  that  the  errand  of 
the  janitor  of  the  academy  to  the  printing  office  had  reference  to  the 
examination  papers,  inasmuch  as  this  had  been  the  duty  of  the  same 
person  on  other  occasions. 

Then  in  a  day  or  two  Gordon  came  again  and  sat  down  beside 
the  convalescent,  with  a  hardened  conscience  but  a  gentle  voice. 

"Well,  Billy,  so  you  are  going  back  to  work  on  Monday?" 

"Yes,    sir." 

"Will  you  do  me  a  favour?" 

"A  favour  for  you,  sir?"  cried  the  boy,  eagerly.  "O,  if  you  would 
only  show  me  how  I  could!  I  believe  I  would  do  anything  for  you, 
sir." 

"That'll  do,  Billy;  hold  hard.  I  want  you  to  get  me  a  copy  or 
proof  of  the  examination  papers  that  the  gentleman  you  saw  in  the 
printing  office  will  probably  order  next  week.  I  want  you  to  bring 
them  to  me  on  Saturday  night." 

Had  the  speaker  breathed  fire,  the  boy  whom  he  addressed  could 
hardly  have  been  more  astonished.  He  stared  for  a  few  seconds  in 
utter  silence,  hoping  that  some  look  or  laugh  of  Gordon's  would  re- 
lieve his  bewilderment.  But  the  young  man  sat  without  a  smile,  coolly 
waiting  his  answer. 

"Get  a  copy  of  the  questions  for  you,  did  you  say,  sir?"  asked 
Billy,  in  a  constrained  voice,  half  expecting  to  be  told  that  he  had 
misunderstood. 

"Yes,"  returned  the  other,  the  lines  of  his  face  hardening;  "that 


Aperira,  1942  TE  KARERE  109 

is  what  I  said;  and  bring  it  to  me  on  Saturday  night  about  eight." 

"But  sir — "   began  the   other   desperately. 

Gordon   arose   and  left  the  room. 

On  Monday,  Billy  went  back  to  work,  but  all  week  he  was  haunted 
by  the  idea  of  betraying  his  trust,  yet  hesitating  to  displease  Gordon. 

On  Saturday  morning  the  office  boy  brought  Billy  a  letter.  He 
opened  it  with  trembling  fingers.  Enclosed  was  a  sheet  of  paper, 
whereon  was  written  with  a  bold  hand,  "Be  as  honest  as  the  days  are 
long." 

Later  in  the  day  a  storm  of  snow  came  on,  and  the  heavens  were 
dark  at  an  early  hour.  After  nightfall  the  wind  arose  and  swept  down 
the  streets  in  bleak  and  bitter  gusts.  At  eight  o'clock  Gordon  was  in 
his  room  awaiting  the  coming  of  Billy. 

"Aha  so  you're  on  hand  my  fine  young  friend!" 

"Yes,  sir — I'm  here.  I  was  determined  I  would  meet  you,  but 
I've  come  to  tell  you  that  I  can't  do   it." 

"Can't   do    it!      What   do    you    mean?" 

"I  mean  I  won't  steal  the  papers.  I  might  have  done  it  a  dozen 
times  to-day,  but  I  couldn't  and  be  honest." 

"I'd  like  to  know,  boy,  if  this  is  the  kind  of  trick  you  meant  to 
play  me  all  the  time?      Is  this  the  way  you  pay  off  your  friends?" 

"No,  sir.  I  intended  to  get  the  papers  for  you  but  now  I  won't. 
I  never  stole  or  cheated,  and  I  never  will.  I  had  made  up  my  mind 
to  do  it,  because  you  wanted  me  to;  but  since  then  I've  found  out  that 
it's  harder  to  steal  than  'twould  be  to  have  you  hate  me.  I  shan't  do 
it,  ad  you  can't  make  me." 

Here  the  boy's  voice  rose  to  a  high  pitch,  and  his  head  seemed 
to  lift  itself  an  inch  taller  over  his  small  shoulders. 

"I  know,"  continued  he,  "that  you've  given  mother  and  me  a  great 
many  good  things,  but  if  you  ask  your  man,  you'll  find  that  most  of 
them  have  been  sent  back  to  you  this  very  day.  I  couldn't  keep  them 
when  I  found  out  the  price  you  wanted  me  to  pay.  I  thought  you 
took  care  of  me  because  you  were  sorry  for  me,  and  because 
had  a  good  heart;  but  now  that  I've  found  you  out,  I  just  say  that 
my   honesty   has   got   a   bigger    price,    sir. 

"I  ain't  a  man,  sir,  and  I  ain't  strong,  anyway,  and  so  I  am  going 
to  hold  on  to  all  I've  got.  This  morning  I  got  a  Letter  from  some- 
body, and  it  just  put  me  back  on  the  right  track  again.  1  haven't  for- 
gotten the  kind  things  you've  done,  and  I  shall  always  try  to  think  you 
did  them  for  me  before  it  came  into  your  head  to  hire  me  to  do  a 
wicked  thing.  I  wanted  to  do  something  to  thank  you,  but  I  wouldn't 
lot    you   spoil   me  to  do   it.       Y"ou'l]   think   I'm   moan    not    to   help  you.   hut 

I'd  he  meaner  to  myself  and  to  my   widowed  mother  it'  I  paid  you  off 

by  I  liming  thief  and  rascal." 

Gordon    waited   a    moment,   as   if   to    permit    him   to   go   on    if   he   had 

more   t«»   say.       Then    he   cried: 

"Well  said,  my  little  friend!  Y<ui'\r  done  grandly!  [*ve  played 
a  desperate  game  of  putting  you  up  to  this  business,  and  deserve  to  be 
whipped  for  it.      Bui  Bee,  I've  turned  over  a  new  loaf  to..." 

"What,  sir!"  exclaimed  the  hoy  in  great   perplexity. 

"YOU      aid    that     you    rrceivod    a    letter    this    mOTO   I 

member  that    the   ink   with  which  the  addre      \\:i     written   was  blue, 
while   i hat    of  the   message   was   black?" 

""5  ei ,  sir." 

"You  see,  then,  that   I  know  something  about  it." 

"Did   you  write  it,  sir?" 

"Yes." 

Thus  did  evenl     bring  the  pair  do  ei   I  Phe  difference  in 

po  ition  and  age  did   not    prevent    Gordon   from   finding  in   th< 
hearted   boy   much   that    seemed   to  support    ami   stimulate   hi-  often 
lagging  morality.     He  suffered  at   the  examination  a-  he  i 


110  TE  KARERE  Aperira,  1942 

and  was  dropped  from  the  rolls  of  the  academy.  But  he  accepted 
this  as  justly  deserved,  and  received  the  reproaches  of  his  friends  with- 
out a  word  of  defense.  He  could  even  witness  the  sorrow  of  his  mother 
with  somewhat  less  of  pain,  being  conscious  that,  notwithstanding  his 
failure,    lie   had   acted   honourably   under   bitter  temptation. 

THIRD  WEEK 

SAFETY    IN   THE    HOME 
Objective: 

To  help  the  boys  and  girls  to  realize  their  responsibility  in  keeping 
the  home  safe.  To  show  them  how  they  can  help  smaller  brothers  and 
sisters  to  guard  against  things  that  are  harmful. 

Curiosity,  especially  on  the  part  of  small  children,  is  one  of  the 
fundamental  causes  of  deaths  by  poisonings.  It  often  results  in  the 
swallowing  of  an  unknown  substance — "just  to  see  what  it  tastes  like." 
Children  are  so  accustomed  to  seeing  adults  consume  material  taken 
from  bottles  and  boxes  that  they  tend  to  "sample"  the  contents  of  any 
receptacle   within   reach. 

Many  medicines  which  are  entirely  safe  when  taken  in  prescribed 
quantities  and  otherwise  used  according  to  directions  are  harmful  in 
over  doses,  when  taken  internally,  or  when  otherwise  misused. — Taken 
from  "Accident  Causes." 

The  very  best  way  to  safeguard  against  harmful  accidents  is  to 
teach  and  train  the  children.  The  lesson  which  follows  may  be  made 
very  interesting  and  should  foster  the  following  habits  and  attitudes. 

1. — To  refrain  from  drinking  anything  from  a  bottle  without 
knowing  absolutely  what  it  is. 

2. — To  help  teach  younger  brothers  and  sisters  not  to  put  things  in 
their  mouths. 
Lesson    Approach: 

Example  questions  that  can  be  answered  by  yes  or  no: — 

1. — Is  it  safe  for  boys  and  girls  to  play  in  the  street? 

2. — Is  it  safe  to  start  a  bonfire  on  a  windy  day? 

3. — Is  it  all  right  to  start  a  bonfire  near  a  fence? 

4. — May  one  leave  a  bonfire  when  it  is  almost  out? 

5. — If  matches  are  dropped  on  the  floor  should  every  one  be  picked 
up? 

HOW  TO  KEEP  SAFE  FROM  POISONS 

To-day  we  are  going  to  chat  just  a  little  about  some  things  that 
are  good  for  us  only  when  a  doctor  tells  us  just  how  to  use  them  and 
some  ways  to  help  keep  us  from  making  mistakes. 

A  little  boy,  once  found  a  box  of  pills  which  had  fallen  on  the 
floor.  They  were  sugar-coated  so  he  thought  they  were  candy,  and 
straightway  he  put  them  in  his  mouth.  They  were  not  intended  for 
him  and  were  to  be  taken  in  very  small  doses,  and  he  swallowed  several. 
The  result  was  he  was  very  ill.  What  could  you  have  done  if  you 
had  been  there  and  seen  him  take  the  pills?  Right,  because  you  are 
older  and  know  better.  You  have  a  responsibility,  then  haven't  you, 
to  help  smaller  brothers  and  sisters  to  not  put  things  in  their  mouths? 

You'll  be  surprised  when  I  tell  you  that  a  girl  as  big  as  (Mary) 
picked  up  a  bottle  from  a  garbage  can  one  day  and  was  just  about 
to  drink  a  few  drops  of  medicine  that  was  left  in  it  when  her  eye 
caught  a  label  that  was  pasted  on  it  which  read  "Stop."  My,  but  was 
she  glad  of  that  label  because  just  under  it  was  another  which  read 
"Poison." 

What  do  you  think  of  the  idea  of  picking  up  old  bottles?  Let 
us  decide  that  that  practice  isn't  a  good  one.  What  about  the  label  on 
the  bottle?  Why  do  you  think  it  a  good  thing?  The  teacher  might 
here  show  a  number  of  bottles  each  with  a  different  label:  "Safe," 
"Stop,"  "Poison,"  one  with  a  safety-pin  in  the  cork,  and  one  with  a 
small  bell  tied  to  the   cork. 


Aperira,  1942  TE  KARERE  111 

Pass  out  pieces  of  white  paper  or  label  stickers  and  let  the  children 
make  a  set  of  labels,  reading — 

STOP!  SAFE!  POISON! 

Labels  help  us  a  great  deal,  but  there  are  a  few  other  things  to 
remember.  The  very  safest  thing  to  do  is  to  keep  all  bottles  contain- 
ing poisons  away  from  other  medicines,  and  keep  them  locked  up. 

When  poisons  are  thrown  away,  care  should  be  taken  not  to 
throw  them  where  anyone  can  get  them.  Can  you  suggest  a  good 
place?  I  know  a  lady  who  emptied  them  into  the  toilet  and  flushed 
them  away.      Another  good  way  is  to  bury  them  in  the  ground. 

You  might  summarize  by  writing  on  the  board  the  following.  If 
a  board  isn't  available  a  piece  of  paper  will  do  just  as  well. 

The  safest  way  to  protect  people  from  poison  is  to — 

(a)  Label  the   bottle. 

(b)  Put  pins  in  the  corks. 

(d)    Separate  the  poison  from  the  other  medicines  and  keep  them 

locked   up. 
Let  the  children  choose  a  game  and  play  it. 
Song:   Sing  a  happy  song. 
Prayer:    One   of  the   boys. 

FOURTH  WEEK 
PLAY  HOUR 

To    the   Teacher: 

"The  urge  to  play  is  one  of  the  most  basic  natural  urges  of  young 
children."  This  drive  becomes  evident  in  the  first  year  of  a  child's 
life;  it  becomes  dominant  in  the  second  year;  and  remains  a  vital  drive 
for  several  years  thereafter.  The  best  time  to  guide  children  in  their 
play  is  during  the  period  of  early  childhood  when  the  natural  instinct 
is  directed  toward  physical  activity  and  dramatic  play.  There  is  cer- 
tainly no  finer  way  in  which  Primary  teachers  can  enter  into  the  heart 
and  soul  of  a  child  than  by  playing  with  them. 

The  play  period  should  begin  with  a  song  or  a  group  of  songs  and 
a  prayer.  The  teacher  should  have  everything  in  readiness  so  that  no 
time  is  wasted  and  no  opportunity  for  disorder  given. 

It  is  well  to  include  in  this  period  a  story.  Il  may  bi  told  at  the 
beginning  of  the  day's  programme,  or  the  children  may  be  gathered 
in  a  group  after  some  games  nave  been  played.  In  this  way  the 
children  are  given  a  rest.     It   is  always  we'd  to  begin  the  programme 

with    oil  her   songs    or   games    the    children    know. 
Teach: 

OH    SUZANNA 

I  came  to  Alabama  wid  my  banjo  on  my  knee, 
I'm   kwan  to   Louisiana,   my  true  love  for  to 
It   rained  all  n ij  lit  de  day  I  left, 

De    weather    it    wafl    dry. 

De  sun   so   hot    I    froze   to   death. 

Susanna  don't   you  cry. 

Chorus: 
Oh  Susanna,  oh,  don't   you  cry  for  me, 
For  I  goin1  to  Louisiana,  wid  my  banjo  on  mj   knee. 

Single  circle     part  ner  by  your  side. 

I  ladle    walk   I  step    bo  cent  re  of  circle. 

Ladies  walk    I    tepi  back  to  place. 

Gentlemen  do  the     ame. 

Do  "Peas  Porridge  Hot" 

Slap   own    I 

Clap  own  hand  . 

('lap    hand      of    p.irtiier. 


TE  KARERE  Aperira,  1942 


Repeat — 

Slap  knees. 

Clap  hands. 

Clap  partner's  right  hand. 

Clap  own  hands. 

Clap  partner's  left  hand. 

Clap  own  hands. 

Clap  both  hands  of  partner. 
Chorus  do  a  grand  right  and  left  and  find  new  partner. 


M.I. A 


SECOND  TUESDAY.      FIRST   AID    (All   Classes) 
Review   of   Lesson    I. 

1.  What  is  first  aid? 

2.  Do  you  think  there  is  need  of  first  aid  training  to-day?     Why? 

3.  What  is  the  purpose  of  first  aid  training?  Give  three  good 
reasons. 

4.  In  first  aid  treatment  give  the  three  things  that  may  prove 
fatal  and  should  therefore  receive  immediate  attention  of  a 
first  aider. 

5.  Name  five  important  things  for  a  first  aider  to  observe  at  scene 
of  accident. 

ANATOMY 

We  must  now  learn  something  of  the  anatomy  and  go  into  further 
detail  as  to  how  to  give  first  aid  treatment  intelligently  for  the  various 
emergencies  that  may  arise.  We  will  be  unable  to  go  into  detail  with 
reference  to  bandaging  and  splinting  of  broken  limbs,  but  attempt  is 
made  to  give  sufficient  instructions  so  that  an  individual  may  know  how 
to  handle  such  conditions  until  further  skill  can  be   obtained. 

THE  SKELETON  AND  BODY 

Every  house  or  building  must  first  have  a  foundation  and  frame- 
work; so  it  is  with  the  human  body.  We  call  the  framework  of  the 
body,  the  skeleton.      Study  chart  carefully.      (Obtain  one.) 

On  to  this  skeleton  is  built  the  body  of  muscles,  tissues,  nerves, 
etc.  The  framework  is  so  constructed  as  to  hold  the  vital  organs  and 
protect  them  from  injury.  The  bones  also  act  as  levers  at  joints  and 
make  movement  possible. 

The  head  or  skull  consists  of  a  bony  case  which  encloses  and  pro- 
tects the  brain,  with  holes  for  eyes,  ears,  nose,  and  mouth.  The  only 
movable  bone  in  the  head  is  the  lower  jaw. 

The  skull  is  fastened  to  the  spinal  column,  which  consists  of  hollow 
bones  or  vertebrae  fastened  together  with  a  soft  cushion  like  substance 
called  cartilage.  At  the  lower  end  the  spinal  column  terminates  in  the 
broad  rump  bone.  Through  the  spinal  column  runs  the  spinal  cord 
or  nerve  centre  from  the  brain  which  blanches  out  and  communi- 
cates with  all  parts  of  the  body.  This  might  be  compared  to  a  great 
telephone  central  switch-board  with  its  numerous  branch  lines.  The 
least  injury  to  any  part  of  the  body  is  thus  communicated  instantly 
to  the  brain. 

To  the  spine,  at  the  back,  are  also  attached  the  ribs,  twelve  on 
each  side,  which  form  the  greater  part  of  the  walls  of  the  chest  in 
which  are  incased  the  lungs,  heart,  and  some  of  the  larger  blood 
vessels.  The  ribs  in  front  are  fastened  to  the  breast-bone,  which  is 
a  large  flat  dagger-shaped  bone  (except  the  two  lower  ribs  on  each 
side  which  are  not  connected  to  anything  in  front.  These  we  call 
floating  ribs). 

"The  pelvis  is  a  wide,  strong  bony  basin  formed  from  the  haunch 
bones  at  the  front  and  sides  and  partly  behind,  where  it  is  closed  by 


Aperira,  1942  TE  KARERE  113 

the  (Sacrum)  or  rump  bone."  This  forms  the  lower  portion  of  the 
trunk  of  the  body  and  is  called  the  abdomen.  These  bones  hold  and 
protect  the  stomach,  liver,  kidneys,  bladder,  intestines  and  other  organs. 
Other  bones  of  the  body  which  are  of  interest  to  the  first  aider  are 
the  extremities.  "Each  upper  extremity  consists  of  the  shoulder  joint, 
the  arm,  the  forearm,  the  wrist,  and  hand.  The  lower  extremity  con- 
sists of  the  thigh,  the  leg,  the  ankle,  and  the  foot." 

The  Muscles  are  bundles  of  fibre  on  cross  sections.  They  give 
bulk  and  shape  to  the  body  and  control  movement  of  parts  to  which 
they   are   attached. 

"Tendons  are  strong,  white  fibrous  cords  that  attach  most  muscles 
to  the  bone."  "The  Skin  is  the  protective  covering  of  the  body  and 
is  the  organ  of  touch." 

THE    CIRCULATORY    SYSTEM 

This  refers  to  the  circulation  of  the  blood  through  the  body  and 
it  is  very  important  that  the  first  aider  become  familiar  with  this 
phase  of  the  human  system.  Blood  is  a  red,  sticky  fluid  that  circu- 
lates through  tubes  called  blood  vessels,  carrying  nourishment  to  all 
parts  of  the  body.  It  also  furnishes  heat  and  oxygen  to  all  parts  of 
the  body  and  carries  waste  matter  from  all  the  tissues  to  such 
as  the  lungs,  kidneys,  skin  and  bowels,  whose  work  it  is  to  separate 
the  wastes  from  the  blood  and  to  expel  them  from  the  body.  The 
blood  is  kept  moving  by  the  heart.  The  Heart  is  a  hollow,  muscular 
organ  that  acts  like  a  two-cylinder  pump.  It  pumps  the  pure  blood 
through  its  left  side  to  the  arteries  and  at  the  same  time  pumps  the 
impure  blood  through  the  veins  to  the  lungs  to  be  purified;  it  is  then 
returned  to  the  left  side  of  the  heart  and  sent  out  through  the  arteries 
again.      The  heart  beats  about  72  times  per  minute. 

There  are  three  kinds  of  blood  vessels — arteries,  veins,  and  capil- 
laries, through  which  the  blood  is  conveyed  to  and  from  all  parts  of 
the  body. 

Arteries  are  the  large  vessels  that  carry  the  fresh,  now  blood 
from  the  heart.  They  are  deeply  imbedded  in  the  flesh  and  follow 
along  close  to  the  bones.  Nature  has  taken  this  precaution  for  their 
protection. 

Capillaries  arc  the  very  small  vessels  that  branch  from  the  arteries 
forming  a  mesh  or  network  in  all  tissues  of  the  body,  thus  feeding 
and  furnishing  thcin  with  oxygon.  Those  tiny  little  vessels  lie  close 
to  the  surface   of  the   skin. 

Veins   are   the   vessels   which    carry   the    Mood    hack    to   the    heart    to 

be  pumped  t<>  the  lungs  ami  purified  again.     The  veins  also  lie  fairly 
•  Mm'  surface.     One  can  see  these  blue  ve<<el^  .oi  the  back  of 

Hie   hand. 

Whenever  the  skin  is  broken  by  cutting  or  other  wound,  the  blood 
evered,  and  bleeding  takes  place.     By  knowing  the  types 
of  bleeding   from   these   three  different    blood   vessels   we   .-ire   able   as 
lid  era  to  determine  the  extent   of  injury  ami  how  to  treat   it. 

Arterial    bleeding    is    the    n  .md    must     be    cheeked    immo- 

diately,   for  ;i   person   may   bleed   to  death   in   four  to  twelve  minutes. 

The  blood  <•<  mine    from  ait.ih       i     ;i   rich,   bright    red  and   com,-    in   -.pints 

being  pumped  direct   from  the  heart,     it   la  for  arterial  bleed- 
going  to  learn  t  he  pre    are  point  .    o  that   If 
ari  i     we  might   be  able  to  render  ■  service  that   ma  meone'a 

life.     When  an  arterj  ould  be  applied  between 

the  wound  and  the  heart  on  the  proper  pressure  point, 

Capillary    fl.-rduu:  i      I  mall 

vessels.     When  a  capillar}    i    cut   the  blood  I    a  brick  red  ano 


114  TE  KARERE  Aperira,  1942 

slowly   from   the   wound.     A  cut  on  the  anger  would  cause  capillary 
bleeding:.      It  may  be  stopped  by  covering  with  a  sterile  bandar*. 

Vein  bleeding  is  not  so  serious  as  arterial  bleeding,  but  more  so 
than  capillary  bleeding.  The  blood  from  the  veins  is  a  very  dark  red 
and  the  flow  is  continuous.  If  the  blood  from  a  vein  cannot  be  Btopped 
i>\  a  compress  bandage,  then  pressure  should  be  applied  below  the 
wound — or,  in  other  words,  the  wound  would  be  between  the  heart  and 
pressure  point,  because  the  blood  in  this  case  is  going  back  to  the 
heart.  Wounds  should  be  covered  immediately  with  sterile  dressing 
to   prevent  infection. 

The  following  stories  or  similar  ones  will  illustrate  the  import- 
ance of  knowing  how  to  stop  arterial  bleeding. 

At  a  large  high  school  with  an  enrollment  of  some  900  pupils,  a 
young  girl  one  day  with  a  number  of  her  schoolmates  was  coming- 
through  a  doer  leading  from  the  hallway  into  one  of  the  classrooms. 
The  upper  part  of  the  door  was  glass,  and  in  some  manner  she  was 
pushed,  her  arm  going  through  the  glass  and  one  of  the  arteries  of  her 
lower  arm  was  severed.  A  doctor  was  called  immediately  and  all  stood 
about  waiting  for  him  to  come,  while  she  bled  profusely  from  the 
wound.  The  doctor  arrived  within  twenty  minutes,  but  alas,  it  was  too 
late.  She  succumbed  a  few  hours  later  because  of  loss  of  blood.  If 
only  one  of  all  the  pupils  or  faculty  in  that  large  school  had  known  just 
where  to  place  a  finger  to  stop  the  flow  of  blood  the  girl's  life  un- 
doubtedly would  have  been  saved. 

A  member  of  a  recent  first  aid  class  had  occasion  to  give  first  aid 
treatment  for  arterial  bleeding  the  same  week  she  learned  the  pressure 
points.  Her  daughter  was  standing  on  a  chair  washing  a  cupboard 
with  glass  doors.  As  she  went  to  step  from  the  chair  it  slipped,  and 
as  she  reached  out  to  catch  herself,  her  hand  went  through  the  glass 
door,  cutting  a  deep  wound  in  the  hand.  Blood  was  spurting,  but 
the  mother  applied  digital  pressure  at  once,  placed  a  tourniquet,  stopped 
the  bleeding,  bandaged  the  wound  and  then  called  the  doctor.  Upon 
arrival,  some  fifteen  minutes  later,  the  mother  was  highly  complimented 
by  the  doctor  on  her  first  aid  treatment  and  said  she  had  probably 
saved  her  daughter's  life. 

Let  us  now  learn  the  pressure  points.  The  class  leader  should 
first  learn  these  thoroughly  herself  and  then  have  the  class  memorize 
them,  each  finding  the  pressure  points  on  herself;  then  pair  off 
and  apply  the  pressure  on  each  other.  Follow  a  chart  showing  the 
pressure  points  and  memorize  them  by  number  only.  Each  should 
find  the  pulse  beat  on  the  various  points  indicated  before  leaving  them. 
They  may  be  felt  on  either  side  of  the  body,  as  the  arteries  separate 
from  the  heart,  running  upward  and  downward  to  all  parts  of  the 
body.  It  may  be  difficult  to  get  the  pulse  beat  at  No.  9  and  No.  10 
pressure  points — the  others  can  very  easily  be  determined.  The 
arteries  are  well  embedded  in  the  muscle,  and  the  pressure  will  have 
to  be  rather  firm  in  order  to  feel  the  pulse.  Use  the  tips  or  balls 
of  the  fingers,  in  applying  pressure.  (Obtain  own  chart  with  Pressure 
Points.) 

Pressure   Points: 

No.  1 — Is  about  one  inch  in  front  and  one  inch  above  the  ear. 

No.  2 — Place  finger  at  back  of  jawbone,  bring  it  forward  until  you 
feel  a  small  dent  in  bone,  this  is  your  pressure  point  and  will  control 
bleeding  at  the  eye,  nose  and  mouth. 

No.  3 — Is  directly  behind  the  Adams  Apple  and  controls  all  bleed- 
ing to  the  head. 


Aperira,  1942  TE  KARERE  115 

No.  4 — Is  underneath  collar-bone,  in  centre  line,  running  from  neck 
to  top  of  shoulder,  and  controls  bleeding  where  arm  has  been  torn 
from  body,  or  severed  artery  on  bicep. 

No.  5 — Is  on  underside  of  arm  in  centre  of  armpit  and  controls 
bleeding  on  any  part  of  arm.      This  is  seldom  used,  however. 

No.  6 — Is  on  innerside  of  arm,  at  bicep  or  large  muscle  on  upper 
arm.  This  controls  bleeding  of  arm  anywhere  below  this  point.  It  is 
at  this  pressure  point  where  tourniquet  is  applied  for  bleeding  of  fore- 
arm. 

No.  7 — Is  on  bend  of  elbow,  inside  at  centre  and  controls  bleed- 
ing of  lower  arm.  Pressure  may  be  applied  here  for  bleeding  of  fore- 
arm while  tourniquet  is  being  applied  on  upper  arm. 

No.  8 — Is  at  wrist.  There  are  two  points  here  and  both  must  be 
used  at  the  same  time.  They  are  on  inside  of  arm  at  wrist.  (Pulsa- 
tion can  be  felt  at  this  point  very  easily.)  This  will  control  severe 
bleeding  of  the  hand. 

No.  9 — Is  in  line  with  top  of  hip-bone  and  slightly  toward  front, 
this  controls  entire  leg.  Pressure  may  be  applied  here  while  tourni- 
quet is  being  placed  at  thigh. 

No.  10 — Is  slightly  above  middle  of  thigh  and  towards  inner  side 
of  leg  (one  hand  width  from  crotch).  This  point  controls  bleeding 
of  leg.      Torniquet  is  applied  at  this  point  for  bleeding  of  leg. 

No.  11 — Is  at  bend  of  knee  and  controls  bleeding  of  leg  and  foot. 
Pressure  may  be  applied  here  while  torniquet  is  being  placed  at  thigh. 

Next  we  shall  learn  how  to  apply  a  tourniquet.  A  triangular  band- 
age is  made  by  taking  a  piece  of  heavy  bleached  or  unbleached  muslin 
or  other  material  a  yard  square  and  cutting  it  cornerwise.  Out  of  one 
square  can  thus  be  made  two  triangular  bandages.  For  making  a 
tourniquet  the  triangular  bandage  should  be  folded  into  a  cravat  band- 
age. To  make  a  cravat  bandage  fold  hem  liin.  wide  at  the  long  Bide 
of  unfolded  triangular  bandage,  then  take  point  of  bandage  and  fold 
over  to  edge  of  folded  hem,  and  fold  together  once  again,  making  a 
cravat  bandage  about  4  inches  wide. 

FIRST  TUESDAY: 

BEE-HIVE    DEPARTMENT 

THE    BEE-HIVE   CALL 

The  Bee-Hive  girls  have  a  "call  to  service."  With  the  Bee-Hive 
Call  they  earnestly   pledge  themselves  to   be  of  Bervice  to  the  world. 

It  is  a  "call"  and  must  be  Bung  in  the  spirit  of  a  challenge: 

Womanho    for    Work!    Womanho    for    Home! 
Womanho    for    Service    to    all    Mankind! 
Womanho!       Womanho!       Womanho! 

Wo  stands  for  work,  Man  for  mankind,  Ho  for  home     work  for 

mankind  and  the  home;  the  three  taken  I sther    poll  "Womanhood." 

except   for  the  lasi  two  letters  which  are  dropped. 

Womanho  is  pronounced  with  ■  long  o;  the  ■  i  In  father,  and 
the  accent    is  on   the  Becond  syllable:   Wo-man'-ho. 

THIRD    TUESDAY: 

BEE-HIVE  COLOURS 

If  yon   will   watch   the   bee   In   your  garden   you   will   notice 
little  creature  i    brown  In  body,  and  aero     the  back 


118  IT.   KARERE  Aperira,  1942 

Promise,  etc.)  ;  Second  Class  Test  (subdivided  in  the  same  way)  ;  First 
Class  Test  (ag-ain  subdivided)  ;  a  dozen  or  more  columns  for  the  entry 
of  any  Proficiency  Badges  he  may  earn;  a  space  for  remarks;  a  column 
for  date  of  discharge ;  and,  finally,  one  to  show  his  destination  on  dis- 
charge   or   transfer. 

Enter  a  cross  opposite  the  name  of  the  Scout  when  he  passes  a 
test.  When  all  the  tests  are  passed  enter  "p"  in  the  last  column. 
This  will  ensure  your  being  ably  to  check  quickly  those  who  have  quali- 
fied as  Tenderfoots,  Second  Class  Scouts,  etc. 


HE   MIHANA   KAUWHAU 

Na  Hone   Wahapu 

Kua  tutuki  ta  maua  mihana  ko  taku  tuakana  ko  Hirini  T.  Here- 
maia  i  tonoa  ai  maua  e  nga  tumuaki.  No  te  12  o  nga  ra  o  Tihema, 
1941,  ka  haere  atu  maua  i  Kaikohe,  a  ko  o  maua  hoa  awhina  ko 
Eta  Wairemana  Wahapu  me  Rangi  P.  Wharemate  tumuaki  o  te 
Peka  o  Tautoro. 

I  tae  matou  ki  te  kainga  o  Tereweti  Penehio  i  Portland,  no 
waho  tenei  tangata  o  te  Hahi,  otira  he  lino  tangata  pai  tend.  I 
whakaae  ia  kia  iriiria  ana  tamariki  e  toru  ki  roto  i  te  Hahi,  na  Rangi 
P.  Wharemate  i  inoi  na  Hone  Wahapu  i  iriiri  i  raro  i  te  whakahaere 
o  Hirini  T.  Heremaia.  I  whiwhi  matou  ki  te  wairua  pai  me  te  aroha 
hoki  i  tenei  kainga. 

No  te  13  ka  haere  atu  matou  ki  te  kainga  o  Te  Hira  Komene  i 
Whakapirau,  takiwa  o  Otamatca.  I  te  teihana  o  Taipuha  ka  uru 
mai  a  Iritana  Pure  ki  to  matou  tira,  a  tae  pai  matou  ki  te  kainga 

0  Te  Hira  Komene.  Ko  Hare  Wahapu  me  tona  hoa  wahine  me 
ta  raua  tamaiti  i  reira.  Na  Rangi  P.  Wharemate  i  whakahaere  te 
karakia  i  te  ahiahi,  a  no  te  14  o  nga  ra  ka  iriiria  e  Hirini  T.  Heremaia 
a  Mina  H.  Komene,  a  Motau  H.  Komene  me  Hare  Maketu  Wahapu. 
Ko  nga  karakalanga  o  tenei  ra  i  tino  pai,  whiwhi  katoa  i  te  wairua 
ora  pai  hoki. 

I  mua  i  to  matou  hokinga  ki  o  matou  kainga  i  te  15  o  nga  ra 
ka  manaakitia  nga  kainga  o  Te  Hira  Komene  me  Hare  Wahapu. 

1  mutu  pai  to  matou  mihana. 


Material  to  be  printed  in  Te  Karere  MUST  reach  the  Editor's 
Office,  Box  72,  Auckland,  before  the  FIRST  DAY  OF  EACH 
MONTH.  There  is  a  war  on,  and  it  assists  Te  Karere  and  the 
"printers"  if  we  can  be  assured  of  your  co-operation. 


BOOKS  FOR  SALE 

We  have  on  hand  now  six  sets  of  two  volumes  each,  of  Tuhoe, 
by  Eldson  Best,  at  12/6  a  set.     Send  in  your  orders  immediately. 


Aperira,  1942  TE  KARERE  119 

HE    MATENGA 

Tena  koe  te  raanu  tangi  pai  o  te  Aotea-roa  me  te  Waipounamu. 
Panuitia  atu  e  koe  ki  nga  wahi  katoa  e  tae  ana  koe  te  matenga  o 
"Tawera  Te  Wherowhero"  i  te  5  o  Pepuere,  1942,  ki  tana  kainga,  Te 
Kahuiiti,  Waahi  Pa. 

No  te  9,  i  te  ahiahi  ka  tukua  mai  nga  karakia  e  te  "kahui  ariki" 
ki  te  Hunga  Tapu,  ka  riro  na  Kio  Tarawhiti  i  whakahaere.  I  awhina 
katoa  nga  Hunga  Tapu  o  Puke  Tapu  i  tenei  karakia,  a  ko  nga  kai 
korero  ko  Karena  Takoro,  me  Tetana  Te  Hira.  Nga  kaupapa  korero 
i  anga  mote  iriiri  rumaki,  tae  atu  ki  te  tangohanga  atu  o  te  wairua 
i  te  tinana  ki  te  whakanohoanga  ki  nga  rangi.  I  taua  po  ano  ka 
mihimihi  nga  iwi  i  pae,  a  ao  noa.  Tino  mahi  aroha  nga  mahi  i  tenei  po, 
no  te  mea  i  te  aonga  ake  ka  tukua  atu  a  Tawera  Te  Wherowhero  ki  te 
kopu  o  te  whenua  i  te  tahi  o  nga  haora  o  te  10  o  Pepuere. 

Ko  te  karakia  nui  i  tenei  ra  na  Ngaha  Rotana,  Timuaki  o  te  Peka 
o  Puke  Tapu  i  whakahaere,  nga  kai  korero  ko  Kio  Tarawhiti  raua  ko 
Tetana  Te  Hira,  i  anga  a  raua  korero  mo  te  mahi  whakapapa,  te  iriiri- 
tanga  mo  te  hunga  mate  me  te  mana  hiiri  o  Iraia  te  poropiti.  Kia 
nui  nga  mihi  ki  nga  Hunga  Tapu  i  awhina  i  tenei  karakia  i  nga  wai- 
ata  me  nga  inoi.      Nuku  atu  i  te  ono  rau  nga  tangata  i  pae  mai. 

I  te  urupa  i  Taupiri,  ka  whakahaerengia  e  Ngaha  Rotana  ano  te 
karakia,  na  Karena  Takoro  te  korero  karaipiture  ia  Koroniti  15,  a  na 
Tetana  Te   Hira  i  whakatapu  te   rua. 

Ko  Tawera  Te  Wherowhero  i  whanau  i  te  tau  1881,  i  te  tau  1919 
ka  whakaritea  e  ia  te  tikanga  o  te  iriiri  ki  roto  i  te  Hahi  o  Ihu  Karaiti 
o  te  Hunga  Tapu  o  nga  Ra  o  Muri  Nei.  Koia  hoki  i  heke  tika  mai  i 
runga  i  te  Waka  Tainui,  tae  iho  ki  nga  kingi.  Ko  tenei  Waka  kei 
Kawhia  moana  e  tau  ana,  koia  tenei  te  whakapapa  o  Tawera  Te 
Wherowhero.   .   .   . 

Tainui  te  Waka,  Hoturoa  te  Ariki  o  runga. 

Hoturoa  ka  moe  ia  Whakaotirangi — 

Hotuope  —  Hotumatapu  —  Puhanga  —  Putetere  —  Uetihi  — 
Uenoho  —  Ueraki  —  Taipu  —  Tamapoto  —  Tuheitia  —  Mahanga  — 
Atutahi  —  Puakirangi  —  Tapaue  —  Te  Putu  —  Tawhiakiterangi  — 
Tuata  —  Te  Rauanga-anga  —  Potatau  (he  Kingi)  —  Tawhiao  (he 
Kingi).  Tawhiao  (kingi)  i  moe  ia  Hera,  puta  mai  ko  Mahuta  (he 
Kingi)  me  Te  Wherowhero.  I  moe  a  Te  Wherowhero  ia  Pakitaua  puta 
mai  ko  Tawera  i  te  tau  1881. 

I  roto  i  tenei  tatai  kaha  nga  waka  katoa  ki  te  whakaeke  ia  ratou 
ki  runga  i  tenei  whakapapa.  Noreira  kia  ora  te  Kingi  Koroki  Te  Rata 
Mahuta,  te  Kahui  Ariki,  tae  atu  kia  Raiha  Tawera,  mo  to  koutou  aroha 
ki  te  Hunga  Tapu  i  homai  ai  e  koutou   enei  karakiatanga  kia  matou. 

Takoto  e  Tawera  Te  Wherowhero  i  te  takotoranga  o  o  tupuna, 
o  o  matua,  o  o  karanga  maha  ia  Papatuanuku  e  takoto  nei  ia  i  Rangi- 
nui  e  tunei.  Kia  kaha  ki  te  whakarongo  i  te  tangihanga  o  te  tetere 
whakaarahanga  i  te  hunga-mate.  E  te  iwi  kia  kaha,  rapua  nga  taonga 
ngaro. 

— Na  Tetana  Rarite   Te   Hira   i   ripoata. 

No  man  can  teach  the  Gospel  of  Jesus  Christ  under  the  inspira- 
tion of  the  living  God  and  with  power  from  on  high  unless  he  is  Living 
it.  He  can  go  on  as  a  member  and  we  will  pray  for  him,  no  matter 
how  many  years  it  may  require,  and  we  will  never  put  a  block  in  his 
way,  because  the  Gospel  is  one  of  love  and  of  forgiveness,  but  we 
want  true  men  and  women  as  our  officers  in  the  Priesthood  and  in  the 
auxiliaries.  A  man  has  no  right  to  be  in  a  high  council  who  can  not 
stand  up  and  say  that  he  knows  the  Gospel  is  true  and  that  he  is 
living  it. — Heber  J.   Grant. 


120 


TE   KARERE 


Aperira,  L942 


NEWS  FROM  THE  FIEED 


MANAWATU  DISTRICT 
Reported  bv  Polly  Wi  Neera 
We  have  had  the  privilege  of  being 
visited  twice  this  month  by  our  District 
President,  Bro.  Mane  Taurau.  On  his 
first  visit,  which  was  to  discuss  the  Hui 
Pariha  which  was  to  have  been  held  at 
Porirua,  but  was  finally  postponed,  Bro. 
Taurau,  together  with  Bro.  and  Sister 
Peneamine  Wi  Neera,  visited  the  home 
of  Bro.  and  Sister  Pumipi  Te  Hiko  and 
their  family,  and  held  a  cottage  meeting. 
Again  Bro.  Taurau  and  his  counsellors, 
Bros.  Hapi  Kawana,  Walker  Enoka  and 
the  Sisters  on  the  Wairarapa-Manawatu 
Relief  Society  and  Primary  Board,  Sister 
Raiha  Kawana,  Mary  Te  Maari  and 
Dulcie  Hawkins  visited  the  Porirua 
Branch.  Meetings  were  held — Bro.  Tay- 
lor Mihaere  of  the  Wellington  Branch  be- 
ing present  to  discuss  and  report  on  the 
activities  of  the  various  organizations 
and  where  changes  of  officers  were 
sought,  this  was  carried  out  effectively. 
Another  duty  performed  by  Bro.  Tau- 
rau and  Walter  Enoka  was  that  of  bind- 
ing together  in  marriage  Leo  Parata  and 
Millie  Parae  of  Porirua.  The  Sunday 
meetings  were  well  attended  and  we 
realise  and  appreciate  the  visits  of  these 
officers  to  our  branch  as  it  draws  us 
closer  together,  and  seeing  their  faith 
certainly  encourages  us  a  great  deal.  We 
would  like  also  to  extend  our  thanks  and 
appreciation  to  Sister  Eileen  Rei  Rene  for 
her  help  in  opening  her  home  for  the  use 
of  some  of  these  officers.  It  is  little 
deeds  of  kindness  like  this  that  help  us 
alon"    life's    highway. 

We  wish  to  welcome  into  our  midst 
Bro.  John  Meha,  from  the  Hawke'e  Hay. 
who  is  now  serving  with  the  armed  forces 
down  here  in  Wellington.  We  have  had 
the  privilege  of  having  him  speak  in  our 
meetings,  and  hope  that  this  isn't  a  case 
of  the  first  and  the  last  time.  His 
cousin.  Olive  Elkington  Hippolite,  has 
visited  us  on  many  an  occasion  and  we 
would  like  to  encourage  others  who  find 
it    possible    to    attend    our    meetings. 

It  has  been  Wellington's  privilege  to 
welcome  home  once  again  another  group 
of  the  Maori  Battalion  from  overseas. 
The  weather  could  not  have  been  more- 
ideal  on  the  morning  of  their  arrival. 
There  were  twenty-seven  boys  altogether 
who  returned  home.  After  the  Tisual 
welcoming  ceremony  the  Hon.  Mr.  P.  K. 
Paikea,  who  acted  as  master  of  cere- 
monies, made  a  speech  of  welcome,  then 
Mr.  Hapi  Love  spoke,  after  which  "Maori 
Battalion"  was  rendered  by  the  Club 
members.  Next  speaker  was  Hohepa  Wi 
Neera;  Mr.  M.  R.  Jones,  Secretary  to 
the  Native  Minister;  Mr.  Jones,  Minis- 
ter of  Defence,  who  spoke  on  behalf  of 
the  Government  of  New  Zealand.  The 
Club  members  then  rendered  an  action 
song.  Mr.  Paikea  then  introduced  Pte. 
Wi  Paki  of  Torere,  who  spoke  on  behalf 
of  the  returned  boys,  followed  by  a  solo 
by  Witarina  Harris.  L/Cpl.  Hudson,  of 
Opotiki,    spoke   next.      Then   the   Rt.    Hon. 


the  Prime  Minister  extended  a  welcome 
to  the  boys  on  behalf  of  the  Dominion 
of    New    Zealand. 

The  next  item  on  the  programme  was 
shaking  hands  with  the  boys  and  then 
the  dinner,  which  they  appeared  to  en- 
joy immensely  —  especially  the  mutton 
bird  and  puha.  Members  of  the  Com- 
mercial Broadcasting  Service  were  pres- 
ent. They  fitted  an  amplifier  in  the  Hall 
and  played  a  recording  which  was  broad- 
cast last  Sunday  of  members  of  the  Maori 
Battalion  who  were  entertained  on  board 
the  Destroyer  Maori — named  after  the 
Battalion.  The  speakers  were  Majors  E. 
T.  W.  Love  and  Rangi  Royal,  and  the 
names  of  the  others  on  board  were  read 
out.  The  H.M.S.  Maori  took  part  in  the 
sinking  of  the  Biscmark  and  has  so  far 
distinguished  herself  in  various  other 
engagements.  In  conclusion  three  cheers 
could  be  heard  and  also  that  well-known 
war  cry,  "Ka  mate!  Ka  mate!  Kaora 
Kaora!"  Thus  ended  another  day  of  wel- 
coming home  some  of  our  Maori  boys 
who  did  such  a  fine  job  "over  there." 
OVERSEAS 
Sister  Wiki  Katene  has  arrived  safely 
in  the  Middle  East.  Stan  Wi  Neera,  who 
is  a  member  of  the  Camouflage  Unit,  has 
arrived  in  safety.  The  late  Eruera  D. 
Hamon  of  Te  Hapara,  Gisborne,  who  died 
of  wounds,  won  first  prize  in  a  black  and 
white  sketch  held  in  the  Middle  East, 
entitled  "The  Spirit  of  the  Bayonet." 
Quite  a  number  of  the  returned  boys 
spoke  highly  of  the  imagination  and  ex- 
cellent work  that  Dennis  could  portray 
in  black  and  white.  Alex  Scott  and 
Hepa  Meha  have  finally  got  together  in 
Canada  and  are  thrilled  that  the  oppor- 
tunity presented  itself,  making  it  pos- 
siole  for  them  to  accompany  each  other 
on  tours  which  they  have  taken  to- 
gether, and  sights  of  great  interest  have 
been  taken  in  by  these  two  Mormon  lads. 
In  the  Christmas  mail  which  arrived  from 
U.S.A.  we  learn  that  Mr.  and  Mrs.  L. 
Garn  Dastrup  have  been  blessed  with  a 
son — the  15th  December,  1941,  was  the 
great  day.  Elder  Ivor  J.  Price  and  Zea- 
land J.  Murdock  are  now  enjoying  wedded 
bliss,  while  Elder  E.  M.  Woolley  remains 
the  bachelor  at  ease.  Elder  Vernon  W. 
Lloyd,  according  to  all  reports,  could  not 
be  doing  better  on  his  huge  farm — 
strictly  up  to  date.  It  seems  he  has 
all  that  a  modern  farm  requires,  and 
especially  chickens  and  pigs,  which  are 
in  great  demand  over  there.  Weston  J. 
Smith  is  slowly  recovering  from  an  acci- 
dent in  which  he  lost  his  wife.  He  in- 
tends living  with  his  daughter,  Eunice 
Beesley,  until  he  feels  fit  enough  to  re- 
ooen  his  business.  We  were  very  happy 
indeed  to  welcome  home  from  the  Middle 
East,  one  of  the  2  7  Maori  boys,  Bro. 
Mohi  Tarawhiti,  of  Huntly  West,  who, 
but  for  a  plastered  arm,  appears  to  be 
in  «rood  health  and,  according  to  himself, 
will  soon  be  a  hundred  per  cent,  whole, 
and  is  glad  to  be  back  in  good  old  New 
Zealand. 


Aperira,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


121 


During  the  past  month  the  three  Pre- 
sidents of  the  Relief  Society,  Young 
Men's  and  Young  Women's  M.I.A.  passed 
through  Auckland  on  their  way  to  and 
from  Ngapuhi,  where  they  had  a  short 
conference  with  Auxiliary  organization 
lieads  concerned.  Accompanying  them 
was  Bro.  Rahiri  Harris,  President  of  the 
Tamaki  Branch,  and  also  chairman  of  the 
Hui   Tau    Board. 

Upon  their  return,  Sister  Una  Thomp- 
son continued  on  to  Dannevirke  in  the 
hope  that,  while  she  was  away,  her  new 
and  thriving  business  (a  few  weeks  old) 
had  not  folded  up,  while  Bro.  Wi  Dun- 
can spent  a  day  or  so  in  the  big  city 
until  Sister  Polly  Duncan  joined  him  to 
-continue  their  visit  throughout  the  Wai- 
kato  and  Hauraki  districts.  Bro.  Rahiri 
Harris  spent  a  day  or  so  in  Auckland  be- 
fore   returning    to    Tahoraiti. 

Among  other  visitors  to  Headquarters 
were:  former  Mission  Secretary  George 
Watene,  Rose  Beazley,  recently  appointed 
counsellor  in  the  Y.M. M.I.A.  to  Sister 
Una  Thompson,  replacing  Sister  Wiki 
Katene  now  overseas.  Win  Smiler  is  back 
again  in  town,  and  we  hope  that  con- 
ditions now  prevailing  will  not  cause 
him  to  be  "evacuated."  Keep  at  it  Win. 
Brother  and  Sister  A.  Dudley  Amadio 
favoured  us  with  their  presence  for  a 
week  or  so,  while  in  Auckland  on  busi- 
ness. Important  business,  too — Genealo- 
gical   research    work. 

Te  Karere  and  the  Mission  Office  feel 
duty  bound  to  express  thanks  and  appre- 
ciation to  Nitama  Paewai  and  Luxford  P. 
Walker,  both  of  the  Tamaki  Branch,  now 
at  Knox  College,  Dunedin,  for  their  good 
work  while  in  Auckland  on  holiday,  with 
President  Cowley's  family  as  their  hosts. 
These  two  young  men  were  recently 
ordained  Elders  and  called  to  fill  mis- 
sions until  released  by  President  Cowley. 
They  have  already  started,  word  or  tele- 
gram rather  was  received  by  the  Secre- 
tary announcing  their  appointment  as 
joint  secretaries  of  the  Otago  District 
with  a  request  for  information  and  work. 
(It's    coming,    my   friends!) 

The  Auckland  Branch  and  Mission 
Home  miss  seeing  "Quayle,  his  mother 
and  aunt"  about.  We  hope  that  they 
are  situated  well  in  their  new  surround- 
ings. Let  us  know  how  you  are  Mabel, 
and  look  after  Quayle  too — Lani  might 
be  interested  you  know.  Hine,  where 
«ver  are  you,  don't  forget  your  many 
friends  in  Auckland ;  there  are  quite  a 
number  of  them,  quite  down  at  the  mouth 
so    to    speak.      Oh,    oh! 

Miss  Jewell  Cowley  celebrated  her  16th 
birthday  on  the  2nd  March,  1942.  Even 
though  we  are  this  late,  "Te  Karere" 
readers  and  subscribers,  too,  join  in 
wishing  Jewell  a  "happy  birthday"  and 
trust  that  everything  she  did  actually 
receive  will  be  symbols  of  our  hopes  and 
Kifts    to    her. 

ENGAGEMENT 

Porou-Whakataka.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Porou 
announce  the  engagement  of  (heir  elder 
daughter,  Ruihi,  known  as  Lucy,  of 
Muriwai,  Cishorne,  to  George,  elder  son 
of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Whakataka  of  Toko- 
maru    Bay. 


MAHIA  DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Riripeti    Mataira 

The  Nuhaka  Relief  Society  President, 
Sister  Parae  Walker,  expressed  gratifi- 
cation at  the  improved  attendances  at  the 
Society's  weekly  meetings.  Its  Centen- 
nial activities  are  uppermost  in  the  minds 
and    work   of   the   Sisters. 

After  being  an  inmate  of  the  Wairoa 
Hospital  for  nearly  three  months,  Sister 
Molly  Tengaio  is  now  home  covalescing. 
All  your  friends  and  the  members  of  the 
district  wish  you  a  full  recovery  to 
normal    health    again,    Molly. 

Pte.  Rataua  (Tilly)  Whaanga  was 
granted  bereavement  leave  on  the  death 
of  his  mother,  Hiraina  Whaanga.  Pte. 
Whaanga  was  formerly  one  of  the  leading 
M.I.A.  tennis  players  at  past  Hui  Tau(s) 
and  was  quite  prominent  in  many  of 
the  M.I.A.  activities  of  the  Nuhaka 
Branch.  (Te  Karere,  for  and  on  behalf 
of  its  readers,  tender  condolences  and 
sympathy  to  the  bereaved  family,  ex- 
pressing grief  and  sorrow  at  such  a  loss 
— that  of  a  mother — to  Kahutia  Whaanga 
and   his   family. — Ed.) 

Sgt.  Riki  Smith  was  given  a  farewell 
dinner  in  the  L.D.S.  Hall  (Dining),  where 
numerous  guests  and  friends  were  well 
catered  for  before  enjoying  themselves 
in  the  Unity  Hall  in  a  farewell  dance. 
The  Tahaenui  Ladies'  Committee  also 
tendered    him    a   farewell. 

Sgt.  Benjamin  Christy,  whose  military 
duties  necessitated  his  release  from  the 
presidency  of  the  M.I.A.,  was  guest  of 
honour  at  another  dinner  held  in  the 
L.D.S.  Dining  Hall,  after  which  they  all 
assembled  in  the  big  hall,  where  they 
were  delightfully  entertained  by  the 
members  of  the  M.I.A.,  with  Bro.  William 
Pakimana  supervising  activities.  It  was 
well  into  the  night  when  the  guest  of 
honour  and  Cpl.  Pomana  left  for  Tahae- 
nui, where  further  entertainment  in  the 
form    of   another   dinner   awaited    them. 

James  Loader  is  now  in  the  Teachers' 
Training  College  pending  call-up  in  the 
Air    Force. 

RELEASES 

Y. W.M.I. A. — Heni  Tengaio,  first  coun- 
sellor: Heni  Christy,  music  director; 
Mary    Nye,    secretary. 

Y.M. M.I. A.  —  Benjamin  Christy,  first 
counsellor;   Angus    Christy,    secretary. 

Primary. — Ira    Mataira,    secretary. 

APPOINTMENTS 

Y. W.M.I. A. — Mary  Nye,  first  counsel- 
lor; Lena  Waerea,  music  director;  Manu 
O'Brien,     secretary. 

Y.M. M.I. A.  Wm.     Pakimana,     first 

counsellor;    Tu    Pakimana.    secretary. 

Primary.  Tu        Pakimana.       secretary  . 

Bro.  Moraro  Walker  has  been  appointed 
officer  in  charge  of  District  Welfare 
Programme)  also  caretaker  of  the  Nuhaka 

Marae    ('.rounds. 

BIRTHS 
To    Mr.    and    Mrs.    George    Harvey,    of 

Nuhaka,     a     son        Mori     Ne.awai      Mete. 

To  Mr.  an. I  Mrs.  Peter  Campbell  of 
Opoutama,  a  daughter  Geneviev<  K<  re- 
arangi. 


122 


TE  KARERK 


Aperira,  1942 


To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Paul  McLean,  a 
daughter — Lovinia. 

To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Ratima  Karangaroa 
of   Nuhaka,   a   son — Final   Leave. 

To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  James  Brown  of 
Opoutama,    a    son — Rewetj    Whakaware. 

To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Joseph  R.  Tengaio  of 
Nuhaka — a    son. 

MARRIAGES 

Pera  Tengaio,  son  of  Bro.  Runga  and 
Sister  Rangi  Tengaio,  of  Nuhaka,  to 
Hannah,  daughter  of  Dave  and  Amiria 
Smith     of    Nuhaka. 

DEATH 

Maru  Te  Iwi  of  Nuhaka.  Burial  ser- 
vice   conducted    by    Pres.    Hirini    Christy. 

WAIKATO    DISTRICT 

Reported    by    Dave    Ormsby,    Howard 

Osborne    and    Daisy    V.    Rowe 

The  Waikato  District  has  gone  ahead 
during  the  year  1941.  The  Branch  Pre- 
sidents throughout  the  district  have  co- 
operated exceptionally  well  with  all  con- 
cerned. 

Bro.  Awe  Whare  Ponga  of  the  Puke- 
kohe  Branch  has  been  doing  wonderful 
work  baptizing  and  endeavouring  to 
bring  back  within  the  confines  of  Church 
activity  numerous  members  of  days  long 
past. 

Bro.  William  Whatu,  well  known  in 
Hamilton  and  Frankton,  has  just  re- 
turned   from    the    battle    area.    He    brings 


back  with  him  the  aroha  and  best  wishes 
of   many   of   our   boys   from    "over   there." 

Reporting  from  the  Taumarunui 
Branch,  Bro.  Osborne  says:  It  is  now 
almost  a  year  since  this  branch  was 
organised  and  the  work  of  the  Lord  has 
made    slow    but    sure    progress. 

We  have  now  organized  the  Relief 
Society  and  M.I. A.,  which  latter  body 
held  a  successful  social  and  dance  on 
February  20th,  creating  much  interest 
and  many  enquiries  regarding  the  pur- 
pose and   aims   of   the   M.I. A. 

Bro.  Charles  E.  Hillman  of  Auckland 
Branch  has  just  concluded  a  nine-day 
visit  with  us,  and  his  advice  and  counsel 
has  been  of  great  assistance  to  us  in 
enabling  us  to  conform  to  the  general 
practice  followed  in  the  Church,  and  a 
number  of  very  fine  meetings  have  been 
held.  Thre  separate  advances  have  been 
made  in  the  Priesthood  during  the  year, 
three   baptisms   and   two   children   blessed. 

One  of  our  young  men,  Eddie  Archer, 
is  in  the  Air  Force  and  has  just  recently 
notified  us  that  everything  is  well  with 
him. 

A  report  of  the  first  Relief  Society 
meeting  held  in  Taumarunui  discloses 
that  there  were  three  officers  and  two 
members  present,  but  the  spiritual  value 
was  sufficient  for  many  more.  Although 
it  was  our  first  meeting,  we  went  to  work 
right  away.  There  was  sewing  as  well 
as  a  lesson,  which  was  given  by  Ivy 
Osborne   from    the   magazine. 


(TkS 


M.A.C.    OLD    BOYS'    MEMORIAL    SUBSCRIPTION    FUND 

Since  the  last  issue  of  Te  Karere,  these  subscriptions 
have  come  to  hand :  James  Heperi,  John  Paki,  Jas.  R.  Elking- 
ton,  T.  Albert  Collier,  Enid  W.  Collier.  The  last-named, 
Enid  Collier,  was  for  some  years  associated  with  her  aunt, 
formerly  Matron  Annie  Mcllroy,  now  Mrs.  Hamiora  Kamau, 
as  a  member  of  the  College  staff  at  the  Faculty  Home. 

At  time  of  going  to  press,  we  await  the  final  drawings 
and  specifications  of  the  proposed  Memorial  Arch.  Remem- 
ber, this  Memorial  Arch  is  hoped  to  be  erected  and  ready 
for  the  Pioneer  Day  Celebrations  at  Korongata  this  coming 
July. 

Your  subscriptions  are  to  be  sent  to  the  Mission  Secre- 
tary,  Box  72,  Auckland.    Amount — Ten  Shillings. 


EXPIRATIONS  OF   SUBSCRIPTIONS 

MARCH,  1942 


Amaru,    Harry — Tologa    Bay 
Allen,    Mrs.    F.    K. — Wanganui   E. 
Apiti,     Whatu — Frankton 
Bratton,    Ada — Te    Kuiti 
Boynton,   Barbara — Wairoa,  H.B. 
Bluck,    Walter — Nuhaka 
Broown,    Barney — Kopuawhara, 
Burge,   W.   R. — Palmerston 
Cameron,    Amy — Auckland 
Campbell,     Sydney — Nuhaka 
Chamberlain,    George — Auckland 
Clark,    Tom- — Tologa   Bay 
Clarke,    Maru    Ernest — Nuhaka 
Christy,     Benjamin — Nuhaka 
Cotter,    Hannah — Kopuawhara 
Campbell,    Mrs.    Peter — Opoutama 
Campbell,    John — Nuhaka 
Dewes,    Maraea — Waipiro    Bay 
Duley,    Mrs.    E.    G. — Nuhaka 
Daniels,     Fred — Auckland 
Davis.    R. — Nuhaka 
Enoka,    Roka — Piriona 
Evans,    John — Nuhaka 
Foster,    George — Waikokopu,    H.B. 
Going,    Mrs.    C.    M.    C. — Maromaku 
Haeata,    Wirihita — Gladstone 
Haeata,    Rangimoehau — Masterton 
Harema,    Ani — Whangaruru    Sth. 
Herewini,   Ropere — Pipiwai 
Hunt,    Mrs.    Eva — Auckland 
Harris,    Mrs.    Lester — Hastings 
Heke,    Kumeroa — Korongata 
Heperi,    Ripia — Okaihau 
Heperi,    Victoria — Okaihau 
Hooro,    Ngaro — Auckland 
Jones,    Grace — Whangarei 
Kadamia,    Edith — Mourea 
Kaihe.    Maria    K. — Maraeroa 
Kamau,    Hamiora — Korongata 
Kamau,    Sid — Korongata 
Karaitiana,    Earl — Pukehou,   H.B. 
Karaitiana,    Rex — Te    Aute    College 
Katene,    William — Wanganui 
Kani,   Robt.   Davis — Te   Aute   Col. 
Kingi,    Kathleen — Hastings 
Kara,    Hemi — Muriwai 
Karangaroa,    Maudie — Manutuke 
Kee,    Alan    On — Nuhaka 
Kaikou    Primary — Pipiwai 
Lang,    Jack — Nuhaka 
lewis,    Mary — Nuhaka 
Manu,    Turake — Manaia 
Marshall,    Harry — Ngaruawahia 
Matenga,    Haana — Pirinoa 
McLean,    Mary — Nuhaka 
McDonald,    Galloway — Porangahau 
McDonald,    Mason — Porangahau 
McDonald,     Kake — Porangahau 
Mita,    Mrs.    Mary   T. — Nuhaka 
Maioha,    Mrs.    Ida — Russell 
Mannering,    Miss    M. — Auckland 
Morgan,    Martha — Taranaki 
McKenzie,   Shirley — Nuhaka 
Mcllroy,    Teiti    &    Tuhaka — 

Korongata 
Mataira,    Aiilie — Nuhaka 
Mataira,    Louie — Nuhaka 
Maihi,     Papa — Kawhia 
Marsh,    Mrs.    Lucy — Hastings 
Matthews,    Clifford — Judea 
Meha,    John    T. — Waipawa 
Mitchell,    Mrs.    E.— Nuhaka 
Meha,    Lehi — Auckland 
Meha,    Annie — Dannevirke 


Neho.    Wahangu — Awarua 
Ngakuru,    John — Weka    Weka 
Ngakuru,     Moewena — Rawene 
Ngakuru,    Nolan — Rawene 
Nepia,    Winika — Taradale 
Noda,    Ivan — Huntly 
Nathan,    D. — Nuhaka 
Nathan,    Wm. — Nuhaka 
Nohinohi,     Wheti — Nuhaka 
Nepia,    Ruth — Nuhaka 
Osborne,    Howard — Manunui 
Owen,    William — Auckland 
Orikena,    Jerry — Nuhaka 
Paiaka,    Ponga — Manunui 
Perderson,     Lionel — Overseas 
Pakimana,    William — Nuhaka 
Paki,    Mary — Kawhia 
Pene,    Pita    R. — Whangaruru 
Piahana,     Pekerangi — Tauranga 
Pakimana,    Lena — Opoutama 
Pere,   Mahanga — Gisborne 
Pere,    Mrs.    Arthur — Nuhaka 
Pomare,    Mihi — Horeke 
Puriri,    Hemi — Korongata 
Puriri,    Hera — Korongata 
Proffitt,   Mrs.   J. — Kawhia 
Rameka,     Moehau — Maraeroa 
Randell,    George — Hastings 
Rarere,    Abe — Opoutama 
Rogers,   Mrs.   Hara — Te   Whaiti 
Ruwhiu,    Hau — Te    Araroa 
Reihana,     Dick — Thames 
Rarere,     Ruka — Opoutama 
Ropotini,     Wm. — Nuhaka 
Rei,    Patrick — Auckland 
Scott,  E.  A.  C.  &  Norman — Huntly 
Smiler,    Tommy — Gisborne 
Smith,    Heni    J. —Nuhaka 
Smith,    Fred — Nuhaka 
Smith,    Hine    G.    H. — Opoutama 
Smith,   Sam,   Jr. — Waimata   Valley 
Smiler,    Winiata — Auckland 
Saunders,     Parekura — Wairarapa 
Solomon,    Tira — Nuhaka 
Sunnex,    Mrs.    M. — Kaikohe 
Solomon,    Tulate — Nuhaka 
Takerei,    Amy — Dannevirke 
Tamaki    M.I. A. — Dannevirke 
Taka,    Ben — Kopuawhara 
Taurima,    Pakimana — Opoutama 
Tengaio,     Mary — Mahia 
Taurima,   Tihema — Opoutama 
Te    Hau,    Rangi — Nuhaka 
Tengaio,    Runga — Nuhaka 
Tengaio,     Ora — Nuhaka 
Tengaio,    Pera — Nuhaka 
Te  Maari,  Meremionga — Wairarapa 
Thompson,    Jane — Hastings 
Tipene,    Hera — Te    Araroa 
Tiwai,    Ka — Korongata 
Waa,    Manu — Motatau 
Wairoa,    Mrs. — Kopuawhara 
Whaanga,    Tuati — Nuhaka 
Whaanga,    Turei — Nuhaka 
Wharemate,    Matekino     Tautoro 
Whaanga,    Sarah — Opoutama 
WiHongi,    Mere    H. — Awarua 
WiHongi,     Moe — Awarua 
Wilder  mo  tt,     Mrs.— Kopuawhara 
Winiana,    Joe — Nuhaka 
Winiana,     Maggie — Nuhaka 
Wirihana,    Kuini — Dannevirke 
Williams.     Folly       Kaulua 

Walker,   Turi     Nuhaka 


BRANCH  TEACHER'S  MESSAGE 


THE   CHURCH   SECURITY   PROGRAMME 

The  divinely  inspired  Church  Security  Programme,  which 
has  likewise  been  called  the  Church  Welfare  Programme,  has 
been  in  operation  for  six  years.  Great  progress  has  been  made 
— more  than   expected — in  the  time   since  it  was  undertaken. 

When  the  programme  was  announced  at  the  General  Con- 
ference in  April,  1946,  President  Grant  said: 

"We  must  put  into  our  people  the  spirit  of  independence 
and  work.  .  .  .  We  must  formulate  a  PLAN  whereby  every 
member  of  the  Church  will  be  made  self-supporting.  .  .  .  This 
is  one  of  the  greatest  and  most  important  things  the  Church 
has  ever  undertaken,  and  it  will  be  put  over  because  we  have 
the  power  and  ability  to  do  it." 

Three    important   objectives   were    named: 

1.  Sufficient  food,  clothing,  and  fuel  were  to  be  assembled 

by  fall  to  care  for  all  those  in  need. 

2.  The  unemployed  were  to  be  helped  to  find  employment. 

3.  An  effort  was  to  be  made  to  help  those  barely  subsisting 

to  raise  their  standard  of  living. 

The  programme  was  planned  to  help  all  the  people  of  the 
Church  to  help  themselves  by  stimulating  collective  effort  and 
co-operative  action. 

At  the  October  Conference,  1936,  only  six  months  after 
the  programme  had  been  announced,  the  first  objective  had 
been  achieved.  This  part  of  the  programme  has  continued 
with  great  enthusiasm,  and  at  the  April  Conference,  it 
was  reported  that  the  Church  had  not  only  taken  care  of 
the  needy  but  had  accumulated  more  than  $115,000.00  worth 
of  food,  fuel,  clothing,  and  commodities,  which  are  safely 
stored  in  Church  storehouses.  During  1937  more  than  172,000 
persons  contributed  towards  the  success  of  the  programme. 

Reaching  the  second  and  third  objectives  will  naturally  be 

slower.      Yet  there   is  every  reason  to   be   encouraged.      More 

than  6,000  persons  found  employment  during  1937,  and  2,532 

•  others  were  engaged  on  Church  Work  Projects.      All  told,  more  ■ 

than  44,000  persons  were  assisted  by  the  programme  in  1937. 

There  is  still  much  to  be  done.  Food  and  clothing  must 
be  supplied  to  those  still  unemployed,  and  work  must  be  found 
for  the  6,544  who  are  unemployed  but  who  are  able  and  willing 
to  work.  To  reach  this  goal  will  take  the  united  effort  of  all 
the  people.  Priesthood  Quorums  must  function  to  their  full 
capacity.  The  splendid  work  always  done  by  the  Relief 
Society  must  continue. 

What  have  you  done?  What  can  you  do?  What  should 
be  done  to  make  this  programme  ultimately  succeed?  Think 
it  "over  for  a  month.  On  their  next  visit  your  teachers  will 
have  suggestions  for  you. 


Mei,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


129 


RELIEF    SOCIETY 

By  John  W .  Apiti,  Hoeotainui 

It  started  with  the  Prophet,  a  hundred 

years   ago, 
A    society   of   mothers,    to    relieve   all 

pain   and   woe. 
The    Seer   blessed   this    Union,    and 

handed  them  the  Key, 
And    promised    Angels    would   attend, 

The  Relief  Society. 

Their   task   was   one   of   Love,    Faith, 

Hope,    and    Charity. 
To    release    the    stream    of    kindliness 

and   set   it   flowing  free. 
That  man  may  find  a  better  joy  than 

spending  time  with  greed, 
In  being  his   brother's   keeper,   in  his 

hours   of   need. 

If  we  would  love  our  neighbour,   for 

many  decades  more, 
We  would  follow  in  the  footsteps, 

where  the  Angels  trod  before. 
The  Everlasting  Priesthood  is  for  all 

eternity. 
And   faithful    at   its    side   shall   be, 

The    "Relief    Society." 


A  PRAYER 

By  Eve  Purves,  Dimcdiii 

Our  Lord  above   I   render  praise  to 
Thee 
For  bounteous  blessings  on  me  here 
bestowed, 
Cleanse  Thou  my  heart  and  make  my 
eyes  to  see 
Thy  truths  divine,  make  Thy  com- 
mandments  known. 

Guide  Thou  my  lips,  let  not  my  light 
grow   dim, 
But  rather  fan  to  flame  the  smould- 
'ring   spark 
Of    Thine    own    light    implanted    here 
within, 
Leave  Thou  not  me.  else  that  light 
does  turn  to  dark. 

Thy    slightest    wish    for    me    \    would 
obey, 
My  spirit  cleaves  to  Thee  from 
whence  it  came — 
Teach  me  Thy  will  that   1  may  learn 
to  say 
Thy  will  be  done,  then  mine  will  be 
the  same. 


If  we  but  love  Thee  Lord,   we   need 
not  fear 
Whate'er  may  come  to  daunt  us  on 
our  way, 
Thou  knowest  best,  teach  us  O  Lord 
to  hear 
Thy  voice,  and  do  whatever  It  may 
say. 

Lead  us   anew  to  make  our  vows   to 
Thee, 
And   practice   them,   heed  not  what 
others  say 
That  when  our  time  on  earth  is  past, 
and  we 
Are  ready,  make  our  light  as  bright 
as  day. 


%$L 


THE  SOLILOQUY  OF  OUR 
RELIEF  SOCIETY 

By  Cecilia  P.  Scrancke,  Auckland 

They   laid   it   one   hundred   years   ago 
By  small  foundation  stone, 

I    wish    those    eighteen   might    have 
known 
How  useful   I  have  grown ; 

For  time  has  changed  so  many  things 
And   now   at   last   I've   come   to   be 

Centennial   Relief   Society. 

All  through  those  years  I've  carried  on 

With   unremitting   zeal, 
And  those  who've  needed  me  can  tell 

Aline  are  the  hands  that  heal; 
For  love,  faith,  hope  and  charity 

Was  the  Redeemer's  plan  for  me — 
The  Relief  Society. 

All   ranks   and  creeds   who  ever  pass 

Through   my   open   door 
To  seek  my  aid — and  those  who  do 

Are  helped  along  once  more 
For  mothers,  in  no  small  degree, 

Realize  why  I  came  to  be 
The  Relief  Society. 

From    small    beginnings    great    things 
rise 

Are  lines  a  poet  wrote, 
Come  follow  me  to  win  the  prize 

To   live   celestially; 
I'm  one  small  part      bill  who  can  doubt 

I'm   proud   as    I    can  be 
Thai  Joseph's  blessing  was  for  me — 
(ion's   Relief  Society. 

—MISSION  RE1  [EF  SOCIETY 


130  TE  KARERE  \k,.  1942 

NICOTINE  KNOCKOUT, 

or  The  Slow  Count 

By    GENE    TUNNEY— former    Heavyweight    Boxing    Champion   of   World; 

Lieutenant  Commander,   U.S.N.R.,  now    in  charge  of  Navy   Physical   Training 

and   Athletics 

1  Reprinted  from  "Era."     Reprinted  from   "Reader's  Digest"  by  permission) 

It's  over  thirteen  years  since  I  retired  from  the  heavyweight  cham- 
pionship. But  here's  a  challenge:  If  Joe  Louis  will  start  smoking,  and 
promise  to  inhale  a  couple  of  packages  of  cigarettes  every  day  for  six 
months,   I'll  engage  to  lick  him   in   fifteen  rounds! 

Of  course,  Joe  wouldn't  be  foolish  enough  to  meet  my  terms.  No 
boxer,  no  athlete  in  training  smokes.  He  knows  that  whenever  nerves, 
muscles,  heart  and  brain  are  called  upon  for  a  supreme  effort,  the 
tobacco-user   is   the    first   to   fold. 

But  how  about  the  ordinary  chair-sitting  citizen  who  never  climbs 
into  a  prize-ring  or  laces  on  a  spiked  shoe?  Does  smoking  affect  his 
vitality,  shorten  his  life  and  nudge  him  down  the  trash  skid  before  his 
time?  The  grim  monosyllabic  answer,  based  on  medical  testimony,  is 
"yes."  Heavy  smoking  has  a  positive  and  demonstrably  bad  effect  on 
longevity,  physical  and  nervous  energy,  and  general  health. 

With  every  puff,  heavy  smokers  shorten  their  own  lives.  Dr.  Ray- 
mond Pearl  of  John  Hopkins  found  that  among  100,000  heavy  (over 
ten  cigarettes  a  day)  smokers,  53,774  die  before  the  age  of  60.  Among 
the  same  number  of  non-smokers,  only  43,436  die  before  that  age. 
"Smoking,"  he  announced,  "is  associated  with  definite  impairment  of 
longevity.  This  impairment  is  proportional  to  the  habitual  amount  of 
tobacco  used."  Even  if  you  smoke  moderately,  you  have  much  less 
chance  of  reaching  60  than  if  you  don't  smoke  at  all.  It's  a  slow 
count,  but  it  gets  you  finally. 

The  cause  of  most  of  the  trouble  is,  of  course,  nicotine.  No  one 
has  ever  denied  that  nicotine  is  poison.  Taken  clear,  it  is  as  quick- 
acting  and  fatal  as  prussic  acid.  A  drop  of  it  on  a  shaved  rabbit  causes 
immediate  convulsions  and  death.  The  nicotine  dissolved  out  of  a  few 
cigarettes  and  placed  on  the  tongue  of  a  grown  man  would  kill  him  in 
fifteen  minutes.  Luckily  the  bulk  of  the  nicotine  in  tobacco  is  volati- 
lized in  smoke;  you  do  not  get  the  poison  straight.  But  if  you  smoke 
a  pack  a  day,  you  inhale  four  hundred  milligrammes  of  it  a  week.  That 
much  in  a  single  dose  would  kill  you  as  quick  as  a  bullet. 

This  powerful  poison  is  the  source  of  all  the  "pleasure"  derived 
from  smoking.  It  touches  off  the  mechanism  by  which  the  adrenal 
glands  release  quick  energy  from  the  liver  and  muscles.  You  do  get 
a  "lift"  when  you  light  a  cigarette.  But  it's  exactly  like  the  lift  you 
get  from  cocaine,  heroin,  marijuana.  All  these  things  can  stimulate 
the  adrenals,  cause  a  momentary  increase  of  sugar  in  the  blood.  Under 
the  flogging  of  the  nicotine  whip,  the  body  burns  up  sugar  faster; 
heart  action,  respiration  and  blood  pressure  are  kept  at  a  ding-dong 
pitch.  At  the  end  of  a  two-pack  day,  the  smoker's  system  has  re- 
ceived an  unmerciful  beating.  Impoverished  nerves  and  body  cells  cry 
out  with  fatigue  and  irritation.  The  chain-smoker  suffers  from  a 
chronic  "tired  feeling."  He  is  an  energy  bankrupt  and  must  borrow 
new  energy  at  the  outrageous  interest  rate  of  still  heavier  smoking. 
Meanwhile,  his  food  tastes  like  a  motorman's  glove,  and  a  hacking  cough 
keeps  his  throat  as  raw  as  a  sandpaper  blister.      Some  fun,   smoking! 


Mei,  1942  TE  KARERE  131 

But  these  are  minor  matters.  Nicotine  leaps  straight  at  the  heart 
and  circulatory  system.  Smoking  even  one  cigarette  narrows  every 
blood  vessel  in  your  body.  Dr.  Alexis  Carrel  states  that  even  one  puff 
from  a  cigarette  contracts  the  tiniest  capillaries  in  your  legs  and  feet. 
As  a  result  of  this  constriction,  the  heart  must  pump  faster  and  harder 
in  order  to  force  blood  through  the  narrowed  arteries.  The  resultant 
strain  is  clearly  shown  in  electro-cardiographic  examinations.  The  Life 
Extension  Institute,  which  makes  thousands  of  these  examinations 
annually,  lists  excessive  smoking  high  among  causes  of  anginal  heart 
attacks  and  Buerger's  disease — the  latter  a  horribly  painful  blocking 
and  tightening  of  the  blood  vessels  in  the  body  extremities.  Nicotine 
also  causes  undue  amounts  of  hydrochloric  acid  to  pour  into  the 
stomach.  Heartburn,  indigestion  and  "acid"  conditions  are  directly 
traceable   to    excessive   smoking,   and 


an    almost    certain    way    of    getting      j  AARONic  priesthood 

stomach  ulcers  is  to  smoke  regularly  anniversary 

on  an   empty  stomach. 

n    .       .       ,.  .       ,,     .,              ,       ,  May    15th,    1829,    Joseph    Smith 

But   niCOtina  isn't   the    Only   tOXIC  j  and    Oliver    Cowdery    received    the 

Substance     found  in     tobaCCO.      When  j  Aaronic       Priesthood       under       the 

you     inhale,     you  take     carbon     mon-  I  hands  of  John  the  Baptist  at  Har- 

17     .  i                    '     *'.  it             •  1  :  mony,    Pennsylvania,    U.S.A.       The 

oxide,   ammonia,    carbolic   acid,   pyri-      ;  angeiic    visitant    claimed    that    he 

dine       and      a      host       Of      tarry      Sub-        i    was    acting   under   the   direction    of 

Stances  into  your  lungs and  through        j    Peter    James  and  John,  the  ancient 

,  i  .    ,  Till  n.      l  :    Apostles,  who  held  the  keys  of  the 

them  into  your  blood  stream.  Carbon      ;  Higher     Priesthood,     which     was 

monoxide     causes     headaches;     ammo-        i    called    the    Priesthood    of    Melchi- 

nia    irritates   your    nose    and   throat.      i  zed^y  A        .   ,,  .    .,      . ..         . 

-r,       •  t  •  j>    i    •       •.         l      .c    li  :  The  Aaronic  Priesthood  through- 

Pyridme  is  a  powerful  irritant  of  the  ;  out  the  Mission  is  asked  to  re- 
bronchial  tubes.  The  tarry  substances  !  member  this  day,  and  Branch 
COat  your  tongue,  blacken  your  I  Presidents  may  with  wisdom  and 
,,11                 fi         _i_j.     j.           i    __  :  counsel     arrange     and     prepare     a 

teeth    and    are    thought    to    play    an      i   suitabie    programme    provided    by 

important  part  in  Causing  mouth  and  |  the  members  of  this  Priesthood 
tdlgue   Cancer,   found   oftenest  among        I    °J?    the    Sunday    nearest    the    15th 

heavy  smokers.  Arsenic,  sprayed  on  \  *  ay" 
tobacco  plants  to  kill  insects,  remains 
in  the  processed  tobacco  in  measurable  quantity.  The  scorching  heat  of 
the  smoke  itself,  reaching  140  degrees  as  your  cigarette  burns  down 
toward  the  end,  sears  the  mucous  membrane  of  nose,  throat  and  lungs, 
reducing  your  resistance  to  colds  and  other  respiratory  diseases.  "Not 
a  cough  in  a  carload"  may  be  true  about  cigarettes  themselves — the 
cough  is  in  the  smoker's  roughened  throat  and  congested  chest. 

Too  many  people  accept  their  craving  for  tobacco  as  a  common- 
place social  habit.  But  I  maintain  that  heavy  smoking  is  a  disease 
symptom.  Whenever  I  see  a  chain-smoker  in  action  I  know  at  once 
that  he  is  plain  sick  and  should  submit  to  a  searching  medical  examina- 
tion to  discover  the  underlying  cause  of  his  smoking.  On  the  physical 
side,  this  may  range  from  a  thyroid  deficiency  to  a  faulty  diet  or  a  lack 
of  exercise.  Or  there  may  be  an  emotional  factor.  My  psychiatrist 
friends  tell  me  that  most  of  their  patients  are  frantic  smokers.  When 
their  lives  get  straightened  out,  the  craving  for  tobacco  falls  away. 

I've  always  opposed  the  pernicious,  advertising  that  extolls  the 
"benefits"  of  tobacco-using.  While  I  was  training  for  my  second  tight 
with  Jack  Dempsey  I  was  offered  fifteen  thousand  dollars  to  endorse 
a  certain  brand  of  cigarettes.  I  didn't  want  to  be  rude,  so,  in  doc-lin- 
ing, I  merely  said  I  didn't  smoke.  Next  day  the  advertising  man  came 
back  with  another  offer:  twelve  thousand  dollars  if  I  would  let  my 
picture  be  used  with  the  statement  that  "Stinkies  must  be  .uood.  be- 
cause all  my  friends  smoke  them."  That  compelled  me  to  say  what  1 
thought — that  cigarettes  were  a  foul  pestilence,  and  thai  advertising 
which  promoted   their   use  was  a  national   menace. 


132  TE  KARERE  Mei.  1942 

I  am  here  reminded  of  the  Metropolitan  Opera  tenor  whose  picture 
was  blazoned  on  billboards  with  this  joyful  declamation:  "Gaspies  Do 
Not  Hurt  My  Throat."  When  asked  about  it,  he  laughed  and  replied: 
"It  is  true,  Gaspies  never  hurt  my  throat — I  don't  smoke." 

Such  misleading  advertising  I  cannot  rap  too  hard.  It  is  danger- 
ous, particularly  to  our  thirty-five  million  young  people.  To  contract 
the  tobacco  habit  when  the  growth  factors  of  the  body  are  exerting 
themselves  to  their  maximum  is  to  handicap  oneself  physically  and 
mentally  for  life. 

To  me  -the  ugliest  of  advertising  is  that  which  features  soldiers 
or  sailors  smoking  cigarettes.  As  Director  of  the  Navy's  Physical  Fit- 
ness Programme,  I  can  bluntly  say  that  few  things  could  be  worse  for 
physical  fitness  than  promoting  the  cigarette  habit. 

Sentimentalists  will  object:  "Why  deprive  the  boys  of  the  innocent 
pleasure  of  tobacco?"  My  reply  is:  "Should  our  citizen  army  be  less 
rigidly  conditioned  than  a  college  football  team?"  And  here's  a 
special  word  to  mothers — send  -your  boy  in  camp  athletic  equipment 
instead  of  cigarettes — a  baseball  mitt  or  a  set  of  boxing  gloves. 

If  you  think  this  sounds  goody-goody,  take  a  look  at  my  com- 
panions in  the  non-smoking  section.  The  late  Knute  Rockne,  Notre 
Dame's  wonder  coach,  said:  "'Tobacco  slows  up  reflexes,  lowers  morale; 
any  advertising  that  says  smoking  helps  an  athlete  is  a  falsehood  and 
a  fraud."  William  Muldoon,  famous  conditioner  of  men,  considered 
nicotine  the  greatest  harm  to  health  in  the  modern  world.  Ty  Cobb, 
the  famous  Georgia  Peach  of  baseball,  says:  "Cigarette  smoking  stupe- 
fies the  brain,  saps  vitality,  undermines  health  and  weakens  moral  fibre. 
No  one  who  hopes  to  be  successful  in  any  line  can  afford  to  contract 
so  detrimental  a  habit."  In  the  face  of  such  testimony  I  can  only 
ask,  with  Tolstoi:  "Why  do  men  stupefy  themselves  with  tobacco?" 

I  have  never  heard  a  sensible  reply.  But  let  me  tell  you  the 
story  of  the  Bedouin  chief  who  told  the  young  men  of  his  tribe :  "There 
are  three  good  reasons  for  smoking:  First,  if  you  smoke  enough  tobacco, 
you  smell  so  strong  the  dogs  will  never  bite  you.  Second,  if  you 
smoke  long  enough,  you  will  develop  a  lung  trouble  which  will  make 
you  cough  even  when  you  sleep.  Robbers  hearing  you  cough  will  think 
you  are  awake  and  so  will  not  try  to  steal  vour  belongings.  Third, 
if  you  smoke  as  much  as  you  can,  you  will  have  many  diseases,  and 
will  die  young." 


CANNING  OPERATIONS  IN  FULL  SWING 

Canning  operations  are  in  full  swing  at  Church  Welfare  centres 
throughout  the  West  and  it  is  expected  that  1,500,000  cans  of  fruit, 
vegetables  and  fish  will  be  stored  this  season,  Welfare  Plan  officials 
said  recently  in  Salt  Lake. 

In  addition  to  filling  Welfare  Plan  elevators  with  grain  the  Wel- 
fare workers  reported  that  they  are  accumulating  wheat  and  barley 
at  regional  storehouses. 

Canning  plants  are  operated  at  St.  George,  Hurricane,  Salt  Lake 
and  Ogden,  Utah;  Idaho  Falls  and  Boise,  Ida.;  Mesa,  Ariz.;  Long  Beach, 
San  Diego,  Gridley  and  Yuba  City,  California.  The  salmon  cannery 
at  Portland  is  ready  to  begin  operations  within  a  few  days,  is  was 
reported. 

Meanwhile,  Welfare  workers  of  the  Salt  Lake  Region  made  plans 
to  assemble  one  evening  at  7.30  in  Barratt  Hall  to  discuss  new  pro- 
grammes for  the  20  stakes  in  this  area.  Principal  speakers  to  be 
Bishop  Marvin  O.  Ashton  and  Bishop  Joseph  L.  Wirthlin  of  the  Pre- 
siding Bishopric  and  Amy  Brown  Lyman,  general  president  of  the 
National  Women's  Relief  Society. 


Mei,  1942  TE  KARERE  133 

Relief  Society  Centennial 
Celebrations 

MANGERE  BRANCH: 

The  evening  of  the  17th  March,  1942,  just  100  years  since  the 
organization  of  the  Relief  Society  of  the  Church,  a  fine  gathering  of 
Saints  and  friends,  including  President  and  Sister  Cowley,  gathered 
at  Onehunga  in  honour  and  praise  of  the  worth  and  work  of  the  Relief 
Society  in  its  centennial  year  of  service  in  the  world.  We  feel  proud 
that  some  of  our  people  belong  to  such  an  organization  and  are  grateful 
for  the  leadership  and  companionship  of  the  women  of  Zion  who  have 
at  sundry  times  dedicated  their  many  years  of  service  and  fellowship 
to    our   cause   in   New   Zealand. 

Our  celebration  services  and  ceremonies  were  perhaps  not  of  the 
best,  yet  in  our  genuine  endeavour  to  do  what  is  right  we  have  felt 
the  full  strength  of  the  spirit  of  eternal  uplift  and  joy  that  comes  from 
mingling  in-spirit  with  what  the  past  has  to  offer  and  pledging  our 
efforts  this  day  on  to  be  found  worthy  of  such  worthwhile  experiences. 

AUCKLAND  BRANCH: 

March  18th,  at  6  p.m.,  a  gathering  of  Saints  and  friends  watched 
the  "tree-planting"  ceremony  where  Sister  Elva  T.  Cowley  directed, 
President  Matthew  Cowley  offering  the  dedicatorial  prayer  and  Sister 
Billman,  President  of  the  Society,  turned  the  first  lot  of  earth,  fol- 
lowed by  her  counsellor  and  secretary,  Sisters  Purcell  and  Cameron. 
A  buffet  dinner  was  thoroughly  enjoyed  by  all  present.  In  the 
course  of  the  evening  speeches  were  given  by  selected  Sisters  and 
Brothers   appropriate   to   the   occasion. 

A  very  delightful  atmosphere  prevailed,  and  the  Sisters  of  Relief 
Society  are  to  be  honoured  and  congratulated  upon  the  successful 
celebrations  and  the  spirit  of  uplift  that  was  enjoyed  by  all  present. 

WAIROA  and  HURIA  BRANCHES: 

March  15th,  President  Matthew  Cowley  and  Sister  Polly  Duncan, 
President  of  the  Mission  Relief  Society,  and  Bro.  Wi  Duncan  attended 
the  Centennial  Celebrations  held  at  Judea  during  the  Sunday  School 
and  evening  service.  The  meetings  were  very  inspirational  and  instruc- 
tional. Much  information  pertaining  to  the  Relief  Society,  its  organiz- 
ation and  its  work  was  given  in  various  ways  by  the  many  speakers. 

During  the  course  of  his  talk  President  Cowley  was  moved  upon 
by  the  spirit  to  urge  repentance  and  better  living  of  the  Gospel  by  the 
Saints  and  the  choicest  blessings  of  the  Lord  could  not  be  withheld 
from  them:  "I  promise  you  by  the  authority  of  the  Priesthood  I  hold 
and  as  Mission  President,  all  your  sins  will  be  blotted  out,  you  will 
be  happier  and  you  will  have  everlasting  happiness,  if  you  will  cease 
to  do  the  evils  that  now  beset  you  and  live  the  Gospel  of  Jesus  Christ 
of  Latter-day  Saints."  Such  a  promise  is  the  natural  right  of  a  ser- 
vant of  God,  for  it  is  predicated  on  law. 

KIRI   KIRI-OMAHU   BRANCH: 

The  Kiri  Kiri  Chapel  was  the  scene  of  the  Centennial  Celebrations 
held  March  22nd,  1942,  under  the  direction  of  Sister  Rachel  Randell, 
President  of  the  Society.  During  the  41  years  of  the  organisation  ol' 
the  Relief  Society  in  this  Branch  much  has  been  done.  Sister  Pani- 
kena  Totaea  (now  dead,  mother  of  present  President)  was  called 
and  set  apart  as  the  first  President  on  June  8th,  L901,  by  President 
John  E.  Magleby,  and  as  her  first  counsellor  Whakamura  Watene,  who 


134  TE  KARERE  Mri.  1942 

was  present,  and,  during  the  course  of  the  service,  was  asked  to  speak 
and  participate  in  the  "cake-cutting"  ceremony  with  Sister  Kahukore. 
President  Toke  Watene  of  the  Hauraki  District  read  an  excerpt 
from  the  minutes  of  Record  Book  No.  2,  Hauraki  District,  Australasian 
Mission,  by  Elder  Andrew  Oldroyd,  page  167,  as  follows:  "Saturday 
morning,  June  8th,  1901,  where  the  Saints  of  the  Hauraki  District  had 
assembled  tor  District  Conference.  2.30  p.m.:  President  John  E. 
Magleby  thought  it  would  be  well  to  organize  a  Relief  Society  here. 
Having  talked  the  matter  over,  it  was  decided  to  convene  at  7  p.m. 
for  the  purpose.  7.  p.m.  meeting:  The  organization  was  effected,  the 
following  officers  being  chosen  unanimously  by  the  people  and  set  apart. 
Panikena  Totaea  President  by  John  E.  Magleby,  Whakamura  Pirimona 
First  Counsellor  by  District  President 

Andrew    Oldroyd,    Mata    Pokaiti    Te      ! 

Aroha    Second    Counsellor    by    A.    S.      |   ^J'^otWSTZ  b£ 

Ferrin."  |    and     Sister     Eru     Kupa    of     Motuti, 

Such  were   Some   of  the  things  that        !    North     Auckland.        Brother     Kupa 

transpired    during    our    celebrations,      j  XiTy  nSUFaUTto  £ 

Which    we    enjoyed    thoroughly.                          j  tend     the     recent     celebrations      in 

i  Korongata,  this  probably  being  the 

uuiif-ATA    imctdi/^t                                             :  first    time    in     recent     years     since 

WA1K.AIU    LH&lKlll:                                           i  Bro.   Kupa  has  been  able  to  mingle 

Away  in  a  secluded  spot,  with  vp--      |  gjjj^ such    a    *atherin*    "f    lh<-' 
gin    bush    on    the    hills    in    the    back-  Even  in  his  recent  bereavement, 

ground    and    a    Stream    Of    pure    fresh        j    Ero.    Eru    has    evinced    a    courage 

water    peacefully    flowing    below    the       j  »nd  steadfastness  that  matches  his 

linmpstpflH      n     lintinv    hqnd     of     ^nint<;        i    faith   and    testimony   of   the   truth- 

noiKhtcaa,    a   nappy    Dana   oi    baints  ,   fulness  of  the  Gospel  and  its  at- 

and    friends    from    Kopuku  —  Hemi  ;   tendant   message   and    promise   of 

Paki    and   family,    Pukekohe — Ratoru  I   life    everlasting    though    we    pari 

Mikaere  and  family,  24  in  all,  met  in  !  fro™  loved  oneB.™  th,s   htf' 

,,        ,  ,.    -p,  j    a-  j.         -r»  i  We    sorrow    with    you    and    your 

the  home  of  Bro.  and  Sister  Beazley.  j  ff0od  wife  and  family,  and  only 
Xc  \v  Brighton,  for  the  Relief  Society  !  hope  that  our  expressions  of 
Celebrations,  March  22nd,  1942.    The      I   sympathy  can  find  as  practical  and 

....  J       ,  -,     .i  ,  t  :    undaunting   evidence  as  that   shown 

interesting   features   of   the   day,   be-      ;   by  you  and  Sister  Mihi.— Ed. 

sides  the  dedication  of  a  young  pohu-      ; j 

tukawa   tree    as   a   memorial   tree   to 

the  100th  anniversary  of  the  Relief  Society  in  the  Church,  by  Brother 
George  Watene,  was  the  lighting  of  the  100  candles  on  the  Birthday 
Cake  by  one  friend  Sister  and  the  blowing  out  of  the  candles  by  another 
friend  Sister,  who  was  the  oldest  member  of  the  group  (Auntie  Pare- 
arita),  and  then  the  cutting  of  the  cake  by  the  newest  member  of  the 
Church  (Mary  Hautonga),  who  was  baptized  and  confirmed  that  day 
by  George  Watene. 

The  celebrations  went  late  into  the  night  and  all  went  home  happy 
and  filled  both  spiritually  and  temporally.  Sister  Rose  Beazley  with 
Sister  Hine  Paki,  who  were  both  present,  represented  the  Waikato 
District  Relief  Society  Presidency. 

AWAPUNI    BRANCH: 

Members  and  friends,  about  30  in  number,  met  at  the  home  of 
Sister  Adelaide  Poananga  to  celebrate  the  Centennial  of  the  Relief 
Society.  What  a  beautiful  day.  Our  programme  commenced  with 
the  hymn  "We  Thank  Thee  O  God  for  a  Prophet"  and  the  prayer 
by  WThiro  Fitzgerald.  After  another  song,  Sister  Adelaide  Poananga 
recounted  the  historical  background  of  the  Society  as  it  affected  the 
Church  both  here  and  in  Zion.  Sister  Paki  as  President  of  the  Society 
welcomed   all   on   behalf   of  the   Society. 

The  haangi  which  was  prepared  provided  much  of  the  banquet 
eats.  There  were  two  cakes,  one  for  Bro.  Heremaia  Fitzgerald,  cele- 
brating his  90th  birthday,  and  the  Centennial  Cake,  part  of  which  was 
taken  to   the   H.B.   District   Celebrations  held   at  Korongata,   Hastings. 


Mei,  1942  TE  KARERE  135 

The  honour  of  cutting  the  Relief  Society  Cake  went  to  one  of  the  oldest 
and  most  loved  and  respected  members  and  mother  in  the  Mission,  Sister 
Waitokorau  Tamihana    (Granny  Wai). 

TE  HORO  BRANCH: 

I  te  17  o  Maehe  nei  ka  tu  te  huihuinga  o  te  Hui  Atawhai  o  Te 
Horo.  I  timata  to  matou  karakia  i  te  1  o  nga  haora  i  te  awatea,  na  Te 
Wairere  Tirarau  i  whakahaere  to  matou  karakia,  koia  hoki  te  timaki  o 
te  Hui  Atawhai  i  tenei  wa,  i  muri  mai  ia  Heni  R.  Kiharoa.  Te  ahua  o 
to  matou  huihuinga  he  whakanui  i  te  "Ra  paunga  o  te  Rau  Tau"  i  tu 
ai  te  Hui  Atawhai.  Te  nui  o  nga  wahine  i  tae  mai  e  24,  nga  tane  e  5. 
I  te  mutunga  o  te  karakia  ka  haere  matou  ki  te  whakato  inga  rakau 
i  mauria  mai  e  nga  wahine  o  ia  Hui  Atawhai  o  ia  Hui  Atawhai — kotahi 
no  Te  Horo  (Rakau  Rau  Tau) — kotahi  no  Awarua  (he  tohu  whakama- 
haratanga  mo  Erana  Reweti) — kotahi  no  Kaikou,  e  rua  no  Ruatangata 
me  tetahi  ano  no  Te  Horo,  hui  katoa  e  ono.  E  wha  o  enei  rakau  hei 
tohu  whakamaharatanga  ki  nga  apiha  me  nga  mema  o  te  Hui  Atawhai 
kua  mate  i  roto  i  nga  tau  maha. 

Na  Te  Wairere  Tirarau  i  whakato  te  Rakau  Rau  Tau  o  Te  Horo, 
to  Awarua  na  Mere  Atawhai  i  whakato,  to  Kaikou  na  Taoho  Hone  Pepe, 
to  Erana  Reweti  na  Ngawai  Ruwhiu,  o  te  Ruatangata  na  Te  Ruma 
Hereora,  na  Raniera  H.  Rewi  i  whakatapu  nga  rakau  katoa,  i  tu  ia  i  te 
taha  o  te  Rakau  Rau  Tau. 

I  oti  pai  enei  mahi  katoa,  i  te  po  ka  timata  ano  nga  mahi,  he 
whakaahua  i  nga  mahi  a  nga  timuakitanga  o  te  Hui  Atawhai  i  o  ratou 
nei  wa. 

Tuatahi,  Erena  Reweti — tuarua,  Maehe  R.  H.  Rewi — tuatoru,  Heni 
R.  Kiharoa — me  Te  Wairere  Tirarau. 

HAWKE'S   BAY   DISTRICT: 

Although  the  weather  immediately  preceding  and  following  the 
22nd  March,  1942,  was  not  the  best,  strange  to  say  that  during  the  Sab- 
bath a  beautiful  warm  day  was  our  lot  at  the  Relief  Society  Centennial 
Celebrations  held  at  Korongata,   Hastings. 

The  work  of  the  marae  and  the  preparation  for  programmes,  etc., 
were  mostly  accomplished  by  the  women.  It  is  wonderful  what  can 
happen  when  Sisters  of  the  Relief  Society  throughout  the  district  are 
able  to  put  forth  the  effort  and  co-operate  one  with  another  in  putting 
over  such  a  wonderful  Hui.  A  Hui  it  was,  for  President  Cowley  had 
invited  all  District  Presidencies  of  the  Mission  to  attend,  as  he  had 
special  instructions  for  them  to  take  back  to  their  districts  and  for 
their  branches.  The  only  districts  not  represented  by  a  member  of 
the  Presidency  were  Auckland  and  Otago. 

The  Saturday  evening  activity  took  the  form  of  a  dance  to  help 
defray  expenses,  and  it  is  gratifying  to  know  that  it  did  help  consider- 
ably. The  Relief  Society  Presidency  of  the  District  were  in  direct 
control  of  all  activities,  working  with  all  units  within  the  district  and 
having  the  advice  of  all  officers  of  the  Mission  Presidency  and  Board 
with  the  exception  of  Sister  Ellen  Heperi,  although  Brother  llohena 
Heperi  was  there  to  enjoy  everything.  In  the  morning,  while  the 
Priesthood  met,  with  President  Cowley  in  charge,  giving  instructions, 
etc.,  the  Sisters  had  their  first  meeting,  and  at  10.30  a.m.  a  general 
meeting  with  specially  prepared  talks  pertaining  to  the  Relief  Society 
and  portraying  its  life  from  its  humble  beginning  in  L842  in  America 
to  the  present,  and  its  historical  life  in  New  Zealand,  even  to  its 
organization  in  the  Hawke's  Bay  District  and  its  several  Branches. 
A  wonderful  service,  expressing  appreciation  ami  emitting  a  Mow  of 
re-energising  current  of  vigour,  faith,  courage  and  ability  to  do  the 
wonderful  works  of  the  Lord.  President  Cowley  was  the  only  male 
speaker  during  the  service,  and  his  tributes  and  thoughts  wore  turned 


136  TE  KARERE  Mei,  1942 

to  the  honour  and  grace  of  the  Mothers  of  the  Church — the  Relief 
Society  Sisters. 

In  the  early  afternoon  the  special  birthday  banquet  was  a  treat  in 
food  and  ability  to  cater  for  the  many  hundreds  that  were  present. 
The  large  "Centennial  Birthday  Cake  with  100  candles"  was  cut,  and 
pieces  presented  to  each  guest.  There  were  several  large  pieces  of  "Cen- 
tennial cakes"  from  other  Branches  and  Districts  which  were  given 
to  President  and  Sister  Cowley. 

The  evening  and  final  service  at  7.30  p.m.  was  a  fitting  climax  to 
the  work  of  the  Relief  Society.  Meeting  did  not  let  out  until  nearly 
midnight.  The  many  District  Presidency  representatives  were  given 
opportunity  to  speak  in  this  meeting  and  their  extollations  were  high 
indeed — they  were  highly  satisfied  for  coming  the  long  distances  that 
some  of  them  did;  what  a  wonderful  chapel,  grounds  and  homes  the 
people  of  Korongata  had,  and  what  an  experience  to  remember  the 
Centennial   Celebrations  held  at  Korongata. 

Many,  many  thanks  and  expressions  of  appreciation  "Te  Karere" 
has  been  asked  to  extend  to  the  people  who  made  the  successful  cele- 
brations possible.  To  the  people  of  the  marae,  of  the  individual 
Branches  of  the  District  who  so  willingly  assisted,  and  to  the  District 
Presidency  of  the  Relief  Society,  Sisters  Reremoana  Kingi,  Teiti  Mc- 
Llroy,  Olive  Edwards  and  Meriana  Whakamoe,  for  organizing  such  an 
uplifting  Hui. 


True  dignity  abides  with  him  alone 

AYho,  in  the  patient  hour  of  silent  thought 

Can  still  respect  and  still  revere  himself. — Wordsworth. 

LIVING  < 

A  few  simple  things  T  must  learn  to  do 
If  I  would  make  my  life  happy  and  true; 
To  work  with  a  deft  skill  and  cheerful  will. 
To  play  with  merry  glee  that  gives  a  thrill, 
To  think  the  thoughts  that  are  highest  and  best, 
To  pray  with  the  faith  of  the  pure  and  blest, 
To  love  neighbour  and  gladly  take  his  part, 
And  to  serve  God  with  hand,  head,  and  heart. 

— Nephi  Jensen 


THREE  THINGS 
Three  things  of  value  and  worth  supreme : 
A  body  that  is  strong,  sound  and  clean, 
A  brain  that  is  clear  and  holds  truth  secure 
And  a  heart  that  is  pure  as  gold  is  pure. 

— Nephi  Jensen. 


Material  to  be  printed  in  Te  Karere  MUST  reach  the  Editor's 
Office,  Box  72,  Auckland,  before  the  FIRST  DAY  OF  EACH 
MONTH.  There  is  a  war  on,  and  it  assists  Te  Karere  and  the 
"printers"  if  we  can  be  assured  of  your  co-operation. 


Mei,  1942  TE  KARERE  137 

SUNDAY  SCHOOL 

Theme —  S 

"OUR  HOMES  AND   CHAPELS   SHALL   BE   BEAUTIFUL" 

"For  Zion  must  increase  in  beauty  and  in  Holiness;  her  borders  \ 

must  be  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened ;  yea  verily  I  say 
unto  you.    Zion  must  arise  and  put  on  her  beautiful  garments."  j 

— Doctrine  &  Covenants  82 :  14. 


IN  HONOUR  OF  THE  MOTHERS  OF  MEN 
The  second  Sunday  of  May  is  set  aside  as  a  national  day 
of  homage  to  the  women  who  have  aspired  to  motherhood. 
This  day  and  its  attendant  services  hold  a  very  significant 
place  in  life  of  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day 
Saints.  Let  every  man,  woman  and  child  honour  this  day 
with  their  highest  thoughts  and  righteous  deeds  to  the  memory, 
honour  and  service  of  their  mothers. 

We  ask  that  all  Sunday  School  Superintendents  make 
special  preparations  for  suitable  commemoration  of  this  hal- 
lowed occasion. 

CONCERT  RECITATION 
Doctrine  and  Covenants  27 :  2. 

"For,  behold,  I  say  unto  you,  that  it  mattereth  not  what  ye 
shall  eat  or  what  ye  shall  drink  when  ye  partake  of  the  sacrament, 
if  it  so  be  that  ye  do  it  with  an  eye  single  to  my  glory — remembering 
unto  the  Father  my  body  which  was  laid  down  for  you,  and  my 
blood  which  was  shed  for  the  remission  of  your  sins." 

KORERO  A  NGAKAU 
Akoranga  me  nga  Kawenata  27 :  2. 

"No  te  mea,  nana,  ko  taku  kupu  tenei  ki  a  koe,  kaore  he  tikanga 
mo  ta  koutou  e  kai  ai,  e  inu  ai  ranei,  i  nga  \va  e  tango  ai  koutou  i 
te  hakaremeta,  ki  te  meatia  e  koutou  i  runga  i  te  whakaaro  tapatahi 
atu  ki  toku  kororia;  e  whakaaro  ana  ki  te  aroaro  o  te  Matua  mo  taku 
tinana  i  whakatakotoria  nei  mo  koutou.  me  oku  toto  i  whakahekea 
nei  hei  murunga  atu  i  o  koutou  hara." 

SACRAMENT  GEM 
In  remembrance  of  Thy   suffering, 
I  ,ord,  these  emblems  we  partake, 
When  Thyself  Thou  gav'sl  an  offering 

I  )ying   for  the  sinner's  sake. 

LESSONS 

KINDERGARTEN    (4  to   5  years).      Thought:  "Truthfulness  and   For- 
giveness." 


138  TE  KARERE  Mu.  L942 

"King    Solomon's   Judgment"    (1    Kings   3) 
"Ananias   and   Sapphira"    (Acts   5) 
"The    Prodigal   Son"    (Luke    15) 

PRIMARY    (6   to   9   years). 

"The  Youth  Who  Chose  Wisdom"    (1   Kings  3  and  4)       Thought: 

"The  Lord  loves  him  who  desires  wisdom." 
"A   Beautiful   Temple"    (1    Kings   6)      Thought:   "We   can   honour 

the  Lord   by  building  Temples." 
"Boys  For  Sale"  (2  Kings  4)     Thought:  "The  Lord  remembers  the 

faithful  in  the  time  of  their  need." 

CHURCH  HISTORY   (10  and  11  years). 

"A  Wonderful  Conversion"  (Alma  18  and  19)  Thought:  "Good- 
ness of  God."  Facts:  Amnion — God  gives  him  great  power — 
a  faithful  missionary — preaches  to  the  Lamanites  —  King 
Lamoni  converted — thousands  follow. 
"Anti-Nephi-Lehies"  (Alma  23  and  24)  Thought:  "Repentance 
leads  to  Godliness."  Facts:  People  of  Anti-Nephi-Lehi — con- 
venant  not  to  shed  blood — bury  weapons  of  war — refuse  to 
defend  themselves — many  are  killed. 

A  &  B  DEPARTMENTS   (12  to  15,   16  to  19  years). 

"A    Leader    in    the    Nation."     (Genesis    41)  What    to    look    for: 

Pharaoh's  answer  to  Joseph's  council.  What  Pharaoh  did  to  have 
Joseph  acknowledged  as  second  ruler  over  Egypt.  How  Joseph  went 
about  his  task.  The  blessings  that  came  to  Joseph.  Problems:  How 
old  was  Joseph  when  he  became  Prime  Minister?  How  much  did 
Joseph  take  of  each  year's  crop?  Over  what  lands  did  the  famine  ex- 
tend? Whom  did  Joseph  marry?  Discuss  the  attitude  of  man  toward 
God  for  the  accomplishment  of  His  great  purposes? 

"The  Measure  of  a  Man"  (Genesis  42  to  45)  What  to  look  for: 
The  reason  for  Jacob's  sending  his  sons  to  Egypt.  Joseph's  nobility 
shown  in  the  reception  of  his  brothers.  The  story  of  Benjamin  being 
taken  to  Egypt.  Judah's  supplication  in  behalf  of  his  brother  Ben- 
jamin. The  incidents  on  the  return  trip  from  Egypt  when  they  took 
Benjamin  back  to  Canaan.  Problems:  Why  did  Joseph  hold  Simeon  in 
Egypt?  Why  were  the  brothers  afraid  when  they  found  money  in 
the  sacks  and  what  did  they  do?  What  happened  when  Joseph's  cup 
was  found  in  Benjamin's  sack?  What  were  Joseph's  gifts  to  his 
brothers  and  father?      Name  the  eleven  brothers  of  Joseph. 

C  DEPARTMENT    (20  to  25  years). 

"The  Apostles  Called  to  go  on  a  Mission"  (Matthew  9:  35  to  11:1; 
Mark  6:  7-13,  and  Luke  9  and  11).  Problems:  Who  are  the  lost  sheep 
of  Israel?  Why  were  the  apostles  sent  only  to  them?  What  is  meant 
by  "He  that  loseth  his  life  shall  find  it?"  What  similarities  do  you 
find  between  the  duty  of  the  twelve  disciples  of  Christ  and  the  apostles 
of  to-day? 

"The  Execution  of  John  the  Baptist  at  Macherus"  (Matthew  14; 
Mark  6;  Luke  9.)  Problems:  Why  is  John  the  Baptist  called  a  mar- 
tyr? What  evidence  did  John  give  the  world  that  he  loved  the  gospel 
more  than  his  life?  (See  John  3:29-32  and  Matt.  3:7-9).  How  is 
John  the   Baptist  connected  with  this  dispensation? 

Review  all  you  can  on  the  life  of  John  the  Baptist. 

GOSPEL  DOCTRINE    (Others  not  already   assigned). 

"The  Lamentations  of  Jeremiah."  (Lamentations  1  to  5)  Helps: 
The  solitude  and  misery  of  the  city — the  ruin — the  bitterness  of  the 
sorrow — the  suffering  the  consequence  of  sin — the  miseries  endured — 
prayer  for   deliverance. 


Mei,  1942  TE  KARERE  139 

"The  Remnant  of  Judah  in  the  Holy  Land."  (2  Kings  25;  Jere- 
miah 39-44)  Helps:  Gedaliah  appointed  governor  over  the  land  of 
Judah — the  governor  warned  of  a  plot  against  his  life — Gedaliah  mur- 
dered by  Ishmael — captives  taken  away — captives  rescued  by  Johanan 
— the  flight  to  Egypt  against  the  will  of  the  Lord — the  fall  of  Egypt 
predicted — idolatry  of  the  Israelites. 

MAORI  CLASS. 

RATAPU   TUATAHI 

TE  KOATI  ORA.  Te  koati  ora  me  te  aata  whakahere  hara  o 
Iharaira  o  nehe,  mehemea  he  mea  whakarite  i  runga  i  te  ngakau 
ripeneta  me  te  ngakau  papaku  i  whakaaetia  e  te  Ariki  hei  whakamama 
i  nga  hara  o  te  iwi.  He  wahi  hei  tirohanga  ko  nga  tikanga  whaka- 
here he  wahi  nui  nei  he  wahi  hoki  e  ahei  ana  i  roto  i  nga  tikanga  o 
te  ture  a  Mohi,  ko  enei  tikanga  kua  tu  noa  atu  i  mua  i  te  whakatopu- 
tanga  o  Iharaira  hei  iwi  motuhake;  i  te  mea,  kua  whakaaturia  ake  ra, 
te  whakahere  i  runga  i  te  aata  e  Arama.  Te  tohu  o  te  whakahaere 
whakahere  o  nga  kararehe  hei  tauira  mo  te  whakahere  nui  kua  pa 
nei  i  muri  ki  runga  o  Kawari  he  mea  whakarite  mai  ra  ano  i  te  tima- 
tanga  o  te  hitori  o  tenei  mea  o  te  tangata. 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  Whakamaramatia  he  aha  te  whakahere  o  te  koati  ora? 

2.  No  nahea  i  timata  ai  te  tikanga  whakahere? 

3.  He  aha  te  putake  i  whakahaeretia  ai  te  whakahere  i  nga 


kararehe? 


RATAPU  TUATORU 


NGA  AHUA  WHAKAHERE.  Nga  ahua  maha  o  nga  whakahere  i 
whakatakotoria  e  te  ture  a  Mohi  kua  wahia  kia  rua  nga  karahe  he 
whakaheke  toto  he  totokore.  Nga  ohaoha  o  te  wahanga  tuatahi  anake, 
e  uru  ana  ki  tenei  te  patunga  kia  mate  rawa,  e  whakaaetia  ana  hei 
takawaenga,  hei  whakaeanga  mo  te  hara,  a  ko  te  mea  hei  whakahere- 
tanga,  hei  te  mea  ma,  ora,  kaore  he  kopatapata,  kaore  he  nawe.  No 
reira  mo  te  whakahere  nui,  ona  tukunga  iho  kaore  he  mutunga  mai, 
e  ahei  ana  hei  te  mea  ma,  hara  kore  e  whakaaetia.  E  ahei  ana  kei 
a  te  Karaiti  te  tika  kia  noho  hei  kai  whakaora  i  te  mea  koia  anake  te 
tangata  hara  kore  i  runga  i  te  mata  o  te  whenua,  a  me  te  Tama 
Kotahi  a  te  Matua,  i  runga  ake  i  nga  mea  katoa  koia  kua  whakaritea 
i  roto  i  nga  rangi  hei  kai  hoko  mo  nga  uri  tangata;  ahakoa  hoki  te 
whakaritenga  i  tenei  mea  he  whakahere  ko  tona  nui  nei  kaore  e  marama 
ana  ki  te  tangata,  otira  i  whakahaeretia  e  la  i  runga  i  te  ngakau  hihiko 
i  tana  ake  hoki  i  pai  ai.  Tae  noa  ki  te  mutunga  i  a  ia  tonu  te  tikanga 
ki  te  whakamutu  i  nga  tukino  a  ona  kai  tukino,  ina  whakahaeretia  e  ia 
tana  mana  i  whiwhi  nei  ia  o  tona  whanautanga  mai.  I  tetahi  ahua, 
ahakoa  kaore  e  tae  te  whakamarama  mai  tana  ahua  kia  tatou,  ka 
tangohia  e  te  Karaiti  ki  runga  kia  ia  te  pikaunga  taumaha  o  nga  hara 
o  nga  uri  tangata.  Te  ahuatanga  ki  o  tatou  whakaaro  maori  nei  he 
mea  ngaro,   a  ko  tona  tukunga  iho  ia  ko  te  whakaoranga  mo  tatou. 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  He  aha  nga  wahanga  whakahere  e  rua  o  roto  o  te  ture  a  Mohi? 

2.  He  aha  i  ahei  ai  ko  te   Karaiti  tonu  te  mea  tika   mo  tenei 
whakahere? 

3.  No  tehea  wa  i  rite  mai  ai  ko  te  Karaiti  hei  whakaheretanga? 

4.  Ahakoa  he  mea  ngaro  kia  tatou  te  rironga  <>  be   Karaiti  hei 
pikaunga  i  nga  hara  o  te  ao,  he  aha  te  hua  nui  i  puta  ake.' 


140  TE  KARERE  Mci,  1942 

RATAPU   TUAWHA 

MO  TE  WHAKAHERE  ANO.  Mo  to  kaiwhakaora,  mamaetanga 
nui  i  a  ia  i  ngunguru  ai  i  raro  i  te  pikaunga  o  te  hara,  koia  nei  he 
tauira  no  te  ma,  i  pehia  nuitia  e  te  mamae,  i  mea  hoki  ia  i  tenei  ra: 
"Ina,  nana,  ko  ahau  ko  te  Atua,  kua  mamae  i  enei  mamaetanga  mo  te 
katoa,  kia  kore  ai  ratou  e  mamae  me  he  mea  ka  ripeneta  ratou.  Heoi 
ki  te  kore  ratou  e  ripeneta,  ka  tino  mamae  ratou,  ka  pera  me  au.  Ko 
taua  mamaetanga  nei  i  mea  i  au  ano,  i  te  Atua,  te  nui  rawa  o  nga  mea 
katoa  kia  oioi  i  te  mamae, a  kia  heke  te  toto  i  nga  putaputa  katoa  o 
toku  tinana  raua  kote  wairua;  I  mea  hoki  ahau  kia  kaua  ahau  e  inu 
i  te  kapa  kawa,  kia  kaua  e  mate,  He  ahakoa  ra,  kia  whakariterite  ki 
nga  tamariki  a  te  tangata." 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  He  aha  te  Karaiti  i  tuku  ai  ia  ia  kia  mamae  i  nga  mamaetanga 
nui  mo  te  katoa? 

2.  Ina  kore  e  ripeneta  pehea  te  ahua? 

3.  He  aha   i  tukua  ai  e  Ihu  te  kororia  ki  te   Matua? 


HE    MATENGA 

PAREKURA  TOKOTOKO  PAEWHENUA.— I  mate  ki  te 
hohipera  o  Kawakawa,  whakahokia  mai  tona  tinana  ki  te  kainga  i 
Ruatangata,  a  mauria  ano  ki  te  marae  o  Waiomio  takoto  ai  mo  tetahi 
ra,  katahi  ano  ka  mauria  ki  tona  takotoranga  tuturu  ki  Akerama. 
He  wahine  tenei  i  ngohengohe  ki  tana  hoa,  te  Timuaki  o  te  Peka  o 
Ruatanga,  a  koia  hoki  te  Timuaki  o  to  matou  Hui  Atawhai  i  whaka- 
ritea  i  raro  i  nga  ringaringa  o  nga  kaumatua  i  te  1 1  o  nga  ra-  o 
Akuhata  1940. 

Haere  ra  e  Pare,  hoatu  ki  te  kainga,  ki  nga  matua,  ki  nget  kai 
man  i  te  whakapono  kei  kona. 

— Xa  Ruma  P.  Hereora  i  ripoata. 

TUAKANA  PERETO.— I  te  31   o  nga  ra  | 
o  Hurae  1941   ka  mate  a  Elder  Tuakana  Peret 
o  Marangairoa,  peka  o  te  Rahui.    Ona  tau  e  32.  ] 
He  nui  te  pouri  mona  i  runga  i  te  taha  tangata, 
a  he  nui  ano  hoki  te  aroha  kia  ia  mo  runga  i  te 
taha  ki  te  Hahi,  no  te  mea  kua  jmaataata  tonu  ake 
i  roto  i  tona  tinana.  me  anamahi  nga  huapai  o  nga 
ra  o  muri  nei. 

Haere  ra  e  hoa,  haere  ki  te  okiokinga.  Haere 
ki  o  matua  me  o  taua  karanga  maha  e  mahi  mai  [ 
na  i  te  mahi  nui. 

Xa    Hail    Ruwhilt    I    ripOata.  Tuakana  Pereto 


Commit  thy  way  unto  the  Lord ;  trust  also  in  him ;  and  he  shall 
bring  it  to  pass. — Ps.  37 :  5. 


Mei,  1942  TE  KARERE  141 

Mutual  Improvement  Association 

M.I.A.  THEME  1942 

Doctrine  &  Covenants  82:10:  "I,  the  Lord,  am 
bound  when  ye  do  what  I  say;  but  when  you  do  not  what  I 
say,  ye  have  no  Promise." 

BOY  SCOUTS'  DEPARTMENT 

FIRST  TUESDAY: 

The  Tests  completed,  you  will  probably  find  that  your  time  has 
considerably  exceeded  that  allotted  for  Period  B.  Period  C  must, 
therefore,  of  necessity  be  short,  but,  to  provide  relaxation  from  the 
strain  of  the  test,  should  be  of  a  light  and  carefree  character.  Some 
game  for  the  quickening  of  the  intelligence,  while  at  the  same  time 
providing  physical  exercise,  should  be  played.  Of  this  type  are  "Paddy- 
whack" and  "O'Grady."  Both  these  were  included  in  the  training  of 
the  New  Zealand  Expeditionary  Forces  for  the  purpose  indicated.  The 
former  is  played  by  the  boys  forming  a  circle,  facing  inwards.  All 
bend  forward  from  the  waist,  placing  the  open  hands  behind  the  back. 
The  Scoutmaster,  or  a  selected  Scout,  walks  round  the  circle,  and 
quietly  places  a  knotted  scarf  in  one  of  the  hands.  The  Scout  who  re- 
ceives the  "rope's  end"  must  at  once  begin  to  belabour  his  right-hand 
neighbour  with  it.  The  duty  of  that  unfortunate  individual  is  to  flee 
round  the  circle  from  right  to  left,  pursued  by  the  "rope's  end."  On 
returning  to  his  own  place,  he  is  in  sanctuary,  and  he  of  the  "rope's 
end"  walks  round  the  circle,  bestowing  the  instrument  of  chastisement 
on  some  other  Scout.  Simple  as  this  game  is,  it  has  been  found  very 
popular  among  those  Troops  which  have  adopted  it. 

"O'Grady"  is  well  known;  a  series  of  commands  is  given,  some 
prefixed  by  the  words  "O'Grady  says" — others  delivered  in  the  ordinary 
way.  The  former  must  be  obeyed  with  true  Scoutlike  alacrity;  the  latter 
must  be  entirely  disregarded.  Thus,  the  order  "O'Grady  says  'About 
Turn'  "  may  be  given.  Any  Scout  not  complying  becomes  a  "defaulter." 
The  command  may  then  be  given,  "Troop,  Quick  March!"  Any  Scout 
who  moves  is  again  a  defaulter,  because  "O'Grady"  has  not  given  the 
order.  Defaulters  are  directed  to  fall  out  at  once,  and  to  perform 
two  or  three  "presses  off  the  floor,"  or  to  recite  the  Scout  Law  while 
standing  on  one  leg,  etc. 

Should  these  or  other  games  seem  to  drag  a  little,  a  good  plan  for 
quickening  the  interest  is  to  break  off  suddenly  with  the  command 
"Race  to  the  far  wall  of  the  clubroom  and  back — Go!"  The  last  man 
is  treated  as  a  defaulter,  as  above. 

After  a  few  minutes  spent   in   this  way,   fall   in   and   dismiss. 

THIRD  TUESDAY: 

Your  Leaders'  Korero  now  assumes  a  greater  importance.  You 
have  completed  your  training  for  the  Tenderfoot  Test,  and  the  majority 
of  your  Scouts  will  probably  have  qualified.  Almost  certainly,  how- 
ever, there  will  be  sonic  who,  from  lack  of  interest  or  concentration, 
from  unavoidable  absence,  or  from  having  joined  your  'Troop  too  Late 
to  pick  up  the  work,  have  failed.  Of  those  it  is  advisable  to  make 
a  Second  Class — let  us  call  them,  for  the  moment,  your  Intermediate 
Class,  while  those  who  have  passed  are  your  Seniors.     Now.  you  cannol 


142  TE   KARERE  Ma.  1942 

train  both  classes  simultaneously  yourself,  and  it  would  be  unwise  to 
do  so  if  you  could.  The  unit  of  the  Scout  movement  is  not  the  Troop, 
but  the  Patrol,  the  gang  of  boys  under  the  leadership  of  one  of  them- 
selves. It  follows,  then,  that  the  Patrol  Leader  is  the  person  who 
should  command  and  train  the  boys,  although  the  personality  of  the 
Scoutmaster  will  set  the  tone  to  the  Troop.  Each  Leader  should  train 
his  own   Patrol,   and  should   endeavour  to   outrival   his  fellow-Leaders. 

What  is  wanted,  therefore,  is  this:  While  you  train  the  Seniors 
for  Second  Class,  each  Patrol  Leader  trains  the  Intermediate  in  his 
own  command  in  the  work  for  Tenderfoot,  with  which,  of  course,  he  is 
already  familiar,   having  studied   it  under  you. 

Now,  this  means  that  while  he  is  doing  this  work  he  is  missing 
instruction  in  Second  Class  work,  and  might  quickly  be  surpassed  by 
others  of  his  Patrol.  This  would  never  do.  Therefore,  if  you  can 
afford  the  time,  give  the  Leaders  a  special  class  on  some  other  evening 
in  the  week  in  Second  Class  work.  If  this  cannot  be  managed,  you 
must  give  the  extra  tuition  during  the  Leaders'  Korero.  In  any  case, 
this  last  should  contain  a  short  talk  on  the  work  to  be  covered  in  the 
next  meeting,  with  some  advice  as  to  the  best  method  of  handling  it. 

Thus,  your  Leaders'  Korero  on  this  evening  must  contain  the  ex- 
planation of  this  system,  and  advice  on  how  to  train  the  Intermediate 
boys  in  the  Scouts'  Promise,  Laws  1  and  2,  Scout  Salute  and  Secret 
Sign,   and  the   Handshake. 

OPEN-AIR   WORK 
FOURTH   TUESDAY: 

During  the  Tenderfoot  Training,  you  will  probably  have  been  able 
to  work  in  a  little  out-door  work  in  the  day  time — on  a  Saturday  after- 
noon, for  instance.  Under  this  head  should  be  included  such  items  as 
the  game  of  "Wool-collecting"  ("Scouting  Games"),  using  red  wool. 
Do  not  use  green  or  any  other  difficult  colour  in  the  meantime.  It  is 
well  to  begin  with  easy  work  for  a  start.  Other  practices  in  observa- 
tion should  also  be  given — e.g.,  the  "Shop  Window  Game,"  or  "Morgan's 
Game"  ("Scouting  Games,"  page  73).  Practice  should  also  be  given 
in  following  a  trail  consisting  of  tne   Scout  Signs. 

SECOND    TUESDAY: 

FIRST   AID    (All   Classes) 

Review  of   Lesson    II. 

1.  Describe  briefly  the  skeleton.  t'~\£rfj^'~      * "" 

2.  Describe    briefly   the    circulation. 

(a)  The  blood 

(b)  Heart  "      ft        -^ 

(c)  Three  types  of  blood  vessels 

3.  Describe  bleeding   of   arteries,   capillaries,   veins. 

4.  Which  is  the  most  serious? 

5.  How  would  you  stop  bleeding  of  each? 

6.  Review  the  pressure  points.  /""T7/ 

THE   TOURNIQUET 

Pair  off  and  apply  tourniquet  on  pressure  point  No.  6,  upper  arm. 
Be  sure  the  blood  is  shut  off  before  removing  tourniquet,  so  that  you 
will  know  same  has  been  applied  correctly.  This  can  be  determined  by 
pressure  point  at  wrist.  If  there  is  no  pulse,  the  tourniquet  is  effective. 
The  fingers  will  also  be  bluish  and  cold. 


Mei,  1942  TE  KARERE  143 

In  case  of  arterial  bleeding  digital  pressure  should  be  applied  at 
once  on  the  nearest  pressure  point  above  the  wound.  It  may  be  some 
little  time  before  the  blood  clots  sufficiently  to  stop  bleeding,  and  other 
injuries  could  well  be  receiving  attention.  In  such  cases,  therefore, 
instead  of  continuing  to  hold  the  pressure,  apply  a  tourniquet. 

Do  not  apply  a  tourniquet  except  in  cases  of  severe  bleeding.  A 
few  moments'  pressure  may  stop  the  bleeding.  "A  tourniquet  is  an 
appliance  used  to  check  severe  bleeding  from  an  artery."  There  are 
two  points  on  the  body  where  a  tourniquet  may  be  applied.  One — the 
upper  arm,  on  pressure  point  No.  6;  two — on  the  thigh,  on  pressure 
point  No.   10. 

A  regular  tourniquet  may  be  purchased  at  any  drug  store  or  with 
first  aid  kits,  but  we  shall  learn  how  to  improvise  one.  "A  tourniquet 
should  be  a  flat  band  at  least  one  inch  in  width;  never  a  rope,  wire  or 
sash  cord.  A  triangular  bandage  folded  to  form  a  narrow  cravat  is 
excellent,  but  a  silk  stocking,  handkerchief,  or  any  similar  cloth  will 
do." 

"A  tourniquet  must  be  long  enough  to  encircle  the  limb.  A  pad 
should  be  placed  over  the  artery  (on  proper  pressure  point)  so  that 
when  the  tourniquet  is  tightened  it  will  press  this  pad  against  the  blood 
vessel  thereby  stopping  the  flow  of  blood.  The  pad  may  be  made  from 
a  smooth,  round  stone,  a  cork,  a  piece  of  coal,  a  pocketknife,  or  some 
object  of  similar  shape  and  size  covered  with  a  handkerchief  or  piece 
of  cloth,  in  order  not  to  bruise  the  skin.  To  use  a  cravat  bandage  as 
a  tourniquet,  it  should  be  passed  around  the  limb  and  tied  in  a  single 
knot.  Then  make  a  reef  knot  above  the  single  knot,  so  as  to  form  a 
loop  between  it  and  the  single  knot.  Insert  a  stick  through  the 
loop  and  twist  it  until  the  blood  is  stopped.  After  putting  the 
stick  into  the  loop  pull  it  away  from  the  body  when  twisting  to 
avoid  bruising  the  skin  and  flesh.  An  assistant  should  make  digital 
pressure  over  the  pressure  point  while  the  tourniquet  is  being  prepared. 
Loosen  the  tourniquet  after  it  has  been  in  place  18  minutes,  but  do 
not  remove.  If  bleeding  does  not  start  again  let  the  tourniquet  remain 
loose.  If  bleeding  persists,  permit  the  artery  to  spurt  three  or  four 
times  and  then  tighten  the  tourniquet  again."  It  is  important  that  the 
tourniquet  be  released  every  18  minutes.  If  the  circulation  is  shut  off 
for  sometime  mortification  will  set  in  and  removal  of  a  limb  may  be 
necessary. 

SHOCK 

A  person  in  an  accident  will  always  suffer  from  shock  to  a  greater 
or  less  degree.  A  first  aider  should  watch  for  symptoms  of  shock  and 
give  immediate  treatment.  Serious  shock  can  often  be  prevented  or 
greatly  relieved,  thus  insuring  safety  of  the  patient. 

"By  the  term  'shock'  is  meant  a  condition  in  which  all  activities 
of  the  body  are  greatly  depressed."  The  blood  vessels  become  relaxed 
and  open  up,  thus  lowering  the  blood  pressure  in  them,  just  as  open- 
ing all  of  the  pipes  in  a  water  system  will  reduce  pressure.  "Of 
course,  neither  the  brain  nor  any  other  part  of  the  body  receives  a 
sufficient  supply  of  blood.  The  heart  attempts  to  make  up  for  not 
being  filled  each  time  it  beats,  that  is,  it  tries  to  maintain  a  constant 
output  by  going  faster.      This  accounts  for  a  fast  but  weak   pulse." 

"Shock  may  be  caused  by  severe  pains,  loss  of  blood,  fright,  anger, 
surgical  operations,  seeing  own  injury  or  injuries  of  others,  or  acci- 
dents by  electricity  or  gas." 

Symptoms  of  shock  are — face  pale,  listless,  vacant  expression; 
cold  perspiration  appears  on  forehead  and  in  palms  of  hands;  pulse 
rapid  and  weak;  in  severe  shock  patient  often  chills,  shaking  violently 


144  TE  KARERE  Mei,  1942 

with  teeth  chattering.      Nausea  and  vomiting  may  occur;  breathing  is 

irregular. 

Treatment. — Place  patient  in  a  comfortable  position  (prone)  with 
head  low,  unless  there  is  a  fracture  of  skull  or  severe  bleeding  of  head. 
Remove  from  mouth  all  foreign  objects,  such  as  false  teeth,  gum,  etc. 
Keeping  the  patient  warm  is  the  most  important  thing  in  treating  or 
preventing  shock.  Patient  should  be  wrapped  in  blankets,  coats,  robes, 
etc.,  to  keep  in  body  heat.  Newspapers  placed  between  layers  of 
blankets  add  much  to  warmth.  Where  patient  is  lying  on  the  ground, 
on  cement  or  other  cold  place,  it  is  important  to  place  clothing  under 
him  as  well  as  on  top.  Apply  external  heat  where  possible  by  placing 
hot  water  bottles,  hot  bricks,  hot  sand  or  salt  bags;  dinner  plates  may 
be  heated  and  used.  These  should  be  placed  at  patient's  armpits,  be- 
tween legs,  at  feet  and  over  heart  (not  on  the  stomach),  after  having 
been  wrapped  and  tested  by  holding  against  cheek  for  a  few  moments. 
It  would  be  easy  to  burn  an  unconscious  person  seriously,  thus  increas- 
ing suffering  and  danger  instead  of  relieving  it.  Rubbing  of  limbs 
toward  the  heart  to  increase  circulation.  Never  rub  both  ways.  Rub- 
bing should   be   done   under  covering. 

A  stimulant  may  be  given.  If  patient  is  conscious,  give  aromatic 
spirits  of  ammonia — a  teaspoonful  in  half  a  glass  of  warm  water. 
(Never  give  any  kind  of  liquor.  This  is  emphasized  by  all  first  aid 
experts.  Liquor  gives  a  reaction  which  is  termed  alcoholic  shock,  which 
increases  patient's  danger.)  When  a  patient  is  unconscious,  aromatic 
spirits  of  ammonia  may  be  given  by  inhalation.  Put  some  on  a  cloth 
and  place  in  front  of  patient's  nose.  This  should  first  be  tested  in 
front  of  own  nose.  If  given  too  strong  may  burn  tissues  of  patient's 
nose. 

"Do  not  give  a  stimulant  in  severe  bleeding,  whether  internal 
or  external,  until  bleeding  has  been  checked.  Do  not  give  a  stimulant 
if  patient  has  a  fractured  skull,  apoplexy,  or  sunstroke." 

It  is  to  be  remembered  that  although  shock  is  serious,  severe  bleed- 
ing and  artificial  respiration   should   be  given   first  attention. 

After  a  thorough  discussion  of  shock  call  about  four  members  of 
the  class  to  demonstrate  before  the  group  treatment  of  shock,  one 
acting  as  patient.  The  others  will  observe  and  call  attention  to  any- 
thing overlooked.  Use  materials  at  hand  for  demonstration.  May 
substitute  books  for  hot  water  bottles.  The  main  thing  is  to  get  the 
right  idea  in  treating  for  shock.      The  following  outline  may  assist: — 

Position. — Prone,  head  low   (or  level). 

Stimulants. — Aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia.    (Sipping  if  patient  is 
conscious;   inhalation  if  unconscious.) 

Heat. — Covering  over  and  under  body;  Hot  water  bottles  (tested)  ; 
Rubbing  limbs  toward  heart  under  covering. 

(Aromatic  Spirits  of  Ammonia  may  be  purchased  at  any  Drug 
Store  in  small  quantities.  It  is  well  for  the  girls  to  know  what  it  is 
and  add  it  to  their  medicine  chest.) 

UNCONSCIOUSNESS 

In  cases  of  unconsciousness  it  is  often  difficult  to  determine  just 
what  is  wrong  with  the  patient.  Very  often  it  takes  careful  examina- 
tion of  a  doctor  and  even  X-rays  to  correctly  diagnose  first  aid  treat- 
ment by  dividing  them  into  the  three  following  groups  on  the  basis  of 
easily  determined  symptoms.  A  first  aider  should  memorize  these 
three  forms  of  unconsciousness  as  all  require  different  treatment. 


Mei,  1942  TE  KARERE  145 

(1)  Red    Unconsciousness: 

Chief  symptoms — red  or  flushed  face  and  a  strong  pulse. 
Treatment — Put    in    warm   position,    head   slightly   raised,    keep    quiet. 
Apply    cold    application    to    head.      Loosen    any    tight    clothing    around 
neck.      Give   no    stimulants — and   have   just   enough   heat   to   keep   the 
patient   warm.      Transport   very    carefully   in    lying   position. 

(2)  White    Unconsciousness: 

Chief  symptoms — Pale  face,  weak  pulse.  Treatment — Keep  quiet 
in  lying  position,  head  level  or  low.  Apply  external  heat — May  use 
inhalation  stimulants  if  there  is  no  bleeding  and  no  head  injury.  Trans- 
port very  carefully  in  lying  position. 

(3)  Blue    Unconsciousness: 

This  includes  the  cases  requiring  artificial  respiration.  Symptoms — 
Pale  face,  blue  lips  and  fingernails — little  or  no  breathing.  Treatment 
— Artificial  respiration — apply  heat  and  treat  as  for  shock.  When 
patient  has  been  restored  keep  quiet — transport  in  lying  position. 

Call  a  doctor  in  every  one  of  the  above  cases.  There  is  no  use 
trying  to  arouse  an  unconscious  person  by  shaking  or  shouting  at  him. 

FAINTING 

This  is  one  of  the  most  common  accidents  a  first  aider  is  called 
upon  to  treat.  Fainting  is  caused  by  an  insufficient  supply  of  blood  to 
the  brain.  Being  in  a  close  or  crowded  place,  fatigue,  weakness  from 
want  of  food,  sight  of  blood,  standing  when  tired,  and  many  other 
things  cause  fainting. 

Symptoms  of  fainting  are — the  face  pales,  person  becomes  dizzy, 
black  clouds  pass  in  front  of  eyes,  face  gets  paler  and  paler,  patient 
slumps. 

Never  allow  a  patient  to  remain  in  this  condition  until  he  slumps. 
This  is  very  bad  first  aid  treatment.  As  soon  as  the  first  symptoms 
appear  and  patient  complains  of  feeling  dizzy  or  sick,  have  him  lie 
down,  head  low,  may  raise  feet.  If  symptoms  of  fainting  appear  in  a 
close,  crowded  place,  while  sitting,  one  may  prevent  fainting  by  bend- 
ing over  with  head  between  knees  for  a  few  moments.  This  allows 
the  blood  to  run  back  to  the  head  and  will  revive  patient  sufficiently 
so  that  he  may  walk  out  into  the  fresh  air,  where  he  should  immedi- 
ately lie  flat  on  his  back  until  thoroughly  revived.  May  give  aromatic 
spirits  of  ammonia  by  inhalation,  or  smelling  salts,  plenty  of  fresh 
air.  Patient  should  revive  in  a  few  moments.  If  not,  and  unconscious- 
ness continues,  cover  patient  and  begin  treatment  as  for  shock,  and 
call  a  physician. 

SUNSTROKE 

Sunstroke  is  a  serious  thing.  We  are  told  by  the  American  Red 
Cross  First  Aid  Manual  that  about  twenty-four  per  cent  of  sunstroke 
cases  admitted  to  the  hospital  are  fatal.  This  is  probably  due  to  the 
fact  that  persons  thus  stricken  receive  little  or  no  first  aid  treatment 
or  the  wrong  kind  of  treatment.  Immediate  and  proper  treatment  is 
important  in  case  of  sunstroke. 

Sunstroke  is  caused  by  direct  exposure  to  the  sun's  rays.  A  similar 
condition,  heatstroke,  may  occur  by  excessive  heat  indoors.  The  wear- 
ing of  proper  clothing,  particularly  protection  of  the,  head  and  neck 
from  the  hot  sun,  may  prevent  sunstroke.  Immediately  upon  noticing 
the  first  symptoms  one  should  find  a  cool,   shady    place   to   rest. 


146  TE  KARERE  Mci,  1942 

The  symptoms  are  usually  pain  in  the  head,  dizziness,  oppression 
and  sometimes  vomiting.  The  skin  is  hot  and  dry,  the  face  flushed; 
the  pulse  full  and  rapid;  temperature  high,  often  ranging  from  107  to 
110  degrees.  The  patient  becomes  unconscious  if  the  case  is  at  all 
severe. 

Treatment. — Remove  patient  to  a  cool  place  if  possible.  Place  in 
a  prone  position  with  head  and  shoulders  somewhat  elevated.  (This 
will  in  all  probability  be  a  case  of  red  unconsciousness.)  Remove 
clothing — apply  to  head  cold,  wet  cloths,  ice  bags,  or  ice;  wrap  patient 
in  a  sheet  and  pour  cold  water  over  him  every  few  minutes — thus 
reducing  heat  gradually.  Patient  should  be  watched  carefully;  if  tem- 
perature is  reduced  suddenly  he  may  suffer  shock.  When  conscious- 
ness returns,  he  may  drink  cool  water.  As  patient  cools  off  rub  briskly 
with  towel  to  restore  normal  circulation.  Give  no  stimulants — call  a 
physician  at  once. 

HEAT  EXHAUSTION 

This  condition  may  be  caused  by  direct  rays  of  sun  or  sultry  days, 
but  is  most  generally  caused  from  excessive  indoor  heat,  usually  while 
working  in  factories,  foundries,  bakeries,  engine  and  boiler  rooms, 
etc.  People  not  in  good  health,  or  indoor  workers  eating  heartily,  and 
drinking  ice  cold  drinks  are  susceptible  to  heatstroke. 

Prevention. — Avoid  exposure  to  heat  when  not  feeling  well.  Do 
not  overeat  in  hot  weather.  When  hot  avoid  large  quantities  of  ice 
cold  drinks  following  a  full  meal. 

Symptoms  are  dizziness,  nausea  and  an  uncertain  staggering  gait. 
Vomiting  is  frequent.  The  face  is  pale  with  cold  perspiration.  The 
body  may  be  clammy.  Patient  may  be  unconscious,  pulse  weak,  breath- 
ing shallow,  patient  may  be  cold. 

Treatment. — Remove  patient  to  air — treat  as  for  shock  by  placing 
him  in  a  prone  position,  keeping  warm,  administering  stimulants,  etc. 
(Patient  in  this  case  would  be  in  white  unconsciousness.) 

Note  that  treatment  for  sunstroke  and  heat  exhaustion  are  very 
different.  The  treatment  is  governed  by  symptoms;  get  the  two  con- 
ditions clearly  in  mind.  The  wrong  treatment  for  either  would  be 
disastrous.  We  emphasize  again  that  the  proper  first  aid  treatment 
may  save  lives ;  the  wrong  treatment  endangers  the  life  of  the  patient. 

APOPLEXY  (Frequently  called  "Stroke") 

"Apoplexy  occurs  almost  entirely  in  persons  past  fifty  years  of  age 
and  is  most  likely  to  occur  in  those  persons  whose  arteries  have  been 
damaged  by  disease,  as  syphilis,  hardening  of  arteries,  or  in  those  who 
have  high  blood  pressure.  A  small  artery  in  the  brain  ruptures.  Blood 
flows  out  and  form  clots.  Pressure  of  these  clots  on  the  brain  causes 
unconsciousness  and  paralysis.  Thus,  if  the  pressure  is  on  the  area 
of  the  brain  controlling  the  right  arm,  that  arm  will  be  paralyzed. 

Symptoms — face  red;  pulse  strong  but  slow;  one  side  of  body 
more  limp  than  the  other,  mouth  may  be  drawn  to  one  side;  patient 
completely  unconscious,  snoring. 

Treatment — Lay  patient  on  back  with  head  and  shoulders  slightly 
raised.  (Red  unconsciousness.)  Apply  cold  cloths  or  ice  bag  to  head. 
Insist  on  absolute  quiet,  move  patient  as  little  as  possible.  If  neces- 
sary to  move  him,  use  great  care.  Use  no  stimulants.  Keep  patient 
warm.      Always   call   a  physician. 


Mei,  1942  •  TE  KARERE  147 

BEE-HIVE  DEPARTMENT 

FIRST  TUESDAY: 

ORGANIZATION 

The  organization  is  the  same  in  the  stakes  and  in  the  missions. 
The  Bee-Hive  Girls'  Organization  is  a  department  of  the  Young 
Women's  Mutual  Improvement  Association  and  is  presided  over  by 
the  officers  of  that  auxiliary.  A  group  of  Bee-Hive  girls  is  called  a 
"Swarm,"  and  their  leader  the  "Bee-Keeper."  Each  ward  or  branch 
may  organize  one  or  more  Swarms  according  to  the  number  of  its 
members  of  Bee-Hive  age.  A  Swarm  usually  consists  of  from  three 
to  eight  girls,  though  it  may  be  larger  if  necessity  requires. 

THIRD   TUESDAY: 

MEMBERSHIP 

Membership  is  open  to  all  girls  (whether  members  of  the  L.D.S. 
Church  or  not),  of  twelve,  thirteen  and  fourteen  years  of  age,  inclu- 
sive. You  are  urged  to  complete  the  work  of  the  Primary  Association 
before  joining  the  Bee-Hive  Organization.  The  graduation  exercises 
of  the  Primary  are  usually  held  in  August  and  girls  are  then  ready 
to  begin  their  Bee-Hive  work  in  September.  New  members  may  join 
at  any  time  during  the  year,  but  it  is  most  desirable  to  begin  with  the 
group   in   September. 

All  Bee-Hive  girls  delight  in  owning  and  wearing  the  Membership 
Pin.  It  is  a  small  gold  beehive.  You  will  be  eligible  to  wear  this  pin 
as  soon  as  you  have  completed  the  Trial  Flights. 

FOURTH  TUESDAY: 

THE    EMBLEM 

The  degree  of  advancement  in  the  Bee-Hive  Organization  is  indi- 
cated by  the  Emblem.  When  complete  it  consists  of:  a  brown  bee- 
hive with  an  hexagonal  cell  below;  two  blue  violets,  one  on  either  side; 
and  a  gold  queen  bee  above.  The  hive  is  the  symbol  of  the  organiza- 
tion; the  hexagonal  cell  signifies  the  Rank  of  Builder  in  the  Hive;  the 
two  violets,  the  Rank  of  Gatherer  of  Honey;  the  queen  bee,  the  Rank 
of   Guardian  of  the  Treasure. 

The  various  parts  of  the  Emblem  will  be  presented  to  you  as 
follows:  the  hive  at  the  completion  of  the  Trial  Flights;  the  hexagonal 
cell  upon  entrance  into  the  Rank  of  Builder  in  the  Hive  (this  and  the 
hive  are  usually  awarded  at  the  same  time)  ;  the  other  parts  upon  en- 
trance into  the  respective  Ranks.  Entrance  into  the  next  Rank  usually 
occurs  at  the  Day  of  the  Swarm.  You  are  entitled  to  wear  only  those 
parts  of  the  Emblem  which  symbolize  the  Ranks  in  which  you  have 
worked  or  are  working.  The  Emblem  should  be  placed  on  your  Band, 
which   is   the   official    Bee-Hive   uniform. 


NUHAKA  RELIEF  SOCIETY  CENTENNIAL 

All  are  invited  to  attend  the  Relief  Society  Centennial 
Celebrations  at  Nuhaka,  H.B.,  May  3,  1942,  under  the  direction 
of  the  Nuhaka  Presidency.  President  Cowley  and  Sister 
Cowley   will    be    in    attendance. 


1 


148  TE  KARERE  Mt-i,  1942 

PRIMARY 

The  Mission  officers  arc  indeed  grateful  for  the  response  of  the 
various  Associations  and  the  officers  and  children  in  our  Mission 
Fund  Campaign.  This  campaign  was  and  is  not  a  new  one  It  is 
more  to  re-mind  you  of  the  obligations  that  have  always  been  yours. 
Pay  your  "Three  Penny  Funds"  as  they  come  due.  Because  of  your 
efforts  the  financial  condition  of  the  Primary  Association  is  very 
good.  We  have  paid  our  1941  "Te  Karere"  account,  and  this  year 
we  are  keeping  up  payments.  This  will  last  only  so  long  as  yon  con- 
tinue to  do  your  part. 

Kia  kaha  children  and  officers. 

Would  all  District  Presidents  meet  with  their  Secretaries  and 
send  into  "Mission  Primary  Secretary,"  Box  72,  Auckland,  a  com- 
plete list  of  the  Branches  in  their  Districts  with  the  names  and 
addresses  of  the  officers  in  their  Primary  Associations.  Also  send 
in  immediately  for  Report  Blank  Forms.  Do  not  depend  on  verbal 
requests   for  Report  Forms.     Write    for  them   immediately. 

As  yet  we  have  no  Primary  Song  Books  on  hand.  Please  do 
not  write  in  for  them.  When  we  do  get  them  we  will  let  yon  know. 
Our  efforts  to  provide  these  Song  Books  for  you  are  untiring.  It 
is  impossible  at  the  moment  to  procure  the  books  from  Zion,  and 
to  have  them  printed  here  costs  quite  a  bit;  however  we  are  endeav- 
ouring to  get  some  copies  available  for  your  use. 

Send  your  Reports  in  on  time,   Please ! 

KELLY   HARRIS,   Mission   Secretary. 

FIRST   WEEK 
Prayer:   By  one  of  the  boys. 
Text:      Lute   10:25-37. 

Objective:  To  help  the  children  understand  that  we  should  be  good 
and  kind  to  all  we  see  whether  we  know  them  or  not. 

THE  GOOD  NEIGHBOUR 

This  is  one  of  the  stories  that  Jesus  told  the  people  while  He  was 
here  on  the  earth. 

Whom  do  you  think  is  your  neighbour?  Perhaps  when  I  am 
through  with  the  story  you  may  have  a  different  answer. 

There  was  a  long  stony  road  from  Jerusalem  to  Jericho.  On  either 
side  of  the  road  there  were  great  rocky  mountains  and  behind  the  rocks 
quite  often  would  hide  robbers.  They  would  stay  hidden  until  some 
traveller  came  along  that  they  thought  might  have  some  money.  Then 
they  would  spring  out  and  rob  him.  This  road  was  very  dangerous  and 
many  travellers  had  been  robbed  and  beaten  and  left  bleeding  in  the 
road. 

One  day  a  man  was  walking  along  this  road.  It  was  a  very  lonely 
road.  He  kept  watching  carefully  and  was  afraid  robbers  might  jump 
out  and  take  the  little  money  he  had.      Finally  he   came  to  the   very 


Mei,  1942  TE  KARERE  149 

loneliest  and  darkest  part  of  the  road,  and  some  robbers  did  jump  out 
upon  him.  They  tore  some  of  his  clothes  from  him  and  beat  him. 
Then  they  left  him  there  on  the  road.  He  was  cold  and  suffering  from 
long  cuts  left  on  his  body  by  the  whips  and  was  almost  dead.  After  he 
had  lain  there  a  long  time  he  heard  someone  coming  and  he  opened 
his  eyes  hoping  that  it  would  be  some  kind  person  who  would  be  good 
enough  to  help  him. 

The  traveller  came  nearer ;  he  was  a  priest  from  the  golden  temple, 
the  great  church  in  Jerusalem.  He  wore  flowing  white  garments  em- 
broidered in  colours  and  a  high  pointed  cap  on  his  head.  He  saw 
the  poor  man  lying  in  the  road.  Guess  what  he  did?  No,  the  priest 
did  not  help  the  man  nor  did  he  even  speak  to  him.  He  even  crossed 
the  road  so  he  wouldn't  have  to  get  near  him  and  went  on  his  way. 

The  poor  man  closed  his  eyes  and  thought  that  surely  he  would 
die  all  alone  on  the  lonely  road  when  he  heard  someone  else  coming. 
Surely  this  man  would  not  be  as  cruel  as  the  priest;  he  was  a  Levite. 
He  saw  the  man  and  crossed  the  road  to  look  at  him.  The  poor  man 
was  too  weak  to  speak  but  he  must  have  looked  at  the  Levite  and 
thought  that  at  last  a  friend  had  come.  But  the  man  only  looked  at 
him  and  passed  on  to  go  to  Jericho. 

The  man  was  very  sad.  It  was  beginning  to  get  dark  and  it  was 
very  cold.  This  time  when  someone  came  toward  him  he  was  too 
sick  and  weak  to  even  hear.  Now  this  man  was  a  Samaritan  and 
wasn't  liked  by  the  Priests  nor  the  Levites.  The  Priests  and  Levites 
thought  they  were  much  better  than  Samaritans;  but  when  we  are 
through  with  this  story  we  will  ask  you  whom  you  think  was  better. 

The  Samaritan  poured  some  healing  oil  on  his  wounds  and  gave 
him  some  water  to  drink.  He  bound  up  the  wounds  with  soft  cloths 
and  then  put  a  warm  cloak  around  him  and  lifted  him  gently  on  to 
his  own  horse.  The  Samaritan  walked  along  to  the  side  of  the  horse 
all  the  way  to  an  inn,  a  little  hotel,  and  when  he  reached  there  he  got 
a  room  and  put  the  wounded  man  on  a  nice  soft  bed  and  took  care 
of  him  all  night. 

The  next  morning  the  man  felt  much  better  and  the  Samaritan 
had  to  go  on  his  way  but  he  paid  the  inn-keeper  enough  to  take  care 
of  the  man  for  two  days  and  promised  to  send  him  more  if  the  man 
were  not  well   enough  then  to  go  to  his  home. 

Which  of  these  three  men  who  travelled  the  Red  Road  was  a  good 
neighbour  to  the  man  who  had  been  beaten  by  the  robbers?  Of  course, 
it  was  the   Samaritan. 

Do  you  think  your  neighbour  is  just  the  people  who  live  close  to 
you?     No,  your  neighbour  is  anyone  whom  you  can  help. 

Spend  a  few  minutes  asking  questions  and  talking  about  the  lesson. 
Maybe  the  children  have  questions  they  would  like  to   ask. 

If  you  have  time,  play  one  of  the  games  learned  last  month. 

Closing  exercises. 

SECOND   WEEK 

Prayer:     By  one  of  the  girls. 

GEM  FOR  MOTHERS'  DAY 

What  can  be  sweeter  than  a  mother's  kiss, 

A  mother's  kiss  of  love? 
What  can  be  sweeter  than  a  mother's  eyes, 

As  blue   as  the  skies   above? 
What  can  be  sweeter  than  a  mother's  lips, 

As   red   as  the   roses    fair? 

Objective:  To  help  the  children  to  appreciate  all  the  things  that 
mothers  do  for  them  and  inspire  In  them  a  willingness  to  do  all  they 
can  to  help  mother. 


L50  l  E  KARERE  M.-i.  1942 

Have  the  children  memorize:  "Honour  thy  father  and  thy  mother, 
that  thy  days  may  be  long  upon  the  land  which  the  Lord  thy  God 
giveth  thee." 

Perhaps  you  may  have  assigned  one  or  two  members  of  the  class 
to  give  a  little  poem  about  Mother  or  May  Day. 
Tell  the  following  story: 

THE   MAY    BASKET 

The  twins  were  in  disgrace — not  that  it  was  a  new  experience  for 
that  six-year-old  pair.  They  were  in  disgrace  most  of  the  time  now 
that  Aunt  Sarah  had  come  to  take  care  of  them  while  Mother  was  in 
the  hospital.  Aunt  Sarah  was  Daddy's  sister  that  didn't  have  any 
husband  or  any  little  boys. 

The  strange  thing  about  it  was  that  they  didn't  want  to  be  in  dis- 
grace. They  really  wanted  to  make  it  easy  for  Aunt  Sarah  as  Mother 
had  asked  them  to  do.  "That  is  what  will  help  me  to  get  better,  boys," 
she  had  told  them.  And  they  did  want  mother  to  get  better.  They 
would  hardly  go  to  sleep  at  night  because  she  was  not  there  to  kiss 
them. 

Tony  shifted  his  position,  cupped  his  face  in  his  hands.  "It 
wouldn't  be  so  bad,  Tommy,  if  it  wasn't  the  day  it  is,"  he  mourned. 

A  car  honked  gayly  at  the  gate.  The  two  dejected  little  figures 
on  the  porch  took  one  look  and  were  half  way  down  the  path. 

"It's  Daddy!      It's  Daddy!"  they  cried  in  chorus. 

"Big  surprise  for  you  fellows,"  Daddy  said,  tucking  a  boy  under 
his  arm,  as  if  they  were  no  more  than  a  ten-cent  bag  of  peanuts,  "but 
what  was  the  trouble?  You  were  humped  up  there  like  two  old  men 
when  I  honked  at  you.      Stomach  ache?" 

"We're   in   disgrace,"   announced  Tony  honestly. 

"Again?"   Daddy's  voice  was  stern. 

"Ah,  heck,  how  did  we  know  that  Buster  was  strong  enough  to 
pull  the  old  bucket  over?"  Tommy  usually  answered  questions  by 
asking  others.  "We  had  to  tie  him  some  place  while  we  fixed  him 
a  house  in  the  coal  shed,  didn't  we?" 

"We  found  him  on  our  way  home  from  school.  He  was  such  a 
good  old  dog — and  we  just  tied  him  up  to  Aunt  Sarah's  mop  bucket 
and — ." 

Daddy's  face  started  to  crinkle  up  into  a  smile  but  he  straightened 
it  out  immediately.      "What  happened  then?"  he  asked. 

"Well,  how  did  we  know  that  Aunt  Sarah  had  just  left  the  old 
bucket  to  answer  the  telephone?" 

Daddy  didn't  speak  so  Tony  took  up  the  explanation.  "Old  Buster 
must  have  got  home-sick  for  us  and  tried  to  come  out  to  the  coal 
house  where  we  were  and  tipped  the  old  bucket  of  hot  water  all  over 
him  and  the  porch  where  Aunt  Sarah  had  scrubbed." 

"I  think  Aunt  Sarah  didn't  like  the  way  he  barked,"  Tommy  said. 

"Aunt  Sarah  said  we  couldn't  have  old  Buster  on  the  place  and 
that  we  couldn't  go  outside  the  gate  till  you  came  home,  and — "  a  lump 
in  Tony's  throat  made  his  voice  so  thick  that  Daddy  could  hardly  under- 
stand him — "and  it's  the  first  of  May!" 

"Daddy   looked   mystified. 

"We  were  going  up  on  Sun  Hill  with  Sam  Markham  to  get  May 
flowers  to  put  in  Mother's  May  basket  and  now  it  is  too  late." 

"May  baskets!"  Daddy  looked  as  if  a  great  idea  had  struck  him. 
He  started  to  say  something  and  then  stopped  suddenly. 

Tommy  explained  further,  "May  baskets  are  things  you  give  to 
people  you  love.  You  put  something  good  in  them  and  then  you  keep 
it  a  dead  secret  till  its  dark  and  then  you  leave  it  on  the  doorstep  and 
run." 


Mei,  1942  TE  KARERE  151 

"We  made  our  basket  all  ourselves  and  it's  all  covered  with  blue 
paper  that's  awful  pretty.  We  made  it  out  of  your  shoe  box  and 
we've  ?ot  two  pieces  of  cake  in  it  that  we — "  Tony  stopped  for 
breath  and  Tommy  took  up  the  story,  "saved  from  supper  last  night, 
and  some  jelly  beans  we  traded  our  moss  agate  to  Sam  Markham  for, 
and  some  gum  we've  been  saving  for  a  long  time." 

Just  then  Aunt  Sarah  came  to  the  door.  She  looked  tired  and 
unhappy.  Daddy  had  told  the  twins  that  she  was  only  ten  years  older 
than  he  was  but  they  knew  that  Daddy  had  made  a  mistake.  Anyone 
could  see  that  Aunt  Sarah  was  awful  old,  she  held  her  mouth  so  tight. 

"Oh,  you  are  back,  are  you,  Thomas?"  She  always  called  Daddy 
Thomas.      "How  is   everything?" 

"Fine.  You  boys  look  at  the  tyres,  will  you,  and  see  if  they  are 
all  up?" 

In  a  few  minutes  Daddy  called  them,  "You  fellows  hustle  and  get 
washed.      After  supper  we  are  going  for  a  ride." 

Aunt  Sarah  had  set  a  big  plate  of  toasted  cheese  sandwiches  and 
was  dishing  up  a  crusty  rhubarb  pie  when  the  twins  slid  into  their 
places. 

"And  you  think  you  don't  care  to  ride  up  with  us?"  Daddy  asked 
Aunt  Sarah  as  the  twins  were  getting  their  caps  on. 

"Not  to-night,  Thomas,  I'm  feeling  pretty  tired.  I'll  go  up  in  the 
morning." 

Daddy  stopped  the  car  at  a  big  house  that  had  its  name  on  the 
front  door.  The  boys  could  not  make  out  the  first  name.  It  was  a 
long  one  and  started  with  "M,"  but  the  last  name  was  plain  enough. 
It  was  "HOME."  The  three  went  up  the  stone  steps  together.  In 
the  office  a  lady  in  a  stiff  white  dress  and  a  funny  little  cap  on  her 
head  smiled  at  the  twins. 

When  Daddy  asked,  "How  is  Mrs.  Morris  by  now?"  the  boys  knew 
that  he  meant  Mother,  though  he  always  called  her  "dearest"  and 
"Mother  girl"   at  home. 

"She  is  still  sleeping,"  the  lady  answered.  "I  suppose  these  gentle- 
men want  to  see ." 

"The  May  flower,"  Daddy  spoke  up  quickly,  "and  their  mother's 
May  basket." 

"May  basket — ah,  I  see."  The  lady  laughed  gayly  as  she  led  the 
way  down  the  corridor.  Daddy  and  the  twins  followed  behind  her. 
There  was  a  funny  smell  in  the  air,  like  in  the  dentist's  office. 

Presently  the  lady  opened  a  door  and  the  twins  saw  a  whole  row 
of  baskets — clothes  baskets  with  numbers  on  each  one. 

"Now,  fellows,  see  if  you  can  pick  out  Mother's  May  basket," 
Daddy  said. 

"These  are  not  May  baskets."  Tommy  looked  disappointed.  "May 
baskets  have  May  flowers  in." 

Daddy  went  over  to  basket  number  "4"  and  pulled  back  some- 
thing white.  "Look  here,  isn't  that  the  prettiest  little  May  flower  you 
ever  saw?" 

"Why,  Daddy,  it's  a  baby,  a  real  one,  isn't  it?"  Tony's  eyes  were 
wide  with  wonder. 

Tommy  reached  out  and  touched  the  tiny  hands.  The  queerest 
feeling  went  all  over  him.      "Is  it  ours,   honest,   Daddy'.1" 

"Ours!     Now  shall  we  go  in  and  see  Mother?" 

The  twins  were  very  quiet  on  the  way  home  Daddy  had  put 
them  in  the  back  seat  so  a  man  who  had  been  up  to  see  his  May  basket 
could  ride   down   with   them. 

On  cither  side  of  each  boy  was  a  large  round  swelling — oranges 
Mother  had  told  Daddy  to  put  in  their  pockets.  "They  will  help  you 
forget  I'm  not  there  to  kiss  you  to-night ."  she  had  whispered  to  them 
as  they  were  leaving. 


152  TE  KARERE  Mr,.  1942 

"It  makes  you  feel  awful  funny  to  have  a  May  basket  like  that," 
Tommy  confided  to  Tony  when  they  were  almost  home. 

"I'll  bet  Aunt  Sarah  wishes  she  had  a  baby,"  Tony  said  as  the 
car  neared  their  street.  They  were  both  silent  for  a  moment  and  then 
Tony  went  on,  "Tommy,  we  ought  to  give  her  something  so  she  won't 
feel  bad  that  we've  got  a  little  sister.  I'll  tell  you  what — let's  give  her 
our  May  basket,  I  guess  mother  isn't  going  to  need  it  now." 

"But,"  Tommy  reminded  the  generous  Tony,  "how  do  we  know 
she  likes  candy?  I  bet  she  doesn't  like  gum  either.  She  makes  us 
spit  ours  out.      And  besides  we  haven't  any  May  flowers." 

"We  could  put  in  our  oranges.  Anybody  would  like  them  better 
than  May  flowers." 

Tommy  knew  that  Tony  was  right — everybody  liked  oranges,  in 
fact,  there  were  few  things  the  twins  liked  better.  Tommy  drew  in 
a  long  breath.  Tony  wasn't  going  to  be  better  to  Aunt  Sarah  than 
he  was.      "All  right,"  he  answered. 

Much  excited  whispering  followed.  At  home  they  hurried  up 
to  their  room  and  left  Daddy  to  tell  Aunt  Sarah  about  the  new  baby. 
They  drew  out  from  under  the  bed  the  grotesque  May  basket.  Tony 
dropped  in  his  oranges.  Tommy  looked  at  his  for  a  moment  and  then 
manfully  added  them  to  the   box. 

Three  times  they  had  to  go  down  stairs,  twice  to  ask  Daddy  how 
to  spell  "sorry"  and  "stout,"  and  once  to  get  the  little  ball  of  twine 
from  the  drawer  in  the  kitchen  table. 

Finally  everything  was  ready.  They  had  tied  one  end  of  the 
twine  to  the  bed-post  and  then  thrown  the  ball  out  the  window.  With 
the  May  basket  between  them  they  tip-toed  down  the  stairs  and  out 
the  front  door.  They  picked  up  the  twine,  secured  it  to  the  knob  of 
the  dining-room  door,  placed  the  May  basket  below  it  on  the  doorstep, 
and  then  slipped  back  up  the  stairs. 

Soon  a  strange  thing  began  to  happen.  The  door-knob  of  the 
dining-room  door  twisted  and  turned  and  rattled.  Aunt  Sarah  dropped 
her  mending  and  hurried  over  to  the  door.  For  a  moment  it  refused 
to  open.  She  gave  it  an  extra  hard  tug  and  it  flew  back  so  quickly 
it  almost  struck  her  in  the  face.  A  short  piece  of  string  fluttered 
from  the  knob. 

Aunt  Sarah  picked  up  the  basket.  A  piece  of  paper  was  attached 
to  the  handle. 

"This  May  basket  is  for  Aunt  Sarah  cus  you  don't  have  a  baby.  We 
are  sorry  the  ole  dog  was  so  stout. — Tommy  and  Tony." 

In  a  few  minutes  the  boys  heard  Aunt  Sarah's  step  on  the  stair. 

"Maybe  we  made  her  mad,"  Tony  whispered. 

They  closed  their  eyes  tightly  and  waited.  She  came  in  to  the 
room  but  didn't  turn  on  the  light.  She  felt  around  with  her  hand  till 
she  had  found  their  faces  and  then  she  stopped  quickly  and  kissed  them, 
and  without  a  word  was  gone. 

For  the  space  of  several  heart  beats  neither  twin  spoke,  and  then 
Tony  sat  up  in  bed.      "Gosh,  that  almost  felt  like  Mother,  didn't  it?" 

"I  felt  a  tear  splash  right  on  my  nose,"  Tommy  whispered. 

Tony's  hand  slid  out  in  the  darkness  and  encountered  his  brother's. 
They  lay  quiet  for  some  time  and  then  Tommy  cuddled  up  close  to 
Tony.      "May  baskets   are   funny  things,"   he   said. 

THIRD    WEEK 

Objective:   To  teach  kindness  to  dumb  animals. 

A  horse  is  one  of  the  noblest  of  animals.  From  ancient  times  he 
has  been  a  faithful  and  valuable  servant  to  man.  During  the  past  few 
years  machinery  has  taken  so  much  of  the  horses'  work  that  some  of 
the  children  may  not  know  much  about  horses. 


Mei,  1942  TE  KARERE  153 

Horses  are  very  easily  trained  and  soon  learn  the  voice  of  a  kind 
master,  and  will  come  at  his  call.  They  have  a  kind  disposition  and 
l*ke  to  be  petted. 

You  may  ask  the  children  what  kind  of  food  horses  eat. 

Horses  seem  to   be   able  to   find  their  way  home   no   matter  how 
far  they  have  been  away.      They  are  able  to   see  very  well  at  night. 
Many  stories  have  been  told  how  horses  have  saved  the  lives  of  their 
masters  and  have  been  of  great  service  to  them. 
Story: 

There  was  once  an  old  man  who  lived  alone  far  away  from  other 
people  up  in  the  mountains.  One  day  he  had  to  go  to  a  nearby  town  to 
buy  food  for  himself  and  his  horse.  On  the  way  home  it  began  to 
snow  and  the  snow  was  so  deep  it  was  very  hard  for  the  horse  to 
pull  the  sled.  It  was  storming  so  the  man  couldn't  see  the  road  and  he 
guided  the  horse  off  the  road.  The  horse  tried  to  go  the  other  way 
but  the  master  thought  he  knew  better.  Soon  the  sled  had  been 
ditched  and  overturned  so  the  man  was  under  it.  The  horse  worked 
and  kicked  until  he  finally  got  freed  from  his  harness.  He  tried  to 
pull  the  sled  off  but  could  not,  and  because  it  was  late  at  night  and 
too  late  to  get  the  help  the  horse  laid  down  to  the  side  of  his  master 
and  kept  him  warm  until  morning,  when  he  trotted  to  the  nearest 
farmhouse  and  neighed  until  the  man  came  out  and,  recognizing  the 
horse,  followed  him  to  his  master  who  was  unconscious,  but  soon  got 
well  after  he  was  taken  to  a  hospital. 

Have  some  of  the  children  relate  experiences  they  have  had  with 
horses  or  other  animals. 

FOURTH    WEEK 

To  the  Teacher:  Recreation  is  very  important  to  the  development 
of  the  child.  Devote  one-half  of  this  lesson  period  to  a  programme 
of  songs  and  recitations  previously  assigned  (Mothers'  Day  thoughts 
may  be  used),  the  remaining  time  have  for  the  following  games: — 

CO-ORDINATION  STUNTS 

PALM  AND  FIST:  Extend  fingers  of  left  hand  with  palm  up- 
ward; make  fist  with  right  hand  and  place  with  knuckles  up  at  right 
angles  to  left  palm  against  little  finger  of  left  hand.  Now  interchange 
hands  so  that  right  palm  is  extended  and  left  fist  is  placed  at  right 
angles  against  the  little  finger  of  the  right  hand.  Alternate  these 
positions  rapidly. 

MISBEHAVING  FINGERS:  Extend  arms  forward  full  length  with 
hands  back  to  back.  Raise  left  hand,  slide  over  right  and  lower  so 
that  palms  are  facing  with  wrists  crossed.  Interlock  fingers  and  bring 
clasped  hands  in  a  semi-circle  down  and  toward  body  and  up  close  to 
chest,  with  wrists  still  crossed.  Assistant  or  partner  now  asks  you 
to  move  a  certain  finger  or  thumb,  pointing  to  it,  but  not  touching  it. 

NOSE  AND  EAR:  Hold  right  ear  with  left  hand,  and  nose  with 
right  hand.  Now  quickly  change  so  that  right  hand  is  holding  Kit  ear 
and  left  hand  is  holding  nose.      Repeat   rapidly   many  times. 

CLAP,  CLAP,  NOSE  AND  EAR:  (Map  both  hands  on  correspond- 
ing knees.  Clap  hands  together  immediately  in  front  of  nose.  Now 
clasp  nose  and   ear  as   in   game   above.      Repeal    clasps   and   alternate 

position   of  hands   as   before.      Repeat    all    rapidly    many   times. 

CIRCLE  AND  SIX:  Draw  a  .continuous  circle  on  the  floor  with 
the  toe  of  the  right  foot.  With  the  index  finger  of  the  right  hand 
draw  figure  sixes  in  the  air.      Now  try  to  do  both  simultaneously. 


154  TE  KARERK  Mei,  1942 

Why    Forty-Five   Wlinutes 
of   Class  Work  ? 

By   Junius    R.    Tmbe,   in    Instructor,   Feb.,   1942 

As  Sunday  School  workers,  our  job  is  clearly  defined.  We 
have  a  definite  task  to  accomplish.  The  assignment  given  to  the 
Sunday  School  by  the  First  Presidency  is  to  teach  the  Restored 
Gospel  to  the  entire  membership  of  the  Church.  No  more  important 
work  has  ever  been  given  to  any  auxiliary  organization.  The  General 
Hoard  has  very  definitely  had  this  mission  in  mind  while  planning 
its  activities. 

The  General  Objectives  of  Sunday  School  work  have  been 
carefully  planned  and  clearly  defined.  The  various  class  committees 
of  the  Board  have  likewise  carefully  chosen  the  Course  Objectives. 
Each  lesson  objective  is  also  selected  to  amplify  the  Course  Objective. 
The  full  realization  then  of  the  General  Objectives  depend  upon  the 
fruition  of  the  various  Course  Objectives.  It  naturally  follows, 
then,  that  each  lesson  objective  must  be  carefully  established  in 
order  to  completely  achieve  the  Course  Objective.  (  >ne  must  care- 
full}'  support  the  other  to  make  the  whole  scheme  successful. 

Accepting  this  as  our  assignment,  it  follows  that  even  the  appar- 
ently insignificant  lesson  objective,  must  not  be  passed  over  lightly. 
Each  is  a  definite  part  of  the  whole  plan,  and  if  success  is  to  attend 
our  efforts,  every  lesson  objective  must  he  firmly  established  in  the 
minds  of  the  pupils. 

There  is  given  to  us  but  forty-five  minutes  each  Sunday  morn- 
ing in  which  to  do  this  all-important  task.  Forty-five  minutes  may 
sound  like  a  great  deal  of  time  when  looked  upon  as  one-half  of 
the  total  time  of  the  Sunday  School  each  Sunday,  but  let  us  view 
it  from  another  angle.  There  are  usually  forty-nine  Sundays  a  year 
during  which  class  periods  are  held.  Assuming  the  full  forty-five 
minutes  are  made  available  each  Sunday,  it  then  means  that  only 
thirty-six  hours  and  forty-five  minutes  are  used  in  an  entire  year 
to  teach  the  Gospel  to  our  people.  In  other  words  a  day  and  a-half 
out  of  three  hundred  and  sixty-five  each  year  we  spend  learning 
the  message  of   Mormonism. 

Reduce  this  to  percentage  and  it  means  that  considerably  less 
than  one-half  of  one  per  cent  of  our  life  time  is  spent  in  Sunday 
School  class  work.  (.0042  per  cent  is  the  correct  average.)  Absent- 
ing oneself  from  Sunday  School  means  that  this  percentage  is 
lowered  accordingly. 

If  each  class  session  throughout  the  year  is  shortened  but  a 
single  minute,  it  means  the  loss  of  a  little  more  than  one  full  class 
period  each  year.  In  other  words  for  each  minute  we  cut  our  class 
time  short,  we  reduce  our  total  time  of  thirty-six  hours  and  forty- 
five  minutes  a  year  by  nearly  one  hour. 


Mei,  1942  TE  KARERE  155 

Stop  and  think  what  it  means  if  we  consistently  cut  ten  or 
fifteen  minutes  each  Sunday  from  our  allotted  forty-five.  A  thirty- 
minute  class  period  means  that  we  have  only  twenty- four  hours  a 
year,  or  but  a  single  day  out  of  three  hundred  and  sixty-five,  to 
teach  the  membership  of  the  Church  the  Gospel. 

May  we  look  at  it  from  another  point  of  view  entirely?  Had 
it  occurred  to  you  that  when  a  class  period  is  shortened  it  is  ex- 
tremely unfair  to  the  department  instructor?  A  sincere,  well  in- 
formed teacher,  plans  her  work  in  advance.  She  anticipates  forty-five 
minutes  of  class  work  in  order  to  teach  the  objective  of  the  lesson. 
Less  than  this  time  makes  the  full  realization  of  her  assignment  diffi- 
cult, if  not  impossible.  If  a  teacher  takes  enough  time  to  fully  pre- 
pare a  lesson,  it  is  obviously  unfair  to  rob  her  of  the  opportunity 
to  culminate  her  worth-while  objective. 

It  is  likewise  unfair  to  the  class  members  who  attend  Sunday 
School.  We  go  to  Sabbath  School,  primarily,  to  be  taught  concern- 
ing the  Gospel  and  our  relationship  to  it.  Some  of  our  younger 
participants  may  not  fully  realise  it.  hilt  if,  because  of  insuffiicent 
class  time,  we  fail  to  establish  for  them  a  testimony  of  this  great 
work,  we  are  grossly  unfair  to  them.  We  may  be  responsible  for 
their  failure  to  obtain  the  greatest  blessing  that  life  has  to  offer — 
namely,  a  testimony  of  this  latter-day  work.  May  we  as  Sunday 
School  workers,  never  be  guilty  of  this  unkindness. 

It  has  been  wisely  arranged  that  forty-five  minutes  of  Sunday 
School  time  be  set  aside  for  a  study  period.  If  we  do  not  spend 
this  amount  for  departmental  work  we  are  using  if  for  less  import- 
ant things.  During  the  Sunday  morning  devotional  hours  nothing- 
is  more  important  than  the  three-quarters  of  an  hour  spent  with  the 
class  instructor  in  Gospel  training. 

May  Kve  urge  that,  if  you  are  not  now  having  a  full  forty-five 
minutes  y6f  class  activity  every  Sunday,  you  immediately  alter  your 
present/procedure  and  see  to  it  that  you  allot  this  amount  of  time 
in  the  future,  and  then  hold  it  inviolate. 

May  we  remind  ourselves  that  we  have  been  commissioned,  as 
Sunday  School  workers,  to  do  a  certain  job — a  very  important  assign- 
ment, of  which  there  is  no  greater.  We  may  be  required  some  day 
lo  give  an  account  of  our  stewardship.  Let  us  all  eagerly  anticipate 
the  reward  of  a  task  well  done.  In  the  future  then — a  full  Eorty- 
five  minutes  for  class  work  each  and  every  Sunday  morning  and  not 
a  single  minute  less. 


THE  ARMOUR  OF  GOD 

"Put  on  the  whole  armour  of  God.  that  ye  may  be  able  to  stand 
against  the  wiles  of  the  devil. 

For  we  wrestle  not   against    flesh  and  blood,   but   against    pnnei 
palities,   against    powers,   against    the   rulers   of   the   darkness   of   this 
world,    against    spiritual    wickedness    in    high    places."-    Paul    to    the 
Ephesians  6:11. 


156 


TE  KARERE 


Mei,  1942 


NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 


AUCKLAND  DISiRlCT 

By     way    of    information 
Jones,     formerly     of     this     M 
Australia.       We    certainly     would    like    to 
see   him   here. 

Brother  and  Sister  William  A.  Carr. 
well  known  members  of  this  branch, 
Bro.  Carr  being  a  former  Branch 
dent  and  is  at  present  a  counsellor  to 
Bro.  Perrott  in  the  Presidency,  have  left 
Auckland  and  are  now  staying  in  he 
South  Island.  We  miss  them  very  much 
and  hope  that  their  stay  in  the  south  i 
only    a    holiday. 

During  the  Easter  week-end  the  Auck- 
land District  held  their  conference,  which 
was  very  well  attended,  particularly  by 
the  Maori  people.  The  Ngapuhi  Saints 
were  here  in  goodly  numbers,  and  they 
added  very  much  to  the  success  of  the 
Hui. 

Even  though  the  activities  of  the  Con- 
ference were  not  as  prepared  as  they 
might  have  been,  due  mostly  to  the  war 
conditions  and  work  of  the  Branch  mem- 
bers, nevertheless,  the  lesson  of  living 
the  Gospel  and  obeying  its  principles 
with  your  brothers  and  sisters  was  the 
theme  that  was  expressed  in  "co-opera- 
tion "  and  its  noticeable  absence  of  appli- 
cation  by   many   was   revealing. 

The  Conference  was  a  success  to  those 
who  went  hoping  to  add  to  what  others 
might  be  able  to  use  and  give  them. 
The  District  President  is  indeed  grateful 
to  the  Maori  Saints  for  their  efforts  at 
the    Conference. 

MANAWATU    DISTRICT 
By    Polly    Wi    Neera 

The  Porirua  Branch  has  been  very  for- 
tunate indeed  to  be  visited  by  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  Wellington  Branch,  Brother 
Domney,  and  his  counsellors  and  mem- 
bers. A  very  inspirational  meeting  was 
held,  and  we  feel  that  such  gatherings 
are  very  beneficial  to  both  branches. 
Some  of  the  speakers  were  Bros.  Hodg- 
kinson,  Rhoner,  Scott,  Pirihi,  Mihaere, 
Sister  Dorothy  Scott  and  John  Meha,  who 
has  been  transferred  away  from  this 
city — and  we  hope  that  he  is  still  en- 
joying good  health  and  the  best  that 
life    can    give    him. 

Bro.  and  Sister  Peneamine  Wi  Neera 
and  Parata  Pirihi  have  been  visiting  non- 
members  at  Plimmerton,  and  a  very  in- 
teresting and  enjoyable  time  was  spent 
there  with  the  people  who  have  been  so 
helpful  to  them  in  opening  up  their 
homes   to   the   servants   of   the   Gospel. 

The  Relief  Society  Centenary  was 
celebrated  in  the  Porirua  Branch  on 
Sunday,  15th  March.  Members  both  of 
the  Priesthood  and  the  Relief  Society 
Board  were  present.  The  Priesthood 
opened  the  meeting  and  then  the  Sisters 
took  over.  Sister  Wi  Neera,  on  the 
Board,  made  a  speech  of  welcome,  and 
the  history  and  purpose  of  the  Society, 
ever  since  it  was  formed  in  this  mission, 
was  given,  and  the  great  leaders  and 
the  wonderful  work  they  had  done  was 
also      mentioned.        Sister      Hannah       Wi 


Neera,  who  turned  83  on  17th,  and  Ra- 
kapa  Te  Iti  Mathews,  the  two  oldest 
members  in  this  branch,  took  active  part 
in  the  programme.  Sister  Mathews 
supervised  the  cutting  of  the  Centenary 
cake,  and  it  might  also  be  mentioned 
here  that  although  this  good  Sister  who 
was  a  mother  to  the  Elders  and  who 
made  it  possible  for  them  to  establish 
their  headquarters  at  her  home,  has  long 
since  said  goodbye  to  her  young  days 
and  has  retired  into  a  world  of  solitude 
and  quiet  which  seems  to  fit  her  nature. 
She  recited  at  this  meeting  a  very  in- 
spiring poem  entitled  "Mary,"  which  had 
eight  verses  to  it  and  eight  lines  in 
<>ach  verse.  Sister  Mathews  has  since 
nfined  to  the  Wellington  Hospital 
am'     our     prayers     are     for     her     speedy 

ltly  we  were  again  privileged  to 
entertain  eleven  more  members  of  the 
Maori  Battalion  who  returned  from  ac- 
tive service  The  Hon.  Mr.  Mason,  Min- 
ister for  Native  Affairs,  represented  the 
N.Z.  Government  and  welcomed  the  boys 
on  behalf  of  game  In  attendance  was 
the  Hon.  Mr.  Jones,  Minister  for  De- 
fence, and  others.  In  between  speeches 
action  songs  were  rendered  by  members 
of  the  Ngati  1'oneke  Club.  We  were 
fortunate  to  have  on  ihis  occasion  Mr. 
Linn,  a  visitor  fro.m  America,  who  was 
welcomed  into  our  midst  by  Mr.  Tai 
Mitchell  of  Rotorua  and  who  also  made 
mention  of  the  high  standard  of  the 
U.S.  fighting  forces  and  the  great  leader 
they  had  in  President  Roosevelt.  He 
said  that  the  Maori  people  in  particular 
had  a  great  liking  for  the  American 
people.  Mr.  Linn  was  n  ore  than  thrilled 
to  be  present  at  such  a  gathering.  "Ka 
Mate!  Ka  mate!  Kaora !  Kaora !"  was 
rendered  by  the  Club  m  rs  and   trans- 

lated    for     the    benefit     of     the    American 
visitor. 

Sister    Nepia     \v;.s     also     called     on     to 
speak.      Pte.     Walters     replied     on     behilf 
of   the  boys   who   returned,   and    i  nded   his 
-i.   ech    with    the   rendition  of   "Ma  • 
talion"    with     the    help    of    the    otl 
turned    boys.      Dinner   was   served   aid.   as 
usual,  it  was   very  much  appreciati   '     and 
our  American  friend   lost  no  time  ii 
ing   himself   to    Maori    delicacies    wh 
appeared     to     enjoy.      Mr.     H.     R. 
Secretary    to    the    Native    Minister 
as    master   of   ceremonies. 

Death  has  called  to  the  great  beyond 
two  of  our  dearly  loved  ones.  W- 
our  deepest  sympathy  to  Sister  Eileen 
Rei  Rene  and  her  husband,  who  lost  their 
eldest  son  on  the  23rd  March.  To  Pro. 
and  Sister  Pumipi  te  Hiko  and  famil 
extend  our  heartfelt  sorrow  in  the  loss 
of  their  daughter,  Raiha  te  Hiko  Rihia, 
known  to  everyone  as  Eliza,  who  gave  up 
this  life  on  the  26th  March.  We  regret 
that  she  could  not  leave  behind  her  all 
the  talent  that  she  possessed  and  made 
use  of,  but  we  feel  sure  that  it  has  all 
gone  to  a  better  world.  Her  husband, 
Eruera  (Teddy)  Rihia  is  serving  with 
the  Maori  Battalion  overseas.  This  young 
woman,  who  was  only  21  years  of  age, 
was    one    of    three    girls    who    took    active 


$  Te  Karere 

)L  Established  in  1907  ^ 

V  Wahanga    36  Hune,    1942  Nama    6  X, 

.  Matthew   Cowley  Tumuaki    Mihana 

Kelly  Harris         Etita 

Eru   T.   Kupa       Kaiwhakamaori 

Waimate   Anaru  Kaiwhakamaori 

"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  whakatapua  hei  hapai  ake  i  te  iwi  Maori  ki 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-nui.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  THE  BUSINESS  PRINTING 
WORKS  LTD.,  55  Albert  Street,  Auckland,  CI,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency: $1.00   per  year;   $4.00   for  five   years;   $10.00   for  life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


CONTENTS 

Editorial —  Page 

Te    Ruihi    Hokarana    164 

Louis    G.    Hoagland    165 

Special    Features 

A  Word  to  the   Wise    166 

He   Matenga 167 

M.A.C.  Old  Boys  Memorial   Gate    186 

Church    Features — 

Sunday   School    168 

Mutual   Improvement  Association 172 

Primary    178 

News  from  the  Field   1 84 


TE  KARERE 


Hune,  1942 


Editorial  .  . 


TE  RUIHI  HOKARANA 

"He  nui  tangata  e  heke  ana  ki  te  Po ; 
he  iti  tangata  e  kake  ana  ki  te  rangi." 

Tenei  to  tatou  matua  a  te  Ruihi  Hokarana  kua  kake 
ki  te  rangi ;  kua  haere  ki  tua  o  te  arai,  ki  te  marae  o  Tane- 
Nui-A-Rangi  me  nga  apa  whatu-kura,  apa  marci-kura  o  Io. 
Haere  e  Pa ;  haere  ki  o  taua  matua,  whaea,  tuakana,  tuahine, 
teina  o  te  iwi  nei  kua  riro  atu  nei  ratou  i  mua  i  a  koe. 
Na  ratou  ano  koe  i  powhiri  kia  tae  atu  koe  ki  a  ratou,  he 
aroha  hoki  na  ratou  mo  au  mahi  i  roto  i  nga  Whare  Tapu 
o  te  Atua.  mo  ratou  kua  mate  nei.  Kua  tu  koe  inaianei  hei 
rangatira  mo  ratou  i  runga  i  to  ratou  Marae.  Ahakoa  ko 
matou  kua  mahue  iho  i  roto  i  te  pouritanga  o  tenei  ao  kei 
te  hari  mai  ano  nga  tini  mano  o  te  iwi  kua  ngaro  atu  nei 
mou  kua  tae  atu  hei  manaaki  i  a  ratou  ki  au  mahi  whakaora 
i  te  hunga  mate.  Ahakoa.  kei  te  noho  mokemoke  to  taua 
whaea  a  Mere  Whaanga  i  te  Pa  Tote  mou  kua  tangohia  atu 
nei,  e  kore  e  taea  te  pewhea.  Era  ano  nga  Kaumatua  hei 
manaaki  i  a  ia  pera  ano  me  koe  i  manaaki  i  a  ia  mai  ano 
i  te  wa  i  hoki  atu  ia  ki  Hiona.  Kei  te  pai  a  ia  e  Ruihi ;  kaua 
e  pouri.  Kua  tata  hoki  te  wa  mona.  Mau  ano  e  whaka- 
tikatika  i  tetahi  wahi  mona ;  ara,  ma  korua  ko  tona  rangatira. 
Kati. 

Ka  mutu  i  to  tatou  matua  ia  te  Ruihi  tenei  mea  te  aroha 
ki  tona  iwi,  ki  te  iwi  Maori.  E  toru  ona  mihana  ki  Niu 
Tireni,  a  ko  ia  ano  te  Tumuaki  o  te  Mihana  mai  i  te  tau 
1905  tae  atu  ki  te  tau  1907.  I  te  tau  1918  ka  hoki  tuatoru 
mai  ia.  Ko  tenei  mihana  ona  he  mihana  kohi  whakapapa. 
Na  te  kaha  ona  ki  tenei  mahi  ka  riro  i  a  ia  nga  tuhituhinga 
e  whakamarama  ana  i  nga  mahi  tapu  o  roto  i  te  Whare- 
Wananga,  ara  te  Kauwae  Runga  me  te  Kauwae  Raro.  Na 
te  Whatahoro  i  hoatu  enei  pukapuka  tapu  ki  te  Ruihi  mo 
te  Hahi.  I  muri  mai  ka  rongo  te  Kawanatanga  kei  te  Hunga 
Tapu  enei  pukapuka  a  ka  tangohia  e  ratou.  Ka  tino  pouri 
te  ngakau  o  Hokarana  i  a  ia  ka  rongo  kua  riro  atu  enei 
pukapuka   ki   te   Kawanatanga,   a  ka   tuhi   tonu   mai   ia   ki 


Hune,  1942  TE  KARERE  16b 

nga  Tumuaki  Mihana  ma  ratou  e  tono  atu  ki  te  Kawana- 
tanga  kia  whakahokia  mai  nga  pukapuka  nei.  Ko  te  take 
i  penei  ai  ia  na  te  tini  o  nga  ingoa  i  roto  i  aua  pukapuka 
hei  mahi  mana  i  roto  i  te  Temepara.  Ahakoa  kahore  te 
Kawanatanga  e  whakaae  kia  whakahokia  mai  nga  pukapuka 
ki  te  Hahi  kua  oti  nga  pukapuka  te  kape  "copy"  a  kua 
homai  te  kape  mo  te  Hahi.  No  tenei  tau  ano  i  homai  taua 
kape.  Kaore  pea  a  te  Ruihi  i  rongo  kua  riro  mai  ano 
enei  tuhituhinga  i  a  ia  ka  mate  nei.  Kei  te  pai.  Kua  nui 
atu  hoki  nga  ingoa  Maori  kua  mauria  e  ia  ki  roto  ki  te 
Temepara.  No  reira  ma  etahi  e  mau  nga  ingoa  roto  i 
te  Kauwae  Runga  me  te  Kauwae  Raro  ki  te  Temepara 
mahia  ai. 

Ahakoa  he  tangata  kaha  ia  ki  te  mahi  i  nga  mahi 
whai-oranga  o  tenei  ao  ka  pau  katoa  ona  whakaaro  ki  nga 
mahi  whaka-te-wairua.  I  enei  tau  kua  taha  tata  ake  nei 
ka  mahi  ia  i  roto  i  te  Temepara;  ara  raua  tahi  ko  tana 
wahine,  a  ko  te  nuinga  a  to  raua  mahi  mo  te  iwi  Maori.  Ko 
te  wairua  o  Iraia  i  roto  i  a  ia  i  nga  wa  katoa;  nana  ano  i 
"whakatahuri  nga  ngakau  o  nga  tamariki  ki  o  ratou  matua, 
me  nga  ngakau  o  nga  matua  ki  nga  tamariki."  No  reira  e 
te  iwi,  me  whakahonore  tatou  i  te  ingoa  o  tenei  kai-whakaora 
o  te  iwi  Maori.  Kia  kaha  tatou  ki  te  whakawhaiti  i  nga 
ingoa  whakapapa.  Ma  tenei  mahi  e  whakahonore  ai  tatou 
i  te  ingoa  o  te  Ruihi  Hokarana. 

Ma  te  Atua  tona  wahine  me  a  raua  tamariki  e  manaaki 
i  roto  i  tenei  wa  o  te  pouritanga. 

— Matiu  Kauri. 


LOUIS  G.  HOAGLAND 

Word  has  been  received  of  the  death  of  Louis  G.  Hoag- 
land,  former  President  of  the  New  Zealand  Mission.  He 
died  at  his  home  in  Salt  Lake  City  at  the  age  of  71  years. 
President  Hoagland  filled  three  missions  in  New  Zealand. 
He  was  Mission  President  on  his  second  mission  and  his 
third  mission  was  in  the  interest  of  genealogy.  He  was 
the  first  Bishop  of  the  26th  Ward  in  Salt  Lake  City.  He 
loved  New  Zealand  and  her  people,  and  during  his  life  tune 
did  temple  work  for  many  of  these  people,  both  European 
and  Maori. 

The  New  Zealand  Mission  extends  sympathy  to  his 
devoted  wife  and  the  bereaved  members  of  the  family. 

—M.C. 


166  TE  KARERE  Hune,  1942 


A  WORD  TO  THE  WISE 

Remember  to  be  careful  of  all  colds.  When  anyone 
has  a  cold,  child  or  grown-up,  see  to  it  that  proper  care  is 
taken.  Do  not  expose  yourselves  to  the  chill  that  might 
follow  and  usually  turns  into  something  more  serious,  like 
pneumonia,  etc.  Above  all,  do  not  leave  things  too  late 
before  calling  in  a  doctor  or  district  nurse.  It  becomes  a 
crime  when  responsible  parents,  husbands,  wives  and  rela- 
tives or  guardians  neglect  to  obtain  medical  assistance  before 
it  is  too  late.  No  Latter-day  Saint  should  be  guilty  of  such 
a  CRIME. 

Disease  is  more  prevalent  now  than  at  any  other  time. 
You  know  the  reason  for  it. 

It  is  well  that  parents  assess  very  wisely  the  need  for 
preventing  disease  gaining  a  foothold  in  the  family.  It  may 
not  even  be  the  little  ones  who  will  first  succumb  to  the 
"cold" — "cough" — "chill" — and  "fever"  that  first  heralds 
the  striking  of  days  of  being  in  bed,  worry,  sorrow,  pain 
and  even  death. 

I  am  no  doctor.  I  do  not  know  what  the  various  ail- 
ments are.  I  do  not  know  what  treatment  to  give  patients. 
I  do  not  even  profess  to  know  much  about  telling  others 
what  to  do  to  help  prevent  disease  striking  us  down.  But 
I  do  know  that  we  should  all  be  careful  with  ourselves. 
CAREFUL  of  what  we  wear  during  these  winter  days  and 
nights.  CAREFUL  of  how  we  expose  our  bodies  to  the 
poisons  of  contagious  diseases  that  are  now  on  every  side. 

As  Church  members,  our  health  guide  is  the  Word  of 
Wisdom.  Our  best  friend  is  our  neighbour — stranger — doc- 
tor or  nurse  who  will  always  be  at  our  service  and  call  when 
we  need  help,   providing  we  do  not  leave  things  too  late. 

The  wisdom  of  the  wise  men  availeth  nothing,  if  it 
cannot  be  tested. 

Again  I  say,  neglect  nothing  as  far  as  your  health  is 
concerned. 

Kelly  Harris. 


HE  MATENGA 

I  te  21   o  Aperira  ka  wehe  atu  a  Manihera  Kauvvhata  i   roto 
ano  i  tona  tuunga  waewae  i  te  Xgawha. 

Haere  e  to  matou  matua,  haere  ki  o  tamariki  e  hinga  ma  ra  i 
tawahi,  haere  ki  te  nuinga  kei  te  po.     Haere. 

— Na  Rauriki  M.  Kauwhata,  i  ripoata. 


Hune,  1942  TE  KARERE  167 

HE  MATENGA 

He  panuitanga  tenei  ki  nga  whanaunga  me  nga  hoa  aroha  o  te 
matenga  o  ta  maua  tamaiti  tane  matamua,  o  Huiki-o-te-rangi  Kupa. 
I  mate  ki  te  hohipera  i  Rawene,  Hokianga  i  te  toru  o  nga  ra  o 
Aperira  1942. 

Te-kau-ma-whitu  nga  ra  i  te  toe  atu  ka  eke  ona  tau  ki  te  tekau- 
ma-waru.  Ko  tenei  tamaiti  i  mate  i  runga  i  te  kimihanga  i  te 
matauranga.  I  te  tau  i  whakanoho  ai  matou  ki  nga  Ngapuhi  nei 
ka  paahi  ia  i  te  kura  i  Maromaku.  E  toru  ona  tau  ki  te  High 
School  i  Whangarei  ka  hoki  mai  ki  te  kainga,  ki  Motuti,  Hokianga, 
ka  kura  tonu  i  te  "Correspondence  Course"   mo  te  rua  tau.     I  a 

Maehe  nei  ka  tae  mai  te  kupu  a  te  Edu- 

Liberty  and  Christian  \  cation  Department  kia  tirohia  tona  tinana 
ideals  will  carry  civiliza-  \  mo  te  ora  (X-ray),  ka  mea  mai  te  takuta 
Hon  forward  swiftly,  gen-  \  i  Rawene  me  tango  ra  ano  te  mate  kei 
eration  after  generation  if  j  roto  j  tona  fan  ^a  ahei  ai  te  paahi  i  aia. 
TdaeZip'ff  ttTe  who  \  Na  roto  i  tenei  tapahanga  (operation)  ka 
as  leaders  are  the  most  \  puta  ake  te  taumahanga  o  te  mate.  I 
competent  and  the  most  \  haere  ora  atu  tona  tinana  ki  te  hohipera, 
righteous.  —  Richard  R.    j   na  ana  ano  hoki  j  haere  atu      No  te  tom 

j  o  nga  ra  i  muri  mai  o  te  tapahanga  ka 

" waeatia  mai  kia  haere  atu  maua  ko  tona 

whaea,  tae  rawa  atu  kua  kore  ke  e  mohio  mai  kia  maua,  otira,  ka 
whakawahingia,  a  ka  timata  te  ahua  pai  ake,  i  tahi  ra  ka  ahua  mohio 
mai  ka  mea  mai  ki  te  whaea  kia  tikina  ona  kakahu  kia  hoki  matou  ki 
te  kainga,  otira,  i  tetahi  ra  i  muri  mai  ka  timata  te  kino  a  tae  noa 
ki  tona  hemonga. 

I  tangihia  nuitia  tenei  tamaiti  e  nga  iwi  o  Motuti,  Panguru,  me 
Waihou,  ara  e  te  Rarawa  mo  tona  ngohengohe,  he  kore  no  tetahi 
mahi  kino  i  meatia  e  ia  i  waenganui  ia  ratou.  I  tae  mai  a  Hohepa 
Heperi  me  Sister  Heperi  ki  te  awhina  i  a  maua  i  roto  to  maua  pouri- 
tanga,  i  ruia  hoki  etahi  kupu  nunui  mo  te  ahua  o  tenei  mea  o  te 
mate  ki  waenganui  i  nga  iwi  i  tae  mai,  i  te  mea  he  Katorika  anake 
tenei  iwi.  I  te  wa  i  nehua  ai,  i  te  mea  e  mahi  hoia  ana  tenei  tamaiti 
i  mua  atu  o  tona  matenga  i  whakanuia  ia  e  nga  hoia,  na  Hohepa 
Haringi  Leef  i  mihimihi  mo  te  taha  ki  te  Home  Guard,  na  Tere 
Noa  mo  te  taha  ki  nga  Territorials,  na  Hone  Perea  Teihi  mo  te 
taha  ki  te  iwi. 

Na  Hohepa  Heperi  i  whakatapu  te  rua.  I  nehua  ia  ki  te  urupa 
o  Panguru  i  te  Ratapu  te  5  o  Aperira  1942. 

Heoi  ano  ra,  na  to  koutou  teina  me  to  koutou  tuahine  i  roto  i  te 
aroha. 

— Era  Kupa  me  Mihiterina  Horomono  Kupu. 

"Man  is  not  the  creature  of  circumstances.    Circumstances  are 

the  creatures  of  men." — Disraeli. 


[68  TE  KARERE  Hune,  1942 

SUNDAY   SCHOOL 


T  lie  me — 

"OUR  HOMES  AND   CHAPELS   SHALL   BE   BEAUTIFUL" 
"For  Zion  must  increase  in  beauty  and  in  Holiness;  her  borders 
must  be  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened;  yea  verily  I  say 
unto  you.    Zion  must  arise  and  put  on  her  beautiful  garments." 

— Doctrine  &  Covenants  82 :  14. 

SACRAMENT  GEM 
May  we  be  among  the  number 

Worthy  to   surround  the  board, 
And  partake  anew  the  Emblems 

Of  the  suffrings  of  our  Lord. 

CONCERT  RECITATION 

Romans  8:38-39. 

"For  I  am  persuaded,  that  neither  death,  nor  life,  nor  angels, 
nor  principalities,  nor  powers,  nor  things  present,  nor  things  to  come, 
nor  height,  nor  depth,  nor  any  other  creature,  shall  be  able  to  separate 
us  from  the  love  of  God,  which  is  in  Christ  Jesus  our  Lord." 

KORERO  A  XGAKAU 

Roma  8:  38-39. 

U  tonu  hoki  toku  whakaaro,  e  kore  te  mate,  e  kore  te  ora,  e 
kore  nga  anahera,  e  kore  nga  rangatira,  e  kore  nga  kaha,  e  kore  nga 
mea  o  naianei,  e  kore  nga  mea  e  puta  mai  a  mua,  E  kore  te  tiketike, 
e  kore  te  hohonu,  e  kore  tetahi  atu  mea  hanga,  e  kaha  ki  te  momotu 
i  a  tatou  i  te  aroha  o  te  Atua,  i  tera  i  roto  nei  i  a  Karaiti  Ihu,  i  to 
tatou  Ariki." 

LESSONS 

KINDERGARTEN    (4   to   5   years).     Thought:   "God's   Providence." 
"Elijah  Fed  by  the  Ravens"    (1   Kings   17). 
"Behold    the    Fowls    of    the   Air"     (Matthew    6). 

"How  We  are  Provided  For  in  the  Present  Day"    (Teachers  to  tell 
of  the  things   God  has  provided  for  our  use. 

PRIMARY    (6  to  9  years). 

"The  Little  Maid  of  Samaria"    (2  Kings  5).     Thought:  "The  Lord 

remembers  the  faithful  in  the  time  of  their  need." 
"Caught  in  a  Trap"   (2  Kings  6).     Thought:  "We  should  be  noble 

and  just,  even  to  our  enemies." 
"A  Very  Little  King"    (2  Kings  11  and  12).      Thought:  "Sin  is  a 

reproach  to   any  people." 
"Youths  Who  Would  Not  Bow  to  an  Idol"    (Daniel  3).      Thought: 

"The  Lord  is  honoured  through  the  faithfulness  of  His  children." 


Hune,  1942  TE  KARERE  169 

CHURCH  HISTORY   (10  and  11  years). 

"Korihor,  The  Anti-Christ"  (Alma  30).  Thought:  "The  way  of 
the  transgressor  is  hard."  Facts:  Korihor,  his  apostasy — many 
people  follow  him — he  demands  a  sign — is  struck  dumb — writes 
his  acknowledgment — his  terrible  death. 

"Shiblon"  (Alma  38).  Thought:  "A  wise  son  maketh  a  glad 
father."  Facts:  Alma  instructs  Shiblon — Shiblon  among  the 
Zoramites — his  faith,  patience,  purity,  and  humility — their  value 
to  youth. 

Review  any  of  the  Lessons  you  have  already  had. 

A   &   B   DEPARTMENTS    (12  to   15,   16  to   19   years). 

"The  Saviour  of  His  Father's  House"  (Genesis  46,  47,  48  and  50). 
What  to  look  for:  Israel's  journey  to  Egypt.  The  introduction  of 
Jacob  and  his  sons  to  Pharaoh  by  Joseph.  The  section  of  Egypt  given 
to  Israel.  Jacob's  blessings  to  Ephraim  and  Manasseh.  The  death 
and  burial  of  Jacob.  Joseph's  prophecy  and  his  death.  Problems: 
What  was  the  Lord's  promise  to  Jacob  at  Beer-Sheba?  How  did 
Joseph  secure  all  the  land  of  Egypt  for  Pharaoh?  What  was  the  re- 
lationship between  Jacob,  Ephraim  and  Manasseh?  How  many  years 
did  Jacob  live  in  Egypt?  What  request  did  Joseph  make  concerning 
his  bones? 

"Jacob's  and  Moses'  Blessings.  Our  Blessings"  (Genesis  49; 
Deut.  33).  What  to  look  for:  Who  received  the  blessing  recorded  in 
Genesis  49  and  Deut.  33?  Purpose  of  Patriarchal  blessings.  Problems: 
Who  gave  the  blessings  in  Gen.  49  and  Deut.  33?  How  do  you  under- 
stand the  promise  that  Joseph's  land  shall  have  a  fulness  of  precious 
things  of  the  earth?  Who  is  entitled  to  receive  a  Patriarchal  blessing? 
Of  what  value  is  a  Patriarchal  blessing  to   you? 

Review  any  lessons  needed. 

C  DEPARTMENT   (20  to  25  years). 

"Discourse  on  the  Bread  of  Life  in  a  Synagogue  at  Capernaum" 
(John  6).  Problems:  In  the  light  of  Matt.  4:  4  and  John  4:  32,  what 
does  our  Saviour  mean  by  saying,  "Whoso  eateth  my  flesh,  and  drink- 
eth  my  blood,  hath  eternal  life"?  What  evidence  have  we  that  the 
multitude  had  a  selfish  purpose  in  seeking  Christ  on  this  occasion? 
What  part  of  the  discourse  seemed  to  antagonize  the  Jews  most? 
What  statement  did  Peter  make  which  showed  his  faith  in  Christ? 

"In    Capernaum    and    Syro-Phoenicia"     (Matt.     15    and    Mark    7). 

"In  Decapolis,  Magdala,  and  Bethsaida"  (Matt.  15,  16  and  Mark 
7,  8). 

GOSPEL  DOCTRINE    (Others  not  already  assigned). 

"The  Captives  in  Babylon"  (Daniel  1  to  4).  Helps — Daniel  and 
his  friends — Nebuchadnezzar's  dream — Daniel's  interpretation — the 
king's  golden  image — the  fiery  furnace — Daniel's  companions  delivered 
— Nebuchadnezzar's  second  dream — the  king's  humiliation — praises  the 
king  of  heaven. 

"Reigns  of  Belshazzar  and  Darius"  (Daniel  5  to  7).  Helps — 
Belshazzar's  feast — his  confusion  and  death — Daniel's  exaltation  under 
Darius — the  den  of  lions — I)aniel's  dream  of  the  four  beasts — the  ten 
horns — the  little  horn. 

MAORI  CLASS. 

RATAPU  TUATAHI 

Te  whakahere  a  Ihu  na  tona  hiahia  ake,  he  puputanga  ake  HO  te 
aroha.  Kua  kitea  iho  nei  i  ata  tukua  paitia  6  te  karaiti  nana  ake  hoki 
tona  hiahia  mo  te  hokonga  o  te  tangata,   nana   ano    i    hoatn    i   a    ia   ake 


170  TE  KARERE  Hune,  1942 

ki  te  kaunihera  tuatahi  i  te  rangi,  hei  mea  mo  te  whakahere  whaka- 
marietanga  i  ahei  nei  na  runga  i  te  haranga  o  te  tangata  tuatahi;  me 
te  herekoretanga  i  kitea  i  whakahaeretia  i  roto  i  tenei  te  wahi  mata- 
maua  o  tona  mihana  whakaora  mau  tonu  tae  noa  ki  te  mutunga  rawa- 
tanga  o  te  whakatutukitanga  o  te  tauira  kua  whakaaetia  ra.  Ahakoa 
i  noho  ia  i  runga  i  te  whenua  he  tangata  pu  i  nga  ahuatanga  katoa  e 
pa  ana  kia  tatou  mo  tatou  whakaaro  mo  ona  he  tauira  no  te  Atua- 
tanga  i  roto  i  te  tangata,  otira  e  tika  ana  kia  mau  ki  tenei,  ahakoa  i 
whanau  ia  na  roto  atu  i  te  whaea  o  te  oranga  mate  mate,  i  whanau 
mai  ia  i  te  kikokiko  na  runga  i  te  Matua  Mutunga  Kore.  Na  konei 
ka  huia  ki  roto  i  tona  tinanatanga  te  hihikotanga  me  te  taenga  ki  te 
mahi  me  te  mana  ki  te  tu  atu  ki  te  mate.  Nana  ano  i  tuku  atu  tona 
oranga,  e  hara  te  mea  me  mea  tango  i  a  ia  i  runga  i  tona  kore  hiahia. 
Tirohia  te  tikanga  i  roto  i  tona  ake  whakaaturanga :  "Koia  te  Matua 
ka  aroha  mai  ai  ki  Ahau,  no  te  mea  e  tuku  ana  Ahau  i  Ahau  kia  mate, 
kia  whakaora  ake  ai  ano  Ahau  i  Ahau.  E  hara  i  te  mea  ma  tetahi 
tangata  Ahau  e  whakamate,  engari  Maku  ano  Ahau  e  tuku  ki  te  mate, 
kei  Ahau  te  tikanga  mo  te  tuku  atu,  kei  Ahau  ano  te  tikanga  mo  te 
whakaora." 

Nga   Patai: 

Rapua  etahi  patai  mo  nga  whakaaro  o  tenei  rehana  me  nga  puta- 
putanga  korero  e  pa  ana  ki  tenei  rehana. 

RATAPU    TUARUA 

I  tetahi  wa  ano  i  whakaatu  a  Ihu  mo  ona  ano  i  penei — "Ta  te  mea 
he  ora  ta  te  Matua  kei  roto  i  a  ia,  waihoki  kua  homai  e  ia  ki  te 
Tama,  kia  whai  ora  i  roto  ia  ia:  A  kua  homai  ano  ki  a  ia  he  tikanga 
mo  te  whakawa,  no  te  mea  ko  ia  te  Tama  a  te  Tangata.  I  roto  i  te 
wa  kikino  o  te  tukunga  i  a  ia,  i  te  wa  o  tetahi  i  mea  nei  hei  Kai-aru 
no  ona  he  hoa  hoki  ka  tuku  i  a  ia  ki  ona  kai  tukino  na  runga  i  te 
kihi  whakapai  kanohi,  a  te  ohoreretanga  o  Pita  i  roto  i  te  pukatanga 
o  ona  whakaaro,  ka  kumea  ake  e  ia  tona  hoari  hei  awhina  tiaki  i  a  te 
Karaiti,  ka  mea  atu  te  Kai-Whakaako:  "E  hua  koe  e  kore  e  ahei  i  ahau 
aianei  te  inoi  ki  toku  Matua  a  maha  atu  nga  rihiona  anahera  kotahi 
te  kau  ma  rua  ana  e  homai  ai  ki  ahau?  Nei  ra,  ma  te  aha  ka  rite 
ai  ta  nga  karaipiture  ara  ko  tenei  kia  meatia?"  A  tae  noa  atu  ki  te 
mutunga  kino,  i  wai  tohutia  nei  e  te  kupu  whakamutunga — kupu  nui 
hoki.  "Kua  Oti."  Te  Atua  i  roto  nei  i  te  kikokiko  kei  a  ia  pu  ano 
te  mana  e  pupuri  ana  hei  turaki  i  ona  kai  tukino  mehemea  ra  i  pai 
ia  kia  peratia. 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  Pehea  ta   Ihu   whakamarama  mo   te   Matua  me   Ia? 

2.  I   te   wa   i  tukua   ai   a   Ihu   e   tona  kai  tuku   he   aha  te   mea   i 
mahia  e  Pita  i  roto  i  te  pukatanga  o  ona  whakaaro? 

3.  Pehea  te  whakahoki  a  Ihu? 

4.  He   aha  te   mea   nui   i   kitea   iho   e   tatou   i   roto   i   nga   korero 
a  Ihu? 

RATAPU  TUATORU 

Te  mana  e  whakaoho  ana  e  hapai  ana  hoki  i  a  Ihu  i  roto  i  nga 
ahua  katoa  o  tona  mihana,  mai  i  te  wa  o  te  whakaritenga  tuatahi 
i  a  ia  ki  te  haora  o  te  whakaotinga  wikitoria  i  runga  o  te  ripeka,  e 
rua  ona  taha:  Tuatahi,  ko  te  hiahia  kite  whakarite  i  ta  tona  Matua  i 
pai  ai,  te  whakaotinga  o  te  hokonga  o  nga  uri  tangata;  tuarua,  tona 
aroha  ki  nga  uri  tangata,  ko  te  whakahaere  nei  mo  to  ratou  ahua 
me  to  ratou  roanga,  kua  riro  nei  i  a  ia  te  mana.  I  tawhiti  noa 
atu  i  a  ia  te  wairua  mauahara  whakautu  hoki  ki  te  hunga  na  ratou 


Hune,  1942  TE  KARERE  171 

nei  i  a  i  whakamate,  i  toko  ke  ake  he  wairua  pouri,  aroha  kia  ratou 
tae  noat.a  te  mutunga,  whakaronga  ki  a  ia  i  to  haora  o  te  whaka- 
raamas  nui,  e  inoi  kaha  ana  '*E  te  matua  houhia  te  rongo  ki  a  ratou, 
kahore  hoki  ratou  e  mahara  ki  ta  ratou  e  me  a  nei."  Kahore  ano 
i  hoki  iho  to  te  Matua  aroha,  e  kitea  na  i  tana  whakaaetanga  ki  ta  te 
Tama  tikanga,  me  te  tuku  i  a  ia  kua  pai  nei  kia  karangatia  e  Ia  ko 
tana  i  ahuareka  ai  kia  pangia  e  te  mamae  i  to  te  Atua  nei  mamae- 
tanga.  "Ko  ia  ano  te  aroha  noa  o  te  Atua  ki  te  ao,  homai,  ana  e  ia 
tana  Tama  Kotahia  kia  kahore  ai  e  ngaro  te  tangata  e  whakapono 
ana  ki  a  ia,  engari  kia  whiwhi  ai  ki  te  ora  tonu.  Kihai  hoki  te  Atua 
i  tono  i  tana  Tama  ki  te  ao  ki  te  whakahe  i  te  ao,  engari  kia  ora  ai 
te  ao  i  a  ia.  Tera  ano  hoki,  ka  rongo  nei  tatou  i  te  whakaakoranga  a 
te  Apotoro  i  aroha  nuitia  nei  e  te  Ariki:  "Na  konei  i  kitea  mai  ai  te 
aroha  o  te  Atua  kia  tatou,  na  te  mea  kua  tonoa  mai  e  te  Atua  tana 
Tama  Kotahi  ki  te  ao,  kia  ora  tatou  i  a  ia." 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  I  roto  i  te  mihana  a  Ihu  he  aha  te  kai  whakaoho  i  a  ia? 

2.  Pehea  te  ahua  o  Ihu  ki  te  hunga  na  ratou  nei  ia  i  tuku? 

3.  Whakatakina   te  rarangi   karaipiture   e  tautoko   i  to   whakautu 
mo   te   patai   tuarua? 

4.  Ko  wai  te  Apotoro  i  aroha  nui  a  Ihu? 

RATAPU   TUAWHA 

Te  whakamarietanga  kua  rite  noa  atu  kua  poropititia  noatu.  Kua 
whakaaturia  ake  ra,  ko  te  tauira  a  te  Matua  kia  tuhera  he  huarahi 
hei  hoko  i  nga  uri  tangata.  Katahi  ka  waiho  i  nga  tangata  katoa  kia 
watea  te  whakahaere  i  ta  ratou  e  pai  ai,  he  mea  whakaae  e  te 
Kaunihera  o  te  rangi  me  te  whakakahore  hoki  i  ta  Rutipa  tauira  o  te 
aki  i  te  tangata.  I  taua  vva  onamata  ra  ano  ko  te  Karaiti  kua  whaka- 
ritea  hei  takawaenga  mo  nga  tangata  katoa,  ae  ra,  "he  kawenata  i 
whakaritea  i  waenganui  i  a  raua  ko  te  Matua,  i  whakaae  nei  ia  i  roto 
kia  noho  hei  kai  whakamarie  mo  nga  hara  o  te  ao,  a  ko  ia  noho  ana, 
e  whakaaturia  ra  ko  te  Reme  kua  patua  noatia  atu  o  te  oroko- 
hanganga  ra  ano  o  te  ao." 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  No  hea  mai  te  tauria  a  te  Matua  mo  nga  uri  tangata? 

2.  He   aha  taua  tauira? 

.'!.     He  aha  te  kawenata  i  waenganui  i  te  Matua  raua  ko  te  Tama? 

HOME   GARDENS 

The  matter  of  intensive  planting  of  gardens  this  season  is  one 
thai  should  also  be  given  special  attention.  There  is  land  in 
community,  vacant  lots,  and  strips  along  farms  where  additional  crops 
planted.  We  recommend  the  use  of  ever}  available  nan 
for  the  planting  and  growing  oi  gardens  and  field  crops.  We  urge 
u  for  ever)  family.  Ii  is  good  econom)  foi  us  to  prepare 
for  the  future,  and  oui   i  lenl  will  need  all  the  surplus  which 

can   be  produced.     Early  planting  1      Well-prepan 

ii  vital.  Lei  us  adopi  the  slogan,  "A  GARDEN  F(  >R  I  \  IKY 
FAMILY." 


"If  you  want  to  find  an  honest  man,  tool 

>■<>/<  Gi 


172  TE  KARERE  Hune,  1942 

Mutual  Improvement  Association 

M.I.A.  THEME  1942 

Doctrine  &  Covenants  82:10:  "I,  the  Lord,  am 
bound  when  ye  do  what  I  say ;  but  when  you  do  not  what  I 
say,  ye  have  no  Promise." 

SECOND   TUESDAY: 

FIRST  AID    (All  Classes) 
Review   of   Lesson    III. 

1.  What  is  a  tourniquet? 

2.  Name  the  two  points  on  the  body  where  tourniquet  is  applied. 

3.  How  long  is  a  tourniquet  left  tight?      What  is  the  danger  oi 
leaving  it  indefinitely? 

4.  What  is  shock — what  causes  shock? 

5.  Give  the  symptoms  and  treatment  of  shock. 

6.  Name  the  three  types  of  unconsciousness. 

7.  Give   symptoms  and  treatment   of   each. 

8.  Give  symptoms  and  treatment  of  sunstroke.      Which  conditions 
of  unconsciousness  would  be  found? 

9.  Give  symptoms  and  treatment  of  heat  exhaustion.     Which  con- 
dition of  unconsciousness  would  be  found? 

10.  What  are  the   symptoms  and  treatment  of   apoplexy? 

11.  Give  symptoms  and  treatment  of  fainting. 

FRACTURES 

It  will  be  impossible  to  teach  without  actual  demonstration  how 
properly  to  splint  fractures,  but  we  can  elarn  the  seriousness  of  frac- 
tures and  how  to  handle  them  at  the  scene  of  an  accident  until  a 
doctor  or  someone  arrives  who  can  give  further  treatment. 

In  our  lesson  on  anatomy,  we  learned  something  about  bones,  and 
framework  of  the  body.  When  we  speak  of  fractures,  we  have  refer- 
ence always  to  broken  bones.  Fractures  are  due  to  many  causes — 
automobile  accidents,  falls,  a  severe  blow,  etc.  They  are  classified  as 
simple  and  compound.  In  a  simple  fracture  the  bone  is  broken,  but 
there  is  no  wound,  or  break  in  the  skin.  The  bone  has  simply  been 
broken  and  remained  in  place.  The  ends  may  be  grating,  however, 
as  a  stick  would  be  that  has  been  broken  but  not  pulled  apart.  A 
compound  fracture  is  a  broken  bone  with  one  end  protruding  through 
the  skin.      In  addition  to  the  break,  therefore,  there  is  also  a  wound. 

A  compound  fracture  can  easily  be  detected,  if  clothing  is  re- 
moved from  injured  part.  Be  very  careful  in  removing  clothing,  cut- 
ting it  on  seams  where  possible,  and  taking  away  only  as  much  as 
is  necessary  for  proper  treatment  of  injured  part. 

A  simple  fracture  isn't  quite  so  easily  detected,  but  the  symptoms 
will  be  pain  and  tenderness  at  point  of  break;  there  may  be  deformity, 
partial  swelling.  Patient  may  say  he  heard  bone  snap  and  in  some 
cases  can  feel  the  ends  grind.  The  limb  may  also  be  partially  or 
totally  helpless.  In  examining  patient  compare  injured  limb  with  cor- 
responding  uninjured   limb. 

Proper  handling  of  a  simple  fracture  is  very  important  as  rough 
handling  and  moving  of  injured  part  may  convert  a  simple  fracture 
into   a  compound  fracture.      Rough  handling  of  a  compound  fracture 


Hune,  1942  TE  KARERE  173 

may  sever  an  artery,  thus  further  endangering  the  patient's  life,  also 
tearing  and  cutting  of  tissues,  thereby  increasing  shock  and  prolonging 
disability  of  patient.  The  object  of  first  aid  treatment  with  regard 
to  fractures  is  to  prevent  further  damage.  We  can  at  least  learn 
to  render  this  much  first  aid  treatment,  even  if  we  are  unable  to 
learn  how  to  apply  splints.  (If  you  have  a  doctor  or  other  person 
trained  in  first  aid  who  can  teach  you  how  to  apply  splints  properly, 
call  them  in  to  give  a  demonstration.)  The  following  rules  will  insure 
safety  of  a  broken  limb  until  a  doctor  arrives  at  the  scene  of  the 
accident  to  apply  splints. 

1.  Do  not  move  a  broken  part.  (If  in  doubt  as  to  whether  injury 
is  a  fracture,  treat  as  such  to  be  safe.)  Keep  as  nearly  in  the  position 
in  which  the  injury  is  received  as  possible.  If  absolutely  necessary  to 
move  patient,  the  fracture  should  be  suported,  by  holding  it  above 
and  below  the  fracture  in  position.  Call  a  physician  or  ambulance  at 
once. 

2.  While  waiting  for  doctor  to  arrive,  make  patient  as  comfortable 
as  possible.  This  may  be  done  by  having  him  lie  down  and  keeping 
him  warm  and  treat  for  shock.  Never  attempt  to  set  a  bone.  This  is 
the   doctor's   "job." 

3.  Do  not  move  patient  or  allow  him  to  be  moved  until  splints 
have  been  applied  by  someone  knowing  how  to  apply  them.  Do  not 
allow  any  person  with  a  fractured  leg  to  be  lifted  into  a  car.  Send 
for  an  ambulance,  truck  or  other  conveyance  where  he  can  be  trans- 
ported in  a  prone  position.  Again  we  repeat,  never  allow  patient  to 
be  moved  until  splints  have  ben  applied.  Keep  him  warm  and  as 
comfortable  as  possible  until  help  arrives — cheer  him. 

In  case  of  a  compound  fracture,  you  may  bandage  wound  with 
a  sterile  dressing.  If  there  is  arterial  bleeding  with  the  compound 
fracture  check  by  digital  pressure  and  applying  tourniquet  as  we  have 
learned  to  do  in  a  previous  lesson. 

TRANSPORTATION— LIFTS   AND   CARRIES 

Considerable  has  already  been  said  about  proper  transportation 
of  a  person  seriously  injured.  It  sometimes  happens  that  accidents 
occur  on  mountain  trips  where  it  is  difficult  to  get  a  vehicle  of  any 
kind  to  the  scene  of  accident.  It  is  important  to  know  ways  in  which 
a  patient  may  be  safely  transported.  A  few  convenient  carries,  there- 
fore, will  bo  given  herewith. 

"The  importance  of  proper  transportation  for  a  seriously  injured 
pel-son  cannot  he  overestimated."  Breakneck  speed  in  getting  a  patient 
to  a  hospital  i  n't  half  as  important  as  giving  proper  first  aid  treat- 
ment at  scene  <>!'  accident,  and  Beeing  to  it  that  lie  is  transported  pro- 
perly. Take  time  enough  <<>  insure  his  safety.  Improvised  stretchers 
may   he   made  with   hlankets.   robes,  quilts,  or  sheets  and  two   poles,  also 

stretching  <-<>at a  over  poles. 

A  patient  may  be  transported  on  :>  stretcher  of  this  kind  by  tour 

people.  One  person  takes  the  top  of  the  stretcher,  one  at  the  bottom, 
one   on    either   side   at    middle    of    stretcher. 

If  poles  are  not  available,  :i  satisfactory  Btretcher  can  he  made 
by  placing  patient  in  centre  of  ;i  blankel  and  rolling  edges  toward 
him.     This  requires  four,  ami  preferably  six.  people  to  carry,  three  on 

either    side.  teller    before    loading    patient     on     it     hy 

;i  well  p<  i  mi  lie  ..;,  it  and  one  at  each  end  lift  sufficiently  to 

1  eel      me    W    i        l  i  i  nre    for    patient. 

The  greatesi   care     hould   he  exercised   In   loading  and  unloading 

tretcher,     it    i  pie  to  lift   ■  patient   properly,  and 

preferably  four.     They    hould  be    trong  and  able  to  understand  orders. 


174  TE  KARERE  Hune,  1942 

One  person,  only,  gives  orders.  Instructions  should  first  be  given  and 
it  should  be  made  clear  just  what  is  expected  when  commands  are 
given. 

Divide  class  into  groups  of  five,  having  one  in  each  group  act 
as  patient,  the  others  lifting;  each  group  taking  turns  until  all  groups 
have  learned  how  to  lilt  a  patient  properly. 

Follow  this  procedure: — 

Have  one  of  the  bearers  place  the  stretcher  close  to  the  injured 
man — preferably  about  two  feet  from  his  head  and  in  a  straight  line 
with  the  patient.      Place  the  patient  on  his  back. 

Have  three  bearers  take  position  on  one  side  of  the  patient  and 
one  bearer  on  the  opposite  side.  If  one  side  is  injured,  the  three 
bearers  should  be  on  the  uninjured  side.  One  man  takes  position  at 
the  shoulder,  one  at  the  hips,  and  the  third  at  the  knees.  The  fourth 
bearer  should  take  position  at  the  hips  on  the  opposite  side,  unless 
given  a  special  injured  part  to  care  for.  All  bearers  face  the  injured 
person  and  kneel  on  the  knee  nearest  to  the  patient's  feet.  The  fourth 
bearer  (when  working  opposite  the  three)  and  the  man  opposite  pass 
their  arms  under  the  patient's  back  and  thighs.  The  bearer  at  the 
shoulder  puts  one  arm  under  the  patient's  head,  neck  and  shoulder  and 
the  other  under  the  upper  part  of  patient's  back.  The  bearer  at  the 
knees  places  one  arm  under  the  patient's  knees  and  the  other  under 
his  ankles.  After  asking  the  bearers  if  they  are  ready,  the  man  in 
charge  says,  "Lift."  Then  the  bearers  all  lift  together  and  place  the 
patient  on  the  knees  of  the  three  men  in  line. 

The  fourth  bearer  then  places  the  stretcher  under  the  patient 
against  the  toes  of  the  kneeling  men.  Again  the  bearers  are  asked 
if  they  are  ready,  and  at  the  command  "Lower,"  the  patient  is  gently 
lowered  to  the  stretcher. 

In  unloading  a  stretcher,  the  procedure  is  just  the  reverse  of 
loading.  Placing  a  patient  in  bed  is  accomplished  in  the  same  way. 
The  bed  should  be  selected  so  that  the  patient  will  not  have  to  be 
moved  and  so  that  the  injuries  are  easily  accessible  to  the  physician 
when  he  arrives. 

Three-Man  Carry. — Where  material  is  not  available  for  making 
a  stretcher,  patient  may  be  carried  comfortably.  Instead  of  being 
lowered  from  the  knees  of  the  three  bearers,  he  is  turned  so  that  the 
front  of  his  body  is  next  to  the  chests  of  the  three  men  supporting 
him.  The  weight  is  well  distributed  and  a  patient  could  be  carried 
for  some  distance,  although  this  carry  is  used  most  frequently  for  short 
distances.  Changes  may  be  made  with  others  of  a  group,  but  each 
time  care  should  be  exercised  in  handling  patient.  He  should  be 
lowered  from  the  arms  of  the  three  bearers  to  the  knees  of  three  other 
bearers  who  in  turn  would  lift  patient. 

Two-Man  Carry. — A  patient  who  has  fainted  or  is  in  some  similar 
condition  may  be  carried  by  the  extremities.  Do  not  carry  fracture 
cases  this  way.  Most  everyone  will  also  know  how  to  make  a  chair 
with  the  hands  of  two  people ;  this  makes  a  good  two-man  carry. 

One-Man  Carry. — The  "pack-strap"  carry  can  be  used  where  there 
are   no  serious  injuries. 

"Trucks  are  often  the  only  practical  means  of  transporting  an 
injured  person  in  a  lying  position.  Light  trucks  with  springs  are  best. 
An  ambulance  is  always  preferable,  but  a  truck  serves  very  well  in 
an  emergency.  Coats,  blankets,  robes,  may  be  used  to  make  a  bed 
on  the  floor  of  the  truck." 

Always  use  this  means  of  transportation  in  case  of  a  seriously 
injured  person,  in  preference  to  "jackknifing"  him  in  the  back  seat 
of  a  passenger  car.      This  method  cannot  be  too  strongly  condemned. 


Hune,  1942  TE  KARERE  175 

BOY  SCOUTS,  DEPARTMENT 

FIRST  TUESDAY: 

During  the  preceding  week  you  will  have  had  to  determine  what 
Scouts  have  passed  their  Tests.  It  is  well  not  to  mark  the  written 
work  yourself.  Get  your  Chaplain,  if  you  have  one,  to  do  it.  If 
you  have  not,  get  some  good-natured  friend  to  perform  the  work.  It 
will  give  them  an  interest  in  the  work,  and,  naturally,  the  more  out- 
siders you  can  get  interested  in  Scouting  the  better. 

Commence  your  evening  with  the  Fall-in  and  Roll  Call,  followed 
by  instruction  in  the  movement,  "Fours  Right."  On  this  command, 
each  four  Scouts  swing  round  en  No.  1  as  a  pivot  man,  until  at  right 
angles  to  their  old  alignment,  the  Scouts  completing  the  movement  in 
five  paces. 

Period  B. — Announce  the  names  of  those  who  have  qualified  as 
Tenderfoots.  These  should  now  be  sworn  in.  This  should  be  an  im- 
pressive ceremony,  and,  if  possible,  should  be  prefaced  by  a  short 
talk  by  the  Troop  Chaplain  on  the  responsibilities  of  the  Scouts.  Form 
the  Scouts  in  a  semi-circle,  with  yourself  and  other  Officers  at  its 
centre,  and,  after  the  talk,  impressing  on  them  the  importance  of  the 
Promise,  give  the  command  "Alert."  Let  each  Tenderfoot  remove  his 
hat,  and,  standing  at  the  half-salute,  repeat  the  Scout's  Promise.  Hats 
are  then  resumed,  and,  one  by  one,  the  successful  Scouts  are  called 
by  name,  each  advancing  in  turn  to  the  centre  of  the  semi-circle  and 
saluting.  You  then  give  the  Scout  handshake  to  each,  with  a  word 
or  two  of  encouragement,  and,  if  possible,  give  him  his  Tenderfoot 
Badge.  Many  Troops,  however,  are  a  long  way  from  Headquarters, 
and  you  may  not,  as  yet,  be  in  possession  of  the  coveted  decorations. 
In  such  a  case  it  is  well  to  withhold  either  the  shoulder-knot  or  the 
scarf  until  this  occasion.  The  distinction  must,  however,  be  made 
in  some  way  between  Tenderfoots  and  those  who  are  yet  without  the 
pale. 

When  all  are  duly  sworn  in,  give  a  short  talk  on  the  position  of 
the  Tenderfoot,  and  urge  the  Troop  to  use  every  effort  to  pass  this 
stage  and  become  Second  Class  Scouts  as  soon  as  possible. 

The  little  ceremony  over,  break  off  and  commence  at  once  with 
Second  Class  work.  Patrol  Leaders,  of  course,  take  over  the  "Inter- 
mediate" boys  of  their  own  Patrols,  while  you  collect  the  Scni 
is  usual  to  commence  with  instruction  in  signalling;  and  it  will  be  found 
that  the  Semaphore  system  is  the  easier  to  teach  and  to  learn.  I.  t 
your  boys,  therefore,  space  themselves  out  facing  you,  in  an  irregular 
rele,  and,  on  the  word  "Ready,"  stand  with  feet  apart  and 
hands  in  front.  Verj  briefly  outline  the  Bystem,  explaining  that 
the    Semaphore    letters    are    made    by    holding   the    hands    out    at    angles 

which  vary  by  forty-five  degrees.     Then  demonstrate  the  I 

A,  B,  C,  D,  E,  F,  and  (J,  the  hoys  following  you   as  you   tnaki 
Letter.     Practise   this   circle   once   or   twice,   and    then   dictate   one   or 
two  words  based  on   it,  e.g.,   BAD  LGE,  C  \IU\ AGE 

will    feel    that    tie  J  ling    on"    when,    almost    at    once,    thi 

signal  words.  Then  let  them  watch  you  while  you  signal  ■  word  or 
two,  and  tell  y<>u  what  you  have  Bent.  They  will  be  very  confused, 
but  to  read  a  message  correctly  is,  if  anything,  more  important  than 
to  send  one,  end  m  truction  in  ih..   respect  cannot  i>e  begun  to< 

THIRD  TUESDAY: 

Treat  the  cond  circli  1 1 .  I .  K,  L,  M .  and  N  in  the  ame  way 
;,    the  in  t,  finally  combining  the  two,  ai  their  knowle< 

calling    for   letten    ai    random,   and    by  \  VME, 

LIKE,  .MAIL.  etc. 


176  TE  KARERE  Hune,  1942 

Your  B  Period  will  by  this  time  be  exhausted,  and  your  Leaders 
v  ill  probably  be  satisfied  that  their  pupils  are  well  grounded  in  the 
Promise,  Handshake,  Salute  and  the  first  two  Laws.  Therefore,  the 
Troop  can  now  be  assembled. 

Period  C. — It  will  have  occurred,  perhaps,  to  some  of  your  boys, 
that  signalling  is  jolly  interesting,  but  just  what  is  the  use  of  it? 
Utilise  this  period,  therefore,  for  a  "Camp-fire  Yarn"  on  the  purposes 
and  different  methods  of  Signalling.  Be  sure  to  avoid  a  mere  lecture, 
and  endeavour  to  make  your  talk  bright  and  cheerful,  freely  inter- 
spersed with  anecdotes. 

Fall-in  and  dismiss  as  usual. 

Your  Leaders  and  Corporals  are  now,  if  not  before,  full-blown 
Scouts,  and  at  your  Leaders'  talk  this  will  be  a  good  opportunity  for 
founding  your  Court  of  Honour.  This  body,  composed  of  your  Ser- 
geant ana  Leaders  (and  also  your  Corporals  if  your  Troop  is  small) 
should  act  as  a  Committee  to  carry  on  business  of  a  routine  nature, 
help  in  providing  equipment,  and  so  on,  besides  acting,  when  necessary, 
as  a  court  for  disciplinary  purposes.  Except  in  instances  under  the 
last  head,  the  Scoutmaster  should,  as  far  as  possible,  allow  the  Court 
to  run  it  own  affairs,  and  only  attend  to  advise  when  necessary.  The 
idea  is  to  make  the  Troop  to  some  extent  a  self-governing  body,  and  to 
train  the  Leaders  to  responsibility  and  organisation.  The  work  for 
the  next  evening,  however,  must  never  be  neglected.  Each  Leader 
should  have  an  outline  of  your  Syllabus  as  far  as  it  affects  him,  so 
that  he  can  read  up  in  preparation  for  each  night;  but  your  advice 
on  just  the  best  way  to  instruct  in  each  phase  of  the  work  is,  in  most 
cases,  indispensable. 

FOURTH  TUESDAY: 

Fall  in  and  have  the  Roll  called.  Each  Patrol  is  told  off  in  fours 
by  its  Leader.  Then  teach  the  movement,  "Fours  Left"  on  the  same 
lines  as  "Fours  Right."  Let  each  Leader  give  his  Patrol  practice  in 
both  movements  until  precision  is  obtained,  each  four  swinging  round 
in  five  clear  paces. 

Period  B. — Revise  the  first  two  circles  of  the  Semaphore  alphabet, 
and  teach  the  third  and  fourth  circles  in  the  same  manner  as  the  first 
two.  This  will,  of  course,  be  for  the  Senior  lads  only,  the  Intermedi- 
ate section  proceeding  under  their  Leaders  with  the  work  which  the 
Seniors  did  on  the  second  evening.  The  boys  should  take  down  in  their 
notebooks  the  sequence  of  the  letters  in  each  circle.  Thus,  the  third 
and  fourth  circles  consist  respectively  of  the  letters  O,  P,  Q,  R,  S,  and 
T,  U,  Y,  Erase.  If  this  sequence  is  memorised,  the  making  of  the 
letter  is  merely  a  question  of  common  sense,  and  facility  quickly  comes 
with  practice.  Every  effort  should  be  made  to  get  the  lads  to  prac- 
tise with  each  other,  or  to  use  Scout  signalling  cards  during  their  spare 
time  at  home  or  at  school.  They  should  not,  of  course,  practise  before 
a  mirror,  as  the  opposites  would  be  confused  with  the  true  letters. 

Now  sketch  an  eight-pointed  star  on  a  blackboard  or  a  large 
piece  of  paper,  and  label  it  with  the  names  of  the  eight  principal  points 
of  the  compass,  viz.,  N.,  N.E.,  E.,  S.E.,  S.,  S.W.,  W.,  and  N.W.  Most 
of  your  Scouts  will  know  these,  but,  all  the  same,  have  them  written 
down  in  the  notebooks   and  thoroughly  memorised. 

Now  teach  the  method  of  making  the  broad  and  narrow-fold 
bandages  (each  Scout  using  his  scarf  as  a  bandage),  and,  when  these 
are  mastered,  proceed  to  treat  a  fracture  of  the  lower  arm,  supporting 
it  with  a  large  arm-sling.  Whenever  possible,  it  is  best,  of  course,  to 
have  some  fully-qualified  person  to  teach  First  Aid — for  instance,  a 
member  of  the  local  branch  of  the  St.  John  Ambulance  Brigade.  A 
Scout  Officer  should,  however,  make  a  point  of  making  himself  pro- 
ficient in  the  subject,  not  only  for  his  own  good,  but  in  order  to  keep 


Hune,  1942  TE  KARERE  177 

the  respect  of  his  boys.  Never  if  you  can  help  it,  allow  a  hint  of 
contempt  to  enter  their  feelings  towards  you.  It  lowers  you  in  their 
estimation  when  they  find  you  saying,  "I  can't  do  that — ask  someone 
else."  So  do  not  let  it  occur  if  you  can  help  it — especially  in  so  im- 
portant a  branch  of  Scout  work  as  First  Aid. 


BEE-HIVE    DEPARTMENT 

FIRST  TUESDAY: 

TRIAL  FLIGHTS 

Upon  entrance  into  the  M.I. A.  you  will  immediately  become  a 
member  of  the  Bee-Hive  Girls'  organization.  During  the  first  month 
you  will  take  your  Trial  Flights,  just  as  the  bees  do  to  test  their 
strength  and  become  acquainted  with  their  new  world.  These  Trial 
blights  or  preliminary  requirements,  will  be  taken  by  all  twelve-year- 
old  girls  before  they  begin  their  work  as  Builders  in  the  Hive.  If  for 
any  reason  a  girl  is  prevented  from  entering  the  M.I. A.  until  she  is 
thirteen  or  fourteen  years  of  age,  she  must  take  the  Trial  Flights  as  an 
initiation  into  the  Rank  she  enters. 

THIRD  TUESDAY: 

THREE  RANKS 

As  in  the  beehive  the  "workers'  labours"  are  regulated  with  due 
regard  to  their  age";  so  in  the  Bee-Hive  Girls'  Organization  the  activi- 
ties are  divided  according  to  age.  There  are  three  ranks:  Builder  in 
the  Hive,  12-year-old  girls;  Gatherer  of  Honey,  13-year-old  girls; 
Guardian  of  the  Treasure,  14-year-old  girls.  If  a  girl  does  not  enter 
M.I. A.  until  she  is  13  she  may  enter  the  Rank  of  Gatherer  of  Honey, 
or  if  she  is  fourteen  she  may  enter  the  Rank  of  Guardian  of  the  Trea- 
sure; in  either  case  she  should  complete  the  Trial  Flights.  It  is  desir- 
able that  she  do  the  work  of  the  Ranks  preceding  the  one  she  enters, 
so  as  to  have  the  satisfaction  of  having  completed  all  the  requirements. 
this  latter,  however,  is  not  required  unless  she  wishes  to  become 
eligible  to  wear  the  completed  Emblem,  Chain,  and  Ring.  This  work 
may  be  made  up  during  the  summer  time. 

FOURTH  TUESDAY: 

SEVEN    FIELDS 

Have  you  noticed  that  honey  differs  in  colour,  taste,  and  texture? 
'[ho  difference  is  du<  t<>  the  tact  that  the  bees  have  gathered  nectar 
from   different    fields.     Someti  from   ;i   field   of  clover,   s<»mo- 

times  from  apple  blossoms.  Life  also  offers  manj  fields  from  which 
you  ma;,'  gather,  or  in  which  you  max  gain  experience.  In  the  Bee 
Hive  (iii'ls'  Organization  you  will  explore  seven  inviting  fields. 
of  those  is  symbolized  by  its  own  emblem,  which  appears  on  the  Seals 
and  Honour  Badge  .  rhey  .il  o  each  have  a  symbolic  colour  which 
is  represenl  <l  in  th<   Seals.  Honour  Badges  ami  Bee  Lines.     The  Fields 

ami    their   Colours    are: 


Religion 

Purple 

Out-of-Doora             Green 

1  Ionic 

<  o 

\  it  -  ami  ( Srafts       r.i  ew  n 

Health 

Red 

B  usii                            Gold 

IMlhl'K 

Service 

Red,    W  lute   ami    Blue 

[78  TE  KARERE  Hune,  1942 

PRIMARY 

FIRST  WEEK 
JOSEPH   AND   HIS   BROTHERS 

Objective: 

When  we  are  given  anything  to  do,  we  should  do  our  very  best. 
Suggestions   for  Teaching: 

Duty  makes  us  do  things  well,  but  love  makes  us  do  them 
beautifully. 

When  we  remember  that  almost  all  the  religious  and  character 
training  many  of  the  children  receive  is  in  our  classes,  we  are  deter- 
mined to  give  our  best  efforts  to  our  teaching. 

David  Starr  Jordan  said:  "There  is  nothing  in  all  the  world  so 
important  as  children,  nothing  so  interesting.  If  ever  you  wish  to  be 
of  real  use  in  the  world,  do  something  for  children.  If  ever  you  yearn 
to  be  wise,  study  children.  If  sin  and  pestilence  are  ever  exterminated, 
if  our  race  salvation  is  ever  worked  out,  it  will  be  because  a  little 
child  has  led." 

Lesson    Approach: 

Tell  very  briefly  the  first  part  of  the  story  of  Joseph  contained  in 
the  Bible. 

Questions  will  help  to  recall  the  story.  How  many  brothers  did 
Joseph  have?  What  was  the  youngest  brother's  name?  What  was 
his  father's  name?  Why  did  Jacob  love  Joseph  so  dearly?  What  did 
Joseph's  brothers  sometimes  call  him?  Why  did  they  call  him  "the 
dreamer"?  Can  you  tell  Joseph's  dreams,  etc.? 
Lesson    Story: 

JOSEPH  IN  THE  LAND  OF  EGYPT 

The  men  with  the  camels,  who  had  bought  Joseph  from  his 
brothers,  travelled  many  miles.  When  they  reached  Egypt  they  sold 
Joseph  to  a  rich  man  who  was  an  officer  in  King  Pharaoh's  army.  He 
lived  in  a  big  house  and  had  many  servants.  He  bought  Joseph  be- 
cause he  needed  another  servant. 

Joseph  was  brave  and  cheerful  even  in  this  strange  land,  and  did 
his  work  well.  The  Bible  says,  "The  Lord  was  with  him."  When 
Joseph's  rich  master  saw  that  the  boy  was  always  busy  and  served 
him  well,  he  gave  Joseph  charge  over  all  his  household. 

At  first  all  went  well;  then  he  was  blamed  for  something  he  had 
not  done.  When  Potiphar  heard  of  it,  he  did  not  take  the  trouble  to 
find  out  the  truth.  He  was  very  angry  and  put  Joseph  into  the  prison 
where  the  king's  prisoners  were  kept. 

While  Joseph  was  in  prison,  God  was  with  him.  He  can  keep 
watch  over  His  children  wherever  they  are. 

Joseph  was  bright  and  happy  and  soon  helped  other  prisoners  to 
be  happy,  too. 

The  keeper  of  the  prison  loved  Joseph  just  as  the  rich  master  had 
done,  and  soon  put  him  in  chaige  of  the  prison  and  everyone  in  it. 

Not  long  after  Joseph  was  in  charge  of  the  prison,  King  Ph&raoh 
became  angry  with  the  chief  of  his  butlers  and  the  chief  of  his  bankers, 
and  they  were  also  put  in  prison. 

One  morning  Joseph  went  to  see  them.  He  found  them  looking 
very  unhappy. 

"Why  do  you  look  so  sad  to-day?"  he  asked. 

"We  have  each  had  a  strange  dream  and  we  should  like  to  know 
what  they  mean,"  said  the  baker. 


Hune,  1942  TE  KARERE  179 

God  put  into  Joseph's  heart  an  understanding  of  dreams,  and 
he  was  able  to  explain  the  meaning  of  the  men's  dreams. 

He  told  the  baker  that  within  three  days  he  would  die,  but  that 
the  butler  would  be  taken  back  by  the  king. 

It  all  happened  just  as  Joseph  had  said.  In  three  days'  time  the 
butler  was  returned  to  his  place  in  the  king's  service.  But  when  the 
butler  was  safe  and  well  himself,  he  forgot  Joseph.  Two  years  passed 
and  Joseph  was   still  in   prison. 

Then  it  happened  that  King  Pharaoh  dreamed  and  was  much 
troubled.  He  called  all  the  wise  men  of  Egypt  to  him,  but  not  one  of 
them  could  tell  Pharaoh  the  meaning  of  his  dreams. 

Then  the  chief  of  the  butlers  remembered  Joseph.  He  told 
Pharaoh  how  Joseph  had  been  able  to  explain  his  dream  in  the  prison. 
Pharaoh  sent  for  Joseph  and  they  brought  him  out  of  the  prison. 

Pharaoh  told  his  dreams  to  Joseph.  Joseph  listened  carefully 
while    Pharaoh   spoke. 

"Both  of  your  dreams  mean  the  same,"  said  Joseph.  "For  seven 
years  there  will  be  plenty  of  food  throughout  the  land  of  Egypt.  Then 
seven  years  of  famine  will  follow.  During  the  seven  good  years,  food 
and  grain  must  be  stored  up  so  that  the  people  can  live  during  the 
years  when  the  corn  will  not  grow." 

King  Pharaoh  saw,  just  as  the  rich  officer  and  the  keeper  of  the 
prison  had  seen,  that  God  was  with  Joseph  and  so  Pharaoh  chose  Joseph 
to  rule  over  all  the  land  of  Egypt.  He  kept  Joseph  in  his  palace  and 
gave  him  the  finest  clothes  to  wear.  Pharaoh  took  his  own  ring  from 
his  hand  and  put  it  on  Joseph's  hand  and  put  a  gold  chain  around 
Joseph's  neck.  Then  he  gave  him  a  fine  chariot  to  ride  in,  and  Joseph 
went  throughout  the  land. 

It  happened  just  as  Joseph  had  said. 

There  came  seven  years  of  great  plenty  in  Egypt,  then  there 
followed  a  great  famine  in  the  land.  The  seven  years  of  plenty  had 
ended  and  there  was  no  food  and  the  people  were  hungry.  But  dur- 
ing the  good  years  Joseph  had  filled  the  barns  and  storehouses  with  so 
much  corn  that  he  could  not  keep  account  of  it. 

And  now  when  the  people  came  to  Pharaoh  and  cried  for  food 
he  sent  them  to  Joseph.  And  Joseph  opened  the  barns  and  gave  them 
food. 

The  famine  was  not  only  in  Egypt,  but  it  was  in  the  land  where 
Joseph's  father  and   brothers  lived. 

We  must  wait  for  the  next  story  to  know  what  happened  to  thorn. 

Conversation   After   the   Story: 

Why  was  Joseph  given  charge  of  Potiphar's  house  and  servants? 
When  he  was  put  in  prison,  why  was  he  given  charge  there?  And 
then  when  he  went  to  King  Pharaoh's  why  was  lie  made  the  governor 
over  all  the  land?  Who  helped  him  to  do  the  things  lie  was  asked  to 
do?  He  will  help  us,  too.  What  must  we  do  if  we  want  our  Heavenly 
father's  help?  It  is  very  important  to  ask  Heavenly  Father  for  His 
help,   but   He   expects   us  to   try   very   hard   ourselves. 

When  we  have  a  task  to  do  what  two  things  will  help  us  to  do 
it   well? 

SECOND  WEEK 

Objective: 

He  grateful  to  (led  for  lives  to  heautify  the  earth  and  to  supply 
us    with    many,    many    thing!    for    our    use. 

Lesson   Approach: 

The  teacher  might  begin  by  saying,  "I  am  thinking  about  something 

that    our    Heavenly     Father    made"       Then     describe    the    thing    she    is 


180  TE  KARERE  Hune,  1942 

thinking  of  and  let  the  children  guess  what  it  is.  Do  not  make  it  too 
hard. 

Some  of  the  older  children  may  be  able  to  take  turns,  also. 

Among  the  loveliest  things  that  our  Heavenly  Father  has  made  to 
grow  for  us  is  the  tree. 

Would  you  like  to  go  for  a  little  walk  with  me  and  see  some  of 
the  lonely  trees  we  have  in  our  neighbourhood?  How  shall  we  act? 
Let  the  children  suggest  some  things  they  can  do  to  make  the  walk 
pleasant  and  profitable. 

(1)  Stay  together.  (2)  Walk  slowly.  (3)  Talk  quietly.  (4)  Be 
polite  to   each   other,   etc. 

See  how  many  trees  the  children  know.  Note  the  difference  in 
shape,  size,  beauty  of  outline,  etc.  Talk  about  the  usefulness  of  the 
trees  in  making  the  world  beautiful;  as  a  shelter  from  the  hot  sun; 
in  the  building  of  houses  and  furniture;  and  meeting  places  for  the 
birds. 

While  resting  under  the  shade  of  a  tree,  let  the  children  sing  a 
favourite    song.      Then   tell   the   following   story: — 

"A    LITTLE    BOY    WHO    LEARNED    ABOUT    TREES" 

One  spring  morning,  just  as  Daddy  was  ready  for  work,  he  called 
his  two  boys,  big  brother  Tom  and  little  brother  Chad.  He  said  to 
them,  "Boys,  the  yard  doesn't  look  at  all  nice.  I  wish  you  would  clean 
it  up  to-day." 

"We'll  try,"  said  Tom  with  a  smile,  and  he  waved  as  Daddy  hurried 
away. 

"Oh,  dear,"  muttered  little  Chad  with  a  big  frown  on  his  face. 

"What's  the  matter,  Chad?"  asked  Tom. 

"I  wanted  to  play  marbles  this  morning.  I  don't  want  to  clean 
the  yard,"  answered  Chad  crossly  as  he  looked  at  the  old  leaves  and 
twigs  that  had  gathered  all  winter. 

"Daddy  works  all  day,  and  the  yard  does  need  cleaning.  It  will 
take  us  only  a  little  while;  then  you'll  have  all  afternoon  to  play," 
said  Tom.  "I'll  get  the  rake  and  do  the  cleaning,  and  you  get  a  basket 
and  gather  up  the  piles  of  leaves." 

Tom  was  busy  raking  when  Chad  came  with  the  basket.  He  began 
gathering  up  the  leaves,  growling,  "I  don't  see  why  the  trees  had  to 
drop  their  leaves  in  our  yard.  I  wish  there  weren't  any  trees.  I  don't 
like  them." 

"Suppose  the  trees  heard  you  say  that,"  said  Tom.  "They 
wouldn't  like  it  very  well  because  they  have  given  us  many  things." 

"They  haven't  given  me  anything  but  work,"  said  Chad,  as  he 
picked  up  more  leaves  and  threw  them  into  the  basket. 

"If  the  trees  could  walk  and  talk,  they  might  come  to  our  house 
and  say,  'We  want  the  wood  we  have  given  to  build  your  house;  Chad 
doesn't   like   us.'  "   Tom   said. 

"I  didn't  think  about  that,"  answered  Chad. 

Tom  continued,  "Other  trees  would  say,  'We  want  your  table, 
chairs,   and  your  bed.      We  gave  them  to   you.'  " 

"I  forgot  about  them,"  replied  Chad. 

"I'm  sure  the  fruit  trees  would  come,  too,"  Tom  said.  "They 
would  say,  'We  gave  our  apples,  cherries,  peaches,  and  pears  for  you 
to  eat;  but  we  have  no  more  for  you.'  " 

"Oh,  but  I  like  fruit!"  explained  Chad. 


Hune,  1942  TE  KARERE  181 

"But  fruit  grows  on  trees,  and  you  said  you  didn't  like  them,'* 
answered    Tom. 

"Well,  I  like  that  kind  of  tree,"  said  Chad. 

"There  are  many  other  kinds  of  trees  that  you  don't  like  that 
would  come  to  see  you.  Some  of  the  maple  trees  would  come  and 
say,  'We  have  no  more  good  maple  syrup  for  you  to  have  on  your  pan- 
cakes,' "  continued  Tom. 

"Syrup  from  trees!"  said  Chad  in  surprise.  "I  like  maple  syrup, 
but  I  didn't  know  that  trees  gave  it  to  us." 

"Then  the  pine  trees  would  say,  'No  more  Christmas  trees  for 
you;  you  don't  like  us,'  "  said  Tom. 

"Christmas  wouldn't  be  such  fun  without  trees.  We  need  Christmas 
trees,"  said  Chad. 

"The  nut  trees  would  be  sure  to  come,  and  they  would  say,  'We 
have  no  more  good  nuts  for  a  little  boy  who  doesn't  like  us,'  "  Tom  told 
his  little  brother. 

"Peanuts  don't  grow  on  trees,"  said  Chad.      "I  know  they  don't." 

"That's  right,  Chad,"  said  Tom,  "but  walnuts,  almonds,  pine  nuts, 
and  lots  of  others  grow  on  trees." 

"Do  they  really?"  asked  Chad. 

"Yes,"  answered  Tom.  "Then  some  strange  trees  that  you  have 
never  seen  would  say  to  you,  'We  want  your  little  rubber  boots.'  " 

"My  boots!"  laughed  Chad.  "What  would  a  tree  want  with  my 
boots?      Mother  bought  those  at  the  store." 

"Oh,  but  rubber  trees  gave  the  rubber  to  make  them,"  Tom  told 
him. 

"I  didn't  know  that,"  said  Chad  in  surprise.  He  sat  quietly  think- 
ing. Then  he  said,  "None  of  those  trees  grow  around  our  house. 
These  trees  don't  give  us  anything." 

"You're  sitting  in  the  shade  of  the  trees  right  now,'  teased  Tom, 
"and  they  help  you  keep  cool  in  warm  weather.  Trees  not  only  help 
us,  but  they  make  the  world  beautiful,"  he  told  his  little  brother. 

"I'm  sorry  I  said  what  I  did  about  the  trees,"  said  Chad.  "I  just 
didn't  know  about  them.  I'm  glad  for  trees";  and  he  gathered  up  the 
last  armful  of  leaves  and  twigs  and  filled  up  the  big  basket.  "They 
give  us  so  many  things;  I  don't  mind  cleaning  up  leaves,"  he  said  with 
a  smile. 

THIRD  WEEK 

CREATIVE    PLAY 
Objective: 

Help  the  children  to  appreciate  home  by   making  a  doll  house. 
Suggestions    for    Teaching: 

The  children  will  enjoy  making  a  doll  houso  as  a  group.  It  may 
stimulate  in  them  a  desire  to  make  doll  houses  at  homo  in  their  play 
time  This  project  should  not  he  made  difficult.  The  children  should 
be  allowed  to  do  the  work  with  suggestions  and  guidance  Prom  the 
teacher. 

A  large  hat  box,  orange  box,  or  any  large  bos  that  you  may  have 

will  do  for  the  house.     Save  it  in  the  room  where  the  children  can  Bee 
it.     It  may  suggest  its  use  to  the  children  after  you  get   started  on 

the    lesson. 
Story: 

"THE    NICEST    PLACE    IN    THE    WORLD" 

The  sun  was  shining  down  through  the  tree  on  little  Brother 
Rabbit  and  Grandma  Badger,  she  was  belling  him  ■  story,  it  was 
about  the  Nicesl  Place  in  the  World.  Soon  Grandma  Badger's  head 
began  to  nod,  and  it  nodded  ami  nodded,  and  nodded,  until  it  nodded 
Itself  right   Into  Sleep  Land.     Then  Little  Brother  Rabbit  not   up  and 


182  TE  KARERE  Hune,  1942 

stretched  himself.  Then  he  hopped  off,  looking  very  busy.  Whom 
should  he  meet  but  Friend  Possum,  who  said  to  him:  "Where  are  you 
going,  Little  Brother  Rabbit?" 

"Im  going  to  look  for  the  Nicest  Place  in  the  World,"  he  said. 

"Isn't  that  a  long  way  off?"  said  Friend  Possum. 

"I  don't  care,"  said  Little  Brother  Rabbit. 

"Well,  then,  neither  do  I,"  said  Friend  Possum.      "I'm  going  too." 

So  they  hopped  along,  and  they  ran  along,  until  they  met  Neigh- 
bour Bluebird,  who  said,   "Where  are  you  going,  Friend  Possum?" 

"I  am  going  with  Little   Brother  Rabbit." 

"Where  are  you  going,  Little  Brother  Rabbit?" 

"I'm  going  to  find  the  Nicest  Place  in  the  World." 

"Isn't  that  a  long  way  off?"  said  Neighour  Bluebird. 

"I  don't  care,"  said  Little  Brother  Rabbit. 

"Nor  I,"  said  Friend  Possum. 

"Well,  then,  neither  do  I,"  said  Neighbour  Bluebird,  "I'm  going 
too." 

So  they  hopped  along,  and  they  ran  along,  and  they  flew  along, 
until  they  came  to  the  great,  big  black  cave  where  Grandpa  Bear  lives. 
He  was  sitting  outside,  enjoying  the  warm  sun  and  the  smell  of  the 
pine  trees. 

"Where  are  you  going,  children?"  said  Grandpa  Bear,  in  his 
kindly  way. 

"Im  going  with  Friend  Possum,"  said  Neighbour  Bluebird. 

"Where  are  you  going,  Friend  Possum?" 

"I'm   going   with    Little    Brother    Rabbit." 

"Where  are  you  going,  Little  Brother  Rabbit?" 

"I'm  going  to  the  Nicest  Place  in  the  World,"  said  Little  Brother 
Rabbit.  "They  say  it's  a  very  long  way  off.  Do  you  know  where 
it  is?" 

Grandpa  Bear  looked  up  at  the  sky.  He  saw  that  the  sun  was 
setting.  Then  he  looked  at  the  ground.  He  saw  that  the  shadows 
were  growing  longer.  Then  he  sniffed  the  air,  and  smelled  night  com- 
ing on.  So  he  said:  "Indeed  I  do;  and  it  isn't  far  at  all.  You  must 
walk  to  the  big  tree  on  the  edge  of  a  pond.  Then  walk  to  the  little 
pine  tree  at  the  foot  of  the  hill.  Turn  to  your  right,  and  you'll  walk 
directly  into  the  nicest  place  in  the  world." 

So  they  hopped  along,  and  they  ran  along,  and  flew  along,  until 
they  came  to  the  little  pine  tree.  And  they  hopped  along,  and  they 
ran  along,  and  they  flew  along,  until  they  came  to  the  middle-sized 
maple  tree.  Then  they  turned  to  the  right,  and  where  do  you  think 
they   were? 

Right  in  front  of  their  own  house! 

Then  Neighbour  Bluebird  looked  at  Friend  Possum  and  laughed. 
Friend  Possum  looked  at  Little  Brother  Rabbit  and  laughed.  Little 
Brother  Rabbit  looked  at  them  both  and  laughed.  "Didn't  Grandpa 
Bear  know,  though?      Home  is  the  Nicest  Place  in  the  World! 

Conversation: 

Why  is  home  the  nicest  place  to  you?  Everyone  loves  his  own 
home  best.      Let  the  children  say: 

"The  place  that's  dearest  and  the  best, 
I  love  it  more  than  all  the  rest — 
My  Home." 

For  the  Children  to  Do: 

Talk  with  the  children  about  making  a  doll  house.  Let  them 
make  suggestions.      The  following  may  be  helpful  to  you: 

Four  large  pasteboard  boxes  (square  hat  boxes  are  ideal),  are 
needed.      Each  box  makes  a  room,  playroom,  bedroom  and  kitchen. 


Hune,  1942  TE  KARERE  183 

The  rooms  are  placed  two  on  top  of  each  other.  Holes  are 
punched  through  the  sides  which  are  together,  paper  fasteners  pushed 
through  the  holes. 

Doors  should  be  cut  between  the  two  downstairs  rooms,  and  be- 
tween the  two  upstairs  rooms.  Cut  only  on  two  sides,  and  fold  on 
the  other  side  so  that  the  door  will  open  and  shut.  A  door  on  one 
outside  wall  should  be  cut. 

Windows  should  be  cut  in  each  room.  The  top  side  of  the  window 
should  not  be  cut,  but  folded  out  so  that  an  awning  is  at  each  window. 
The  awnings  may  be  covered  with  a  bright  piece  of  coloured  paper, 
or  crayoned. 

When  the  work  for  the  period  is  finished,  have  the  children  tidy 
the  room. 

Game: 

Let  the  children  choose  a  game. 

FOURTH  WEEK 

CREATIVE   PLAY 
Objective: 

To  give  the  children  an  opportunity  to  enjoy  work  and  play. 

Suggestions    for   Teaching: 

This  period  let  the  children  continue  making  their  doll  house.  Be 
sure  that  each  child  has  a  share  of  the  work  to  do.  Encourage  each  to 
do  his  best.  Make  the  children  happy  by  your  own  cheerful  attitude. 
Sing  plenty  of  songs.  There  is  no  better  way  to  teach  the  gospel  than 
to  sing  it  into  the  hearts  of  the  children.  Let  them  say  the  memory 
gems  often.  It  only  takes  a  second  to  repeat  a  gem  thought.  Every 
time  one  is  said  it  is  more  firmly  rooted  in  the  mind. 

For    the   Children    to    Do: 

Continue  work  on  the  doll  house.  Talk  about  the  work  already 
done.  Name  the  rooms,  etc.  What  shall  we  do  next?  Let  the  chil- 
dren suggest.  They  will  no  doubt  say  paper  the  walls  and  get  the 
rugs  down.  Any  paint  shop,  where  wallpaper  is  sold,  will  give  you 
a  sample  book  for  the  asking.  Let  the  children  see  some  of  the  paper 
samples;  help  them  to  decide  on  the  right  colour  for  each  room.  Why 
wouldn't  one  of  these  papers  do  for  our  house?  (The  designs  are  too 
large.)  What  shall  we  do  then?  How  can  we  make  our  own  paper? 
What  kind  shall  we  make?  (A  plain  paper  with  a  pretty  border  may 
be  suggested,  or  a  paper  with  a  simple  design  and  no  border.)  After 
this  discussion  pass  paper  and  crayons  and  let  the  children  make  tin 
wallpaper.  It  might  be  well  to  divide  the  children  into  groups  and 
let  each  group  make  the  paper  for  a  certain  room.  Let  the  children 
choose  the  best  for  the  doll  house. 

Cut  the  wallpaper  the  size  needed  for  a  wall.  Put  the  paste  on 
the  wall,  not  on  the  paper.  It  will  he  easier  to  get  the  paper  on  even 
if    you    do    it    this    way. 

The  niM  and  linoleum  may  he  made  from  paper  alto.  After  a 
discussion  about  suitahlo  designs  for  the  rugs  and  linoleum,  let  each 
child  have  paper  and  crayons  and  make  a  floor  Covering.  Lei  the  class 
choose    the    hest     for    the    doll    house. 

When  the  finois  arc  finished  let  the  children  admire  their  work. 

Let  them  BUggesI  where  it  Bkighl  have  hecn  done  better,  and  what  to 
do  next.  Ask  them  to  cut  pictures  of  the  interior  of  homes  and  bring 
to   class   next    time. 

lie    suit    that    every      crap    of    paper    is    in    the    wa>te  paper    hasket 

and  that  all  material    are  put  away  properly. 

Close    with    a    came    or    daner. 


184 


TE  KARERE 


Hune,  1942 


TAUMARUNUI     BRANCH 
Reported   by   Howard   Osborne 

The  Taumarunui  Branch  Conference 
was  held  at  Manunui  on  April  18th  and 
19th.  Of  seven  meetings  held,  that  on 
Sunday  evening  was  the  best  attended, 
over  fifty  persons  being  present.  The 
weather,  though  cold,  and  on  Saturday 
was  showery,  was  not  unfavourable,  but 
may  have  prevented  some  of  the  Saints 
and  friends  attending,  especially  some 
who    live    at    a    distance. 

The  Conference  was  financed  by  the 
M.I. A.,  which  held  its  third  monthly 
social  and  dance  on  Friday,  the  17th  of 
April;  this  function  being  attended  by 
about     seventy     people. 

On  Saturday,  18th,  the  Primary  and 
M.I. A.  session  was  held  in  the  Victory 
Hall.  The  programme  consisted  of  action 
songs,  recitations,  a  cornet  duet,  vocal 
duets,  a  monologue,  songs,  and  short 
talks    by    visiting    officers. 

A  Priesthood  meeting  was  held  on 
Sunday  morning  at  9  o'clock,  eight 
members  of  the  Priesthood  being  present, 
including  President  M.  Cowley,  Bro. 
Percy  Hill  of  the  Waikato  District  Presi- 
dency, Bro.  Tupana  Te  Hira,  District 
Sunday  School  Superintendent,  Bro.  C. 
E.  Billman  of  Auckland,  and  local  mem- 
bers of  the  Priesthood  who  were  in- 
structed and  strengthened  by  the  advice 
of   President   Cowley   and   other   speakers. 

The  Relief  Society  also  convened  at 
9  a.m.,  presided  over  by  Sister  Cowley, 
who  gave  the  assembled  sisters  great 
credit  for  the  work  they  have  done  and 
imparted    spiritual    help    and    advice. 

At  10  o'clock  the  Sunday  School  offi- 
cers met  and  checked  up  on  the  day's 
programme  and  received  instructions 
from     the    District    Superintendent. 

The  Sunday  School  Session  was  held  in 
the  Victory  Hall,  commencing  at  10.30 
a.m.  After  the  usual  opening  exercises 
the  Tiny  Tots  repeated  the  first  Article 
of  Faith,  a  duet  was  rendered,  and  the 
Superintendent,  Bro.  Percy  H.  Rowe,  ex- 
tended a  welcome  to  those  present.  The 
combined  classes  briefly  reviewed  the 
past  year's  lessons,  after  which  Bro.  Te 
Hira  spoke  in  complimentary  terms  of 
the  work  done  and  progress  made  by  the 
Sunday  School.  The  session  closed  at 
12    noon. 

A  meeting  for  all  Branch  officers  was 
held  at  12.15,  when  reports  were  made 
by  the  Presidents  of  all  the  Auxiliary 
organizations,  which  showed  that  all 
officers  are  actually  interested  in  their 
work. 

At  2  p.m.  on  Sunday  the  General  Ses- 
sion was  held  in  the  King's  Theatre.  No 
doubt  because  of  the  cold  temperature 
prevailing  only  twenty-three  persons  at- 
tended, but  the  words  of  the  various 
speakers  brought  a  warmth  of  joy  and 
spiritual  welfare  that  made  any  physical 
discomfort    well    worth    while. 

The  Conference  terminated  with  a  ses- 
sion beginning  at  7  p.m.  and  lasting 
till  about  9.20.  The  Relief  Society,  as 
is  usual,  occupied  the  first  portion  of 
this  session,  during  which  a  talk  by 
Sister  Cowley,  on  the  progress  of  the 
Relief  Society  during  the  100  years  of 
its  existence,  made  a  profound  impres- 
sion on  all  present,  about  fifty  in  num- 
ber.     The  Priesthood  portion  of  this   ses- 


sion was  taken  up  by  various  speakers 
and  a  duet  was  rendered  by  Bros.  P.  H. 
Rowe  and  H.  Osborne.  President  Cow- 
ley was  the  principle  speaker  and  re- 
ceived an  attentive  hearing  by  Saints  and 
friends. 

A  very  satisfactory  and  more  than 
sufficient  dinner  was  served  at  4.30  p.m. 
The  culinary  experts  are  to  be  congratu- 
lated on  their  efforts,  even  if  one  of  the 
puddings  did  leak  out  of  its  cloth,  plenty 
were  left  to  satisfy  all  the  hungry 
diners. 

The  only  incidents  to  mar  the  very 
enjoyable  Conference  were  a  flat  tyre 
and  a  blocked  fuel  pipe  on  President's 
car  when  the  Auckland  party,  which  in- 
cluded President  and  Sister  Cowley  and 
Tony,  Bro.  Billman  and  Sister  Davies, 
were  preparing  to  return  home  on  Mon- 
day  morning. 

Many  thanks  to  all  who  combined  to 
make  our  Branch  Conference  one  which 
will    not    be    soon    forgotten. 

DUNEDIN    BRANCH 
Reported   by   J.   Luxford   Walker 

The  Dunedin  Branch  has  been  through 
a  war  of  its  own,  but  in  spite  of  the 
comparatively  large  casualty  list,  there 
has  been  no  'retreating  accordnig  to  plan' 
in    the    work. 

Sister  Mary  Anne  Abernethey  suffered 
a  severe  stroke,  but  thanks  to  the  Lord 
is  making  steady  progress.  Sister  Eve 
Purves  was  confined  to  her  bed  for 
awhile,  but  is  now  O.K.  The  ranks 
of  the  Public  Hospital  was  swelled  when 
Sister  Margaret  Coburn  went  in  for  ap- 
pendicitis, and  we  believe  that  after  a 
successful  operation  she  is  making  a  fine 
come-back. 

Easter  holidays  was  spent  by  Brother 
M.  N.  Paewai  and  J.  L.  P.  Walker  in  the 
colourful    khaki    raiments    of    the    Army. 

Prior  to  the  forming  of  the  Relief 
Society,  work  by  Sister  Dalziel  was  done 
for  the  Red  Cross,  sewing,  etc.  But 
now,  with  the  help  of  the  Sisters  of  the 
Relief  Society,  the  Red  Cross  will  find 
greater    productions. 

Even  the  E.P.S.  has  entered  into  our 
Church  life,  as  Bro.  Henry  J.  Murray 
is   now  a  member. 

The  number  of  members  has  greatly 
decreased  with  the  departure  of  the 
Moritzen  family  to  other  parts,  and  may 
the  blessings  of  the  Lord  be  with  them 
all. 

WAIKATO    DISTRICT 
Reported    by   Olive   Scott 

Puke  Tapu  has  been  blest  abundantly 
these  past  weeks  with  the  visits  of  Bro. 
and  Sister  Duncan,  Brother  Mihaere  and 
Bros.  John  and  Douglas  Apiti.  The  Re- 
lief Society  was  gratified  in  having  Sis- 
ter Duncan  attend  one  of  their  meetings 
and  speak  and  instruct  them  in  their 
work. 

The  M.I. A.  reported  to  Bro.  Duncan 
that  their  work  was  going  ahead  in  leaps 
and  bounds  (?).  The  Y.M.M.I.A.  Presi- 
dency consists  of  Martin  Brown  Presi- 
dent, Ru  Tarawhiti  and  Ben  Berryman 
Counsellors,  Taiki  Himiona  Secretary  and 
Mohi  Tarawhiti  Treasurer.  The  Y.W. 
M.I. A.  officers  are  Tamo  Mack  Thomp- 
son  President,   Agnes   Himiona  and   Wera 


Hune,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


185 


Tarawhiti  Counsellor  and  Secretary,  and 
Polly  Rotana  Treasurer.  We  know  that 
these  officers  will  be  blessed  in  this  work. 

We  are  pleased  to  have  in  our  midst 
Brother  Mohi  Tarawhiti  and  to  say  that 
his  arm  is  progressing  favourably  and 
that   he   is   active   in   our   Mutual. 

Baptisms. — Raymond  Himiona  and  Wai- 
ona  Scott  by  Ru  Tarawhiti ;  Martin 
Brown  by  Ngaha  Rotana;  Ben  Berry- 
man   by    E.   A.   C.   Scott. 

We  are  also  glad  to  report  that  Tommy 
Berryman  is  able  to  attend  meetings 
once  again  after  a  short  time  in  hospital 
at    Hamilton    with    a    broken    knee-cap. 

Puke  Tapu  wishes  a  speedy  recovery 
to  all  Saints  who  are  suffering  from  this 
so-called    "flu-bug." 

MAHIA  DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Riripeti    Mataira 

The  Opoutama  Branch  Relief  Society 
held  its  Centennial  Celebrations  on 
March  17th,  during  which  Sister  Uru- 
manuka  Rarere,  who  was  an  officer  of 
its  First  Presidency,  was  given  the  place 
of  honour.  Sister  Kui  Campbell,  their 
present  President,  is  now  living  at  Tuai, 
Waikaremoana.  Brother  Pakimana  Tau- 
rima  is  doing  construction  work  at  Pal- 
merston    North. 

The  members  of  the  district  are 
pleased  to  know  that  "Fergie"  Ferguson 
of  Kopuawhara,  is  again  enjoying  good 
health    following    a    lengthy    illness. 

During  a  brief  stay  in  Nuhaka  while 
on  route  northward,  thirty  soldiers  were 
given  light  refreshments  by  the  mem- 
bers   of    the    Nuhaka    M.I. A. 

M.I. A.  activities  hold  a  keen  place  in 
the  life  of  the  members.  Especially  is 
this  so  in  the  V.A.D.  and  First  Aid 
classes  being  instructed  by  Sisters  Lena 
Waerea  and  Manu  O'Brien.  Debates  are 
keenly  contested,  and  among  its  enthu- 
siastic members  is  the  local  Anglican 
Minister's    son. 

At  the  request  of  Mr.  H.  L.  Harker, 
Mayor  of  Wairoa,  the  Nuhaka  Branch 
choir  presented  two  numbers  at  a  Patri- 
otic Concert  field  in  the  Gaiety  Theatre. 
These  renditions  were  very  well  reecived, 
one  of  which  being  particularly  appro- 
priate, the  re-arrangemenl  by  Walter 
Smith  <.r  "There'll  Always  Be  \ 
land."  This  choir  also  took  part  in  the 
An/.ac  Day  communal  service  held  In 
tin-  L.D.S.  Hall,  where  the  various  de- 
nominations took  part.  Particular  In- 
1  ere  I  a ■<  accorded  I  he  remark  of  Mi- 
nn i    Chi 

Births.       To,      Mr.     .and 

Whaanga  of  Nuhaka  a  daughter,  Cairo 
Eliza,  To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Davi  Smith,  Jr., 
of  Nuhaka,  .-.     on,   vvi.     To  Mr.  ai 

,    Matairs    of    N uhaka,    ■    daui  bter, 

Hope. 

Baptisms.       Miriama    D.-nn:       Tangi    W  i 

aiana,     Dorothy     Nepia      Bi  Mitchell 

Camnbell,    Tlemi    Hate,    Teddj     w  I 
Taaka      Putaa     Walker,     bj      Eld< 

•    and     Kenya     Wai 
bj     William    Chi  laty.     Conflrn  at 
.•ill    of    th.    .■    baptism         er<     du 
formed  and  recorded. 

AppointiiK -Hi  a  iniana 

i.-int    i , ■.,,  i,, |]   in  i  be  Prims i 

of    the    Bundaj    Bel I 

Put!     I'uti     atataira    ■       \ 
Leader.     Bister  alibi  Karaa 


Counsellor  of  the  Tahaenui  Neighbour- 
hood Primary.  Sister  Te  Arawhiti  Mete 
as  Second  Counsellor  of  the  Tahaenui 
Neighbourhood  Primary  with  Sister  Wai 
Haronga    as    their    Secretary. 

Ordinations. — Tommy  Parkes  as  Dea- 
con, by  Joseph  R.  Tengaio  and  Mahlon 
Nepia    as    Deacon    by    Tamahau    Haronga. 

Releases. — Te  Wai  Haronga  as  Arts 
and  Crafts  teacher  in  the  Tahenui  Neigh- 
bourhood Primary.  Sisters  Tulate  Solo- 
mon and  Maggie  Winiana  as  First  and 
Second  Counsellors  respectively  of  the 
Tahaenui   Neighbourhood    Primary. 

NGAPUHI    DISTRICT 
Reported   by   Rebecca  Anaru 

The  25th  and  26th  of  April  was  Con- 
ference time  under  the  direction  of  the 
Relief  Society  Sisters.  Primary  meeting 
was  held  on  Saturday  night  followed  by 
the  Mutual  programme.  We  were  hon- 
oured with  visits  from  Saints  and  friends 
from  many  parts,  including  Maromaku 
Tautoro  Awarua  and  Auckland.  Presi- 
dent and  Sister  Cowley  were  guests  of 
the  celebrations.  An  interesting  diver- 
sion was  the  work  of  the  Pipiwai  Platoon, 
Home  Guard,  under  the  command  of  Lt 
Hetaraka  Anaru.  Visitors  had  no  fear 
of   any    losses    of   petrol. 

Sunday  morning,  at  8  o'clock,  the 
Priesthood  and  Relief  Society  held  their 
meetings,  to  be  followed  at  10.30  with 
the  Sunday  School  programme  under  the 
direction  of  Superintendent  Wirihana 
Peepe.  At  11  a.m.  the  Relief  Society 
Sisters  took  control,  at  which  service 
the    Birthday    Cake    was    cut. 

The  Home  Guard  was  again  in  the 
news  as  they  paraded  for  inspection  by 
Major  Joseph  Hay,  commander  of  the 
Bay  of  Island  Home  Guard  Battalion. 
'I  Ins  event  was  a  distinct  honour  to  the 
Relief  Society  celebrations  and  to  the 
Pipiwai   Platoon  of  the  Horn,'   Guard. 

HAWKE'S    BAY   DISTRICT 

Reported    by    Olive    Edwards    and 

William    Harris 

was    h,  id    at 

•ill     25th,     Where     the 

local  Home  Guard  paraded  and  Tuhaka 
Babbington,     h.. me    on    sick     i.-.i . 

of    honour.      The    program] 
under  t  he  capable  dii 

Edwards,  while  the  Relief  Societj  sisters 
arrangi  d  for  a  lis  in  lupper,  music  being 
provided    by    Byd    Raman's    orch< 

During   th<    i 
ngata   Choir  and   Byd    Kama 

.  .-r  the  air.     J( 

■  ilated   on    being    conductor  of  the 
choir.  honour 

lll.le.  d. 

Joe    Tengaio    In    the    nea 
along    v.  it  h    King!    \.  w  toi 

•  a  here      in      t  I,, 

undergoing    Home    Guard    training. 

irned  to  the 

borne. 
Bli  ih       i  tar    Paul    Ran- 

dall   Oi  0     and 

Mother1       Da] 

honoured    sfo 

l  9  i .'.   in   t  hair  Chapel,   w  hi<  h 
fully   d< 


186 


TE  KARERE 


Hune,  1942 


dent  and  Jewell  Cowley  were  in  attend- 
ance, and  other  visitors  included  Bro. 
and  Sister  Eruera  Taurau  (newly  weds) 
of  Wairarapa,  Adelaide  Poananga  and 
Waitokorau  Tamihana  of  Rangiotu.  Bro. 
and  Sister  Nopera  of  Te  Hauke,  Stuart 
Meha  of  Waipawa  and  others  too  numer- 
ous   to   mention. 

The  programme,  which  was  ably  con- 
ducted by  Cowley  Harris,  Second  Assist- 
ant Superintendent  of  the  Branch  Sunday 
School,  consisted  of  songs,  recitations  and 
speeches;.  The  principal  speaker  was 
President  Cowley,  who  in  his  usual  way, 
delivered  a  very  inspiring  message.  After 
the  service  all  adjourned  to  the  dining- 
room,    where    a    feast    was    awaiting. 

At  the  guest  table  was  seated  the 
"newly-wedte,"  and  at  an  appropriate 
hour  the  wedding  cake  was  cut  amid 
the  usual  proceedings  at  an  occasion  of 
this  nature. 

The  Chapel  was  again  filled  at  6  p.m., 
when  the  M.I. A.,  under  the  direction  of 
Emaraina  Takerei,  conducted  services, 
using  as  its  theme  "Love  Thy  Neigh- 
bour," speakers  being  Stuart  Meha  and 
Sisters  Mabel  Meha  and  Adelaide  Po- 
ananga. The  Priesthood  meeting,  which 
followed  immediately,  was  conducted  by 
Mission  President  Matthew  Cowley,  and 
in  his  opening  remarks  pointed  out  that 
"a  man's  religion  was  of  no  use,  if  he 
was  unable  to  speak  of  its  divinity  and 
truth."  With  this  in  mind  he  called  on 
the  younger  members  of  the  congregation 
to  speak.  These  included  Luxford  Peeti 
Walker,  Awhitia  Hiha,  James  Harris,  Para 
Meha,  Jewell  Cowley.  All  responded  will- 
ingly, and  each  imparted  inspiration  and 
sincerity  to  the  many  listeners.  I  wish 
to  make  special  mention  of  Sister  Jewell, 
and  take  this  opportunity  of  compli- 
menting her.  It  was  given  with  ease 
and  simplicity.  It  was  so  sincere  and 
encouraging  —  exhorting  her  generation 
to  live  steadfast  to  the  teaching  of  the 
Church.  She  also  paid  a  beautiful  tri- 
bute to  her  mother — "I  have  the  most 
wonderful    mother." 

Marriage. — Eruera  Taurau  and  Mere 
Te  Maari  were  married  by  President 
Cowley  on  May  9,  1942,  at  the  home  of 
Brother     and     Sister     Wi     Duncan.       Bro. 


Taurau  has  been  President  of  the  Wai- 
rarapa District  for  a  number  of  years 
and  was  left  widowed  at  the  death  of  his 
wife    some    three    years    ago. 

A  constant  visitor  to  our  Branch  is 
Trevor  Hammon,  son  of  Hixon  Hamon, 
at  present  undergoing  training  in  camp. 
We  are  always  happy  to  see  Trevor,  and 
hope    that    his    visits    are    continued. 

Luxford  Peeti  Walker  has  just  re- 
turned on  holiday  from  Knox  College, 
Dunedin,  and  as  you  notice  was  present 
at  our  Mother's  Day  programme.  He 
is  certainly  looking  fit.  His  cousin, 
Nitama  M.  Paewai,  is  expected  home 
very   soon,   also   on   holiday. 

George  Nepia,  famour  "All  Black" 
fullback,  is  with  us  for  a  short  while  as 
he  attends  Home  Guard  training.  George 
lived  here  a  number  of  years  ago,  and 
went  from  here  to  "All  Black"  fame. 
Upon  his  return  this  time  his  many  old 
friends  were  glad  to  renew  and  exchange 
experiences. 

Jewell  Cowley  is  spending  one  week  or 
more  of  her  school  holidays  with  Brother 
and  Sister  Wi  Duncan  before  going  to 
the    South    Island    with    her    parents. 

The  local  organizations  are  function- 
ing well,  considering  that  most  of  the 
members  of  the  Branch  are  at  various 
jobs — mostly  in  Hastings.  We  are  look- 
ing   forward    to    their    return. 

Death The     death     occurred     at     the 

Dannevirke  Hospital  of  Charlotte  Martin, 
aged  7,  daughter  of  Piki  and  Marara 
Martin  (nee  Marara  Potete  of  Porirua). 
The  funeral  service  was  held  in  the  Ta- 
maki  Chapel,  which  was  suitably  prepared 
for  the  occasion.  Piki  Martin  is  a  mem- 
ber of  the  Ratana  Church,  but  while 
their  daughter  lay  sick  in  hospital  he 
requested  the  Elders  to  visit  and  admin- 
ister to  her.  This  they  did  right  up  un- 
til her  demise.  For  this  they  desired 
also  that  the  burial  of  the  child  should 
be  under  the  auspices  of  the  Church.  So 
grateful  and  impressed  were  they  with 
the  funeral  arrangements  and  services 
that  they  expressed  in  writing  to  the 
Tamaki  Branch  Presidency  their  appre- 
ciation and  thanks  for  such  services 
and  assistance  given  in  their  time  of  sor- 
row and   bereavement. 


M.A.C.  OLD  BOYS'  MEMORIAL  GATE 

Notice  has  just  been  received  from  Chairman  George  Randell, 
who  is  in  charge  of  erecting  the  Memorial,  that,  because  of  the 
restrictions  recently  imposed  by  the  Controller  of  Construction, 
restricting  the  use  of  cement  and  other  material,  our  plans  and  work 
are  temporarily  held  up. 

Any  new  information  will  be  published  in  the  July  issue  of 
Te  Karere,  which  will  come  out  in  sufficient  time  before  the  "Pioneer 
Day"  celebrations,  which  will  give  all  enough  time  to  either  prepare 
or  cancel  arrangements  for  the  Opening  and  Dedicating  of  the  Gate. 

Following  on  from  the  list  printed  in  the  last  issue,  we  here 
acknowledge  receipt  of  these  added  subscriptions : — Ben  Armstrong, 
Walter  Smith,  Ida  H.  Smith,  Niki  Paewai,  Rangi  Greening,  Walter 
Greening,  Hui  Tau  Elkington  and  David  Tari. 


Wahanga  36  Hurae,  1942 


Nama  7 


zr^sarnHH 


BROTHERLY  LOVE 

Does  it  seem  strange  that  in  a  war-torn  world  we 
pause  a  moment  to  consider  the  doctrine  of  brotherly 
love?  Since  our  own  right  to  live  as  we  choose  has 
been  violently  challenged,  shall  we  desert  our  ideals 
and  surrender  to  the  soul-devastating  principles  of 
hatred  and  ill  will?  In  this  great  crisis  shall  we  allow 
ourselves  to  assume  frenzied  attitudes  which  destroy 
our  sense  of  judgment  and  canker  our  righteous  self 
discipline? 

What  would  the  Saviour  do  if  He  were  here?  He 
would  love  His  fellow-men,  all  of  them,  even  His 
enemies.  For  so  He  did  and  taught  that  we  should 
do.  He  would  not  condone  men  in  their  evil  and 
wicked  conduct,  but  ever  pray  and  struggle  for  their 
enlightenment. 

Even  His  right  to  live  as  He  chose  was  challenged, 
ultimately  leading  to  His  crucifixion.  As  He  was  lead 
by  His  executioners,  was  there  hate  in  His  heart  to- 
ward them?  Did  He  hate  those  who  hated  Him,  some 
of  whom  drove  the  nails,  thrust  the  sword,  and  fixed 
the  thorns  upon  His  head?  What  of  those  who  scorned 
and  mocked  Him,  and  even  he  who  spat  upon  Him" 

In  His  attitude  we  have  our  pattern.  In,  perhaps, 
His  darkest  hour  upon  the  earth,  as  He  hung  upon  the 
cross,  He  looked  upon  those  who  challenged  His  free- 
dom. His  way  of  life,  those  who  hated  and  despised 
Him  unto  death,  and  said,  in  prayerful  supplication : 
"Father,  forgive  them ;  for  they  know  not  what  they 
do."    He  loved  them  even  though  they  crucified  Him. 

Actuated  by  this  same  lofty  spirit,  the  First  Presi- 
dency of  the  Church  issued  a  statement  December  8, 
1941,  which  we  should  bind  upon  our  hearts :  "We  urge 
that  hate  of.  men  which  injures  most  them  who  have  it, 
shall  not  be  permited  to  enter  our  hearts  and  that  the 
eternal  principle  of  the  brotherhood  of  man  shall  ever 
be  the  guiding  spirit  of  our  conduct." 

— Improvement  Era. 


Te  Karere 

Established  in  1907  & 

Wahanga   36  Hurae,    1942  Nama    7  % 

Matthew   Cowley  Tumuaki    Mihana 

Kelly  Harris  Etita 

Eru   T.   Kupa       . .       . .        '. Kaiwhakamaori 

Waimate   Anaru  Kaiwhakamaori 

"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  whakatapua  hei  hapai  ake  i  te  xwi  Maori  ki 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-nui.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  THE  BUSINESS  PRINTING 
WORKS  LTD.,  55  Albert  Street,  Auckland,  CI,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00   per   year;   $4.00   for   five   years;   $10.00   for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


CONTENTS 

Editorial—  Page 

Ko  Te  Rua  Tekau  Ma  Wha  0  Nga  Ra  0  Hurac  1(>- 

Special    Features — 

Evidences  and   Reconciliations   ll)^ 

Pioneer  Day       lu" 

Ko  Te  Kumara  W 

M..\.(  .  Old  Boys'  Memorial  Gate  198 

Church    Features — 

Sunday    School    't|,) 

\l uiii.ii    I mpr< ivemenl    \  si m  iat ion 

Primary       

New  I    from    tlio    Field    »M 


TE  KARERE 


Hurae,  1942 


Editorial 


KO  TE  RUA  TEKAU  MA  WHA  0  NGA  RA 
O  HURAE 


Ko  te  rua  tekau  ma  wha  o  nga  ra  o  Hurae  he  ra  e 
whakanuitia  ana  ki  nga  wahi  katoa  o  te  ao  e  nohoia  ana  e 
te  Hunga  Tapu.  Ko  tana  ra  e  korerotia  whakahonoretia  ana 
e  nga  mema  katoa  o  te  Hahi  timata  ai  i  nga  tamariki  nonohi 
tae  ake  ki  nga  koroheke  me  nga  kuia.  No  taua  ra  i  te  tan 
1847  ka  eke  mai  te  Hunga  Tapu  ki  te  taha  o  te  Roto  Tote, 
ki  taua  wahi  e  tu  ana  te  Pa  Tote  inaianei.  I  te  wa  i  eke 
mai  te  ropu  tuatahi  o  te  Hahi  ki  taua  wahi  kaore  tahi  he 
whare  e  tu  ana  i  taua  wahi ;  kaore  hoki  he  rakau,  he  aha  ranei 
e  tupu  ana.  Ahakoa  i  mohio  etahi  pakeha  ki  taua  wahi  i 
mua  atu  i  te  taenga  mai  o  te  Hunga  Tapu  kihai  rawa  ratou 
i  whakapono  tera  ano  ka  ora  te  tangata  e  noho  roa  ana  ki 
taua  whenua.  Na  te  kaha  o  te  wera  o  te  ra  me  te  kore  ua 
hoki  rite  tonu  ki  te  kohatu  te  oneone.  No  reira  i  whakaaro 
ai  nga  pakeha  i  kite  i  taua  whenua  i  mua  atu  i  te  taenga  mai 
o  te  Hunga  Tapu  e  kore  rawa  te  tangata  e  whiwhi  oranga 
ki  reira.  He  tika  hoki  to  ratou  whakaaro  pera  no  te  mea 
kaore  ratou  i  mohio  ki  nga  whakaaro  puku  o  te  Atua  mo 
taua  whenua. 

No  te  tau  1842  ka  puta  mai  te  reo  o  Ihowa  ki  tana  Poro- 
iti,  ki  a  Hohepa  Mete,  a  ka  mea:  "Tera  ka  puta  mai  te  wa 
ka  haere  te  Hunga  Tapu  ki  tetahi  wahi  kei  te  hauauru  a  ka 
noho  ratou  ki  waenganui  i  nga  Maunga  Pohatu  ;  a  ka  tupu 
hoki  ratou  hei  iwi  kaha  ki  reira."  No  reira  i  te  wa  i  panaia 
mai  te  Hunga  Tapu  i  Nawu  ka  mohio  a  Pirikama  Tanga  ki 
te  wahi  ka  haere  nei  ratou  hei  hanga  i  o  ratou  kainga  tuturu 
ki  reira.  No  reira  ka  anga  atu  to  ratou  titiro  whaka-te- 
hauauru.  I  a  ratou  e  haere  ana  ka  titiro  nga  tangata  i 
mahue  ki  muri  ki  a  ratou  me  te  ki,  e  kore  te  iwi  Moromona 
e  ora  i  te  wahi  e  haere  nei  ratou.  Ka  hari  hoki  nga  hoa 
riri  o  te  Hahi  no  te  mea  kaore  ratou  i  pai  ki  te  rongo  ano 
i  taua  kupu  "Moromona"  a  muri  atu.  Mehemea  i  mohio 
ratou  tera  te  Hunga  Tapu  ka  whakaorangia  ki  waenganui 
i  nga  Maunga  Pohatu  ki  toku  mohio  kua  patua  katoatia 
ratou  ki  Nawu  pera  me  te  Poropiti  i  kohurutia.  Tena,  na 
te  Atua  Kaha  Rawa  ratou  i  pupuri  i  roto  i  ana  ringa  a  tae 
ora  mai  ana  te  ropu  tuatahi  ki  taua  whenua  motu-ke,  moke- 
moke,  koraha  hoki.  I  a  ratou  ka  puta  mai  i  nga  maunga  ka 
titiro  iho  a  Pirikama  Ianga  ki  te  raorao  e  takoto  ana  ki  te 
taha  o  te  Roto  Tote  a  ka  mea;  ''Ko  te  wahi  ienei."   Katahi 


Hurae,  1942 


TE   KARERE 


193 


ka  tino  pouri  etahi  o  ratou.  Kihai  ratou  i  pai  ki  te  noho 
ki  te  koraha  a  ka  inoi  ratou  ki  a  Pirikama  Ianga  kia  haere 
tonu  ki  tetahi  wahi  e  ora  ai  ratou,  ahakoa  pewhea  te  tawhiti. 
Kihai  a  Tumuaki  Ianga  i  whakaae  ki  ta  ratou  tono ;  no  te 
mea  i  mohio  ia  ko  te  kainga  tuturu  tera  mo  ratou. 

Mai  ano  i  taua  ra  i  te  tau  1847  kua  tupu  kaha  te  Hunga 
Tapu  i  waenganui  i  nga  Maunga  Pohatu  pera  me  ta  te  Atua 
i  mea  ai  ki  a  Hohepa  Mete.  Kei  te  titiro  te  ao  katoa  ki  te 
Pa  Tote  inaianei  me  te  whakamiharo  ano.  E  korerotia 
whakahonoretia  ana  taua  pa  i  roto  i  nga  nu-pepa  katoa  o 
te  ao,  me  nga  pikitia  hoki  o  te  Pa  Tote  e  kitea  ana  i  roto 
i  nga  whare  pikitia  i  nga  wahi  katoa  o  te  ao.  Me  tenei  ano ; 
ahakoa  i  korerotia-kinotia  te  ingoa  o  Pirikama  Ianga  mo  nga 
tau  maha,  inaianei  kua  huri  mai  nga  tangata  whai-whakaaro 
katoa  ki  te  whanahonore  i  a  ia.  E  whakaae  ana  ratou,  ae. 
ko  ia  tetahi  tangata  nui  atu  i  roto  i  nga  ingoa  nunui  o  te  ao. 
Kati. 

Mehemea  i  haere  mai  a  Pirikama  Ianga  me  tana  ropu 
ki  taua  whenua  ki  te  kimi  oranga  motuhake,  taonga  ranei, 
kua  kore  rawa  ratou  i  ora.  Kua  hemo  noa  atu  i  te  kore  kai. 
Tena  ko  tenei,  i  haere  ke  mai  ratou  ki  te  kimi  i  tetahi  wahi 
e  noho  ai  ratou  i  raro  i  te  tikanga  here-kore  o  te  wairua 
kia  karakia  ki  te  Atua.  No  reira  i  ora  ai  ratou;  no  reira 
hoki  i  manaakitia  te  oneone  kia  tupu  ai  nga  rakau  me  nga 
kai  o  ia  ahua,  o  ia  ahua. 

I  te  mea  he  maha  nga  wahi  o  te  ao  i  end  ra  e  takahi  ana 
i  taua  tikanga  o  te  here-kore  o  te  wairua  kia  karakia  ia 
tangata,  ia  tangata,  kia  rite  ki  tana  e  pai  ai.  kana  tatOU  te 
Hunga  Tapu  e  whakaae  kia  pera  tatou.  Ko  tana  tikanga 
he  mea  tuku  iho  i  0  tatOU  matua  i  haere  mai  nei  ki  te  koraha 
o  te  koto  Tote  hei  whakatu  i  te  Whare  o  [howa  ki  te  tilii 
0  nga  maunga.  Me  i  kore  ratou  i  haere  mai  ki  tana  wahi  i 
raro  i  te  tikanga  o  te  here  kore  o  te  wairua  kua  kore  tatou  i 
whiwhi  i  te  raneatanga  o  te  Kongo  I'ai,  kua  kore  hoki  tatou 
i    mohio   kei    whea   ranei   a    I  liona. 

\o  reira  me  whakanui  tatou  i  te  rua  tekau  me  wha  o 
nga  ra  0  1 1  mac;  me  whakahonore  hold  i  nga  tangata  katoa 

i   haere   tnatahi   mai   ki   te   wahi   c   kiia   nei   e   talon   ko    lliuna. 

A  i  a  tatou  c  maharahara  ana  ki  a  ratou  kaua  tatou  e  ware 
ware  ki  a  tatou  tamariki  maia  kua  hoatu  nei  i  t>  ratou  tinana 
i  roto  i  tenei  pakanga  kino  kia  kana  te  tikanga  «»  te  here 
kore  o  te  wairua  kia  karakia  ki  te  Atna  c  ngaro  i  waenganui 
i  nga  iwi  whakapono  o  te  ao.     Ma  te   KtxiB  ratou  e  manaaki. 

Mo  tut    L 


194 


TE  KARERE 


Hurac,  1942 


EVIDENCES  AND  RECONCILIATIONS 

SHOULD  A  SOLDIER  LOVE  HIS  ENEMY? 

By  Elder  John  A.  VVidtsoe  of  the  Quorum  of  the  Twelve  Apostles 

The  divinely  revealed  preface  to  the  Doctrine  and  Covenants 
makes  the  statement  that  "I  the  Lord  cannot  look  upon  sin  with  the 
least  degree  of  allowance."     (1:31;  see  also  Alma  45:  16.) 

The  nature  of  sin  justifies  this  unrelenting,  final  judgment.  Sin 
is  untruth,  and  the  misuse  of  truth.  It  violates  law,  the  essence  of 
truth.  It  decries  freedom,  and  fosters  tyranny.  It  deceives  and 
lie's.  It  destroys,  but  never  builds  up  except  for  more  destruction. 
It  slinks  away  from  light  and  lurks  in  darkness.  .  It  is  in  deliberate 
opposition  to  the  Lord's  plan  for  human  pro- 
gress.    Sin  is  the  mark  of  Satan. 

The  wide  spectrum  of  sin,  laid  against  a 
background  of  selfishness,  is  everywhere  evil. 
It  extends  from  wilful  ignorance  to  the  use  of 
knowledge  for  unholy  purposes;  from  dis- 
honesty in  speech  to  deliberate  murder ;  from 
family  and  neighbourhood  contentions  to  war- 
fare among  nations.  Every  part  of  it  corrodes, 
annihilates,  is  death-dealing.  Every  part  of  it, 
if  uncovered,  is  hideous  and  found  to  beckon 
from   slimy,   poisonous   depths. 

Sin  cannot  be  shown  love  or  mercy,  how- 
ever meek  and  beguiling  it  may  present  itself. 
It  ••cannot  be  condoned.  Were  that  done  the 
structure  of  truth  would  collapse.  The  battle 
of  the  Church  is  against  sin,  of  every  kin;  it 
must  be  conquered,  or  the  plan  of  salvation 
will  be  defeated;  it  must  be  fought  to  the  bitter  end. 
sin  is  itself  a  sin. 

All  human  affairs  must  be  measured  by  the  standards  of  right. 
If  evil  is  in  man's  acts,  it  becomes  a  sin  to  support  them.  The  statue 
totters  and  falls  if  clay  is  mixed  with  the  iron  of  the  feet.  The 
strength  of  a  democracy,  more  than  any  other  form  of  government, 
lies  in  its  adherence  to  the  principles  of  the  plan  of  salvation. 

A  war  can  be  called  just,  only  when  waged  against  sin  and  for 
the  victory  of  truth;  when  it  battles  for  the  preservation  of  the 
principles  which  make  up  the  plan  of  salvation,  then  warfare  is 
righteous.  If  it  is  waged  against  sin  and  for  the  victory  of  truth; 
when  it  battles  for  the  preservation  of  the  principles  which  make 
up  the  plan  of  salvation,  then  warfare  is  righteous.  If  it  is  waged 
to  defeat  the  attempt  to  enslave  men  under  tyrannical  rule,  it  becomes 
a  war  against  sin.  Such  a  war  should  be  supported  by  all  who  love 
right  above  wrong;  by  all  who  adhere  to  the  right  of  free  agency, 
for  which  the  heavenly  battle  was  fought,  long  ago. 


Elder  J.  A.  Widtsoe 


Tolerance  of 


Hurae,  1942  TE   KARERE  195 

If  it  be  desired  to  test  the  righteousness  of  a  war.  compare  the 
issues  with  those  of  the  divinely  formulated  plan  for  human  happi- 
ness.    No  other  test  is  needed.     The  standards  are  all  there. 

In  such  a  spirit,  with  such  understanding,  the  soldiers  who  go 
out  from  this  Church  must  go  into  battle.  They  are  fighting  sin  ; 
they  are  fighting  for  truth ;  no  quarter  can  be  shown  the  opposing 
side.  The  soldiers  of  the  enemy,  whether  willing  or  not,  represent 
a  sinful,  destructive  cause.  They  must  be  defeated  at  any  cost, 
even  that  of  their  lives.  Sin  cannot  be  looked  upon  "with  the  least 
degree  of  allowance."  The  opposing  army  must  be  viewed  as  a 
cause,  not  as  a  group  of  men. 

The  cause  must  be  uppermost.  The  individual  must  recede  in 
importance,  until  the  cause  for  betterment  has  triumphed.  Soldiers 
of  a  righteous  cause,  whether  the  warfare  be  great  or  small,  must 
fix  their  attention  upon  that  cause,  and  with  determination  fight  for 
it.  The  fate  of  the  enemy  as  individuals  must  be  set  aside  in  the 
battle  for  principle.  If  right  wins,  as  it  must  and  will,  the  enemy 
and  all  humanity  will  be  blessed. 

In  sacred  history  war  has  often  been  permitted,  to  establish  the 
cause  of  righteousness,  or  to  prevent  evil  from  triumphing  among 
men.  Even  the  Saviour  when  the  temple  of  God,  "a  house  of  prayer/' 
had  been  made  into  "a  den  of  thieves,"  overthrew  the  tables  of  the 
money  changers  and  the  merchants,  and  drove  out  all  who  were 
violating  the  holy  purposes  of  the  temple.  The  cause  of  righteous- 
ness must  be  man's   first  and  constant   consideration. 

Nevertheless,  though  sin  can  be  given  no  quarter,  nor  thos< 
who  seek  to  impose  sin  upon  others,  yet  the  soldier  must  recognize 
that  the  sinner,  as  an  individual,  remains  a  child  of  God,  subject  to 
repentance  and  the  Lord's  eternal  mercy.  Since  be  represents  n 
sinful  cause,  it  max  be  necessary  t<>  use  against  him  the  only  weapons 
lie  recognizes,  even  though  it  means  bis  destruction.  The  coin  of 
Caesar  is  bis;  we  must  render  it  to  him  to  win  the  Lord's 
Yet  we  max  hope  and  pra\  thai  on  the  endless,  eternal  journey,  Ik 
may  find  bis  way  t<i  salvation. 

Love  is  the  first  activating   force  of  the  gospel.     For  love  of 

I  lis  children  the  Lord  laid  out  the  plan  of  Salvation.       It  was  love   for 

humanity  thai  gave  the  Saviour  courage  to  meet  I  Ms  death  upon  the 
cross.  It  is  through  love,  one  for  the  other,  among  the  children 
of  men.  thai  the  brotherhood  of  man,  the  aim  of  the  gospel,  will 
arise  upon  earth.  Through  love,  right  will  triumph  over  evil.  But, 
it  should  ever  be  bome  in  mind  that  love  is  defeated,  unless  righteous 
ness  is  victorious. 

Therefore,  the  love  of  truth,  the  gospel,  to  bless  all  mankind, 
must  transcend  the  love  of  an  individual  or  a  group.  Usually,  tin- 
best  way  to  love  our  enemies  is  to  keep  truth  from  being  trodden 
into  the  ground  b)  thotc  who  •|"'  led  b)  evil,  designing  leaders. 
Make  truth  and  righl  triumphant,  and  love  will  bear  mle  among 
men.     There  is  no  ol hei   w 


196  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1942 

All  need  to  learn  that  love,  as  all  other  virtues,  must  be  exer- 
cised with  wisdom  and  in  a  common-sense  manner.  Hysteria  and 
emotional  outbursts,  often  for  criminals,  are  not  expressions  of  love, 
but  of  diseased  conceptions  of  the  right  manner  of  loving  our 
fellow-men, 

The  banner  of  love  will  ever  be  held  aloft  by  the  Church.  The 
soldier  can  and  should  love  his  enemy,  but  not  in  the  sense  that  he 
forgets  the  greater  love  of  the  cause  by  which  in  the  end  the  enemy 
and  all  others  will  be  blessed. 

— Improvement  Era. 


SPECIAL    NOTICE  K 

J                                                   PIONEER   DAY  (? 

(L             On   July    24th,    1942,   there   will   be    "The   Pioneer    Ball"    at  1 

j)    Korongata,  Hastings,  to  commence  the  Pioneer  Day  Hui.    Follow-  SC 

{(,    ing  this  event,  the  Hui  proper  will  commence  on  Saturday,  25th,  j) 

J    and    continue    on    until    the    evening    of    the    26th    July,    1942.  j[ 

(f     Although  the  M.A.C.   Old  Boys'  Memorial  Gate  will  not  be  com-  j) 

Jj    pleted  for  this  occasion  as  planned,  it  will  be  a  pleasure  and  a  (^ 

/f     privilege  to  see  some  of  the  "Old  Boys"  as  they  take  upon  them-  S) 

J,    selves  the  work  of  pioneering  in  these  times  of  much  strife.  (? 

The  Mission  President  and  Korongata  Branch  Presidency  ex-  s\ 

^?    tend   a  welcome   invitation   to   all   who   can,   to    attend   this   Hui.  (p 

J 


FROM   MISSION  OFFICE 

There  has  lately  been  a  demand  from  the  Saints  for  various 
certificates  including  copies  of  marriage  licences,  etc.  If  individuals 
are  needing  these  certificates,  etc.,  kindly  state  proper  name,  parents, 
where  and  when  born  and  what  Branch  they  belong  to  or  else  get 
in  touch  with  District  Secretaries  and  find  out  the  correct  record 
number  and  have  the  District  Secretaries  send  for  them.  In  the 
case  of  marriage  licences,  kindly  state  both  parties  concerned,  when 
married  and  by  which  Elder. 

By  complying  with  the  suggestions  as  stated,  you  will  be  assist- 
ing this  office  in  the  search  for  the  correct  information  and  being 
able  to  furnish  you  with  the  required  copy  as  soon  as  possible,  pend- 
ing which  it  may  be  a  week  or  more  before  the  search  is  completed. 

— Mission  Secretary. 


M.I.A.   NOTIFICATION 

The  Nuhaka  Branch  M.I.A.  has  sent  to  the  M.I.A.  Secretary  at 
Dannevirke  a  third  of  their  takings  of  the  Gold  and  Green  Ball  for 
the   past   year,   amounting    to   £28. 


Hurae,  1942 


TE   KARERE 


197 


KO  TE  KUMARA 

Na  Rurana  N.  Mete 

Tena  koutou  e  te  iwi  Maori.  Tena  koutou  e  oku  tuakana,  oku 
tuahine,  i  roto  i  te  Rongo  Pai.  Tena  ano  koutou  e  oku  hoa  aroha 
pono   i  roto   i  tena  iwi  pai. 

Kia  ora  ra  koutou  katoa,  koutou  i  atawhai,  i  whangai,  i  aroha, 
mai  ki  ahau,  i  ahau  e  haerere  ana  i  waenganui  i  a  koutou.  E  te  iwi 
e  arohaina  e  te  Atua,  te  iwi  i  whati  atu  i  te  manga  o  Iharaira,  tenei 
taku  mihi  ki  a  koutou. 

Kaati.      He    mihi    hoki    naku    ki    te    Manu    Tangi    Pai,    ara,    "Te 

Karere."      Kei  te  taetae  tonu  mai  tenei  pepa  ki  ahau,  e  mau  mai  ana 

nga   kupu    o    nga    Maori   me    nga    pakeha    o    Niu    Tireni.      Na   tenei    e 

mohio    ai    ahau    ki   nga   whakaaro,    ki   nga   mahi    a 

te   Hunga   Tapu   o   Aotea-roa. 

Kaati  tena.  Ko  te  kaupapa  nui  o  aku  kupu 
ko  te  "Kumara"  o  te  Maori.  Kua  rongo  tatou 
tera  i  haere  mai  te  Maori  i  te  whenua  o  nga  Hura, 
it  te  whenua  o  nga  Ihipana  ranei,  ara  nga  Hai- 
namana  me  tetahi  atu  wahi  ranei.  Na,  ki  ta  te 
Hunga  Tapu,  i  haere  mai  te  Maori  i  taua  whenua 
e  kiia  e  te  Atua,  te  whenua  pai  rawa  atu  i  era  atu 
whenua  katoa,  ara,  te  whenua  o  te  "kupu  whaka- 
ari."  Ko  ia  te  whenua  nei  i  hoatongia  ki  te  iwi 
o  Rihai.  Ka  mea  tatou  i  reira  te  Maori.  Kua 
mohiotia  tera  i  noho  tetahi  tangata  ki  taua  whenua 
he  tangata  kai-hanga  waka.  Ka  rere  tenei  tangata 
me  tona  ropu  ki  runga  te  moana  nui.  Na,  katahi, 
ka  ngaro  atu  ratou  i  to  ratou  nei  iwi.  E  kore  e 
kitea  ano. 

He  nui  nga  kupu  Maori  mo  te  haerenga  mai 
"i  tawhiti  nui,  i  tawhiti  roa,  i  tawhiti  pamamao,  i 
hono  wairua."  Ka  nui  nga  awangawanga  i  waenganui  i  nga  tangata 
mohio  mo  tenei  wahi  e  kiia  nei  ko  te  hono  wairua,  ara  te  whenua 
tawhito  o  te  Maori.  Tetahi  atu  o  nga  kupu  o  te  Maori  e  ki  nei,  "I 
haere  mai  matou  i  te  whenua  e  tupu  noa  mai  te  kumara."  Kei  whoa 
ra  taua  whenua?  Tera  pea  k<>  taua  whenua  me  te  "hono  wairua" 
to  whenua  kotahi?  Ae-ki  ta  te  korero  Maori  e  tika  ana  tenei.  Kua 
rongo  au  tera  ko  Amerika  Tonga  to  wahi  e  tupu   noa  mai  to  kumara. 

I  ahau  e  korero  pukapuka  ana   1   kite  ahau   i  tetahi   mea  oho 
ki   ahau.     K o   tenei    pukapuka   ko   "The   Citadel   of   a    Hundred 
ways."     He  mea  tuhituhi  na  Alida  Sim  Malkus,  he  wahine  tino  mohio 
ki  nga  mea  katoa  o  Amerika  Tonga.     I  noho  ia  i  waenganui  i  tera  iwi 

mo    tetahi     Wa     roa.       Ko    te     mea    tmo     ohorero     ki     ahau     ko     te     kupu 

"cumui  a."     E  penei  ana  te  korero  i  roto  i  tona  pukapuka.  "Two  kinds 

Of   swoot    DOtatO,    apichu    and    eumara         "      Ara    te    w  hakamaorit . 

a  riwai  reka,  te  apitiu  me  te  kumara  "  \'a  e  hoa  ma,  ka  kite 
tat«ui  i  te  iitoii.ua  o  to  ratou  nei  kupu.  eumara,  ki  to  tatou  nei  kupu. 
kumara.  Kei  te  mahara  ahau  ki  te  whakatauki  maori,  "I  haere  mai 
matou  i  te  whenua  e  tupu  noa  mai  te  kumara."  Co  tenei  whenua  t 
korerotia  nei  <•  tenei   wahine,   ko   Bolivia  I   Amerika  Toi 

Ka  mea  mai  taku  hoa  Ida  ahau  tera  kua  tae  atu  ia  ki  nga  whenua 
katoa   o   LJropa,   tae  atu   ki   te   whenua   of   nga    Hura.   me  tera 
Ihipaua   me  etahi   atu   whenua,   otira,   kihai   ia    I   kite   i   tenei    mea  te 
kumara.     No    reira,    ka    mea   ahau    ko    Amerika    Tonga   te    whenua    e 
tupu   noa  mai  te  kumara.     No  reira   hoki.   ka   mea  ahau   no   Amerika 

Tonga   te   Maori. 


Rurana  N.  Mete 


I 


198  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1942 

He  maha  nga  mea  pai  i  tuhituhia  e  tenei  wahine  mo  taua  wahi. 
Ka  mea  ia  he  nui  nga  pa  ki  runga  nga  maunga  nui,  me  nga  whare 
kua  hangatia  i  nga  kohatu  nunui.  I  kite  ahau  i  nga  whakaahua  i  roto 
i  te  "Improvement  Era"  o  nga  pa  kua  korerotia  nei.  Na  reira  ka 
mohio  ahau  he  tika  te  korero  o  te  wahine  nei. 

Kaati,  e  hoa  ma.  Me  he  mea  Tie  pai  enei  kupu  kia  koutou  kua 
oti  pai  tenei  mahi  aku.  Engari,  ma  nga  kupu  penei  me  enei  ka  piki 
haere  o  matou  hinengaro  i  nga  mahi  a  te  Atua  i  roto  i  Tona  Hahi.  No 
reira,  kia  kaha,  kia  toa,  kia  maia,  tena  ano  KIA  NGAWARI. 

Heoi   ra.      Kia  ora  tatou  katoa. 

I  THE  M.A.C.  OLD  BOYS'  MEMORIAL  GATE     f 

Y  As  was  announced  in  the  last  'Te  Karere"  that  there  was  A 
(^  a  hold-up  in  the  erection  of  the  Memorial  Gate  at  Korongata,  we  vC 
J\  regret  to  add  that  because  of  difficulties  forced  on  us  by  the  war,  S) 
*  the  completion  of  the  proposed  memorial  will  be  indefinitely  post-  h 

poned.      This    decision    was    reached    and    agreed    upon    between  \ 

\  President  Cowley  and  the  chairman   of  the   "working  committee  S) 

v  in  charge,"  George  Randell,  when  President  Cowley  was  in  Hast-  /p 

(b  ings   during  the  second  week-end   of  June,    1942.  \ 

J)  The    amount   already   subscribed   by   "Old   Boys"    and    other  j) 

Jf  interested    people    such    as    instructors    and    aides     (women)     is  (? 

^  £32/12/6.  & 

d)  In  the  list  published  in  the  June  "Te  Karere,"  the  amounts  J 

K  above  the  subscription  suggested  was  omitted  for  Walter  and  Ida  ([ 

>?  H.  Smith,  who  donated  £1  each.    The  subscriptions  received  since  ^ 

3  are:—  \ 

t  William  Peihopa  (£1/10/-),  Tipi  Kopua,  Tuheni  Pohatu,  Roy  \ 

\  Matthews   (12/6),  Walter  Martin   (deceased),  Renata  Puriri   (de-  S) 

Y  ceased),  Peter  Kelly,  Sydney  Crawford  and  son  (£2),  Jury  o 
(^  Thompson,  Dave  Ormsby,  Ka  Tipoki,  James  Southon,  Dan  Wil-  1 
J  liams,   Opai  Martin,  Peter  H.   Calkin,  Abe  Rarere.        Subs.   10/-.  ^ 

DEATH  OF  PRES.  LOUIS  G.  HOAGLAND 

Too    late    for    the    June    issue    of    "Te    Karere"    we    print    a    communication    from 
a   former  N.Z.   missionary   and   a  present   official   of   the   Returned    Missionary   Society, 
Elder    Ernest    L.    Dee,    to    President    Matthew    Cowley    informing    us    of    the    death    of 
President    Louis    G.    Hoagland. 
Dear    President    Cowley, 

This  is  to  inform  you  that  President  Louis  Gerald  Hoagland  died  on  March  12, 
1942,   at   Salt   Lake   City,    Utah,    at    the   age   of    71    years. 

His  grandfather,  Abram  L.  Hoagland,  was  one  of  the  first  Bishops  of  the  14th 
Ward   of   Salt   Lake  City,   Utah,   and   a  pioneer   of   1847. 

Louis  was  a  son  of  John  and  Adelia  West  Hoagland  and  was  born  in  Ogden, 
Utah.  He  is  survived  by  a  widow,  Mrs.  Alice  B.  Young  Hoagland,  and  the  following 
children:  Mrs.  Edith  H.  Jensen.  Mrs.  Lida  H.  Byrne,  Laurie  L.  Hoagland,  Edwin  L. 
Young,  George  L.  Young,  and  Frank  H.  Young.  Also  seven  grandchildren,  one  great- 
grandchild   and    two    living    brothers.,    Clarence   A.    Hoagland    and    Frank    E.    Hoagland. 

Louis  was  the  first  Bishop  of  the  26th  Ward  of  Salt  Lake  City,  Utah,  and 
has  served  as  a  member  of  the  High  Council  of  Pioneer  Stake,  and  member  of  Pioneer 
Stake    Sunday    School    Superintendency. 

Services  were  held  at  the  14th  Ward  of  Salt  Lake  City,  Utah,  and  burial  was 
in  the  Salt  Lake  City  Cemetery,  Monday,  March  16,  1942.  The  services  were  under 
the  direction  of  the  Returned  N.Z.  Missionaries,  speakers  being  Apostle  H.  B.  Lee 
and  Vice-President  Ernest  L.  Dee.  The  New  Zealand  Maori  Missionary  Quartette 
rendered   a    very   appropriate   selection   in    the   native   tongue. 

The    pall-bearers    were:    Elders    Ezra    T.    Stevenson,    J.    Howard    Jenkins,    O.    D. 
Romney.   Jr.,    Graham    H.    Doxey,    Clarence   E.    Tregeagle,   and    Fred    W.    Schwendiman. 
Mere    Whaanga,    aged    94,   attended   the   services. 


Hurae,  1942  TE   KARERE  199 

SUNDAY   SCHOOL 


Theme — 

"OUR  HOMES   AND   CHAPELS   SHALL   BE   BEAUTIFUL" 
"For  Zion  must  increase  in  beauty  and  in  Holiness;  her  borders 
must  be  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened;  yea  verily  I  say 
unto  you.    Zion  must  arise  and  put  on  her  beautiful  garments." 

— Doctrine  &  Covenants  82 :  14. 


SACRAMENT    GEM 

Bless  us,  0  Lord,  for  Jesus'  sake; 
O  may  we  worthily  partake 
These   emblems  of  the  flesh  and   blood 
Of   our  Redeemer,    Saviour,   God. 

CONCERT  RECITATION 
I.    Chronicles    19:  13 

"Be  of  good  courage,  and  let  us  behave  ourselves  valiantly  for 
our  people,  and  for  the  cities  of  our  God;  and  let  the  Lord  do  that 
which   is   good   in   His   sight." 

KORERO   A   NGAKAU 
I.    Nga   Whakapapa    19:  13 

"Kia  maia,  kia  whakatane  tatou;  me  whakaaro  ki  to  tatou  iwi, 
ki  nga  pa  o  to  tatou  Atua,  a  ma  Ihowa  e  mea  te  mea  e  pai  ana  ki  Tona 
titiro." 

LESSONS 
KINDERGARTEN   (4-5  yrs.).  Thought:  "Thanksgiving  and  Gratitude." 

"Birth  and  Childhood  of  Samuel"    (1   Samuel  1). 

"Noah's    Thanksgiving    after    Leaving    the    Ark"     (Genesis    8). 

Review  some  of  the  lessons  previously  had. 

PRIMARY   (6  to  9  years). 

"A  Young  Prince  Who  Dared  to  Serve  God"    (Daniel  6).    Thought: 

"God  protects  those  who  have  faith  in  Him." 
"A    Brave    Young    Queen"     (Book    of    Esther).  Thought:      "The 

prayers  of  the  faithful  will  prevail." 
Review  some  of  previous  lessons. 

CHURCH  HISTORY   (10  to  11  years). 

"Moroni"  (Alma  46).  Thought:  "Righteousness  exalteth  a  nation." 
Facts:  X<  phit.es  fight  for  their  religion-  Lamanitea  for  power  - 
Amalickiah's  treason— Moroni's  loyalty — the  "Title  of  Liberty" 
— the  long  continued   struggle. 

"The  People  of   Amnion"    (Alma    53,   Or   Story   of    Book   of    Mormon. 

chap.  38).     Thought:  "Alan  is  not  justified  in  breaking  an  oath 

with    God."       Facts:    Ammonites      their    oath— -Lnmanites    at    war 

with  Nephites     Ammonites  tempted  to  break  their  oath     Elela- 

man's  advice     permit   their  sons  to  go  to  battle. 

"The    Young    Ammonite*"     (Alma    56,    or    Story    of     Book    of     M"r- 

moil,   chap.   87).     Thought:   "Faith   ■   power  of   war." 

TWO    thousand    A  in  mon  it  <•    youths    enlist     under    llelaman       II. 'a- 

inan  greatly  strengthened     I  Lamanitei    surrounded 

and   overcome     Helaman  count  one  slain. 

A  &  B  DEPARTMENTS  (12  to  15,   i»".  to  Lfl 

"A    Stranger    in    a    Strange    Land"     I  (mi  I'        IT.     1,   :    1     10. 

24  28.     Exodui    L2:37,  10,  and  Numbers  L).     What  to  look  for:  Kindly 
treatment  of  fsrael  during  Jo  eph1    time.     The  pan  [yen  to 


200  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1942 

Israel.  Number  who  went  into  Egypt.  Number  who  left  Israel.  Com- 
pare with  Abraham's  blessings.  Duration  of  Israel's  stay  in  Egypt. 
Problems:  What  was  the  condition  of  the  Israelites  before  the  time  of 
the  Pharaoh  'who  knew  not  Joseph'?  Why  did  the  Egyptians  fear 
the  rapid  increase  of  the  Israelites?  In  what  ways  did  the  Egyptians 
try  to  prevent  the  Israelites'  increase?  How  did  the  Egyptian  bond- 
age fulfil  the  prophecy?  What  were  some  of  the  effects  of  the  bondage 
upon  Israel? 

"The  Story  of  Moses"  (Exodus  2;  Acts  7:20-50).  What  to  look 
for:  The  tribe  Moses  belonged  to.  How  his  life  was  preserved.  The 
cause  of  his  flight  from  Egypt.  The  length  of  time  he  was  among  the 
Egyptians.  Problems:  What  kind  of  training  did  Moses  probably  get 
in  the  house  of  Pharaoh?  Compare  Moses  and  Lincoln  with  reference 
to  slavery?      Where  did  Moses  go  from  Egypt?    Discuss  Heb.  11:  22-29. 

C  DEPARTMENT  (20  to  25  years). 

"Peter's  Great  Testimony"  (Matt.  16:13-28,  Mark  8  and  9,  Luke 
9:18-27).  Problems:  Why  did  men  think  that  Christ  might  be  John 
the  Baptist  or  Elias  (Elijah)?  Suggest  a  probable  reason  why  Jesus 
did  not  want  His  disciples  to  proclaim  Him  as  the  Christ  at  that  time? 
Select  from  this  lesson  those  things  our  Saviour  encourages  and  dis- 
courages in  His  disciples. 

"Christ  Transfigured  Before  Three  Disciples"  (Matt.  17,  Mark  9 
and  Luke  9).  Problems:  Show  how  this  lesson  gave  the  disciples  a 
fuller  knowledge  that  Jesus  is  the  Christ.  List  the  purposes  of  the 
vision.  On  what  other  occasions  was  Christ  introduced  with  the  same 
words  as  used  at  the  Transfiguration?  Explain  why  the  disciples  were 
unable  to  cast  out  this  evil  spirit?  Discuss  also  Matt.  18,  to  complete 
or  cover  the  month. 

GOSPEL  DOCTRINE    (All  others  not  already  assigned). 

"The  Visions  of  Daniel"  (Dan.  8-12).  Helps:  Vision  of  the  ram 
and  he-goat — prophecy  of  the  seventy  weeks — vision  near  the  river 
Hidekel — prophecy   of  the  last  days. 

"The  Rebuilding  of  the  Temple"  (Isaiah  44,  45  and  48;  II.  Chron. 
26;  Ezra  1  to  4 ;  Nehemiah  7).  Helps:  Encouragements  to  God's 
people — prophecies  concerning  Cyrus — the  proclamation  of  Cyrus — 
charge  to  build  a  house  to  the  Lord — restoration  of  the  sacred  vessels 
— return  of  the  captives — renewal  of  sacrifices — foundation  of  the 
temple  laid — the   building  of  the  temple  hindered. 

MAORI   CLASS. 

RATAPU   TUATAHI 

Nga  poropiti  e  ora  ana  he  maha  nga  rau  tau  i  mua  atu  o  te 
whanautanga  o  te  Karaiti  e  whakaatu  tuturu  ana  mona  me  te  mahi 
nui  kua  wehea  nei  i  a  mana  e  mahi.  Enei  tangata  a  te  Atua  kua 
tukua  ra  i  roto  i  te  tirohanga  atu  a  nga  kanohi  poropiti,  kia  kite  i  nga 
mea  e  tupono  e  pa  ana  hoki  ki  te  mihana  a  te  Karaiti  i  te  whenua 
nei,  a  e  whakaatu  tuturu  mo  nga  whakaaturanga  mai.  Nga  whaka- 
aturanga  a  te  Karaiti  he  wairua  no  te  whakakitenga,  ina  kore  tana 
wairua  e  kore  rawa  tetahi  e  ahei  te  kereeme  tika  i  tona  rereketanga 
i  noho  ai  he  poropiti  na  te  Atua.  Te  takanga  o  Arama  i  pa  mai 
nei  he  pouri  nui  kia  ia,  i  hurihia  he  mea  koanga,  ina  hoki,  na  te  whaka- 
kitenga ka  mohio  ia  ki  te  tauira  o  te  hokonga  mai  ka  whakahaeretia 
e  te  Tama  a  te  Atua  i  roto  i  te  kikokiko.  Te  tangata  pono  a  Enoka 
i  whakaako  i  enei  mea  tika  ano,  i  whakaaturia  mai  nei  ki  a  ia  e  nga 
rangi.  Tenei  whakaaturanga  i  puta  ano  i  a  Mohi,  ia  Hopa,  ia  Rawiri, 
ia  Hakaraia,  ia  Ihaia  me  Mika.  Ko  taua  whakaaturanga  ra  ano  i 
meatia  e  Hoani  Kai-Iriiri,  ko  ia  nei  kua  kiia  e  te  Ariki  he  nuku  ake 
i  te  poropiti. 


Hurae,  1942  TE   KARERE  201 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  Ko  wai  ma  i  whakaatu  mo  te  Karaiti  me  tona  mahi? 

2.  He  aha  te  wairua  e  ahei  ana  kia  whiwhi  te  poropiti?      Ina  kore 
he  aha  ia? 

3.  He  aha  i  huri  ai  te  pouritanga  o  Arama  mo  te  takanga  hei  koa? 

RATAPU   TUARUA 

Mehemea  he  ruarua  to  tetahi  mo  te  tatunga  o  enei  poropititanga, 
keite  whakaaturanga  whakamutunga  a  Te  Karaiti  mo  ona  ano  taua 
poropititanga.  I  taua  ra  nui,  i  muri  tata  iho  i  Tona  aranga  mai,  i  a  ia 
e  haere  ana  kaore  i  mohiotia  ko  wai  e  te  tokorua  o  ana  akonga  e  haere 
tahi  nei  me  ia  i  te  huarahi  ki  Emauha,  i  whakaako  ai  ia  i  a  raua  ki 
nga  karaipiture  kua  tuhituhia  nei  mo  te  Tama  a  te  Atua.  "Timata 
atu  i  a  Mohi  me  nga  poropiti  katoa,  ka  whakamaramatia  atu  kia  raua 
nga  karaipiture  katoa  e  pa  ana  mo  ona."  I  etahi  haora  i  muri  tata 
iho  i  tena  mea  ka  whakakite  a  Ihu  i  a  ia  ki  te  tekau  ma  tahi  i 
Hiruharama.  Ka  whakamahia  e  Ia  o  ratou  hinengaro  "kia  mohio 
ai  ratou  ki  nga  karaipiture,  a  ka  mea  kia  ratou,  ko  te  mea  tenei  i 
tuhituhia,  ko  te  tikanga  mo  tenei,  ko  te  Karaiti  kia  whakamamaetia, 
kia  ara  ano  i  te  hunga  mate  i  te  toru  o  nga  ra,  i  roto  i  tenei  ahua.  e 
whakaatu  ana  e  whakatutuki  ana  i  a  i  te  tauira  kua  oti  ke  noatu  te 
whakarite  mai.  A  Pita,  tetahi  o  nga  hoa  tuturu  o  te  Karaiti  i  haere 
tahi  ai  i  te  ao  nei  e  mea  ana  mo  ona  ara  mo  te  Karaiti  "He  reme 
koha  kore,  poke  kore."  I  whakaritea  nei  i  mua  o  te  orokohanganga 
o  te  ao.  I  roto  ite  pukapuka  a  Paora  ki  nga  Romana  kua  meatia  a  te 
Karaiti  e  Paora  "Ko  ta  te  Atua  i  whakaatu  ai  i  mua  hei  whakamarie 
i  runga  i  te  whakapono,  he  mea  na  ona  toto,  kia  whakakitea  ai  tona 
tika,  i  te  mea  ka  whakapahemotia  nei  nga  hara  o  mua."  Ko  enei 
he  rarangi  torutoru  nei  he  meatanga  mai  i  roto  i  nga  whakaaturanga 
o  te  Paipera  mo  te  whakaritenga  i  a  te  Karaiti  i  mua  i  te  oroko  hanga- 
nga  o  te  ao.  E  ki  tonu  ana  te  kawenata  hou  me  te  mea  tawhito  i  nga 
whakaaturanga  pono  o  te  mahi  ma  te  Mihaia  kua  rite  noa  mai. 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  I  tehea   wa  i   whakaako   ai   a   Ihu   i  nga  akonga   tokorua? 

2.  He   aha   te   toputanga    o    enei   whakaaturanga    mo   Ihu? 

3.  Kimihia    he    patai. 

RATAPU  TUATORU 

K<>  nga  Poropiti  o  te  pukapuka  a  Moromona  e  ttiohiotia  ana  «■  haere 
tika  tonu  atu  ana  ta  ratou  whakaaturanga  mo  te  .Mihaia.     No  te  mea 

na    runga    i   tona    whakapono    i    tukua   ai    to   toina   0    Iarore    kia    kite    i    te 

Kai  Whakaora,  e  rua  tekau  ma  rua  ran  tan  i  mua  atu  o  to  waenga- 
muitanga  o  nga  wa   me  te  whakaatu   kia  ai   ia  ko  to  tangata  he  mea 

hanga  kia  cite  tonu  ki  t<>  !.•  Atua  ahua.  mo  to  whakaatu  mai  i  taua 
wa  ano  mo  ta  te  .Matua  tikanga  mo  te  Tama  kia  uiu  ki  to  kikokiko 
kia  noho  ki  runga  ki  te  whenua.     Tirohia  te  kupu  tika  atu  a  to  Kai- 

Hoko,    kua    oti    noa    atu    nei    ia    te    whakarite    hei    pera,    ki    tenoi    poropiti 
"Nana,    ko    ahau    (era    i    whakaritea    ra    no    te    Oroko    hanganga    I 
hoi   hoko   i   toku   Iwi.       Nana,   ko  ahau   a    Ihu    Karaiti.       Ko  ahau   te    Matin 
raua    ko    !»■    Tama.       I     POtO    i    a    au     ka    whai    marama    ai     nga    tangata 

katoa,  ho  mea  man  tonu,  ara  ko  te  hunga  e  whakapono  ana  ki  toku 
ingoa,  a  ka  riro  ratou   hei  tamariki  hei  tamahine  maku." 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  \'a  to  aha  i  kito  ai  te  teina  o  (arere  i  te  Kai  Whakaora.  ■  ,1,, 
tehea   w  a   i   tupono  ai? 

2.  El  pehea  ana  tana  whakaaturanga  mo  te  ahua  o  to    \ 
.;.    \o  toh,  a  wa  i  whakaritea  ai  to  Kai  Hoki  ki  tona   M  I 


202  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1942 

RATAPU   TUAWHA 

Na  Niwhai  i  tuhituhi  te  poropititanga  a  tona  papa  a  Rihai  mo 
te  wa  i  mea  ake  ka  puta  te  Tama  i  roto  i  te  kikokiko,  Tona  iriiringa, 
Tona  matenga  me  te  aranga  mai,  a  ko  tenei  whakapuakanga  poropiti- 
tanga e  whakatuturu  ana  i  te  takiwa  o  te  whanautanga  o  te  Kai  Whaka- 
ora — e  600  tau  i  muri  mai  o  te  mahuetanga  atu  o  Hiruharama  ia  Rihai. 
E  whakaaturia  ana  ano  te  mihana  a  Hoani  Kai-Iriiri  tae  noa  hoki  ki  te 
whakaingoatanga  o  te  wahi  e  iriiri  ai.  I  muri  tata  iho  o  te  wa  o  te 
whakakitenga  kia  Rihai,  i  whakakitea  aua  mea  ano  kia  Niwhai  e  te 
Wairua,  me  nga  mea  maha  atu,  ko  etahi  kua  oti  e  ia  te  tuhituhi,  ko 
te  nuinga  kaore  ia  i  tukua  kia  tuhituhia,  no  te  mea  ko  tetahi  atu,  te 
Apotoro  a  Hoani,  kua  whakaritea  kia  whakatakoto  i  aua  mea  ki  roto 
ki  tetahi  pukapuka,  he  wahi  hoki  no  te  Paipera,  engari  i  roto  i  tetahi 
wahi  o  te  whakaaturanga  o  te  whakakitenga  ki  a  ia,  ka  mohio  tatou  i 
kite  ia  i  Nahareta,  i  a  Meri  te  wahine,  tuatahi  ko  ia  anake,  a  muri  tata 
iho  he  tamaiti  i  roto  i  ona  ringaringa;  a  ka  whakaaturia  mai  e  te  Kai 
Whakakite  mai  i  te  kitenga  ko  te  tamaiti  ko  te  Reme  a  te  Atua,  te 
Tama  a  te  Matua  ora  tonu.  Ka  kite  ano  a  Niwhai  i  te  Tama  e  minita 
ana  i  waenganui  i  nga  tamaraki  a  te  tangata,  e  kauwhau  ana  i  te  kupu 
e  whakaora  turoro  ana  me  te  mahi  i  te  maha  o  nga  merekara  whaka- 
miharo ;  i  kite  ia  i  a  Hoani  te  poropiti  o  te  koraha  e  haere  ana  i  mua 
ia  Ia,  i  kite  ia  i  te  Kai  Whakaora  e  iriiria  ana  e  Hoani,  me  te  Wairua 
Tapu  e  heke  iho  ana  ki  runga  ki  a  Ia  i  runga  i  te  tohu  e  kitea  atu 
ana,  o  te  kukupa.  Ka  kite  ano  ia  ka  poropiti  hoki  tera  tekau  ma  rua 
nga  apotoro  ka  aru  i  te  Kai  Whakaora  i  roto  i  tona  mahi  minita,  ka 
tangohia  te  Tama  e  te  tangata  a  ka  whakawakia,  a  te  mutunga  iho  ka 
whakamatea.  Ka  kitea  atu  e  ia  te  tuponotanga  o  nga  mea  kei  te  takoto 
mai  i  ko  atu  o  te  ripekatanga.  I  kitea  atu  e  Niwhai  te  pakanga  o 
te  ao  ki  nga  apotoro  a  te  Reme  me  te  whiwhinga  ki  te  wikitoria  whaka- 
mutunga   o   ta  te   Atua   mahi. 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  He   aha  nga  mea  i  tuhia   e  Niwhai   o  te  poropititanga  a  tona 
napa? 

2.  He  aha  i  kore  ai  a  Niwhai  e  tukua  kia  tuhi  i  etahi  o  nga  whaka- 
kitenga? 

3.  He  aha  te  mea  i  kitea  e  Niwhai  mo  te  taha  ki  nga  apotoro? 


Mutual  Improvement  Association 

M.I.A.  THEME  1942 

SECOND    TUESDAY: 

FIRST   AID    (All    Classes) 

Review    of    Previous    Lessons. 

1.  What  is  a  fracture? 

2.  What   is   a  simple   fracture?   a   compound   fracture? 

3.  What  is  the  danger  of  improper  handling  of  a  simple  fracture? 
a    compound    fracture? 

4.  What  is  the  proper  way  of  transporting  a  patient  with  a  frac- 
tured leg,  fractured  spine   or  other  serious  injury? 

5.  Describe  three  stretchers  which  might  be  made  for  transport- 
ing  patients. 

6.  Review  briefly  the  different  carries  learned  in  last  lesson. 


Hurae,  1942  TE   KARERE  203 

GERMS 
There  are  three  kinds  of  germs  important  in  first  aid. 

1.  Those  that  cause  infection  with  pus  formation. 

2.  Those  that  get  into  the  bloodstream  and  cause  blood  poisoning. 

3.  Those  that  cause  lockjaw  or  tetanus. 

Germs  may  be  killed  by  use  of  disinfectants.  Tincture  of  iodine — 
SI  per  cent,  solution  is  the  disinfectant  recommended  by  the  American 
Red  Cross.  Have  your  druggist  dilute  the  regular  iodine  sold  at  drug 
stores,  one-half  with  rubbing  alcohol,  or  do  so  yourself.  This  is  the 
best  strength  to  use  as  it  is  practically  as  effective  as  the  stronger  and 
not  nearly  so  likely  to  blister  the  tender  tissues. 

WOUNDS 
A  wound  is  a  break  in  the  skin.      There  are  three  kinds  of  wounds : 

1.  Incised   wounds — made  from   cutting  of   a  knife,  glass,   etc. — 
clean  cut  wounds. 

2.  Lacerated  or  torn  wounds,  made  by  blunt  instruments. 

3.  Punctured  wounds — commonly  caused  by  nails,   ends  of  wire, 
bullets,  etc. 

There  are  also  wounds  which  may  be  classified  as  special  wounds 
those  which  involve  special  danger  and  reauire  special  treatment,  viz., 
infected  wounds,  wounds  from  animal  bites  (chiefly  dog  and  cat), 
snake  bites,  those  in  which  foreign  bodies  remain. 

All  open  wounds  are  subject  to  infection  as  the  surface  of  the 
skin,  the  hands,  clothing  and  everything  handled  are  covered  with 
germs.  It  must  be  remembered  that  thousands  of  germs  may  enter 
the  smallest  wound  and  thus  endanger  infection.  It  is  important, 
therefore,  that  a  first  aider  know  how  properly  to  treat  wounds.  All 
wounds  should  be  treated  and  dressed  promptly  to  keep  out  infection. 
Clean  cuts  usually  bleed  freely,  which  is  nature's  way  of  washing  out 
the  germs  that  may  have  entered  the  wound  from  the   instrument. 

Never  wash  a  wound  with  water.  You  would  wash  germs  back 
into  the  wound.  Cleanse  wound  with  iodine.  Take  a  swab  (cotton 
twisted  on  toothpick,  match,  etc.),  gauze  or  glass  tube  found  in  most 
iodine  bottles.  Place  swab  directly  in  wound  and  wipe  away  from 
the  wound,  thus  taking  the  germs  with  it.  Never  wipe  toward  wound. 
Dip  in  the  bottle  each  time  before  touching  the  wound  thus  killing 
the  germs.  Let  iodine  dry  thoroughly  before  dressing  wound,  to  avoid 
blistering. 

Punctured  wounds  and  lacerated  wounds  will  not  hired  as  freely 
as  incised  wounds.  In  this  case  it  is  well  to  squeeze  helow  the  wound 
gently  and  encourage  bleeding.  This  as  stated  will  wash  out  some 
germs.  Apply  the  half-strength  iodine  putting  it  well  into  the 
wound,  and  let  dry  thoroughly  before  bandaging.  All  coverings  of 
wounds  should  be  thoroughly  sterile  and  should  he  applied  firmly  ><> 
that  they  will  not  slip,  rubbing  on  dirty  skin  thus  picking  up  germs  and 
carrying  them   hack   into  the   wound. 

'la      leader,  or  preferably  a  doctor,  should  demonstrate  the  pro- 
of t real ing  wounds. 

tandard  first   aid  classes,  with  a  trained  instructor  in 
aging  of  wounds  on  all  parts  of  tin-  body  would  b< 
1  annol   he  explained  here,  hut   we  feel  sufficient  can  ho  given  to 

help  out-  Gleaner  girl!    understand  something  of  treatment  of  wounds. 

l.    Treat  with  iodine  as  described  above. 

i.    Apply  Bterile  gauze  and  bandage  firmly  so  that   there  will  be 
no  ilippinj  nit  a  doct or  and  in  ca 

punctured  wound    it  I    very  important  to  call  a  physician, 


204  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  194> 

By  sterile  gauze  we  mean,  gauze  that  comes  out  of  tightly  sealed 
packages  without  having  been  touched  or  handled.  That  portion  going 
next  to  the  wound  must  not  touch  anything  except  the  wound.  In 
the  absence  of  sterile  gauze  a  folded  clean  handkerchief  turned,  plac- 
ing inside  next  to  the  wound  may  be  used.  To  iron  a  clean  piece  of 
cloth  or  scorch  it  lightly  with  a  match  will  sterilize  it.  Adhesive  tape 
may  be  used  to  hold  sterile  gauze  in  place,  but  never  put  adhesive  tape 
next  to  a  wound.  In  regular  first  aid  work  adhesive  tape  is  not  used 
as  we  learn  to  secure  sterile  dressings  with  the  aid  of  bandages.  For 
small  cuts,  such  as  one  continually  receives  on  the  fingers  and  hands, 
small  bandages  called  "Bandaid"  are  excellent.  These  can  be  pur- 
chased at  any  drug  store  and  every  household  should  keep  them  for 
emergencies.      You  will  find  them  invaluable. 

INFECTED   WOUNDS 

In  cases  of  large  wounds  or  cases  of  infection,  consult  a  physician 
at  once.  Every  effort  should  be  made  to  prevent  infection,  but  in 
some  cases  it  sets  in  rapidly,  and  when  it  gets  into  the  bloodstream  may 
cause  death  in  a  very  short  time  by  blood  poisoning.  Infected  wounds 
are  neglected  wounds;  we  should  take  every  precaution,  therefore,  to 
guard  against  infection. 

In  case  we  should  be  called  upon  to  treat  infected  wounds,  how- 
ever, we  would  find  the  following  symptoms:  swelling,  heat,  redness, 
tenderness  on  pressure,  severe  pain,  nus,  usually  not  visible,  and  there 
may  be  a  red  streak  up  the  limb,  which  indicates  that  the  poison  is 
travelling  in  the  bloodstream  toward  the  heart. 

1.  Call  a  doctor  immediately. 

2.  In   the   meantime,   place   patient   in   comfortable   position. 

3.  Elevate  limb. 

4.  Treat  with  hot  applications.  To  a  quart  of  water  add  about 
three  tablespoonfuls  of  ordinary  salt,  or  twice  this  amount  of  Epsom 
salts.  Use  as  hot  as  is  comfortable.  Place  the  infected  part  directly 
in  the  solution  if  possible  and  bathe  it.  If  this  isn't  possible,  use  hot 
packs  with  the  same  solution.  Apply  for  one  hour  continuously;  and 
repeat  every  six  hours  until  doctor  can  be  secured.  Remember  this 
is  a  temporary  measure  and  a  physician's  services  should  be  secured 
at  once. 

PUNCTURED   WOUNDS 

These  should  always  receive  the  attention  of  a  physician  because 
punctured  wounds  do  not  bleed  freely,  they  are  difficult  to  cleanse 
and  get  antiseptic  well  into  the  wound;  air  cannot  get  to  the  wound 
and  lack  of  air  favours  the  growth  of  a  very  dangerous  germ  that 
causes  tetanus  or  lock-jaw. 

The  tetanus  or  lock-jaw  germ  normally  lives  in  the  large  intes- 
tine of  a  horse  or  other  animals.  Hence  it  is  distributed  everywhere 
that  horse  manure  is  present,  on  roads  and  streets,  on  lawns  and 
gardens,  in  fields,  and  wherever  fertilizer  is  used;  it  is  carried  into 
buildings  of  all  sorts  on  shoes,  so  these  germs  may  be  present  in  large 
quantities  everywhere.  "This  germ  is  peculiar  in  that  when  thrown  in 
unfavourable  surroundings,  it  assumes  what  is  known  as  a  "spore" 
form  and  can  lie  out  in  the  rain,  heat  and  cold  for  months.  But 
as  soon  as  it  is  once  more  placed  in  favourable  surroundings,  for 
example,  in  a  punctured  wound,  it  begins  to  grow  rapidly."  Lock-jaw 
can  be  prevented  by  proper  treatment,  but  almost  never  cured  when 
once  it  develops.  It  is  therefore  important  to  consult  a  physician 
in  case  of  punctured  wounds.  They  may  be  caused  by  nails,  wires, 
bullets,  and  other  blunt  instruments.  First  aid  treatment  would  con- 
sist of  encouraging  bleeding,  and  then  working  iodine  well  down  into 
the  wound.      Call  a  doctor.      In  addition  to  treating  the  wound  itself, 


Hurae,  1942  TE    KARERE  205 

the  physician  will  often  give  tetanus  antitoxin  which  is  a  most  effective 
preventative.  "In  the  World  War,  lock-jaw  very  rarely  developed 
in  cases  given  antitoxin,  whereas  it  had  been  one  of  the  chief  causes 
of  death  among  the  wounded  in  all  previous  wars." 


BOY   SCOUTS'    DEPARTMENT 

FIRST   TUESDAY: 

Period  C. — Give  a  short  yarn  on  "Observation."  Tell  or  read  (to 
tell  is  always,  of  course,  much  preferable)  the  story  of  Kim.  Then, 
as  a  preparation  for  the  observation  test,  if  you  are  to  take  this  for 
Second  Class,  collect  a  few  articles — say  about  fifteen — on  a  table,  and 
play  Kim's  Game.  Start  with  a  small  number  of  objects  to  make 
the  game  easier.  Regarding  this  portion  of  the  test,  the  rules  make 
it  optional  for  a  Scout  to  follow  a  track,  observe  shop  windows,  or 
show  proficiency  in  "Kim's  Game."  In  a  Troop  of  any  size,  the  first 
two  are  often  impracticable,  so  that  "Kim's  Game"  is  usually  the  test 
adopted.  If  time  permits,  repeat  the  game  once  or  twice,  changing 
as  many  articles  as  possible,  and  increasing  the  number  up  to  about 
thirty  or  so. 

Fall  in  and  dismiss  as  usual,  and  follow  with  the  Court  of  Honour. 

By  now,  the  various  Patrols  will,  in  all  probability,  have  provided 
themselves  with  lockers,  etc.,  and,  with  a  little  encouragement,  will 
add  home-made  splints  and  bandages  to  their  outfits.  It  is  probable, 
too,  that  you  have  been  able  to  get  a  little  financial  aid.  Scouts  are, 
of  course,  forbidden  to  beg,  and  Scout  Officers  should  also  retrain 
from  any  form  of  touting  for  public  subscriptions.  There  are  in  most 
places,  however,  those  who  are  willing  to  subscribe  privately  to  the 
funds  of  the  Troop  if  it  has  not  been  possible  to  raise  funds  by  a 
Scout  concert  or  something  of  the  kind.  In  any  case,  an  effort  should  . 
be  made  to  start  a  Troop  library  certainly  not  later  than  this  stage. 
An  English  work  on  Troop  management  advises,  "Buy  books,  not 
bugles.  A  bugle  disturbs  the  neighbourhood — a  book  doesn't."  At 
all  events,  a  Troop  library  is  always  well  patronised.  Rummage  among 
your  own  bookshelves,  and  those  of  your  long-suffering  friends  for 
some  old  boys'  adventure  yarns,  and  invite  the  boys  to  bring  any  they 
can  get  from  their  parents  or  friends.  These  must,  of  course,  be  sub- 
mitted to  you  for  approval.  Buy  out  of  Troop  funds  a  few  good 
Scouting  stories  and  readable  works  on  camping,  pioneering,  treking, 
etc.  Finally,  get  the  boys  to  manufacture  bookshelves,  appoint  your 
Assistant  or  one  of  the   Leaders   Librarian,   catalogue  the   books  and 

open  a  register,  and  the  thing  is  done.  You  have  the  nucleus  o(  a 
library    which   can    be   added    to    from    time   to   time,   and    will    always    be 

popular, 

A    section    for    Patrol    Leaders   only,   of   hooks   on   certain    phases   ^\' 

Scouting  work,  is  usually  well  worth  while.  The  Leaders  are  enabled 
to  advance  their  knowledge,  and  are  accorded  another  privilege  which 
helps  them  to  value  their  positions. 

THIRD    TUESDAY: 

Fall  in  and  Roll  Call,  and  then  let  each  Leader  practise  his  I'atrol 
for  a  few  minutes  in  "Lours  Right"  and  "Lours  Lett."  first  at  the 
halt ,    and    linall\    on    t  he    march. 

Period    B.     Patrol   Leader    take  over  the   Intermediate  ("lass  for 

Tenderfoot    work,   afl  done   on    the  Third    Might,        With    the    S< 

the  tifth,  sixth  and  seventh  circles  ol  the  Semaphore  Alphabet,  using 
the  same  method  as  before.     The  letteri  to  he  taken  down  in  the  hook- 


206  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1942 

are:  Fifth  circle:  Numerical  sign,  J  and  V;  sixth  circle,  W  and  X; 
seventh  circle,  Z.  In  teaching  the  fifth  circle,  explain  the  uses  of 
the  Numerical  Sign  and  of  J  (which  is  also,  of  course,  the  Alphabetical 
Sign).  There  is  no  need  as  yet  to  linger  over  the  details,  but  a  simple 
explanation  must  be  given.  Revise  the  knowledge  of  the  whole  alpha- 
bet by  means  of  letters  chosen  at  random. 

Next  draw  the  eight-pointed  compass  star  again,  and  let  the  boys 
name  each  point  to  you.  Write  in  the  names  as  they  give  them.  Now 
draw  eight  more  points  between  those  you  already  have,  and  write 
in  the  names,  so  that  the  sixteen  points  read  round  the  star  as  follows: 
N.,  N.N.E.,  N.E.,  E.N.E.,  E.,  E.S.E.,  S.E.,  S.S.E.,  S.,  S.S.W.,  S.W., 
W.S.W.,  W.,  W.N.W.,  N.W.,  and  N.N.W.  It  will  not  be  difficult  for 
the  boys  to  remember  these  if  a  simple  system  is  pointed  out  to  them. 
Thus,  if  they  have  difficulty  in  naming  the  point  between  S.E.  and  E., 
for  instance,  they  should  consider  its  relationship  to  the  nearest  "half- 
cardinal"  ooint,  viz.,  S.E.  On  which  side  of  S.E.  is  the  point  in  ques- 
tion— the  East  or  the  South?  Obviously,  it  is  East  of  S.E.,  and,  there- 
fore, its  title  is  East-south-east.  Later,  when  they  have  mastered  the 
positions  of  the  various  points,  they  should  be  encouraged  to  "box 
the  compass"  in  nautical  style,  by  repeating  the  names  in  order,  com- 
mencing from  the  North,  and  working  through  East  to  South,  and 
back  through   West  to   North   again. 

FOURTH   TUESDAY: 

When  the  Scouts  have  copied  the  additional  points  into  the  ever- 
ready  note  books,  proceed  to  First  Aid  work.  Let  it  be  noted  here, 
however,  that  some  boys,  who  are  in  possession  of  Scouting  books, 
may  want  to  beg  off  this  writing  down  business,  but  do  not  permit  it. 
The  very  act  of  writing  the  thing  down  is  a  very  strong  aid  to  the 
memorising  of  it,  and  will  tend  to  clinch  it  in  the  boy's  mind  for  all 
time.  Of  course,  such  a  reason  would  not  appeal  to  your  Scouts,  but 
they  can  be  advised  to  keep  the  note  books  up  to  date  in  order  that 
'they  may  always  have  them  for  reference  on  any  Scouting  point  that 
may  crop  up. 

First  Aid  work  will  comprise  the  treatment  of  a  fractured  upper 
arm.  Points  to  be  noted  are:  first,  that  anything  stiff,  strong  and 
smooth  will  do  for  a  splint.  If  a  Scout  has  not  the  right  thing  handy 
he  makes  something  else  do.  Next,  the  bandages  are  to  be  applied 
above  and  below  the  break,  respectively;  third,  reef  knots  only  must 
be  used,  and  knots  must  be  tied  on  the  splints,  to  avoid  hurting  the 
patient.  Finally,  the  small  arm  sling  is  used,  to  support  the  hand  with- 
out  lifting  the   elbow. 

Now  let  the  boys  practise  on  one  another.  Examine  their  work 
to  see  that  they  have  done  it  correctly  (and  look  out  for  "granny" 
knots).  Check  any  ungentle  handling,  making  each  Scout  act  as 
nearly  as  possible  as  he  would  in  dealing  with  a  genuine  injury. 

Period  C. — In  preparation  for  the  Second  Class  Test,  and  with 
the  Ninth  Scout  Law  as  a  basis,  give  a  short  yarn  on  "Thrift,"  enlarg- 
ing on  the  advantages  of  saving.  For  the  benefit  of  those  who  have 
not  saved  the  necessary  amount  for  the  Test,  explain  the  method  of 
opening  a  Savings  Bank  Account.  If  necessary,  arrange  a  time  when 
you  can  go  with  your  boys  and  open  an  account  for  them.  Stress  the 
point  that  the  idea  is  not  for  the  Scout  to  have  a  shilling  in  his  pocket; 
it  must  be  saved,  i.e.,  in  the  Savings  Bank. 

To  finish  the  evening,  play  the  game  "Ankle  Tapping,"  which  is 
played  in  this  wise:  Two  Scouts,  taking  their  staves  in  their  hands, 
face  each  other,  and  endeavour  to  tap  each  other  anywhere  below  the 
knee,  at  the  same  time  using  the  staff  to  ward  off  the  opponent's 
weapon.  To  prevent  this  game  becoming  rough,  make  it  a  penalty  in- 
volving disqualification  for  anyone  to  raise  the  point  of  the  staff  above 


Hurae,  1942  TE   KARERE  207 

the  knee.      A  few  minutes  of  this  will  suffice,   after  which  the  Troop 
will  fall   in   and   dismiss. 

Hold  your  Leader's  Korero,  and  discuss,  as  always,  the  work  for 
next  evening. 


BEE-HIVE    DEPARTMENT 

FIRST  TUESDAY: 

CELL-FILLING 

The  activity  of  a  Bee-Hive  girl  as  a  Builder  in  the  Hive  and  as  a 
Gatherer  of  Honey  consists  of  the  filling  of  Cells.  As  a  bee  goes  out 
into  the  fields  of  flowers  to  gather  honey,  which  it  brings  back  and 
stores  in  cells  of  the  hive,  so  a  Bee-Hive  girl  goes  into  the  fields  of 
life,  and  gathers  happy  experiences  and  thus  also  fills  Cells.  Your 
Handbook  lists  hundreds  of  Cells  from  which  you  may  choose  those 
which  you  feel  will  give  you  the  most  development.  The  purpose  of 
Bee-Hive  is  to  stimulate  and  help  you  to  do  new,  interesting,  and  worth- 
while things;  to  make  your  girlhood  richer  than  it  otherwise  would  be. 
Bee-Hive  awards  should  be  symbols  of  new  accomplishments  in  your 
life.  You  will  begin  your  Cell-building  as  soon  as  you  have  completed 
your  Trial  Flights  and  become  a  Builder  in  the  Hive,  or  a  Gatherer  of 
Honey. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  Cells,  Foundation  Cells  and  Structural 
Cells.  There  are  nine  Foundation  Cells  (one  in  each  field  and  two 
general  ones)  for  the  Rank  of  Builder  in  the  Hive  and  for  the  Rank 
of  Gatherer  of  Honey.  To  complete  these  two  Ranks  you  will  fill 
the  nine  Foundation  Cells  and  also  twenty-seven  Structural  Cells  for 
each  Rank,  which  you  may  select  from  the  seven  Fields,  selecting  at 
least  two   in   each   Field. 

SEALS 

When  a  cell  is  filled  with  honey,  the  bees  seal  it  over  with  wax. 
In  the  Bee-Hive  Girls'  Organization  a  Seal  is  awarded  to  Builder-  in 
the  Hive  and  Gatherers  of  Honey  for  each  Cell  filled.  These  Seals 
may  be  awarded  in  Swarm  meetings  as  soon  as  earned,  or  on  special 
occasions.  As  soon  as  you  receive  a  Seal,  place  it  in  your  Handbook 
on  the  record  page  of  the  Field  in  which  you  have  filled  the  Cell;  or, 
if  you  prefer,  you  may  place  it  in  your  Honey-Comb.  Write  opposite 
the  Seal,  or  on  it,  the  number  of  the  Cell  which  you  have  tilled,  and 
the  date. 

THIRD    TUESDAY: 

BEE-LINES 

Guardians    of    the    Treasure    do    not     receive    Seals    hut     Bee-Lines 

in  recognition  of  their  activities.     A   bee-line  Is  the  shortest   line  be* 

tweeu   two    points.       In    the    lice  Hive   Girls'    Organisation    it    is  the   most 

direct  way  to  definite  accomplishment.  The  work  for  this  highest 
Rank   consists  of   making   Bee  Lines.     Fourteen   are   required   for  the 

Completion    of    the    Rank.       There    are    seven    Foundation    Bce-Linr»,    one 

in  each  Field,  which  you  will  receive  if  you  attend  at  least  three 
regular  Swarm  meetings  each  month  ami  take  p.-ut  in  the  activities 
of  those  evenings.     ¥ou  may  choose  your  seven  structural  Bee-Liae* 

from    those    provided    in    the   seven    Fields.       There    need    not    he    a    St  rue 

tural   Bee  Line   from  each  Field.     The   Bee  Line  awards  are  coloured 

to  represent  the  VarioUl  Fields  and  are  to  he  placed  on  your  Hand, 
t  he   official    uniform. 


208  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1942 

PRIMARY 

FIRST   WEEK 

Lesson    Approach: 

Let  individual  children  choose  a  Biblical  picture  and  tell  the  story 
it  suggests;  this  need  take  only  a  few  minutes.  Do  not  be  disturbed 
if  stories  are  very  brief.  Comment  favourably  on  the  children's  efforts. 
They  will  enjoy  this  activity  and  it  will  help  you  discover  how  well 
you  impress  your  lessons. 

AT  THE  SEA  OF  GALILEE 

(John   21:  1-14) 

To-day  we  are  going  to  hear  another  story  about  Jesus  before  He 
went  back  to  heaven.  Seven  disciples  of  Christ  were  together  one 
evening  on  the  shore  of  the  sea  of  Tiberias,  Galilee.  They  were  Peter, 
Thomas,  Nathaniel,  James,  John  and  two  others.  Peter  said  to  his 
fellow-disciples:  "I  go  fishing,"  and  the  others  replied,  "We  also  go 
with  you."  Without  delay  they  went  into  the  boat  and  put  off.  Night 
is  the  best  time  for  fishing,  but  all  night  they  caught  nothing.  Every 
time  they  cast  the  net  over  the  side  of  the  boat  and  drew  it  in,  it 
was  empty.  They  did  not  catch  a  single  fish.  When  early  morning 
came,  disappointed,  discouraged,  they  drew  near  the  land.  They  saw 
in  the  faint  light  of  dawn  a  man  standing  on  the  shore.  He  seemed 
to  be  waiting  for  them.  He  hailed  them  and  asked:  "Have  you  any 
meat?"  They  replied  "No."  It  was  Jesus  who  spoke  to  them,  but  the 
disciples  knew  not  that  it  was  He.  He  called  to  them  again,  saying, 
"Cast  the  net  on  the  right  side  of  the  boat  and  ye  shall  find."  They 
obeyed,  and  in  a  moment  the  net  was  so  full  of  fish  they  were  scarcely 
able  to  haul  in  the  net. 

At  once  they  remembered  that  other  remarkable  draught  of  fishes 
when  Jesus  was  with  them.  Then  John,  whom  Jesus  loved,  whispered 
to  Peter,  "It  is  the  Lord." 

Peter  answered  nothing,  but  hastily  fastened  his  fisher's  coat 
around  him  and  sprang  into  the  sea  and  swam  to  shore.  He  wanted 
to  be  the  first  to  greet  Jesus. 

The  boat  was  only  a  short  distance  from  land.  In  a  few  minutes 
all  the  disciples  were  with  their  Lord. 

On  the  shore  they  saw  a  fire  of  coals,  with  fish  broiling  on  it,  and 
some  bread  lying  near.  Jesus  said,  "Bring  of  the  fish  ye  have  now 
caught."  Instantly  Peter  started  up,  and  with  his  strong  arm  helped 
drag  the  net  ashore.  When  counted,  they  found  that  there  were  a 
hundred  and  fifty-three  great  fishes  in  it.  "And  for  all  there  were  so 
many,  yet  was  not  the  net  broken." 

Then  Jesus  said,  "Come  and  dine."  He  divided  and  passed  the 
bread   and  fish  to   each. 

When  the  meal  was  finished,  Jesus  talked  to  them.  He  told  them 
what  He  wanted  them  to  do,  after  He  had  left  them.  He  told  them 
to  love  one  another  and  help  one  another. 

This  was  the  third  time  Jesus  showed  Himself  to  His  disciples,  after 
that  He  was  risen  from  the  dead." 

JESUS'  LAST  MESSAGE  AND  THE  ASCENSION 

Once  more  Jesus  came  to  His  disciples  in  Jerusalem.  He  knew 
that  He  soon  must  leave  them.  He  told  them  the  same  things  many 
times.  Once  more  He  said  to  them,  "Go.  ye  into  all  the  world  and 
preach  the  gospel  to  every  creature."  That  meant  that  they  were  to 
go  everywhere.  They  were  to  tell  all  people  about  Jesus  and  what 
good  things  He  taught.  He  promised  the  disciples  He  would  be  with 
them  always,   even  unto  the  end  of  the  world. 


Hurae,  1942  TE   KARERE  209 

As  He  talked  to  them  He  led  them  "as  far  as  to  Bethany."  "Then 
He  lifted  up  His  hands,  and  blessed  them;  and  while  He  yet  spake,  He 
rose  from  their  midst,  and  they  looked  upon  Him  until  a  cloud  received 
Him   out   of   sight." 

It  is  not  strange  that  they  could  not  look  away  from  the  sky  and 
continued  to  gaze  with  the  hope  that  they  might  have  one  more 
glimpse  of  Him  who  had  so  blessed  them.  While  they  stood  gazing  up- 
ward, two  personages  clothed  in  white  spoke  this  glorious  promise: 
"Ye  men  of  Galilee,  why  stand  ye  gazing  up  into  heaven?  This  same 
•Jesus,  which  is  taken  up  from  you  into  heaven,  shall  so  come  in  like 
manner  as  ye  have   seen   Him  go   into   heaven." 

After  praying  in  silence  the  Apostles  returned  with  great  joy 
to  Jerusalem,  there  to  await  the  coming  of  the  Comforter  (explain) 
which  Jesus  had  promised  them.  Then  they  would  be  ready  to  do  the 
work   He   had   given   them. 

SECOND   WEEK 
FAMOUS   PICTURES   YOU   WANT    TO    KNOW 

Lesson    Approach: 

Talk  with  the  children  about  people  who  paint  pictures.  What 
are  they  called?  Some  people  write  stories  for  our  enjoyment;  others 
write  poems  that  make  us  happy.  Artists  tell  us  stories  and  poems 
in  their  paintings.  Tell  about  art  galleries  where  famous  paintings 
are  kept.  Who  has  been  to  an  art  gallery?  If  you  have  a  copy  of  a 
famous  painting  show  it  with  brief  comment.  Tell  how  great  paintings 
give  joy  to  many  people. 

Lesson    Story: 

This  interesting  story  of  the  "Madonna  of  the  Chair"  is  a  legend. 
The  story  is  called  a  legend  because  no  one  is  sure  that  it  is  true. 

"Italy  is  a  very  mountainous  country.  In  the  hills  of  that  coun- 
try, nearly  five  hundred  years  ago  lived  Father  Bernado.  He  was 
called  a  hermit,  for  he  lived  by  himself  in  a  small  cottage  close  by 
a  great  oak  tree.  Though  he  had  never  married  and  had  children  of 
his  own,  he  used  to  say  that  he  had  two  daughters.  One  was  Mary. 
the  beautiful  daughter  of  a  neighbouring  vine-dresser,  and  the  other 
was  the  grand  old  oak  tree  that  provided  shade  around  his  little  home. 
Mary  would  visit  him  frequently,  often  bringing  food  and  fruit.  They 
enjoyed  talking  together.  When  Mary  was  not  with  him,  he  would 
talk  to  the  oak  tree  as  if  it  were  a  person,  and  would  tenderly  care 
for   it   as  a    lather   cares    for   a   child.      The   tree    had    been    standing    for 

centuries.     M    was    beginning   to   decay,    and    ofttimea   the   woodsmen 

wished  to  cut  it  down  hut  Father  Bernado  would  not  allow  them  to 
do  BO. 

"It  was  well   for  him  that    it    had   not   been   cut   down   for  one  spring 

after  an   unusually   severe   winter,   when   the   snow   in   the   mountains 

began    to    melt,    ton-cuts    of    water    poured    down    the    mountain    side-. 

They  destroyed  everything  in  then-  path.  Father  Bernado'a  hut  was 
carried  away,  hut  he  wai  able  to  save  himself  hy  climbing  into  the 
branches   of   the    protecting   oak.     There    Mary    found    him    when   she 

came  after  the  flood.  He  was  very  weak  from  exposure  and  from  lack 
<>f    food.       She    took    him    to    her    home    and    cared    foe    hiui    until    he    was 

able  t"  return  to  hi-  home  which  his  friendly  neighbours  rebuilt.  In 
his  prayers,  he  often  prayed  that  his  two  daughtei  .  Wtarj  and  the 
oak,  might   !»<•  blessed  and  remembered  for  having  saved  his  life. 

"The    legend    goes   on    t<,    relate   that    \ears   later    M.n>    married   and 

had  two  strong  and  beautiful    on  .     The  old  oak  tree  had  at  last  been 

cut   down  and  made  mi'  ither.     <>ne  day  she  was 

itting  as  she  held  the  younger  boy,     The  other  boj   had  made  a  rude 

cross  out  of  stick    and  wa     tanding  near  her.     Tin    we  can    ..'in  the 

picture    for    it     wa       in    t     at     that     moment    that     Kaohael    had      eeu    thorn. 


210  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  1942 

It  was  said  that  he  was  walking  in  the  country.  Because  of  his  love 
for  painting  Madonnas  he  was  ever  watchful  for  such  scenes.  So  im- 
pressed was  he  with  this  picture  made  by  the  mother  and  two  children 
which  he  saw  before  him  that  he  wished  to  sketch  them  at  once.  He 
had  no  canvas  upon  which  to  work.  He  seized  the  smooth  round  oak 
cover  of  a  cask,  perhaps  made  from  Father  Bernardo's  oak,  and  used 
that  as  the  surface  upon  which  to  draw  the  picture.  When  he  returned 
to  his  studio  he  transferred  the  sketch  to  a  canvas  and  painted  upon 
it,  but  still  kept  the  circular  shape  of  the  original. 

THIRD  WEEK 

Objective: 

To  interest  the  children  in  the  homes  of  birds  of  their  community 
and  help  them  to  realize  their  debt  and  responsibility  toward  birds. 
Suggestion   to   Teachers: 

Take  a  walk  with  the  children  in  the  neighbourhood  if  it  is  pos- 
sible and  find  some  of  the  nests  and  birds,  then  bring  one  to  class.    Find 
out   how   many   birds  the   children   can   name    and   describe   them   and 
their  habits. 
Story: 

If  your  group  is  small  it  may  be  that  you  will  have  time  for  this 
story  which  was  told  by  Harrison  R.  Merrill,  a  great  lover  of  birds  and 
outdoor  life. 

OUR    NEIGHBOURS 
I  came  home  from  school  one  day,  long,  long  ago  very  warm  and 
tired.      We   lived   then   about   half   a   mile   from   the   schoolhouse,    and 
many  times  we  used  to  make  our  homecoming  a  sort  of  cross-country 
run. 

I  was  perched  on  the  doorstep  wiping  my  wet  face  with  the  crown 
of  my  old  felt  hat  when  Mother  came  upon  the  porch.  She  had  her 
arms  full  of  clean  clothes  which  she  had  just  taken  from  the  line. 

''Hello,"  she  said,  smiling  down  at  me,   "you  seem  to  be  warm." 
"I   am!"    I   declared,   stoutly.      "I   ran   all  the   way  to-day." 
"I  have  some  good  news  for  you,"  Mother  said.      "We  have  some 
new  neighbours;  they  came  to-day." 

"Neighbours?"    I    questioned.      "Who?" 

"Wait  a  minute  and  I'll  introduce  you  to  them,"  she  said,  giggling 
a  little  just  as  Mother  always  did  when  she  had  some  surprise  for  any 
of  us.      "They  seem  to  be  very  nice  people." 

She  passed  into  the  house  and  laid  the  clothes  on  the  table,  then 
she  returned  to  the  porch. 

"Come  on,"  she  said,  "I  want  you  to  like  these  people.  If  you  like 
them,   I'm  sure  they'll  like  you." 

She  led  me  around  the  corner  of  the  house  to  the  big  old  Balm 
of  Gilead  tree  that  stood  by  the  lawn. 

"There  they  are,"  Mother  cried.  "See  they  are  building  their 
house." 

On  a  limb  twelve  or  fifteen  feet  from  the  ground  the  little  neigh- 
bours sat  talking  with  one  another.  The  male  was  dressed  in  a  very 
brown  coat,  swallowtailed  at  that,  a  warm  red  vest,  and  pantaloons 
that  bagged  at  the  knees  a  bit  and  made  his  slender  legs  look  all  the 
more  skinny.  On  his  head  he  wore  a  jaunty  velvet  cap,  almost  black 
in  colour,   crested  a  little  towards  the  back  of  the  crown. 

The  newcomers  proved  to  be  fine  masons.  They  plastered  their 
little  home  very  carefully,  and  then  tenderly  they  prepared  the  bed- 
room in  which  the  little  ones  were  to  live. 

Every  morning  I  would  awaken  to  the  glorious  warbling  of  our 
neighbours.  Their  happy  songs  fell  around  our  little  home  in  sparkling 
showers  of  music. 

One  evening  when  the  western  sky  was  ablaze  with  glory,  Mother 
took  me   on  her  lap  as  she  rocked  back  and  forth  in  the   old  family 


Hurae,  1942  TE   KARERE  211 

rocking  chair  that  had  become  the  coveted  resting-place  of  all  of  us, 
she  sang  this  little  song: 

There  came  to  my  window  one  morning  in  spring 
A  dear  little  bird  that  came  there  to  sing: 
The  song  that  he  sang  was  sweeter  by  far 
Than  ever  I've  heard  on  the  flute  or  guitar. 
Tra  la  la  la  la  la  la  la  la  la  la  la  la 

He  raised  his  light  wings  to  fly  far  away, 
Then  pausing  a  moment  these  words  seemed  to  say, 
"How  happy,  how  happy  this  world  seems  to  be, 
Arise,  little  boys,  and  be  happy  with  me." 
Tra  la  la  la  la  la  la  la  la  la  la  la  la 

But  just  as  he'd  finished  his  beautiful  song, 

A  thoughtless  young  man  with  his  gun  came  along; 

He  killed  and  he  carried  my  birdie  away, 

And  he'll  never  sing  more  at  the  break  of  day. 

I  can  remember  yet  how  sad  I  felt  when  the  song  was  finished. 
Mother  was  a  sweet  singer,  and  somehow  the  little  bird  seemed  real 
to  me.  It  seemed  so  sad  that  the  wondrous  song  should  be  hushed 
forever. 

A  real  lump  was  in  my  throat  as  I  said,  "Mother,  I'll  never  kill 
a  bird." 

"I  hope  you  will  not,  my  son,"  Mother  answered,  as  she  looked  out 
through  the  window  at  our  little  neighbours. 

One  day  shortly  after,  I  climbed  the  tree  that  I  might  peep 
into  the  wonderful  nest.  The  mother  robin  was  very  much  excited 
over  my  visit  and  set  up  a  noisy  clatter  as  I  approached.  I  was  almost 
afraid  of  her  as  she  darted  back  and  forth,  through  the  foliage  of  the 
tree.  I  knew  I  didn't  mean  her  any  harm,  and  so  I  kept  on  until  from 
a  branch  above  the  little  home  I  could  look  into  it. 

What  a  sight  met  my  gaze !  Four  wonderful  sky-blue  eggs, 
daintier  than  any  china,  reposed  in  the  snug  little  bed.  They  Looked 
like  tiny  bits  of  heaven  that  had  been  carved  out  of  the  matchless 
blue  above  our  home.  I  can  remember  yet  the  emotion  that  moved 
me  as  I  saw  the  four  little  miracles. 

I  climbed  down  from  the  tree  with  additional  can'. 

"Little  Mother,"  I  said  out  loud  to  the  anxious  robin,  "Your  won- 
derful eggs  are  safe." 

FOURTH  WEEK 

LET'S    KEEP    CLEAN 
Objective: 

To  help  the  child  to  feel  that  God  gave  him  his  beautiful  body,  and 
that  in  order  to  keep  his  body  strong  and  beautiful,  he  must  keep  it 
clean. 

Lesson    Approach: 

show  a  picture  of  a  bathroom.     (There  air  ve.y  mans   beautiful 

ones  in  the  magazines.  )  Lei  a  child  point  to  the  bathtub.  What  ifl  11 
\\,i'!  What  other  kind  of  baths  may  we  take-.'  Which  kind  do  you 
like  befit?  We  like  to  BWim  and  we  like  a  shOWer.  hut  a  nice  war-", 
soapy  hath  make-  m  feel  line,  doesn't  it  7  We  round  out  main  ■■ 
why  we  should  have  clean  hands,  now  let  Ufl  write  down  lOUie  ^ooi\ 
tea   oil      why    we      hould    hat  he. 

1.  To     he     (dean. 

2.  To   feel  e<>od. 

.;.     To  he  an  agreeable  companion. 

i.     To  keep  our    km  bealt  by  and  cleai , 


212  TE  KARERE  Hurae,  [942 

Sing  the   following   (tunc:   flow,   Row,   Row  Your  Boat): 

('Iran,   clean,   clean   and   neat, 

Every   child   should   be; 
Children   washed   and   dressed  and  sweet 

We  all   like  to  see. 
Take,  take,  take  a  bath, 

Take  one  every  day; 
Children   should   be   nice   and   clean 

That's  the  nicest  way. 
Scrub,  scrub,  scrub  your  teeth, 

Scrub  them  every  day; 
With  a  tooth  brush  and  some  paste 

Keep  the  germs  away. 


Story: 


THE   SPICK  AND   SPAN  TWINS 


In  a  bright,  clean  town  not  very  far  from  here  live  a  boy  and  a 
girl  who  are  twins.  Their  names  are  Keith  and  Kay.  Their  faces  are 
so  bright  and  rosy  that  people  love  to  see  them  coming  down  the 
street.  Keith  always  wears  a  clean  suit  and  Kay  wears  a  spotless 
dress.  They  wear  smiles  instead  of  frowns  and  help  everybody  they 
can. 

One  day  the  twins  heard  some  children  who  were  called  in  from 
play  to  take  their  baths  say  that  they  did  not  like  to  bathe.  The  twins 
thought  this  was  very  odd,  because  they  liked  to  get  into  the  big 
tub  and  scrub  and  scrub  and  scrub.  One  little  girl  said,  "Oh,  mother, 
I  want  to  stay  out  and  play.  Anyway  it's  too  late.  The  water  is 
always   too    hot,    or   else    it's   too    cold.      The    soap   gets   in    my    eyes." 

So  the  twins  talked  to  Mary  and  the  other  children  and  said, 
"Why,  we  take  a  bath  all  over  at  least  twice  a  week.  We  just  love 
nice  warm  water  and  soap-suds.  We  wash  our  faces  and  necks  and 
ears  every  morning  and  we  don't  even  count  how  many  times  a  day  we 
wash  our  hancs.  We  always  wash  them  before  eating."  So  Mary 
decided  she  would  like  to  be  sweet  and  clean  too,  so  that  she  would 
look  like   Kay. 

Soon  they  went  into  a  house  and  found  a  little  girl  scolding  be- 
cause she  had  played  so  hard  and  she  was  too  tired  to  take  a  bath. 
Kay  told  her  about  a  poor  little  girl  who  didn't  even  have  a  tub  to 
bathe  in.  Every  time  she  wanted  a  bath,  she  had  to  put  buckets  of 
water  on  the  stove  to  heat.  Then  she  would  go  outside  and  bring  in 
a  wash  tub  in  which  she  put  the  warm  water  so  that  she  could  be 
bathed  and  be  sweet  and  clean.  The  little  girl  who  was  scolding  was 
surprised,  because  she  had  a  nice  white  tub  to  bathe  in  ,and  didn't 
have  to   worry  about  getting  nice,   warm  water. 

A  little  girl  called  Sunny  was  the  next  child  they  saw.  She  was 
washing  her  hair,  and  then  she  dried  it  in  the  sunshine.  Keith  and 
Kay  told  her  what  a  fine  thing  it  was  to  keep  the  hair  bright  and  shin- 
ing by  washing  it  often   and   brushing   it  well. 

Then  they  saw  a  little  girl  called  Careless  Carrie  who  always 
had  unclean  finger-nails.  She  just  could  not  remember  to  clean  them 
and  keep  them  clean.  So  the  twins  thought  of  a  plan  to  help  her. 
They  took  a  piece  of  paper,  put  their  right  hands,  palms  down,  and 
drew  around  each  finger  and  the  thumb  with  a  pencil.  This  made  a 
picture  of  a  hand  and  on  it  they  wrote,   "I  will  clean  my  nails." 

Keith  and  Kay  saw  so  many  children  and  talked  to  them  about 
clean  bodies  and  hair  and  finger-nails,  that  before  they  knew  it,  it 
was  time  for  them  to  go  home  and  bathe.  So  home  they  skipped,  happy 
because  they  had  helped  someone  else  to  be  clan,  and  the  last  thing 
they  said  was: 

"When  you  have  had  a  nice  warm  scrub, 
Always  remember  to  clean  the  tub." 


Hurae,  1942 


TE   KARERE 


213 


NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 


MANAWATU    DISTRICT 
Reported   by   Polly   WiNeera 

The  Primary  has  been  organized  in  the 
Porirua  Branch  with  the  following  in 
office: — Emily  Katene  as  Pres.,  Maraea 
Katene  and  Pirihira  WiNeera  as  coun- 
sellors and  Tilly  Katene  as  secretary. 
The  M.I.A.  has  also  followed  suit  with : 
Hinerau  WiNeera  as  Pres.  and  Sec.  of 
the  Young  Women's,  Lea  WiNeera  and 
Ina  Pohio  as  her  counsellors.  The  Young 
Men  have  elected  Tama  Swainson  as  their 
Pres.,  Taylor  Mihaere  and  Puoho  Katene 
as  counsellors,  and  Taylor  is  also  their 
secretary  and  Scout  leader.  It  might  be 
mentioned  here  that  with  the  exception 
of  about  two  of  these  officers,  the  ages  of 
the  others  average  about  16.  The  first 
big  event  to  take  place  in  these  two  newly 
established  organizations  was  in  the  way 
of  a  concert  followed  by  a  social  per- 
formed and  conducted  by  the  Primary 
and  M.I.A.  members.  The  officers  of 
both  organizations,  especially  the  Prim- 
ary Pres.,  need  much  praise  for  the  man- 
ner in  which  they  carried  out  this  func- 
tion so  successfully,  and  we  hope  that 
in  the  future  their  endeavours  to  uplift 
the  work  of  both  these  organizations  in 
this    Branch   will   be  realised. 

Bro.  Peneamine  WiNeera  visited  the 
Rangiotu  Branch  on  the  week-end  of  10th 
May  and  attended  Mother's  Day  there, 
which  was  celebrated  with  a  full  pro- 
gramme very  successfully  performed.  The 
efforts  of  those  faithful  Saints  to  keep 
the  Gospel  active  in  their  Branch  is  in- 
deed an  inspiration  to  us  all.  Mother's 
Day  was  also  celebrated  in  the  Porirua 
Branch,  where  tributes  to  mothers  of 
the  Church  and  of  the  world  were  paid 
in  song,  orations,  and  in  prayers.  Sister 
Emily  Katene  was  responsible  for  the 
arranging   of   this   programme. 

Word  has  been  received  from  Sister 
Wiki  Katene,  who  is  nursing  overseas, 
that  she  is  well  grounded  and  her  duties 
as  a  V.A  D.  keep  her  forever  on  her  feet. 
What  little  time  she  has  off  is  spent, 
always,  with  some  member  of  the  Maori 
Battalion.  Her     brother,     Georgie,     has 

spent  much  time  with  her,  showing  her 
the  sights.  Wiki  has  not  had  time 
enough  to  herself  to  get  homesick — yet! 
Apparently  Georgie  sees  to  that.  Inci- 
dentally the  letter  she  was  writing  had 
to  be  brought  to  a  close  because  Major 
E.  T.  W.  Love  had  arrived  on  the  scene 
to    "show   her   the   town." 

Pte.  E.  K.  WiNeera  wishes  to  express 
his  sincere  appreciation  for  the  fine  time 
shown  him  by  Bro.  and  Sister  George 
Randell  and  their  son,  of  Hastings,  when 
he    was    there    on    leave. 

MAHIA  DISTRICT 

Reported    by    Riiipeti    Mataira 

The  Nuhaka  Branch  Relier  Society   held 

its  0entenni8l  celebrations  on  Sundav, 
May  3.  1942,  when  Presidenl  and  Sister 
Cowley  were  able  to  )>.■  present.  On  Mon- 
day    morning     President      Cowlej      planted 

and    dedicated   •>    "karal  a"    I  ree   on    the 


marae.  On  the  Sunday  following,  which 
was  Mother's  Day,  the  Sunday  School 
presented  a  programme  honouring  the 
mothers.  The  youngest  and  oldest 
mothers,  Stella  Godding  and  Ka  Tawhiri 
(respectively)     were    given    gifts. 

The  Opoutama  Branch  also  honoured 
Mother's  Day  with  a  programme  con- 
ducted by  the  Sunday  School  under  the 
direction  of  Bro.  James  Brown,  and  here 
also  the  youngest  and  oldest  mothers 
were  presented  with  gifts,  Josephine 
Savage  (nee  Brown)  and  Urumanuka 
Rarere. 

Keen  enthusiasts  and  participants  in 
the  local  Home  Guard  are  the  R.S.  mem- 
bers who  were  instrumental  in  forming 
a  district  Maori  Club,  whose  scope  of 
work  has  touched  many  phases  of  the 
war   work. 

At  the  request  of  the  Wairoa  Patriotic 
Committee  the  M.I.A.  and  Choir  members 
will  be  giving  items  at  a  Sunday  Night 
concert  at  the  Gaiety  Theatre,  Wairoa, 
on    May    31st. 

Private  Nira  Greening  (Dempsey)  was 
tendered  parties  by  the  M.I.A.  and  Nu- 
haka   Patriotic    Committee. 

Hiku  Adam  Mitchell,  convert,  baptized 
and  confirmed  by  Elder  E.  H.  Tengaio. 
Another  baptism  performed  by  E.  H. 
Tengaio  was  that  of  Marama  Mita,  who 
was    confirmed    by   Te    Kauru    Hohepa. 

Release Heeni  Smith   as   R.S.   teacher. 

ADoointments. — Heni  Christy  as  R.S. 
teacher,  and  Maggie  Winiana  as  Asst. 
Secretary. 

Births. — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  J.  Peak- 
man  of  Whakaki,  a  daughter,  Oriwa  We- 
hikino.  To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Nelson  of 
Kopuawhara,    a   daughter. 

Death. — Taylor  Hook,  aged  10.  Burial 
service  conducted  by  Te  Kauru  Hohepa 
at    Whakaki. 

HAURAKI    DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Rose    Watene 

May  3.  1942— Saints  of  Kirikiri  and 
Omahu  Branches  met  at  Kirikiri,  where 
three  baptisms  were  performed.  The 
Mother's  Day  programme  was  held  tin- 
following  week.  May  17 — Presidents 
Toke  Watene  and  George  Watene  of  the 
District  Presidency  were  accompanied  by 
Brother  Tiki  Reihana  and  Sisters  Whaka- 
mura  and  Rose  Watene  on  a  visit  to 
Manaia,  where  the  family  of  N  gar  una 
Mikaere,  28  in  all,  had  gathered  to  meet 
in     karakia     with     US.  Three     baptisms 

were  performed  here  bj  George  Watene, 
2   children  blessed,   l   ordination  to   Priest 

and     2     rerom  mends     to     Mission     Presidenl 

Sain:-   among  the  community  of  Efc 

and    Church    of    England    follow*  rs,     Mas 

Slsl     PreB.    Cowley,    accom  panic. I    h\      Win. 

R.     Perrott,     President     of    the    Auckland 

District,    and    Teao    Wuihana    of    tb. 

sion  Genealogical  Society,  visited  the 
Kirikiri  Branch,  Imparting  Instruction 
i  ad  advice  perl  incut  to  the  t  im«  \ 
thering  Presidenl  Cowlej  ordained 
Tuaha  Randell,  an  Elder,  and  also    . 

I    child. 


214 


TE  KARERE 


Hurae,  1942 


WAIKATO    DISTRICT 
Reported  by  Dave  Ormsby 

June  7th,  r.)i2.  the  Hamilton  Branch 
held  their  Hui   Peka,  whin   President   and 

Si>t.r  Cowley  and  Brothers  Perrotl  and 
for     Elders.  This    family    are    the    only 

Teao  Wilson  of  Auckland  visited  them. 
Te  Awamutu  and  Kawhia  Branches  were 
associated    with    this    conference. 

Among  the  many  visitors  were  Brother 
and  Sister  A.  D.  Amadio.  and  Sisters 
Rose  Beazley  of  the  Mission  Y. W.M.I. A. 
and  District  R.S.  President  and  Hine 
l'aki.  also  a  member  of  the  District  R.S. 
Board. 

Brother  Percy  Hill  <>r  the  District  Pre- 
sidency and  President  of  the  Hamilton 
Branch  directed  the  conference,  ami  the 
many  meetings  held  under  the  various 
heads    were    very    inspiring   indeed. 

HAWKE'S     BAY     DISTRICT 
Reported   by    Olive    Edwards 

A  wonderful  Aaronic  Priesthood  anni- 
versary service  was  conducted  by  Syd 
Hawiri  Kamau  on  May  17th,  1942,  at 
Korongata,  where  many  people,  including 
President  Nopera,  had  gathered.  Among 
the  speakers  were  Paul  Randell,  William 
Heke  and  David  Edwards,  who  spoke  on 
special  topics.  Brother  Louis  Lanfear 
and  President  Nopera  were  the  other 
speakers.  Before     the     Sunday     School 

meeting,  2  baptisms  were  performed  by 
Rakaipaka  Puriri,  when  he  baptised  Mary 
and  Eric  Tahau,  daughter  and  son  of  Mr. 
Hoeroa  Tahau  of  Hastings,  which  family 
has  in  times  past  assisted  in  many  ways 
the    activities    of    the    Church. 

The  local  and  surrounding  Home  Guard 
units  met  on  manoeuvres  at  the  con- 
clusion of  which  they  were  provided  with 
welcome  refreshments  by  the  Patriotic 
Women's  Committee  and   E.P.S.  members. 

Sgt.  Pera  Tengaio  of  Nuhaka  (but  a 
more  often  than  not  habitat  of  Koro- 
ngata),  accompanied  by  Mrs.  Tengaio 
(nee  Smith),  spent  what  was  left  of  the 
night  at  the  home  of  Mr.  and  Mrs  Peter 
Edwards  on  their  way  north.  Having 
arrived  after  10  p.m.  one  would  think 
that  (iuiet  and  bliss  would  prevail,  but 
alas — lively  entertainment  was  provided 
the  newly-weds  (about  a  month  or  so) 
in     the     form     of    a     "tin-can"  (  ?)  The 

merrymakers  were  given  a  delightful  sup- 
per (am  I  right.  Olive?)  during  the  re- 
mainder   of    the     night. 

Tungane     Reupena,     mother     of     E 
R.remoana    Kingi    is    spending    some    time 
with     her     daughter     Rere,     having     been 
here    for    the    last    three    months    or    so. 


Release.  -  Ani  L.  Kamau  as  Relief 
Society    Secretary    and    the   appointment    of 

Winipere    Bdwarda   to   the   position. 

Death-  -Pomare  Hapi.  aged  about  11 
years,  died  in  the  Napier  Hospital  on  the 
29th  May.  1942,  after  being  a  patient 
there  for  three  years.  Burial  services 
were    held    at     Korongata    t\v.»    days     later. 

(It  is  rumoured  that  a  certain  'fellow' 
who  should  know  better  had  to  wear  his 
boots  around  his  neck  upon  a  certain 
occasion.  Will  someone  knowing  the 
facts  kindly  verify  this  rumour.  I  be- 
lieve Pu  Erueti  might  be  able  to  give 
information.       Kia    ora    ra.) 


GENERAL    MISSION    NEWS 

Brothers  Alex  Wishart  and  Cliff  Pente- 
cost are  the  proud  fathers  of  another 
Son  and  another  daughter.  Both  mothers 
are  doing  tine.  Mentioning  babies  brings 
to  light  the  knowledge  that  Brother  and 
Sister  Burge  (nee  Ruby  Schultz)  now  of 
Palmerston  had  their  first  son  blessed  by 
President  Cowley  when  President  and 
Sister  Cowley  and  Jewell  returned  from 
the  South  Island.  They  report  the  faith- 
fulness of  the  few  Saints  of  the  South. 
and  tell  of  their  remarkable  efforts  in 
Relief   Society    work    and    war   work. 

For  the  past  two  months  President 
Cowley  has  been  travelling  from  here, 
there  and  everywhere  each  week-end,  to 
Hui  Pekas  and  special  conferences  with 
the  Saints.  Each  time  he  comes  back 
to  Headquarters  he  seems  to  be  filled 
with  a  firmer  conviction  that  the  Saints 
are  standing  steadfast  and  active  in  their 
Church  duties.  Each  conference  attended 
is  an  inspiration  to  all.  Not  only  to  the 
Saints  does  he  mingle  and  talk  with  as 
he  has  just  filled  requests  to  speak  to 
public  groups  in  Auckland  with  further 
requests  to  speak  at  the  Otago  University 
and   Rotary   Club   in   Hastings,   and   so  on. 

The  Auckland  Branch  Relief  Society 
has  been  reorganized  recently,  when  Sis- 
ter Billman  and  her  counsellors  were 
honourably  released  after  many  years  of 
faithful  service,  and  Sisters  Amadio,  Har- 
ris, Ottley  and  Cameron  sustained  as  the 
new    officers. 

Among  recent  visitors  to  our  Church 
Ser\  ices  were  Brothers  Duwain  Larson 
and  Jines  of  Zion,  and  Boyd  Williamson 
also  of  Zion.  Ptes.  Tuhaka  Babbington 
and  John  T.  Meha  have  also  attended 
services    in    Auckland. 

Sister  Reupena,  though  aged,  adds  much 
spirituality  to  the  many  meetings  she 
is    able   to   attend. 


TELEGRAMS 

Anyone  sending  telegrams  to  Headquarters  or  anyone  here, 
address  them:  "Quickmere,"  Auckland.  This  is  our  code  address 
for  telegrams,  and  when  sent  this  way  will  be  delivered  direct  to  the 
Office,     It  will  also  save  expense  as  to  address  if  followed. 

— Mission  Secretary. 


"Te  Karere'  Subscribers 

Expiration  Notices  of  the  following  list  of  names  in- 
clude the  months  May,  June  and  July,  1942,  which  means 
that  subscribers  with  names  listed  in  this  issue  receive 
this  as  their  last  issue  until  renewals  are  effected. 

Branch  Presidents  are  urgently  asked  to  make  a 
drive  for  a  "Karere  In  Every  Home"  and  Agents  who 
are  receiving  "Te  Karere (s)"  for  distribution  are  asked 
to  advise  subscribers  of  the  above  notice  and  obtain  re- 
newal subscriptions  and  advise  this  office. 

MAY,    JUNE    and    JULY,    1942 

Billman,  Charles  and  Desmond — Auckland.  Beasley,  Fred — 
Hikurangi.  Brady,  Margaret — Auckland.  Bryers,  E.  Nehua — Okai- 
hau.  Bush,  Mrs.  Rangi —  Auckland.  Carr,  Mrs.  D.  —  Taranaki. 
Da  vies,  Henry  M. — Rotorua.  Dennis,  Lovie — Manutuke.  Fryer, 
Mrs.  Edith — Frankton.  George,  Mrs.  A. — Auckland.  Going,  Mrs. 
Cyril — Maromaku.  Grey,  Mrs.  M. — Bell  Block.  Hare,  Sam — Awa- 
rua.  Haronga,  Wai — Nuhaka.  Harris,  William — Tahoraiti.  Hapeta, 
Harriet — Hokianga.  Heke,  Remana  —  Awarua.  Heke,  Kumeroa  — 
Korongata.  Henare,  Mere — Pipiwai.  Heremaia,  Hirini  T. — Kaikohe. 
Hiha,  Awhitia — Tahoraiti.  Hira,  Mrs.  Sam — Omahu,  Thames.  Hone- 
tana,  Tamati  —  Hoeotainui.  Horlock,  Connie  —  Huntly.  Hoetawa, 
Haromi — Frasertown.  Hall,  Marjorie — Auckland  Haika,  Hepi — 
Whangaruru  South.  Joyce,  Ivan  George — Tautoro.  Jensen,  Carl  B. 
—  -Auckland.  Kamau,  Nikera — Korongata.  Kamau,  Eparaima — Koro- 
ngata. Kamau.  Ani  Maraki — Korongata.  Kauwhata,  Arapera — 
Ngawha.  Kelly,  Dolly — Kopuawhara.  Kohu,  John — Judea.  Kopua, 
Tipi — Tokomaru  Bay.  Karaka,  Jacob — East  Coast.  Maddocks,  Edith 
— Petone.  Mason,  Mrs.  Norman — Maromaku.  Mate,  Materoa  R. — 
Waimana.  Matthew,  Violet — Judea.  Mitchell,  Gladys — Nuhaka. 
Murupara,  Kahureinga  Tuhoro — Thames.  Marsh,  Watene — Koro- 
ngata. Nepia,  Mihi  H.  —  Nuhaka.  Ngakuru,  Wiremu  ■ —  Rawene. 
Ngatuere,  Miss  Frances — Mangamahoe.  Nuku,  Mrs.  E.  Connie — 
Taranaki.  Nopera,  Emma  and  Eriata — Opapa.  Ngakuru,  Mrs.  W. 
— Rawene.  Ormsby,  Gilbert — Matamata.  Ormsby,  George — Frank- 
ton.  Ormsby,  Edwin — Tauranga.  Osborne,  Mrs.  D. — Manunui. 
Otene,  Nopera — Mangamuka.  Paea,  John  M. — Awarua.  Paki,  Hemi 
— Pokeno.  Paki,  Hinetaeapa  B. — Rangiotu.  Pera,  Tarati — Opapa. 
Pereto,  Emere — Te  Araroa.  Pearse,  Kura — Wairarapa.  Potae,  Areta, 
Ngaro — Tokomaru  Bay.  Puriri,  Jim — Korongata.  Peihopa,  Pat — 
Pipiwai.  Poki,  Flora — Gisborne.  Polamalu,  Ray — Te  Puke.  Rangi. 
Iti — Kopuawhara.  Rarere,  Mrs.  Henry — Opoutama.  Reihana.  Mrs. 
Sydney — Waiomio.  Ryan,  Mrs.  L.  S. — Auckland.  Smith,  Tuehu — 
Nuhaka.  Snee,  Len  R. — Tahoraiti.  Stinson,  E.  L. —  Wellington. 
Stent,  Louisa — Wanganui.  Southon,  James — Hastings.  Silberry, 
Sophie — Morrinsville.  Tahau,  Ivy  C. — Hastings.  Tarawa.  Koi  and 
Matthew — Onehunga.  Tangihaere,  D. — Aria,  Te  Awamutu.  Tauira. 
Robert — Te  Mata.  Te  Whata,  Pine  Wiremu — Tautoro.  Thompson. 
T. — Waipawa.  Te  Kauru,  Piripi — Frasertown.  H.  B.  Thompson, 
Una  (10/-), — Dannevirke.  Tukukino,  Sophie  Paeroa.  Turinui, 
Maisie — Waikato.  Tupuivao.  licit  \  Hastings.  Tucker,  .James  H. — 
Whangaruru.  Tau.  Manga  Kaikohe.  Tangataiti,  Sarah  Onehunga. 
Tamihana,  Marore  -Dannevirke.  Tomoana,  Mrs.  Taahga  Hastings. 
Waerea,  Lena  -Nuhaka.  Walker.  Bloraro  Nuhaka.  Watene,  Mrs. 
Kahukore  Thames.  Waetford,  Rosie  Hikurangi.  Wainohu,  Wetini 
Korongata.  Wharemate,  Rangi  I'.  Tautoro.  Wharemate,  Te  Wake- 
kore  Tautoro.  Whakaka,  Hinehuirangi  Glandstone.  Wi  Hongi, 
Henare  Pere  Awarua.  WiHongi,  Te  Aim  Kaikohe.  WiHongi, 
Wit. hira  Kaikohe.  Wikaira,  Hirini  Hokianga.  WiNeera,  lVn.a- 
rrtine  Porirua.  Winiana,  Wm.  Nuhaka.  Wirihana,  Teai 
huhga.    Witehira,  James    P.      Whangarei.    WiHongi,    Ruperl      Tikftiki. 


GOSPEL  STANDARDS 

By   President   I  teber  J.  ( rrant 

(  These  sentence  and  paragraph  excerpts  are  from 
President  Grant's  new  hook.  "Gospel  Standards," 
which  came  from  the  press  on  his  eighty-fifth  birthday 
anniversary  and  is  now  available  through  "The  Im- 
provement Era"  or  through  book  dealers  everywhere.) 

I  tell  you  it  is  the  duty  of  the  Presidency  of  this 
Church  to  ask  the  people  to  do  anything  and  every- 
thing that" the  inspiration  of  God  tells  them  Lo  do. 

*  *         * 

I  have  never  seen  the  day  when  I  was  not  willing 
to  do  the  meanest  work  ( i  i'  there  is  such  a  thing  as  mean 
work,  which   I   doubt)   rather  than  be  idle. 

Now   I   want  to  make  all  mistakes  on  the  side  of 
mercy.     But  once  in  a  while  I  want  to  see  justio 
just  a  little  bit  of  a  chance  among  the  people. 

*  *         * 

1  may  not  have  been  a  very  good  preacher  of  the 
gospel  of  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ  from  the  standpoint 
of  doctrinal  preaching.  But  I  have  endeavoured,  to 
the  best  of  my  ability,  to  preach  the  doctrine  of  James: 

"I   will  show  thee  my   faith  by  my  works." 

*  *    '     *' 

Some  people  think  they  are  not  appreciated  and 
are  not  allowed  sufficient  scope  for  usefulness.    There 

is  but  one  person  who  can  curtail  an   individual's  use- 
fulness, and  that   is  himself. 

*  *  * 

The  Lord  is  no  respecter  of  persons,  and  will  give 
success  to  all  who  work  for  it.  If  I  can  only  impress 
upon  the  minds  of  the  youth  of  /ion  the  eloquence,  the 
inexpressible    eloquence    of    work.    I    shall    feel    fully 

repaid. 

*  *         * 

You  need  have  no  fear,  my  dear  brothers  and  sif- 
ters, that  any  man  will  ever  stand  at  the  head  of  the 
Church  of  Jesus  Christ   unless  our   Heavenly   Father 

wants  him  to  he  there. 

The  accomplishments  of  our  people  have  been 
bnm^ht  about  by  pulling  together,  by  "teamwork,"  by 
absolute  unity  and  co-operation. 


SEAGULL    MONUMENT    WITH    TEMPLE    SPIRES    REACHING 
HEAVENWARD 


FIRST   PRESIDENCY 
Hebcr  J.  Grant,  Prophet,  Seer  and  Revelator  and  President  of 
the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of   Latter-day   Saints. 

•I.    Reuben   Clark,  Jr.,  First  Counsellor  in  the  First    Presidency. 
David   o.    .McKay,   Second  Counsellor  in  the   First    Presidency. 

President    of    the   Council    of    The    Twelve    Apostles       Rudger    CkftWSOn. 

Council  of  The  Twelve  Apostles  Rudger  Claw  son.  Ci'iiru'r  Albert  Smith, 
George  I'.  Richards.  Joseph  Fielding  Smith.  Stephen  L.  Richards,  Richard 
H.  Lyman,  .loin.  A.  Widtsoe,  Joseph  F.  Merrill.  Charles  A.  Callis.  Albert 
E.   Bowen,  Sylvester  Q.  Cannon  and  Harold   B.   Lee. 

Acting    Patriarch    to    the    Church       George    F.    Richards, 
the   First    Presidency,   the  Twelve   Apostles,  and   the 

the    Church,     as     Prophets.     Seers     and     Revelators. 


ant.    as     Trust  ee-i  n-Trust     for    the    Church     of 
Saint  S. 

The  First  Council  of  The  Seventy  Levi  Edgar  Young,  Antoine  R.  Ivins, 
Samuel  O.  Reunion.  John  H.  Taylor.  Rufua  K.  Hards.  Richard  L.  Kvans. 
and    Oscar    A.     Kirkman. 

Presiding    Bishopric       LeGrand    Richaru-      Presiding    Bishop ;    Marvin    ().    Ash- 

ton,    First    Counsellor;   Joseph    L.    Wirthlin,   Second   Counsellor. 
GENERAL  OFFICERS  OF  THE  CHURCH: 

Church  Historian  and  Recorder. — Joseph  Fielding  Smith  with  A.  Wil- 
liam Lund  as  assistant.  Church  Board  of  Education  —Hebe*  J.  Grant,  J. 
Reuben    Clark.    Jr..     David    ().     McKay,     Rudger    Clawson,    Joseph     Fielding 

Smith.     Stephen     L.     Richards.     Richard     R.     Lyman,    John     A.     Widtsoe      Adam 

s.    Bennion,   Joseph    F.    Merrill.   Charles   A.   Callis.    Franklin    L.    West,    Albert 

}■'..  Bowen  ami  Frank  Evans  Secretary  and  Treasurer.  Commissioner  of 
Education  Franklin  L.  West.  Seminary  Supervisors — M.  Lynn  Reunion 
J.  Karl  Wood.  Auditing  and  Finance  Committee  Orval  W.  Adams.  Albert 
F.  Bowen,  George  S.  Spencer,  Harold  H.  Bennett.  Tabernacle  Choir  I 
F.  Hewlett.  President;  J.  Spencer  Cornwall.  Conductor:  Richard  R.  Condi«>. 
Assistant  Conductor.  Tabernacle  Organists  Alexander  Schreiner,  Frank 
W  .     Asper,    and     Wade     N.    Stephens     Assistant. 

CHURCH  WELFARE  COMMITTEE: 

Advisers     John    A.    Widtsoe,    Albert     E.    Bowen,    Marion    G.    Romnes 

Thomas  E.  McKay.  Clifford  E.  Young  Alma  Sonne,  Nicholas  0.  Smith, 
Antoine  R.  Ivins,  John  H.  Taylor.  LeGrand  Richards,  Marvin  ().  Ashton, 
Joseph  L.  Wirthlin  and  General  Presidency  of  Relief  Society.  General  Com- 
mittee— Henry  D.  Moyle,  Chairman:  Robert  L.  Judd,  Vice-Chairman  ;  Harold 
R.  Lee,  Managing  Director:  Marion  (',.  Romney.  Assistant  Managing  Direc- 
tor: Mark  Austin,  Clyde  C.  Edmunds,  Sterling  H.  Nelson,  William  L. 
Ryberg.    StririKham    A.    Stevens    and    J.    Frank    Ward. 

GENERAL  AUXILIARY  OFFICERS  OF  THE  CHURCH: 

National  Women's  Relief  Society  Amy  Brown  Lyman.  President; 
Marcia  K.  Howells,  First  Counsellor;  Donna  I).  Sorensen,  Second  Counsellor: 
with  all  the  members  of  the  Board  a-  B1  present  const  it  ut  ed.  Deseret  Sunday 
School  Union  George  D.  Pyper,  General  Superintendent:  Milton  Reunion, 
First  Assistant  Superintendent;  George  R.  Hill.  Second  Assistant  Superin- 
tendent, with  all  the  members  of  the  Hoard  as  at  preseul  constituted. 
Young  Men's  Mutual  Improvement  Association  George  Q.  Morris.  General 
Superintendent;  Joseph  J.  Cannon,  First  Assistant  Superintendent:  Burton 
K.  Famsworth,  Second  Assistant  Superintendent,  with  all  the  members  of 
the  Roard  as  at  present  constituted.  Young  Women's  Mutual  Improvement 
Association — Lucy  Grant  Cannon.  Presidenl  :  Hel<  n  Spencer  Williams,  First 
Counsellor:  Vema   W.  Cod. lard.  Second  Counsellor,  with  all  the  members  of 

the     Roard    as    at    present     constituted.  Primary    Association  —  May     Green 

Hinckley.  Superintendent;  Adele  Cannon  Howells,  First  Assistant  Superin- 
tendent: LaVern  W.  Parmley,  Second  Assistant  Superintendent,  with  all  the 
members  <>f  the   Board  as  at   present   constituted. 


Te  Rarer e   I 


Established  in  1907 
Akuhata,    1942 


Nama   8 


&F>&F}&P>&F>&P>&W. 


Matthew   Cowley 
Kelly  Harris 
Eru   T.   Kupa 
Waimate   Anaru 


Tumuaki    Mihana 
Etita 

Kaiwhakamaori 
Kaiwhakamaori 


"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  whakatapua  hex  hapai  ake  i  te  iwi  Maori  hi 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-nui.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  THE  BUSINESS  PRINTING 
WORKS  LTD.,  55  Albert  Street,  Auckland,  CI,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00   per   year;   $4.00    for   five   years;    $10.00    for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


CONTENTS 

Editorial—  Page 

The  Church  and  the  Present  War   220 

/ 
Special    Features — 

The  Message  of  the  First  Presidency  of  the  Church  222 

Genealogy 229 

Church    Features — 

Sunday    School 230 

Mutual    Improvement    Association    '. 234 

Primary    236 

News  from  the   Field   240 

COVER  MOTIF.  The  1942  April  Conference  of  the  Church,  because  of  war  condi- 
tions, was  not  available  to  the  general  public,  although  11  was  held,  being  attended  by 
the  Presiding  Cciht.-i I  An'  horitiea  and  especially  invited  guests,  numbering  In  all  not 
more  than   500.     Tin-   i\i < • :    .- 1 ■  ■ « ■     of  lh<    brethren   from   thia  Conference  are  being    made 

available    to    you,    I with    thia    iBsue,    and    We    bopi     that    the    cover    Bcens, 

although  used  once  before,  will  Find  a  new  significance  in  your  thoughts  and  impriss- 
sions   as   being    symbolical   of   "the    lav*    comma    forth    from    /.ion." 


22i) 


TE  KARERE 


Akuhata,  1942 


Editorial  . 


THE  CHURCH  AND  THE  PRESENT  WAR 

By   David  (  ).   M<  K.w 

Address  delivered  at  the  Sunday  morning  session  of  the 
112th  J  annul  Conference.  April  5,  1942,  in  the  Salt  Lake 
Temple,  Temple  Square,  Salt   Lake  City. 

With  a  number  of  young  men  from  each  of  many  wards 
in  the  Church  serving  somewhere  in  the  terrible  conflict  now 
raging,  it  is  easily  understood  why  our  minds  are  turned 
toward  the  deprecation  of  war.  and  to  the  hope  for  peace. 
Thoughts  of  Loved  ones  are  pretty  closely  linked  with  their 
soldier  hoys  in  army  encampments.  There  are  many,  too, 
who  should  like  to  know  what  the  attitude  of  the  Church  is 
toward  the  present  war.  This  is  a  fitting  day  and  occasion 
on  which  to  consider  this  subject. 

Easter,  as  you  know,  is  an  ancient  spring  festival  with 
which  Christendom  has  long  since  associated  the  resurrec- 
tion of  Jesus  Christ.  The  Saviour's  resurrection  is  the  most 
glorious  event  in  the  history  of  mankind.  It  proclaims  die 
victory  of  the  soul  over  death,  and  the  existence  and  pro- 
gression of  the  individual  personality  beyond  the  grave. 

The  resurrected  Lord's  first  greeting  to  His  disciples,  in 
the  evening  of  that  memorable  day.  was  "Peace  be  unto  you.'- 

And  when  he  had  so  said,  he  shewed  unto  them  his 
hands  and  his  side.  Then  ■were  the  disciples  (/lad,  when  they 
saw  the  Lord. 

Then  said  Jesus  unto  them  again,  Peace  he  unto  you. 
(John  20:20-21) 

That  was  His  message,  too,  at  the  last  meeting  He  had 
with  them  before  his  crucifixion.  Said  He:  "These  words  I 
have  spoken  unto  you  that  in  me  ye  might  have  peace." 

The  peace  of  Christ  abides  in  the  heart.  It  is  an  indi- 
vidual blessing.  But  it  is  a  condition  to  be  enjoyed  also 
by  groups  of  individuals,  and  to  that  end  His  disciples  were 
to  declare  peace  to  the  world. 

On  this  Easter  Day,  the  Risen  Christ  beholds  in  the 
world  not  peace,  but  war. 

In  the  face  of  the  tragic  condition  among  mankind, 
honest  thinking  men  and  women  ask  how  is  it  possible  to 
reconcile  the  teachings  of  Jesus  with  the  participation  of  the 
Church  in  armed  conflict. 


Akuhata,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


221 


War  is  basically  selfish.  Its  roots  feed  in  the  soil  of 
envy,  hatred,  desire  for  domination.  Its  fruit,  therefore, 
is  always  bitter.  They  who  cultivate  and  propagate  it  spread 
death  and  destruction,  and  are  enemies  of  the  human  race. 

War  originates  in  the  hearts  of  men  who  seek  to  despoil, 
to  conquer,  or  to  destroy  other  individuals  or  groups  of 
individuals.  Self  exaltation  is  a  motivating  factor ;  force, 
the  means  of  attainment.  War  is  rebellious  action  against 
moral  order. 

The  present  war  had  its  beginning  in  militarism,  a  false 
philosophy  which  believes  that  "war  is  a  biological  necessity 
for  the  purification  and  progress  of  nations."  It  proclaims 
that  Might  determines  Right,  and  that  only  the  strongest 
nations  should  survive  and  rule.  It  says,  "the  grandeur  of 
history  lies  in  the  perpetual  conflict  of  nations,  and  it  is 
simply   foolish  to  desire  the  suppression  of  their  rivalry." 

War  impels  you  to  hate  your  enemies. 

War  says,  Curse  them  that  curse  you. 

The  Prince  of  Peace  says,  Pray  for  them  that  curse  you. 

War  says,  Injure  and  kill  them  that  hate  you. 

The  Risen  Lord  says,  Do  good  to  them  that  hate  you. 

WAR    INCOMPATIBLE    WITH    THE    TEACHINGS 
OF  THE  SAVIOUR 

Thus  we  see  that  war  is  incompatible  with  Christ's 
teachings.  The  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ  is  the  gospel  of  peace. 
War  is  its  antithesis,  and  produces  hate.  It  is  vain  to  attempt 
to  reconcile  war  with  true  Christianity. 

In  the  face  of  all  this,  I  shall  seem  inconsistent  when 
I  declare  that  I  uphold  our  country  in  the  gigantic  task  it 
has  assumed  in  the  present  world  conflict,  and  sustain  the 
Church  in  its  loyal  support  of  the  government  in  its  fight 
against  dictatorship. 

In  justification  of  this  seeming  inconsistence,  I  shall 
not  attempt  to  prove  that  there  are  occasions  when  Jesus 
would  approve  of  a  nation's  starting  a  war.  That  He  used 
force  to  drive  from  the  temple  the  money  changers,  and 
other  desecrators  of  the  House  of  God,  is  a  fact;  but  only 
a  misapplication  of  the  text  can  make  that  incident  a  justifi- 
cation for  one  Christian  nation's  going  to  war  against 
another.  On  that  occasion,  as  on  all  occasions,  Jesus  opposed 
and  denounced  wrong.  With  the  strength  of  fiery  indigna- 
tion and  of  his  own  moral  force,  and  not  merely  with  a  whip 
of  small  cords,  Jesus  drove  the  self-convicted  desecrators 
from  the  temple. 

( (  ontinued  on  /><»</<•  226) 


II'    K  VRERE 


Akuhata,  1(MJ 


THE  MESSAGE  OF  THE  FIRST 
PRESIDENCY   OF   THE   CHURCH 

Read  by  President  J.  Reuben  Chirk.  Jr.,  at 
the  final  Session  of  the  112th  Annual  Confer- 
ence, Monday,  April  6th,  1942,  in  the  Assembly 

I /all.   Temple  Square,  Salt  Lake  City. 

In  bhese  days  of  trial  and  Borrow, 
when  Satan  is  "seeking  bo  destroy  the  souls 
of  men"  (D.  &  C.  10:27)  we  send  to  the 
righteous   everywhere   our   greetings   with 

prayers  for  their  blessing;  to  the  Saints  in 
all  lands  and  on  the  islands  of  the  seas, 
We  renew  our  testimonies  and  pledge  OUT 
unselfish  service,  exhorting  them  to  lives 
obedient  to  the  gospel  and  the  command- 
ments of  the  Lord;  we  extend  to  them  the 
hand  of  true  and  faithful  fellowship,  with 
deep  and  abiding  love  and  blessing. 


Pres.  Heber  J.  Grant 


Our  Testimonies. — We  bear  witness  to  all  the  world  that  God 
lives,  and  still  rules,  that  His  righteous  ways  and  His  truth  will 
finally  prevail. 

We  bear  testimony  that  Jesus  is  the  Christ,  the  Only  Begotten  of 
the  Father,  the  First  Fruits  of  the  Resurrection,  the  Redeemer  of  the 
World,  and  that  "there  is  none  other  name  under  heaven  given  among 
men,  whereby  we  must  be  saved."      (Acts  4:  12.) 

We  solemnly  declare  that  in  these  the  latter-dayS,  God  has  again 
spoken  from  the  heavens  through  His  chosen  Prophet,  Joseph  Smith; 
that  the  Lord  has,  through  that  same  Prophet,  again  revealed  in  its 
fulness  His  gospel, — the  plan  of  life  and  salvation;  that  through  that 
Prophet  and  his  associates  He  has  restored  His  holy  Priesthood  to  the 
earth,  from  which  it  had  been  taken  because  of  the  wickedness  of 
men;  and  that  all  the  rights,  powers,  keys,  and  functions  appertaining 
to  that  Priesthood  as  so  restored  are  now  vested  in  and  exercised  by 
the  chosen  and  inspired  leadership  of  His  Church, — The  Church  of 
Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  even  as  that  Priesthood  has  been 
exercised  on  the  earth  from  the  Beginning  until  this  day,  whenever 
His  Church  was  here  or  His  work  had  place  among  the  children  of  men. 

These  testimonies  we  bear  in  all  soberness,  before  God  and  men, 
aware  that  we  are  answerable  to  God  for  the  truthfulness  thereof. 
We  admonish  all  men  to  give  ear  to  these  testimonies  and  to  bring  their 
lives  into  harmony  with  the  gospel  of  Christ,  that  on  the  day  "When 
the  Son  of  man  shall  come  in  his  glory,  and  all  the  holy  angels  with 
him,"  they  may  stand  with  those  on  His  right  hand,  to  whom  He  will 
say,  "Come,  ye  blessed  of  my  Father,  inherit  the  kingdom  prepared 
for  you  from  the  foundation  of  the  world."    (Matt.  25:31,  34) 

We  shall  now  speak  first  of  some  vital  practical  matters  which 
should   be  uppermost  in  the  minds  of  all  Latter-day  Saints. 

Message  to  Parents. — It  is  becoming  increasingly  clear  that  very 
many  of  our  physicians  and  surgeons  will  be  taken  by  the  government 
for  service  with  the  armed  forces.  This  is  well,  for  we  want  our  sol- 
diers and  sailors  to  have  every  care  which  it  is  possible  to  give  them. 
But  this  will  leave  the  civilians  with  curtailed  and  probably  inadequate 
medical  help.  In  some  areas  we  shall  be  left  with  little  more  trained 
assistance  than  was  available  to  our  pioneer  fathers.  Yet  it  is  our 
patriotic  duty  to  be  as  fully  effective  in  production  at  home  as  our 
boys   are    effective    in    combat   in   the    field.      Those    in   the    front   lines 


Akuhata,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


223 


Pres.  J.  Reuben  Clark,  Jr. 


cannot  be  strong  unless  those  behind  the 
lines  are  strong  also.  To  meet  this  patriotic 
duty  and  to  prepare  for  this  threatening 
condition,  we  urge  all  parents  to  guard  with 
zealous  care  the  health  of  their  children. 
Feed  them  simple,  good,  wholesome  food 
that  will  nourish  and  make  them  strong.  See 
that  they  are  warmly  clad.  Keep  them  from 
exposure.  Have  them  avoid  unnecessary 
crowds'  in  close,  poorly  ventilated,  over- 
heated rooms  and  halls.  See  that  they  have 
plenty  of  rest  and  sleep.  Avoid  late  hours. 
Keep  them  home  in  the  evenings  and  remain 
home  to  enjoy  them.  Teach  them  strictly 
to  observe  the  Word  of  Wisdom  which  is 
God's  law  of  health.  You  parents  observe 
these  rules  yourselves,  and  keep  the  other 
commandments  of  the  Lord.  You  bishops 
and  presidents  of  stakes,  first  lead  your  peo- 
ple by  example  and  then  they  will  follow 
your  precepts.  Parents,  prepare  yourselves 
and  your  children  for  the  times  to  come.  So  live,  day  by  day,  that  you 
may  with  confidence,  ask  the  blessings  of  health  with  which  the  Lord 
clothes  those  whom,   living  righteously,  He  delights  to  succour. 

Message  to  the  Youth. — To  the  youth  of  the  Church  we  repeat 
all  the  foregoing  advice,  but  above  all  we  plead  with  you  to  live  clean, 
for  the  unclean  life  leads  only  to  suffering,  misery,  and  woe  physically, 
— and  spiritually  it  is  the  path  to  destruction.  How  glorious  and  near 
to  the  angels  is  youth  that  is  clean;  this  youth  has  joy  unspeakable 
here  and  eternal  happiness  hereafter.  Sexual  purity  is  youth's  most 
precious  possession;  it  is  the  foundation  of  all  righteousness.  Better 
dead,    clean,    than    alive,    unclean. 

Times  approach  when  we  shall  need  all  the  health,  strength,  and 
spiritual  power  we  can  get  to  bear  the  afflictions  that  will  come  upon  us. 

Welfare  Work. — We  renew  the  counsel  given  to  the  Saints  from 
the  days  of  Brigham  Young  until  now, — be  honest,  truthful,  industri- 
ous, frugal,  thrifty.  In  the  day  of  plenty,  prepare  for  the  day  of 
scarcity.  The  principle  of  the  fat  and  lean  kine,  is  as  applicable  to-day 
as  it  was  in  the  days  when,  on  the  banks  of  the  Nile,  Joseph  interpreted 
Pharaoh's  dream.  Officials  now  warn  us,  and  warn  again,  that  scant 
days  are  coming. 

We  renew  our  counsel,  and  .repeat  our  instructions.  Let  every 
Latter-day  Saint  that  has  land,  produce  some  valuable,  essential  food- 
stuff thereon  and  then  preserve  it;  or  if  he  cannot  produce  an  essential 
foodstuff,  let  him  produce  some  other  kind  and  exchange  it  for  an 
essential  foodstuff;  let  them  who  have  no  land  of  their  own,  and 
who  have  knowledge  of  farming  and  gardening,  try  to  rent  some,  either 
by  themselves  or  with  others,  and  produce  foodstuff  thereon,  and  pre- 
serve it.  Let  those  who  have  land  produce  enough  extra  to  help  their 
less  fortunate  brethren. 

The  Welfare  plan  should  be  carried  forward  with  redoubled  en 
that  we  may  care  for  the  worthy,   needy   poor  and    unfortunate,   and 
many  of  us  may  hereafter  enter  that  class  who  now  feel  we  are  secure 

from  want. 

As  the  Church  has  always  urged  since  we  came  to  the  Valleys,  so 
now  we   urge   every   Church   householder  to   have   a    year's  supply   of 
odstuffs   ahead.     This  should,   so    far  as   possible,   I 
S  (  ach  householder  and  preserved  by  him.     This  course  will  not 


224 


I  I     KARERE 


Akuhata,  1('4J 


Pres.  David  O.  McKay 


only  relieve  from  any  impending  distress 
those  households  who  bo  provide  them- 
selves, but  will  release  just  that  much  food 
to  the  general  national  stores  of  foodstuffs 
from  which  the  public  at  Large  must  be  fed. 

The  utmost  care  should  be  taken  to 
sec  that  foodstuffs  so  produced  and  pre- 
served  by  the  householder,  do  not  spoil, 
for  that  would  be  waste,  and  the  Lord 
looks  with  disfavour  upon  waste.  He  has 
hlessed  His  people  with  abundant  crops; 
the  promise  for  this  year  is  most  hopeful. 
The  Lord  is  doing  His  part;  He  expects  as 
to   do   ours. 

False  Political  -Isms. — We  again  warn 
our  people  in  America  of  the  constantly 
increasing  threat  against  our  inspired  Con- 
stitution and  our  free  institutions  set  up 
under  it.  The  same  political  tenets  and 
philosophies  that  have  brought  war  and 
terror  in  other  parts  of  the  world  are  at 
work  amongst  us  in  America.  The  proponents  thereof  are  seeking  to 
undermine  our  own  form  of  government  and  to  set  up  instead  one  of 
the  forms  of  dictatorships  now  flourishing  in  other  lands.  These  revo- 
lutionists are  using  a  technique  that  is  as  old  as  the  human  race, — 
a  fervid  but  false  solicitude  for  the  unfortunate  over  whom  they  thus 
gain  mastery,  and  then  enslave  them. 

They  suit  their  approaches  to  the  particular  group  they  seek  to 
deceive.  Among  the  Latter-day  Saints  they  speak  of  their  philosophy 
and  their  plans  under  it,  as  an  ushering  in  of  the  United  Order.  Com- 
munism and  all  other  similar  -isms  bear  no  relationship  whatever  to 
the  United  Order.  They  are  merely  the  clumsy  counterfeits  which 
Satan  always  devises  of  the  gospel  plan.  Communism  debases  the 
individual  and  makes  him  the  enslaved  tool  of  the  state  to  whom  he 
must  look  for  sustenance  and  religion;  the  United  Order  exalts  the 
individual,  leaves  him  his  property,  "according  to  his  family,  accord- 
ing to  his  circumstances  and  his  wants  and  needs"  (D.  &  C.  51:  3),  and 
provides  a  system  by  which  he  helps  care  for  his  less  fortunate  brethren  ; 
the  United  Order  leaves  every  man  free  to  choose  his  own  religion  as 
his  conscience  directs.  Communism  destroys  man's  God-given  free 
agency;  the  United  Order  glorifies  it.  Latter-day  Saints  cannot  he 
true  to  their  faith  and  lend  aid,  encouragement,  or  sympathy  to  any 
of  these   false   philosophies.      They   will   prove   snares  to   their   feet. 

Gospel    of    Love. — The   gospel   of   Christ   is   a  gospel    of   love    and 
peace,  of  patience  and  long  suffering,  of  forbearance  and   forgiveness, 
of    kindness    and    good    deeds,    of    charity    and    brotherly    love.      Greed, 
avarice,  base  ambition,  thirst  for  power,  and  unrighteous  dominion  over 
our   fellow-men,   can   have  no   place    ir    the    heart  3   of   Latter-day   Saints 
n    everywhere.     We   of   the   Church    mui 
the   saying   of  the   ancient   prophet-warrior: 
/  seek  not  for  power,  hut  to  full  it  down.     I  seek  not  for  honour  of  the 
world,   but    for   the   glory   of   my    God,   and   the   freedom    and  welfare    of    my 
country.  (  Alma  60  :  36) 

Hate  Must  Be  Abolished. — Hate  can  have  no  place  in  the  souls 
of  the  righteous.  We  must  follow  the  commands  of  Christ  Himself 
which  declare  the  true  life: 

Love  your  enemies,  bless  them  that  curse  you,  do  good  to  them  that  hate 
you,  and  fray  for  them  which  despitefully  use  you,  and  persecute  you; 

That  ye  may  he  the  children  of  your  Father  which  is  in  heaven.  (Matt.  5: 
44-45) 


Akuhata,  1942  TE  KARERE  225 

These  principles  must  be  instilled  into  the  hearts  of  our  children, 
taught  to  our  youth,  given  by  way  of  instruction  to  our  vigorous  man- 
hood and  womanhood,  lived  in  very  fact  and  deed  by  the  aged,  ripened 
in  experience  and  wisdom.  These  are  the  principles  which  God  enjoins 
upon  all  who  teach,  in  whatever  capacity  or  in  whatever  place.  The 
Lord  has  declared  that  those  who  teach  not  their  'children  light  and 
truth,  according  to  the  commandments'  shall  be  afflicted,  the  wicked 
one  shall  have  power  over  them  (D.  &  C.  93:42),  and  the  sin  shall 
be  upon  their  heads  (D.  &  C.  68:  25).  Woe  will  be  the  part  of  those 
who  plant  hate  in  the  hearts  of  the  youth,  and  of  the  people,  for  God 
will  not  hold  them  guiltless;  they  are  sowing  the  wind,  their  victims 
will  reap  the  whirlwinds.  Hate  is  born  of  Satan;  love  is  the  offspring 
of  God.  We  must  drive  out  hate  from  our  hearts,  every  one  of  us, 
and  permit  it  not  again  to  enter. 

Mission  of  the  Church. — The  Lord  has  established  His  Church  in 
these  latter-days  that  men  might  be  called  to  repentance,  to  the  salva- 
tion and  exaltation  of  their  souls.  Time  and  time  again  He  told  the 
Prophet  Joseph  and  those  with  him  that  "the  field  is  white  already 
to  harvest."  (D.  &  C.  4:4;  6:3;  11:  3;  12:  3;  14:  3;  33:  3,  7).  Over 
and  over  again  He  commanded  them  to  preach  nothing  but  repentance 
to  this  generation    (D.   &   C.   6:9;   11:9;   14:8)    finally  declaring: 

And  thou  shah  declare  glad  tidings,  yea,  publish  it  upon  the  mountains, 
and  upon  every  high  place,  and  among  every  people  that  thou  shaft  be  permitted 
to  sec. 

And  thou  shalt  do  it  with  all  humility,  trusting  in  me,  reviling  not  against 
rcvilcrs. 

And  of  tenets  thou  shalt  not  talk,  but  thou  shalt  declare  repentance  and 
faith  on  the  Saviour,  and  remission  of  sins  by  baptism  and  by  fire,  yea,  even 
the  Holy   Ghost. 

Behold,  this  is  a  great  and  the  last  commandment  which  I  shall  give  unto 
you  concerning  this  matter;  for  this  shall  suffice  for  thy  daily  walk,  even  unto 
the  end  of  thy   life. 

And  misery  thou  shalt  receive  if  thou  wilt  slight  these  counsels,  yea,  even 
the  destruction  of  thyself  and  property.      (D.  &  C.   19:29-33) 

These  commands  we  must  obey  that  men  shall  come  to  know  God 
and  Jesus  Christ  whom  He  sent,  for  "this  is  life  eternal."   (John  17:  3) 

For  this  cause  was  the  Church  organized,  the  gospel  again  revealed 
in  its  fullness,  the  Priesthood  of  God  again  restored,  with  all  its  rights, 
powers,  keys  and  functions.  This  is  the  mission  of  the  Church.  The 
divine  commission  given  to  the  apostles  of  old  (Matt.  28:  18  ff . ;  Mark 
16:15ff.)  has  been  repeated  in  this  day,  that  the  gospel  shall  be 
carried  to  all  nations  (D.  &  C.  38:33),  unto  the  Jew  and  the  gentile 
(D.  &  C.  18:  26)  ;  it  shall  be  declared  with  rejoicing  (D.  &  C.  28:  16)  ; 
it  shall  roll  to  the  ends  of  the  earth  (D.  &  C.  65:  2)  ;  and  it  must  be 
preached  by  us  to  whom  the  kingdom  has  been  given.  (D.  &  C.  84:  76),. 
No  act  of  ours  or  of  the  Church  must  interfere  with  this  God-given 
mandate.  The  Lord  will  hold  us  to  this  high  commission  and  exalted 
duty,  imposed  by  His  commandment  to  us,  when  He  said: 

And  in  nothing  doth  man  offend  Cod.  or  against  none  is  his  wrath  kindled. 
save  those  who  confess  not  his  hand  in  all  things,  and  obey  not  his  command- 
ments.     (D.  &   C.   59:  2 1.) 

We  shall  be  excused  from  this  divine  commission,  in  lividually  and 
as  a  Church,  only  if  some  power  beyond  our  control  shall  prevent  our 
obedience  to  God's  commands,  then  they  who  hinder  must  hear  the 
penalty.  (D.  &  C.  124:49)  But  to  that  point  of  hindrance,  it  is  our 
hounden  duty  to  carry  on. 

f  To  be  continued) 


TE  KARERE  Akohata,  L942 

THE  CHURCH  AND  THE  PRESENT  WAR 
(  Continued  from  page  221) 

ther  shall  1  attempt   bo  prove  that   He  favoured  war  when   He 
said:  "Think  not  thai  I  conic  to  send  peace  on  earth;  I  came  nol  : 
peace  but  a  sword."  (Matt.  10:  34).     They  who  would  quote  this 
as  indicating  that  Jesus  approves  of  war  surely  put  a  strained  interpre- 
tation on  its  meaning,  which  refers  nn.st  clearly  to  the  incompatiblity 
n  truth  and  error.     It  clearly  refers  to  the  necessity  of  a  choice, 
which  has  been  made  by  thousands.  betwe<  n  accepting  the  gospel  I 
tinning  in  ease  and  comfort  with  relatives.     There  is  not  in  that  quota- 
tny  justification    for   one   Christian   nation's   declaring  war   upon 
another. 

Nor,   again,  would  I  try  to  justify  my  s<  eming  inconsistency   by 

ring  to  what  He  said  on  another  occasion  as  follows: 
Bui  now,  he  that  hath  a  purse,  lei  him  take  it.  and  likewise  his  scrip;  and 
he  that  hath  no  sword,  let  him  sell  his  garment  and  buy  our.  .  .  . 

And  they  said.  Lord,  behold  here  are  two  SWQrds,  And  he  said  unto  them, 
it  is  enough.   (Luke  22:36  and  38) 

Without  reading  into  the  text  something  which  is  not  intended  or 
even  implied,  the  most  that  one  can  get  from  this  admonition  is  that 
henceforth  the  disciples  going  forth  into  an  antagonistic  world  might 
supply  themselves  with  necessary  support  and  the  usual  mean-  of 
defei 

None  of  these  sayings  of  the  Saviour's  can  be  taken  to  prov 
He  justifies  war, 

Tolstoy,  in  his  "Christianity  and  Patrotism," 

./  Christian  state,  to  he  consistent,  ought,  on  entering  upon  a  war,  not 
merely  to  remove  the  crosses  from  the  churches,  to  turn  the  churches  them- 
selves into  buildings  for  other  purposes,  to  give  the  clergy  other  duties,  and 
above  all,  to  prohibit  the  (jospel — but  ought  to  renounce  every  precept  of 
morality  which  follows  from   the  Christian  law. 

Notwithstanding  all  this,  I  still  say  that  there  are  conditions  when 
entrance  into  war  is  justifiable,  and  when  a  Christian  nation  may,  with- 
out violation  of  principles,  take  up  arms  against  an  opposing  force. 

Such  a  condition,  -however,  is  not  a  real  or  fancied  insult  given 
by  one  nation  to  another.  When  this  occurs  proper  reparation  may  be 
made    by    mutual    understanding,    apology,    or    by    arbitration. 

Neither  is  there  justifiable  cause  found  in  a  desire  or  even  a  need 
for  territorial  expansion.  The  taking  of  territory  implies  the  subju- 
gation  of  the   weak   by  the   strong — the   application   of   the  jungle   law. 

Nor  is  war  justified  in  an  attempt  to  enforce  a   new  ori 
eminent,  or  even  to  imp*  a  particular  form  of  worship,  how- 

ever   better   the   government    or    eternally   true   the    principles   of   the 
enforced   religion   may  be. 

Then-    are.    however,    two    conditions    which    may    justify    a    truly 
.m    man    to    enter — mind    you,    I    say    enter,    not    begin — a    war: 
(1)   An  attempt  to  dominate  and  to  deprive  another  of  his 
and   (2)   Loyalty  to  his  country.     Possibly  there  is  a  third,  viz..  D< 
of   a  weak  nation   that   is  being  unjustly  crushed   by  a   strong,   ruthless 

MAX'S  FREE  AGENCY  FUNDAMENTAL  TO  PROGRESS 

Paramount  among  these  reasons,  of  course,  is  the  defense  of  man's 
freedom.    An  attempt  to  rob  man  of  his  free  agency  caused  diss* 
even  in  heaven.      Scriptures  tell  us: 

Michael  and  his  angels  fought  against  the  dragon;  and  the  dragon  fought 
and   his  angels. 

And  prevailed   not;    neither   zeas  their  place  found  any   more   in   heaven. 


Akuhata,  1942  TE  KARERE  227 

And  the  great  dragon  was  cast  out,  that  old  serpent,  called  the  Devil,  and 
Satan,  which  deceivcth  the  whole  world;  he  zvas  cast  out  into  the  earth,  and 
his  angels  were  cast  out  with  him. 

In  that  rebellion  Lucifer  said  in  substance:  "By  the  law  of  force 
I  will  compel  the  human  family  to  subscribe  to  the  eternal  plan,  but 
give  me  thine  honour  and  power." 

To  deprive  an  intelligent  human  being  of  his  free  agency  is  to  com- 
mit the  crime  of  the  ages. 

Impelling  motives  of  this  archenemy  to  liberty  were  pride,  ambi- 
tion, a  sense  of  superiority,  a  will  to  dominate  his  fellows,  and  to  be 
exalted  above  them,  and  a  determination  to  deprive  human  beings  of 
their  freedom  to  speak  and  to  act  as  their  reason  and  judgment  would 
dictate.      Applicable   to   him   are   the   words   of   Isaiah: 

How  art   thou  fallen  from   heaven,   O   Lucifer,  son  of  the  morning!   .   .   . 
For  thou  hast  said  in  thine  heart,  I  will  ascend  into  heaven,  I  will  exalt 
my  throne  above  the  stars  of  God.     I  will  sit  also  upon  the  mount  of  the  con- 
gregation, in  the  sides  of  the  north. 

I  will  ascend  above  the  heights  of  the  clouds;  I  will  be  like  the  most  High. 
Yet  thou  shall  be  brought  down  to  hell,  to  the  sides  of  the  pit.     (Isaiah 
14:  12-15.) 

Thus  in  the  beginning  was  designed  the  great  crime  against  man- 
hood, to  thwart 

The  wish,  which  ages  have  not  yet  subdued, 
In  man,  to  have  no  master  save  his  food. 

So  fundamental  in  man's  eternal  progress  is  his  inherent  right 
to  choose,  that  the  Lord  would  defend  it  even  at  the  price  of  war. 
Without  freedom  of  thought,  freedom  of  choice,  freedom  of  action 
within  lawful  bounds,  man  cannot  progress.  The  Lord  recognized  this, 
and  also  the  fact  that  it  would  take  man  thousands  of  years  to  make 
the  earth  habitable  for  self-governing  individuals.  Throughout  the 
ages  advanced  souls  have  yearned  for  a  society  in  which  liberty  and 
justice  prevail.  Men  have  sought  for  it,  fought  for  it,  have  died  for 
it.  Ancient  free  men  prized  it,  slaves  longed  for  it,  the  Magna  Charta 
demanded  it,  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States  declared  it. 

"This  love  of  liberty  which  God  has  planted  in  us,"  said  Abraham 
Lincoln,  "constitutes  the  bulwark  of  our  liberty  and  independence.  It 
is  not  our  frowning  battlements,  our  bristling  seacoasts,  our  army, 
and  our  navy.  Our  defense  is  in  the  spirit  which  prizes  liberty  as  the 
heritage  of  all  men,  in  all  lands,  everywhere.  Destroy  this  spirit,  and 
we  have   planted  the  seeds  of  despotism   at   our  very   doors." 

OUR   OBLIGATION  TO   THE   STATE 

A  second  obligation  that  impels  us  to  become  participants  in  this 
world  war  is  loyalty  to  government. 

We  believe  thai  governments  were  instituted  of  God  for  the  benefit  of  man; 
ami  that  He  holds  men  accountable  for  their  acts  in  relation  to  them,  both  in 
making  laws  and  administering  them,  for  the  good  and  safety  of  society. 

We  believe  that  no  government  can  exist  in  peace,  except  such  laWs  are 
ffaihed  and  held  inviolate  as  will  secure  to  each  individual  the  free  exercise 
6)     onsctence,  the  right  and  control  of  properly,  and  the  protection  of  life. 

The  greatest  responsibility  of  the  state  is  to  guard  the  lives,  and 
to  protect  the  property  and  rights  of  its  citizens;  and  if  the  state  is 
obligated  to  protect  its  citizens  from  lawlessness  within  its  boundaries, 
it  is  equally  obligated  to  protect  them  from  lawless  encroachments 
from  without  —  whether  the  attacking  criminals  be  individuals  or 
nations. 

We  are  informed  by  competent  authority  that  twenty  years  ago 
the  government  of  the  United  States  entered  into  an  agreement  with 
Japan  to  maintain  peace  in  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and  "keep  honourable 
hands  off  China."      "Before  the   year  was  over."   writes   Mark  J,   Gayn, 


TE  KARERE  Akuhata,  1942 

in  an  article  "Prelude  to  Treachery,"  "the  ablest  men  on  tin-  Japanese 
naval  general  stair  went  to  work  blue-printing  war  on  the  United  States 
and   Britain." 

Prom  such  treachery  the  state  is  in  duty  hound  to  protect  itself, 
and  its  only  effective  means  o['  doing  so  under  present  world  condi- 
tions is  by  armed  force.     As  a  Church: 

We  believe  that  all  men  are  justified  iii  defending  themselves,  their  friends, 
ami  property,  ami  the  government  from  the  unlawful  assaults  ami  encroachments 
of  all  persons  in  times  of  exigency,  where  immediate  appeal  cannot  he  made 
to  laws,  and  relief  afforded.    (I).  &   C.   134:  11  I 

Even  though  we  sense  the  hellish  origin  of  war,  even  though  we 
feel  confident  that  war  will  never  end  war.  yet  under  existing  condi- 
tions we  find  ourselves  as  a  body  committed  to  combat  this  evil  thing. 
With  other  loyal  citizens  we  serve  our  country  as  bearers  of  arms, 
rather  than  to  stand  aloof  to  enjoy  a  freedom  for  which  others  have 
fought  and  died. 

One  purpose  of  emphasizing  this  theme  is  to  give  encouragement 
to  young  men  now  engaged  in  armed  conflict  and  to  reassure  them  that 
they  are  fighting  for  an  eternal  principle  fundamental  to  the  peace  and 
progress  of  mankind. 

CONCLUSION 

God  bless  them  and  others  now  registered  awaiting  the  call  to 
duty,  and  those  serving  in  defense!  To  each  of  you  we  send  a  mes- 
sage of  confidence  and  trust.  Many  of  you  before  entering  upon  your 
military  duties  were  authorized  messengers  of  peace.  Others  of  you 
also  hold  the  Priesthood.  To  all  we  say,  in  your  personal  habits  lei 
the  same  ideals  guide  you  as  soldiers  in  the  army  as  guided  you  as 
missionaries.  What  the  Lord  said  to  you  then  is  applicable  to  you 
now — 

Wherefore,  gird  up  your  loins,  and  take  upon  you  my  whole  armour,  that 
ye  may  he  ahle  to  withstand  the  evil  day.  having  done  all.  that  ye  may  he  able 
to  stand. 

Stand,  therefore,  having  your  loins  girt  about  with  truth,  having  on  the 
breastplate  of  righteousness,  and  your  feet  shod  with  the  preparation  of  the 
gospel  of  peace.     I  1).  &  ('.  27 :  15.  16.) 

Keep  yourselves  morally  clean.  Being  soldiers  or  sailors  is  not 
justification  for  indulgence  in  vulgarity,  intemperance,  or  immorality. 
Others  may  be  impelled  to  do  these  things  because  of  the  beastliness 
of  war,  but  you  who  hold  the  Priesthood  cannot  so  indulge  with  im- 
punity. For  your  own  sweet  lives,  and  for  others  who  trust  you,  keep 
yourselves  unpolluted.  Your  loved  ones  believe  in  you,  your  comrades 
will  respect  you,  your  officers  will  admire  you. 

To-day  as  we  celebrate  the  resurrection  of  our  Lord  and  Saviour, 
there  is  a  cloud  of  spiritual  heaviness  hanging  over  the  world,  as  there 
was  darkness  at  the  time  of  the  crucifixion.  Let  us  hope  that  when 
this  mad  orgy  shall  have  ended,  that  the  honest  in  heart  will  experi- 
ence a  spiritual  resurrection  and  will  associate  with  one  another  in  a 
newness  of  life.  As  seeds  of  future  wars  are  often  so,wn  around 
the  peace  table,  may  the  spirit  of  the  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ  and  not 
the  spirit  of  retaliation  and  revenge  actuate  those  who  meet  to  deter- 
mine peace  terms.  When  that  blessed  occasion  comes,  may  the  repre- 
sentatives of  the  nations  recognize  the  inalienable  rights  of  peoples 
everywhere  to  govern  themselves.  It  would  be  appropriate  if  there 
were  emblazoned  in  golden  letters  on  the  walls  in  which  they  meet, 
and  especially  cherished  as  motives  in  the  hearts  of  those  who  deter- 
mine the  conditions  of  peace,  the  words  of  Christ  our  Lord:  "Love 
your  enemies,  bless  them  that  curse  you,  do  good  to  them  that  hate 
you,  and  pray  for  them  which  despitefully  use  you,  and  persecute  you: 
That  ye  may  be  the  children  of  your  Father  which  is  in  heaven." 


Akuhata,  1942  TE  KARERE  229 

O  Brother  Man 

Follow  with  reverent  steps  the  great  example 

Of  Him  whose  holy  work  was  "doing  good" ; 

So  shall  the  wide  earth  seem  our  Father's  temple 

Each  loving  life  a  psalm  of  gratitude. 

Then  shall  all  shackles  fall ;  the  stormy  clangor 

Of  zvild  music  o'er  the  earth  shall  cease; 

Love  shall  tread  out  the  baleful  fire  of  anger, 

And  in  its  ashes  plant  the  tree  of  peace! 

— The  Improvement  Era. 


GENEALOGICAL  WORK 

The  following  letter,  which  was  received  by  President 
Cowley  recently,  reminds  us  of  an  important  obligation.  In 
the  reading  of  this  letter  from  the  Genealogical  Society  of 
Utah,  which  directs  the  Genealogical  work  necessary  for 
Temple  Ordinances,  read  into  it  the  request  for  an  effort  on 
your  part  to  do  your  duty  by  your  dead,  and  also  assist  the 
Genealogical  Society  of  this  Mission.  Any  information  will 
be  given  upon  request  to  Teao  Wilson,  Secretary,  Genealogical 
Society,  Box  72,  Auckland,   C.I. 

The  letter  was  dated  April   1,   1942,  and  is  as  follows:— 

Dear  President, 

There  is  an  acute  shortage  of  names  of  females  for  temple  work 
at  each  of  the  temples  now  in  operation.  Hence  it  is  now  an  oppor- 
tune time  for  Saints  in  the  missions  to  get  temple  work  done  which 
they  are   unable   to   do   personally. 

We  therefore  suggest  that  throughout  your  Mission  you  request 
the  Saints  to  submit  names  of  those  eligible  for  temple  work  upon  the 
new  form  of  family  group  sheet,  sample  of  which  is  enclosed.  This 
is  the  form  upon  which  all  names  should  be  submitted  in  future  for 
temple  work.  Enclosed  also  are  two  reprints  of  instructions  explain- 
ing the  use  of  these  forms. 

We  suggest  that  all  such  records  be  collected  within  districts  and 
forwarded  to  the  Mission  office.  It  is  further  requested  that  each 
Mission  President  approve  the  sheet  submitted  by  any  patron  before 
it  is  forwarded  for  temple  work.  'This  approval  is  requested  because 
in  some  missions  there  is  a  possibility  that  names  of  negroes  might 
be  submitted. 

We  trust  thai  whatever  records  are  sent  will  be  thoroughly  com- 
piled in  accordance  with  existing  rules  with  all  the  information  called 
for  on  the  sheets  sent  in  as  completely  as  possible,  and  that  these 
records  be  despatched  as  soon  as  feasible  to  the  Index  Office,  80 
North   Main   Street.  Salt    Lake   City.   Utah. 

Sincerely  yours. 

GENEALOGICAL   SOCIETY   OF   UTAH, 
Joseph  Fielding  Smith.  President. 


Hate  can  have  no  place  in  the  souls  of  the   righteous. 

*  *  * 

Be    Honest,    Truthful,    Industrious,    Frugal,    Thrifty.       En    the    daj 
of  plenty,  prepare  for  the  day  of  scarcity. 


I  E   KAR1  ata,  1942 

SUNDAY   SCHOOL 

Theme — 

"OUR   HOMES   AND   CHAPELS   SHALL   BE   BEAUTIFUL" 

"For  Zion  must  increase  in  beauty  and  in  Holiness;  hit 
must  be  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened;  yea  verily  I  say 

unto  you.    Zion  must  arise  and  put  on  her  beautiful  garments." 

— Doctrine  &  Covenants  82:  14. 

SACRAMENT  GEM 

[  come  to  The  all  penitent, 

I  feel  TJiy  love  for  me. 
Dear  Saviour,  in  this  Sacramenl 

I   do  remember  Thee ! 

CONCERT  RECITATION 

: -bs  3:  1-2. 
"My  son.  forget  not  my  law;  but  lei  thine  heart  keep  my  com- 
lents:  For  length  of  days,  and  long  life,  and  peace 

add  to  the 

tERO  A  NGAKATJ 

Whakatauki  3:  1-2.  , 

"K  taku  tama,  kej  wareware  ki  taku  tnre;  h  iki  aku 

ton  ngakau:  Katahi  ka  nui  ak 
.  me  te  ata  noho." 

LESSONS 

KINDERGARTEN   (4-5  years).      Thought:  "HelptV: 
"The   Good   Samaritan"    (Luke    10). 
"Elijah   and   the   Widow"    (1    Kings    17). 
"Peter    Released    from    Prison"     (Acts    I 

PRIMARY  (6-9  years). 

"The   Birth   of   Christ"    (Luke    2:  1-7). 

"The  Message  to   th»  Shepherds"    (Lul. 

"The   Presentation   in   the   Temple"    (Luke    2:22-38). 

CHURCH  HISTORY   (10-11  yea!-). 

"Helaman's  Two  Sons."    (Helaman  5  or  cha; 
of    Mormon).        Thought:    "God    has   power    to    protect   his    servants." 
Facts:  Nephi  and  Lehi — missions  to  the  Lamanites — cast  into  prison — 
officers   seeks   to    slay   them — enveloped    with    fire — are    not    injured — 
Lamamites  converted — unite  with   Nephites. 

"Nephi's  Warning  to  the  Nephites"    (Helaman  8  and  9  or  chapter 
38,  Story  of  Book  of  Mormon.)      Thought:  "God  revealeth  his  secrets 
to  his  servants  the  prophets."      Facts:   Corruption  of  Nephite  govern- 
ment— denounce i   by  Nephi — the  people  revile  him — the  sign  given  by 
hi — Jhe  chief  judge  found  dead. 


Akuhata,  1942  TE  KARERE  231 

"Nephi  is  Charged  with  Murder."  (Helaman  9  or  chapter  38,  Story 
of  Book  of  Mormon,.)  Thought:  "The  wicked  are  confounded  through 
revelation."  Facts:  Some  accept  the  sign,  others  charge  Nephi  with 
murder — Seantum,   the   murderer — Nephi  vindicated. 

A  and  B  DEPARTMENTS    (12-15,   16-19  years). 

"The  Story  of  Moses"  continued.  (Exodus  2,  3  and  4.  Acts  7:  30 
to  36.)  What  to  look  for:  The  value  to  Moses  of  his  association  with 
Jethro.  Who  the  Midianites  were.  The  call  of  Moses  in  the  story  of 
the  burning  bush — the  excuses  he  made.  Problems:  What  was  Moses' 
occupation  in  Midian?  How  would  his  experiences  in  Midian  better 
prepare  him  for  his  great  work?  What  are  the  evidences  that  Moses' 
call  was  from  God? 

"Plans  to  Deliver  Israel"  (Exodus  4,  5  and  6.)  What  to  look  f  or : 
Proofs  that  Moses  was  called  of  the  Lord.  How  Moses  and  Aaron  were 
received  by  the  Israelites.  How  Moses  and  Aaron  were  received  by 
Pharaoh.  Problems:  In  what  ways  did  Pharaoh  make  the  Israelites 
work  harder  and  why?  What  did  the  people  say  to  Moses  because  of 
their  added  tasks?      How  old  was  Moses  when  he  went  back  to  Egypt? 

"The  Plagues  of  Egypt"  (Exodus  7,  8,  9  and  10).  What  to  look 
for:  The  purposes  of  the  plagues.  God's  instructions  to  Moses  and 
Aaron.  In  what  ways  the  magicians  failed.  How  the  Lord  favoured 
Israel.  The  last  plague.  Problems:  Why  were  the  rivers,  frogs,  flies 
and  darkness  religiously  important  to  the  Egyptians?  What  did  the 
plagues  teach  Israel  and  the  Egyptians?  What  promises  did  Pharaoh 
make?      Did  he   '-eep  them?      Name  the  plagues. 

C  DEPARTMENT    (20  to  25  years). 

"Other  Incidents  in  Galilee  and  Capernaum"  (Matt.  17,  18;  Mark 
9;  Luke  9:44-50;  John  2:  13-16).  Problems:  How  is  greatness  in  the 
Kine-dom  of  Heaven  measured?  What  is  meant  by  becoming,  "as  a 
little  child"? 

"About  Six  Months  Before  His  Crucifixion"  (John  7).  Problems: 
What  does  the  Saviour  say  is  the  way  for  all  people  to  find  out  if  He  is 
the  Messiah?  On  what  former  occasion  had  Nicodemus  expressed 
faith  in  Jesus  the  Christ?      What  was  the  Feast  of  the  Tabernacles? 

"At  the  Feast  of  Dedication"  (John  8) ...  Problems:  What  great 
lesson  did  Christ  teach  the  Jews  when  they  asked  Him  to  condemn  the 
sinful  woman?  Did  Christ  excuse  the  woman's  sin,  by  saying,  "neither 
do  I  condemn  thee"?  Why  have  the  Jewish  people  failed  to  reap  the 
blessings   promised   them   through   their   father,   Abraham? 

GOSPEL  DOCTRINE    (All   others  not  already  assigned). 

"The  Rebuilding  of  the  Temple"    (Isaiah  44,  45  and  48;  2  Chron. 

26;  Ezra  1  to  4 ;  Nehemaih  7). 
"Zachaviah,  The  Son  of   Iddo"    (Zachariah   1  to   14). 
"The  Decree  of  Darius  Hystaspes"   (Haggai  1  and  2;  Ezra  5  and  6), 

MAORI  CLASS. 

RATAPU   TUATAHI 

A  HAKOPA  TE  TEINA  0  Niwhai  i  poropiti  ki  otia  tuakana,  ka 
puta  mai  a  Te  KaraiLi  i  roto  i  te  kikokiko  ki  wacnganui  i  nga  Ilmac, 
a  ka  whakamamaetia  ia,  ka  ripekatia.  I  ara  te  red  fcautoko  o  King] 
Pemamiiie  i  tana  whakaaturanga  an<>,  a  ka  kauwhau  ki  bona  fcwi  fco  te 

fcika  tona  whakatikanga  i  a  ia.  I  pora  ano  t<>  wliakaaturan.ua  a 
Apinari,  a  Arami,  Anunvkc  me  llamiicra  to  poropiti  Raniana.  Te  ata 
t  uponotanga  o  onoi  poropit  it  ani'.a  hoi  Med  whakaatu  i  1c  tika  0  ana 
poropititanga.      Nga    tohu    me    nga    men    whakainiharo    e    pa    ana    HtO    to 


232  I  1.  KARERE  Akuhata,  1(M_> 

whanautanga  o  te  Karaiti  me  tons  matenga  i  puta  katoa;  a  i  muri  i 
tona  matenga,  me  tona  kakenga  atu  ka  whakakite  te  Kai  Whakaora 
i  a  ia  ki  nga  Niwhai.  Ko  to  Matua  hoki  e  whakaatu  ana  ki  te 
whakaminenga. 

Nga    Patai: 

1.     He    aha    te    poropititanga    a    Hakopa?      E    korero    ana    hoki    ia 
ki   a  waiV 

-.     Ko    wai    ma    etahi    atu    o    nga    poropiti    i    pera   alio    nga    whaka- 
aturan.ua? 

3.  He  aha  te  tohu  o  te  tika  o  enei  poropititanga? 

4.  I   whakakite  a  Te  Karaiti   i   a   ia  kia  wai   ma  i   muri   iho   i 
matenga  me  tona  kakenga  atu? 

RATAPU    TUARUA 

KO  NGA  KARAIPITURE  onamata,  ae  hoki,  e  marama  ana  to  whaka- 
aturanga ko  te  Karaiti  i  haere  mai  ki  runga  ki  te  whenua  ki  to  whaka- 
rite  i  tetahi  mahi  kua  rite  noa  mai  hei  mahinga.  I  noho  ia,  i  pangia 
e  te  mamae  a  i  hemo  hoki,  kia  rite  ki  te  tauira  he  mea  hanga  i  mnga 
i  te  tika,  i  mua  atu  hoki  i  te  ao,  hei  hoko  mai  i  nga  tamariki  a  Arama. 
Penei  ano  hoki  tewhakaharahara  me  te  marama  <>  to  kupu  mai  o  roto 
o  te  whakakitenga  mai  o  nga  ra  o  muri  nei  na  roto  mai  nei  to  whaka- 
aturanga  a  te  Tama  mo  ona  ake  ko  te  Arepa  mo  te  Omeka,  to  tima- 
tanga  me  te  whakamutunga,  te  Kai-inoi  a  te  tangata  ki  te  Matua,  to 
Kai-hoko  hoki  o  te  ao  katoa.  Whakaarohia  ak<>  tetahi  whakaaturanga 
kotahi  i  roto  i  nga  whakakitenga  mai  maha  mo  t"  Karaiti  i  homai  i 
enei  wa.  "Whakarongo  ki  te  reo  o  te  Ariki  o  tokorua  Atua,  ae  ra  o 
te  Arepa  me  te  Omeka,  te  timatanga  mo  to  mutunga  ko  te  huarahi  he 
porowhita  mutunga  kore,  rite  tonu  inanahi  inaianei,  a  ake,  ake,  ake. 
Ko  Ihu  Karaiti  Ahau,  ko  te  Tama  a  te  Atua,  i  ripekatia  ra  mo  nga 
hara  o  te  ao,  kia  meinga  ai  hei  tamariki  ma  te  Atua  nga  tangata  katoa 
o  whakapono  ana  ki  toku  ingoa,  ae  ra,  kia  kotahi  ratou  i  roto  i  a  an 
me  Ahau  i  roto  i  te  Matua,  me  te  Matua  hoki  he  kotahi  i  roto  i  au, 
kia  kotahi  ai  tatou." 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  He  aha  tetahi  o  nga  tino  mea  e  marama  ana  to  whakaaturanga 
i  roto  i  nga  karaipiture? 

2.  No  nahea  i  rite  mai  ai  te  mahi  hoi  whakaritenga  ma  te  Karaiti 
i  runga  i  te  whenua? 

3.  He  aha  te  painga  ki   nga  tamariki  a  Arama  ina  whakaritea  to 
tauira? 

4.  He   pehea  te  whakaaturanga  mai   mo   ona   i   roto   i   nga  whaka- 
kitenga o  nga  ra  o  muri  nei? 

RATAPU  TUATORU 

TE  WHANUITANGA  0  TE  whakamarietanga  e  pa  ana  mo  te  ao 
katoa,  e  rite  pu  ana  ki  nga  uri  katoa  o  Arama.  Ahakoa  te  whakapono 
kore,  te  mohoao,  me  te  tamaiti  e  mate  ana  i  mua  atu  o  te  ritenga  o 
ona  tau  ki  te  wa  e  tika  ana,  ratou  katoa  e  hokona  mai  ana  i  nga  mate 
o  to  tangata  kotahi  i  te  takanga  atu  ma  roto  i  te  whakahere  a  te  Kai 
Whakaora  i  a  ia  ano.  Kua  taea  te  whakatuturu  e  to  karaipiture  ko  te 
aranga  mai  o  te  tinana  ko  ia  tona  tetahi  o  nga  wikitoria  i  taea  e  te 
Karaiti  na  roto  atu  i  tona  whakahere  o  te  whakamarietanga,  na  ana 
ano  i  whakapuaki  te  pono  mau  tonu:  "Ko  Ahau  te  aranga  mai  me  te 
ora."  A  ko  ia  te  mea  tuatahi  o  nga  tangata  katoa  kia  ara  ake  i  te 
urupa  ki  te  matenga  mutunga  kore — te  matamua  o  te  hunga  kua  moe. 


Akuhata,  1942  TE  KARERE  233 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  E  pa  ana  ki  a  wai  ma  te  whakamarietanga? 

2.  He  aha  tetahi  o  nga  wikitoria  nui  i  taea  e  te  Karaiti? 

3.  Kei    hea   te    whakaaturanga   ko    te    Karaiti   te    matamua    o    te 
hunga  kua  moe? 

RATAPU   TUAWHA 

KAHORE  HE  WAHI  E  watea  ana  i  te  karaipiture  hei  ruaruatanga 
ko  te  aranga  mai  mo  te  ao  katoa.  I  whakamohio  atu  te  Kai  Whaka- 
ora  ki  ona  apotoro  te  timatatanga  o  tenei  mahi  whakaora  mai  i  te 
urupa;  whakaronga  ki  ona  kupu:  "Kaua  e  miharo  ki  tenei,  no  te  mea 
meake  puta  te  wa,  e  rongo  ai  i  tona  reo  nga  tangata  katoa  i  roto  i 
nga  urupa,  a  ka  puta ;  ko  nga  kai  mahi  i  te  pai  ki  te  aranga  o  te  ora, 
ko  nga  kai  mahi  i  te  kino  ki  te  aranga  o  te  whakawa,"  penei  ranei  e 
ai  ta  te  whakaaturanga  mai  i  enei  ra:  "Ko  ratou  kua  mahi  i  te  pai  ki  te 
aranga  mai  o  te  hunga  tika,  a  ko  ratou  kua  mahi  i  te  kino  ki  te  aranga 
mai  mo  te  hunga  kino." 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  He  wahi   ano  ranei  i  watea  mai  i  roto   i  nga  karaipiture  hei 
ruaruatanga:  "Ko  te  aranga  mai  mo  te  ao  katoa?" 

2.  Kei   hea   te   whakaaturanga   hei   tautoko   i  tenei? 

3.  Pehea    te    whakaaturanga    i    roto    i    nga   whakakitenga    mai    o 
naianei? 

RATAPU   TUARIMA 

I  KAUWHAUTIA  E  PAORA  te  akoranga  "ko  te  aranga  mai  mo 
te  ao  kataoa,"  ara  tenei  ake  ka  ara  nga  tangata  mate,  nga  tangata 
tika,  nga  tangata  he.  I  tetahi  wa  ano  i  tuhituhi  ia,  "I  roto  hoki  i  a 
Arama  ka  mate  katoa  nga  tangata,  waihoki  i  roto  i  a  te  Karaiti  ka 
whakaorangia  katoa."  A  Hoani  whakakitenga  i  whakaatu  i  roto  i 
tetahi  o  ona  whakakitenga  mo  nga  wa  a  mua,  "I  kite  ano  ahau  i  te 
hunga  mate,  i  te  hunga  ririki,  i  te  hunga  nui  e  tu  ana  i  te  aroaro  o  te 
Atua — I  tukua  mai  ano  e  te  moana  te  hunga  mate  i  roto  i  a  ia,  i 
tukua  mai  ano  e  te  mate  e  te  po  te  hunga  mate  iroto  i  a  raua."  No 
reira  ka  marama  i  konei  te  tukunga  mai  o  te  whakamarietanga,  tona 
panga  atu,  te  wikitoria  i  runga  i  nga  mea  o  tenei  oranga  me  nga  mea 
o  te  tinana  kua  mate,  e  uru  katoa  ana  ki  roto  nga  uri  tangata,  e  pera 
ana  ano  te  wehenga  mai  i  te  mate  Wairua,  te  peinga  mai  ranei  i  te 
aroaro  o  te  Atua,  e  pa  ana  ki  te  katoa;  noreira  ki  te  kore  te  tangata 
e  whiwhi  i  te  oranga  kei  a  ia  ano  te  he  i  kore  ai  e  whiwhi,  e  hara 
hoki  i  te  mea  na  to  Arama  haranga  kaore  i  taea  te  kape. 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  Pehea  ta  Paora  korero  mo  te  aranga  mai? 

2.  Pehea  ta  Hoani  whakakitenga  mo  te  aranga  mai? 

3.  I  roto  i  enei  whakaaturanga  he  aha  te  mea  i  marama  atu  tatou? 

4.  He  aha  te  mea  i  rite  ki  enei,  ara  i  pa  ki  te  katoa? 

*  *  * 

The  members  of  the  Church  have  always  felt  under  obligation  to 
come  to  the  defense  of  their  country  when  a  call  to  arms  was  made. 

This  is  a  major  crisis  in  the  world-life  of  man.      (led  is  at  the  holm. 

To  our  young  men  who  go  into  service  .  .  .  wo  say  live  clean, 
keep  the  commandments  of  the  Lord,  pray  to  Him  constantly  to  pro- 
serve  you  in  truth  and  righteousness. 


234  TE  KARER]  Akuhata,  1942 

Mutual  Improvement  Association 

M.I. A.  THEME  1942 

Doctrine  &   Covenants  82:10:    "/.  the  Lord,  am 
hound  when  ye  do  what  I  say:  but  when  you  do  not  what  I 

say.  ye  have  no  Promise." 

SECOND    TUESDAY: 

FIRST    AID    (All    Classes) 
WOUNDS   IN    WHICH    FOREIGN    BODIES    REMAIN 

Splinters  of  wood  are  the  most  frequent  cause  of  such  wounds, 
also  small  pieces  of  glass,  metal  shavings,  etc.  If  the  foreign  body 
is  very  near  the  surface  it  can  be  picked  out.  Sterilize  the  skin  with 
iodine.  Sterilize  a  knife  point,  or  needle  by  holding  it  over  a  flame 
or  by  cleansing  with  iodine  and  use  it  to  remove  splinter.  Make  the 
wound  bleed  well  and  bandage  with,  sterile  dressings.  If  body  is  large 
or  deeply  buried,  consult  a  doctor.  For  splinters  under  a  fingernail, 
scrape  nail   until  thin,  then   cut  a   V   shape  and    remove   above. 

ANIMAL    BITES— ESPECIALY    THOSE    OF   CATS   AND    DOGS 

"The  mouth  of  the  dog  or  cat  is  often  in  contact  with  filth  of  all 
kinds  and  is  reeking  with  germs  that  may  cause  infection.  The  wound 
made   is   usually   a   punctured  wound,   but   may  be   a   lacteration." 

"Rabies  or  hydrophobia  is  a  germ  disease  spread  by  the  saliva  of 
an  animal  having  rabies.  A  bite  is  the  usual  method  of  transferring 
the  germ,  but  cases  are  recorded  which  were  caused  by  a  rabid  dog 
having  licked  scratches  or  small  wounds  on  the  hand.  If  the  disease 
once  develops  it  is  never  cured.  Luckily,  there  is  a  preventive  treat- 
ment known  as  the  Pasteur  or  vaccine  treatment  that  is  almost  100 
per    cent,    effective." 

First  Aid  Treatment. — "Wash  wound  to  remove  saliva,  this  being 
the  exception  to  the  rule  not  to  use  water.  Holding  under  a  running 
tap  is  an  excellent  way.  Dry  with  clean  gauze;  apply  tincture  of  iodine, 
dry  and  dress  as  any  other  wound." 

"'Always  consult  a  physician  at  once.  He  will  give  the  wound 
itself  further  treatment  and  will  either  give  the  Pasteur  or  vaccine 
treatment  himself  or  send  the  patient  to  the  proper  place  to  receive 
it,  if  he  believes  it  necessary.       Every  doubtful   case  should    receive   it." 

Do  not  shoot  the  dog  unless  sure  that  he  ha  tnstl   there 

someone  being  bitten  in  trying  to  shut  him  up.  A  dog 
who  has  bitten  someone  should  be  shut  up  or  tied,  where  he  cannot 
get  (<ut,  and  placed  under  observation  for  ten  days.  If  he  does  not 
develop  rabies  in  this  period,  the  person  bitten  is  in  no  danger  of 
taking  the  disease.  The  time  required  for  rabies  to  develop,  in  a  per- 
son after  he  is  bitten  is  usually  twenty-one  days  to  two  months,  forty 
days  being  the  average.  "Thus  it  is  safe  to  wait  a  few  days  while  the 
under  observation,  except  in  bites  of  the  face,  lip,  eyelid,  or 
tongue."  Never  wait  in  these  cases.  "Of  course,  if  the  dog  develops 
symptoms  of  hydrophobia,  Pasteur  or  vaccine  treatment  should  be 
started  at  once.  If  the  dog  must  be  shot,  do  not  shoot  through  the 
head.  Save  the  head  so  the  physician  can  have  it  examined  for  evidence 
of  rabies." 

We  can  see  how  important  it  is  to  care  for  these  bites  and  not 
neglect  them.      Hydrophobia  as  stated  is  never  cured  after  it  develops. 


Akuhata,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


235 


SNAKE  BITES 

The  poisonous  snakes  of  the  United  States  are  rattlesnakes,  copper- 
heads, and  cottonmouth  moccasins,  and  coral  snake.  Rattlers  are 
the  most  common  in  the  Rocky  Mountains.  Poisonous  snakes  have 
fangs  and  strike,  leaving  two  small  holes  or  punctured  wounds.  Non- 
poisonous  snakes  will  leave  several  teeth  marks.  Symptoms  are  severe 
pain,  swelling  occurs  rapidly,  nausea  and  vomiting,  pallor  and  extreme 
weakness  soon  develop.  Patient  will  suffer  shock.  Immediate  death 
would  occur  where  the  venom  was  injected  directly  into  a  vein  unless 
prompt  treatment  is  given.  Otherwise  absorption  is  slow,  death 
occurring  probably  not  until  the  next  day. 

Treatment. — Apply  at  once  a  tourniquet  around  the  limb  just 
above  the  bite.  This  may  be  a  necktie,  handkerchief,  or  bandage;  it 
should  be  tight  enough  to  prevent  the  blood  flowing  back  through  the 
veins,  but  not  tight  enough  to  shut  off  the  arteries.  Do  not  leave 
the  tourniquet  on  longer  than  one  hour.  With  a  sharp  knife  or  razor 
blade,  sterilized  with  iodine  or  burning,  make  a  cross-cut  incision  lin. 
by  Mn.  and  about  Jin.  deep  to  insure  free  bleeding.  Then  proceed 
at  once  to  extract  the  snake  poison  by  suction.  This  may  be  done 
with  the  mouth  if  the  skin  isn't  broken  in  the  mouth,  by  a  glass  breast- 
pump,  or  by  a  small  funnel  attached  to  a  rubber  bulb,  such  as  found 
in  snake  bite  outfits.  This  suction  should  be  applied  for  at  least  one- 
half  hour.  Keep  the  patient  quiet  and  give  the  usual  treatment  for 
shock.      Always  obtain  a  physician  as  quickly  as  possible. 

INSECT   AND   MOSQUITO   BITES 

Bites  or  stings  of  wasps,  bees,  hornets,  mosquitoes,  spiders,  etc., 
are  very  irritating  and  sometimes  quite  painful  and  poisonous.  In- 
fection frequently  occurs  from  scratching — therefore  avoid  scratching 
such  bites.  A  few  drops  of  oil  of  lavender  or  oil  of  citronella  rubbed 
on  the  skin  will  usually  prevent  biting  of  insects  for  a  few  hours.  Bathe 
affected  parts  with  household  ammonia,  half  water,  Epsom  salts  water 
or  a  paste  made  of  baking  soda.      Rub  affected  parts  with  alcohol. 


Through  these  pages  is  expressed  the 
best  wishes  and  congratulations  of  the 
people  of  this  Mission  to  their  President 
Matthew  Cowley  on  the  occasion  of  his 
birthday  anniversary,  August  2nd,  1942. 
With  it  is  intended  our  prayers  on  his 
behalf,  that  he  might  continue  in  grace 
as  a  servant  of  God  in  this  land,  in 
health  of  body  and  mind,  that  his  leader- 
ship and  aroha  might  envelope  all  who 
are  members  of  the  Church  of  Jesus 
Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  the  host 
of  friends  and  acquaintances  vouch- 
safed unto  him  in  this  land. 


It  is  our  di  to  continue  urgently  and  militantly 

to  cai  ry  forward  oui    •■  .    v.  ork. 


"Tli'  is  i  nly  the  art  of  awakening  the  natural 

curiosity  of  \<  ung  min  Is  for  the  purpose  of  satisfying  it  afterwards." 
— Anatole   Fi 


236  II".    KAIxl.U  I.  Akuhata.  1<M_> 

PRIMARY 

FIRST  WEEK 

THE   APOSTLES    DID    AS   JESUS   TOLD   THEM 
Objective: 

We  may  receive  great  blessings  through  faith  in  Jesus. 

Lesson   Approach: 

Close  your  eyes.  How  would  you  feel  if  you  had  to  live  every  day 
without  seeing?  What  would  you  miss  thai  you  enjoy  now?  A  little 
girl  named  Joan  was  born  blind.  She  never  once  in  her  life  saw  the 
beautiful  trees  and  flowers  and  sunshine.  Yet  this  little  girl  was 
happy  and  made  everyone  in  her  home  happy,  too.  She  went  to  a 
school  for  the  blind  and  there  she  learned  to  read.  Do  you  know  how 
blind  children  read?  (Explain  if  necessary.)  She  learned  to  write  on 
a  typewriter  and  she  learned  to  play  the  piano.  She  was  happy  and 
thankful  for  her  kind  parents  and  friends. 

You  can  walk  and  run  and  play  without  any  trouble.  Have  you 
ever  thought  how  you  would  feel  if  you  were  crippled  or  lame?  There 
are  fine  hospitals  where  kind  doctors  and  nurses  help  crippled  and  lame 
children  to  get  well.  These  children  are  very  happy  too,  because  they 
learn  to  enjoy  the  things  they  have. 

A  long,  long:  time  ago  when  Jesus  and  His  apostles  lived,  the  blind 
and  the  lame  weren't  so  well  taken  care  of.  Many  of  them  sat  on  the 
roadside  and  begged.  Do  you  remember  the  stories  of  how  Jesus 
healed  the  blind  man  and  the  lame  man?  To-day's  story  is  about  a 
lame  man  who  was  healed. 

THE    LAME    MAN    IS    HEALED 

One  of  the  very  important  things  Jesus  told  His  apostles  just 
before  He  went  to  His  Father  in  heaven,  was  that  they  should  go 
everywhere  and  teach  the  people  the  things  that  He  had  taught  to  them. 
He  told  them  also  to  heal  the  sick  as  they  had  seen  Him  do  The 
apostles  loved  Jesus  so  they  did  just  as  He  told  them. 

Whom  did  Jesus  promise  He  would  send  to  help  them?  Did  the 
Helper  (Comforter)  come?  (Review  briefly.)  After  the  Comforter 
came  to  the  apostles,  they  stayed  in  Jerusalem  and  preached  to  the 
pe<  pie.  Sometimes  they  went  to  the  temple  at  the  "hour  of  prayer." 
Many,   many  people  went  at  that  time  to   pray. 

One  day  Peter  and  John  went  to  the  temple.  They  had  to  go 
through  a  very  large  gate.  So  beautiful  was  this  gate  that  it  was 
called  the  gate  Beautiful.  As  they  went  through  they  saw  a  lame 
man  there.  He  had  been  lame  all  of  his  life  Are  you  wondering  how 
there?  The  Bible  says  that  his  friends  carried  him  to  the  gate 
Beautiful  every  day  that  he  might  "ask  alms  (Explain  the  word  alms) 
of  them  that  entered  into  the  temple." 

This  day  the  lame  man  looked  up  when  ho  saw  Pot  or  and  John 
coming  in.  As  he  looked  at  them  he  held  out  his  hands  and  said, 
"Alms,  alms."  Peter  and  John  stopped.  They  knew  he  wanted  money 
but  they  had  none.  They  were  so  busy  teaching  about  Jesus  that  they 
had  no  time  to  work  for  money.  What  Jesus  had  told  them  to  give 
the  people   was  much   better  than   money. 

Then  Peter  and  John  looked  on  the  lame  man  and  said,  "Look  on 
us."    And  he  looked,  expecting  to  receive  something  of  them. 

Then  Peter  said,  "Silver  and  gold  have  I  none  :  but  such  as  I  have 
I   give  thee.      In  the   name    of   Jesus   of  Nazareth   rise   up   and   walk." 


Akuhata,  1942  TE  KARERE  237 

"And  he  took  him  by  the  right  hand,  and  lifted  him  up."  Imme- 
diately his  feet  and  ankle-bones  became  strong,  and  he  stood  up  and 
walked. 

He  went  into  the  temple  with  Peter  and  John,  and  there  he  thanked 
and  praised  God  for  making  him  well. 

Listen  to  the  way  the  Bible  tells  the  rest  of  this  beautiful  story. 
(Read  from  Acts  3:  9,   10.) 

"And  all  the  people  saw  him  walking  and  praising  God. 

"And  they  knew  that  it  was  he  which  sat  at  the  Beautiful  gate  of 
the  temple:  and  they  were  filled  with  wonder  and  amazement  at  that 
which  had  happened  unto  him." 

When  Peter  saw  that  the  people  did  not  understand  he  said  to 
them,  "Why  do  ye  marvel?  Do  you  not  know  that  this  lame  man  was 
not  healed  by  our  power,  but  through  faith  in  Jesus  was  this  man 
made  strong." 

Many  people  gathered  in  the  porch  of  the  temple  that  day  and 
heard  the  words  of  Peter.  Peter  and  John  were  happy  because  they 
were   doing  as  Jesus  had  told   them. 

SECOND   WEEK 

SOMETHING   TO   DO 
Objective: 

To  help  the  child  to  use  his  free  time  doing  useful  things. 

Suggestions    for    Teaching: 

A  deep  and  sincere  love  for  little  children  inspired  one  teacher 
to  write  this  beautiful  thought  which  I  pass  on  to  you: 

"I  thank  you  for  lending  me  your  child  to-day.  All  the  years 
of  love  and  care  and  training  which  you  have  given  him  have  stood 
him  in  good  stead  in  his  work  and  play.  I  send  him  home  a  little 
stronger,  a  little  taller  a  little  freer,  a  little  nearer  his  goal.  Lend 
him  to  me  again  Saturday.  In  my  care  of  him  I  shall  show  my 
gratitude." 

The  child  who,  through  wise  guidance,  forms  the  habit  of  using 
liome  materials  to  fashion  some  desired  toy  is  learning  to  depend  on 
himself.  Encourage  him  to  exercise  his  own  initiative  at  every 
opportunity. 

Complete  any  unfinished  work  before  you  begin  articles  suggested 
for  this  lesson. 

Dolls  to  Make  and  Dress: 

Here  is  how  you  make  a  doll  from  an  empty  spool.  The  head 
is  a  small  ball  of  cotton  tied  in  the  centre  of  a  square  of  white  cloth. 

For  the  neck,  put  a  wad   of  cotton  on  top  of  the  spool. 

Draw  the  ends  of  the  cloth,  forming  the  head,  down  over  the 
rim  of  the  spool  and  tie  firmly  in  place. 

The  arms  are  made  of  a  strip  of  cloth  which  is  sewed  at  the 
shoulders.      Tie    the    knots    for   hands. 

The  dress  is  made  from  an  oblong  piece  of  cloth.  It  has  a  slit 
for  the  head.  Tie  a  ribbon  or  cord  around  the  waist.  The  bonnet 
is  a  triangular  shaped  piece  of  material,  tied  under  the  chin. 

Draw  the  features  with  ink;  red  crayon  makes  rosy  cheeks;  and 
black  crayon  the  hair. 

Wastepaper    Basket: 

Have  each  child  bring  to  Primary  two  large  brown  paper  bags, 
exactly  the  same  size,  such  as  groceries  come  in.  If  they  are  wrinkled 
from  use,  tell  the  children  to  dampen  them  and  have  Mother  press 
them   with   a  hot   iron. 


TE  KARI  R]  Akuhaia.  1942 

Slip  one  bag  into  the  other,  making  them  fit  smoothly.  Fold  down 
on  the  top  edge  of  this  double  bag,  two  inches  all  the  way  around  the 
bag.  Turn  this  fold  over  two  or  three  times,  depending  on  the  height 
of  the  bag.  To  make  the  basket  stand  better,  tit  a  piece  of  heavy 
cardboard  in  the  bottom  of  the  bag,  and  paste  it. 

Have  simple  decoration.  On  th«  fold  around  the  top  a  border 
may  be  added.     Let  the  children  choose  their  own  design. 

inexpensive  basket  will  be  very  useful  in  the  child's  own  room. 

Talk   about    its    use   and   encourage   the   children   to    be   tidy. 
Rubber   Toys    for   Brother    or    Sister: 

Here    is   an    idea   the   hoys   will    enjoy.       Have   them    bring   old    inner 

r  hot  water  bottles.     Suggest   that   they  wash  them  thoroughly 

with    warm    water   and    soap    before    bringing    them    to    elass.      Let    them 

he  toy  they  wish  to  make  on  the  rubber  a, id  cut  out  with  9< 
A    duck,    a    rabbit    or    an    elephant    would    make    a    toy    little    siffl 

would   he   happy   to   own. 

Either  have  them  sew  the  two  pice-  together  with  yarn,  or  glue 
them    with    rubber   cement. 

Stun   the  toys  with  cotton,   rags  cut  in  very  small  pieces  oi 
paper.      Paint  the  eyes  and  other  features. 

Something    Useful    for   the   Boy's    Room: 

Make  a  shoe  box  from  an  orange  crate.  Place  shelves  accord- 
ing to  different  sizes  of  shoes.  Make  smooth  with  sandpaper  and  paint 
a  colour  which  will  match  the  room.  Cover  the  front  with  a  curtain 
having  an  applique  design.  The  girls  will  he  happy  to  make  the 
curtains. 

A   Stamp   Box: 

An  interesting-  stamp  box  may  be  made  by  glueing  together  three 
empty  match  boxes.  Use  paper  fasteners  for  knobs.  You  may  cover 
the  boxes  with  pretty  paper  to  make  them  colourful  as  well  as  strong. 

THIRD    WEEK 
OUR  PETS 

I  have  a  little  pet   at  home, 

I  like  it  quite  a  bit; 
I  will  treat  it  kindly  and 
I'll   take  good   care   of   it. 
Story: 

ANDROCLES    AND    THE    LION 
Androcles    was    a    poor    Roman    slave    who    was    carried    away    to 
Northern  Africa  many  hundreds  of  years  ago.      His  life  was  very  hard 
and  painful,  and  his  master  was  a  very  cruel  man.      At  last  he  i 
that   he  would  try  to  escape  to  the  sea  coast,   and  get  back  to  Rome. 
He  knew  that  if  he  were  caught  he  would  be  put  to  death;  so  he 
waited   till   the   nights  were   dark   and   moonless.      He   crept   out   of  his 
'a  house  and  stole  through  the  town.      He  soon  got  into  the  open 
country. 

On  and   on  he  hastened  through  the  darkness  as  fast  as  his 
would  carry  him.      But  when  the  day  broke  he  found  that  , instead  of 
making    toward    the    sea    coast,    he    had    struck    into    the    great    lonely 
d.  sert.      He  was  tired  out,  hungry  and  thirsty.      Seeing  a  cave  in  the 
side  of  some  cliffs,  he  crept  into  it,  lay  down,  and  soon  fell  a-' 

Suddenly  he  was  awakened  by  a  terrible  roaring.  Starting  to 
his  feet  he  beheld  a  huge  tawny  lion  standing  at  the  end  of  the  cave. 
Androcles  had  been  sleeping  in  its  den.  He  could  not  escape;  the 
huge  lion  barred  the  way.  Utterly  terror  stricken,  he  waited  for  the 
beast  to  spring  upon  him  pr»d  devour  him. 


Akuhata,  1942  TE  KARERE  239 

But  the  lion  did  not  move.  It  moaned  and  licked  one  of  its  paws 
from  which  blood  was  flowing.  Seeing  that  the  animal  was  in  great 
pain,  Androcles  forgot  his  terror,  and  came  forward.  The  lion  held 
up  his  paw.      It  looked  as  though  he  was  asking  Androclese  for  help. 

Androcles  could  see  that  a  great  thorn  had  got  into  the  animal's 
paw.  It  had  made  a  bad  cut,  and  the  injured  foot  was  swelling 
rapidly.  With  a  quick  jerk  he  drew  out  the  thorn,  and  by  pressing  the 
sore  place  he  soon  stopped  the  flow  of  blood. 

Relieved  of  the  pain  the  old  lion  limped  out  of  the  cave.  Not  far 
from  the  cave  was  a  spring  of  good  water.  So  the  lion  and  his  friend 
lived  very   comfortably  for  three   days. 

But  the  idea  of  getting  back  to  Rome  was  always  in  the  mind 
of  the  fugitive.  When  he  thought  that  those  who  were  tracking  him 
had  given  up  the  seaich,  he  ventured  out  of  the  cave.  But  the  Roman 
soldiers  were  still  watching.  They  caught  the  poor  slave  and  shipped 
him  back  to  Rome. 

The  Romans  were  very  cruel  to  slaves  who  tried  to  get  away. 
They  said  that  Androcles  should  be  killed  by  wild  beasts  in  the  arena 
on  the  first  public  holiday. 

A  vast  multitude  of  spectators  came  to  see  the  pitiful  sight.  In 
the  most  important  place  of  all  sat  the  Roman  Emperor. 

Androcles  was  pushed  into  the  great  open  space.  A  lance  was 
thrust  into  his  hand.  With  this  he  was  told  he  would  have  to  defend 
himself  against  a  powerful  lion  which  had  been  kept  for  days  without 
food  to  make  it  savage  and  fierce.  The  poor  fellow  was  given  a  chance 
of  surviving  but  he  knew  as  well  as  any  one  that  it  was  a  very,  very 
slim  chance. 

He  trembled  when  the  hungry  beast  sprang  out  of  its  cage.  The 
lance  shook  in  his  hand  as  the  lion  came  bounding  up  to  him.  But 
instead  of  tearing  the  poor  fellow  to  pieces  as  every  one  thought  he 
would,  the  lion  wagged  his  tail,  just  like  a  great  cat,  and  licked  the 
hands  of  the  poor  frightened  slave.  Then  Androclese  saw  that  it  was 
his  old  friend  with  whom  he  had  lived  in  the  cave.  He  was  so  much 
in  need  of  a  friend  that  even  a  friendly  lion  was  a  welcome  sight.  He 
put  his  arms  around  the  tawny  mane  and  cried  and  cried. 

All  the  spectators  marvelled  at  the  strange  scene.  The  Emperor 
sent  for  Androcles  and  asked  him  for  an  explanation  of  it.  He  was  so 
delighted  with  the  story  that  he  made  Androcles  a  free  man. 

FOURTH  WEEK 

This  day  should  be  a  glorious  culmination  of  the  year's  work. 
Every  effort  should  be  made  to  make  it  a  joyous  time  for  the  boys 
and  girls  and  an  interesting  time  for  the  parents  and  friends. 

Story: 

Play  fair,  play  with  all  your  might,  and  never  lose  your  temper. 
If  you  lose,  be  a  good  sport.  This  applies  whether  the  game  is  a  pri- 
vate one  in  your  own  home,  one  in  your  school,  or  one  between  your 
school  and  another  school.  Do  not  spend  any  time  explaining  how 
you  happen  to  lose;  but  give  due  credit  to  the  superior  playing  of  your 
opponents  in  any  public  game,  or  any  formally  arranged  tournament;  it 
is  customary  to  shake  hands  as  a  sign  of  good  Cooling  and  congratula- 
tions both  before  and  after  the  match.  Whether  your  team  wins  or 
loses,  cheer  the  opponents  at  the  close  of  the  game.  If  you  win,  bo 
be  a  good  sport,  too.  This  is  often  harder  than  it*  yon  lose.  Do  not 
gloat  over  the  defeat  of  your  opponent,  hut  put  him  at  case  by  your 
friendliness  and  generous  spirit.  Speech  as  "This  must  he  my  lucky 
day"  or  "I  certainly  enjoyed  that  game;  you  gave  me  a  good  tight." 
help  to  soften  the  disappoint  ment  of  defeat.  If  failure  to  win  a  game 
was   due   to    one    poison    on    your   side,    do    not    pitch    into    him    about    it. 


240 


TE  KARERE 


Akuhata.  1942 


It*  it  was  intentional,  never  play  with  him  again;  if  unintentional,  and 
he  feels  it  badly,  cheer  him  up  by  having  him  understand  it  was  a  good 
game  and  look  forward  to  B  return  match.  After  all.  a  game  is  a  game. 
Do  not  spoil  it  by  making  it  a  battle  royal.  If  you  attend  a  good  game- 
in  a  group,  keep  your  merriment  within  your  group.  It  is  quite  possible 
to  have  a  thoroughly  good  time  without  having  your  neighbours  on  the 
car  or  elsewhere  think  what  noisy,  ill-bred  boys  and  girls  your  are. 

NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 


MAORI    NEWS    SECTION 

Kua  a  mate  a  Matewai  Geary,  otira, 
kua  riro  ia  i  te  ringa  kaha  o  te  mate. 
He  wahine  kaha  i  roto  i  nga  tikanga  o 
te  Hahi,  ahakoa  he  tauiwi  tona  hoa  tane. 
Haere  e  te  tuahine  aroha  ki  tenei  mea 
ki   te  tangata.      Haere. 


No  te  27  o  nga  ra  o  Aperira  1942  ka 
mate  te  Timuaki  o  te  Peka  o  Kaikohe,  a 
Te  Ahu  Matiu  WiHongi.  He  nui  te  pouri 
me  te  aroha  i  na  mai  ki  te  Hunga  Tapu 
i  tenei  mauranga  o  tenei  Timuaki  pai. 
He  nui  nga  iwi  i  eke  mai  ki  te  marae 
ki  te  tangi  ki  tenei  tangata.  Ko  tona 
mate  he  T.B.,  whakauru  atu  hoki  te  mate 
"tetere."  No  te  29  o  nga  ra  ka  nehua 
tona  tinana  ki  te  "parikarauna"  i  te 
Whare-karakia  o  Kaikohe,  a  na  te  Ti- 
muaki o  te  Takiwa  o  Pei  Whairangi,  na 
Hohepa  Heperi  i  whakahaere  te  karakia 
whakamutunga  mona. 


Ko  Meri  Hare  Eramiha  i  mauria  e  te 
Kaihanga  i  te  20  o  Aperira  1942.  He 
kaumatua  rawatu  tenei  tuahine,  a  i  ahu 
mai  tona  mate  i  reira.  I  te  karakia  nehu 
mo  tenei  tuahine,  na  te  Timauki  o  Wha- 
ngarei,  na  Henare  Pere  WiHongi  i  whaka- 
tapu    te    rua. 


tanga  o  Arona.  Na  Hirini  Rawiri  Kaniau 
i  whakahaere  te  mahi  o  tenei  bill  ata- 
ahua,  whakaaku  hoki  i  nga  mahi  o  tenei 
Tohungatanga    o    Arona. 

E  te  Hunga  Tapu,  ara  koutou  e  mau 
nei  tenei  Tohungatanga  o  Arona,  tirohia 
te  Akoranga  me  nga  Kawenata,  20  me 
107  o  nga  tekiona.  Kei  kona  nga  Icorero 
i  korerotia  i  tenei  hui.  Ko  enei  nga 
korero  e  tika  ana  kia  mohiotia  e  tatou 
katoa.  Tirohia  i  reira  mehemea  e  kuare 
ana  koe.  Ko  enei  ra  nga  ahuatanga  i 
puta  i  tenei  hui  maharatanga  ki  te  whaka- 
hokinga  mai   o  te  Tohungatanga  o  Arona. 

Nga  kaikorero  katoa  i  whai  i  nga  kau- 
papa  i  whakatakotoria  mo  ratou  mo  ia 
wahi  mo  ia  wahi  o  te  Tohungatanga,  ana 
kii,  ana  mahi,  ana  mana  me  ana  mana- 
akitanga.  Ko  ia  nei  nga  kaikorero,  Paul 
Randell.  Wiremu  Parata  Heke,  Louis 
Lanfear  me  te  Timuaki  o  te  Takiwa, 
Eriata  Nopera  o  roto  i  tetahi  o  nga 
karakia. 

Tetahi  mahi  nui  o  tenei  ra,  ko  te  iriiri- 
nga  rumaki  o  Erika  Tahau  raua  ko  tana 
tuahine,  a  Meri  Tahau,  nga  tamariki  a 
Te  Hoerqa  Tahau  o  Heretaunga.  Mo  tenei 
take  noaiho,  he  ra  nui  tenei  kia  matou. 
Na  Rakaipaka  Puriri  nga  mema  hou  nei 
i  iriiri  rumaki,  a  i  roto  i  tetahi  o  nga 
karakia,  ka  whakaungia  raua  hei  mema 
o  te  Hahi  o  Ihu  Karaiti  o  te  Hunga  Tapu 
0   nga  Ra  o   Muri  Nei. 


No  te  22  o  Aperira  1942  ka  mate  a 
Hihi  Rairai  Fred  Tane,  te  kotiro  a  Fred 
raua  ko  Jainie  Tane,  i  te  Hohipera  o 
Kawakawa  i  te  Pneumonia.  I  nehua 
tenei  mokopuna  a  Hirini  T.  Heremaia  ki 
te  "parikarauna"  o  ona  tupuna  ki  Oro- 
mahoe. 


I  roto  i  nga  Karakia  whakamahara- 
tanga  ki  te  Rau  Tau  o  te  Hui  Atawhai 
i  tu  ki  Ngapuhi  he  maha  nga  karakia- 
tanga  me  nga  whakatoonga  rakau  whaka- 
maharatanga  ki  nga  apiha  tuatahi  o  te 
Hui  Atawhai  i  whakaturia  ki  Niu  Tireni 
me  te  rakau  Rau  Tau,  me  te  maha  noa 
atu  tohu  aroha  ki  nga  ropu,  tangata  hoki 
na  ratou  i  hapai,  i  pikau  te  mahi  Hui 
Atawhai.  Enei  whakamaharatanga  i  mahia 
i  raro  i  te  whakahaere  o  Erana  Heperi 
o  te  Poari  o  te  Mihana  ki  te  Peka  o  Kai- 
kohe, a  na  nga  kaumatua  i  reira  ratou 
i    awhina. 


I  tu  tetahi  hui  ataahua  ki  Korongata, 
Hastings,  i  te  24  o  Mei  1942,  he  Hui 
Whakahonore,  Whakamaharatanga  Hoki 
i    te    Whakahokinga    Mai    o    te    Tohunga- 


Itu  tetahi  ra  nui  ki  Akarana  i  te  16 
0  nga  ra  o  Mei,  1942,  i  te  wa  i  mare- 
natia  a  Lt.  Benjamin  Goddard  Christy, 
tama  a  Hirini  Christy  raua  ko  Katherine 
Welsh  o  Nuhaka,  kia  Agnes  Mary  Hikairo 
Grace,  tamahine  a  Puataata  Alfred  Grace 
raua  ko  Reiti  Weatherley  o  Tokaanu, 
takiwa   o   Taupo. 

Na  te  Timuaki  Peka,  Takiwa  hoki  o 
Akarana,  na  Elder  William  R.  Perrott, 
i  marena  i  roto  i  te  Whare  Karakia  o  te 
Hahi  i  Akarana  nei.  He  nui  nga  ta- 
ngata i  tae  mai.  Na  Walter  Smith  me 
tana  wahine  i  whakarite  te  wahi  ki  a 
Hirini  Christy  i  aia  i  kore  i  tae  mai,  i 
te  mate  hoki,  a  i  konei  hoki  nga  matua 
o  te  wahine,  me  tana  papa,  a  John  Grace 
(kei  te  mohio  nei  a  Heretaunga)  me  tona 
wahine    me   etahi    atu. 

E  hoa  ma,  he  tino  pai  tenei  marena- 
tanga.  Pai  nga  waiata,  nga  korero,  me 
te  kai  ano   hoki. 

MAHIA  DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Riripeti    Mataira 

The  Nuhaka  Branch  Sunday  School  is 
maintaining  its  high  attendance  and  fur- 
ther reports  that  its  activities  are  very 
much    appreciated.     The    2i-minute    talks 


Akuhata,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


241 


by  the  children  are  a  special  feature,  be- 
cause the  talks  are  well  given.  The 
parents  of  the  children  are  to  be  com- 
mended for  their  part  in  this  important 
training    of    the    Sunday    School    children. 

The  Nuhaka,  Whakaki  Maori  Club, 
with  Elen  Mataira  as  chairlady,  has  had 
a  sacred  concert  and  a  social  evening  and 
dance  during  the  past  month,  the  latter 
being  held  at  Whakaki  netted  quite  a  con- 
siderable sum  for  the  benefit  of  the  Home 
Guard    cause. 

Some  of  our  boys  already  in  camp, 
while  spending  leave  with  us,  tell  of  their 
experiences  and  the  kindness  of  the 
Maori  people  to  them.  We,  their  people, 
express  through  these  pages  our  appre- 
ciation for  their  kindness  to  our  boys. 
Among  those  who  have  been  home  were 
Sgt.  P.  Tengaio  and  Pts.  Wheti  Nohinohi 
and    J.    Toroaiwhiti. 

Appointments. — Priscilla  Davis  as  As- 
sistant Secretary  to  the  Y. M.M.I. A.  and 
organist  for  the  Y. M.M.I. A.  of  the  Nu- 
haka Branch.  Hiku  Mitchell,  who  was 
recently  baptized,  and  also  ordained  a 
Priest  by  President  Hirini  Christy,  as 
Church  History  teacher  in  the  Nuhaka 
Sunday  School. 

Ordination. — William  Pakimana  as  a 
Priest    by    Eru    Tengaio. 

Death. — Hoani  Tawhiri  died  at  Wairoa 
Hospital,  and  burial  services  were  con- 
ducted at  Nuhaka  by  President  Hirini 
Christy. 

WAIKATO    BRANCH 
By    Howard    Osborne 

The  Taumarunui  Branch  now  has  four 
boys  in  the  forces,  among  whom  are  one 
or  two  who  have  seen  service  overseas 
and  have  since  been  returned  for  service 
in  New  Zealand.  All  of  these  young  men, 
Eddie  Archer,  Victor  Osborne  and  two  of 
Sister  Cribbs'  sons,  visit  their  home  town 
whenever  possible,  and  we  at  home  here 
appreciate  their  comings,  because  of  their 
value  to  us   in  our   Branch  activities. 

On  Sunday,  June  21st,  1942,  we  laid 
to  rest  the  mortal  remains  of  Sister  Bella 
Cribb,  who  passed  away  on  Wednesday, 
June  17th,  as  the  result  of  a  stroke, 
which  necessitated  her  admittance  to  the 
Taumarunui    Hospital    4    days    previously. 

The  'flu  has  done  its  part  in  upsetting 
our  usual  round  of  meetings,  at  which, 
owing  to  war  conditions,  the  attendance 
is  somewhat  less  than  usual.  Still  we 
carry  on  with  the  good  work  to  the  best 
of  our  ability,  and  lose  no  opportunity 
of   showing   our   faith    by   our   works. 

MISSION  GENERALLY 

The  tithing  reports  to  hand  so  far  in- 
dicate that  the  Saints  are  mindful  of 
their  obligations,  and  in  this  are  volun- 
tarily contributing  to  their  own  welfare. 
This  is  perhaps  a  good  time  to  warn  you 
to  prepare  for  the  year's  accounting, 
which  is  due  within  the  next  few  months. 

The  Mission  Office  would  like  to  add 
this  too:  Any  person  performing  any 
ordinance  of  the  Church  should  send  the 
required  details,  such  as  filled-in  Gene- 
alogical Slips  to  the  Branch  President  of 
the  person  or  persons  concerned,  unless 
they  who  are  performing  the  ordinances 
are  Branch  Presidents,  enter  them  in  pour 
proper   records    and    send    the   information 


on  to  your  District  Secretaries,  and  not  to 
the  Mission  Office.  Please  remember  this. 
All  Mission  Record  of  Membership  en- 
tries are  made  only  after  the  proper  en- 
tries have  been  recorded  FIRST  by  the 
Branch  and  SECOND  by  the  District. 
Persons  sending  information  direct  to  the 
Secretary  of  the  Mission  must  be  pre- 
pared for  delays  in  the  issuing  of  the 
necessary  certificates,  as  this  office  has 
to  do  what  YOU  were  supposed  to  have 
done.      Remember? ? 

The  Amadios,  who  have  been  travel- 
ling around,  report  from  Rotorua  that 
their  meetings  with  the  Saints  have  been 
very  inspirational.  They  have  tried 
wherever  they  have  gone,  to  search  out 
the  Saints,  and  in  doing  so  have  accom- 
plished much  good  missionary  work. 
The  Mission  expresses  through  these 
pages  its  appreciation  of  the  work  of 
all,  particularly  Bro.  and  Sister  Dudley 
Amadio,  who  endeavour  to  meet  with  the 
Saints  to  renew  the  spirit  of  the  Gospel 
and    so    renew    their    covenants. 

We  regret  to  have  heard  that  Sister 
W  narekura  has  been  an  inmate  of  the 
P.otorua  Hospital,  but  are  happy  again, 
that  she  is  home  now  and  enjoying  health 
and  the  happiness  that  is  her  due  with 
her    family. 

Bro.  Amadio,  Sr.,  spent  a  week-end 
with  his  son,  Dudley,  and  Sister  Amadio 
in  Rotorua,  and  the  reports  say  that  he 
is   doing   fine. 

Former  Acting  Mission  President 
Harold  T.  Christensen,  is  now  chairman 
of  the  Sociology  Department  of  Brigham 
Young  University,  and  has  recently  had 
articles   in   the   "Improvement   Era." 

President  Rufus  K.  Hardy,  formerly  of 
this  Mission,  now  of  the  First  Council 
of  Seventy,  is  at  present  Acting  Mission 
President  of  Southern  California,  while 
President  Henry  H.  Blood  is  on  leave  of 
absence. 

Bro.  Joseph  Hay.  as  a  Major  in  the 
Home  Guard,  was  a  visitor  to  the  Auck- 
land   Branch   recently. 

President  and  Sister  Cowley  have  been 
married  for  more  than  20  years  as  July 
13th,  1942,  passed  by.  This  wedding 
anniversary  was  celebrated  in  true  mis- 
sionary spirit,  as  Sister  Cowley  was 
absent  from  Auckland,  travelling  through 
the  Mission  since  Monday,  July  6th. 
Although  they  were  separated,  I  am 
sure,  because  of  their  missionary  labours 
and  soirit,  their  oneness  on  this  occasion 
in  these  times  goes  much  deeper  and 
holds  more  for  each  other  than  many 
can  appreciate.  "Te  Karere"  expresses 
these  sentiments  in  congratulation  to 
President  and  Sister  Cowley  on  the  occa- 
sion of  the  20th  anniversary,  with  a 
prayer  of  thankfulness  that  this  Mission 
has  been  blessed  with  their  continued 
presence. 

Tony  Cowley  is  also  in  line  for  eon- 
gratulations  as  he  has  passed  his  third 
birthday,  July  7th,  1942,  on  which  occa- 
sion of  this  20th  anniversary,  with  a 
new  "overcoat  and  a  pair  of  shoes."  We 
congratulate  you,  Nopera  Takana  Meha 
(Tony)  Cowley,  and  feel  sure  that  we 
express  the  Deal  wishes  of  the  many 
Klders  and  friends  who  know  you.  By 
the    way.    Tony     has     for    weeks    past     been 

attending     Kindergarten    classes    in     the 


II'   KARERE 


Akuhata,  1942 


'l'h.    Auckland   Branch  of  late  baa  much 

lu     lie     thankful     for     in     the     work     of     [tf 

Sunday    School.     The   attendance    for    the 
i'.i-t     year    haa    been    conaistentls 
the    SO    mark,    although    th< 
still   coming   in    late.      The   School   Super- 
intendence   feel    very    much    gratified    a1 
the    way    things    are    going,    bul    have   an 
<  i  i  neat     hop,'    that     t hose    membi  i 
used  to  come  will  find  it  to  their  intereal 
to  come  again.     There  are  many  members 

of  the  Church  in  and  around  Auckland 
City  who  could  come  to  Sunday  School. 
and  for  that  matter  come  to  at  |< 
of  the  Church  meetings  which  arc  held. 
The  Chapel  is  still  at  the  corner  of  Scotia 
Place  and  Queen  Street,  and  the  meet- 
ings commence  at  !>  am.  every  Sunday 
fo.-  the  Priesthood,  with  Sunday  School 
at  10.30  and  Sacrament  Meeting  at  7  p.m. 
There  is  also  the  M.I. A.  on  Tuesday 
evening  at  7.30  and  the  Relief  Societj 
at    1.30    p.m.    on    Wednesday. 

There  has  been  a  tendency  of  late  of 
visitors  forming  a  very  large  part  of  tin- 
small  congregation  at  the  Sacrament 
meetings. 

This  is  a  build-up.  we  hope,  to  invite 
your  attendance  at  our  and  your  meet- 
ings. Another  thing:  The  Auckland 
Branch  Conference  is  being  held  in  the 
Chapel  on  August  15th  and  16th,  10  112. 
with  the  first  session  beginning  at  f.30 
p.m.   on    Saturday     15th. 

Of  interest  to  many  people  is  the 
notice  which  appeared  in  an  American 
paper,  of  the  appointment  of  former 
M.A.C.  Principal,  Ariel  S.  Ballif  to  an 
important  teaching  post  in  one  of  the 
Universities. 

Elder  Bodge,  who  succeeded  Elder 
Ballif  as  Principal  of  the  College,  visited 
Headquarters  during  the  past  month. 
Bro.   Hodge  is   now  teaching   in   Auckland. 

MANAWATU    DISTRICT 
By   Polly   WiNeera 

The  Relief  Society  Sisters  of  the  Pori- 
rua  Branch  have  been  working  overtime 
under  the  direction  of  Sister  Peneamine 
WiNeera  during  the  last  month  or  two, 
making  and  designing  aprons  and  pillow- 
slips which  have  been  in  great  demand. 
Many  orders  have  yet  to  be  completed, 
but  now  that  the  material  for  the  mak- 
ing   has    been   rationed    the   work    will    be 

held  up  until  the  Sisters  have  figured 
out  a  way  in  which  to  overcome  this 
object.  Sugar  sack  kitchen  aprons  trim- 
med with  coloured  scrap  materials  were 
made  up  in  record  time  and  sold  almo-t 
as  quickly.  Sister  WiNeera  ha 
much  time  in  visiting  the  sick  members 
and  non-members  in  the  hospitals  in  the 
cit'  and  extending  to  them  the  comfort, 
understanding  and  friendliness  of  the 
Society. 

Arrangements  were  made  by  the  Mis- 
sion President  and  the  Presidency  of  the 
Wairarapa-Manawatu  Districts  to  hold  a 
Hui  Peka  at  Gladstone  on  the  week-end 
of  the  27th  and  2Hth  of  June.  The 
earthquake  which  was  felt  on  th-  24th 
June  upset  arrangements  to  the  extent 
that    roads    were    blocked    on    the    Master- 


ton  t  runk  line  and  t  In-  problem  of 

to     t  he     ilui     pro*  ed     rat  h. 

cult.       However,    to    save    the    ui 

situation,    ami    acting    under    th.-    M 

President's     instruction        !       ■.     Mane    Tnu- 

.  au,  In-    m-w  bride   '  I  Queenie 

and    grandson    Richard)     arrived    on    the 
i  -t    iti  t [me  aa   Bro.  ami  Sister  Wi 
Acre    making    preparation! 
through   to  Gla 

Sunday    School    wa  aal    in 

rirua   Branch,  Katene, 

On   Ho!  in-.        The    t  v.  o 

Bro    Taurau  ami   President .    The  n 

•  il     attended    and     the    ad\  i. 
out    to    the    young    girla    bj     President    was 
duly    noted      i-    that    right,    girla!     While 
in    this     Branch,    President    and     Brother 
Taurau    bleaaed    the  i    Eileen 

Rei     Rene    and     her     buaband,    and     we    are 

bappy    to    report    that    the    youn 

inn     famously     in     health     and     in 

everj    other    r< 

On     the     game    Sunday     afternoon     Pre.-. 

('.■why  travelled  to  Wellington  ami  at- 
tended service  there  which  was  conducted 

by  Branch  President  Bro.  Domney.  and 
the  attendance  exceeded  all  others.  Saints 
from  Porirua  accompanied  President  and 
a  very  inspiring  and  fine  meeting  is 
reported. 

In    the    meantime    the    (iladstom     Saints 

were  n<  disappointed,  for  they 

were   honoured    with    the   presence   of    Bros. 

Eriata     Nopera,     Rahiri      Harris,     Stuart 

ind    Parata    Pirihi    at    their-    meet- 

\nd  if  we  know  anything,  there  must 

have     been    a    miniature     Ilui     there     with 

these    line    brethren    in    attendance.      So 

actually  everything  turned  out  perfect 
and  th-'  Saint-  throughout  the  district 
were    all    Ber\  ed    alike. 

we   regret    to   report   the  passing  of  T. 

who     died     in     th,       I'ever     Hospital 

-nth.  Funeral  service  was  con- 
ducted by  Bro.  George  Katene,  Snr.,  as- 
sisted  by    Bro.  Taylor   Ifihaere. 

It    has    been    our    pi  lin    wel- 

come home  eleven  more  members  of  the 
Maori  Battalion.  The  Hon.  P.  K.  Paikea 
acted    as    master   of   CI  remonies.       S] 

of   welcome   wi-'-   extended   'he   boya,   and 

the     entertainment      was     Supplied      by     1h< 

members   of   the   Ngati    Poneke   Club   The 

1      the      visitors      were     made     DP     of 

members    who   accompanied    the   hoys   from 

!    I  hej    Stated    that    their   fine 

■  ion  wit  h  i  he  hoys  will  ne\  r  lie 
forgotten.  The  action  son--  were  the 
first      they      had      actually      witnessed      and 

I    expresaion. 

Just    as    dinner    was    about    to    be 
the     gathering     was     honoured     with     the 
he    Prime    Minister,    the    Rt. 
Hon.   Mr.   Fraser.  and   the   Mini     -r  of   De- 
fence,   the    Hon.     Mr.    Jones.         We    later 
learned     that      one     of     the     hoys     who     had 
just    returned    was    Pte.    Wixon    from    Colac 
Bay.    who     had     been     decorated     with     t  he- 
Military    Medal   at    about    the   same   time   aa 
George      Katene,      Jnr.,      and      the      people 
no    time    in     showing    Pte.    Wixon 
how    proud    they    were  of   him    as    they   ap- 
plauded   him    on    winning    such    a    distinc- 
■■     :  I, 
Sister    Ella    Hawea    and    daughter    Gail 
hav<     just    arrived    at    her    parents'    home 
-i  a  few  months,  and  are  they  glad 
to    have   them  ! 


"Te  Karere'  Readers  and 
Subscribers. 

Because  of  recent  regulations  gazetted,  "Te  Karere" 
has  had  to  be  reduced  to  its  present  size,  and  in  this 
respect  we  hope  to  have  the  continued  goodwill  and  interest  of 
our  readers.  We  need  every  person  who  can  find  interest  and 
value  in  "Te  Karere"  to  continue  to  subscribe  to  it,  and  make 
an  endeavour  to  interest  others. 

"Te  Karere"  is  indispensable  to  every  Sunday  School  and 
Primary  officer  and  teacher — it  is  an  aid  also  to  some  of  the 
M.I. A.  officers  and  teachers.  Branch  Presidents  and  their 
officers  should  subscribe  to  "Te  Karere"  and  see  to  it  that 
there  is  at  least  ONE  KARERE  IN  EVERY  L.D.S.  HOME. 

It  is  impossible  to  print  everything  that  is  sent  to  the 
Editor,  even  more  so  now  than  heretofore,  because  of  available 
space.  We  endeavour  at  all  times  to  give  that  which  is  most 
needed  and  suitable  from  the  material  made  available  for  our 
publication,  both  to  the  Maori  and  Pakeha  readers.  Your  con- 
tinued support  and  confidence  is  needed  now  more  than  ever. 

As  a  contribution  to  the  conserving  of  paper  and  because 
of  its  high  cost,  it  is  intended  to  bring  into  being  the  "agent 
plan" — where  subscribers  whose  postal  address  is  the  same,  as 
in  the  Branches,  etc.,  to  receive  issues  under  one  cover  from 
Agent  instead  of  separately.  All  Agents  as  they  are  now  con- 
stituted are  dependable  people  and  have  the  full  confidence  and 
trust  of  the  Editor.  We  ask  all  Agents  and  Branch  Presidents 
to  co-operate  with  each  other  in  the  task  of  keeping  "Te 
Karere"  in  its  valuable  position  as  the  Official  Organ  of  the 
Church  in  the  New  Zealand  Mission. 

Find  out  now  the  people  whose  subscriptions  have  lapsed 
and  endeavour  to  have  them  renew.  Watch  the  "Expiration 
Notices"  that  are  published  with  each  issue,  and  remember,  we 
are  not  "thought  readers"  to  the  extent  of  continuing  your 
subscription  without  the  required  notification  and  subscription 
fee. 

Expirations  of  Subscriptions 

AUGUST,    1942 
Brosnan,    Wm. — Auckland.      Crawford,    Rebecca — Korongata.      Edwards, 
Jack — Korongata.      Forbes,    Horace — Frankton.      Geary,    Mrs.    R. — New     Ply- 
mouth Going,     Raymond — Overseas.       Herewini,     Mrs.     Heni — Mataraua. 
Herewini,    Ray — Pukehou,    H.B.       Hill,    Hetty — Whatawhata.       Hill,    Ranjri — 
Whatawhata.        Hammon,     Trevor — Gisborne.  Hammon,      Rei — Gishonu  . 
Hapi,     Mrs.     Karo — Onehunga.           Hill,     Charles — Waikato.  Harris,     Mrs. 
Karanga — Mangamuka.      Karaitiana,    Mrs.    George — Takapau,    H.B.      Kairau. 
Mere — Awarua.      Kelly,    Mary — Hastings.      Karipa,    Paki — Korongata.       Mar- 
shall,    Mrs.    C — Mokau.       Mackey,    Catherine — Tiki    Tiki.       Morris.     Lehi 
Te    Karaka,    R.D.      Morris,    Derrick — Te    Karaka,    R.D.       Morris,    Trevor      Te 
Karaka,   R.D.      Manu,   Kararaina — Taranaki.      Manuirirangi,    Karo      Taranaki, 
Mrtin,     Mrs.  —  Onehunga.        Maunsell,     Peita      K.      Ngawha.        Nepe,     Hine 
Muriwai.       Nepia,    Riria — Nuhaka.       Ormshy.     Mrs.     RongO       Wairoa.       Otene, 
Maliuri       Mangamuka.      Paewai.    Niki       Danncvirkc.     Pederson.    Ata       Nuhaka. 

Pilmer,    Mary — Gisborne.  Pentecost,    dill"     Auckland.       Poipoi,     Honore 

Muriwai.     Pita,  Ngaroma  Whangaruru.    Randell,   Potahi     Onehunga.    Reid, 
Ivan— Auckland.       Ridings,     Rachel      Waihaha.      Smith.     Walter     Auckland 

Tairua,  Hemi  N. — Pipiwai.  Taituha,  Katerina      Muriwai.    Te  Kauru,  Hohepa 

Nuhaka.      Taniora.    Petty  Whangaruru.      Thompson,    Ruby     Christchurch. 
Waikato,    Jack     GiBborne.       Watene,     Merania      Waihau     Bay.       Whi 

Polly     Nuhaka.     Williams,  Wm       Avondale.      Whakamoe,   Mac     Korongata. 
Yates,    Bowman      Kaitaia. 


The  Way  to  Peace 

\I.KK   It.  CASTLETON  of  the  Relief  Societj    Genera]   Board 

I  cannot  remember  a  time  when  I  have  not  had  implicit 
faith  in  the  First  Presidency  of  the  church  as  divinely  guided 

leader.-.  I  have  always  Looked  upon  these  men  with  profound 
respect,  believing  them  to  be  the  Lord'.-  anointed,  chosen  by 
inspiration  to  lead  His  people  and  to  direct  the  affairs  of  His 
Church. 

So.  in  view  of  this  fact.  I  believe  in  these  times  of  uncer- 
tainty and  sorrow,  when  Satan  seems  rampant,  threatening  to 
destroy  the  peace  of  the  world,  when  millions  of  people  have 
forgotten  that  "God's  in  his  heaven"  and  are  relying  upon  the 
wisdom  of  their  godless  leaders,  my  heart  is  full  of  gratitude 
to  my  Heavenly  Father  that  the  members  of  the  Relief  Society 
can  implicitly  rely  upon  the  advice  and  counsel  given  from  time 
to  time  by  these  inspired  men. We  should  take  comfort  in  the 
knowledge  that  these  leaders  will  not  lead  us  astray. 

During  these  perilous  times  we  should,  as  Relief  Society 
women,  accept  the  counsel  and  advice  given  us  regarding  con- 
servation along-  all  lines.  The  Saviour's  admontion,  "Come 
follow  me,"  should  he  our  motto  day  by  day  in  order  that  the 
work  of  the  Lord  may  go  forward.  The  growth  of  the  Church 
depends  in  a  large  measure  upon  our  individual  efforts,  and  we 
must   not   fail. 

.My  great  concern  at  the  present  time  is  for  those  who  do 
not  heed  the  counsel  given  by  those  in  authority.  These  people 
need  our  loving  interest  and  sympathy.  We  should  pray  always 
that  there  will  he  a  spiritual  awakening  in  their  souls.  We 
should  make  every  effort  to  build  up  their  faith,  to  sustain 
them  in  light  living,  and  to  inspire  them  to  keep  the  command- 
ments of  God,  so  that  when  the  ills  and  calamities  of  the 
world  face  them  they  will  be  strong  and  well  fortified.  Those 
who  keep  the  commandments  of  the  Lord  are  the  partakers  of 
that  peace  and  contentment  which  the  Saviour  promised  when 
He  said:  "My  peace  I  leave  with  you,  my  peace  I  give  unto 
you:  not  as  the  world  giveth,  give  I  unto  you.  Let  not  your 
heart   he  troubled,  neither  let   it   he  afraid."    (John   14:27.) 

My  earnest  prayer  is  that  we  as  members  of  Relief 
Society  will  consecrate  our  lives  to  the  tasks  which  confront 
us  at  the  present  time,  and  that  we  may  have  an  abiding  faith 
that  God's  purposes  are  being  fulfilled;  that  the  dawning  of  a 
brighter  day  lies  before  us;  that  right  will  triumph  throughout 
the  world;  that  there  will  be  a  spiritual  awakening  not  only 
among  the  people  in  the  Church,  but  among  people  of  all 
nations,  that  they  will  turn  to  the  Prince  of  Peace  for  divine 
solace    and    comfort. 

— Relief  Society  Magazine. 


<J1 


I 


SALT  LAKE  TEMPLE 


A  Testimony 


To  the  World  Concerning  God,  Christ  and  the  Prophet 

Joseph    Smith,    by    the    First    Presidency    of   the    Church. 

We  bear  witness  to  all  the  world  that  God  Lives, 
and  still  rules,  that  His  righteous  ways  and  His  truth 
will  finally  prevail. 

We  bear  testimony  that  Jesus  is  the  Christ,  the 
Only  Begotten  of  the  Father,  the  First  Fruits  of  the 
Resurrection,  the  Redeemer  of  the  World,  and  that 
"there  is  none  other  name  under  heaven  given  among 
men,  whereby  we  must  be  saved."  (Acts  4:  12) 

We  solemnly  declare  that  in  these,  the  latter- 
days,  God  has  again  spoken  from  the  heavens 
through  His  chosen  Prophet,  Joseph  Smith;  that  the 
Lord  has,  through  that  same  Prophet,  again  revealed 
in  its  fullness  His  Gospel — the  plan  of  life  and  sal- 
vation; that  through  that  Prophet  and  his  associates 
He  has  restored  His  Holy  Priesthood  to  the  Earth, 
from  which  it  had  been  taken  because  of  the  wicked- 
ness of  men ;  and  that  all  the  rights,  powers,  keys 
and  functions  appertaining  to  that  Priesthood  as  so 
restored  are  now  vested  in  and  exercised  by  the 
chosen  and  inspired  leadership  of  His  Church — The 
Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  even  as 
that  Priesthood  has  been  exercised  on  the  earth  from 
the  Beginning  until  this  day,  whenever  His  Church 
was  here  or  His  work  had  place  among  the  children 
of  men. 

These  testimonies  we  bear  in  all  soberness,  be- 
fore God  and  men,  aware  that  we  are  answerable  to 
God  for  the  truthfulness  thereof.  We  admonish  all 
men  to  give  ear  to  these  testimonies  and  to  bring 
their  lives  into  harmony  with  the  Gospel  of  Christ, 
that  on  the  day  "When  the  Son  of  man  shall  come 
in  His  glory,  and  all  the  holy  angels  with  Him," 
they  may  stand  with  those  on  His  right  hand,  to 
whom  He  will  say,  "Come,  ye  blessed  of  my  Father, 
inherit  the  kingdom  prepared  for  you  from  the 
foundation  of  the  world."     (Matt.  25:  31,  34.) 


I  Te  Karere   f 

&  Established  in  1907  L^ 

X  Wahanga  36  Hepetema,   1942  Nama  9  V 


Matthew    Cowley 
Kelly  Harris 
Eru    T.    Kupa 
Waimate   Anaru 


Tumuaki    Mihana 
Etita 

Kaiwhakamaori 
Kaiwhakamaori 


"Ko  tenet  Pe 


■>a  i  whakatapua  hei  hapai  ake  i  te  iwi  Maori  ki 
roto   i  nga  whakaaro-nui.' 


"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  THE  BUSINESS  PRINTING 
WORKS  LTD.,  55  Albert  Street,  Auckland,  CI,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years:  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00    per   year;    $4.00   for   five   years;    $10.00    for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


CONTENTS 


Editorial —  Page 

Tetahi  Ahua  o  te  Mihana   248 

Special    Features 

The  Message  of  the  First  Presidency  of  the  Church   25(1 

Church    Features — 

Sunday  School    257 

Mutual  Improvement  Association   260 

Primary      . 262 

News  from  the  Field 2'^- 


COVER  MOTIF.  The  1942  April  Conference  of  the  Church,  because  of  war  condi- 
tions, was  not  available  i<>  the  general  public,  although  it  was  bald,  being  attended  by 
the  Presiding  General  Authorities  and  especially  invited  guests,  numbering  in  all  not 
more  than  500.  The  Mossa^es  of  the  brethren  from  this  Conference  are  being  made 
available  to  yon.  beginning  with  this  issue,  ami  we  hop«  thai  the  cover  scene, 
will  find  a  new  significance  in  your     j  Ii    ■  <■   n        rmbolical    >f 

"the  law  coming  forth   from   Zion." 


TE   KARERE  Hcpetema,  1942 

Editorial  .  .  . 

TETAHI  AHUA  O  TE  MIHANA 

Ala  koutou  ra  e  matakitaki  mai  ki  tend  whakaahua  o 
koutou  ano  mo  te  tau  kua  muui  nei  ia  Noema,  1941. 

Tetahi  mea  niu  i  kitea  i  roto  i  nga  ripoatatanga  o  te 
Mihana,  ko  te  nui  o  nga  tamariki  e  tika  ana  kia  iriiritia  i  te 
mea  kua  Lae  ke  o  rtitou  tau  ki  te  warn.  Kei  nga  matua  te 
taumahatanga  matahi  o  te  ture  o  te  Ilahi  mo  tenei  take.  Ma 
ratou  ke  te  mahi  ki  te  whakaako  me  te  whakarite  kia  uru  ki 
roto  1  nga  wai  o  te  iriiri-rumaki,  kaore  ranei.  Te  tuarua, 
ma  nga  Timuaki  Peka  e  titiro  haere  i  roto  i  nga  pukapuka 
nga  tamariki  kua  oii  te  manaaki  kua  tae  o  ratou  tau  ki  te 
warn,  kia  haere  ki  ia  matua,  ki  ia  whanau,  korero  ai  mo  tenei 
;akc.  a  whakariterite  ai  mo  te  mahi  mo  te  kore  ranei.  Tua- 
toru,  kei  nga  Timuakitanga  Takiwa  te  taumahatanga  ki  te 
whakahau  ki  nga  Timuaki  Peka  i  raro  ia  ratou  mo  tenei  ahua. 
no  te  mea  kei  ia  ratou  e  man  ana  te  kupu  tapahi  i  roto  i  Le 
ture  o  te  ilain  i  nga  ingoa  tamariki  i  manaakitia  uru  ai  o 
ratou  ingoa  ki  roto  i  nga  pukapuka  mematanga  of  te  Main, 
kua  nukti  atu  i  te  "iwa  tau  te  pakeke.  I  roto  i  tenei  ahua- 
tanga  ko  te  mea  nui  ia,  ina  uru  mai  ano  tetahi  kua  oti  nei 
tona  ingoa  te  tapahi  ki  waho  o  nga  pukapuka  mo  "tenei  take' 
ka  ngaro  ia  ratou  te  tuhituhinga  o  tona  manaakitanga,  ka 
riro  ia  i  roto  i  te  ropu  e  kiia  nei  'mema-hou"  (convert)  kua 
ngaro  te  whakahuanga  "tamaiti-manaaki"  (Child  of  recprd). 
He  maha  nga  mea  kua  penei.  No  reira  e  nga  matua,  nga 
kai-tiaki  o  nga  tamariki  penei,  me  koutou  nga  Timuaki  Peka, 
Takiwa  hoki,  tahuri  ki  te  main  i  to  mihana,  kia  svatea  ai  koe 
i  te  ringa  whakapae  a  muri  ake  nei. 

,ii  aiu  take.  Ripoatia  nga  materiga  o  nga  thema  o 
te  llahi.  Kei  te  man  tonu  etahi  ingoa  o  nga  mea  kua  mate. 
I  te  \va  e  mate  ana  tetahi  o  koutou,  tukua  te  whakaatu  ki  nga 
Timuakitanga  Peka,  ma  ratou  ki  nga  Takiwa  a  tae  mai  ki  te 
Tari  o  te  Mihana. 

1  roto  i  nga  ahuatanga  o  nga  'ohaoha  me  nga  whaka- 
tekau'  kei  te  whai  ake  nei  etahi  whakaaturanga.  Kei  te 
ngoikore  te  Hunga  Tapu  mo  te  tana  ki  nga  'ohaoha.'  Ko  te 
ahua  nei  kahore  te  Hunga  Tapu  c  hiahia  ana  ki  te  awhina  i 
nga  rawakore,  pani,  pohara,  tangata  mate,  mate-kai  hoki. 
Ko  enei  homaitanga  ohaoha,  lie  mea  motuhake  mo  nga  ahua- 
tanga kua  oti  nei  te  whakaatu  i  raro  i  te  whakahaere  o  nga 
Timuaki  Peka  i  raro  i  te  kupu  o  te  Timuaki  Mihana.  Mo 
te  wahi  ki  nga  whakatekau,  e  nuku  am  i  to  te  tau  1940.  E 
tika  ana  kia  mohio  tatou  he  maha  nga  "hoa-aroha"  e  atu 
whakatekau  ana  mo  ia  anake,  ara  e  toru-tekau. 


Hepetema,  1942  TE  KARERE  249 

Mo  te  ahua  o  to  tatou  Te  Karere.   Kei  te  amuamu  etahi  ^ 

o  koutou  mo  te  ahua  o  to  tatou  Karere.     E  tika  ana  hoki.  w 

Koutou  nga  Maori  e  riri  ana  mo  te  kore  o  te  reo  Maori  mo  S 

nga  kai  o  roto.     Ko  nga  Pakeha  e  pera  ana  mo  te  wahi  kia  ^ 

ratou.  Me  titiro  tatou  ki  te  ahua  tanga  o  te  taanga  o  Te 
Karere.  Tuatahi,  i  raro  i  te  ture  o  te  Kawanatanga,  kahore  e 
nuku  atu  nga  wharangi  o  ia  i  kape  i  te  24.  I  mana  tenei 
ture  i  te  kape  o  Hurae  1942.  I  roto  i  tenei  ahua  e  10  nga 
wharangi  e  wehea  ana  ki  nga  rehana  mo  te  Paraimere,  Miu- 
tara  me  te  Kura  Hapati  i  roto  i  te  reo  Pakeha,  a  e  3  nga 
wharangi  ki  te  rehana  Maori  o  te  Kura  Hapati,  hui  katoa 
ai  nga  wharangi  13  mo  nga  rehana,  ka  toe  iho  ell.  Ko  nga 
wharangi  tokotoru  tuatahi  o  ia  kape  he  motuhake  tana  wehe- 
nga.  Ka  toe  i  konei  e  8  nga  wharangi.  Mo  nga  "News  of  the 
Field"  i  roto  i  te  reo  Pakeha  e  tae  ana  ki  te  3  ki  te  4  nga 
wharangi,  toe  iho  e  4  ki  te  5.  I  roto  i  enei  4  ki  te  5,  ka 
puta  nga  whakaaturanga  o  nga  Apiha  o  te  Hahi  me  ie 
Mihana,  ka  toe  iho  pea  i  konei  e  torn  nga  wharangi  hei 
homai  etahi  korero  whai  take  mo  te  nuinga.  Titiro  mai  ki 
tenei  ahua  e  hoa  ma.  I  te  paku  o  te  wahi  e  toe  ana,  kahore 
e  makona  tetahi  wahanga  mo  te  Maori  me  te  Pakeha,  noreira 
i  wanangangia  e  te  Etita  pai  ake,  ko  tetahi  marama,  te  nuinga 
o  nga  wharangi  e  toe  ana  ki  tetahi  taha,  ko  tetahi  marama 
ki  tetahi  taha.  Mo  te  ahua  o  te  nui  o  nga  mea  tango  Karere 
ana.  Kahore  e  eke  te  nama  kei  te  tango  i  Te  Karere  ki  te  500 
i  roto  i  te  Mihana  ake,  Pakeha,  Maori  ranei.  Kei  te  whai 
ake  nei  etahi  whakaatu  hei  matakitaki  ma  koutou  mo  nga 
ahuatanga  o  te  Mihana  e  pa  ana  ki  nga  take  kua  korerotia  nei. 

I  te  mutunga  o  te  tau  ia  Noema  1941,  i  roto  i  nga  ripo- 
ata,  ka  kitea  enei  e  whai  ake  nei. 

Tohunga-nui  5,  Whitu-tekau  1,  Kaumatua  430,  Tohunga 
311,  Kaiwhakaako  159,  Rikona  537,  Mema-tane  1977,  Mema- 
wahine  3414,  Tamariki-tanc  (kaore  ano  i  iriiri)  1409,  Ta-ma- 
riki-wahine  (kaore  ano  i  iriiri)  1458.  Huihui  katoa  9701 
nga  mema  o  te  Hahi  o  Ihu  Karaiti  o  te  llunga  Tapu  o  nga 
Ra  o  Muri  Nei  o  te  Mihana  o  Niu  Tireni.  ECo  enei  mema 
kei  roto  katoa  i  nga  peka  90  o  nga  takiwa  13  o  te  Mihana. 
Nga  mema  hou  i  roto  i  te  tau  1941  e  73.  Nga  tamariki- 
manaaki  (C.  of  R.)  i  iriiri-rumakitia  139.  Nga  tamariki  i 
manaakitia  e  303.  Nga  tangata  katoa  i  ripoatatia  kua  mate  1  \, 

I  te  ahua  o  enei  whakaatu,  tera  ano  he  main  nui  ma 
tatou  inaianci  tonu.  E  nga  llnnga  Tapu,  koutou  kei  wahi  ke 
i  nga  Peka,  taliuri  ki  nga  mahi  a  te  Atua  ;  koutOU  kei  roto 
i  nga  Peka,  tautokona  nga  mahi  a  nga  ropu  o  nga  Peka  me 
nga  ture  o  te  Hahi  i  homaingia  kia  tatou  hei  oranga  mo 
tatou  i  roto  i  te  kikokiko  i  tenei  ao  tae  noa  ki  nga  mea  hei 
whakatuturu   nga   manaakitanga   o   te   Wanna.     K.I  I. 


J5n  TE   KARERE  rlepetama,  L942 

THE  MESSAGE  OF  THE  FIRST  PRESIDENCY  OF 
THE  CHURCH 

Read  by  President  J.  Reuben  Clark.  Jr.,  at  the  Final  Session  o\  the 
112th  Annual  Conference,  Monday,  April  6th,  1942,  in  the  Assembly 

J I  all.   Temple  Square,  Salt  Lake  City. 

(Concluded  From  last  month) 

Sending  of  Missionaries. — It  is  our  duty,  divinely  imposed,  to 
continue  urgently  and  militantly  to  carry  forward  our  missionary  work. 
We  must  continue  to  call  missionaries  and  send  them  out  to  pr<  ach  the 
gospel,  which  was  never  more  needed  than  now,  which  is  the  only 
remedy  for  the  tragic  ills  that  now  afflict  the  world,  and  which  alone 
can  bring  peace  and  brotherly  love  back  amongst  the  people  of  the 
earth.  We  must  continue  to  call  to  missionary  work  those  who  seem 
best  able  to  perform  it  in  these  troublous  and  difficult  days.  Our  duty 
under  divine  command  imperatively  demands  this.  We  shall  not  know- 
ingly call  anyone  for  the  purpose  of  having  him  evade  military  service, 
nor  for  the  purpose  of  interfering  with  or  hampering  that  service  in 
any  way,  nor  of  putting  any  impediment  in  the  way  of  government. 
These  would  be  unworthy  motives  for  a  missionary  life.  Our  people 
have  furnished  and  we  expect  them  to  continue  to  furnish  their  full 
quota  for  those  purposes,  but  we  see  no  alternative,  until  new  rules 
are  made  by  the  government,  but  to  continue  to  call  the  best  and  most 
effective  men  into  missionary  work,  if  they  are  available  therefor. 

Having  in  mind  that  the  worldwide  disaster  in  material  and 
spiritual  matters  has  brought  vital  and  difficult  problems  to  the  nation 
and  to  the  Church, — the  nation  because  of  need  of  manpower  for  the 
armed  forces  and  defence  works,  and  to  the  Church  because  of  the  im- 
perative need  it  brings  to  us  to  employ  in  our  missionary  work  the 
experience,  testimony  and  faith  possessed  by  our  more  mature  brethren, 
we  have  instructed  our  bishops,  presidents  of  branches,  and  presidents 
of  missions,  to  confine  until  further  notice,  their  recommendations  of 
brethren  for  missionary  service  in  the  field,  to  those  who  on  March  23, 
1942,  were  seventies  or  high  priests.  Furthermore,  in  recommending 
these  brethren,  none  but  those  who  are  and  have  been  living  worthily, 
should  be  chosen;  and  as  to  these,  they  should  choose  those  only  who 
have  not  received  their  notice  of  induction,  who  are  not  likely  to  receive 
it  within  a  short  time,  and  who  have  a  real  desire  to  do  missionary  work. 

To  preach  the  gospel,  under  ordination  from  the  Priesthood  of 
God,  is  a  great  privilege,  to  be  enjoyed  by  those  only  who  are  thor- 
oughly qualified  and  who  are  and  have  been  strictly  living  the  com- 
mandments and  attending  to  their  Church  duties.  Every  bishop  will 
carefully  examine  everyone  whom  he  considers  for  a  mission,  to  be 
sure  he  meets  these  requirements.  No  lukewarm  or  unworthy  person 
should  be  recommended.  The  bishop  must  not  in  any  way  play  fav- 
ourites, thus  avoiding  giving  just  ground  among  the  people  of  his 
ward  for  that  unworthy,  unrighteous  thought,  sometimes  voiced  by 
those  whose  sons  have  gone  into  the  service,  that  because  their  sons 
have  gone  into  the  army,  every  other  parent's  son  should  go  into  the 
army,  and  that  none  should  be  sent  on  missions.  This  feeling  has 
behind  it  thoughts  that  do  not  comfort  with  the  teachings  of  our 
Heavenly  Father.  Moreover,  those  going  on  missions  are  amenable 
to  selection  for  army  service  so  soon  as  they  return.  A  mission 
exempts  from  army  service  only  for  the  term  of  the  mission. 

Church  and  State. — The  Church  stands  for  the  separation  of  church 
and  state.      The  church  has  no  civil  political  functions.      As  the  church 


Hepetema,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


251 


may  not  assume  the  functions  of  the  state,  so  the  state  may  not  assume 
the  functions  of  the  church.  The  church  is  responsible  for  and  must 
carry  on  the  work  of  the  Lord,  directing-  the  conduct  of  its  members, 
one  towards  the  other,  as  followers  of  the  lowly  Christ,  not  forgetting 
the  humble,  the  poor  and  needy,  and  those  in  distress,  leading  them 
all  to  righteous  living  and  a  spiritual  life  that  shall  bring  them  to 
salvation,  exaltation,  and  eternal  progres- 
sion in  wisdom,  knowledge,  understanding, 
and  power. 

To-day,  more  than  ever  before  in  the 
history  of  the  Church,  we  must  bring  the 
full  force  of  the  righteous  living  of  our 
people  and  the  full  influence  of  the  spiritual 
power  and  responsibility  of  the  holy  Priest- 
hood, to  combat  the  evil  forces  which  Satan 
has  let  loose  among  the  peoples  of  the 
earth.  We  are  in  the  midst  of  a  desperate 
struggle  between  Truth  and  Error,  and 
Truth   will   finally  prevail. 

The  state  is  responsible  for  the  civil 
control  of  its  citizens  or  subjects,  for  their 
political  welfare,  and  for  the  carrying  for- 
ward or  political  policies,  domestic  and 
foreign,  of  the  body  politic.  For  these 
policies,  their  success  or  failure,  the  state 
is  alone  responsible,  and  it  must  carry  its 
burdens.  All  these  matters  involve  and 
directly  affect  Church  members  because 
they  are  part  of  the  body  politic,  and  mem- 
bers must  give  allegiance  to  their  sovereign 
and  render  it  loyal  service  when  called 
thereto.  But  the  Church,  itself,  as  such, 
has  no  responsibility  for  these  policies, 
as    to    which    it    has    no    means    of    doing 

more  than  urging  its  members  fully  t  )  render  that  loyalty  to  then- 
country  and  to  free  institutions  which  the  loftiest  patriotism  calls  for. 
Nevertheless,  as  a  correlative  of  the  principle  of  separation  of 
the  church  and  the  state,  themselves,  there  is  an  obligation  running" 
from  every  citizen  or  subject  to  the  state.  This  obligation  is  voiced 
in  that  Article  of  Faith  which  dec' a 

We  believe  in  being  subject   to  kings,  presidents,  rulers,  and  magistrates, 
in   obeying,  honouring,  and  sustaining   the  laiv. 

For  one  hundred  years,   the   Church  has  been   guided   by   the   fol- 
lowing  principles: 

We  believe   that  governments  were   instituted  of   God  for  the   be-., 
man;    and   that    he   holds   men   accountable   far   their   acts   in    relation    to    them, 
both  in  making  laivs  and  administering  (hem,  lor  the  good  and  safety  of  society. 

//'(■  believe  that   no  government   can  exist   in  peace,  except  such  la\ 
framed  and  held  inviolate  as  will  secure  to  each   individual  the   '• 
conscience,   the   right    and   control   of   properly,   and  the   protection   of   life. 

We  believe  that  all  governments  necessarily  require  civil  officers  and 
islraies   to   enforce   the   laws   oj     be    same;   and  that   such   as  unit  administer 
the  law  in   equity  and   justice  should  be  sought   for  and  upheld  by   the   I 
the   People  if  a  republic,  or  the  will  oj  lb,    sovereign. 

We  believe  that  religion  is  instituted  oj  God;  and  that  men  are  am 
to   him,  and  to   him   only,   for   the   exercise   oj    it.   unless  their   religious 
promt,    them   to   infringe   upon   the   rights  o>ul  liberties  of  others;   but 
not   believe  that   human  laiv  has  a   right   to   interfere   in   prescribing 


COX  SEC RAT ED  01 E 
It  is  not  proper  for  any 
person  to  use  any  but 
"olive  oil"  of  the  purest 
quality  for  the  purpose  of 
administering  to  the  sick. 
Xo  one  should  disregard 
this  instruction.  until 
otherwise  ad-Xsed  by  the 
Mission  President.  It 
niitst  be  remembered  now 
that  it  is  becoming  in- 
creasingly difficult  to  ob- 
tain pure  olive  oil  and 
you  arc  therefore  advised 
to  be  zrry  careful  in  the 
use  of  your  supply.  In 
obtaining  a  fresh  supply, 
do  not  acquire  too  much 
but  sufficient  for  your 
needs,  and  remember,  it 
must  be  olive  oil,  and 
none  other.  —  Matthew 
Cowley,  Mission  Pres. 


252  TE   KAKI  RE  Hepctcma,  1942 

worship  to  bind  the  consciences  of  men,  nor  dictate  forms  for  public  or  private 

devotion;    that    the    civil   magistrate   should   restrain    crime,   but    never   control 
conscience;  should  punish  guilt,  but  never  suppress  the  freedom  of  the  soul. 

//'«•  believe  that  all  men  are  bound  to  sustain  and  uphold  the  respective 
governments  in  which  they  reside,  while  protected  in  their  inherent  and  inalien- 
able rights  by  the  laics  of  such  governments j  and  thai  sedition  and  rebellion 
tire  unbecoming  every  citizen  thus  protected,  and  should  be  punished 
ingly;  and  that  all  governments  have  a  right  to  enact  such  laws  as  in  their 
own  judgments  are  best  calculated  to  secure  the  public  interest  at  the  same 
time,   however,   holding   sacred   the    freedom    of   conscience. 

We  believe  that  every  man  should  be  honoured  in  his  station,  rulers  and 
magistrates  as  such,  being  placed  for  the  protection  of  the  innocent  and  the 
punishment  of  the  guilty;  and  that  to  the  laics  all  men  owe  respect  and  defer- 
ence, as  without  them  peace  and  harmony  would  be  supplanted  by  anarchy  and 
terror;  human  laws  being  instituted  for  the  express  purpose  of  regulating  our 
interests  as  individuals  and  nations,  between  man  and  man;  and  divine  laws 
given  of  heaven,  prescribing  rules  on  spiritual  concerns,  for  faith  and  worship, 
both  to  be  answered  by  man  to  his  Maker..    .     . 

//'(•  believe  .  .  .  thai  murder,  treason,  robbery,  theft,  and  the  breach  <>j  the 
general  peace,  in  all  respects,  should  be  punished  according  to  their  criminality 
and  their  tendency  to  evil  among  men,  by  the  laics  of  that  government  in  which 
the  offence   is  committed.     .     .     .    (I).   &    (/.    134:1-6,   8)  ' 

Church  Membership  and  Army  Service. — Obedient  to  these  prin- 
ciples, the  members  of  the  Church  have  always  felt  under  obligation 
to  come  to  the  defence  of  their  country  when  a  call  to  arms  was  made; 
on  occasion  the  Church  has  prepared  to  defend  its  own  members. 

In  the  days  of  Nauvoo,  the  Nauvoo  Legion  was  formed,  having-  in 
view  the  possible  armed  defence  of  the  Saints  against  mob  violence 
Following  our  expulsion  from  Nauvoo,  the  Mormon  Battalion  was  re- 
cruited by  the  national  government  for  service  in  the  war  with  Mexico. 
When  Johnston's  army  was  sent  to  Utah  in  1857  as  the  result  of  malici- 
ous misrepresentations  as  to  the  actions  and  attitude  of  the  territorial 
officers  and  the  people,  we  prepared  and  used  measures  of  force  to 
prevent  the  entry  of  the  army  into  the  valleys.  During  the  early  years 
in  Utah,  forces  were  raised  and  used  to  fight  the  Indians.  In  the  war 
with  Spain,  members  of  the  Church  served  with  the  armed  forces  of 
the  United  States,  with  distinction  and  honour.  In  the  World  War, 
the  Saints  of  America  and  of  European  countries  served  loyally  their 
respective  governments,  on  both  sides  of  the  conflict.  Likewise  in  the 
present  war,  righteous  men  of  the  Church  in  both  camps  have  died, 
some  with  great  heroism,  for  their  own  country's  sake.  In  all  this 
our  people  have  but  served  loyally  the  country  of  which  they  were 
citizens  or  subjects  under  the  principles  we  have  already  stated.  We 
have  felt  honoured  that  our  brethren  have  died  nobly  for  their  coun- 
try;  the   Church  has  been   benefited  by  their  service  and  sacrifice. 

Nevertheless,  we  have  not  forgotten  that  on  Sinai,  God  com- 
manded "Thou  shalt  not  kill";  nor  that  in  this  dispensation  the  Lord 
has    repeatedly    reiterated    that    command.      He    has    said: 

And  now,  behold,  I  speak  unto  the  church.  Thou  shalt  not  kill;  and  lie 
that    kills  shall   not   have  forgiveness   in   this  world,   nor   in   the  world   to   come. 

.hid  again,  I  sax,  thou  shalt  not  kill;  but  he  that  killeth  shall  die. 
(I).  &  C.  42:  18-19;  and  see  59:6.), 

At  another  time  the  Lord  commanded  that  murderers  should  "be 
delivered  up  and  dealt  with  according  to  the  laws  of  the  land;  for  re- 
member that  he  hath  no  forgiveness."  (ibid  79).  So  also  when  land 
was  to  be  obtained  in  Zion,  the  Lord  said: 

Wherefore,  the  land  of  Zion  shall  not  be  obtained  but  by  purchase  or  by 
blood,   otherzeise   there   is   none   inheritance  for  you. 

.hid  if  by  purchase,  behold  you  are  blessed; 


Hepetema,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


253 


And  if  by  blood,  as  you  are  forbidden  to  shed  blood,  lo,  your  enemies  are 
upon  you,  and  ye  shall  be  scourged  from  city  to  city,  and  from  synagogue  to 
synagogue,  and  but  few  shall  stand  to  receive  an  inheritance.  (D.  &  C.  63  :29-31 ) 

But  all  these  commands,  from  Sinai  down,  run  in  very  terms 
against  individuals  as  members  of  society,  as  well  as  members  of  the 
Church,  for  one  man  must  not  kill  another  as  Cain  killed  Abel ;  they 
also  run  against  the  Church  as  in  the  case  of  securing  land  in  Zion, 
because  Christ's  Church  should  not  make 
war,  for  the  Lord  is  a  Lord  of  peace.  He 
has  said  to  us  in  this  dispensation: 

Therefore,  renounce  war  and  proclaim 
peace.  ...   (D.  &  C.  98:  16.) 

Thus  the  Church  is  and  must  be  against 
war.  The  Church  itself  cannot  wage  war, 
unless  and  until  the  Lord  shall  issue  new 
commands.  It  cannot  regard  war  as  a 
righteous  means  of  settling  international 
disputes;  these  should  and  could  be  settled 
— the  nations  agreeing — by  peaceful  nego- 
tiation and   adjustment. 

But  the  Church  membership  are  citizens 
or  subjects  of  sovereignties  over  which  the 
Church  has  no  control.  The  Lord  Himself 
has  told  us  to  'befriend  that  law  which  is 
the   constitutional   law   of  the   land': 


TITHING  MONTH 

It  is  here  directed  that 
at  all  meetings  of  the 
Church  under  whoso- 
ever* s  direction,  from 
Mission  President,  Dis- 
trict President,  Branch 
President  or  Auxiliary 
organization  supervision 
during  the  month  of  Oc- 
tober, 1942,  the  subject  of 
'Pithing  as  a  laze  of  God 
in  the  Church  be  dis- 
cussed. It  is  expected  that 
all  responsible  officers  of 
the  Church  in  the  Mission 
will  so  arrange  their 
meetings  that  someone 
during  the  course  of  that 
meeting  will  speak  on 
'Pithing. — Matthew  ( 'ow- 
lev,    Mission    President. 


And  now,  verily  I  say  unto  you  concerning 
the  laws  of  the  land,  it  is  my  will  that  my 
people  should  observe  to  do  all  things  whatso- 
ever  I    command  them. 

And  that  law  of  the  land  which  is  con- 
stitutional, supporting  that  principle  of  freedom 
in  maintaining  rights  and  privileges,  belongs  to 
all  man  bind,  and  is  justifiable  before   me. 

Therefore,  J.  lite  Lord,  justify  you.  and  your  brethren  of  my  church,  in 
befriending  that  law  ivhich  is  the  constitutional  law  of  the  land; 

And  as  pertaining  to  law  of  man,  whatsoever  is  more  or  less  than  this 
cmueth    of   evil.      (  I).    &    C.   98:4-7) 

While  by  its  terms  this  revealed  word  related  more  especially  to 
this  land  of  America,  nevertheless  the  principles  announced  are  world- 
wide   in    their   application,   and    they    arc   specifically   addressed   to    My0UM 

(Joseph  Smith),  "and  your  brethren  of  my  ehureh."  When,  therefore, 
constitutional  law,  obedient  to  these  prii  iples,  calls  the  manhood  of 
the  Church  into  the  armed  service  of  anj  country  to  which  they  ewe 
allegiance,  their  highesl  civic  duty  requires  that  they  meet  tha 
If,  barkening  to  thai  call  and  obeying  those  in  command  over  them. 
they  shall  take  the  lives  of  those  who  fight  against  them,  that  will  not 
make  of  them  murderers,  nor  subject  them  to  the  penaltx  that  God  has 
prescribed  for  those  who  kill,  beyond  the  principle  to  be  mentioned 
shortly.     For  it  would  be  a  cruel  God  that   would  punish   His  children 

as  moral  sinners  for  acts  done  l>\    them  ;i     the  innocent    instrumentalities 

overeign   whom   He  had  told  them  to  obej    and  whose  will  they 

were  powerless  to   resist. 

God    is    at    the    Helm.       The    whole    world    is    m    the    midst    of    a    war 

that  seems  the  worst  of  all  time.  Thi  Church  i-  a  worldwide  Church. 
I;  devoted  members  are  in  both  camp  .  Thej  are  the  Innocent  war 
instrumentalities  of  then-  wai  i  '  "  ■■<•  they 
believe   they   are   fighting    For  hom<         d   country,   and    freed 


-'54  TE   K  \\<\  RE  riepetema,  1942 

each  side,  our  brethren  pray  to  the  same  God,  in  the  same  name,  for 
victory.  Both  sides  cannot  be  wholly  right;  perhaps  neither  is  without 
Wrong.  God  Will  work  out  in  Bis  own  due  time  and  in  His  own  sove- 
reign way  the  justice  and  right  of  the  conflict,  but  He  will  not  hold  the 
innocent  instrumentalities  of  the  war,  our  brethren  in  arms,  responsible 
for  the  conflict.  This  is  a  major  crisis  in  the  world-life  of  man.  God 
is  at  the  helm. 

Righteous  Suffer  With  Wicked. — But  there  is  an  eternal  law  that 
rules  war  and  those  who  engage  in  it.  It  was  given  when,  Peter  hav- 
ing struck  off  the  ear  of  Malchus,  the  servant  of  the  High  Priest,  .lesus 
reproved  him,  saying: 

Put  up  again  thy  sword  into  his  place;  for  all  they  thai  take  the  sword 
shall  perish  with  the  sword.     (Matt.  26:52) 

The  Saviour  thus  laid  down  a  general  principle  upon  which  He 
placed  no  limitations  as  to  time,  place,  cause,  or  people  involved.  lb- 
repeated  it  in  this  dispensation  when  He  told  the  people  if  they  tried 
to  secure  the  land  of  Zion  by  blood,  then  "lo,  your  enemies  are  upon 
you."  This  is  a  universal  law,  for  force  always  begets  force;  it  is 
the  law  of  'an  eye  for  an  eye,  a  tooth  for  a  tooth'  (Ex.  21:  25;  Lev. 
24:20);  it  is  the  law  of  the  unrighteous  and  wicked,  but  it  operates 
against  the   righteous  who  may  be   involved. 


*3 


Pte.  Heber  "Nu"  Smith  of  Nu- 
haka,  youngest  son  of  the  late  Wi 
Smith,  former  District  President 
of  Mahia,  is  now  reported  as  be- 
ing  a    prisoner   of   war   in    Italy. 

Pte.  Patara  "Butler"  Tarawhiti, 
son  of  Kio  and  Mrs.  Tarawhiti  of 
Huntly,  was  reported  killed  in  ac- 
tion in  Egypt,  July  5th,  1942.  He 
went  overseas  with  the  1st  Rein- 
forcements two  years  ago  and  saw 
action  in  Greece.  Crete,  Lybia  and 
Egypt. 


Pte.    Smith  Pte.   Tarawhiti 


Mormon,  recording  the  war  of  revenge  by  the  Nephites,  against 
the  Lamanites,  pronounced  another  great  lawr: 

But,  behold,  the  judgments  of  God  will  overtake  the  wicked;  and  it  is  by 
the  wicked  that  the  wicked  are  punished;  for  it  is  the  wicked  that  stir  up  the 
hearts  of  the  children   of   men    unto   bloodshed.      (Mormon  4:5) 

But,  we  repeat,  in  this  war  of  the  wicked,  the  righteous  suffer 
also.  Moroni,  mistakenly  reproving  Pahoran  'for  sitting  upon  his 
throne  in  a  state  of  thoughtless  stupor,  while  his  enemies  were  spread- 
ing the  work  of  death  around  him,  yea,  while  they  were  murdering 
thousands  of  his  brethren,'   said  to  Pahoran: 

Do  ye  suppose  that,  because  so  many  of  your  brethren  have  been  killed  U 
is  because  of  their  wickedness/ .  A  say  unto  you,  if  ye  have  supposed  this  ye 
have  supposed  in  vain;  for  I  say  unto  you,  there  are  many  who  have  fallen  by 
the  sword;  and  behold  it  is  to  your  condemnation ; 

For  the  Lord  suffereth  the  righteous  to  be  slain  that  his  justice  and 
judgment  may  come  upon  the  wicked;  therefore  ye  need  not  suppose  that  the 
righteous  are  lost  because  they  are  slain;  but  behold,  they  do  enter  into  the 
rest   of  the  Lord  their  God.      (Alma  00:7.    12-13) 

In  this  terrible  war  now  waging,  thousands  of  our  righteous  young 
men  in  all  parts  of  the  world  and  in  many  countries  are  subject  to  a 
call  into  the  military  service  of  their  own  countries.      Some  of  these, 


Hepetema,  1 942  T  E  K  A  R 1 1 R  E 

so  serving,  have  already  been  called  back  to  their  heavenly  home; 
others  will  almost  surely  be  called  to  follow.  But  'behold,'  as  Moroni 
said,  the  righteous  of  them  who  serve  and  are  slain  'do  enter  into  the 
rest  of  the  Lord  their  God,'  and  of  them  the  Lord  has  said  "those 
that  die  in  me  shall  not  taste  of  death,  for  it  shall  be  sweet  unto  them." 
(D.  &  C.  42:  46).  Their  salvation  and  exaltation  in  the  world  to  come 
will  be  secure.  That  in  their  work  of  destruction  they  will  be  striking 
at  their  brethren  will  not  be  held  against  them.  That  sin,  as  Moroni 
of  old  said,  is  to  the  condemnation  of  those  who  'sit  in  their  places 
of  power  in  a  state  of  thoughtless  stupor,'  those  rulers  in  the  world 
who  in  a  frenzy  of  hate  and  lust  for  unrighteous  power  and  dominion 
over  their  fellow-men,  have  put  into  motion  eternal  forces  they  do  not 
comprehend  and  cannot  control.  God,  in  His  own  due  time,  will  pass 
sentence  upon  them. 

Vengeance  is  mine;  I  will  repay,  saith  the  Lord.   (Romans  12:  19) 

Message  to  Men  in  Service. — To  our  young  men  who  go  inC 
vice,  no  matter  whom  they  serve  or  where,  we  say  live  clean,  keep  the 
commandments  of  the  Lord,  pray  to  Him  constantly  to  preserve  you 
in  truth  and  righteousness,  live  as  you  pray,  and  then  whatever  be- 
tides you  the  Lord  will  be  with  you  and  nothing  will  happen  to  you 
that  will  not  be  to  the  honour  and  glory  of  God  and  to  your  salvation 
and  exaltation.  There  will  come  into  your  hearts  from  the  living  of 
the  pure  life  you  pray  for,  a  joy  that  will  pass  your  powers  of  expres- 
sion or  understanding.  The  Lord  will  be  always  near  you;  He  will 
comfort  you;  you  will  feel  His  presence  in  the  hour  of  your  greatest 
tribulation;  He  will  guard  and  protect  you  to  the  full  extent  that 
accords  with  His  all-wise  purpose.  Then,  when  the  conflict 
and  you  return  to  your  homes,  having  lived  the  righteous  life,  how- 
great  will  be  your  happiness — whether  you  be  of  the  victors  or  of  the 
vanquished — that  you  have  lived  as  the  Lord  commanded.  You  will 
return  so  disciplined  in  righteousness  that  thereafter  all  Satan's  wiles 
and  stratagems  will  leave  you  untouched.  Your  faith  and  testimony 
will  be  strong  beyond  breaking.  You  will  he  looked  up  to  ami 
as  having  passed  through  the  fiery  furnace  of  trial  and  temptation  and 
come  forth  unharmed.  Your  brethren  will  look  to  you  for  counsel, 
support,  and  guidance.  You  will  he  the  anchors  to  which  thereafter 
the   youth   of   /ion   will    moor  their   faith   in    man. 

To  you  brethren  aid  sisters  who  make  up  the  body  "(  the  Church 
we  send  again  our  greetings  and  our  blessings.  We  are  grateful  to 
our  II  tavenly  Father  for  your  loyalty,  your  devotion,  and  your  righte- 
ousness. We  love  and  bless  you.  We  are  grateful  for  your  faithful- 
n  youi  tithes  and  offerings,  the  greatest  in  tin-  last  year  in  the 
whole    historv    of    the    Church. 

We  remind  you  that  as  the  Lord  said  to  ancient  Israel,        H 
to    us.    in    an    i  ternal    principle: 

Bring   ye  all  the  tithes  into  the  storehouse,  that   there  ma 
house,  and  prove  me  now  herewith,  saith  tin 
you   the  windows  of  heaven,  and  pour 
on  enoi  •  •'•  to  1  .■  ei\  e  it. 

And  I  will  rebuke  the  devourei      *<    vow    takes,  and 
the  fruits  of  your  ground, 
time  in  the  field,  saith  the   Lord  oj 

And  all  nations  shall  call    \'t 
saith  the  Lord  of  hosts.     |  Malachi  3    I 

We  give  thanks  and   prai  e  to  oui    H< 
selfish  and  i  ighteo  i  '   the  offi<  i 

of  the  auxiliai  ii      of  th  d,  of  the  m 

oman  who   i     helping   to  advance  tl 
ur  blessing  and  love  to  all  ol 
tfl  ,,i    the   Lord.      I  o  •  ur  brethren  of  tl  i 
the  Twelve   and   then- 


-'•;''  TE   KARERE  Hepetema,  1942 

First    Council   of  the   Seventy,   and   the    Presiding   Bishopric — we  give 

our  love  and  trust.  We  thank  them  and  our  Heavenly  Father  for 
their  loyal  support,  their  faith,  their  righteous  works,  which  they  can  \ 
on  with  an  eye  single  to  the  glory  of  Cod  and  to  the  progress  of  Hi's 
work,    so    magnifying    in    righteousness    their    callings. 

We   exhort  all  the   Saints  to  remember  the  great   commandmenl 
which  Jesus  gave: 

Thou   shall    lore   the    Lord   thy    Cod  with    all   thy    heart,   and  with   all   thy 
soul,   and  with   all   thy   mind. 

This  is  the  first   and  great   commandment. 

And  the  second  is  like   unto   it.   Thou  shall   love  thy   neighbour  as  thyself. 

On  these  two  commandments  hang  all  the  law  anil  the  prophets. 
22:37-40) 

And    as    King    Benjamin,    the    Nephite    prophet-king,    said    to    his 
people : 

.   .   .   Learn   that   when  ye  are   in   the  service  of  your  fellow-beings 
only  in  the  service  of  yourGod.   (Mosiah  2:  17) 

May  the  Lord  preserve  the  officers  and  the  body  of  the  Church  in 
health    and    strength,    increase,  our   faith    and    our   testimonies,    endow 
us   all   with   wisdom   and   understanding  beyond   measure,   that   we   may 
all  so  live  that  when,  Ave  are  called  home  we  may  be  saved  and  e 
in    the    celestial    kingdom. 

Our  Heavenly  Father:  Hear  us  in  our  petitions  before  The<  : 
nothing  stand  betwixt  us  and  Thee  and  Thy  blessings;  work  out  Thy 
purposes  speedily;  drive  hate  from  the  souls  of  men,  that  peace 
and  brotherly  love  may  again  come  to  the  earth  and  rule  the  hearts 
of  Thy  chlidren,  that  nations  may  again  live  together  in  amity.  Watch 
tenderly  over  Thy  children  in  all  lands;  bless  therein  the  sick  and 
afflicted,  care  for  those  in  distress;  help  us,  their  brethren  bearing  Thy 
Priesthood,  to  feed  the  hungry,  clothe  the  naked,  give  shelter  to  those 
who  have  no  homes;  comfort,  our  Heavenly  Father,  with  the  full  sweet 
ness  of  Thy  Holy  Spirit,  those  who  mourn,  we  humbly  pray  in  the  name 
of  Jesus   Christ.      Amen. 

— The   Improvement    Leo. 


T<>    Brother   I  Iirini    1 1  eke, 

(  The  thought  here  expressed  is  the  counterpart  of  the 
feeling  each  one  of  us  must  feel  at  some  time  at  the  loss  of 
a  friend.  To  John  Apiti  and  his  thoughts  about  his  friend  and 
missionary  companion  who  has  made  the  supreme  sacrifice 
on  the  field  of  battle  in  the  cause  of  democracy  and  its  righte- 
ousness, zee  here  accord  the  due  appreciation  and  gratitude 
for  this  memorium. — Ed '. ) 

To  Brother  1  Iirini  Heke,  my  Mission  companion  in  the 
Waikato  District,  who  walked,  slept  and  prayed  together, 
night  and  day.  When  we  were  insecurity,  he  prayed  fer- 
vently to  God  for  the  welfare  of  my  dear  wife  and  two 
small  sons,  administered  to  me  in  illness,  cheering  me  with 
his  presence,  inspiring  me  with  his  humbleness,  and  weep- 
ing with  me.  when  after  live  and  a  half  months,  was  honour- 
ably released  to  return  to  his  home  in  Ngapuhi.  Ilaere  ra 
e  hoa.     Haere.     Haere.     Ilaere. 


Hepetema,  1942  TE  RARE  RE  257 

SUNDAY   SCHOOL 

»        Theme — 

!        "OUR   HOMES   AND    CHAPELS    SHALL   BE   BEAUTIFUL"        j 

"For  Zion  must  increase  in  beauty  and  in  Holiness;  her  borders 
\        must  be  enlarged;  her  stakes  must  be  strengthened;  yea  verily  I  say 
J         unto  you.    Zion  must  arise  and  put  on  her  beautiful  garments." 
j  — Doctrine  &  Covenants  82:  14.        J 

SACRAMENT  GEM 

"Come,  follow  me,"  the  Saviour  said. 
Then  let  us  in  His   footsteps  tread: 
For  thus  alone  can  we  be  one 
With  God's  own  loved,   Begotten   Son. 

CONCERT  RECITATION 
(kilatians  6:  3-4. 

"For,  if  a.  man  think  himself  to  be  something,  when  he  is  nothing, ** 
he  deceiveth  himself.  But,  let  every  man  prove  his  own  work.  ancW 
then  shall  he  have  rejoicing  in  himself  alone,  and  not  in  another."  . 

KORERO   A    NGAKAU 

Karatia   (\:  3-4.  *  •         • 

"*Ki  te  kii  hpki  tetahi  ki  a  ia  ano  he  mea  nui  ia.  i  te  mea  he 
kore  noa  iho  ia,  e  nuka  ana  ia  ki  a  ia  ano.  Engari  kia  whakama- 
tauria  tana  mahi  ake  e  tetahi,  e  tetahi.  katahi  ka  ai  he  whakamana- 
mananga  mona  ki  tana,  anake,  e  kore  ano  e  aim  ki  ta  tetahi." 

LESSONS 

KINDERGARTEN   (4  to  5  years). 

Thought:   "The  Re-Awakening  and    Resurrection." 
"Baptism"    (Romans  (> ;  Colossians  2). 
"Christ's   Resurrection"    (Matthew 

"Age  for  Baptism  of  Children"  (Doctrine  cV;  Covenants  68:25-27). 

PRIMARY    (6  to  9  years). 

"The   Wise   Men    from    the    East"    (Mat  I  hew    2). 

"The  Flight  Into  Egypt"   (Matthew  2:  L9 

"The    Story    of    the    Visit    to    Jerusalem"     (Luke 

CHURCH    HISTORY    I  LO   to    l  l    jrei 

"The     Power    of     Nephi's     Prayers"     iHelainan     LO     ■'"  ■!     LI,     "' 

chapter  of  Story  of  Book  of  Moi  mon).  Thou 

the  element     oi    i  ature  through   His  P  phets.       I 

— he  prays     the  Lord's  promi  Ni  pi  fivei    | 

repentance      relief      rain      abundance. 

"Samuel    the    Lamanito"     (II     lamai       L3  \    891 

Book  of  Mormon  ».     Thoughl  :  "God's   Prophel 
Pacti  :  Samu<  ['     mi  lion     in     prophe<  j      a  nev     tai 
Chrisl   came   -the  signs. 

Review     ome  of  put  L  «>"' 

already  discus  i  d  of  the      <  i<     bofoi        »u  bej  n    fo 


TE   KARE  K'l  Hepetema,  1942 

13  DEPARTMENTS    (12  to   15,   16  to   19   years). 

The  Feast  of  the  Passover"  (Exodus  1.  11  and  12).  What  to 
look  for:  How  it  began.  Its  purposes.  Problems:  What  were  the 
instructions  to  Israel  which  prepared  them  tor  the  Passover?  What 
sign  or  act,  if  obeyed,  should  save  the  Israelites?  Relate  the  effect 
of  the  death  of  the  first  horn  upon  the  Egyptians?  Compare  tin 
over  with  the  Crucifixion  of  Christ?  In  what  marine*  are  we  con- 
tinually   reminded   of  the   sacrifice   of   Christ? 

"The  Escape  from  Bondage"  (Exodus  12  and  13).  What  to  look 
for:  Why  Pharaoh  and  the  Egyptians  were  anxious  for  the  L 
to  depart  in  haste.  The  preparations,  accumulations  and  number  of 
Israelites.  The  deliverance,  "It's  Night  to  be  Observed."  The  ordin- 
ances to  be  commemorated  by  all  Israel.  The  route  shown  to  the 
Israelites.  Problems:  Why  did  the  Egyptians  urge  the  Israelites  to 
depart  in  haste?  What  did  the  Israelites  borrow,  and  why?  Why 
were  the  Egyptians  so  angry  when  they  realized  that  the  Israelites  had 
gone?  How  long  had  Israel  been  in  bondage?  Why  should  the  Lord 
point  the  way  for  Israel? 

Review,  some  past  Lessons. 

C   DEPARTMENT    (20   to   25   years). 

"Who  Did  Sin?"   (John  9  and  10).     Problems:  Wfould  other  v. 
than   the    pool    of    Siloam   have   been   just    as   effective   in    healing   the 
blind   man?      Could   a   man   sin   in  the   spirit   world?      Explain, 
ever  a  cause  of  affliction?      Explayi.      Did   the   disciples  believe   in   an 
ante-mortal   existence? 

"Expansion  of  the  Ministry,  Call  of  the  Seventy"  (Luke  ';)  and 
10;  Matthew  10).  Prdblems:  Compare  the  testimonies  of  model 
sionaries  of  Christ  with  that  of  the  Seventy  upon  their  return?  Com- 
pare instructions  given  by  Christ  to  the  Seventy  a»nd  to  the  Twelve. 
How  do  you  account  for  the  difference?  How  are  the  Seventies 
ized  in  our  day?  What  is  their  duty,  authority  and  the  make-up  of 
their  quorum.      (See   Church   books  for  this   last   question.) 

Review  previous  Lessons. 

GOSPEL  DOCTRINE    (All  others  not  already  assigned). 

All  of  these  Classes  are  here  given  an  opportunity  to  catch  up 
with  their  outlined  lessons.  Those  already  caught  up  may  discuss  some 
of  the  beginning  lessons  for  this  class  as  are  outlined  in  "Te  Karen." 
There  are  many  problems  that  might  be  discussed  pertinent  to  these 
lessons. 

MAORI  CLASS. 

RATAPU  TUATAHI 

KO  TE  TAONGA  O  TE  hokonga  mai  ma  roto  atu  i  a  te  Karaiti 
l,  mea  homai  noa  ki  nga  tangata  katoa  he  mea  aata  whakaako  e  nga 
apotoro  o  mua.  Ko  ta  Pacra  hoki  tenei  i  mea  ai — "Ae  ra,  na  te  hara 
kotahi  i  tru  ai  te  he  ki  nga  tangata  katoa,  waihoki  na  te  tika  kotahi 
te  mea  homai  noa  ki  nga  tangata  katoa,  e  tika  ai,  e  ora  ai."  Me  tenei 
ano,  "Kotahi  hoki  te  Atua,  kotahi  te  takawaenga  o  te  Atua,  o  nga 
tangata,  ko  te  tangata  ko  Karaiti  Ihu;  i  hoatu  nei  i  a  ia  hei  utu  mo 
te  katoa  he  mea  whakarite  i  ona  wa  ake."  I  mea  ano  a  Hoani  mo  te 
whakahere  a  te  Kai-hoko,  "Ko  ia  ano  te  whakamarie  mo  o  tatou  hara; 
e  hara  i  te  mea  mo  o  tatou  anake,  mo  o  te  ao  katoa  ano  hoki." 

Nga    Patai: 

1.     He  aha  ta  nga  apotoro  o  mua  i  whakaako  ai? 

?..     Pehea  a  Paora  whakamarama  mo  tenei  take? 

3.     Pehea  hoki  ta  Hoani? 

Tirohia  a  Roma   5:18.    1   Timoti   2:5-6   me   1   Hoam   2:2. 


Hepetema,  1942  TE  KARERE 

RATAPU    TUARUA 

ENEI  MEA  TIKA  ano  i  whakaakona  ki  nga  Niwhai.  A  Penia- 
mine  te  kingi  pono  i  kauwhau  mo  te  whakamarietanga  i  whakaritea  ai 
no  orokohanga  ra  ano  o  te  ao  mo  nga  tangata  katoa,  i  ora  no  te 
takanga  mai  ra  ano  o  Arama,  mo  nga  tangata  hoki  e  ora  ana  i  naianei 
me  nga  tangata  hoki  me  ake  whanau  mai,  a  ka  penei  tae  noa  ki  te 
mutunga  o  te  ao.  I  roto  i  nga  whakakitenga  o  enei  ra,  ka  korero 
tatou  mo  te  haerenga  mai  o  te  Karaiti,  i  haere  mai  ki  te  ao  kia  pa  ki  te 
mamae,  kia  hemo  hoki,  "kia  whakaorangia  katoa  e  ia,  ara  te  katoa, 
kua  hoatu  nei  e  te  Matua  ko  tona  kaha,  nana  hoki  i  hanga. 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  Pehea   te   maramatanga   i    whiwhi   koe    i   roto    i   te   kauwhau    a 
kingi   Peniamine? 

2.  He  aha  te  mea  i  pa  kia  te  Karaiti  i  tona  haerenga  mai  ki  te  ao? 

3.  I  roto  i  tenei  ahua  he  aha  te  mea  i  whiwhi  tatou?      Tirohia  a 
Mohia  4:  7  me  Akoranga  me  nga  Kawenata  76:  42. 

RATAPU  TUATORU 

OTIRA,  I  WAHO  ATU  o  te  panga  o  te  whakamarietanga  mo  te 
katoa  i  ahei  ai  kia  hokona  mai  nga  tangata  katoa  i  te  rarurau  i  pa 
mai  mo  to  Arama  haranga  i  mate  ai  te  tinana  me  te  hara  tuku  iho 
hoki,  kua  tau  atu  ano  tenei  whakahere  nei  hei  takawaenga  mo  ou  ake 
hara  i  mahi  ai,  ka  watea  atu  i  runga  i  te  whakapono  me  nga  hanga  pai 
o  te  tangata  hara.  Ko  tenei  taharua  o  nga  painga  o  te  whakamarie- 
tanga  kei  roto  i  nga  tikanga  o  to  tatou  whakapono  e  ako  ako  nei  tatou 
inaianei.  Ko  te  me  tuatahi  i  hua  ake  ko  te  whakaputa  i  nga  katoa 
ahakoa  ko  wai,  kia  watea  mai  i  te  whiu  o  te  takanga  atu  tau  iho  ana 
ko  te  tauira  o  te  oranga  mo  te  katoa.  Ko  te  tuarua  o  nga  mea  i  hua 
ake  ko  te  whakatuwhera  he  huarahi  hoi  whakaoranga  mo  ia  tangata 
e  whiwhi  ai  te  tangata  he  murunga  atu  i  ona  hara  ako.  I  to  mea  ko 
enei  hara  i  pa  mai  ai  na  runga  i  ana  mahi  ako.  e  tino  tika  ana  ko  te 
murunga  atu  i  ana  hara  me  tau  ki  runga  ki  to  tikanga  kua  whakata- 
kotoria  nia  ana  ake  ano  e  whakarite,  ara:  "kia  ngohengohe  ki  nga  ture 
me  nga  tikanga  o  te  Rongopai." 

Nga  Patai: 

1.  He  aha  nga  painga  o  to  whakamarietanga? 

2.  Ho  aha  nga  tauira  e  rua  o  nga  painga  o  to  whakama 

3.  Whakatakina  ake  tetahi   o   nga   tikanga  o  to   tatou    Km- 
pa   ana   ki   tenei   take? 

4.  He  aha  te  mea  e  tino  tika  ana  kia  whakaritea 
tuarua? 

RATAPU    TUAWHA 
KO  TE  PAINGA  Mil   0  TE   whakamarietanga   mo  t< 
io  okenga  atu  ki  nga  mea  katoa  kua  rite  nei  o  ratou  tau   kua  mohio, 
kua  marama  ake  i  nga  karaipiture  kua  whakatal 
at  u  o  enei  mi  a  I-  i  nga  tamariki  e  ahei  a  • 
Km   Karaiti  o  te   Hunga  Tapu  o  nga   Ra   o   Mui     N 
hei  tikanga  tona   kaupana   he   mea  ata  tirotiro   i  nr 

iraipil  ure    h   I  ;.      '■-•  o    nga    tami 
aroaro  o  te  At ua,  a  me  tae  ra  an  •  o  ratou  tau 
ai   ia  tamaiti 

iriiritanga   mo    ratou,   ara   tona    whakanotongi     kua 
i  oto  i  to  whakamariel    ni  wait ; 

Nga    Patai: 

l.    He  aha   te   mea   nui   kua   marama 
whakatakina  ak< 
He   aha    hoki   to   mea    hei   tirotirohanga    ma   tat 

:;.     He  aha  te  9  hal  te  Mahi  o  Ihu  Ka 

Tapu  o  nga  Ra  <»  Wuri  Ne 


260  TE   KARERE  Hepetema,  1942 

Mutual  Improvement  Association 

SECOND    TUESDAY: 

FIRST    AID    (All    Classes) 
Review    of    Previous    Lesson. 

1.  What  is  the  danger  of  open  wounds? 

2.  Tell   how  you  would  treat    a   wound.      What   disinfectant   would 
you   use? 

3.  What  is  the  danger  of  punctured  wounds? 

4.  What  is  the  danger  of  animal  bites — particularly  dogs  and  cai-'. 

5.  Tell  briefly  how  you  would  treat  a  snake  bite. 

ARTIFICIAL  RESPIRATION 

Respiration  means  breathing,  taking-  in  pure  air  and  driving  out 
the  impure  air  that  the  lungs  have  separated  from  the  blood.  Wh(  n 
breathing  has  stopped  or  been  suspended  the  body  will  soon  die  from 
want  of  oxygen.  Oxygen  as  we  have  learned  is  taken  into  the  lungs, 
picked  up  by  the  blood  stream  and  carried  to  all  parts  of  the  body. 
The  breathing  apparatus  consists  of  the  nose,  throat,  windpipe  and 
lungs.  Air  is  taken  through  the  nose  where  it  is  filtered  and  warmed 
before  going  to  the  lungs  by  way  of  the  windpipe.  At  the  top  of 
the  windpipe  is  the  larynx;  in  the  larynx  are  the  cords  of  speech  by 
which  the  voice  is  formed.  During  swallowing  the  larynx  is  closed 
by  a  flaplike  covering  known  as  the  epiglottis,  which  prevents  food 
and  liquid  from  entering  the  windpipe.  Sometimes  in  quick  swallow- 
ing the  epiglottis  doesn't  close  before  some  object  get  into  the  wind- 
pipe, thus  shutting  off  the  air,  and  choking  or  smothering  takes  place. 
Fortunately,  the  first  aider  can  artificially  carry  on  breathing  for  the 
victim  of  an  accident  causing  suspension  of  breathing,  by  alternately 
compressing  the  chest  and  releasing  the  pressure,  thus  causing  air  to 
flow  out  and  in.  This  is  known  as  artificial  respiration  and  its  use 
will  save  lives  in  many  cases. 

There  are  three  main  causes  for  suffocation — drowning,  smoke, 
gases  of  various  types.  Electric  shock,  a  blow  on  the  abdomen  or 
back  of  neck  may  cause  stoppage  of  breathing  by  paralysis  of  the 
nerve  centres  of  the  brain  controlling  breathing. 

DROWNING 

Many  people  have  a  false  impression  that  drowning  is  caused  by 
the  lungs  filling  with  water.  There  may  be  little  or  no  water  in  the 
lungs.  It  is  a  matter  of  water  entering  the  windpipe  and  shutting  off 
the  air.  One  drop  is  sufficient  to  ao  this.  Thus  rolling  over  a  bane! 
is  very  bad  first  aid  treatment.  The  only  water  expelled  would  be  that 
taken  into  the  stomach,  which  does  the  patient  no  harm  whatever. 
The  thing  a  first  aider  must  do  is  to  restore  the  breathing  of  the  patient. 

The  patient  in  all  cases  where  breathing  has  been  suspended  would 
be   unconscious. —  (''Blue    unconsciousness"   as   treated   in   Lesson   III.) 

The  Schafer  Prone  Pressure  Method  is  recognised  as  the  most 
efficient  and  safest  in  applying  artificial  respiration.  In  giving  artifi- 
cial  respiration  proceed  as  follows: 

1.  As  quickly  as  possible  remove  all  foreign  objects  (chewing- 
gum,  false  teeth,  etc.)  from  the  mouth — pull  the  tongue  forward — 
loosen  tight  clothing,  such  as  waist  belts,  ties,  shirt  collars,  etc. 

2.  Lay  patient  on  his  stomach,  one  arm  extended  directly  over- 
head, the  other  arm  bent  at  elbow  and  with  face  turned  outward  and 
resting  on  hand  and  forearm,  so  that  the  nose  and  mouth  are  free  for 
breathing. 

3.  Kneel  straddling  the  patient's  thighs,  with  your  knees  just 
above  patient's  knees.  Place  palms  of  hands  on  the  small  of  the  back 
with  fingers  resting  on  the  ribs,  the  little  finger  just  touching  the  lowest 


Hepetema,  1942  TE  KARERE  201 

rib  or  floating  rib,  with  thumb  and  fingers  in  natural  position,  the  tips 
of  fingers  just  out  of  sight. 

4.  With  the  arms  held  straight,  swing  forward  slowly,  so  that  the 
weight  of  your  body  is  gradually  brought  to  bear  upon  the  patient. 
The  shoulder  should  be  directly  over  the  heel  of  the  hand  at  the  end 
of  the  forward  swing.  The  hands  should  snap  off.  Keep  elbows 
straight.      This   operation   should   take   about   two   seconds. 

5.  Now  immediately  swing  backwards  so  as  to  remove  the  pres- 
sure completely.  After  two  seconds  swing  forward  again.  Repeat 
unhurriedly  fifteen  times  per  minute.  The  double  or  rocking  move- 
ment of  pressure  and  release  should,  therefore,  take  four  seconds. 
Count  two  on  and  two   off. 

6.  Continue  artificial  respiration  without  interruption  until 
natural  breathing  is  restored — if  necessary,  four  hours  or  longer  or 
until  physician  declares  the  patient  dead. 

7.  While  artificial  respiration  is  going  on,  have  someone  treat 
for  shock.  This  may  be  done  by  covering  patient,  placing  hot  objects 
(tested),  rubbing  limbs  toward  heart  and  aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia 
by  inhalation. 

8.  After  patient  has  been  restored,  do  not  let  him  walk.  Keep 
him  in  a  lying  down  position.  In  moving  use  a  stretcher  or  three-man 
carry.  Keep  him  warm.  He  may  then  also  take  a  stimulant — sipping 
one  teaspoonful  of  aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia  in  a  glass  of  warm 
water,  or  some  other  hot  drink — not  liquor. 

Have  the  girls  in  class  pair  off  and  practice  artificial  respiration 
according  to  instructions.  Blankets  or  canvas  may  be  spread  on  the 
floor  for  the  patients  to  lie  on.  Have  them  change  off  so  that  all  may 
have  opportunity  to  learn  this  important  treatment.  Thousands  of 
children  drown  annually  in  swimming  pools,  ditches,  and  even  gutters. 
You  may  have  opportunity  to  save  the  life  of  a  little  neighbour,  - 
this  matter  seriously  and  take  advantage  of  the  opportunity  to 
how  properly  to  apply  artificial  respiration. 

GAS  ASPHYXIATION 

"Carbon  monoxide  causes  most  of  the  trouble  in  gas  asphyxiation 
cases.     It  is  a  colourless,  odourless  gas,  slightly  lighter  than  air.  and 
is  found  in  automobile  exhaust  gas,  manufactured  gas  used  for  illumin- 
ating and  heating,  smoke  from  fires  and  coal  stoves,  furnaces,  <: 
in  sewers  and  manholes  frequently  contains  carbon   monoxide. 

In  case  of  gas  asphyxiation,  remove  patient  to  fresh  air  and 
render  artificial  respiration  as  described.  I><>  not  enter  a  gas-filled 
room  without  being  properly  equipped  with  gas  mask,  or  ftrsl  throw- 
ing open  doors  and  windows.  Take  no  chances  on  being  overcome  your- 
self or  there  will  be  two  patients  instead  of  one, 

ELECTRIC  shock 

In    case    Of    electric    shock    the    patient     may    he    I'uliml     I, 
a   live   wire,  and   the   first    thing   neccssaiy   would    hi-   to    rescue   hin 
the  wire.     This  is  very  dangerous  :.\\(\  should  hi-  done  with  I 

care    in    orth-r    to    insure      alVi.x     o  '     hhn^-lf.       If    not.    there 

\  ould  he  another  victim  of  the  accident. 

If  a  switch  ia  near*  turn  off  the  current,  hut  lose  no  t 
ing  for  one.     U  -  a  drj     I  ick,  oard,  drj  rope,  dry  clothing, 

bandage  or  other  non-conductor  to  removi    the  wire  from  the  man  or 
the  man  from  the  wire.      Be    lire  the  mi 

on   dry   board  .   nev   i  apers,  etc..   for   pi  d   wrap  the   handi 

w  ii  h  dry  ch.t  him'. 

Begin  ai  tificial  respiration  imm< 
wire.     Proct  ed  a     I  or  di  ■ 

be   continued   three   or   four   I evt      thou 

revival. 


262  TE   KARERE  Hepetema,  1942 

PRIMARY 

FIRST  WEEK 

"Whatsoever  ye  would  that  men  should  do  to  you,  do  vc  even  30 
to  1  hem." — Matthew  7:  L2. 

DOING  GOOD   TO  OTHERS 
Objective: 

To  help  the  children  know  that  helping  others  brings  happiness, 
both  to  those  whom  they   help  and  to  themselves. 

"It  is  one  of  the  beautiful  compensations  of  this  life  that  no  man 
sincerely   tries  to  help  another  without  helping  himself." 

The  two  Bible  stories  for  this  month  are  within  the  understanding 
of  the  children  and  should  be  good  preparation  for  the  third  week's 
lesson. 

Conversation    and    Story: 

The  lovely  story  of  David's  kindness  to  King  Saul  may  be  preceded 
by  a  brief  talk  with  the  children  about  being  kind  to  each  other.  Help 
them  to  see  that  when  we  are  kind  and  gentle,  people  are  kind  and 
gentle  to  us.  Tell  the  story  that  follows  to  illustrate  that  point.  The 
lesson  story,  "David's  Kindness  to  the  King"  will  further  emphasize 
the   objective  of  the  lesson. 

Story: 

THE   ECHO 

There  was  once  a  little  boy  named  Edward  who  was  very  lonely. 
He  had  no  brothers  nor  sisters  with  whom  to  play.  His  Daddy  and 
Mother  did  all  they  could  to  make  him  happy,  but  he  did  so  much 
want  other  boys  and  girls  to  play  with. 

When  Edward  was  six  years  old  his  Daddy  and  Mother  went  to 
live  near  some  great  mountains.  How  he  loved  to  look  at  them!  They 
were  so  high  and  steep.  Some  days  the  clouds  would  travel  so  low 
that  he  could  not  see  their  tops.  On  clear  days  he  could  see  the  little 
snow-caps  on  the  tops  and  the  sun   made  them   beautiful. 

Each  of  the  mountains  had  a  name  and  in  the  morning  Edward 
would  call  to  each  of  them  as  if  they  were  people.  "Good  morning, 
Steep-Sides!      Good    morning,    White-Cap!" 

Once  in  a  while  Edward's  father  would  climb  up  the  mountain 
side-  with  him.  They  could  see  for  miles  and  miles  around.  The  little 
town  looked  so  far  away  and  the  people  seemed  like  dolls  walking 
around. 

Edward  made  friends  with  the  birds  and  little  animals.  They 
learned  to  know  that  he  was  their  friend  and  came  to  play  with  him, 
but  he  still  wished  for  boy  and  girl  playmates. 

One  morning  he  ran  out  to  meet  the  pretty  lake  close  by  his  home. 
He  was  so  happy  that  he  shouted  as  he  ran.  Suddenly  it  seemed  that 
someone  was  calling  back  to  him.  He  listened,  but  there  was  no  sound. 
So  he  called  again  "Hello."  And  surely  enough,  someone  did  answer. 
"Hello!"  came  a  faint  voice  from  far  away.  Edward  was  so  pleased; 
he  thought.  "There  is  another  little  boy  here  in  the  woods."  He  won- 
d<  red   who   it  could  be,   so  he   called   again,   "Who   are  you?" 

But  instead  of  telling  him  a  name  the  voice  just  said,  "Who  are 
you?" 

Edward  thought  it  was  strange  the  boy  didn't  say  who  he  was, 
so  he  said,  "My  name  is  Edward;  what  is  yours?" 

But  the  answer  came  back,  "My  name  is  Edward;  what  is  yours?" 

Poor  Edward!  He  thought  the  boy  was  making  fun  of  him  and 
he  bagan  to  get  angry,  and  he  said,  "You're  a  mean  boy." 


Hepetema,  1942  TE  KARERE  263 

And  the  voice   said,   "You're   a   mean  boy." 

Tears  sprang  to  his  eyes  and  he  shouted,  "I  hate  you!" 

The   answer   came,    "I   hate   you!" 

Edward  ran  to  his  mother  and  sobbed  out  the  story  to  her.  When 
he  had  finished  she  said,  "Go  back  again  and  speak  kindly  and  see 
what  your  little  friend  will  say." 

So  Edward  went  back  and  called  "Hello!" 

"Hello!"  said  a  voice. 

"I   love    you,"    called    Edward. 

"I  love  you!"  answered  the  voice. 

Lesson    Story: 

DAVID'S  KINDNESS  TO  THE   KING 

One  day  King  Saul's  servant  was  walking  through  a  green  mea 
He  saw  the  sheep  nibbling  the  grass.      He  heard  the  sheep  call  I 
other.      What  do  sheep  say?      (Allow  the  children  to  say  'Baa.  baa.") 
Then    suddenly   the   servant   stood    still,    for   he    heard    something 
different.      Some  one  was  playing  on  a  harp — music  he  had  never  heard 
before.      It  seemed   to   be   telling  about  the   sparkling   water,    the    bird 
songs,  the  sunshine  and  all  the  gladness  in  the  world.      And   it   made 
the  servant  happy  as  he  listened.      Then  he  heard   a  song,  a  beautiful 
song  of  thanksgiving  and  praise  to  God.      And  his  heart  was  filled  with 
joy.      He  did  not  move  until  the  song  was  ended.      "I  wonder  who  it  is 
that  can   sing  and   play  so   beautifully,"   he  said   to   himself.      "I    must 
find  him."      He  went  farther  up  the  hill  and  there  he  saw   David,  the 
shepherd  boy,  who  cared  for  his  father's  sheep,   sitting   under  a  tree 
with  his  harp  on  his  knee. 

But  the  servant  knew  he  ha:l  no  time  to  linger,  lit-  had  work  to 
do  at  the  king's  palace.  So  he  hastened  along  his  way.  still  thinking  <>f 
the  sweet  music. 

When  at  last  he  reached  the  palace  gate  he  was  met   by  am 
servant   who    said,    "I    have    sad    news    to    til    you.      Our    king    i 
ill."      And,  indeed,  the  king  was  so  ill  that   no  one  could  help  o 
fort  him.      Everyone  in  the  palace  tried.      Wist-   men   tried,   but   it    was 
no   use.     Bach  day   he  grew  worse.      Everywhere   people 
"What  can   we  do   for  our  king'.'       Is  there   no  one   in   the   land   wl 
help  him?" 

"If  he  could  hear  sweet  music  perhaps  that  would  h  Ip  him," 
suggested    i  omeone. 

servant  said,  'i  know  someone  who  plays  very  beautiful  music. 
I    will   go   for  him." 

He  w.-n!   directly  to   David's  house.      II-    aid  to  the  father.  ' 
king  wishes  your  son   t<>  come  t<>  the   palace  '<>   play   for  him."     The 
fathei   wa    glad  to  i.(-  of  service  t<>  the  king  and  Benl  for  David 
lefl   his  sheep  and  wenl   to  see  what    his  father  wanted.     "David,  will 

in-   harp   to   I  he    palace   ami    play    for   the    ! 

father,  I     hall  be  very  happy  to  help  oui  I  can." 

•■\  i  r<    ■.  ell,   go,   my  Bon.     H   r< 
it    I   have  packed   some  food  and  a  young   goal    for  you   I 
■    i,,    the    king."     So    David    bade    in     mother   and 
odbye  and  wenl   off  t<>  th<    pa 
As  soon  a    I-    arnvrd  \u-  wa  hed  and  dn     ed  hin 
appeared   before   the   king.      He     au    that    th< 

.11     t  kit:   .■■  ei         P  M 

gentlj    and    began    to   pi  a}    the   beautiful    music   which 
to  tell  of  Hi,,    parkling  water,  the  .  ami  all  the 

gladne       in    the    world,      \     th«        •  ■    he   smiled 

aboul    his  suffering.     Th<  -   I ' 
comforted   him.    He    ang   on  and  on   ui  I 

1 1  tter  alreadj 

time  pt." 


264  TE   KARERE  Hepetema,  1942 

The  next  (lay  the  king  scut  for  David.  He  did  so  for  many  days. 
David  lived  in  the  palace  and  Bang  and  played  for  the  kftlg.  He  went 
each  time  with  a  happy,  smiling  lace,  and  he  cheered  the  king  and 
helped    to    make    him   strong   and   well. 

While  David  was  at  the  palace  he  met  the  king's  son,  Jonathan. 
Jonathan  was  a  prince  and  a  very  fine  one.  He  loved  David  and  David 
loved  Jonathan.  They  were  very  good  friends.  One  day  they  made 
a  promise  that  they  would  always  be  kind  to  each  other. 

Next  Primary  Day  I  shall  tell  you  a  story  of  how,  when  David  was 
king,  he  kept  the  promise  he  made  to  Jonathan. 

SECOND  WEEK 

A  man  that  hath  friends  must  show  himself  friendly. — Prov.  18:24. 

JOY   THROUGH   KINDNESS 
Objective: 

To  help  the  child  develop  attitudes  of  thoughtfulness  and  kindness 
towards  others. 

For    the    Teacher: 

A  child  in  a  Mission  Primary  said  this  in  her  opening  prayer: 
'Dear  Heavenly  Father,  help  us  to  be  kind  to  our  teacher;  she  is  so 
kind  to   us." 

Kindness  is  to  be  stressed  to-day.  As  you  tell  the  lesson  story 
emphasize  this  quality  of  character  in  David.  Help  the  children  to 
appreciate  the  feelings  David  and  Jonathan  had  for  each  other.  Show 
how  David's  desire  to  be  kind  prompted  him  to  inquire  if  any  of 
Jonathan's  children  were  living.  It  is  not  necessary  to  excite  the 
sympathy  of  the  children  for  the  lameness  of  the  boy.  Bring  out  the 
fact  that  David  took  the  son  of  his  good  friend  Jonathan  into  the  palace 
home  and  restored  to  the  boy  all  of  Jonathan's  possessions. 

Lesson    Story: 

DAVID    IS   KIND   TO  JONATHAN'S   SON 

Jonathan's  son  was  only  five  years  old  when  his  father  kissed  him 
goodbye  and  went  away  to  war.  The  little  boy  was  very  proud  of  his 
strong,  noble  father.  He  knew  his  father  was  going  to  help  people 
who  were  in  great  trouble.  It  was  lonely  when  his  father  went  away; 
hut  oven  little  boys  have  to  learn  to  be  brave.  And  then,  he  was  not 
left  alone,  because  his  kind  nurse  was  there  to  take  care  of  him. 

One  day  the  little  boy  was  playing  near  his  home,  when  he  saw 
some  men  travelling  very  fast.  He  heard  them  call,  "Prince  Jonathan 
is  dead."  He  ran  to  his  nurse  for  there  was  no  one  else  to  help  him. 
The  nurse  knew  that  the  little  boy  was  in  great  danger  now  that  his 
father  was  dead.  She  must  take  him  away  from  the  old  home.  She 
gathered  him  in  her  arms  quickly  and  ran  with  him.  She  was  fright- 
ened and  ran  so  swiftly  that  she  stumbled  and  the  little  boy  fell  out 
of  her  arms.  It  was  such  a  bad  fall,  and  oh,  how  his  feet  hurt!  The 
nurse  was  sorry,  for  she  had  meant  only  to  be  kind.  She  picked  him 
up  again  and  ran  on  and  on,  for  she  knew  that  she  must  get  him  to  a 
place  of  safety. 

At  last  she  found  a  new  home  for  him,  but  when  he  tried  to  stand 
on  his  feet  he  could  not.  And  never  again  was  he  able  to  walk  and  run 
and  jump  and  play  like  other  boys.  All  the  lands  and  riches  of  his 
father  were  lost.  He  had  no  home  and  no  kind  father  or  mother  to 
care  for  him.  He  lived  for  a  while  with  one  and  then  with  another, 
and  finally  with  a  farmer,  and  he  grew  up  with  the  farmer's  boys. 

Once  he  heard  that  a  new  king  had  been  chosen  to  rule  his  father's 
people — the   good    King    David. 

Long  ago,  David  and  the  little  boy's  father,  Jonathan,  had  been 
<#reat    friends.      They    had    loved    each    other    dearly.      And    now    that 


Hepetema,  1942  TE  KARERE  265 

Heavenly  Father  had  been  so  kind  to  David  and  made  him  king,  and 
given  him  everything  a  king  could  wish  for — a  palace,  to  live  in,  plenty 
of  good  food,  fine  clothing  to  wear  and  friends  to  love — he  was  very 
thankful.  He  was  a  good  king  and  wanted  to  make  others  happy. 
He  often  thought  of  his  friend  Jonathan  and  wished  that  some  of  his 
family  were  living  so  he  might  help  them.  He  did  not  know  about 
the  lame  boy  until  one  day  he  said  to  his  servant  Ziba,  "Are  any  of 
Jonathan's   children  living?" 

"Yes,"  answered  Ziba;  "he  has  one  son  living  in  the  country. 
He  is  lame." 

"Bring  him  to  me,"  said  the  king,  "that  I  may  show  kindness  unto 
him." 

The  lame  boy  was  very  much  surprised  when  the  servant  went  to 
him  and  said,   "King  David  has  sent  for  you  to  come  to  his  palace." 

The  boy  wondered  why  the  king  had  sent  for  him.  "I  am  lame 
and  cannot  work  or  be  a  soldier  for  him,"  he  thought.  He  was  almost 
afraid  to  go. 

But  when  Ziba  took  him  to  the  king  all  fear  left  him,  for  the 
king  said,  "Fear  not,  I  have  sent  for  you  to  come  and  live  with  me  in 
the  palace.  From  now  on  you  are  to  eat  at  my  table.  All  the  land 
that  was  your  father's  shall  be  your  land,  and  Ziba  shall  be  your  ser- 
vant." And  he  turned  to  Ziba  and  said,  "You  and  your  children  are 
to  take  care  of  the  land,  ?nd  all  that  is  raised  on  it  shall  belong  to 
Jonathan's  lame  son  who  is  really  a  prince." 

Ziba,  the  servant,  was  glad  to  do  as  he  was  told.  And  the  lame 
prince  was  happy  and   King  David  was  happy. 

THIRD  WEEK 

A   HAPPY   TIME   TOGETHER 
Objective: 

To  set  up  situations  where  children  may  do  acts  of  courtesy  and 
kindness   toward   each   other. 

For    the    Teacher: 

Did  you  ever  stop  to  think  that  children  really  like  peace  and 
order  in  their  classes?  They  work  or  play  best  where  something  is 
accomplished  and  behaviour  is  expected.  This  is  particularly  true  of 
the  play  period. 

There  are  two  types  of  teachers.  One  lets  the  children  "run  the 
show."  In  her  classroom  the  children  arc  not  happy;  work  goes  on  in 
confusion.  There  is  no  respect  for  the  teacher.  The  other  has  a 
clear  idea  of  what  real  freedom  is,  and  has  a  quiet  force  to  control 
every  situation.  In  her  classroom,  work  goes  smoothly,  tin  children 
are  happy,  and  there  is  not   only   respect   luit    affection    for  the  teacher. 

Earnest  prayer  and  sincere  preparation  will  help  to  put  you  with 
the  second  type,  which  without  doubt,  is  the  happy  successful  teacher. 

II*    there    is    one    period     more    than    another    for    which    you     need 

Rood  preparation,  it  is  the  play  period.  "Plan  your  work  and  work 
your  plan"  is  good  advice 

Story: 

RED   CHEEKS    AND    BLACK   CURLS 

Lola  sat  on  the  front  steps  eating  one  of  the  popcorn  balls  grand 

had    made    for    her.       She    W8  it    the    house    next    door. 

A  new  family  had  moved  there  and  grandmol 
i  hey  had  children. 

"I     hop,,    there    i:     ;i     little    '-ill    JU    '  dd    like    me."     I.ela    had 

declared  eagerly. 

It      was     pleasant      ;it      -■  ta  ml  mot  In  Hlicl  >  had     done 

everything  she  could  to  make  Lela'  a  hn|  p.v  one;  but  there  hadn't 

been  any  litl le  girl  i  to  play  with,  and   I  i 


TE   KARERE  Hcpetcma,  1942 

Presently  a  little  girl  came  out  of  the  house  next  door.  She  had 
.short  black  curls  and  a  rod  checked  dress,  and  she  looked  to  be  just 
Lela's  age. 

Lela  smiled  over  at  her  and  she  smiled  hack,  and  in  just  a  few 
minutes    they    were    both    out    by    the    low    hedge    that    divided    the    two 

lawns,  getting  acquainted. 

"Let's  bring  out  our  dolls  and  play  in  my  playhouse."  suggested 
Lela  at  last. 

"That  will  be  nice,"  answered  tin-  new  gill,  hut  further  plans  were 
cut   short   by   a   voice   calling,    "Jane    dear,    mother   wants    you." 

"I'll  be  back  to  play  with  you  in  a  minute,"  promised  -lane,  skip- 
ping into  the  house. 

Lela  ran  in,  too,  to  get  her  doll  and  to  tell  grandmother  of  the  fun 
she  was  going  to  have.  Then  she  came  out  and  sat  down  on  the  steps 
again  to  wait  for  Jane. 

Soon  the  red  cheeks  and  black  curls  of  the  new  little  girl  appeared 
once  more  in  the  doorway.  But  this  time  she  didn't  come  over  to  the 
hedge!  Instead  she  picked  up  a  little  white  kitten  and  began  playing 
with  it  just  as  though  nothing  had  ever  been  planned  about  playing 
dolls  with  Lela. 

"Why,  I  think  she's  mean,"  declared  Lela  hotly  to  herself,  and 
ran  into  the  house  to  tell  grandmother  about  it. 

Do  not  judge  too  quickly,  dear,"  said  grandmother,  patting  tie- 
flushed,  angry  little  face.  "Perhaps  there  is  a  reason  we  don't  under- 
stand." 

When  Lela  went  outside  again  the  little  girl  and  the  kitten  wen 
gone,  but  a  minute  later  a  flying  figure  with  a  big  doll  came  dashing 
over  to   the   hedge. 

"I  had  to  help  mother,"  she  called  gayly,  "but  I  came  as  soon  as 
I    could." 

Before  the  puzzled  Lela  could  reply,  the  little  girl  with  the  kitten 
stood  once  more  in  the  doorway.  "Why!"  exclaimed  Lela,  staring  hard. 
"are  there  two   of  you?" 

"Yes,"  laughed  Jane.      "We're  twins. 

"Oh,"  said  Lela,  slowly,  "Now  I  understand.  It  was  Jean  who 
came  out  on  the  steps  while  I  was  waiting  for  you." 

"Yes,  she  has  been  sick,  so  until  she  gets  stronger  mother  calls  me 
when  she  wants  one  of  us  to  help  her." 

"Won't  she  plav  with  us  too?"  in  vited  Lela.  "There  is  room 
in  my  nlayhouse  for  all  of  us.   and  I  have  just  three  popcorn  balls  left." 

"Of  course,"  replied  Jane,  "She'd  like  to." 

A  few   minutes  later  Lela  led  two  little  girls   with   bobbing   black 
curls  and  red  checked  dresses  in  to  see  grandmother.      "I  have  t  \\ 
playmates,  now,"  she  said  happily. 

FOURTH  WEEK 

THE   PLAY   HOUR 
Objective: 

To  give  the  children  joy  in  play  and   song. 
For    the   Teacher: 

Again  we  reneat  that  this  period  will  not  be  profitable  if  the  chil- 
dren are  allowed  to  be  boisterous  and  rude.  A  certain  amount  of 
noise  is  permissible,  <>f  course,  but  noise  is  not  noise  if  the  children 
are  doing  the   >  ight  thing  at  the  right  time. 

If   it   is   convenient   take   the    children    outdoors   for   their   games, 
lay  got  out  of  Rand  unless  you  have  your  programme  of  games 
and   dances   well   planned  and  well  in  mind  yourself. 

The  story  may  U  low  the  group  of  songs.  This  will  give  the 
children  a  euiet  ooriod  after  the  activity  in   music. 

After  the  ptoud  o/  games  in  the  fresh  air,  have  the  children  go 
back  in   th°   class  r  a  sonar  and  the  closing  prayor. 


Hepetema,  1942  TE  KARERE  267 

Let  one  child  say  "The  Lord'  Prayer"  and  then  lead  all  the  chil- 
dren in  an  opening  prayer. 
Songs: 

Children  love  to  sing.  They  love  the  songs  they  know  best. 
Observe  closely  and  note  which  songs  they  sing  most  enthusiastically. 
Have  your  songs  selected  and  be  sure  your  organist  has  the  list,  and 
that  her  song  book  is  ready  to  turn  quickly  to  the  songs  you  are  going 
to  sing.  Be  sure  the  children  know  the  lines  of  the  songs.  It  is  better 
to  sing  fewer  songs  and  know  them  well  than  to  only  half  know  a  great 
number. 

WHY  THE  BLUEBIRD  CARRIES  HAPPINESS 

Once  there  was  a  little  fairy  whose  name  was  Good  Luck.  She 
was  known  and  loved  all  over  the  world  because  she  carried  Happiness 
to  everyone.  This  Happiness  she  carried  in  an  ugly  black  box,  and 
though  it  could  only  hold  a  tiny  bit,  it  was  always  full.  Now,  Good 
Luck  had  to  be  very  careful  of  her  gift,  for  if  she  lost  Happiness  the 
world   would   be   very   sad. 

One  night  she  was  very  tired.  It  was  so  dark  that  not  a  star  could 
be  seen.  Good  Luck  had  to  find  a  place  where  she  could  hide  her 
treasure.  She  thought  that  perhaps  the  trees  would  help  her,  so  she 
asked  a  pine  tree  to  hold  it  while  she  slept.  The  pine  tree  answered  : 
"What!  That  ugly  little  box?  No,  indeed.  I  have  too  many  pretty 
cones  to  hold." 

The  tired  little  fairy  hurried  on  until  she  came  to  a  fir  tree  whom 
she  asked  to  hold  her  precious  gift.  But  the  fir  was  too  busy  and  would 
not  bother  with  it. 

Thus  each  tree  gave  some  excuse.  Poor  Good  Luck  was  about  to 
cry  when  she  spied  a  tree  whose  branches  drooped  to  the  ground. 

"Will  you  hold  my  box,  little  tree?"  she  cried. 

"My  branches  bend  low,"  sighed  the  little  tree  sadly,  "and  I  am 
too  ugly  to  be  of  much  use.      I  will  watch  it.      Lay  it  near  my  trunk." 

Early  the  next  morning  Good  Luck  awoke,  and  opening  her  box 
she  spread  a  tiny  bit  of  its  contents  on  the  tree.  Then  she  thanked 
the  kind  tree  and  flew  away.  Later  the  sun  was  surprised  to  find  the 
bent  tree  straight  and  its  branches  reaching  up  to  the  sky. 

Now,  that  night,  a  little  brown  bird  came  to  the  branches  of  the 
tree.  She  told  the  bird  of  Good  Luck  and  her  box;  hut  she  made  a 
mistake  when  she  told  him  she  thought  the  box  was  golden  instead  of 
black.  This  little  brown  bird  was  so  ugly  thai  it  didn't  have  many 
friends.  Usually  he  was  too  busy  helping  others  to  think  of  himself, 
hut  this  night  he  was  determined  to  find  Good  Lurk  and  ask  her  to  give 
him  beautiful  plumage  like  that  which  the  other  birds  had. 

Out    he    started    on    his    search.      One    day    as    he    was    flying    over 
a  brook,  he  saw    a    fairy  caught    in  a  spider's  web.      Quickly  cutting  the 
threads  of  the   web,   he   set    the   fairy   free   and   put    her   en   hi 
and  flew  away.       Alter  he  put    her  down  he  saw  that   she  carried 
black  box.     The  fairy  asked  him  if  he  would  carry  it   for  her. 

d.     Before  flying  away  he  asked  the  fairy  if  she  could  tell  him 
where  he  could  find  Go.,,!  i.ii,  I    and  her  boa  i^\'  Happin< 

"I  am   Good    Luck,"   answered   the   fairy,   "and   you   have  tin    i 

Happiness  on  your  back.     Happine  a  i  nM   alwayi   In  gold  boxes.    It  is 

found    wherever    t  rue    I  er\  ic< 

The  little  brown  bird  flew  to  the  brook  to  see  the  box,  but  ir 
he  saw  a   beautiful   bluebird.     And   that    i-   how    the   bluebird   •. 

(•(dour,    and    why    he    is   such    a    happy    little    bird. 
Games    and    Dances: 

The  children     hould   I    o*    a   numb<  •  well 

by    tins    time.       The    circl  which    all    can    take    pari    wdl    no 

doubl    he    host. 


I  I     KARERE 


Hepetema,  1942 


NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 


MAORI    SECTION    NEWS 
TOEOTORO    A    TE    POAR1    HI  I    A  I  \ 
WHAI     o     HAURAKI.      l      ■       ait. 
wiki    tuatoru    0     Hutic    k;i     haere    atu    au     i 

Roto  ua  ki  Te  Puke  ki  te  kainga  o 

•a  Nicholls.  1  hui  tnatou  i  te 
do.  Tino  pai  te  wairua  i  roto  i  to  ma- 
boo  karakia.  I  reira  ki  Tauranga  ki  te 
kainga    o    Sister   T.    I 

a  i  te  baterei  ki  te  Soldiers  Parade  i 
Tauranga  ano'.  I  reira  ka  haere  atu  ki 
ki  te  kainga  o  Siater  Ngawajkau- 
kau  Kohu.  I  tu  te  huihuinga  o  te  Hui 
Atawhai  i  te  ratapu,  he  nui  nga  patai 
me  te  pai  hoki  o  te  wairua  kotahi,  tino 
whiwhi  nga  Diema  ki  te  hari.  I  te  mane 
ka  haere  atu  ki  te1  Wairoa  ki  Te  Puna,  i 
reria  ka  haere  atu  au  ki  Waihi  i  reira 
ka  tutaki,  noho  hoki  ki  te  kainga  o  Bro. 
Tino  pai  tenei  tutaki- 
tanga  ki  tona  whanau,  ka  torotoro,  i  nga 
whanaunga  a  haere  atu  ki  Paeroa  ki  te 
kainga  o  Brother  and  Sister  Lanfear,  tino 
pai  hoki  to  matou  hui  i  reira.  Ko  Omahu 
me  Kirikiri  nga  kainga  o  muri  i  enei, 
ara  i  noho  au  ki  te  kainga  o  Sister  Rosie 
Watene.  He  nui  te  koa  i  tenei  tuta- 
kitanga.  Hooi  ra  e  hoa  ma  kei  te  pai 
ttga    wahine   o    roto    i    te   Hui   Atawhai. 

— Na  Mihi  Ormsby  te  Ripoata. 

MANAWATU     DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Pollv    Wi    Neera 

We  have  had  quite  a  number  of 
Saints  visit  our  fair  city  during  the  past 
month  or  two.  A  rather  striking  ftgur 
presented  itself  on  the  Wellington  Rail- 
way Station  one  week-end  last  month. 
Among  the  hundreds  of  people  who 
hustled  to  and  fro  I  could  not  help  notic- 
ing Lieut.  Benjamin  Christy,  son  of  Bro. 
Sydney  Christy  of  Nuhaka,  looking  very 
neat  in  his  officer's  uniform,  and  may  we 
take  this  opportunity  of  offering  our 
congratulations    on    his    promotion. 

Sister  Violet  Meha  (her  married  name 
being  unknown  to  me)  was  another  one 
busy  throng  who  didn't  happen  to 
lose  bers<  If  in  the  crowd.  She  was  on  her 
way  to  visit  her  aunt  at  Madsen,  Sister 
Hui  Tan  Elkington,  who  has  been  con- 
fined to  a  sick  bed.  and  we  sincerely  hope 
and  pray  that  she  will  be  blessed  with 
health    and    strength. 

A  Hui  was  held  at  Otaki  last  month 
to  welcome  home  from  the  Middle  East 
Major  Rangi  Royal,  who  has  been  ap- 
pointed to  a  very  responsible  position 
as  far  as  the  Maori  Battalion  is  con- 
cerned in  N.Z.  The  Prime  Minister, 
Sir  A.  T.  Ngata,  th<  Hon.  P.  K.  I'aikea 
and  others  were  present.  Bro.  Sydney 
Christy  delivered  a  very  outstanding 
speech  on  this  occasion,  which  was  well 
d  by  all.  I'.ro.  Rahiri  Harris  of 
Dannevirke    was    also    present. 

The  news  has  been  received  of  the 
death  of  Lt.-Col.  E.  T.  W.  Love,  first 
Maori  to  command  the  Maori  Battalion 
overseas,  who  was  killed  in  action.  A 
special  day  was  held  at  his  hom<  in 
Petone,  where  friends  and  relatives  could 
pay  their  respects  to  this  fine  leader.  A 
number  of  Saints  from  the  Porirua 
Branch   were  present  at   this   gathering. 


MAHIA   DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Riripeti    M.i.. 
Th<  ingrng 

competitions  dur the  past   two  months. 

■ 

Efforts 
of   all 

on  the  ooming  Qold  and  Green  Ball, 
which     even;     will     benefit     the     P 

Fund. 

Sistei  er  Kapu 

Smith    \  isite.i    each    of   the    Saint 

wit  h    Instruct  w  e    are 

pleased    to    report  tmth    is 

on   her   Primary   work 
of   four    >• 

The    p<    »ple    of    Nuhaka    were    )■!■ 
receive    Major    Rangi    Koyal   and   Sir    \      1. 
when   they    \  isited   the   community 
and    addressed    a    lai  <>f    the 

[elusion  of  which   the 
Relief  rs    made    a    presenta- 

tion   to    Mrs.    Royal   of   a    "quilt." 

Competitions     in     weaving     have     bean 
;  he    Society,    and    to    dat 1 

Parae  Walker  tied  for  the  table  mat,  and 
Hannah    Tengaio    firsl    and    second    with 

Mana    Mahanga    third     for    kits. 

Mrs.    Robin    Waerea   of   Auckland,   whose 

husband    is    overseas,    is    now    on   a    visit 

to  her  mother-in-law.  Mrs.  Em  ere 
Waerea. 

Sister  Elsie  Loader,  who  spent  her 
furlough  with  us.  is  looking  well  and  fit 
three  months  in  an  army  can- 
teen  unit. 

Brothers     Maui     Whaanga,     Riki     Hapi 

and  Paku  Solomon  were  ordain <  d  deacons. 
Births. — To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Wiremu 
Pakimana,  a  son,  Sydney  Calgary  Alberta. 
To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Sam  Smith  of  VVhakaki. 
a     son,    Johnnie     Walker. 

HAWKE'S    BAY   DISTRICT 
Reported     by     Olive     Edwards 

During  the  month  of  June  many  things 
happened  to  brighten  our  everyday  life 
a  bit.  First  was  the  Heretaunga  Branch 
Conference  held  at  Hastings,  with  Pre  i- 
dent    Cowley    in    attendance 

this    conference    served    a    lot    of 

people      and      served      them      well      in      the 

spiritual  things  as  well  as  being   h 

i  ional.       It     is     tie  idles  a    to    com  n 

the    wonderful    speeches     that     were    made 

by     1 1  •  akers,    but     n 

must     here     be     marie    of     the     wonderful 

organization    of    the    food    problem    under 

the     direction     of    the     Branch     Pr< 

with    George    Randell    and    Hoeroa    Tahau 

in   charge.   Their  efforts   were   highly   om- 

others     who     have     had     at     sundr; 
been      responsible      for      the      caterinir      to 
large  President     Cowley's 

praise  is  all  the  more  worthy  as  it  brings 
to  mind  the  thought  that,  of  all  ' 
pie  responsible  for  the  food  arrange- 
ments, there  were  only  two  people  from 
th<  Branch  who  had  any  reason  to  be 
absent  from  the  afternoon  session  of  the 
conference.  It  is  a  good  lesson  for  other 
Branches  and  Districts  to  emulate,  as  it 
is  a  bad  thing  when  too  many  people 
stay   away   from    meetings   to   prepare  the 


Hepetema,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


265 


id  fit 


food.  The  food  at  this  particular  Hui 
was  in  a  class  that  prompted  the  re- 
mark from  Bro.  Sid  Christy  of  Nuhaka, 
where  it  is  a  common  thing  for  good 
food  in  bounty,  that  he  thinks  Here- 
taunga  has  Nuhaka  beat.  Among  the 
European  visitors  to  the  conference  were 
old  College  friends,  among  whom  were 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Ten.  Heighway.  The  bap- 
tism of  Wikitoria  Chadwick  Southon 
(wife  of  Branch  Pres.  James  Southon), 
who  has  been  for  years  a  very  good  help- 
meet to  President  Southon  in  his  Church 
activities,  was  also  performed,  as  were 
the  ordinations  to  Elders  of  Ahineta 
(Wm.)     Watene   and    Wiremu    P.    Heke. 

During  this  same  week-end  the  M.I. A. 
Mission  officers  met  at  Korongata  to  dis- 
cuss Mutual  work,  and  there  agreed  that 
all  Gold  and  Green  Balls  held  during  this 
year   were   for   patriotic   purposes. 

June  17,  a  few  days  after  the  Here- 
taunga  Conference,  Rangikawea  Puriri  of 
Korongata,  passed  this  life.  It  is  told, 
that  this  grand  old  "pioneer,"  a  veteran 
of  three  wars  and  a  volunteer  for  this 
present  one,  as  he  himself  travelled  to 
Wellington  to  gain  permission  from  the 
Government  to  enlist,  in  his  passing, 
never  tasted  death  in  fulfilment  of  a 
promise  made  to  him  only  three  or  four 
days  previously  by  President  Cowley  in 
reply  to  a  request  for  a  blessing  that  he 
soon  leave  this  life  as  he  felt  his  life's 
efforts  for  good  were  full,  when  President 
in  substance  told  him  that  his  life  was 
a  full  and  righteous  one,  there  was  no 
blessing  that  any  could  give  him  as  he 
had  earned  the  right  to  die  feeling  happy 
and  ready,  and  that  he  would  not  taste 
death,  and  taste  death  he  did  not,  for 
he  had  a  chair  placed  outside  in  the 
warm  sunshine  and  there,  as  he  sat,  his 
Spirit  left  his  smiling  body,  knowing  not 
the  pain  of  death.  And  as  his  mortal 
remains  were  confined  to  their  last  rest- 
ing place  in  the  Korongata  Cemetery,  the 
funeral  services,  which  were  conducted 
under  the  direction  of  the  Branch  Pre- 
.  were  the  most  impressive  and 
beautiful  ever  witnessed  by  the  many, 
i/. .in.  people  gathered.  Among  those  who 
came  to  honour  this  old  soldier  were 
Of      '  h"      Vet<  ran-,'      Associat  ion. 

civic  leader  of  Hastings,  members  of 
i  he     A  rm<  <i  enl  ing     most 

branches,    as    well    as    many    well-known 
residents     in    and     aboul     Hastings.      The 
Home    Guard    formed    a    very    imp 
guard     of     honour. 

At  the   Pioneer   Day    Hui   held  at    Koro- 
!6,    i  he    man  \     Saints 
and    friends    who    gathered    weri     treated 
io    a     v  c  i  .     in   piral  ional    feast 

•  1 1 .  ■     .i   it i .      Pre  i d enl 

Dunn.       Don        Ross       am! 

k.  ii.  Hai  i :  iron,  Auckland.  Brother  and 
Bay, 
and 

i      witli 
buret. 

\\  •■    regret    to    announce    i  he    di 
Waipari     M    ha 

I,    the   wif<    • 

uhil B     In  :,M  h         ill      tO     I 

l.i      I  I  1 1 i      I  . •  i  1 1     I 

held    In    Waipawa,   July    '2r>. 


OTAGO   DISTRICT 
Reported    by   Luxford   P.    Walker 

After  a  sojourn  in  hospital  we  are 
glad  to  welcome  Sister  Margaret  Coburn 
back  to  our  meetings,  and  she  is  look- 
ing very  well  too.  In  the  same  manner 
we  say  welcome  and  hello  to  Sister  Joan 
and  Bro.  Bill  and  John  Coburn  after  a 
long — "absent,    sir." 

Apparently  the  Saints  further  south 
are  doing  fine,  and  if  their  faith  and 
desires  are  as  worthy  as  their  offerings 
then  we  have  no  cause  to  complain.  Mr. 
Flu  has  been  getting  around  quite  a  bit 
these  past  few  weeks  as  his  visits  have 
been  quite  frequent,  although  brief  we 
are  pleased  to  add.  At  present  he  is  an 
unwelcome  visitor  at  the  home  of  the 
Petersen  family.  Sister  Mary  A.  Aber- 
nethy  has  been  having  quite  a  topsy- 
turvy time,  for  health  and  illness  seem 
to  be  taking  turns  at  keeping  her  com- 
pany, and  at  present  illness  is  her  com- 
panion. 

Time  marches  on!  And  so  another 
half-hour  has  been  added  to  our  meetings 
to  give  an  extra  quarter-hour  for  the 
children's  lesson  the  other  quarter-hour 
being  occupied  by  a  previously  appointed 
speaker.  A  short  time  ago  Sister  Dal- 
ziel  left  our  midst  for  awhile  to  care 
for  her  ailing  sister  in  Christchurch.  We 
wish  them  both  the  best  in  health  and 
spirit. 

Bro.  Nitama  Paewai  has  indeed  sur- 
passed himself  in  the  realm  of  football 
down  here  and  is  always  in  the  headline 
news.  On  Saturday,  July  18,  hi  went 
to  [nvercargill  with  Otago  rep  written 
all  over  him   to  help  in   playing  Southland. 

At  one  stage  of  the  year  Dunedin 
Branch  meetings  were  without  their  Pre- 
sident. Bro.  H.  J.  Murray,  who  had  in- 
jured his  foot  very  badly.  However,  be 
is  now  well  and  leading  our  work  Of  pro- 
gression   again. 

al      The    population    of    the    sunny 

south    has    increased    by    "one."      To    Kath- 
leen   and     Bro.    Harr\     Hayward    was    born 

Walter    Henry,   on   the   "Jl 

1942        Keep     it     up     folks. 

WAIKATO    DISTRICT 

Reported    by    Davy    Ormsby    and 

Olive    Scott 

the    Samts     ol    the    district 

efforts    of    the    brethren    in    visiting    uh.r. 

a  •  e  been   aid,  ■   and 

h    o1  her   and 
to  make  clear 

tion    one    will 

Pre  el, 
July     27th 

Lead"     three 

v 

honour 

U 

mil) 


ii    k  \\<\\<i: 


I  [epetema,  1942 


M.I. A.   and    Bhould    n  Bimiona 

and       \\  |       ('(.in,    ellors,      aiul 

Valerie   Scotl    Secretary. 

Our    sympathj     ;a    ov1    to    Mr.    and 

Paki    and    Family    in    their    grief 

at    the    loss    of    their    nine-mont  hs-old    son 

and   brother,    Muri    Aroha   Paki,   who   die 

Auckland  Hospital  on  July  Gth, 
1942.  The  burial  services  were  under 
th«  direction  of  Brothers  NTgaha  R 
and  Scott.  They  also  conducted  th< 
funeral  service  for  another  child  of  a 
family  of  aon- Mormons  who-.'  i 
was    nol    able   to   be   present. 

A    marriage    was    performed    by    Tetana 

Te    llira    at     Puke    Tapu    on    May    17.    win  n 
Ruby     Anaru     11    rewini     and     Charlie    Tai- 
■     •  •  :•  .lined     in     wedlock. 

The   Huntly   (;    I  1  and   Green    Ball,  their 

eighth  annual  event,  will  be  held  in  the 
Huntly     Town     Hall     on     September     17th. 

1912,  featuring  a  Tahitian  crownin 

mony.  and  favouring  the  Regent  Dance 
Hand. 

MISSION   GENERALLY 
The   Mission   generally    is   doing  as   well 
as    can    be    expected    under    these    trying 

times.  President  Cowley  is  travelling 
as  much  as  he  is  able  to.  to  Hui  Peka(s) 
and  Hui  Pariha(s)  and  is  taking  an  in- 
tere;t  in  the  activities  of  the  Gold  and 
Green  Halls  He  was  present  at  a  wed- 
ding anniversary  (golden)  at  Kaitake, 
Dannevirke,  during  the  past  month  as 
among  tin-  specially  invited  guests,  which 
numbered  many  well-known  residents 
from  near  and  far.  Both  he  and  Sister 
Cowley  were  present  on  this  occasion. 
As  far  as  Sister  Cowley  is  concerned  Bhe 
is  doing  her  part  in  furthering  the  work 
of  the  Gospel.  Her  contacts  in  Auck- 
land with  the  various  women's  organ- 
izations include  the  Mothers'  League 
from  Remuera.  Travel  Club,  American 
Circle.  Higher  Thought  Temple  and 
other       groups.  Her       talks       to       these 

organizations  have  so  thrilled  her  hear- 
ers that  various  leaders  of  other  organ- 
izations present  have  asked  th;.i 
same  talks  he  presented  to  their  particu- 
lar organization,  and  through  it  all  is 
woven  the  message  of  the  Gospel.  Within 
the  past  day  or  so,  Sister  Cowley  has 
spoken  to  the  Highe"  Though'  Temple 
group,  and  during  the  afternoon  tea 
period  a  woman  at  the  rear  of  the  hall 
came  forward  and  her  opening  remarks 
were  "I  knew  it.  I  told  my  companioni 
that  Mrs.  Cowley  was  not  drinking  tea, 
for  I  have  heard  her  before,  and  know 
that  she  does  not."  This  statement  was 
the  apparent  outcome  of  some  discus- 
sion in  the  rear  of  the  hall,  and  in  com- 
ing forward  the  woman  beheld  an  almost 
empty  glass  of  warm  milk  before  Sister 
Cowley.  The     Gospels     standards     and 

messages  are  at   lea^-.t    being   lived   as   well 
as     being    spread     by     this     missionary. 
Gold    and     Green     M.I. A.     Halls     for    this 


d.  it'ui    oppor- 
tunity   to    our    people    to    | ,. 
and    wonderful  In    preaching 

by    "our    fruits    we    shall    be    know 

"by  example  teach,"  etc. 

This      i-      a      t  [me      W  hen      man>       pi    »plc 

should  learn  to  knov  of  the 

It  ia  well 

thai    all    proceeds    of   all    Gold   and    Green 

Halls    are    for    patriotic     purposes,    and     in 
portraying    what     a    wonderful    amount     of 

omplished,     President 
Cowll  >       on      behalf      of      1 1  • 
M.I. A.    and    of   the    Mission    handed    to    the 
Mayor    of     li  1800    as     the 

proceeds  of  that  one  ball  for  patriotic 
purposes,  during  the  evening  of  the  ball 
hehl  in  Hastings  Assembly.  I 
ti.  1'.'  12.  It  appears  that  tb  Koi 
Choir  and  Brother  Don  Rosa  of  Auckland 
who  wen  both  in  great  form,  impressed 
the  crowd  of  dancers  with  their  wonder- 
ful singing  that  many  expressions  of 
amazement,  wonder,  pleasure  and  good- 
will were  o  spontaneously  expressed  by 
all.     The    Mayor    in    his    remarks    envisaged 

a    better    understanding    and    opportunity 
for  the  good  that  om   people  had  to  offer. 

Bro.  Charles  E.  Billman  of  Auckland 
is    visiting    in    the    southern    districts,    and 

in    his    travela    called   at    Tamaki,    Da  ine- 
virke.    i  Bastings    and    intends 

•■:  ber  up  t  In-  i 

It  is  believed  that  Bro.  and  Sister  I'ai 
Rei,  who  are  now  in  Rotorua,  are  finally 
-.tiled  for  tie  time  being,  and  that  Pat 
is  doing  his  part  in  visiting  the  Sains. 
\\  .  are  sure  that  he  will  be  an  :. 
the  Hauraki  District  at  Rotorua,  and 
trust  that  while  Bro.  Amadio  | 
that  their  combined  efforts  will  do  much 
to    assist    in    the    work. 

We  were  very  pleased  indeed  to  hear 
that  Elder  Hohepa  Meha.  former  Editor 
of  "Te  Karen."  on  two  occasion 
received  a  commission  in  the  R.N.Z.A.F. 
in  Canada  as  Pilot-officer.  We  are  pr  ad 
with  you,  Mabel  and  Quayle.  and  our 
player.-,  are  always  that  all  our  people 
erving  in  the  armed  forces  might  be 
permitted     to    return     to    their    loved    ones. 

We  record  here  the  passing  on  July 
17  of  Arthur  S.  Smith,  of  3  Sheehan 
street.     Ponsonby.     Auckland,     aged     85, 

beloved  father  of  Isobel  Amadio,  ami 
grandfather  of  Doria  Feil  now  in  Cali- 
fornia, and  Wynne  Briggs  of  Hastings. 
The  Waikato  Relief  Society  Presidency 
desire  to  extend  their  greetings  and  ap- 
preciation to  the  many  Saints  and  friends 
hey  met  in  their  two  weeks'  visit  around 
•he  district,  commencing  June  1  to  17, 
1942.  Among  the  branches  visited  were: 
Hoe-o-tainui.  Huntly,  Frank  ton,  Kawhia, 
Otorohanga.  Hangatiki.  Te  Kuili,  Pio  Pi  », 
Aria  and  Marton,  also  visiting  Tamaki, 
Dannevirke.  Korongata  and  Hastings  in 
the  Havvke's  Bay  district  in  company 
with  President  Cowley.  —  Sister^ 
Beazley    and    Hine    Paki. 


VISITORS  TO  HEADQUARTERS 

During-  the  past  weeks,  the  Mission  Home  at  No.  2  Scotia  Place, 
Queen  Street,  Auckland,  CI.  v  a  visited  by  Brothers  Hollis  Ladd,  Wil- 
liam Venuck  and  Lt.  Elwood  Call,  and  in  the  course  of  exchanges  were 
grateful  for  the  opportunity  of  visiting  with  the  Saints  during  these 
troublous  times. 


Readers  and  Suu 


Because  of  recent  regulations  gazetted,  "Te  Karere" 
has  had  to  be  reduced  to  its  present  size,  and  in  this 
respect  we  hope  to  have  the  continued  goodwill  and  interest  of 
our  readers.  We  need  every  person  who  can  find  interest  and 
value  in  "Te  Karere"  to  continue  to  subscribe  to  it,  and  make 
an  endeavour  to  interest  others. 

"Te  Karere"  is  indispensable  to  every  Sunday  School  and 
Primary  officer  and  teacher — it  is  an  aid  also  to  some  of  the 
M.I. A.  officers  and  teachers.  Branch  Presidents  and  their 
officers  should  subscribe  to  "Te  Karere"  and  see  to  it  that 
there  is  at  least  ONE  KARERE  IN  EVERY  L.D.S.  HOME. 

It  is  impossible  to  print  everything  that  is  sent  to  the 
Editor,  even  more  so  now  than  heretofore,  because  of  available 
space.  We  endeavour  at  all  times  to  give  that  which  is  most 
needed  and  suitable  from  the  material  made  available  for  our 
publication,  both  to  the  Maori  and  Pakeha  readers.  Your  con- 
tinued support  and  confidence  is  needed  now  more  than  ever. 

As  a  contribution  to  the  conserving  of  paper  and  because 
of  its  high  cost,  it  is  intended  to  bring  into  being  the  "agent 
plan" — where  subscribers  whose  postal  address  is  the  same,  as 
in  the  Branches,  etc.,  to  receive  issues  under  one  cover  from 
Agent  instead  of  separately.  All  Agents  as  they  are  now  con- 
stituted are  dependable  people  and  have  the  full  confidence  and 
trust  of  the  Editor.  We  ask  all  Agents  and  Branch  Presidents 
to  co-operate  with  each  other  in  the  task  of  keeping  "Te 
Karere"  in  its  valuable  position  as  the  Official  Organ  of  the 
Church  in  the  New  Zealand  Mission. 

Find  out  now  the  people  whose  subscriptions  have  lapsed 
and  endeavour  to  have  them  renew.  Watch  the  "Expiration 
Notices"  that  are  published  with  each  issue,  and  remember,  we 
are  not  "thought  readers"  to  the  extent  of  continuing  your 
subscription  without  the  required  notification  and  subscription 
fee. 

Expirations  of  Subscriptions 

SEPTEMBER,     1942 

Apiata,  Te  Aumihi — Matauri  Bay.  Anaru,  Teaomarama — Pipiwai. 
Bryan,  Mary — Coromandel.  Hay,  Muriel  S. — Maromaku.  Hulme,  Ellen — 
Mt.  Eden.  Hohaia,  Rebecca — Mataraua.  Kewene,  Mrs.  Rachel — Mangere. 
Mannering,  Miss  M. — Parnell.  Mclntyre,  Mrs.  M. — Manunui.  Ntrakuru, 
Mae  Lorna — Rawene.  Nahu,  Toru  Alfred — Hoeotainui.  Nelson,  Mrs.  E. — 
Penrose.  Papanui,  Mrs.  and  Mr. — Gladstone.  Prime,  Ephraim  and  Ned 
— Onehunga.  Riwai,    Jack — Featherston.  Raymond,    Kura — Te    Puke. 

Thompson,     A.     F. — Ohakea.      Te     Whaiti,     Ruahina — Waimarama.      Watene, 
Mita — Thames.      Young,    Mrs.    Anne    Whatu — Paeroa. 


RELIEF  SOCIETY  POEM  CONTEST  WINNERS.— The 
Mission  Relief  Society  Board  expresses  its  appreciation  to  the 
contributors  to  this  contest  for  their  efforts  and  thoughts  con- 
tained in  the  poems,  as  they  contain  much  that  is  good  and, 
above  all,  portray,  the  talent  and  ability  there  is  among  the 
people  of  this  land,  particularly  our  people,  in  this  new  field 
of  endeavour — "poetry."  Therefore,  as  it  now  conns  time  t<> 
adjudge  the  winner,  it  is  our  pleasure  to  announce  that  we 
placed  John  Apiti's  "Relief  Society"  first,  and  Cecilia  P. 
Seranck's  "The  Soliloquoy  of  Our   Relief  Society"  also   first. 

— Mission  Relief  Society  Board. 


JL         Ott 


Beside  The  Fire 


Oh  how  my  thoughts  do  wander  away 

Back  thru  the  years  to  a  former  day, 

When  in  a  garden,  planted  by  God, 

Adam   walked   boldly  and   talked   with  the  Lord. 

I  think  again  of  another  day. 

When  all  earth's  legions  had  gone  astray. 

Of  Noah  and  his  family,  saved  in  the  Ark, 

The  wicked  destroyed  in  the  flood  and  the  dark. 

I  see  many  Prophets  who  come  and  go 
Bidding  the  people  His  will  to  do; 
Then,  passing  dry  shod  thru  the  sea, 
The  children  of  Israel  were  all  set  free. 

I  see  chosen  Israel  awaiting  their  King, 
Awaiting  the  freedom  that  He  would  bring: 
I  see  the  cross  raised  on  Calvary, 
He,  suffering  there  for  our  liberty. 

Woe,  wToe  is  me,  how  the  darkness  spread, 
Children  of  light  were  living  in  dread ; 
Then  I  see  dawning  the  light  of  day, 
Darkness  and  error  are  fleeing  away. 

Surely  I'm  dreaming  that  war  drums  sound 
And  vials  of  wrath  in  the  earth  are  found, 
Surely  God's  power  can  break  and  bind 
These  chains  of  error,  and  sooth  my  mind. 

And  then  a  peace  and  restfulness 
Sweeps  over  me  my  soul  to  bless, 
Calvary's  conqueror  now  I  see, 
Bringing  His  peace  and  liberty. 

God  in  His  mercy,  God  in  His  love, 
Millennial  peace  will  send  from  above, 
Sabbatic  era,  coming  to  stay, 
O,  make  me  worthy,  Dear  Lord,  I  pray. 

H.  OSBORNE, 
Branch    President,    Taumarunui. 


Te  Karere 

Established  in  1907 
Wahanga  36  Oketopa,  1942  Nama  10 

Matthew    Cowley  Tumuaki    Mihana 

Kelly  Harris         Etita 

Eru   T.   Kupa       Kaiwhakamaori 

Waimate   Anaru  Kaiwhakamaori 

"Ko  tenei  Pe.pa  i  whakatapua  hex  hapai  ake  i  te  iwi  Maori  ki 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-nui.' 

"Te  Karere"  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  THE  BUSINESS  PRINTING 
WORKS  LTD.,  55  Albert  Street,  Auckland,  CI,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00    per   year;    $4.00   for   five   years;   $10.00    for   life.) 

Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    C.l,    New    Zealand. 


CONTENTS 

Editorial—  Page 

The    Tithe 276 

Special    Features — 

If  Ye  Are  Prepared  Ye  Shall   Not  Fear   278 

Te  Tikanga  O   Te  Whakatekau    281 

He  Tangi  Mai  No  Hiona   284 

Church    Features — 

Sunday   School    , 2S5 

Mutual    [mprovemenl   Association    288 

Primary       291 

New:    From  the  Field  -()7 


COVER  MOTIF  Tliis  month'  presentation  is  Intended  to  Further  remind  ua  <>f  the 
Importance  of  the  Gospel  and  to  deflnitelj  bring  to  muni  our  obligation!  .-^  membara 
,,r  the  Church.  We  have  before  m  portrayal  of  the  Preaidenta  and  Prophets  of  the 
pre  ,,i.i,i  and  Propheta  of  the  Church  of  Jeaua  Chrl  I  of  Latter-day  Sainta  In  like- 
ness and  word.     To  the  believer  both  are.  God  jiven 


TE  KARERE 


Oketopa,  1942 


Editorial  .  . 


"THE   TITHE" 

"The  word  of  the  Lord  is:  The  time  has  now  come  for 
every  Latter-day  Saint,  who  calculates  to  be  prepared  for  tin- 
future  and  to  hold  his  feet  upon  a  proper  foundation,  to  do 
the  will  of  the  Lord  and  to  pay  his  tithing  in  full.  That  is 
the  word  of  the  Lord  to  you,  and  it  will  he  the  word  of  tin- 
Lord  to  every  settlement  throughout  Zion" 

This  "word  of  the  Lord"  was  given  through  President 
Lorenzo  Snow  on  May  17th,  1899,  while  he  was  addressing 
a  special  conference  held  in  St.  George,  Utah.  This  mes- 
sage rings  just  as  true  to-day  as  on  the  day  it  was  given  by 
the  Lord  to  His  people.  This  revelation  was  the  means  of 
arousing  tin-  Saints  to  a  realization  of  the  importance  of 
tithe-paying  as  thee  never  had  been  aroused  before.  The 
Priesthood,  high  or  low,  and  the  membership  of  the  Church 
in  genera]  made  a  covenant  with  themselves,  with  each  other. 
and  with  God,  that  they  would  return  unto  Him  the  tithe  of 
their   increase. 

The  Kingdom  of  God  is  established  by  and  through  His 
children  who  dwell  upon  the  earth,  and  for  the  building  of 
the  Kingdom  and  the  administration  of  its  affairs  He  has 
revealed  His  will  and  set  forth  laws.  The  progress  of  God's 
work  and  the  prosperity  of  Hi>  Kingdom  is  determined  by 
obedience  t<>  those  laws.  Not  the  least  important  of  the  laws 
is  the  Law  of  the  Tithe,  or  the  law  of  revenue.  Without 
obedience  to  this  law  it  would  be  just  as  impossible  to 
administer  the  affairs  of  God  Upon  the  earth  as  it  would  be 
to  carry  on  the  purposes  of  the  governments  of  kingdoms 
and  republics  of  man's  creation. 

"The  Lord  revealed  to  His  people  in  the  incipience  of 
His  work  a  law  which  was  more-  perfect  than  the  law  of 
tithing.  It  comprehended  larger  things,  greater  power,  and 
a  more  speedy  accomplishment  of  the  purposes  of  the  Lord. 
But  the  people  were  unprepared  to  live  by  it.  and  the  Lord, 
out  of  mercy  to  His  people,  suspended  the  more  perfect 
Law,  and  gave  the  law  of  tithing,  in  order  that  there  might 
be  means  in  the  storehouse  of  the  Lord  for  carrying  out  of 
the  purposes  He  had  in  \iew:  for  the  gathering  of  the  poor, 


Oketopa,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


277 


for  the  spreading  of  the  Gospel  to  the  nations  of  the  earth, 
for  the  maintenance  of  those  who  were  required  to  give  their 
constant  attention,  day  in  and  day  out,  to  the  work  of  the 
Lord,  and  for  whom  it  was  necessary  to  make  some  provision. 
Without  this  law  these  things  could  not  be  done,  neither 
could  temples  be  built  and  maintained,  nor  the  poor  fed  and 
clothed.  Therefore  the  law  of  tithing  is  necessary  for  the 
Church,  so  much  so  that  the  Lord  has  laid  great  stress  upon 
it." 

"By  this  principle  the  loyalty  of  the  people  of  this 
Church  shall  be  put  to  the  test.  By  this  principle  it  shall 
be  seen  whose  hearts  are  set  on  doing  the  will  of  God  and 
keeping  His  commandments.  .  .  .  There  is  a  great  deal  of 
importance  connected  with  this  principle,  for  by  it  it  shall 
be  known  whether  we  are  faithful  or  unfaithful.  In  this 
respect  it  is  as  essential  as  faith  in  God,  as  repentance  of  sin, 
as  baptism  for  the  remission  of  sin,  or  as  the  laying  on  of 
hands  for  the  gift  of  the  Holy  Ghost.  For  if  a  man  keep 
all  the  law  save  one  point,  and  he  offend  in  that,  he  is  a 
transgressor  of  the  law,  and  he  is  not  entitled  to  a  fullness 
of  the  blessings  of  the  Gospel  of  Jesus  Christ.  But  when 
a  man  keeps  all  the  law  that  is  revealed,  according  to  his 
strength,  his  substance,  and  his  ability,  though  what  he  docs 
may  be  little,  it  is  just  as  acceptable  in  the  sight  of  God  as 
if  he  were  able  to  do  a  thousand  times  more." 

"The  law  of  tithing  is  a  test  by  which  the  people  as 
individuals  shall  be  proved.  Any  man  who  fails  to  observe 
this  principle  shall  be  known  as  a  man  who  is  indifferent 
to  the  welfare  of  /ion.  who  neglects  his  duty  as  a  member 
of  the  Church,  and  who  docs  nothing  toward  the  accomplish 
ment  of  the  temporal  advancement  of  the  kingdom  of  God. 
lie  contributes  nothing,  cither  toward  spreading  the  Gospel 

to  the  nations  of  the  earth,  and  he  neglects  to  do  that  which 
would  entitle  him  to  receive  the  blessings  and  ordinances  ol 

the   (  rOSpel."      Joseph    F\    Smith. 

While  the  kingdoms  of  the  earth  an'  tumbling  upon  our 
shoulders  let  us  turn  to  the  preservation  of  din-  citizenship  in 
the  kingdom  of  God  1»\  obeying  the  laws  thereof,  not 
forgetting  the  law  of  the  tithe. 

M  \ i  i  ii i  w   Cowley. 


278  11.  KARERE  Oketopt,  1942 

M  IF  YE  ARE  PREPARED  YE  SHALL  NOT  FEAR  " 

By  John  A.  Widtsoi  .  of  the  Council  of  the  Twelve. 
Delivered  at  the  Saturday  afternoon  session  of  the  112th 
General  Conference.  April  I.  1942,  in  the  Assembly  Hall. 

The  present  unhappy  infernal  conditions  of  the  world  are  daily 
before  us  and  our  people.  We  cannot  forget  them.  The  incom 
prehensible  folly  of  humanity  bewilders  us.     All   tsrael  arc  anxious 

and  troubled.  Some  face  the  day  in  fear.  Manx  are  tilled  with  pre- 
monitions and  forebodings.  To  cure  this  condition;  to  steady  the 
pulse  of  our  people;  to  teach  the  ultimate  conquesl  of  right  over 
wrong,  may  he  our  immediate  problem.     <  >f  all  people  in  the  world 

we  should  and  can  see  most  clearly  in  this  dark,  man-made  chaos. 
We  have  the  light.  We  must  sec  the  happy  destined  end  from  a  dark 
and  corrupt  beginning.  The  Lord  has  spoken,  and  foretold  the 
calamities  of  the  last  days;  but  lie  has  also  declared  that  lie  is  the 
Master  and  that  lie  and  His  righteous  people  will  triumph  oxer  all 
evil.     The   Lord  is  never  defeated. 

Questions,  conjectures,  and  speculations  are  rife  among  tin 
people.  Some  ask,  "Is  this  Armageddon?"  Others,  "Will  the 
Saviour  come  when  this  was  is  over?"  Yet  others  are  busily  engaged 
in  proving  that  present  events,  countries,  men.  and  even  dates,  may 
l>e  read  into  the  prophecies  of  thousands  of  years  ago.  To  all  such 
questions  there  L  hut  one  answer:  We  only  know  thai  this  is  the 
dispensation  of  the  fullness  of  times,  the  Saturda)  evening  of  the 
earth's  temporal  existence.  These  are  the  "last  days,"  days  of  much 
commotion,  to  he-  followed  1>\  the  millennium  and  the  presence  on 
earth  of  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ  who  will  "put  all  enemies  under  his 
feet."  We  know  that  the  coming  of  the  Lord  jn  nigh,  hut  lie  has 
warned  us  that  "the  hour  and  the  day  no  man  knoweth.  neither  the 
angels  in  heaven,  nor  shall  they  know  until  he  conies."  (I).  ,\  C.  49: 
7).  All  that  lias  keen  set  forth  in  great  clearness  in  the  revelations 
to  the  Prophet  Joseph  Smith  and  his  successors.  There  is  no  benefii 
in  prying  beyond  the  revealed  word  of  the  Lord. 

A  passage  in  the  Doctrine  and  Covenants  foretells  and  explains 
the  sorrows  of  the  "last  days,"  and  it  summarizes  the  message  of  the 
Lord  to  His  latter-day  people  concerning  these  times  of  .sadness, 
i  I).  &  (".  63:  32-34.)  ' 

/,  the  Lord,  am  angry  with  the  wicked;  I  am  holding  my  Spirit 
from  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth.  I  have  sworn  in  my  wrath,  and 
decreed  wars  upon  the  face  of  the  earth,  and  the  wicked  shall  slay 
the  wicked,  and  fear  shall  come  upon  every  man;  and  the  saints  also 
shall  hardly  escape;  nevertheless.  I.  the  Lord,  am  with  them,  and 
WUI  come  down  in  heaven  from  the  presence  of  my  Lather  and  con- 
sume the  wicked  with  unquenchable  fire. 

Fear,  which  "shall  come  upon  every  man."  i>  the  natural  conse- 
quence of  a  sense  of  weakness,  also  of  sin.      Fear  is  a  chief  weapon 


Oketopa,  1942 


TE  KARERK 


of  Satan  in  making-  mankind  unhappy.  He  who  fears  loses  strength 
for  the  combat  of  life,  for  the  fight  against  evil.  Therefore,  the 
power  of  evil  ever  seeks  to  engender  fear  in  human  hearts.  In  this 
day  of  sorrow,  fear  walks  with  humanity.  It  directs,  measurably, 
the  course  of  even-  battle.  It  remains  as  a  gnawing  poison  in  the 
hearts  of  victors  as  of  the  vanquished. 

As  leaders  in  Israel,  we  must  seek  to  dispel   fear   from  among 
our   people.     A   timid,    fearing   people   cannot    do   their   work    well. 
The   Latter-day    Saints   have   a   divinely   assigned   world-mission    so 
great  that  they  cannot  afford  to  dissipate  their 
strength  in   fear.        The  Lord  has   repeatedly 
warned  His  people  against  fear.    Many  a  bless- 
ing- is  withheld  because  of  our  fears.     He  has 
expressly    declared   that   men    cannot    stop   his 
work   on    earth,    therefore,   they    who    are    en- 
gaged in  the  Lord's  latter-day  cause  and  who 
fear,    really    trust    man    more   than    God,    and 
thereby  are  robbed  of  their  power  to  serve. 

The  key  to  the  conquest  of  fear  has  been 
given  through  the  Prophet  Joseph  Smith.  "If 
ye  are  prepared  ye  shall  not  fear."  (D.  &  C. 
38:30.)  That  divine  message  needs  repeating 
to-day  in  every  stake  and  ward.  Arc  we  pre- 
pared in  surrender  to  God's  commandments? 
In  victory  over  our  appetites?  In  obedience 
to  righteous  law?     If  we  can  honestly  answer 

yes,  we  can  bid  fear  depart.  And  the  degree  of  fear  in  our  hearts 
may  well  be  measured  by  our  preparation  by  righteous  living,  such 
as  should  characterize  Latter-day  Saints.  To  the  handful  of  be- 
lievers at  the  opening  of  this  dispensation,  the  Lord  g?.ve  this  ^1« >ri- 
OUS  promise  : 

Fear  not.  little  flock- ;  do  good;  let  earth  ami  hell  combine  against 
you.  for  if  ye  ore  built  upon  my  rock,  they  cannot  prevail.  (D.  &  C. 
6:  34.) 

Speaking  to  the  Church  about  the  events  of  the  la-: 
Lord  said,  "The  wicked  shall  ike  unto  /ion  for  safety."     Sino 
is   wherever  the   pure   in   heart   are.    I    like   to   read   into  that    inspired 
.i   ine.  that  there  i^  safet)   wherever  the  people  of  the  I  .ord  live  s,. 
worthil)   as  to  claim  the  sacred  title  of  citizens  oi  the  . 
Lord.     Otherwise  the  name  Zion  is  bul  an  empt)  sound.      The  onl) 

safet)    that   we  can  expect   in  tin-  or  an\    other  calamitous  time  lies  in 

our  eon formit)  to  gospel  requii ements. 

Every  individual  may  carr)  the  blessings  of  /ion  with  him 
wherever  Ik-  goes.     <  Kir  boys  who  have  been  called  into  on 

e,  if  the)   keep  themseh  es  dean  and  undefih  d, 
them.     It   is  m\    faith  thai   the)    will  be  protected  b)   divine  ■ 
Should  tb<\   fall  in  action  or  from  disease  \\  will  be  with  the  consent 


John  A.  Widtsoe 


TE  KARERE  Oketopa,  1942 

of  our  Father  in  heaven.  Besides,  to  all  Latter-day  Saints,  time  and 
eternity  are  closely  associated.  Our  sons  who  live  righteously,  yet 
who  may  lose  their  lives  in  this  devil-engendered  war  (and  may  they 
be  few  in  number,  I  pray)  will  chut  into  tin-  glory  prepared  for  the 
righteous.  The  Lord  has  so  declared.  "Therefore,  whosoever  be- 
longeth  to  my  church  need  not  fear,  for  such  shall  inherit  the  king- 
dom of  heaven."  I  D.  &  C.  10:  55.  )  And  also,  "fear  not  even  unto 
death,  for  in  this  world  vonr  jo\  is  not  full,  hut  in  me  your  joy  is 
full.'"     (I).  &  C.  101  :36.) 

In  this  world  upheaval,  in  this  day  of  wanton  destruction,  we. 
as  a  people  must  look  upward.  There  must  he  trust  and  faith  in 
our  hearts.  Hope  must  walk  by  our  side.  We  must  remember  charity 
We  must  treasure  the  warm  words  of  the  Father  to  Hi. 
Church,  "Be  of  good  cheer,  and  do  not  fear,  for  I  the  Lord  am  with 
you,  and  will  stand  by  you."  ( 1).  &  ('.  OS:  o.)  We  who  have  been 
called  to  leadership  in  the  Church  of  Christ  must  lead  our  people 
from  anxiety  and  fear  and  doubt,  to  trust  and  faith  in  the  Lord,  and 
certainty  in  the  outcome  of  the  Lord's  plan  of  salvation.  We  must 
repeat  with  gladness  the  words  of  the  Lord.  "Fear  not.  let  your 
hearts  he  comforted;  yea.,  rejoice  evermore,  and  in  everything  give 
thanks."     (  1).  &  C.  98:1.) 

Above  the  roar  of  cannon  and  airplane,  the  manoeuvres  and  plans 
of  men.  the  Lord  always  determines  the  tide  of  battle.  So  far  and 
no  farther  does  lie  permit  tin-  evil  one  to  go  in  his  career  to  create 
human  misery.  The  Lord  is  ever  victorious ;  He  is  the  Master  to 
whose  will  Satan  is  subject.  Though  all  hell  may  rage,  and  men  may 
follow  evil,  the  purposes  of  the  Lord  will  not  fail.  The  God  of 
[srael,  "lie  slumbers  not  nor  sleeps."  It  is  well  to  remember  the 
admonition  of  old:    "Be  still  and  know  that    I   am  God." 

It  is  our  destinx  as  a  people  to  purify  the  world;  to  lead  men 
from  evil  to  good;  to  win  the  nations  to  the  realm  of  everlasting 
truth;  to  prepare  the  earth  for  the  coming  of  the  Lord.  We  are 
called  to  establish  the  kingdom  of  God  on  earth.  If  we  accept  our 
mission  with  faith  and  the  courage  horn  of  faith,  the  Lord  will  make 
us  victorious  in  our  labours  in  his  cause.  Happiness  will  wait  upon 
The  protection  of  heaven  will  he  about  us.  At  this  time  in  our 
history,  let  us  teach  as  never  before.  "If  ye  are  prepared,  ye  shall 
not  fear." 

May  the  Lord  qualify  us  for  the  heavy  duties  of  this  day  I  pray 
in  the  name  of  the   Lord  Jesus   Christ.      Amen. 


The  Back  Cover  Picture. — In  an  endeavour  to  preserve  selected 
old  photographs  of  interest  to  the  Mission,  President  Cowley  has 
requested  that  a  plea  to  anyone  knowing  any  in  the  present  pic- 
ture to  forward  their  names  to  the  Mission  Office,  Box  72,  Auckland, 
CI,  New  Zealand.  In  forwarding  names,  kindly  base  your  information 
along  the  following — Front  row,  second  row,  third  row,  and  back  row. 
Begin  your  numbering  for  identification  from  the  right  of  the  picture, 
which  will  be  opposite  your  left  hand.  Remember,  name  the  row  accord- 
ing to  instructions  and  be  quite  definite  in  your  identification. 


Oketopa,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


281 


TE  TIKANGA  O  TE  WHAKATEKAU 


Na  Kelly  Harris 

I  ROTO  I  NGA  TIKANGA  0  te  Hahi,  ko  tenei  tetahi  take  a  ahua 
uaua  ana  ki  te  whakarite.  Kahore  tenei  uauatanga  he  mea  hou  i  roto 
i  te  Hahi.  Kahore  i  te  mea  ko  tatou  i  roto  i  enei  ra  o  te  pakanga  me 
ana  raruraru  whakaporaru  i  te  tangata,  e  kore  whiwhi  taonga  ana  hei 
tapae  ki  te  Atua.      Kahore  hoki  i  te  mea  e  kuare  ana  ki  te  Kupu. 

Ko  tenei  ture  o  te  "whakatekau"  na  te  Atua.  Nana  i  homai  ki 
ana  hunga  tapu  o  onamata,  e  ai  ki  ta  nga  tuhituhinga  o  te  Kawenata 
Tawhito.  Me  titiro  pea  tatou  ki  nga  ahua  o  te  iwi  a  te  Atua  i  Aia 
i  hoatu  i  tenei  Ture  ki  a  ratou. 

I  puta  te  kohuru  tuatahi  i  roto  atu  i  te  whakakotititanga  o  te 
tikanga  o  te  "hoatu"  e  ai  ki  ta  te  Atua.  Te  tikanga  o  te  "hoatu"  i 
taua  wa  o  Kaina  me  Apera  e  rite  ana  i  roto  i  nga  ahua  e  rua  ki  te 
tikanga  o  te  whakatekau.  Tuatahi  ko  te 
tikanga  o  te  "hoatu."  I  roto  i  te  whaka- 
hau  kia  Kaina  raua  ko  Apera,  ko  te  mea 
nui  ia  o  taua  Kupu,  ko  te  hoatu-noa,  ara, 
ma  te  tangata  tonu  e  hoatu,  e  homai  ranei, 
a  ina  hoatu,  tera  he  utu.  Ko  te  whakahere 
he  mea  tapae  ki  te  Atua  i  runga  i  te  tika- 
nga here-kore,  engari  i  te  mea  ka  whaka- 
rite te  tangata,  me  whakarite  i  runga  i  te 
tika  me  te  pono  o  te  ture.  Ko  ta  te  ture 
e  mea  ana  me  penei,  me  penei,  ko  tera  te 
tikanga  kia  tino  mau.  Mehemea  ka  wehe 
ke  atu  i  te  tino  o  ture,  e  he  ana  te  tiri. 
Titiro  hoki  ki  te  take  i  riri  ai  a  Kaina.  I 
te  mea  i  ahua  kaiponu  B  Kaina  i  ana  hua- 
nga  ki  te  Atua,  ka  hoatungia  e  ia  etahi  atu 
o  ana  taonga  hei  whakahere,  ara.  e  rite 
ana,  i  tahae  ia,  te  mutunga  i  o  tana  mahi 
i  wahi  ke  atu  o  te  tino  o  te  ture,  kahore 
te  Atua  i  pai  ki  tana  tiri.  Kaati.  i  rote 
katoa  i  enei  korero  tera  tetahi  ahua  kahore 
pea  tatou  i  whakaaro.  Hei  aha  aua  whakahere.  aua  hoatu  ■  Kaina 
me    Apera? 

Ki  toku  nei  whakaaro,  aua  whakahere  i  hiahiatia  hei  awhina  i  te  mahi 

0  te  Rongopai  no  te  mea  ko  tera  te  wa  ka  tnnata  te  tangata  i  rare  ia 
Arama  ki  te  ako,  ki  te  whaihanganga  «»  te  Hahi  a  te  Atua.  I  puta 
tenei  whakaaro   i   te   mea  he  nui   nga   taonga   i   whakaheretia.   ara  te   nui 

ia,  ko  te  "tuatahi  o  nga  mea  katoa."     Kahore  enei  mei   i  kohia  kia 
tahuna  kia  waiho  ranei  kia  mauniau.  engari  ke  kia  whakkmahia 
kororia  «-  te  Atua.     Kahore  te  Atua  i  te  Atua  whakahau  ture  mo  te 
kore  noaiho,  ara.  whakahau  ture,  ko  te  kiko  anake  o  rot*  Ida  whaka- 
ritea.     Kaore.     Ko   aua   ture   katoa   e   whanui   ana    nga   mutuni 
maha   nga   painga,   no   te   mea   ko    ia   he   Atua)   ko   ana   ture   me   nga 
painga,  nga  kiko,  mo  te  whaka  atuatanga  o  te  tangata,  ko  tera  hoki  te 
mahi  a  te   Rongopai,  te  whakatoputanga   i  te  wWii   kotahi  o  nga  tun 
katoa  a  te  Atua.     Ko  te  take  e  hiahia  nei  ahau  kia  whaka< 
te  take  i  hiahiatia  ai  nga  whakahere  ■  Kama  d 
,.  rite  ana  ki  te  take  o  te  i^r  o  te  whakatekau.     Te  whaihanga 
te  Hahi,     Te  ahua  tuarua,  ko  te  mea  na  te    Uua  i  whakahau, 
tatou  he  whakarite  kia  rite  ki  ta  te  Atu  K  tou,  he 

aha  hoki  tatou,  kia  whakaaro  ko  tatou  ki  tetahi  atu 
Ina  whakaritea  te  ture  tera  he  whiwhinga  nui  atu  mo  tatou. 


PARENTS.  —  It  is  re- 
quired by  laze  that  you 
register  the  birth  of  your 
children.  Your  compli- 
ance with  this  require- 
ment would  be  appreci- 
ated by  this  office  to  the 
extent  that  the  numerous 
requests  for  certificates 
could  be  properly  handled 
by  the  Registrars"  of 
Births  wherever  you  are 
located,  and  save  the  ex- 
pense and  time  by  apply- 
ing  to    this   office. — Ed. 


TE  KARERJ  Oketopa,  1942 

wa  o  nuia.  ko  tenei  ture  0  te  whakahere  he  wahi  iti  0  te  ture  i  whaka- 
ritea  nei  e  Enoka,  I  tenei  wa,  ko  tera  te  whakaritenga  o  te  ture  o 
te  whakatekau,  he  wahi  iti  o  te  ture  nui  o  Enoka. 

I  roto  i  te  hitori  o  Iharaira  ko  te  ture  <>  te  whakatekau  ia  ratou 
no  te  mea  kahore  ratou  i  rereke  atu  ia  tatou  inaianei,  a  ia  Kaina  raua 
ko  Apera  hold.  Ko  te  ture  ma  [haraira  hei  hapai  i  nga  mahi  o  te 
Hani  ko  taua  ture  o  te  whakatekau.  Tirohia  a  Rewitikuha  27:30-33, 
a  Kenehi  14,  a  Tiuteronomi  U  me  etahi  atu  wahi  o  te  Paipera.  Kei 
kona  nga  manaakitanga  mo  te  hunga  e  whakarite  ana  i  tenei  ture, 
a  me  te  pono  hoki  o  te  ture. 

Te  mea  nui  ia  o  enei  hitori  mo  tenei  ture  uaua,  ko  nga  wa  katoa 
i  whakaritea  te  ture,  i  hua  te  whenua,  ara  i  manaakitia  te  hunga  tapu. 

Kahore  tetahi  wahi  i  roto  kat«»a  i  te  hitori  i  tuhituhia  me  te  hitori 
kahore  nei  i  tuhituhia  e  whakaatu  ana  i  hapa  te  manaaki  a  te  Atua  i  te 
iwi  whakarite  i  te  ture  o  te  whakatekau,  no  te  mea  kei  roto  ia 
Maraki  te  oati  a  te  Atua  ka  manaakitia  te  tangata  e  whakatekau  ana 
i  roto  i  te  tika.  Ko  wai  o  tatou  e  kaha  ana  ki  te  kii  lie  teka  te  Atua. 
I  roto  i  nga  mamaetanga  me  nga  ahua  taumaha  katoa  e  mohio  nei 
tatou,  mehemea  i  whakaritea  te  ture  ka  whiwhi  te  tangata.  Ko  tenei 
ra  te  kiko  o  te  ture  o  te  whakatekau.  Na  te  Atua  te  whakahau.  Ma 
te  Atua  manaaki. 

Ko  tatou  nga  Hunga  Tapu  o  nga  Ra  o  Muri  Nei,  kei  te  amuamu 
mo  te  uaua  o  enei  wa.  Kahore  e  taea  te  utu  te  whakatekau.  Kei  te 
tangohia  e  te  kawanatanga  tetahi  wahi  nui  o  o  tatou  huanga,  a  ko  te 
wahi  e  toe  ana  he  iti,  kahore  e  ea  nga  raruraru.  Ko  enei  etahi  o 
nga  korero  e  whakaaro  nei  tatou  ka  watea  tatou.  Ko  te  mea  anake 
ka  watea  tatou  ia,  ko  nga  manaakitanga.  Tena  koutou  e  penei  ana 
nga  whakaaro.  Titiro  ki  etahi  o  koutou  e  mohio  nei  koe  kei  te  whaka- 
rite i  te  ture.  Titiro  mehemea  kei  te  hapa  nga  manaakitanga  a  te 
Atua  ia  ratou.  Whakaaro  mehemea  e  pouri  ana  o  ratou  whakaaro  mo 
nga  mea  e  pouri  nei  ou  whakaaro.  Ko  etahi  o  koutou  e  nui  ake  nga 
whiwhinga  o  tenei  ao,  ara  te  moni,  me  era  atu  ahua  o  te  whiwhi  o  te 
taonga,  engari  ko  koutou  kahore  e  noho  ana  i  roto  i  te  ma  o  te  hine- 
ngaro,  e  mahaki  ana,  e  hoa  tata  ana  ki  te  wairua  e  arahi  ana  i  nga 
wa  katoa  i  nga  huarahi  o  te  pai,  te  noho  i  roto  i  te  marietanga  o  te 
whakaaro.  Ko  etahi  kahore  e  whakarite  ana  te  ture  no  te  mea  kaore 
ratou  e  pai  ana  ki  nga  tangata  kua  whakaritea  ki  te  tango  i  te  whaka- 
tekau, a  kahore  hoki  e  pai  ki  te  ahua  whakapau  a  nga  Apiha  o  te  Hahi 
o  te  Mihana  ranei  i  aua  whakahere.  He  kore  whakapono  e  mahi  tika 
ana  nga  Apiha  o  te  Hahi,  ara,  kei  te  riro  te  painga  o  nga  whakahere  i 
tetahi  atu.  Ko  enei  whakaaro  kei  roto  i  etahi.  Kahore  te  tangata  e 
tika  ana  kia  whakatekau  e  mohio  ana  hoki  ki  te  ture  engari  kahore  i  te 
whakarite,  e  kaha  te  kii  e  he  ana  enei  whakaaro.  Te  take  i  ko  atu 
i  enei  "mo  te  tangata  matau  ki  te  ture  engari  kahore  e  utu  ana,  he  kore 
whakapono  he  ture  na  te  Atua  tenei  i  enei  ra. 

Kahore  te  tikanga  o  enei  korero  he  riri.  he  whakahe  ranei  i  te 
tangata,  no  te  mea  kei  te  tangata  tona  hiahia  ki  tana  i  pai  ai,  engari  ia, 
kia  whiwhi  pea  ki  etahi  whakaaro  e  pa  ana  mo  te  "ture  o  te  whaka- 
tekau," kia  whiwhi  ki  tetahi  hiahia  ki  te  mahi  i  ta  te  Atua  i  pai  ai, 
ahakoa  kei  te  he  nga  Apiha,  ko  ta  koutou  ara,  ta  tatou  he  whakarite, 
ma  te  Atua  a  ko  atu,  mana  e  manaaki  te  mea  whakarite  a  mana  e 
hoatu  te  whakawa  mo  te  tangata  he. 

Kei  roto  i  te  Akoranga  me  nga  Kawenata  119  te  tekiona  e  whaka- 
atu ana  i  te  tikanga  o  te  whakatekau.  Kei  reira  e  mea  ana  ko  te 
whakatekau  he  "wahi  tekau"  (one  tenth)  pera  ano  i  ta  nga  karaipiture 
e    whakaatu    ana. 


Oketopa,  1942  TE  KARERE  283 


Hei  mutunga  ake  maku  mo  enei  korero.  Ko  te  marama  nei  o 
Oketopa,  1942,  to  marama  i  tohungia  e  te  Timuaki  o  te  Mihana  iraro 
i  te  whakahau  o  nga  Apiha  o  Hiona,  hei  marama  korero  ma  tatou  i  roto 
i  nga  HUIHUINGA  katoa  o  te  Hahi,  tenei  tikanga  o  te  WHAKA- 
TEKAU,  me  te  mahara  hoki  ka  mutu  te  tau  1942  mo  te  taha  ki  o  tatou 
pukapuka  o  te  Hahi  o  tenei  Mihana  i  te  20  o  nga  ra  o  Nomea,  1942. 
Noreira,  tahuri  o  tatou  whakaaro  ki  tenei  take  nui.  Tahuri  tatou  ki 
te  whakatikatika  ia  tatou  i  roto  i  nga  whakahere  ki  te  Atua,  kia  kore 
ai  e  rite  te  whakawa  a  Maraki  kia  tatou:  "E  tahae  ranei  te  tangata  i 
ta  te  Atua?  Heoi  kua  tahaetia  taku  e  koutou.  A  e  mea  na  koutou, 
he  pehea  ta  matou  tahae  i  tau?  Konga  whakatekau  me  nga  whakahere." 


HE   KAUWHAU   HAERE 

I  te  26  o  nga  ra  o  Aperira  ka  karangatia  ahau  e  Elder  Hirini  T. 
Heremaia  kia  haere  hei  hoa  mona  ki  tana  mihana  ki  Tautoro  me 
Mataraua. 

Ka  haere  maua  tae  atn  ki  Tautoro  ka  hoatu  e  Hirini  ona  take 
kia  Aperahama  Whareniate  kia  hoatungia  ki  te  Tumuaki  o  te  Peka, 
kia  Rangi  P.  Wharemate. 

Tika  tonu  to  maua  tira  ki  Mataraua.  koia  ra  hoki  te  haere  nui, 
ka  tae  maua  ki  te  kainga  o  Pou  Tau  i  te  Waiwhao,  koia  tenei  ko  te 
tangata  i  karanga  ia  Hirini  T.  Heremaia  hei  manaaki  i  ana  tama- 
riki   e   rua. 

Ko  te  karakia  na  Hirini  i  whakahaere,  me  te  kauwhau  pu 

mo  te  whakapa  peepi,  me  era  atu  wahanga  korero.     Ko  te  wairua 
o  tenei  mihana  lie  pai,  aroha  me  te  ngawari. 

— Na  Manga  Tan. 


Te  Karere  extends  the  condolences  and  sympathy  of  the  Minion  and  many 
to  Sister  Ngete  Mihaere  in  the  loss  of  her  husband,  Brother  Wiremu 
(Whati)  Mihaere,  who  passed  tins  life  August  -'-'.  1942.  The  Funeral 
tor  this  stalwart  of  the  Church  was  well  attended  by  his  main  friends  and 
associates  throughout  the  district.  Branch  President  Rahiri  Harris  conducted 
the  services  held  in  tin-  Tamaki  Chapel.  A.ugus1  24th,  1942.  President  Matthew 
and  Sister  Cowley  were  also  present,  and  Presidenl  dedicated  the 
grave.  Bro.  Mihaere  will  always  Ik-  remembered  Por  his  work  at  the  Hni  Tans 
of  tin-  Mission.  Mis  family  will  miss  him  very  much,  but  his  legacy  of  fine 
young  boys  will  assisl  their  mother  and  family  to  live  as  he  would  have  had 
them  live.  I  In  Branch  will  miss  him,  as  he  was  a  Counsellor  in  the  Presidencj 
to  Bro.  Rahiri  Harris,  and  his  works  in  the  community  >\ill  stand  as  tangible 
evidences  of  his  character,   progressiveness,  courage,   faith  and  strength. 


In  the  Thames  distj  i<  I  the  death  of  Pirimona  \\  atene  of  Kirikii  i  is  mourned 
bj  mam  In  expr<  me  the  sympathj  and  condolences  of  its  mam  readers  and 
members  oi  the  (  hurch,  ' .  Karere  can  but  add  that  Bro,  Pirimona  Wat< 
lived  a  lull  life  and  has  given  to  the  world  fine  children.  IP-  posterity  will 
always  he  known  for  their  ability  t"  give  "t  the  besl  in  sport,  work,  citizenship 
and   Church 


284 


I  l.  KARERE 
HE  TANGI  MAI  NO  HIONA 

\\i  Mere  Whaanga 


<  Mcetopa,  1942 


I  A  (/  nga  raruratu  o  /<•  pakanga  <■  motnae  nei  /<•  ao  katoa,  katahai  ano  ka 
toe  iinii  tenei  reta.  I  tuhia  i  nga  ra  timata  o  Hanuere,  1()J2,  ara  i  roto  te  reta 
a   Timuaki  Ruwhara  Haari. — Xa  te   Etita. ) 


E  te  hun.ua  tapu  tenei  au  ta  koutou  mokai,  kui,  tipuna,  te  tuhi- 
tuhi atu  nei  kia  koutou  i  runga  i  te  ngakau  aroha  kain.ua  tda  koutou 
mai  aim  o  to  \va  i  timata  ai  tenei  kino  o  te  ao  i  timata  ai  tenei  pouti 
mamae,  aroha  i  roto  i  taku  ngakau  a  tae  noa  mai  Id  tenei  tau  hou, 
i  te  mea  kua  kino  liaoro  tenei  ahuatanga  o  te  ao,  no  reira.  ka  puta 
mai  tenei  whakaaro  kia  tuhi  atu  au  kia  koutou,  hei  milii  atu  kia  koutou. 
Tena  ra  koutou  e  te  iwi,  e  te  hunga  tapu  i  roto  i 
tenei  tau  hou.  Ko  te  toru  tenei  o  nga  tau  e  whaka- 
mamae  ana  o  koutou  ngakau  mo  a  tatou  tamariki, 
mokopuna  e  noho  mai  ra  i  roto  i  te  mura  o  te  ahi 
a  te  rewera.  Nui  atu  toku  aroha  kia  koutou  e  te 
iwi,  me  pehea  hoki  e  te  iwi  i  te  ture  o  to  whenua, 
a  te  kawanatanga,  kaore  e  taea  te  ki  atu  ki  nga 
tamariki  e  noho,  kaua  e  haere,  e  rang]  ko  to  mamae 
o  waiho  kia  tatou  mo  te  taka  ki  to  kikokiko  a 
tatou  tamariki,  mokopuna,  e  rangi  ia  kua  takoto  I 
noa  te  tikanga  i  roto  i  nga  tuhituhinga,  taihoa  ka 
kino  te  ao  i  to  kore  o  otahi  iwi  o  whakapono  he  | 
Atua  ana  kei  runga  i  te  rangi  e  noho  mai  ana, 
koia  te  mea  nui,  nana  nga  mea  katoa  i  hanga  me  I 
nga  tangata  me  ana  ture,  nana  1  whakatakoto  i  te 
ao  hei  tirohanga  ma  nga  tangata  hei  puritanga,  ko  j 
te  iwi  nana  nei  i  timata  tenei  kino  he  iwi  kaore 
mohio  he  Atua  ano  i  reiria. 


Wh 


aanga 


Kei  te  mohio  ra  tatou  e  te  Hunga  Tapu  ko  Me 
eriei  nga  ra  mutunga.  E  nga  hui  atawhai,  e  te 
Hunga  Tapu,  kia  kaha  te  whakaako  i  nga  tamariki 
kia  tipu  hei  tamariki  papai  i  roto  i  te  tika,  manaakitia  te  pononga  a  te 
Atua.  Ka  nui  taku  aroha  ki  a  ia  mona  i  manawanui  i  waenganui  ia 
koutou.  Kaati,  e  te  iwi,  kei  te  tuhituhi  atu  au  i  taku  reta  i  runga  i  to 
whakama  i  te  mea  he  nui  atu  a  koutou  reta  mai  ki  nga  kaumatua  kaore 
koutou  e  mihi  mai  ki  au,  ki  to  koutou  tipuna,  kui  hoki,  penei  ana  nei 
au  e  hara  ia  koutou,  he  no  pari,  heoi  ano  te  reta  a  taku  tama  a  Maraki 
kia  Ruwhara,  kaore  rawatu  ona  tangi  mai  ki  au.  E  patai  atu  ana  au 
ki  aia  kia  whakapapatia  mai  e  ia  tana  whakapapa  kia  Ruwhara,  akua 
nei  kaore  e  kitea  e  ia,  ka  whakapapa  ia  i  toku  piringa  ki  aia  he  poto 
noa,  he  kui  au  kia  ia.  Kia  ora  ra  e  taku  tama.  Kei  to  pai  ra  to  rota. 
no  te  mea  he  whakaatu  hoki  nahau  i  nga  mahi   pai   o  to   Peka. 

Kei  te  pai  a  Ruwhara,  he  tangata  raruraru  i  te  nui  o  ana  mahi  o 
tana  karangatanga,  kei  te  haere  i  nga  wa  katoa  i  roto  i  tona  mihana, 
kei  te  tipu  nga  mahi  o  te  Hahi,  kei  te  kaha  te  Hunga  Tapu  ki  te  mahi 
i  nga  mahi  o  te   Hahi  mahi  oranga  mo  te  tinana,  kaati  ra. 

Tena  koutou.  Kaati  taku  reta  kia  koutou  i  te  mea  kua  rite  taku 
hiahia  ki  te  tuhituhi  kia  koutou,  aua  atu  te  raruraru  o  nga  korero,  ma 
koutou  e  whakatikatika.  Ma  te  Atua  koutou  e  tiaki  i  roto  i  o  koutou 
pouritanga. 

Heoi,    (signed)    Mere  Whaanga.      Kia  ora  e  te  iwi. 


Oketopa,  1942  TE  KARERE  285 

SUNDAY   SCHOOL 

Theme — 

"TO  OBEY  THE  LAW  OF  TITHING  AS  COMMANDED  OF  GOD'1 

"Honour  the  Lord  with  thy  substance,  and  with  the  firstfruits  of  all  thine 
increase :  So  shall  thy  barns  be  filled  with  plenty,  and  thy  presses  shall  burst 
out  with  new  wine." — Proverbs  3  :  9-10. 

SACRAMENT  GEM 

I  come  to  Thee  all  penitent. 

I  feel  Thy  love  for  me. 
Dear  Saviour,  in  this  Sacrament 

I  do  remember  Thee. 

CONCERT  RECITATK  >\ 

Malachi  3:10-11. 

"Bring  ye  all  the  tithes  into  the-  storehouse,  that  there  may  be 
meat  in  mine  house,  and  prove  me  now  herewith,  saith  the  L 
hosts,  if  I  will  not  open  you  the  windows  of  heaven,  and  pour  you 
out  a  blessing,  that  there  shall  not  be  room  enough  to  receive  it. 
And  I  will  rebuke  the  devourer  for  your  sakes,  and  he  shall  not 
destroy  the  fruits  of  your  ground,  neither  shall  your  vine  east  her 
fruit  before  the  time  in  the  field,  saith  the   Lord  of  hosts." 

KORER(  )  A  NGAKAU 
Maraki  3:  10-11. 

"Alaua  katoatia  te  whakatekau  ki  roto  ki  te  toa,  kia  whai  kai 
ai  toku  whare,  waiho  hoki  tenei  hei  whakamatautau  moku,  e  ai  ta 
Miowa  o  nga  mano,  me  kahore  e  tuwhera  i  ahau  nga  matapihi  o  te 
rangi  kia  koutou,  a  ka  ringitia  he  manaaki  kia  koutou,  a  kia  kore 
ra  ano  he  takotoranga.  Taku  ano  kia  koutou,  Ka  riria  te  kaiwhaka- 
pareho,  kei  he  i  a  ia  nga  hua  o  to  koutou  oneone;  e  kore  ano  e 
marere  noa  nga  hua  o  la  koutou  vvaina  i  te  mara,  e  ai  ta  [howa  o 
nga  mano." 

LESSONS 

KINDERGARTEN   (4  to  6  years).     Thought:  "Faith  and 

"Call   of   Abraham"    (Gen.    12;    Pearl   of   Great    P  i: 

Abraham  2.) 

"Story    of    Esther"    (Hook    of    Esther). 
"Elijah    and    the    Prophet*    of    Baal"     (1     King 

PRIMARY  (6  bo  9  years). 

"John  and  His  Preaching"   I  Matt! 

Thf    Baptism    of    Jesus"        M. 

"The  Cleansing  of  th«-  Temple"   (John 


TE  KARERE  Oketopa,  1942 

CHURCH    HISTORY    I  LO  to   11   yean). 

"The    Signs    Appear"    (111    Xiphi    1    or   (.-hap.     LO,    Story    of    Book    of 

Bform<  11 ) . 
"Samuel    Rejected"    (Helaman    L6,    Or   chapter    39,    Story    of    Book    of 
Mormon  I . 

"Nephi's    Marvellous    Ministry"     (111     Xephi    6,    7;    <>r     11     St<»ry    of 
Book  of   Mormon  ) . 

:   B  DEPARTMENTS    (12-15,    16-19   years). 

"The    Miraculous    Deliverance"     (ExodllS     11,     15). 

"The  Story  of  the  Mana"    (Exodus   15,    L6,    IT). 

"Israel's   Organization    at    Sinai"    (ExodllS    Is.     Xumheis    10    A    111. 

EPARTMENT    (20  to  25  years). 

"In  Bethany,  Near  Jerusalem"    (Luke   10.   11).      Problems:    Show  that 

the   parable  ol    the   Good    Samaritan   was  true  to   existing  conditions. 

Why    is   the   victim   in   the    parable   not    named?      What    ii    he    were    a 
Samaritan?       What   law   of    Moses   were   the   unsympathetic  Jews 
parable   not   keeping?      (Dent.   22:4;   Lev.    19:  18.)      Select   and  Btate 
the  verses  which  emphasize  the  doing  phase  of  learning.     If  Mary  and 
Maltha   were   of   high   school    age   and    wei  ring    in    high    school. 

what  courses  would  they  take? 

"At    Jerusalem"     (Matt.     L2:22-45;     Luke     11:14.54).       Problems: 

Why  is  it  wrong  to  seek  for  a  sign?     Why  is  there  no  forgiven 
on     who  speaks  against  the   Holy   Ghost?      What  evidence   is  there   in 
that  Satan  redoubles  his  efforl  who  resist  his  first 

ings? 
"At   Jerusalem"    (Luke    12.)       Problems:    Why   did    Christ    liken   the 
hyperisy  oi   the  Pharisees  to  tea     n?      What  power  of  the  Holy  Ghost 
ated  in   this  lesson?      Show  wherein   this   tesson   teaches  the 
relative   values    between   material   grains  and   spiritual   gains? 

■L   DOCTRINE    (All   others  not  already   assigned). 
"Queer    Ectlier    of    Persia"  10). 

"Ezra    and    Nehemiah"    (Ezra    7-10;    Nehemiah     1    I 
.irms    of    Nehemiah"     <X.1>    imah    7-13). 

MAORI  CLASS. 

RATAPU   TUATAHI 

I  TETAHI  AHUA,  nga  tamariki  e  whanau  mai  ana  he  uri  ki  nga 
whakaaro  pai,  kino  ranei  o  o  ratcu  matua;  te  whakaputanga  <>  ana  mea 
ki  nga  uri  e  whakaaetia  ana.  Te  whakawhirinaki  ki  te  pai.  ki  te  kino, 
nga  manaakitanga,  nga  kanga  e  whal  aputa  ana  i  tena  whakatu] 

a  whakatupuranga.     Na   roto   i  tenei  huarahi  whaka-te-Atua  mo 
te   ahua  o   nga   wairua   i   mua   atu   i   tenei   oranga,   ko   nga  tamariki   a 

i  he  uri  tika  ki  nga  mate  e  pa  ana  ki  te  tangata  kikokiko;  engari 
na  roto   i  te   whakamarietanga  aiti   nga  tangata   katoa   i   hoko 

mai  i  roto  i  te  kanga  o  tona  taha  takangaatu.      Ko  tenei   nama  i  puta 
a   wira   mai   nei   kia   ratou,   kua   utua   ke   tia,   a   kua    mahue   wa1 
ratou.      Nga  tamariki  e  hemo  ana  i  mua   i  to   ratou  taenga  ki   nga  tau 
ana   kia  tau   te   he   kia  ratou   mo  a  ratou   mahi  e  he-kore  ana  ki 

Atua  titiro,  ahakoa  hoki  he  tamariki  ratou  na  te  hunga  hara. 
E  korero  ana  i  roto  i  te  pukapuka  a  Moromona — "Kahore  e  ahei  i 
1  laraki  nonohi  te  ripeneta,  no  reira  he  kino  whakawehi  te  kai- 
ponu  i  ta  te  Atua  tohu  tangata  ki  a  ratou  ina  e  ora  katoa  ana  ratou 
i  roto  i  a  ia  i  runga  i  taua  tohu  tangata.  .  .  .  Ta  te  mea,  ko  nga 
tamariki  nonohi  katoa  c   ora  ana  ratou  i  roto  ia  te  Karaiti,  me  te  hunga 


Oketopa,  1942  TE  KARERE  287 

ture  kore  ano  hoki.      No  te  mea  ka  horapa  atu  te  kaha  o  te  hokonga  ki 
te  hunga  katoa  kahore  nei  o  ratou  ture. 

Nga  Patai: 

He  aha  te  mea  o  nga  matua  e  whakaaetia  ana  e  puta  ana  ki  nga 
uri  tamariki?  Pehea  te  ahua  o  nga  uri  o  Arama?  Na  te  aha  ratou 
i  watea  ai  i  aua  he?  Pehea  ta  te  Atua  titiro  ki  nga  tamariki  nonohi 
kahore  ano  kia  rite  o  ratou  tau  a  ka  hemo?  Pehea  te  whakamarama  i 
te  pukapuka  a  Moromona? 

RATAPU    TUARUA 

I  TE  TUHINGA  ATU  A  te  poropiti  a  Moromona  ki  tana  tama  kia 
Moronai,  i  penei  tana  whakaaturanga  mo  tana  whakaaro  tuturu  mo 
te  he-kore  o  nga  tamariki:  "Whakarongo  ki  nga  kupu  a  te  Karaiti,  a 
tou  Kaihoko  a  tou  Ariki,  a  tou  Atua.  Nana  kihai  ahau  i  haere  mai 
ki  te  ao  ki  te  karanga  i  te  hunga  tika,  engari  i  te  hunga  hara  kia  ripe- 
neta;  kahore  he  aha  o  nga  tangata  ora  e  meatia  ai  e  te  rata,  engari 
o  te  hunga  e  mate  ana;  no  reira  e  ora  ana  nga  tamariki  nonohi, 
kahore  hoki  o  ratou  kaha  ki  te  mahi  hara,  no  reira  ka  tangohia  te 
kanga  o  Arama  i  runga  i  a  ratou  i  roto  i  a  au,  a  kahore  ona  kaha  ki 
runga  kia  ratou;  ka  mutu  hoki  te  ture  o  te  kotinga  i  roto  i  a  au, 
nana,  ko  taku  kupu  tenei  kia  koe,  ko  te  whakaakoranga  tenei  mau, 
ko  te  ripeneta  me  te  rumaki  ki  te  hunga  e  mohio  ana  e  kaha  ana  ki 
te  mahi  i  te  kino,  ae  ra  whakaakona  nga  matua  me  ripeneta  ratou, 
me  rumaki,  me  whakaiti  ratou  e  ratou  ano,  kia  rite  kia  ratou  tama- 
riki nonohi.  A  kahore  he  aha  o  nga  tamariki  nonohi  e  ripenetaai 
ratou,  e  rumakina  ai  ranei.  Nana,  te  putake  o  te  murun.ua  i  nga  hara. 
Heoi  he  mea  ora  nga  tamariki  nonohi  i  roto  i  a  te  Karaiti.  kua  pera  ano 
hoki  no  te   orokohanganga  o   te   ao. 

Nga    Patai: 

Mo  wai  ma  te  rata?      Pehea  te  whakaritenga  atu  ki  nga  tamariki 
nonohi?      He   mea   pehea   i   tangohia   ai   te   kanga   o    Arama    i    rui 
ratou?     E  pa  ana  kia  wai  te  rumakanga  me  te  ripenetatanga?      He  aha 

te  putake  o  te  rumakanga? 

RATAPU  TUATORU 
I  ROTO  I  TETAHI  whakakitenga  kia  Hohepa  Mete  poropiti  i  Unei 
wehenga  o  nga  wa.  Ka  mea  atu  te  Ariki:  "Otira,  nana,  ko  taku  kupu 
tenei  kia  koutou  ko  nga  tamariki  nonohi  kua  oti  noa  atu  te  hoko  mai  i 
te  orokohanganga  mai  ra  ano  o  to  ao,  ma  roto  i  taku  Tama  Kotahi; 
no  reira,  kahore  e  ahei  i  a  ratou  te  hara.  kahore  hoki  he  kaha  i  hoatu 
ki  a  Hatana  hoi  whakawai  i  a  ratou  ka  tae  ra  ano  ki  to  wa  e  mohio 
ai  ratou  ki  a  ratou  mahi  i  toku  aroaro."  A  Timuaki  Eloani  Teira  i 
muri  i  tona  whakatakinga  i  nga  rarangi  mo  te  Karaiti  aroha  ki  nga 
tamariki  nonohi  me  nga  whakaaturanga  tuturu  mo  ta  te  rangi  titiro  atu 
ki  nga  tamariki  nonohi  i  una:  "Mehemea  kahore  to  \rama  heanga, 
kahore   e   ahei    kia    whai    oranga    enei    tamariki,    na    roto    i    te    whaka- 

maiiotan.ua    ka    whakaurua    atu    ratOU    ki    te    wahi    whakaoranua    e    liara 

i  ta  ratou  kaha.     Ki  ta  to  hunga  kai  titiro  kaute  tangata,  ka  pa  tenei 

ki    te    wahi    nuku    atu    i    to    hawhe    0  noi    e 

whakamau  ana  i  to  ratou   whakaoranga,  na   roto  atu   i  te  taka\ 
me  te  whakamarietanga  o  te  Kai  Whakaora. 

Nga   Patai: 

Pehea  te  whakaakoranga  kia  Hohepa  Mete  i  enei  ra  8  pa  ana 
mo  nga  tamariki  nonohi?      Pehea  te  korero  ■  Timuaki  Hoai 

amariki  nonohi  me  te  takanga  atu  o  Arama?  E  ai  ta  nga  kai 
titiro  mo  te  nui  o  nga  tangata,  pehea  kia  ratou  te  nui  o  nga  mea  e 

laka   ki    ran.   i    te  ar-.ha    in  B   0  te     K\  iki" 


•|  E  K  \\<\U\  Oketopa,  1942 

RATAPU  TUAWHA 
NGA  PAANGA  [HO  KI  ia  tangata  o  te  whakamarietanga  mo  tena 
me  tena  mo  nga  tangata  katoa  h<>ki  e  whiwhi  ai  ki  te  murunga  o  ratou 
hara  ake,  ma  roto  atu  i  te  takawaenga  <>  Ihu  Karaiti;  engari  ko  tana 
tent,  whakaoian.ua  me  atu  ma  runga  i  to  te  tangata  ake  kaha  e  kitea 
nei  i  r<»t<>  i  te  whakapono  i  te  ripenetatanga  me  te  bono  tonu  o  te 
mahi  i  te  tika.  Nga  tore  e  whiwhi  ai  ia  tangata  ia  tangata  ki  te  whaka- 
oranga  ia  he  mea  whakarite  na  Ihu  Karaiti,  kei  a  ia  nei  te  mana  ki  te 
mea  me  pehea  he  manaakitanga  mai  ma  roto  hoki  i  tona  tukunga  i 
a  ia  hei  whakahere.  E  tika  ana  nga  tangata  katoa  kia  whiwhi  ki  te 
takawaenga  o  te  kai  whakaora  i  te  mea  e  whiwhi  hara  ana  nga  ta 
katoa. 

Nga    Patai: 

Na  te  aha  te  tangata  i  whiwhi  ai  ki  te  murunga  o  ratou  hara'.' 
Me  pehea  hoki  ia  e  ahei  ai  tenei  whakaoranga?  Na  wai  i  whakatakot< 
mai  nga  ture  e  ahei  ai  te  whiwhi  ki  te  whakaoranga?      Hei  aha  i  riro 

ai   ia   ia  tenei   mana? 


Mutual  Improvement  Association 

M.I.A.  THEME  1942 

Doctrine  &  Covenants  82:10:  "I.  the  Lord,  am 
hound  when  ye  do  what  I  say;  but  when  you  do  not  what  I 
say.  ye  have  no  Promise." 

SECOND  TUESDAY: 

FIRST    AID    (All    Classes) 

Review  of   Previous  Lesson. 

1.  What   is   artificial   respiration? 

2.  Give  five  causes  for  stoppage  of  breathing. 

3.  Describe    briefly    how    you    would    proceed    to    give    artificial 
respiration.      What  method   is  recommended? 

BURNS 

"Injuries  caused  by  the  contact  of  heat  are  called  burns.  If  the 
burn  is  caused  by  a  hot  liquid  or  a  hot,  moist  vapour,  it  is  commonly 
called   a  scald." 

Burns  may  be  caused  by  dry  heat,  direct  contact  with  fire;  with 
moist  heat,  such  as  steam,  or  hot  liquid;  by  chemicals,  and  by  electricity. 

"Burns  are  classified  to  the  'degree'  or  depth  to  which  the  body 
tissues  are  injured.  This  classification  should  be  remembered,  as  the 
treatment  is  influenced  by  the  degree  of  the  burn.  Also  the  terms  of 
degree  are   useful   in   describing  the  seriousnss   of  the   injury." 

In  a  first  degree  burn  the  skin  is  reddened  but  not  broken. 

In  a  second  degree  burn  the  skin  is  blistered. 

Third  degree — deeper  destruction  of  tissues,  as  charring  or  cooking. 

It  might  be  well  to  consider  prevention  of  burns.  The  loss  of  life 
and  property  from  fire  is  tremendous  and  much  of  it  could  be  pre- 
vented. "Burns  and  scalds  cause  the  death  of  more  children  than  any 
other  kind  of  accident,  and  most  of  these  could  be  prevented." 


Oketopa,  1942  TE  KARERE  289 

"Kettles  with  hot  liquids  should  never  be  placed  near  the  edge  of 
the   stove,   sink,    or  table. 

If  tubs  or  boilers  of  hot  water  must  be  placed  on  the  floor,  keep 
small  children  at  a  distance. 

Matches  of  all  kinds  must  be  kept  out  of  reach  of  children. 

Do  not  pass  a  cup  of  hot  liquid  of  any  kind  over  someone  sitting 
at  a  table.      Many  children  have  been  badly  scalded  in  this  way. 

Do  not  attach  a  percolator  or  electric  iron  cord  where  someone  may 
trip  over  it,  pulling  the  apparatus  over. 

To  try  to  go  up  or  downstairs  with  a  baby  on  one  arm  and  a  pail 
of  hot  water  in  the   other  is  very  dangerous. 

Do  not  use  open-flame  lights  where  curtains  or  draperies  may  blow 
against  them.      Do   not  use  lighted  candles  on  Christmas  trees. 

Do  not  allow  inflammable  rubbish  to  accumulate  in  basements, 
attics,  outbuildings  and  such  places. 

Never  pour  kerosene  into  a  coal  or  wood  stove,  even  if  the  fire 
is  believed  to  be  out. 

Always  watch  closely  any  liquid  boiling  on  a  stove. 

Never  pour  water  on  flaming  grease;  use  salt,  flour,  soda  or  cover 
with  a  metal  lid. 

The  floor  beneath  a  stove  should  be  protected  with  a  sheet  of  metal. 
All  pipes  should  be  in  good  condition  and  all  connections  tight.  An  open 
grate  or  fireplace  should  be  protected  by  a  metal  screen. 

Partially  smoked  cigars  and  cigarettes  are  frequent  cause  of  fire. 
Smoking  in  bed  causes  many  serious  burns  and  fires. 

Cleaning  with  inflammable  fluids,  such  as  naptha  or  gasoline,  should 
never  be  done  in  a  closed  room  or  near  a  flame.  These  are  dangerous 
even  under  the  best  conditions.      Fireproof  cleaning  fluids  are  the 

Do  not  hang  clothes  near  a  stove  or  pipe  to  dry.  This  caution 
applies  especially  to  clothing  that  has  been  freshly  cleaned  with  inflam- 
mable  cleaning  fluid. 

Be  very  careful  of  rubbish  fires  and  bonfires.  Particularly,  do 
not  allow  children  to  play  near  them. 

Treatment  of  First  Degree  Burns. — As  stated  the  skin  is  red  but 
not  broken,  therefore,  there  isn't  danger  of  infection.  Relief  of  pain 
is  the  purpose  of  treatment.  This  is  done  chiefly  by  excluding  the 
air.  Cover  burn  with  any  good  burn  ointment,  vaseline,  hakir 
mixed  into  a  paste,  olive  oil,  castor  oil,  or  any  clean  substam 
cover  with  clean  gauze  or  doth.  Bathing  in  soda  water  may  relieve 
pain.  A  first  degree  burn  isn't  serious  and  when  taken  care  of  in 
this  manner  pain  will  be  relieved  in  a  few  hours,  varying  according 
to  area  of  burn. 

Second    Degree    Burns. — The    skin    will     he    blistered    and    probably 

broken,  therefore  second  degree  burns  will  be  regarded  as  open  wounds. 
The  danger  of  infection  is  great.  The  material  used  on  these  burns 
should  be  sterile  as  with  any  open  wound.  Oily  or  greasy  substance. 
or  cotton  should  never  be  used  on  Imese  burns.  These  materials  stick 
to  the  burn  and  are  difficult  for  the  doctor  to  remove,  thus  increasing 
shock  of  the  patient  and  endangering  infection.  Never  use  iodine  on 
any  kind  of  a  burn.  Picric  acid  gauze  is  one  of  the  most  satisfactory 
dressings  for  second  degree  burns,  especially  where  lar. 
burned.     It   may  be  obtained  at   i  drug  store  and  is  usually  found   in 

first   aid   kits.       It    is  a  sterile  uau/.e  that    has   been   BOaked   in   a  solution   *>( 

picric  acid,  dried  and   placed   in  scaled   package 

with  steam  or  clean  water  before  applyii  >ly  water  tl 

been  boiled.     l><>  not  touch  any  part  of  it  thai  to  the  burn. 

Then    cover    with    an    outer    bandage    to    hold    in    place    and    keep    moiit 

until  pat  icnt   i    placed  in  the  hand  ician. 


290  TE  KARER]  Oketopa,  1942 

Cart'  should  be  taken  not  to  let  tliis  gauze  touch  any  clothing  M 
it  will  produce  B  stain  that  will    not   wash  out. 

If  picric  acid  gauze  is  not  available,  any  sterile  gauze  (or  freshly 

laundered   cloth),   soaked    m   one   of  the    following  solutions,   also   makes 

a  very  good  dressing.  One  tablespoonful  of  baking  soda,  or  about  two 
tablespoonfuls   of   Epsom   salts  to  a   pint   of   warm   water — preferably 

boiled    water.      This    makes    a    very    satisfactory    dressing    and     should 

be  kept  moist  until  dressed  by  a  physician.     Soda  is  a  very  satisfactory 

treatment    for    burns   and    is    most    always    available. 

Third  degree  burn*  may  be  treated  the  same  way  as  second  degree 

burns.  They  are  very  much  more  serious  and  in  many  case-  prove 
fatal.  Always  consult  a  physician.  The  services  of  a  physician  should 
also  be  secured  in  second  degree  burns  that  are  deep  or  cover  a  large 
area. 

Where  a  person's  clothing  catches  on  fire,  smother  same  with  a 
rug,   quilt,    blanket,   coat,    or   rolling   on   the   ground.     People   on    fire 

often    run    into   the   open   air.   which,   of   course,    is    folly. 

Chemical  Burns. — Bum-  caused  by  an  acid,  alkali,  or  any  other 
chemical  should  be  washed  without  delay.  Affected  part  should  be 
washed  thoroughly  with  large  quantities  of  water.  Clothing  soaked 
with  chemicals  should  be  removed  immediately.  After  washing,  an 
ointment  dressing  (olive  oil,  castor  oil,  etc.)  may  be  used.  Secure  a 
physician's  services  as  soon  as  possible. 

Chemical  Burn  of  the  Eye. — Any  chemical  in  the  eye.  including 
lime,  cement,  and  "battery  fluid"  should  immediately  be  washed  out 
with  large  quantities  of  water,  holding  eye  under  a  tap  or  drinking- 
fountain,  having-  patient  lie  flat  on  back  and  pouring  water  into  the 
inner  corner  of  the  eye,  letting  it  run  to  the  other  side.  Of  course  the 
eye  must  be  held  open.  After  washing  thoroughly,  place  a  drop  of 
oil,  wesson  oil,  olive  oil,  into  eye  and  bandage  and  take  patient 
to    a   doctor. 

In  burns  of  hands  and  feet,  great  care  should  be  exercised  when 
bandag  .'ate   the    fingers    and   toes,   or   any    part    of   the    body 

where  there  is  danger  of  sticking,  with  moistened  sterile  gauze  or  picric 
acid  gauze.  If  this  isn't  done  the  fingers  or  toes  adhere  very  readily, 
and  instead  of  helping  your  patient  you  may  lie  the  cause  of  an  opera- 
tion  to   separate   these  parts. 

Sunburn. — Sunburn  is  due  to  exposure  to  the  sun's  rays.  The 
burn  is  usually  a  first  degree  burn,  in  some  cases  second  degree.  If 
very  extensive  the  patient  may  become  quite  ill  from  it-  ette 
have  a  fever.  Severe  sunburn  is  dangerous.  The  best  prevention  is 
covering  of  the  head  and  body  from  direct  rays  of  sun.  Where  sun- 
tan  is  desired,  gradual  exposure  to  the  sun'<  ray-,  increasing  the  length 
of  time  each  day.  and  thus  gradually  building  up  a  protective  coat  of 
tan,  is  the  best  prevention  against  sunburn.  Application  of  olive  oil, 
cocoa  butter,  or  some  good  burn  ointment  before  exposure  is  of  con- 
sid  irable  assistance  in  preventing  serious  burns.  Treatment  for  sun- 
burn is  that  of  any  fin  nd  degree  burn.  In  most  CS 
good  burn  ointment  offers  the  most  satisfactory  treatment;  (dive  oil. 
cocoa    butter,    etc. 

FROSTBITE 

Frostbite  is  the  injury  produced  by  the  freezing  of  a  part  of 
the  body,  usually  areas  more  or  less  exposed  such  as  nose,  cheeks, 
ears,  fingers,  toes.  A  person  with  poor  circulation  or  one  who  is 
exhausted  is  always  less  resistant  to  cold.  Frostbite  is  more  likely  to 
occur    when    a    high    wind    is    blowing.      There    is    usually    considerable 


Oketopa,  1942  TE  KARERE  291 

pain  when  fingers  and  toes  are  frosted,  but  very  often  an  individual 
doesn't  realize  that  nose,  cheeks  or  ears  are  frozen  until  told  by  some- 
one else.  The  frosted  area  becomes  a  peculiar  greyish  white,  due  to 
the  ice  actually  frozen  in  the  tissues. 

Treatment. — When  one  first  feels  cold  it  is  well  to  exercise  or  rub 
parts  gently  to  increase  circulation.  Rubbing  after  freezing  has  taken 
place,  however,  is  not  the  proper  treatment  as  it  bruises  the  tissues. 
Do  not  rub  with  snow.  Cover  the  frozen  part  with  the  hand  or  some 
other  body  surface  until  the  part  its  thawed  and  circulation  is  re- 
established. If  a  hand  is  frozen,  hold  it  next  to  the  skin  in  the  arm- 
pit or  between  the  thighs  or  the  frozen  part  may  be  thawed  very 
gradually  in  cool  air  or  cold  water.  If  this  cannot  be  done,  cover  the 
part  with  extra  clothing.  Do  not  expose  to  the  hot  stove,  fire,  or 
radiator  for  some  time  as  severe  pain  or  even  permanent  damage  may 
result. 

FREEZING 

When  the  entire  body  is  exposed  to  severe  cold,  the  individual 
becomes  numb,  movement  is  difficult,  and  drowsiness  which  cannot 
be  resisted  overtakes  him.  He  staggers  as  he  walks,  his  eyesight  fails 
and   he   falls   and   becomes   unconscious. 

Treatment. — Place  the  patient  in  a  cool  room.  If  breathing  has 
ceased  give  artificial  respiration.  Rub  the  limbs  briskly  with  cloths 
wet  in  cool  water.  When  patient  begins  to  react,  the  temperature  of 
the  room  should  be  raised  slowly  and  the  patient  given  a  hot  drink. 
Then  place  in  a  warm  bed,  if  available.  In  cases  where  the  patient 
is  only  chilled  and  no  parts  of  the  body  are  frozen,  and  he  is  not 
unconscious,    put    in    a    warm    bed    and    give    hot,    stimulating    drinks. 


PRIMARY 

FIRST  WEEK 

THE  APOSTLES  DID  AS  JESUS  TOLD  THEM 

Objective: 

We    may    receive    greal     Uessin.u's    through    faith    in    JeSUS 

Lesson    Approach: 

Close  your  eyes.     How  would  you   feel  If  you  had  to  live  ever} 

day    without    seeing?       What    would    you    miss    that    you    enjoy    now'.'       A 

little  girl  named  -Iran  wa  born  blind.  She  never  once  in  her  life  -;i« 
the  beautiful  trees  and  flowers  and  sunshine.  Yei  this  little  girl  was 
happy  and   made   everyone   in   her  home   happy,   too.     She   went    to   a 

school    for  the   blind   and   there  she   learned   to   read.       I  >o   you    know    how 

blind  children  w.n\'!  (Explain  if  nece  sary.)  she  learned  to  write  on 
a  typewriter  and  she  learned  to  play  the  piano,  she  was  happy  and 
thankful  for  her  kind  parenl    and  friends. 

Von    can    walk    and    run    and    pla\     without    any    trouble,       Have    you 
ever    thOUght    hOW    VOU    Would    feel    I  l'    \oii    Wire    crippled    or    lame" 
are   line   hospital      where   kind   docton    and    nure      help  crippled   and   lame 


-'"J  I  E  KARERE  Oketopa,  1942 

children  to  get  well.  These  children  are  very  happy  too,  because  they 
learn  to  enjoy  the  things  they  have. 

A    long,    Long    time    ago    when    Jesus    and    Hifl    apostles    Lived,    the 

blind  and  the  lame  weren't  so  well  taken  care  of.  Many  of  them  sat 
on  the  roadside  and  begged.  Do  you  remember  the  stories  of  how 
JeSUS  healed  the  blind  man  and  the  lame  man?  To-day's  story  is  about 
a    lame    man    who    was    healed. 

Lesson     Story: 

THE    LAME    MAN    IS    HEALED 

One  of  the  very  important  things  Jesus  told  His  apostles  just  before 
Ho  went  to  His  Father  in  heaven,  was  that  they  should  go  everywhere 
and  teach  the  people  the  things  that  He  had  taught  to  them.  He  told 
them  also  to  heal  the  sick  as  they  had  seen  Him  do.  The  apostles 
loved  Jesus  so  they  did  just  as  He  told  them. 

Whom  did  Jesus  promise  He  would  send  to  help  them?  Did  the 
Helper  (Comforter)  come?  (Review  briefly.)  After  the  Comforter 
tame  to  the  apostles,  they  stayed  in  Jerusalem  and  preached  to  the 
people.  Sometimes  they  went  to  the  temple  at  the  "hour  of  prayer." 
Many,   many  people  went  at  that  time  to   pray. 

One  day  Peter  and  John  went  to  the  temple.  They  had  to  go 
through  a  very  large  gate.  So  beautiful  was  this  gate  that  it  was  called 
the  gate  Beautiful.  As  they  went  through  they  saw  a  lame  man  there. 
He  had  been  lame  all  of  his  life.  Are  you  wondering  how  he  got  there? 
The  Bible  says  that  his  friends  carried  him  to  the  gate  Beautiful  every 
day  that  he  might  "ask  alms  (explain  the  word  alms)  of  them  that 
entered  into  the  temple." 

This  day  the  lame  man  looked  up  when  he  saw  Peter  and  John 
coming  in.  As  he  looked  at  them  he  held  out  his  hands  and  said, 
"Alms,  alms."  Peter  and  John  stopped.  They  knew  he  wanted  money 
but  they  had  none.  They  were  so  busy  teaching  about  Jesus  that 
they  had  no  time  to  work  for  money.  What  Jesus  had  told  them  to 
give  the  people  was  much  better  than  money. 

Then  Peter  and  John  looked  on  the  lame  man  and  said,  "Look  on 
us."  and  he  looked,  expecting  to  receive  something  of  them. 

Then  Peter  said,  "Silver  and  gold  have  I  none;  but  such  as  I  have 
I  give  thee.      In  the  name  of  Jesus  of  Nazareth  rise  up  and  walk." 

"And  he  took  him  by  the  right  hand,  and  lifted  him  up."  Immedi- 
ately his  feet  and  ankle  bones  became  strong,  and  he  stood  up  and 
walked. 

He  went  into  the  temple  with  Peter  and  John,  and  there  he  thanked 
and    praised    God   for    making   him    well. 

Listen  to  the  way  the  Bible  tells  the  rest  of  this  beautiful  story. 
(Read  from  Acts  3:9,   10.) 

"And   all   the   people   saw    him    walking   and   praising   God. 

"And  they  knew  that  it  was  he  which  sat  at  the  Beautiful  gate  of 
the  temple:  and  they  were  filled  with  wonder  and  amazement  at  that 
which  had  happened  unto   him." 

When  Peter  saw  that  the  people  did  not  understand  he  said  to 
them.  "Why  do  ye  marvel?  Do  you  not  know  that  this  lame  man  was 
not  healed  by  our  power,  but  through  faith  in  Jesus  was  this  man  made 
strong." 

Many  people  gathered  in  the  porch  of  the  temple  that  day  and 
heard  the  words  of  Peter.  Peter  and  John  were  happy  because  they 
were  doing  as  Jesus  had  told  them. 


Oketopa,  1942  TE  KARERE  293 

SECOND   WEEK 

SOMETHING   TO  DO 
Objective: 

To  help  the  child  to  use  his  free  time  doing  useful  things. 

Suggestions    for    Teaching: 

A  deep  and  sincere  love  for  little  children  inspired  one  teacher  to 
write  this  beautiful  thought  which  I  pass  on  to  you : 

"I  thank  you  for  lending  me  your  child  today.  All  the  years  of 
love  and  care  and  training  which  you  have  given  him  have  stood  him 
in  good  stead  in  his  work  and  play.  I  send  him  home  a  little  stronger, 
a  little  taller  a  little  freer,  a  little  nearer  his  goal.  Lend  him  to  me 
again,  to-morrow,  I  pray  you.  In  my  care  of  him  I  shall  show  my 
gratitude." 

The  child  who,  through  wise  guidance,  forms  the  habit  of  using 
home  materials  to  fashion  some  desired  toy  is  learning  to  depend  on 
himself.  Encourage  him  to  exercise  his  own  initiative  at  every 
opportunity. 

Complete  any  unfinished  work  before  you  begin  articles  suggested 
for  this  lesson. 

Dolls  to  Make  and  Dress: 

Here  is  how  you  make  a  doll  from  an  empty  spool.  The  head  is 
a  small  ball  of  cotton  tied  in  the  centre  of  a  square  of  white  cloth. 

For  the  neck,  put  a  wad  of  cotton  on  top  of  the  spool. 

Draw  the  ends  of  the  cloth,  forming  the  head,  down  over  the 
rim  of  the  spool  and  tie  firmly  in  place. 

The  arms  are  made  of  a  strip  of  cloth  which  is  sewed  at  the 
shoulders.      Tie  the  knots  for  hands,  trimming  off  the  extra  goods. 

The  dress  is  made  from  an  oblong  piece  of  cloth.  It  has  a  slit  for 
the  head.  Tie  a  ribbon  or  cord  around  the  waist.  The  bonnet  is  a 
triangular  shaped  piece   of  material,  tied  under  the  chin. 

Draw  the  features  with  ink;  red  crayon  makes  rosy  cheek.-;  and 
Mack  crayon  the  hair. 

FOR  THE  BOYS 
Conversation    Before    Beginning    Work: 

Chat  with  the  boys  for  a  few  minutes  about  how  they  have  enjoyed 

Primary.      What  has   each   boy  enjoyed   most?      What    has   helped   him 

most?     Let  the  discussion    be   informal.     Encourage   each   to   express 

himself. 

Folding    Paper 
Suppose   you    fold   a   sheet    of   paper  twice   and    cut    it    in   the    middle 
Of  the  last    fold,   how   many  holes  will  you  get?       Answer  before  you   cut 
the    paper.       Then    ask    yourself,     HO"W    many    holes    will    I    get     it*    I     fold 

it  four  times?     if  I  fold  it  eight  times?     Then  check  your  answ< 
ad  ually  cutting  the  paper. 

Neighbourhood   Tour: 

1 1'  you  would  rather  take  the  boyi  \<>\  a  walk  in  the  neighbourhood 
instead  of  doing  the  handiwork  the  following  is  suggested: 

Bring  to  class,  or  bettei     nil  have  the  boys  brini 

from  the  neighbour}] I  trees.     Help  th<  ei   the  distin 

guishing  character'  ties  of  the  leavei  and  then  with  the  leaves  in  hand 
make  a  tour  of  your  locality  ami   identify  the  tree     from  which  the 

leaves   came.         \1    o    leam    the    name-   of    the    i'. 


294  TE  KARERE  Oketopa,  [942 

Let  the  boys  observe  the  protection  the  trees  give  to  the  homes  and 

their  ornamental  effect.  Talk  about  the  colour  given  to  the  land- 
scape, the  distant  trees  in  silhouette  against  the  sky,  and  the  beauty  We 
enjoy  because  of  the  trees. 

It  would  be  interesting  to  have  the  boys  press  leaves  and  mount 
tin  in  on  card  boards  or  in  a  booklet,  and  then  write  the  name  of  the 
tree  from  which  the  leaves  were  taken. 

Story: 

If  you  have  time  for  a  story  tell  one  that  you  have  told  before. 
Do  not  feel  that  telling  a  story  once  is  enough  either  for  you  or  the 
children.      Tell  your  best  stories  again  and  again. 

THIRD    WEEK 

The  world  is  so  full  of  a  number  of  things 
I  am  sure  we  should  all  be  as  happy  as  kings. 

Objective: 

To  help  the  child  to  know  that  the  real  joy  of  Thanksgiving  Day 
comes  from  sharing  with  others  and  giving  thanks  to  our  Heavenly 
Father  who  gives  so  many  blessings  to  His  children. 

GIVING   THANKS 

I  think  that  every  day  should  be 

Thanksgiving   Day,    don't   you? 
We're  thankful   for   so   many  things — 

Our   parents  kind  and  true, 
Our  brothers,  sisters,  teachers,  books, 

The  stars  that  shine  at  night, 
The  birds,  the  flowers,  the  grass,  the  trees, 

The   sunshine   warm   and   bright. 
So   for   our  friends  and  happy  homes, 

For  work  and  for  our  play, 
And   every   blessing   that   God   sends, 

Let  us  give  thanks  each  day. 

When  does  the  poem  say  we  should  give  thanks?  Not  only  every 
day,  but  many  times  a  day.  Let  the  children  tell  to  whom  else  besides 
our  Heavenly  Father  we  should  give  thanks  for  the  things  we  receive. 
In  our  homes  mother  and  father  are  constantly  doing  things  for  us. 
Let  the  children  tell  one  way  other  than  saying  "I  thank  you,"  that 
they  can  show  their  thanks  for  what  their  parents  do  for  them.  Then 
let  them  name  some  of  the  ways  in  which   boys  and  girls  can  live  thanks. 

What  kind  of  feeling  do  you  have  when  others  express  their  thanks 
to  you  for  kindnesses  shown?  How  can  you  make  others  happy  who 
are  kind  to  you? 

THE  WHEAT  FIELD 

Some  children  were  sent  to  reap  in  a  wheat  field.  The  wheat  was 
yellow  as  gold;  the  sun  shone  gloriously;  and  the  butterflies  flew  hither 
and  thither.  Some  of  the  children  worked  better,  and  some  worse ; 
but  there  was  one  who  ran  here  and  there  after  the  butterflies  that 
fluttered  about  his  head,  and  sang  as  he  ran. 

By  and  by,  evening  came,  and  the  Angel  of  the  wheat  field  called 
to  the  children  and  said,  "Come  now  to  the  gate,  and  bring  your 
sheaves  with  you." 


Oketopa,  1942  TE  KARERE  295 

So  the  children  came,  bringing  their  sheaves.  Some  had  great 
piles,  laid  close  and  even,  so  that  they  might  carry  more;  some  had 
their's  laid  large  and  loose,  so  they  looked  more  than  they  were;  but 
one,  the  child  who  ran  to  and  fro  after  the  butterflies,  came  empty- 
handed. 

The  angel  said  to  this  child,  "Where  are  your  sheaves?" 

The  child  hung  his  head.  "I  do  not  know!"  he  said.  "I  had 
some,  but  I  have  lost  them,  I  know  not  how." 

"None  enter  here  without  sheaves,"   said  the   Angel. 

"I  know  that,"  said  the  child.  "But  I  thought  I  would  like  to  see 
the  place  where  the  others  were  going;  besides,  they  would  not  let  me 
leave  them." 

Then  all  the  other  children  cried  out  together.  One  said,  "Dear 
Angel,  let  him  in!  In  the  morning  I  was  sick,  and  this  child  came  and 
played  with  me,  and  showed  me  the  butterflies,  and  I  forgot  my  pain. 
Also,  he  gave  me  one  of  his  sheaves,  and  I  would  give  it  to  him  again, 
but  I  cannot  tell  it  from  my  own." 

Another  said,  "Dear  Angel,  let  him  in!  At  noon  the  sun  beat  on 
my  head  so  fiercely  that  I  fainted  and  fell  down  like  one  dead;  and  this 
child  came  running  by,  and  when  he  saw  me  he  brought  water  to 
revive  me,  and  then  showed  me  the  butterflies,  and  I  was  so  glad  and 
merry  that  my  strength  returned;  to  me  also  he  gave  one  of  his  sheaves, 
and  I  would  give  it  to  him  again,  but  it  is  so  like  my  own  that  I  cannot 
tell  it." 

And  a  third,  "Just  now,  as  evening  was  coming,  I  was  weary  and 
sad,  and  had  so  few  sheaves  that  it  seemed  hardly  worth  my  while  to 
go  on  working;  but  this  child  comforted  me,  and  showed  me  the  butter- 
flies, and  gave  me  one  of  his  sheaves.  Look!  it  may  be  that  this  was 
his;  and  yet  I  cannot  tell,  it  is  so  like  my  own." 

And  all  the  children  said,  "We  also  had  sheaves  of  him,  dear 
Angel;  let  him  in,  we  pray  you!" 

The  Angel  smiled,  and  reached  his  hand  inside  the  gate  and  brought 
out  a  pile  of  sheaves;  it  was  not  large,  but  the  glory  of  the  sun  was 
on  it,   so  that  it  seemed  to  lighten  the  whole  field. 

"Here  are  his  sheaves!"  said  the  Angel.  They  are  known  and 
counted,  every  one."      And  he  said  to  the  child,  "Lead  the  way  in." 

FOURTH  WEEK 

Objective: 

Give  the  children  an  opportunity  to  share  their  work  with  others. 
As  this  is  a  sort  of  party  day  the  children  will  enjoy  this  fun  story 
which  teaches  a  good  lesson. 

Story: 

THE  OLD  WOMAN  WHO  LIVED  IN  A  VINEGAR  BOTTLE 

Once  there  was  an  old  woman  who  lived  in  a  vinegar  bottle. 

One  day  she  went  to  market  to  buy  a  loaf  of  bread,  a  pat  of  butter, 
and  a  little  fish  for  her  supper.  When  she  was  returning  home  she 
had  to  cross \a  bridge  over  a  stream.  Just  before  she  came  to  the 
stream  the  little  fish  poked  his  head  out  of  the  paper  and  said,  "Oh, 
please,  little  old  woman,  don't  cook  me  for  your  supper.  I  don't  want 
to  be  friend  in\a  pan." 

"But  I  must,"  said  the  little  old  woman,  "I  have  nothing  else  for 
supper." 

"Please,  please,  throw  me  into  the  wain,"  said  the  little  fish, 
"and  maybe  some  day  I  can  do  something  for  you."  And  he  pleaded 
so  hard  that  the  old  woman  threw  him  into  the  Water.  lit1  looked 
up  and  said,  "Thank  you,  old  woman,"  and  then   he  disappeared. 


/ 


296  TE  KARERE  Oketopa,  1942 

So  the  old  woman  went  home,  and  that  night  she  had  only  bread 
and    butter   for  supper. 

The  next  morning  when  she  was  sweeping  her  house  she  found  a 
bright  new  silver  quarter.  "There,"  said  she;  "the  little  fish  has  sent 
me  this."  And  when  she  had  finished  her  work  she  went  again  to 
market. 

This  time  she  bought  a  piece  of  meat  for  her  supper.  When  she 
was  coming  home  what  should  she  see  in  the  water  but  the  little  fish. 
So  she  stopped  and  called  out,  "Thank  you,  little  fish,  for  the  silver 
quarter  you  sent  me;  but,  oh,  little  fish,  I  wish  I  had  a  little  house  to 
live  in.  It  is  very  difficult  keeping  house  in  a  vinegar  bottle.  One 
has  so  little  room." 

"Go  home,"  said  the  little  fish,"  and  perhaps  you  will  have  your 
wish."  So  the  old  woman  went  home,  but  when  she  got  there  the 
vinegar  bottle  was  gone  and  in  its  place  stood  a  neat  little  house. 

The  old  woman  went  down  to  the  bridge  and  called,  "Little  fish, 
little  fish,   I've  got  another  wish!" 

"Oh,  is  it  you  old  woman?"  said  the  little  fish.  "What  is  it  you 
want  now?" 

"The  little  house  was  very  nice,  little  fish,"  said  the  old  woman, 
"but  it  is  quite  too  small  for  me.  I  want  a  large  house,  and  I  want 
a  girl  to  help  me  take  care  of  it." 

"Well,  well,"  said  the  little  fish,  "We  will  see,"  and  down  he  went 
under  the  water. 

The  old  woman  hurried  home,  but  when  she  came  in  sight  of  the 
place  there  stood  a  fine  large  house  and  a  dear  little  girl  was  sweeping 
the  steps. 

The  old  woman  was  greatly  pleased,  and  she  and  the  little  girl 
were  very  happy.      They  gave  parties  and  they  went  to  church  together. 

But  one  day  the  old  woman  thought  how  very  nice  it  would  be  if 
they  had  a  little  pony  and  a  cart. 

She  hurried  down  to  the  bridge  and  leaning  over  she  called,  "Little 
fish,  little  fish,  I've  got  another  wish!" 

"What,  another  wish?"  said  the  little  fish,  looking  up  out  of  the 
water.      "What  do  you  wish  for  this  time?" 

"I  want  a  little  pony  and  a  cart  so  that  my  little  girl  and  I  can 
drive.  It  is  very  tiresome  to  walk  everywhere  one  goes,"  said  the 
little   old   woman. 

"Well,"  said  the  little  fish,  "go  home  and  maybe  you'll  have  your 
wish." 

Away  went  the  old  woman,  and  when  she  got  home  there  was  the 
pony  and   cart. 

The  old  woman  was  delighted,  and  she  and  the  little  girl  had  a 
happy  time  driving  in   the  park. 

Then  one  day  the  old  woman  thought  how  fine  it  would  be  if 
they  had  a  big  strong  horse  and  carriage.  So  she  said  to  herself,  "I'll 
go   and  tell   the   little   fish." 

Down  to  the  bridge  she  ran  and  called,  "Little  fish,  little  fish,  I've 
got    another   wish!" 

"Another  wish?  What  do  you  want  now?"  said  the  little  fish 
from  the   water. 

"I  want  a  larger  horse  and  a  carriage  with  two  seats." 

"You  want  too  many  things,  old  woman,"  said  the  little  fish.  "I 
can  do  no  more  for  you,"  and  he  swam  under  the  water,  and  the  old 
woman   never   saw   him    again. 

When  she  reached  home  the  fine  house,  the  pony  and  cart  were 
gone,  and  there  stood  the  old  vinegar  bottle. 


Oketopa,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


297 


NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 


AUCKLAND  DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Mission    Secretary 

During  the  latter  part  of  August  of 
this  year,  the  Auckland  Branch  held  a 
very  successful  Branch  Conference.  All 
meetings  including  the  M.I. A.  and  Prim- 
ary programme  of  Saturday  evening  were 
held  in  the  Chapel  at  the  corner  of  Queen 
Street    and    Scotia    Place. 

As  the  main  purpose  of  the  conference 
was  the  reorganization  of  the  Branch, 
many  new  officers  were  installed  and  sus- 
tained. In  the  process,  due  appreciation 
and  honour  was  accorded  those  faithful 
officers  of  the  past  who  were  released, 
among  whom  was  Bro.  William  A.  Carr 
of  the  Branch  Presidency,  who  was  hon- 
ourably released  from  his  position  as 
Second  Counsellor  to  President  Perrott, 
which  was  necessitated  because  of  his 
moving  to  the  South  Island  with  the  ap- 
parent intent  of  residing  there  perman- 
ently. The  new  member  in  the  Presi- 
dency is  Bro.  Clifford  Pentecost,  who  was 
released  from  the  Sunday  School  as 
Superintendent. 

The  other  new  officers  sustained  at  the 
conference  were:  Relief  Society,  Sisters  E. 
Amadio,  Marie  Harris,  Margaret  Ottley : 
Sunday  School,  Brothers  Alexander  Wis- 
hart,  Norman  King,  Ivan  Reid ;  M.I.  A  , 
Sister  Mere  Owen,  Bro.  Thomas  Collins 
and  Bro.  Alexander  Douglas;  Primary, 
Sisters  Jewell  Cowely,  Audrey  Hoey  and 
Joan   Bush. 

Spiritually,  the  conference  was  indeed 
a  success,  as  all  of  the  meetings  were 
very  well  attended,  and  the  speakers 
seemed  to  have  had  the  spirit  and  the 
messages  to  impart.  At  all  of  the  ses- 
sions, President  Matthew  Cowley  pre- 
sided, and  the  immediate  direction  of  the 
meetings  were  under  the  then  existing 
organization  heads,  and  President  William 
R.  Perrott  conducted  the  Priesthood  at 
9  a.m.,  the  2  p.m.  General  Session,  and 
the  concluding  meeting  after  the  Relief 
Society    in    the    evening. 

Because  of  the  exhilarating  news  of 
the  contributions  made  to  the  Patriotic 
Fund  from  functions  conducted  under  the 
auspices  of  the  M.I. A.  throughout  the 
Mission,  there  is  much  activity  in  and 
about  Mangere  and  Auckland,  discussing 
the  pros  and  cons  of  the  advisability  of 
putting  forth  the  effort  required  to  con- 
clude a  successful  Green  and  Gold  Ball 
in  the  district.  From  all  indications  the 
Mangere  M.I. A.  and  Branch  Presidency 
have  been  given  the  task  of  going  into 
the  matter  with  the  intent  of  forming 
the  nucleus  of  workers  needed  to  put 
such    a    project    over. 

Sister  Una  Thompson  of  the  M.I. A. 
Presidency  of  the  Mission,  called  in  at 
Auckland  upon  her  return  from  the  suc- 
cessful Green  and  Gold  Ball  held  at 
Tauranga.  She  did  not  stay  long,  how- 
ever, as  her  duties  called  her  to  the  Wai- 
rarapa  and  Wellington  districts  and  then 
to  Huntly,  in  preparation  for  the  Huntly 
Ball  to  be  held  on  the  17th  September. 

Another  member  of  the  M.I.A.  Mission 
Presidency  to  visit  Auckland  was  R  ■  e 
Beazley  of  Kaiaua.  Her  visit,  however, 
was     to     the     hospital     to     ninler.e.o     six-rial 


treatment  for  an  irritable  ear  complaint. 
She   is   now   back   on   the  farm   again. 

A  very  regular  visitor  to  the  Church 
services  of  the  Branch  is  Corporal  Abbott 
of  Hinckley  Ward.  His  spirit  and  testi- 
mony of  the  Gospel  is  indeed  worthy  of 
his  membership  in  the  Church,  and  is  a 
welcome  impetus  to  other  members  in  the 
services    to    keep    the    truth. 

The  first  marriage  performed  by  Elder 
Teito  Tangataiti  of  the  Mangere  Branch 
Presidency  was  when  he  joined  together 
in  matrimony  his  daughter,  Rangi  Amohia 
Tangataiti  and  Jack  Pitkethly  on  Septem- 
ber  14th,   1942. 

George  Watene,  former  Mission  Secre- 
tary, who  was  a  visitor  to  the  Rotorua 
Branch  Conference  held  in  the  second 
week  of  September,  returned  to  Auckland 
with  President  Cowley,  before  returning 
home    to    Turua. 

WAIKATO    DISTRICT 
Reoorted    by    John    Paki 

With  Elder  Percy  Hill  as  officiating 
minister,  the  marriage  of  Eileen  Wai- 
hongi  Paki  to  Matthew  Ormsby  was  con- 
cluded at  Tokapiko  Pa,  Hauturu,  on  8th 
August,  1942.  This  momentous  occa- 
sion in  the  lives  of  the  newly-weds  was 
performed  at  the  home  of  the  bride- 
groom's parents,  where  many  relatives 
and  friends  had  gathered.  This  gather- 
ing and  its  attendant  functions  and  cus- 
tomary Maori  talks,  etc.,  lasted  into  the 
night,  and  with  the  approach  of  the  even- 
ing, Bro.  John  Paki,  father  of  the  bride 
and  an  Elder  of  the  Church,  was  given 
the  opportunity  of  conducting  karakia. 
This  meeting  was  very  much  appreciated 
by  all  who  attended,  and  it  certainly  was 
an  opportunity  of  testifying  to  the 
divinity   of   the   Gospel. 

HAWKE'S   BAY   DISTRICT 
Reported    by   Olive    Edwards 

Mr.  Ranui  Parahi  and  Miss  Dorothy 
Ferguson  of  Korongata  won  a  silver  cup 
each,  and  an  additional  £5,  when  they 
won  the  Hawke's  Bay  Waltzing  Competi- 
tion held  and  finalised  at  Hastings  July 
29th,   1942. 

As  announced  in  the  last  issue,  the 
Korongata  Green  and  Gold  Ball  held  at 
Hastings  on  August  6,  was  an  outstand- 
ing success,  and  as  such  provided  an  ex- 
cellent incentive  to  the  other  Hawke's 
Bay  M.I.A.s  to  better  the  mark  set  by 
Korongata.  The  winning  Queen  candi- 
date at  the  Korongata  Hall  was  Miss 
Dorothy  Ferguson,  representing  the  M- 
Mi'ii,  with  Miss  Dinah  Solomon,  candi- 
date represent  inv,  tin  Cleaners,  as  the 
charming   and    attractive    lady-in-waiting. 

The  Korongata  Branch  Presidency  ten- 
dered special  invitations  to  Judge  Ache- 
son   of   the    Native    Land   Court    and    Hare 

Kal.ne  of  the  Native  Department  to  at- 
tend   at    a    special    evening    in    their    honour. 

where  the   M.I.A,  and  choir  organi 
provided  an  excellent  programme  of  enter- 
tainment,   on    the    evening    of    September 
8rd     1942.      On    the    following    night    the 
Korongata,  Chape]  Committee  held  ;>  con* 


298 


TE  KARERE 


Oketopa,  I1'-!.' 


cert  in  Hastings  to  raise  more  funds  for 
the     church     beautiflaation     project.       A 

bazaar  is  also  in  preparation  for  a  Big 
Day  in  Hastings  in  aid  of  the  BBme  pro- 
ject, which  is  scheduled  for  October  2nd, 
L942. 

Don    Ross    of   Auckland,    who    is    n    w    in 
the    Bay,    has    s(>    far    formed    a    chi 
choir   with    a    membership    at    presenl    of 
25.      He  is  also  teaching  music  and   so  far 
has   about   nine   pupils. 

Everyone  is  working  hard  throughout 
the  district  for  the  Te  Hauke-Waipawa- 
Heretaunga- Waimarama  M.I. A.  Green  and 
Gold  Ball  scheduled  to  be  held  in  Hast- 
ings   on    September    25th,    1942. 

The  local  M.I. A.  members  of  Koro- 
ngata  are  now  looking  forward  to  their 
Closing  Night  of  M.I. A.  work  for  the  year 
(which  will  be  over  by  the  time  this 
reaches  you),  scheduled  for  the  lsth 
September. 

MAHIA  DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Riripeti    Mataira 

The  Nuhaka  M.I. A.  Green  and  Gold 
Ball  was  held  on  Friday,  28th  August, 
1942,  where  a  record  attendance  enjoyed 
themselves  despite  unsettled  weather  con- 
ditions. The  main  feature  of  the  even- 
ing was  the  crowning  of  the  winning 
Queen  candidate  by  the  Mayor  of  Wairoa, 
Mr.  H.  L.  Harker.  The  ceremony  was 
wonderfully  atmosphered  with  military 
sword  and  tunic,  and  the  honoured  Queen, 
Miss  Hinetauarai  Walker  of  Whakaki, 
and  her  Ladies-in-waiting,  Misses  Teiti 
Nepia  of  Nuhaka,  Olive  Haronga  of  Ta- 
haenui  and  Pango  McGregor  of  Wairoa, 
but  added  to  the  beauty  and  enchant- 
ment  to   the   climax   of   the   evening. 

It  certainly  was  a  proud  ni^ht  for  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  Turi  Walker  of  Whakaki  to  see 
their  daughter  so  graciously  crowned 
Queen   of    the    Ball. 

President  Hirini  Christy  of  the  Nuhaka 
Branch  and  Mahia  District  handed  the 
Mayor  a  cheque  for  £500,  the  tangible 
result  of  the  combined  efforts  and  co- 
operation of  the  people  so  wonderfully 
realized  and  culminated  in  this  one  night's 
gathering.  The  Mayor,  on  behalf  of  the 
Patriotic  Committee,  very  gratefully  re- 
ceived the  contribution  of  the  people,  and 
his  remarks  of  appreciation  and  thanks 
were    very   well   received   and    appreciated. 

The  musical  impetus  for  the  evening 
was  supplied  by  Sid  Kamau's  Dance  Band 
and  vocal  singing  numbers  by  that  very 
talented  personality,  Don  Ross  of  Auck- 
land. 

Honoured  guests  at  a  function  in  their 
behalf  were  Lt.  Benjamin  Christy  and 
Mrs.  Christy,  when  they  attended  a  ban- 
quet and  dance  sponsored  by  the  local 
Patriotic  Committee  at  the  L.D.S.  dininp 
hall. 

The  Relief  Society  monthly  competi- 
tions resulted  in  T.  Solomon  (1),  S. 
Harvey  (2)  and  M.  Winiana  (3)  for  the 
Pikelets.  Shortbread:  H.  Christy  (1),  P. 
Walker  (2).  Flowers:  P.  Walker  (1),  T. 
Solomon    (2)    and    M.    Winiana    (3). 

The  M.I. A  Gleaner  class  is  fortunate 
jn  having  Miss  Mowatt  as  their  instruc- 
tor on  signalling,  and  100  per  cent,  at- 
tendance   is    reported. 

The  members  of  the  district  wish  to 
express  their  sympathy   to  Sister  Mihaere 


and  Family  of  Tahoraiti.  Dannevirke  in 
their    loss    at     the    death    of     Hro.     Wiremu 

"Whati"  Mihaere.  At  the  Nuhaka  Branch 
meeting  of  August  28rd,  l '.»!:>.  one- 
minute's  silence  was  observed  in  honour 
and     memorium    of    Brother     Mihaere. 

\M.-r  six  months'  absence  on  construc- 
tion works,  Hro.  I'akiniana  Taurima  is 
now    hack    again    in    the   Opoutama    Branch. 

James  Ferguson  was  baptized  bj 
Janus     Brown    at    Opoutama. 

Births:  To  Mr.  and  Mrs.  H.  Mitch.  II 
of  Nuhaka,  a  son,  Tuehu  Smith.  To  Mr. 
and  Mrs.  M.  Smith  of  Whakaki,  a  daugh- 
ter     I'aku     Whaanga. 

TARANAKI    DISTRICT 

Reported    by   Zena   M.    Stent    and 

Tukino  Hakopa 

During  the  first  week-end  of  Septem- 
ber. Kelly  Harris,  of  the  Mission  office, 
visited  us  in  Wanganui.  and  all  I  can 
say  is:  "beware,  district  secretaries  ami 
presidencies!"  Bro.  Harris  came  to  work 
and  I  hope  that  I  can  remember  at  least 
half  of  what  instructions  he  gave.  I  am 
taking  this  opportunity  of  advising  all  in 
the  district  of  Taranaki  to  assist  me  in 
my  work  as  District  Secretary,  and  the 
way  you  can  do  that  is  to  DO  YOUR 
PART  OF  THE  WORK  correctly.  Any 
ordinances  performed  in  the  district  must 
be  immediately  communicated  to  me  that 
a  proper  record  be  made.  It  has  been  ad- 
vised by  Bro.  Harris  that  no  ordinations 
to  the  Priesthood  of  Aaron  or  Melchi- 
sedek  be  performed  unless  a  proper 
search  is  made  in  the  Branch  and  dis- 
trict record  as  to  the  membership  of  the 
candidate,  therefore,  in  as  much  as  Pre- 
sident Tukino  Hakopa  was  in  accordance 
with  the  advice,  unless  the  candidate  i- 
recorded  as  a  member  in  the  branch 
record  a  recommendation  to  the  District 
Recorder,  which  is  myself,  is  necessary 
to  satisfy  that  the  candidate  be  a  mem- 
ber of  the  district  or  not.  If  the  candi- 
date is  not  a  member  of  the  district,  the 
recommendation  must  then  go  to  the 
Mission  Office  for  approval,  which  will 
be  given  when  the  membership  is  estab- 
lished,   providing    everything    is    in    order. 

August  3,  1942.  marked  the  passing  <>f 
Maihi  Kerei  (Marsh  Grey)  of  Bell  Rock, 
when  he  died  at  New  Plymouth.  The 
burial  services  were  under  the  direction 
of  President  Tukino  Hakopa  and  Taka 
Toroaiwhiti  on  the  5th  August,  when  the 
body  was  buried  at  Oropuriri. 

WHANGAREI   DISTRICT 

On  August  3rd,  1942,  President  Mat- 
thew Cowley,  accompanied  by  Harold 
Stokes,  journeyed  to  Whanagrei  to  at- 
tend and  officiate  at  the  funeral  of  Elder 
Robert  H.  Osborne,  who  died  July  31st. 
The  many  people  gathered  to  pay  their 
last  respects  included  many  of  the 
churchpeople    throughout    the    district. 

In  the  passing  of  Bro.  Osborne,  Wha- 
ngarei  has  lost  a  loyal  citizen,  and  the 
Church  a  loyal  and  faithful  officer,  as  he 
was  Supervising  Elder  in  the  town.  His 
family  here  in  New  Zealand  will  miss  him 
very  much  as  do  all  who  have  known 
him.  However  the  name  Osborne  will 
be  carried  here  and  abroad  with  distinc- 
tion and  honour  to  country  and  Church. 
In  America  he  has  a  brother  who  is  very 
active   in   Church   work. 


Noema,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


visited  every  house  and  notified  the  people  of  the  meeting 
to  be  held.  There  was  quite  a  good  attendance,  including 
the  Revs.  Dickson  and  Smith  and  a  lay-reader,  Mr.  Watkins. 

"After  dealing  at  some  length  upon  the  attack  made 
by  Rev.  Dickson,  President  Bowles  invited  all  who  so  wished 
to  ask  questions.  Many  did  so ;  especially  the  Rev.  Dickson. 
To  one  not  prejudiced  all  the  accusations  against  "Mor- 
monism"  were  proved  to  be  false.  The  meeting  lasted  until 
11.30  p.m.  The  "Local  Press"  wrote  the  matter  up,  giving 
a  fairly  impartial  report ;  adding  an  editorial  to  the  effect 
that  if  the  "Mormon  President"  (Mr.  Bowles)  could  be 
prevailed  upon  to  come  again  the  hall  would  be  filled  with 
eager  and  attentive  listeners." 

Pursuant  to  this  suggestion,  President  Bowles  returned 
to  Picton  in  October.  The  meeting  was  "held  in  Fay's  Hall, 
a  very  large  number  of  people  being  present,  among  whom 
were  to  be  seen  the  Mayor,  ex-Mayor,  doctors,  councilmen, 
ministers  and  others.  This  time  President  Bowles  preached 
the  Gospel  principles  to  a  very  attentive  audience  for  one 
hour  and  a  half,  after  which  questions  were  asked  quite 
freely  until  10.30  p.m.  The  Rev.  Dickson  made  a  final 
attempt  to  attack  the  doctrine  of  the  Church,  but  miserably 
failed." 

President  Bowles  was  ever  a  loyal  friend,  a  good  neigh- 
bour, a  devoted  husband  and  a  loving  father.  He  was  large 
in  physical  stature  but  gentle  withal.  He  was  fearless  in 
standing  by  his  convictions  but  humble  in  spirit.  He  did 
not  look  upon  sin  with  the  least  degree  of  allowance,  but  he 
was  charitable  to  the  sinner. 

To  his  son,  George,  and  others  of  his  kith  and  kin  who 
survive  him,  the  New  Zealand  Mission  extends  its  sympathy 
and  "aroha  nui"  in  the  loss  of  a  noble  man. 

— Matthew  Cowlky. 


"Good  habits  arc  not  made  on  birthdays,  nor  Christian 
character  at  the  New  Year.  The  workshop  of  character  is 
every-day  life.  The  uneventful  and  commonplace  hour  is 
where  the  battle  is  lost  or  won."-    M.  .D.  Babcock. 


306  TE  ECARERE  Noema,  1(M_> 

PATRIOTIC    CONTRIBUTIONS 

During  the  months  of  August  and  September,  the  Hastings 
Patriotic  Zone  Funds  were  hondsomel}  augmented  by  the  Maori 
people  of  the  district.  Of  the  £l,300-odd  collected,  was  the  won 
derful  contribution  of  the  Mutual  Improvement  Associations  of 
Korongata,  and  the  combined  Te  Hauke,  Waipawa,  Waimarama  and 
Hastings  Green  and  Gold  Balls,  which  accounted  for  more  than 
£1,000  of  the  total. 

This  centre,  however,  is  not  alone  in  benefiting  from  M.I. A. 
effort,  as  all  Green  and  Gold  Balls  throughout  the  Mission  this  year 
were  for  the  benefit  of  patriotic  endeavour.  At  Dannevirke  the  local 
society  was  given  more  than  £350  from  the  Tamaki  Green  and 
Gold  Ball  held  in  the  Town  Hall.  At  Nuhaka,  the  Mayor  of  Wairoa, 
Mr.  I  larker.  received  a  cheque  approximating  £500  as  tin-  result 
of  the  Green  and  Cold  Ball  held  at  the  Nuhaka  L.D.S.  Hall.  The 
Huntly  and  Judea  Green  and  Gold  Balls  each  contributed  hand- 
somely to  their  respective  patriotic  organizations. 

On  behalf  of  the  Mission  and  the  Church,  Te  Karere  expresses 
the  wonderful  feeling  of  satisfaction  and  pride  in  the  accomplish- 
ments of  the-  Saints  and  their  many  wonderful  friends  in  this  response 
to  a  worthy  cause.  Your  actions,  he  they  worthy  or  otherwise,  pro- 
claim your  own  individual  attainments  and  ideals,  and  as  members  of 
the  M.I. A.  your  efforts  have  indeed  been  recognized  and  appreciated. 

The  undermentioned  letter  is  from  the  Mayor  of  Hastings  as 
head  of  the  Hastings  patriotic  organization  to  President  Cowley, 
expressing  his  acknowledgment  of  the  contribution  of  our  1 'resident 
by  his  personal  attendances  and  inspiration  to  the  people  in  such  a 
cause.  We  now  have  much  to  he  thankful  for  throughout  the 
Hawke's  Bay  from  Mahia  at  the  northern  tip  to  Dannevirke  in  the 
south. 

Hastings,    N.Z. 
President  Cowley.  30th  September,  1942. 

Church  of  Latter-day  Saints, 
Auckland. 

My  dear  President  Cowley, 

This  is  just  a  short  note  to  say  how  grateful  I  am  to  you  for  the  magnifi- 
cent lead  which  you  personally  gave  to  Maori  people  and  for  the  very  wonderful 
assistance  which   I   received  from  the  Maori  adherents  to  your  Church. 

I  feel  that  the  result  of  the  Maoris'  efforts  in  Hawke's  Bay  will  have  very 
far-reaching  effects,  and  what  pleases  me  more  than  anything  else  is  the  fact 
that  with  friendly  and  tactful  assistance  from  their  pakeha  friends,  the  Maoris 
in  this  district  at  least,  have  proved  that  they  can  walk  alone  in  these  matters. 
I  do  feel,  however,  that  they  still  will  need  just  what  you  yourself  have  sup- 
plied in  this  latter  campaign,  and  which  I  believe  was  in  a  great  measure  the 
secret  of  its  success. 

With  kind  regards  and  many  thanks. 

Yours  very  sincerely, 

A.  I.  RAIXROW.  Mayor. 


Noema,  1942  TE  KARERE  3  17 

MY   APPRECIATIONS 

(7;/  (.living  the  following  letter  this  title,  I  feci  that  the  writer,  a  former 
Editor  of  "Te  Karere"  had  just   that   thought   in   mind. 

The  following  letter  was  written  to  President  Cowley  by  Elder  Pilot  Officer 
11.  M.  Meha  of  the  R.N.Z.A.F.  on  service  overseas.  In  publishing  his  letter. 
"Te  Karere"  hopes  that  it  accomplishes  the  purpose  intended  by  Bro.  Meha  and 
further  provides  interesting  reading  to  all  who  may  read  these  pages.— Editor.) 

I  am  sorry  that  I  cannot  greet  you,  one  and  all,  in  our  own  native 
tongue,  but  should  this  letter  be  censored,  Mr.  Censor  might  not  appre- 
ciate  it   and   might   confuse    Grade   A   Maori   for   third-class   Japanese. 

A  lot  of  water  has  passed  under  the  bridge  since  I  left  New  Zea- 
land— since  I  left  you  all,  my  people,  friends  and  loved  ones.  Many 
faces  will  be  missing,  having  answered  the  "Call"  whence  there  is  no 
return.  Some  on  our  Empire's  gory  battlefield,  others  through  natural 
causes  right  there  at  home.  It  is  a  little  over  a  year  now  since  my 
arrival  in  this  magnificent  continent,  the  land  spoken  of  by  Father 
Lehi  as  "Whenua  O  Te  Kupu  Whakaari" — The  Land  of  Promise — the 
land   blessed   above   all   others.      And   correctly   was   it   named. 

Without  a  doubt  these  two  nations  and  peoples,  the  Canadians 
and  the  Americans  are  self-sustaining — self-supporting.  They  do  not 
need  to  go  outside  their  countries  to  obtain  the  necessities  of  life — 
bread  and  meat — while  minerals,  lubricants  and  iron,  coal,  lumber  and 
electricity  and  electrical  appliances,  so  necessary  to  modern  modes  of 
living  and  transportation,  etc.,  may  be  obtained  in  plenty  in  this  land. 

It  is  said  that  comparisons  are  odious:  be  that  as  it  may,  but  to  us 
who  hail  from  "Down  Under"  by  comparing  what  we  have  and  what 
we  lack  we  arrive  at  a  basis  where  we  can  obtain  a  truer  sense  of  values. 
In  the  money,  for  instance,  we  buy  goods  with  dollars  and  cents,  but 
we  reckon  in  pounds,  shillings  and  pence,  and  in  this  way  only  can 
we  ascertain  whether  or  not  the  commodity  bought  compares  favourably 
with  our  prices  at  home,  or  whether  it  is  much  higher  or  much  cheaper. 
Tinned  foodstuffs,  fruit  juices,  strawberries,  cherries,  grapes,  peaches, 
chocolate,  ice-cream,  bread,  cake,  biscuits,  milk  and  jam  cost  consider- 
ably less  here  than  there  at  home.  However,  cheese  and  butter,  mutton, 
bananas  are  considerably  more.  The  better  cuts  of  meat  is  a  little  higher 
in  price,  but  one  thing  we  must  concede  to  the  Canadian — they  do> 
know  how  to  cut  a  good  steak.  Until  we  came  to  this  country  we  did 
not  know  what  a  Porterhouse  steak  was  or  what  a  T-bone  steak  looked 
like.  To  me,  they  are  the  choicest  of  all  beef  cuts.  Go  into  a  res- 
taurant and  order  a  T-bone  or  Porterhouse  steak  and  you  have  on  your 
hands  a  cut  big  enough  to  feed  two  people,  about  an  inch  and  a  half 
thick,  tender,  juicy  and  decidedly  appetising. 

Meals  in  cafes  are  somewhat  higher  than  back  there,  but  really 
it  is  worth  the  extra  cost.  One  has  such  a  big  variety  of  foodstuffs  to 
choose  from.  To  be  truthful,  for  every  one  item  we  have  on  our  menu 
cards  they  have  ten  to  fifteen  on  their  cards  here.  It  would  take  four 
of  these  pages  to  give  you  the  ordinary  every-day  menu  a  la  carte. 

The  hotel  services  are  unique,  prompt  and  efficient.  There  are 
no  such  things  as  bars  in  the  hotels.  Rooms  with  private  lavatory  and 
wash-basin  and  telephone  cost  from  a  dollar,  seventy-five  upwards,  while 
a  double  room  with  private  bath,  lavatory  and  telephone  sets  One 
back  to  the  tune  of  two  and  a  half  dollars  and  up.  In  the  up-to-date 
and  modern  hotels,  one  may  purchase  anything  from  a  tooth-pick  to  a 
submarine.  It  really  is  a  pleasure  to  stay  in  one  of  these  big  hotels 
— if   you   can   afford   it. 

The  railroad  service,  especially  on  the  main  routes,  is  all  that  one 
can  wish  for.     Fast  trains  whisk  you  from  one  end  of  the  continent  to 


IK   KARERE 


N< 


1942 


the  other  almost   in  the  Bame  time  it   tak<  om   Wellington  to 

Auckland  and   back  again.     The  distance  is  a  little  better  than 
thousand  miles.     Thus  you  will  Bee  the  trains  do  not  "loaf"  along. 

On  the  trains  are  first-class  "diners"  or  dining-cars,  where  excel- 
lent  in  al     a.*    obtained  at   a  reasonable   price.     Persona]  care  of  the 
the  lot  of  the  Negro  porters,  whose  gentlemanly  manners 
and   charm   of  speech   and  voic<  to   behold.      Reservations 

can  only  be  made  on  Night  Coaches,  first  and  second  class,  and  sle 
Pay  Coaches,  used  In  short  trips  when-  the  journey  does  not  require 
an  all-night  trip,  are  commodious  and  comfortable,  with  thick  ii 
the  floor,  great  big  leather,  fibre  or  plush-lined  seats,  air-conditioned 
and,  indeed,  pleasant  to  ride  in.  Two  great  concerns  traverse  this 
continent  with  hundreds  of  miles  of  steel  and  coaches — The  Canadian 
National  Railways— Government  owned — and  the  Canadian  Pacific 
Railways  (C.P.R.) — company  owned.  Both  these  railways  run  through 
country  of  exquisite  beauty,  each  controlling  hotels  at  the  leading 
eauty  spots  throughout  Canada  and  in  all  the  chief  cities  and  smaller 
-•'ties    of   this    COntil 

Hundreds  of  miles  are  covered  by  the  different  airways — Trans- 
Canada  Airways  being  the  largest  concern.  Connections  with  American 
Air  Lines  are  made  at  different    points. 

This  is  indeed  a  tremendous  country,  where  things  are  done  in  a 
big  way.  For  instance,  perhaps  no  other  country  in  the  world  could 
have  ur.de!  taken  such  a  colossal  undertaking-  as  has  Canada,  in  the 
tling  of  so  many  hundreds  of  airmen,  ground 
and  administration  personnel,  as  has  been 
-fully  carried  out  in  so  short  a  time. 
All  over  this  continent  it  seems  that  overnight 
huge  wooden  cities  have  sprung  up-  marsh  land 
filled  in,  mountains  laid  flat  and  perfect  airfields, 
fully    equipped,    have     resulted.      I'  to    a 

miracle.  Much  as  I  would  like  to  say  about  the 
Empire  Air  Training  Scheme,  it  is  a  strictly  guarded 
secret,  hut  suffice  to  say,  a  very  wonderful  achieve- 
ment in  such  a  short  space  of  time.  Perhaps  there 
J&  is   one   thing   I    could    mention    about   this   plan,    and 

JjjGL  >    that  is  the   opportunity  afforded  the   young   nun   of 

H^      (fy  fc         I    different    nationalities    of    meeting    one    another — 
5k>     x*\         1    New    Zealanders.    Australians,    Americans,    Swedes, 
■;       V  I     Poles,   Norwegians,   South   Africans,   Cingal 

^^^^ «gggsr*    -    [  (|ians    (R0(i)      Canadians,    Checks,    Yugos.,    French 
and  Englishmen.    All  rub  shoulder  to  shoulder  with 
Elder   Meha  t^e   other  in   this  great   "melting  pot,"   and   one   of 

the  results  is  a  better  understanding  and  a  greater  appreciation  of  the 
other  chap. 

ugh  the  national  beauty  of  New  Zealand  is  world  famous. 
Canada  also  beasts  a  beauty  equal,  if  not  surpassing,  that  of  our  own 
island  heme.  Where  ours  is  on  such  a  small  scale,  theirs  engulf  more 
lavish  proportions.  The  name  Rockies  is  known  to  every  New  Zea- 
lander.  Never  have  mountain  ranges  been  so  truly  named.  Just  sheer 
walls  of  rock  and  granite  reaching  unto  dizzy  heights,  only  to  be  lost 
a  mantle  of  clouds,  awe-ful,  grand,  majestic.  The  beauty  of 
the  pines,  spruce,  cotton-woods,  maples,  ashes,  and  poplars  is  a  pleasing 
sight,  whilst  sylvan  lakes,  nestling  in  the  lap  of  huge  valleys  surrounded 
by  towering  snow-capped  rugged  mountains,  and  on  the  shores  of  which 
huge  pines  and  blue-spruce  lift  their  heads  heavenward,  thrilling  the 
soul  of  man  with  a  beauty  that  is  divine.  No  wonder  man  has  credited 
Nature  with  the  powers  of  its  Creator  and  has  called  it,  not  the  Build- 
ing constructed  by  the  Builder,  but  the  Builder  itself.  There  are 
myriads  of  extremely  beautiful  summer  and  winter  resorts,  among  the 


Noema,  1942  TE  KARERE  309 

best  known  being  Banff,  Lake  Louise,  Jasper  National  Park,  Waterton, 
Waskesiu  and  others. 

Not  only  has  Canada  used  its  waterways  for  fishing,  electricity 
and  waterways,  but  for  years  they  have  been  utilized  by  the  lumber- 
jack as  a  means  of  transport  for  millions  and  millions  of  feet  of  lumber 
from  the  camp  site  to  the  lumber  mill  or  paper  mill,  hundreds  of  miles 
away.  Exactly  the  opposite  to  the  beauty  of  the  towering  Rockies  is 
that  of  the  prairie  lands  of  the  west.  For  miles  and  miles  around,  the 
countryside  is  as  level  as  a  billiard  table,  so  different  from  our  little 
New  Zealand.  It  is  impossible  for  you  who  have  not  seen  such  a  forma- 
tion as  this  to  imagine  or  even  picture  in  your  minds  what  a  sight  as 
this  looks  like.  As  far  as  the  eye  could  see  the  landscape  stretches 
forth  flat  and  level.  On  such  lands  as  these  the  granneries  of  the  world 
are  supplied  yearly  with  a  rich  golden  harvest  so  essential  to  mankind. 

Before  bringing  this  to  an  end,  let  me  tell  you  something  about  the 
Canadian  and  Canadian  hospitality.  It  has  been  my  good  fortune  to  be 
the  guest  at  the  homes  of  Saints  and  non-members  alike.  In  all  sin- 
cerity and  in  humbleness,  and  with  no  thought  of  boasting,  there  is 
no  finer  people  on  this  earth  than  the  Latter-day  Saints  who  are  living 
their  religion,  be  they  black,  white,  brown  or  yellow.  And  the  Saints 
I  have  had  the  pleasure  of  meeting,  visiting  with,  and  in  whose  homes 
I  have  been  made  to  feel  so  welcome,  are  no  exception. 

It  was  a  single  honour,  not  only  to  meet  Elder  David  A.  Smith  and 
Sister  Smith,  President  of  the  Eastern  Canadian  Mission,  but  also  to 
have  the  pleasure  of  staying  with  them  in  the  Mission  Home  at  Fern- 
dale  Avenue,  Toronto,  for  almost  a  week.  Whilst  there  I  had  the  privi- 
lege of  attending  Sunday  meetings  and  a  Mutual  meeting,  and  meeting 
the  Saints  and  the  missionaries  of  that  city.  They  have  a  splendid 
chapel,  which  is  a  credit  to  the  members  of  that  ward.  I  was  afforded 
the  opportunity  of  visiting  two  or  three  of  the  families  in  their  homes. 

In  Oshawa,  a  city  about  thirty  miles  north-east  of  Toronto,  I  met 
Brother  and  Sister  Schoenau  and  the  Saints  of  that  city.  Theirs  is  a 
young  branch,  small  in  membership,  but  plenty  big  in  enthusiasm  and 
archa.  The  missionaries  are  doing  a  good  work  there,  and  quite  a 
number  of  people  are  investigating  the  message  of  Mormonism. 

Though  Winnipeg  is  a  large  city,  there  are  comparatively  very  few 
Saints  in  that  ward.  The  missionaries,  with  President  Roberts  and  his 
counsellors,  are  doing  a  good  job,  and  I  feel  sure  their  numbers  will 
increase  from  time  to  time.  The  Saints  there  were  awfully  kind,  and 
I  am  greatly  indebted  to  them. 

To  me  their  is  no  finer  music  in  all  the  world  than  the  members  of 
our  congregations  singing  our  Latter-day  Saints'  songs.  This  was 
brought  home  to  me  at  my  first  Sunday  night  meeting  with  the  Saints 
of  the  Lethbridge  Ward,  Alberta.  They  have  a  membership  between 
800  and  1000.  My  mind  took  wings  to  far-off  Aotea-roa,  to  our  Hui 
Taus  and  Hui  Parihas.  The  singing  was  so  much  like  that  which  one 
hears  at  those  gatherings. 

I  cannot  say  enough  about  the  people  of  this  ward.  Such  men  and 
women  as  Pres.  and  Sister  Palmer  and  family,  Pres.  and  Sister  Ursen- 
bach  and  family,  Pres.  and  Sister  Andersen,  father  and  mother  of 
Elder  Willard  Andersen,  so  well  known  to  you  folks  back  there  in 
Hawke's  Bay  and  Mahia.  Will  himself,  and  also  his  wife,  his  sister 
and  brother-in-law,  Bro.  Hunsaker,  brother  to  the  two  Hunsak"  r 
who  were  missionaries  in  New  Zealand  some  years  ago;  Pres.  Steele, 
Pres.  of  the  Stake,  Bro.  and  Sister  Johannasen  and  family  and  hosts 
of  others  of  the  Lethbridge  Ward  who  were  so  kind  to  me  and  the 
boys  at  our  camp.  I  will  eve)-  he  indebted  to  these  good  people.  They 
have  a  splendid  ward  and  their  new  chapel,  still  in  the  course  <>f  con- 
struction, will  be  a  monument  to  their  future  generations  of  a  tine  and 
stalwart  people.  I  shall  never  forget  these  people  and  their  Western 
hospitality. 


310  TE  KARERE 


Moema,  1942 


I  had  the  privilege  of  meeting  President  Wood  of  the  Cardston 
Temple,  and  many  of  the  Saints  of  Cardston,  the  Temple  City.  Though 
at  the  time  of  writing  it  was  not  my  pleasure  to  go  through  the  Souse 
of  the  Lord,  I  trust  that  by  the  time  this  reaches  N.Z.  Bhores  the  privi- 
lege and  honour  will  have  been    mine. 

I  made  it  a  point  to  visit  Raymond,  Alta,  and  although  I  spent  one 
night  only  it  was  a  night  well  spent  with  Generald  Gibb,  the  man  wh<» 
persevered  with  me  during  my  initiation  to  "Te  Karere"  work  nearly 
ten  years  ago.  He  has  a  charming  wife  and  a  grand  family  of  three 
BOns.  I  met  a  number  of  members  in  the  few  hours  I  was  there.  I 
thoroughly  enjoyed  my  visit  with  Gerald.  I  also  had  the  good  for- 
tune while  at  Cardston  of  meeting  and  renewing  old  acquaintances 
with  Elder  Ray  Blackmore.  He  is  fine.  I  also  met  a  Bro.  Wylie,  a 
New  Zealander,  living  at  Cardston  who  mentioned  many  of  the  Saints, 
including  Bro.  Chas.  Billman  of  Auckland,  Bro.  Stuart  Meha  of  Hawke's 
Bay,  and  others.  His  father  receives  "Te  Karere"  from  Bro.  Billman, 
and  it  is  a  source  of  interest  to  them  and  is  about  the  only  publication 
which  keeps  them  in  touch  with  the  homeland.  Their  praise  of  "Te 
Karere"   is  loud  and  long. 

And  now  a  word  about  the  people,  non-members,  who  have  been 
so  good  and  kind  to  me  and  other  Maori  boys,  and  Europeans,  too.  for 
that  matter. 

While  hitch-hiking  from  Niagara  Falls  to  my  station  in  Trenton 
last  fall  I  was  fortunate  to  be  picked  up  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Annis  of 
Oshawa,  Ont.  This  was  the  beginning  of  an  acquaintanceship  which 
budded  into  a  mutual  friendship  never  to  be  forgotten — by  me  at  least. 
Their  home  was  a  home  away  from  home,  and  each  week-end  for  three 
months  that  was  my  abode.  They  drove  me  hundreds  of  miles  to  see 
the  different  points  of  interest  in  beautiful  Ontario.  When  the  good 
people  found  out  I  was  fond  of  corn  and  water  melon,  these  were  in- 
cluded in  our  daily  bill  of  fare  as  long  as  the  corn  and  melons  were 
in  season.  Through  them  I  met  other  people  at  whose  homes  I  was 
made   so    welcome. 

My  next  station  was  Winnipeg.  From  my  first  week  in  Winnipeg 
I  was  again  fortunate  to  meet  the  splendid  family  of  Mr.  William 
Greening.  To  these  people  I  owe  much.  Their  home  was  open  to  me 
and  my  friends  24  hours  of  the  day.  This  was  my  home  for  seven 
months,  and  the  homes  of  their  friends  were  open  to  me  at  all  times. 
Their  friends  were  my  friends — the  Goldings,  Browns,  Fullers,  Ormis- 
tons,  Crowders,  Dickiesons  and  others  too  numerous  to  mention.  These 
were  the  people  that  first  taught  me  to  skate  on  ice;  that  took  me  to 
my  first  hockey  match,  that  initiated  me  to  my  first  sleigh  ride.  These 
were  the  people  that  planned  weeks  ahead  to  make  my  stay  in  Winni- 
peg one  of  joy  and  one  full  of  interesting  events. 

By  their  request  other  Maori  boys,  pakehas,  and  Canadians  also, 
were  entertained  by  them  and  were  made  to  feel  at  home.  Tommy 
Waerea  of  Nuhaka,  Ron  Bennett  of  Dargaville,  Mick  Manawaiti  (my 
own  cousin)  from  Maketu,  Rotorua,  another  Maori  lad,  Pat  from  Tara- 
naki,  have  been  their  guests  overnight  and  to  dinner  on  several  occa- 
sions. In  Portage  La  Prairie,  Man.,  the  homes  of  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Osborne, 
manager  of  the  Bank  of  Nova  Scotia,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Cal  Miller,  the 
Caldwills,  and  others  were  my  retreat. 

Ma  Greening  and  Ma  Brown,  Mrs.  Annis  and  Mrs.  Golding  and 
Mrs.  Fuller — to  them  I  owe  a  lot.  If  people  throughout  the  world  were 
like  these  good  people — giving  and  expecting  nothing  in  return,  caring 
to  our  needs,  washing  and  mending  our  clothes,  feeding  us  as  they 
do,  with  never  a  cent  of  pay  in  return — there  would  be  no  such  thing 
as  wars,  hatreds  and  needless  suffering. 

In  conclusion  let  me  say  this:  As  big  and  grand  as  the  Rockies  art, 
as  wide  and  broad  as  the  Prairie  lands  of  the  West — all  these  pale  into 
insignificance  in  comparison  to  the  bigness  of  the  hearts  of  the  Cana- 


Noema,  1942  TE  KARERE  311 

dian  people.  Our  treatment  at  their  hands  may  be  only  expected  from 
our  own  loved  ones.  This  is  indeed  Canadian  hospitality.  They  are 
the  essence  of  kindness. 

Before  concluding-  I  have  been  in  touch  with  several  of  our  former 
missionaries  from  Utah  and  Idaho.  Lieutenant  Warren  Ottley  is  in 
Florida.  Elder  Haslam  is  in  the  Air  Corps  and  is  at  an  Officers'  Train- 
ing Camp.  Elder  Baumgartner  is  in  the  Army  too.  Can  you  imagine 
Elder  Baum  shouldering  a  gun  almost  as  big  as  he?  Elder  Rudd  is 
in  the  chicken  business  and  Elder  Wallace  is  working  at  the  same  place. 
Barry  Wride  is  also  in  the  Army.  Elder  Simpson  is  living  in  Southern 
California  and,   I   believe,   is  married. 

Julian  R.  Stephens  of  Ogden  has  been  corresponding  with  me 
ever  since  I  landed  in  this  country.  He,  with  the  other  Elders  and 
Pres.  Hardy,  have  been  more  than  kind,  helping  me  financially  and 
sending  me  such  welcome  articles  as  chewing  gum  and  chocolate  bars. 
These  commodities  are  invaluable  in  the  air.  I  received  splendid 
Christmas  cakes,  cookies  and  candy  bars  from  Julian.  Former  mis- 
sionaries have  all  been  so  kind  to  me,  and  though  the  channels  of  "Te 
Karere"  I  would  like  to  thank  them  all  and  to  let  you  know  back  home 
there  in  N.Z.  just  how  kind  our  missionaries  have  been  to  me. 

I  want  to  thank  you  all,  too,  the  Saints  of  Auckland  and  the  non- 
members   also   for   your   goodness  to   me. 

I  wish  to  thank  the  Saints  and  friends  throughout  the  Mission  for 
your  kind  letters.  I  do  appreciate  them.  My  own  loved  ones  in  H.B. 
— my  dad,  brothers,  sisters,  aunts,  uncles,  nieces  and  nephews  and 
other  relatives — I  love  you  all.  I  miss  you  all.  Grannie  Mere,  "Kia 
kaha  ki  a  koe!"  ("I'll  be  seeing  you  soon!") — and  the  many  others 
whose  names  are  too  numerous  to  mention. 

To  the  Waipawa  people :  It  was  my  great  pleasure  to  meet  Harold 
Dwight   at    Regina.      He    is   well    and    fit. 

I  have  been  blessed  a  thousand  fold.  I  have  a  testimony  of  the 
truth  of  the  Gospel.  Blessings  pronounced  on  my  head  by  President 
Cowley  and  my  dad  have  literally  come  to  pass.  Others  yet  have  to 
be  fulfilled.  I  know  they  will  be  fulfilled.  I  believe  in  the  Word  of 
Wisdom  and  have  kept  it  rigidly.  I  endeavour  to  keep  the  law  of 
tithing  and  to  pray  night  and   day. 

To  all  our  boys  in  the  forces,  I  am  convinced  of  this:  Keep  the 
Word  of  Wisdom,  do  not  deviate  from  the  teachings  of  our  parents 
which  are  the  teachings  of  our  Lord,  and  we  will  be  blessed.  Our  work 
will  be  easy  to  perform  and  we  will  gain  promotion.  Greatest  of  all, 
we  will  again  be  reunited  with  those  we  love  so  much.  You  know  the 
many  evils  which  surround  us  in  our  daily  army  life.  Temptations 
are  on  all  sides  of  us.  Therefore  be  prayerful:  hedge  yourselves 
around  with  a  mantle  of  prayer  and  I  feel  sure  we  will  not  fall  short. 
I  hope  and  pray  I  shall  return  to  my  wife  and  son  just  as  I  left  her. 
God   bless  you  all. 

I  trust  some  day  soon  I  shall  see  you  all  again.  Kia  Ora  and 
arohanui   to    all. 

Your  Friend  and  Brother, 

HOHEPA  MEHA. 


SPECIAL. To    some    of    the    Saints    in    out-of-the-way    places,    who 

desire  to  pay  tithing  before  the  end  of  the  year,  send  it  direct  to  the 
Mission  Office  on  or  before  the  last  day  of  November,  1942.  This 
announcement  is  not  for  members  who  are  regular  tithe-payers  to 
Branch  Presidents  and  others  authorised  to  receive  tithing,  but  is 
specifically  for  the  few  who  are  unable  to  contact  organized  branches. 
Send  in  your  tithing  and  we  will  return  a  receipt  for  the  same  from 
the    Mission    Office.      Remember,    the    30th    November,     1942. 


312  TE  KARERE  Noema,  L942 

UNITY  FOR  THE  WELFARE  OF  THE  CHURCH 
AND  THE  NATION 

l>v  Harold  B.  Lee,  of  the  Council  of  the  Twelve 
[Address  delivered  at  the  Monday  morning  session  of  the    I 

Annual   General  Conference,  April  6,   1942,  in  the  Assembly  Hall.  I 

This  has  been  a  gathering  that  might  accurately  have  been 
described  as  a  Church  leadership  conference.  President  Grant,  at  the 
opening  session  of  this  conference,  bore  testimony  to  the  divine  calling 
of  those  who  have  presided  over  the  Church  in  this  dispensation.  In  his 
testimony  he  has  given  us  the  key  by  which  we  may  be  safely  guided 
in  our  own  presidency  and  leadership  responsibility,  and  he  sounded 
the  keynote  that  has  carried  through  this  entire  conference.  I  am 
persuaded  that  any  presiding  officer  who  does  not  have  such  a  testimony 
is  not  qualified  to  preside  as  an  officer  in  the  Church. 

From  the  beginning  of  time,  as  recorded  in  sacred  scripture,  the 
prophets  of  the  Lord  have  sounded  the  warning  not  to  the  world  and 
to  the  membership  of  the  Church.  There  have  always  been  those  with 
apostate  leanings  who  have  ridiculed,  and  have  stood  on  the  side-lines 
and  made  light  of  the  efforts  of  those  who  sought  to  follow  that  counsel. 
It  was  so  in  the  days  of  Noah,  and  that  history  is  repeating  itself  at 
the  present  time. 

In  1831,  the  Lord  gave  a  revelation  to  this  Church,  in  which  lit 
declared  that  "the  time  was  not  yet,  but  soon,  when  peace  should  be 
taken  from  the  earth."  That  time,  we  all  recognize,  is  here.  In  that 
same  revelation  the  Lord  declared  : 

"Wherefore,  I,  the  Lord,  knowing  the  calamity  which  should  come 
upon  the  inhabitants  of  the  earth,  called  upon  my  servant  Joseph 
Smith,  Jun.,  and  spake  unto  him  from  heaven,  and  gave  him  com- 
mnadments."    (D.  &  C.  1 :  17.) 

Again  He  has  declared,  "Whether  by  mine  own  voice,  or  by  the 
voice  of  my  servants,  it  is  the  same."  (D.  &  C.  1:38.)  Not  all  of  Hi- 
commandments  have  been  given  to  the  Church  in  the  writings  of  the 
scriptures. 

This  conference  has  convened  on  the  sixth  anniversary  of  the 
launching  of  what  we  have  styled  the  Church  Welfare  Plan  which  was 
given  to  the  Church  by  our  leaders  as  they  were  inspired  by  the  Lord. 
The  activities  of  the  Welfare  Plan  have  provided  the  greatest  oppor- 
tunities for  spiritualizing  this  Church  that  perhaps  have  ever  been 
given  this  people  in  our  generation,  and  as  we  have  watched  it  unfold 
and  its  purposes  be  more  fully  revealed,  we  have  come  to  see  therein 
a  building  for  not  only  the  temporal  salvation  but  also  the  spiritual 
salvation  of  the  Church  as  well.  Priesthood  quorums  everywhere  who 
have  rallied  to  that  call,  and  have  joined  together  as  a  group,  have 
bound  themselves  in  love  and  unity  that  has  blessed  this  Church  beyond 
our   fondest   expectations. 

We  have  come  to  understand,  and  it  is  my  firm  conviction  that  the 
thing  most  needed  in  the  Church  to-day  is  a  membership  stimulated 
to  action  by  a  fervent  conversion  to  the  divinity  of  the  calling  of  the 
brethren  who  preside  as  leaders  of  this  Church.  We  have  been  a  most 
blessed  people  above  all  other  peoples.  We  have  been  given  the  powei 
of  the  Priesthood.  We  have  been  blessed  with  a  divine  leadership  and 
an  inspired  organization,  and  a  great  pioneering  heritage  and  experi- 
ence. The  Lord  will  hold  us  responsible  for  the  blessings  that  He 
has  given  us,  and  if  the  calamities  that  have  been  foretold  come  upon 
this  people,  they  will  come  because  we  have  not  done  our  full  duty, 
and  we  have  not  made  the  most  of  our  opportunities,  nor  have  we 
discharged  the  responsibilities  we  bear  before  our  Heavenly  Father. 

We  have  had  many  evidences  of  the  power  manifesting  itself  from 
the  united  team  work  of  Priesthood  quorums.      We  have  witnessed  that 


X.  ema,  1942  TE  KARERE  313 

wherever  stake  welfare  groups  have  followed  the  counsel  of  the  leaders, 
and  have  banded  together  as  regional  organizations,  when  there  was  a 
disaster  or  an  emergency,  as  was  the  case  in  southern  Arizona  during 
a  serious  flood  situation,  we  have  discovered  to  our  delight  that  the 
way  was  provided  by  which  true  brotherhood  was  fostered.  We  have 
noted  how  Priesthood  quorums  have  made  large  contributions,  with  but 
very  little  effort  when  they  worked  unitedly  together.  We  have  seen 
how  great  amounts  of  produce  have  come  from  those  who  saw  in  their 
assignment  not  merely  an  out-and-out  contribution,  but  a  chance  to 
work  together  and  to  develop  together,  on  a  permanent  foundation, 
some  project  of  which  their  community  was  capable. 

We  have  been  delighted  to  observe  throughout  the  Church  an 
attempt  to  study  the  basic  reasons  for  our  economic  difficulties,  and  in 
farming  communities  we  have  noticed  that  farmers  have  set  their  goals 
to  two  prime  objectives,  namely,  first  to  pro- 
duce all  they  can  on  their  own  farms,  for 
their  own  living;  and,  second,  to  make  an  all- 
out  war  on  debt.  The#analysis  of  how  that 
work  should  be  done  has  been  something  that 
I  am  sure  would  provide  intelligent  and  pro- 
fitable reading  for  those  who  are  struggling 
with  these  problems. 

The  general  Church  Welfare  committee 
would  have  me  say  to  you,  that  from  the 
standpoint  of  organization  there  is  no  other 
way  to  carry  forward  this  work  except  by  the 
Ward  Welfare  committees,  properly  super- 
vised by  the  stake  Welfare  committees.  It 
can't  be  done  without  an  intelligent  analysis 
of  problems  as  revealed  in  the  survey  that 
you  have  been  asked  to  make.  The  only  ones 
Harold  B    Lee  who    are    objecting   to    the    carrying    forward 

of  that  survey,  or  to  the  organization  as  now 
set  up,  are  these  who  have  never  organized  or  who  have  never  made 
the  survey. 

We  are  pleased  that  in  the  Salt  Lake  region  we  have  received  the 
report  that  at  least  seventy-five  per  cent,  of  the  wards  are  functioning 
according  to   programme. 

We  have  been  asked  to-day  to  be  patriotic.  This  Church,  as  ha& 
been  read  by  President  McKay,  has  a  record  of  accomplishment  that 
is  a  delight  to  all  of  us,  and  a  testimony  to  the  World  of  the  patriotism 
of  this  people.  We  have  been  sending  our  boys  into  the  army,  and 
will  continue  to  do  so.  We  will  buy  war  bonds  and  stamps.  We 
will  pay  inordinate  taxes,  for  the  carrying  on  of  the  work  for  the 
buying  of  planes  and  munitions  of  war.  We  will  produce  and  conserve 
foodstuffs,  that  there  may  be  sufficient  of  the  necessities  to  carry  on, 
as  we  have  been  requested  by  our  Government. 

But  beyond  all  that,  the  Latter-day  Saints  have  a  responsibility, 
that  may  be  better  understood  when  we  recall  the  prophecy  oi'  Joseph 
Smith  who  declared  that  "the  time  would  come  when  (the  destiny  and) 
the  Constitution  of  these  United  States  would  hang  as  it  wore  by  a 
thread,  and  that  this  people,  the  sons  of  Zion,  would  rise  up  and  save 
it  from  threatened  destruction."    (J.  of  D.,  Vol.  7:15.) 

I  want  to  ask  you  to  consider  the  meaning  of  that  prophecy,  in  the 
light  of  the  declaration  of  the  prophets  of  the  Book  of  Mormon  times, 
who  declared  that  this  land  was  a  choice  land  above  all  other  lands. 
and  would  be  free  from  bondage  and  from  captivity,  and  from  all  other 
nations  under  heaven,  if  they  will  but  serve  the  God  of  this  land,  ever 
our  Saviour,  Jesus  Christ.      (Ether  2:  12) 

This  is  a  people  whom  the  Lord  has  chosen  to  preach  the  gospel 
of   righteousness.      We    talk   of    security    ill    this   day,    and    yet    \ 


314  TE  KARERE  Noema,  1942 

to  understand  that  here  on  this  Temple  Block  we  have  standing  the  holy 
temple   wherein   we   may   find   the  Bymbols   by   which   power   might   be 

generated  that  will  save  this  nation  from  destruction.  Therein  may 
be  found  the  fullness  of  the  blessings  of  the  Priesthood.  Yesterday 
morning,  as  we  assembled  ami  heard  the  broadcast  from  that  place. 
broadcasting  to  the  world  a  message,  it  to  me  was  significant  of  the 
prophecy  that  from  this  place  "the  law  shall  go  forth  to  the  world,  and 
the  word  of  the  Lord  from  .Jerusalem."  The  spires  on  the  eastern  towera 
of  the  temple  air  to  represent  the  presidency  of  the  Melchizedek  Priest- 
hood; the  spires  of  the  west,  the  presidency  of  the  Aaronic  Priesthood; 
the  gilded  figure  of  the  angel  Moroni  symbolizes  the  preaching  of  the 
gospel  to  the  world.  The  gospel  must  be  preached  as  a  witness  under 
the  direction  of  the  holy  Priesthood:  "Fear  God  and  give  glory  to  him; 
for  the  hour  of  his  judgment  is  come."  (Rev.  14:  7)  Therein  lies  the 
responsibility  of  this  Church  in  sanctifying  this  people  and  this  nation, 
that  they  might  be  spared  the  judgments  that  otherwise  might  come 
upon  them,  were  it  not  for  the  preaching  of  the  humble  elders  of  this 
Church.  % 

The  Prophet  Isaiah  comforted  his  struggling  people  with  these 
words : 

"Peace,  peace  to  him  that  is  far  off,  and  to  him  that  is  near,  saith 
the  Lord;  and  I  will  heal  him. 

"But   the   wicked   are   like   the   troubled    sea,    when    it    cannot 
whose  waters  cast  up   mire   and   dirt. 

"There  is  no  peace,  saith  my  God,  to  the  wicked."    (Isa.  57:19-21) 

May  we  return  home  and  teach  our  people  the  way  of  peace — 
peace  because  they  are  willing  to  live  the  commandments  of  the  Lord 
Jesus  Christ.      I  humbly  pray,  in  His  name.     Amen. 

SUNDAY   SCHOOL 

SACRAMENT  GEM 

Tis   good    to    meet    each    Sabbath   day. 
And.  in  His  own  appointed  way. 
Partake  the  emblems  of  His  death, 

And  thus   renew  our  love  and    faith. 

CONCERT   RECITATION 
Joshua  7 .  P. 

"Have  not  I  commanded  thee?     Be  strong  and  of  good  c  nirage; 

lie  not  afraid,  neither  be  thou  dismayed:  for  the  Lord  thy  (  i  cl  is 
with  thee  withersoever  thou  goest." 

KORERO  A  NGAKAU 
Hohua  /:  9. 

"Kahore  ianei  ahati  i  whakahau  ki  a  koe?  Kia  kaha.  kia  maia: 
kaua  e  wehi,  kaua  hoki  e  pawera:  ta  te  mea  kei  a  koe  a  [howa,  ton 
Atr.a  i  nga  wahi  katoa  e  haere  ai  koe." 

TO  SUPERINTENDENCES— Your  final  quarterly  report  for  the 
year  ending  November  30th,  1942,  will  be  due  at  the  end  of  this  month. 
Please  do  not  fail  to  see  that  those  reports  are  sent  in  and  with  them 
the  final  contribution  of  the  Sixpenny  Fund,  which  is  also  due  for 
ihose    who    have    not    already    contributed    their    full    year's    fund. 


Noema,  1942  TE  KARERE  315 

Branch  Presidents  and  Sunday  School  officers  are  advised  to  make 
whatever  changes  in  the  personnel  of  their  Sunday  Schools  now  before 
the  new  year  begins.  This  matter,  if  attended  to  now,  will  be  of  great 
value  to  the  incoming  officers,  giving  them  time  and  opportunity  to 
plan    their   work,    etc.,    for   the   coming    year. 

In  the  selection  of  officers  and  teachers  for  Sunday  Schools,  Branch 
Presidents  are  again  reminded  and  advised  to  appoint  only  those  who 
are  worthy  leaders,  observers  of  the  Word  of  Wisdom,  Tithe  and  Fast 
Offering  payers. 

By  the  beginning  of  December,  1942,  which  is  the  beginning  of  the 
year's  work  for  1943,  each  Branch  Superintendency  will  have  in  their 
possession  the  new  outline  for  Sunday  School  Superintendents.  This 
new  outline  will  automatically  cancel  the  previous  outline  suggestions 
published  in   "Te  Karere"  some  months  ago. 

LESSONS 

KINDERGARTEN   (4  to   5  years).      Thought:  "Courage." 
"Conversion  of   Saul"    (Acts   9). 
"Cornelius   and   Peter"    (Acts    10). 
"Ruth    and    Naomi"    (Book   of   Ruth). 

PRIMARY    (6   to   9   years). 

"The    Healing   of   the   Blind   Man"    (John   9). 
"Christ  and  the  Rich  Young  Man"    (Matthew  19). 
"Jesus   Raises  Lazarus  from  the  Dead"    (John  11). 

CHURCH  HISTORY    (10  to   11   years). 

"Samuel's    Prophecy    Concerning    the    Crucifixion"     (Helaman    14). 
"Signs   of   Crucifixion   Appear"    (111   Nephi   8   and   9). 
"Christ  Appears"    (111  Nephi   10  and   11). 

A  &  B  DEPARTMENTS   (12  to  15,  16  to  19  years). 
"The  Golden  Calf"    (Exodus  31,   32,   33  and  34). 
"Introduction    to    Study    of    the    Ten    Commandments"     (material    in 

previous  lesson). 
"The    First    and    Second    Commandments"     (Exodus    20:3-6). 

C  DEPARTMENT  (20  to  25  years). 

"Incidents  near  Jerusalem"  (Luke  13;  John  10).  Problems:  What 
work  is  jusifiable  on  the  Sabbath  Day?  On  what  grounds  did  Jesus 
desire  the  Jews  to  judge  if  He  were  indeed  the  Christ?  In  the  light 
of  John  10:34-36  discuss  the  proposition  that  men  may  become  gods. 

"In  Perea"  (Luke  13:  22  and  14).  Problems:  What  was  the  Pro- 
phet Joseph  Smith's  definition  of  salvation?  How  do  you  account  for 
the  fearless  manner  with  which  Jesus  answered  Herod's  threat?  Why 
did  the  Jews  watch  so  closely  for  the  Sabbath  Day  activities  of  Jesus? 

"A  Discourse  in  Parables"  (Luke  15).  Problems:  Is  it  better  to 
sin  and  repent  or  never  to  have  sinned?  What  makes  a  human  soul 
so  valuable? 

GOSPEL   DOCTRINE    (All   others  not  already  assigned). 

"Close  of  the  Old  Testament"  (Malachi  1-4).  Helps — The  Prophet 
Malachi — the  people  reminded  of  the  special  regard  the  Lord  has  for 
them — the  priests  rebuked  for  their  profanation  of  the  Lord's  name 
— the  sins  of  the  people — a  messenger  to  preceed  the  coming  of  the 
Lord — blessings  that  follow  the  payment  of  tithing — the  promise  o( 
Elijah. 

If  it  is  at  all  possible  for  teachers  to  acquire  Oxford  or  Bagster 
Bible  Helps,  you  will  there  find  material  to  finish  up  the  historical 
period  from   Malachi   to  the  time   of   Herod,    immediately    prior   to   tl le 


316  TE  KARERE  Noema,  1942 

coming  of  the  Christ  For  those  who  will  not  be  able  to  discuss  this 
period,  review  your  Lessons  from  the  old  Testament  from  the  beginning 
to  the  end  and  bring  to  mind  the  main  features  of  the  various 
periods,  etc. 

MAORI   CLASS. 

RATAPU    TUATAHI 

TE  MANAAKITANGA  O  TE  HOKONGA— Ki  te  mea  tatou  kahore 

o  tatou  Inn  a,  e  whakapohehe  ana  tatou  i  a  tatou  ano,  kahore  hoki  te 
pono  i  roto  1  a  koulou.  Ko  te  manaakitanga  o  te  hokonga  mai  i  nga 
hara  :  ke  o  te  tangata,  ahakoa  ano  hoki  e  tuwhera  ana  kia  whiwhi  te 
katoa.  otira  e  ahei  ana  ma  runga  ano  i  te  kaha  o  ia  tangata  e  tino 
marama  ana  tona  whakaaturanga  pera  ano  me  te  pono  o  te  hokonga 
mai  i  te  mate  i  pa  mai  nei  na  runga  i  te  takanga  atu.  Kua  whakaritea 
mai  he  whakawakanga  mo  te  katoa,  a  ka  whakawakia  te  katoa  kia  rite 
ano  ki  a  ratou  mahi.  Te  herekoretanga  o  te  tangata  na  reira  e  ahei 
ana  ia  ki  te  whiriwhiri  i  te  mea  hei  hopunga  ma  ana  hei  whakakahore- 
tanga  ranei.  Ki  te  aru  i  te  ara  o  te  ora  ki  te  huanui  ranei  e  tika  atu 
ana  ano  kia  pa  kia  ia  te  wero  whakautu  mo  tana  whakamahlnga  i  te 
mana  o  tana  i  whiriwhiri  ai  kia  tupono  hoki  ki  a  ia  te  tukun.ua  Lho 
o  ana  mahi. 
Nga    Patai: 

1.  Ina   ki   tatou   kahore   o   tatou    hara,    e   pehea   ana   tatou? 

2.  Whakamaramatia  te  ahua  o  te  hokonga  mai? 

3.  Pehea  te  ahua  o  te  whakaritenga  mai  i  te  whakawakanga 
te  katoa? 

4.  He  aha  i  ahei  ai  kia  tupono  ki  te  tangata  te  tukunga  iho  i 
mahi? 

RATAPU  TUARUA 

NATE  TIKA  O  TE  WHAKAAKORANGA  karaipiture  ko  te  whaka- 
oranga  i  haere  mai  ano  ki  ia  tangata  ma  roto  atu  i  te  ngohengohe,  ko 
te  kupu  mo  te  Karaiti  e  penei  ana  "A  ka  meinga  nei  ia  kia  tino  rite, 
ka  waiho  ia  hei  take  mo  te  ora  tonu  ki  te  hunga  katoa  e  ngohengohe  ana 
kia  ia,  a  me  tenei  ano,  ma  te  Atua  e  homai  ki  tetahi,  ki  tetahi,  kia  rite 
ki  a  ratou  mahi,  ki  te  hunga  e  whai  ana  ki  te  kororia,  ki  te  honore,  ki 
te  matenga  kore,  me  te  mau  ano  ki  te  mahi  pai,  he  ora  tonu:  ki  te 
hunga  ia  e  totohe  ana  e  turi  ana  ki  te  pono,  e  whakarongo  ana  hoki 
ki  te  he,  he  riri,  he  aritarita,  he  pawera,  he  raru,  mo  nga  wairua 
tangata  katoa  e  mahi  ana  i  te  kino,  mo  te  Hurai  ki  mua  mo  te  Kariki 
ano  hoki. 

He  kororia  ia,  he  honore,  he  rangimarie,  mo  nga  tangata  katoa  e 
mahi  ana  i  te  pai  mo  te  Hurai  ki  mua  mo  te  Kariki  ano  hoki.  Kahore 
hoki  a  te  Atua  whakapai  kanohi.  Me  tapiri  atu  ki  enei  nga  kupu  a 
te  Ariki  kua  ara  ake  nei,  ko  ia  e  whakapono  ana  ka  oti  te  iriiri  ka 
whakaorangia  na  te  tangata  e  kore  e  whakapono  ka  tu  te  he  ki  a  ia. 
Nga    Patai: 

1.  He    aha    ta   te    karaipiture    whakaakoranga,    whakatakina    hoki 
nga  rarangi  karapiture? 

2.  He   aha   te   whakatutukitanga   o   te   whakapono? 

3.  Pehea  ta  te  Atua  titiro  ki  ia  tangata? 

RATAPU   TUATORU 

MO  TE  POROPITITANGA  A  KINGI  PENIAMINE.  Tirohia  ano 
te  poropititanga  a  Kingi  Peniamine  i  whakapuaki  ai  ki  te  whakaminenga 
o  nga  Niwhai :  Ko  nga  toto  o  te  Karaiti  hei  whakamarietanga  mo  nga 
hara  o  te  hunga  i  hinga  i  te  takanga  o  Arama,  i  mate  matau-kore  hoki 
ki  ta  te  Atua  whakaaro  mo  ratou  ara,  mo  te  hunga  i  hara  i  runga  i  te 
kuaretanga.      Otiia,  aue,  aue  te  mate  mo  te  tangata  e  tutu  marire  ana 


Noema,  1942  TE  KARERE  317" 

ki  te  Atua,  e  kore  hoki  te  whakaoranga  e  puta  ki  nga  pera,  engari  ma 
te  ripeneta  anake  me  te  whakapono  ki  te  Ariki  ki  a  Ihu  Karaiti. 
Otira,  he  aha  kia  whakamaha  atu  i  nga  whakaaturanga  karaipiture  i  te 
mea  ko  te  aronga  o  nga  karaipiture  katoa  e  tautoko  ana  i  tenei  whaka- 
akoranga.  Ina  ki  te  kore  a  te  Karaiti  e  kore  rawa  e  ora  tetahi  tangata, 
a  ko  te  whakaoranga  i  wehea  mai  ma  roto  i  nga  mamaetanga  o  te 
Karaiti  me  te  matenga  o  tona  tinana  kikokiko  i  homai  ma  runga  i 
tetahi  kaupapa  marama  anake  a  e  whakatoputia  ana  mai  ki  raro  ki 
nga  kupu  e  whai  ake  nei:  "kia  ngohengohe  ki  nga  ture  me  nga  tikanga 
o  te  rongopai. 
Nga    Patai: 

1.  Pehea  te  maramatanga  o  te  poropititanga  a  Kingi  Peniamine? 

2.  I  te  mea  ki  te  kore  a  te  Karaiti  i  kore  rawa  tetahi  tangata  e 
ora  me  pehea  ka  ora  ai  te  tangata? 

3.  I   roto   i   te   whakatoputanga   i   enei   korero,   pehea   te   rarangi 
korero  i  hua  ake  i  roto? 

RATAPU   TUAWHA 

TE  WHAKAORANGA  ME  TE  WHAKATEITEITANGA.  Etahi 
painga  o  te  whakaoranga  tera  e  puta  ki  katoa  o  te  hunga  kaore  ano 
nei  kia  takahia  e  ratou  to  ratou  mana  kia  whiwbi.  Ko  te  whakatei- 
teitanga  e  hoatu  ana  ki  era  anake  o  te  hunga  na  runga  nei  i  a  ratou 
mahi  tika  i  whiwhi  kereeme  ai  ki  te  aroha  homai  noa,  na  to  ratou  kaha 
nei  i  whiwhi  ai,  o  nga  mea  kua  whiwhi  nei  ki  te  whakaoranga,  •  e  kore 
ratou  katoa  e  whakateiteitia  ki  nga  kororia  o  runga  ake.  Kahore  te 
utu  e  tukua  hei  whakaea  i  te  takahanga  o  te  tika.  Kahore  hoki  te  whiu 
e  whakaputaina  hei  kaupare  atu  i  te  whakaputanga  o  te  aroha.  Kahore 
he  tangata  e  uru  noa  atu  ki  tetahi  turanga  kororia,  ara  e  kore  tetahi 
wairua  e  whakaorangia  kia  ea  ra  ano  te  tika  mo  te  ture  i  takahia.  Ko 
ta  matou  whakapono  mo  te  paanga  o  te  whakamarietanga  ki  te  katoa, 
e  hara  i  te  mea  ko  nga  tangata  katoa  ka  whakaorangia,  kia  riterite 
tonu  te  whakanuinga  o  nga  kororia  me  te  mana. 
Nga    Patai: 

1.  He   aha   i   puta   ai   etahi   painga   ki   etahi  tangata? 

2.  He  aha  i  whiwhi  kereeme  ai  etahi  ki  te  aroha  noa? 

3.  Ka  uru  noa  ranei  tetahi  wairua  ki  nga  turanga  kororia  o  runga 
ake? 


To  all  Auxiliary  Organizations  of  the  Church  in  the  Mission. 

You  are  again  reminded  to  be  prompt  with  your  reports 
to  your  various  Mission  Headquarters.  All  organizations 
should  he  able  to  complete  their  year's  work  on  their  pro- 
per report  forms  and  forward  not  later  than  the  10th 
Decemher,  1942.  Novemher  30th  is  the  last  day  of  the 
year  for  all  auxiliaries.  This  is  a  general  reminder  to  the 
Sunday  School  and  Primary  organizations  to  forward  their 
reports,  etc.,  to  Mission  Secretary,  Box  72,  Auckland,  CI. 
All  District  Presidents  and  Branch  Presidents  are  asked  to 
assist  in  gaining  a  complete  return  from  these  auxiliaries 
under  their  jurisdiction.  Your  co-operation  in  this  matter 
will  he  very  much  appreciated. — Kelly  //arris.  Mission  Secy. 


318  TE  KARERE  Nocma,  1942 

Mutual  Improvement  Association 

M.I.A.  THEME  1942 

Doctrini  &  Covenants  82:10:  "/.  the  Lord,  am 
bound  when  ye  do  what  I  say;  but  when  you  do  not  what  I 
say,  ye  have  no  Promise" 

SECOND  TUESDAY.      FIRST  AID    (All  Classes). 
Review    of    Previous    Lesson: 

1.     Give  the   classification   of  burns. 

l'.    Tell  hew  you  would  treat  a  first  degree1  burn;  second  degree; 

third   degree. 

3.  How   would   you   treat   chemical   burns? 

4.  Give    treatment    for   frostbite,    freezing. 

COMMON  EMERGENCIES 
We  have   a   classification   in    first   aid   called   common    emergencies, 

which  includes  accidents  and  minor  ailments  which  happen  frequently 
in  the  home  and  community.  It  is  well  to  know  how  to  give  first  aid 
treatment  in  all  of  these  cases  and  very  important  to  know  how  to 
treat  some  of  them  which,  without  prompt  attention,  might  prove  fatal. 

POISONS 

First  aid  treatment  of  poison  cases  is  usually  not  given  sufficient 
attention.  This  is  one  of  the  emergencies  demanding  immediate  action 
by  the  first  aider.  If  the  poison  can  be  removed  from  the  stomach 
before  it  is  absorbed,  the  harm  done  the  patient  is  usually  not  great. 
Once  the  poison  becomes  absorbed  into  the  body,  there  is  not  much 
that  even  a  physician  can  do.  Children  are  particularly  liable  to  take 
poisons  accidentally.  Among  children  under  fourteen  years  of  age, 
poisoning  ranks  third  as  the  cause  of  fatal  accidents  in  the  home. 
If  a  child  takes  poison,  usually  the  entire  family  becomes  panic-stricken 
and  wastes  much  valuable  time  in  rushing  the  patient  to  a  distant  hos- 
pital or  stands  awaiting,  helplessly,  the  arrival  of  a  physician.  In 
the  meantime  the  poison  is  being  absorbed  into  the  child's  system. 
Always  call  a  physician  at  once,  but  in  the  meantime  give  first  aid. 
It  is  necessary  to  remember  a  long  list  of  antidotes.  In  fact,  much 
better  work  will  usually  be  done  if  the  first  aider  uses  the  simple 
measures  always  at  hand. 

Only  those  poisons  taken  through  the  mouth  into  the  stomach 
are  considered  here.  These  may  be  taken  either  with  suicidal  intent  or 
accidentally.  If  taken  with  suicidal  intent,  the  patient  may  refuse 
treatment  so  that  rather  harsh  methods  must  be  employed  in  adminis- 
ering  first  aid. 

Prevention. — With  children  this  is  particularly  important.  Keep 
all  bottles  labelled  and  never  take  medicine  from  an  unlabelled  bottle. 
Keep  all  poison  drugs  away  from  all  other  medicines  and  safely  locked 
up.      Keep  all  medicines  and  poisons  out  of  the  reach  of  small  children. 

Symptoms. — These  vary  considerably  with  the  drug  taken.  There 
may  be  no  early  symptoms.  Pain  in  the  stomach,  nausea,  vomiting 
and  cramps  frequently  occur.  If  a  corrosive  poison  has  been  taken, 
the  mouth  and  tongue  may  be  burned  or  stained.  Headache  powders 
and  sleep-producing  drugs,  of  course,  cause  drowsiness  or  sleep  or 
even   unconsciousness. 

Treatment. — Two  main  points  are  to  be  remembered — dilute  and 
wash  out.     Poison  diluted  with  a  large  amount  of  fluid  is  never  absorbed 


Noema,  1942  TE  KARERE  319 

as  rapidly  as  when  in  a  concentrated  form.  Therefore,  large  quantities 
of  fluid  should  be  given  the  patient,  as  vomiting  is  much  easier  when 
the  stomach  is  full.  The  two  purposes  of  diluting  the  poison  and  wash- 
ing it  out  are  accomplished.  They  may  be  accomplished  by  any  of 
the  following  emetics:  Soap  suds  (any  ordinary  soap);  salt  water; 
soda  water  (ordinary  baking  soda)  ;  lukewarm  water;  dish  water; 
milk,  particularly  in  a  corrosive  poison.  Give  four  to  seven  glass- 
fuls  of  any  of  these  liquids,  preferably  lukewarm.  Tickling  the  back 
of  the  throat  with  the  finger  aids  in  inducing  vomiting,  after  the  patient 
has  had  several  glassfuls  of  emetic.  When  the  stomach  is  well  washed 
out,  one  may  give  the  antidote,  if  known  and  on  hand.  This  is  often 
given  on  the  bottle  label.  If  the  poison  was  a  corrosive,  soothing 
drinks  of  milk  or  milk  and  eggs  beaten  up  together  are  good  antidotes. 
If  breathing  has  stopped,  give  artificial  respiration.  If  patient  shows 
signs  of  shock  after  the  vomiting,  apply  heat  and  give  stimulants.  Where 
opium  or  morphine  poisoning  has  been  taken  it  is  aavisable  to  keep 
the  patient  awake  by  having  him  drink  a  strong  cup  of  coffee  every  half- 
hour  until  doctor  arrives.  In  strychnine  poisoning  do  not  give  a  stimu- 
lant and  keep  patient  as  quiet  as  possible.  Always  call  a  physician 
in  poisoning  cases. 

FOOD  POISONING 

Food  poisoning,  popularly  called  Ptomaine  poisoning,  is  quite  com- 
mon, particularly  during  the  summer  months.  It  is  caused  by  eating 
food  that  has  not  been  properly  cared  for — this  is  food  partly  decayed, 
or  poison  plants  as  toadstools  eaten  for  mushrooms,   etc. 

Symptoms. — Nausea  and  vomiting.  Severe  pain  in  the  upper 
abdomen,  cramps,  vomiting,  purging  and  more  or  less  prostration. 

Treatment. — Send  for  a  doctor  at  once  and  in  the  meantime  cause 
vomiting  by  giving  salt  water  or  any  of  the  emetics  recommended  for 
drug  poisons.      Keep  patient  warm  and  treat  for  shock. 

POISON  PLANTS 

Poison  ivy,  poison  oak,  and  poison  sumac,  all  of  which  belong  to 
the  same  family,  are  common  causes  of  skin  poisoning.  The  best  pre- 
ventative is  to  become  familiar  with  these  plants  and  avoid  handling 
them. 

The  symptoms  will  be  severe  discomfort,  itching,  red  surface  of 
skin,  and  often  small  blisters.  Frequently  these  become  infected  from 
scratching  and  form  pus. 

Treatment. — After  handling  any  of  these  poison  plants,  wash  the 
exposed  area  with  plenty  of  hot  water  and  soap.  Make  a  thick  lather 
and  wash  five  or  six  times.  Do  not  use  a  brush  or  any  other  rough 
materials.  Then,  if  convenient,  wash  thoroughly  with  rubbing  alcohol 
and  rinse  in  clear  water  and  dry.  If,  after  this  treatment,  a  rash 
appears,  make  a  paste  by  heating  soap  with  a  little  water  until  about 
the  consistency  of  lard.  Apply  Epsom  salts  dressings  as  strong  as  can 
be  made  with  cold  water  are  good.  The  following  solution  is  also 
recommended  for  people  in  camps  where  poisoning  is  frequent:  a  five 
per  cent  solution  of  Ferric  Chloride  in  fifty  per  cent  alcohol  prepared 
by  a  druggist.  Keep  tightly  corked.  Apply  once  or  twice  a  day  until 
the  rash  is  "dried  up." 

ALCOHOLIC  POISONING 
Alcohol  poisoning  from  wood  alcohol  or  denatured  alcohol  should 
be  treated  as  other  poison,  giving  emetics  if  the  patient  can  be  aroused. 
This  may  be  followed  with  aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia,  one  teaspoonful 
in  half-glass  of  warm  water.  If  unable  to  arouse  patient,  rub  Limbs 
toward  heart,  apply  external  heat  and  call  a  doctor.  Give  artificial 
respiration   if   patient  stops   breathing. 


TE  KARERE  \.  ema,  L942 

PRIMARY 

FIRST   WEEK 

Objective: 

To  help  the  child  to  feel  that  the  Lord  knows  the  thought!  of  our 
.  even  though  we  do  not  express  them. 

Story: 

TAKING    CARE    OF    TEDDY 
"I'll     bring    apple-    and    COOkieS,"     promised     Dorothy,     "and     I'll     he 

ready  at  ten  o\ 

"We'll  meet  at  my  house,"  planned  Madge,  "and  we'll  go  straighl 
out  to  the   pretty   place   in  the   pines  that   Marcia  told    us   about." 

"Oh,  won't  we   have   tun."   exclaimed   Ethel   delightedly. 

Dorothy  ran  home  then  to  tell  Mother  aboul  it.  .Mother  would 
consent,  Dorothy  fell  c<  rtain,  to  the  Saturday  hiking  trip  the  girls  were 
planning.      Mad.Lv  ter,   Marcia,  could  go  with  them. 

Mother  was  at  the  telephone  when  Dorothy  hurst  into  the  house. 
Sitting  down  quietly  to  wait  until  she  would  be  through.  Dorothy  heard 
her  mother  say,  "Thank  you  so  much  for  asking  inc.  Mrs.  Clark.  I'd 
love  to  go.  I'll  leave  Teddy  with  Dorothy,  and  I'll  he  ready  at  one 
o'clock." 

Then  Mother  turned  smilingly  to  Dorothy,  as  she  hung  up  the 
receiver,  saying.  "Mother  has  such  a  lovely  invitation  for  to-morrow 
afternoon.  Mrs.  Clark  has  asked  me  to  drive  in  to  the  city  with  her 
in  her  new  car.  We'll  do  some  shopping  and  call  on  a  sick  friend  at 
the   hospital.      1   cai  !l   take   Teddy  there   with   me.   hut    I've   a 

big  ten-year-old  girl  I  am  sure  I  can  depend  on  to  care  for  him  while 
I  am  gon.e."  Mother  gave  Dorothy  a  little  squeeze  then  and  went  into 
the  kitchen,  singing  a   little  tune. 

Dorothy  sat  just  where  she  was,  her  face  very  sober.  No  hike  for 
her  to-morrow! — that  is,  unless  she  told  Mother  of  the  plan.  Then. 
no  doubt,  Mother  would  change  her  own  plans,  and  tell  Dorothy  to  go 
anyway.  But  should  she  do  that'.'  The  thought  of  the  fun  the  girls 
would    have    almost   tempted    her   to   tell   Mother. 

Mother's  happy  singing  in  the  kitchen  stopped  suddenly.  Teddy 
had  wakened  from  his  nap,  and  with  eyes  still  dewy  with  sleep  and 
cheeks  as  pink  as  his  little  pink  rompers,  wras  coming  out  of  the  bed- 
room  as    fast   as   his   fat   little   two-year-old   legs   could   bring  him. 

Mother  caught  him  up  in  her  arms.      "Teddy  is  going  to  he  S; 
boy   to-morrow,"   she   was   saying.      "Mother   is   going   to    have   such   a 
good  time." 

Something  Dorothy  hadn't  thought  of  before  came  to  her  then. 
Mother  wanted  to  have  her  good  time  to-morrow  just  as  badly  as  she 
wanted  hers.  And  something  else,  too.  Dorothy  had  ever  and.  ever 
so  many  good  times  while  Mother  was  almost  always  at  home,  working 
for  her  and  making  the  good  times  possible. 

In  a  minute  she  was  in  the  kitchen  with  Mother  and  Teddy.  "Teddy 
and  Sister  will  get  along  fine,  won't  we?"  she  said,  putting  her  arms 
around  the  little  fellow. 

After  supper  she  went  over  to  Madge's  to  tell  her  that  she  couldn't 
go  on  the  hike  this  time,  and  the  next  afternoon  Mother  (hove  gayly 
off  with  Mrs.  Claik,  waving  to  Teddy  and  Dorothy  as  long  as  she  could 
see   them. 

Dorothy  played  with  Teddy  a  little  while  and  then  Teddy  took  his 
nap.  Dorothy  sat  down  on  the  front  norch  with  a  book,  but  she  found 
herself  thinking  more  about  the  hiking  trip  than  the  printed  words. 
A  lonesome  tear  was  just  ready  to  splash  down  her  cheek  when  a  car 
came  up  the  street  and  stopped  in  front  of  her  house.  "Who  could 
it   be?"      Dorothy  wondered,   but  she   didn't  wonder  long. 


Noema,  1942  TE  KARERE  323 

"If  others  can  go  I  don't  see  why  we  can't,"  said  David. 

"What  others  do  or  do  not  do  is  not  our  business,"  said  their 
mother.  "Everyone  has  a  right  to  decide  for  himself  what  he  thinks 
is  right.  The  important  thing  for  each  of  us  to  do  is  to  have  strength 
enough  to  do  what  we  think  is  right  regardless  of  the  decisions  of 
others." 

"I  know  the  story  of  a  man  who  was  willing  to  risk  his  life  to  do 
what  he  thought  was  right,"  she  said. 

And  as  neither  of  the  boys  spoke,  she  continued:  "The  man's  name 
was  Daniel.  He  lived  hundreds  of  years  ago.  He  was  one  of  the 
great  prophets  of  Israel.  When  his  people  were  conquered  by  the 
Babylonians,  Daniel  was  taken  captive  and  went  to  live  at  the  court 
of  the  king. 

"Because  Daniel  was  a  brave  and  wise  and  good  man,  the  king  of 
Babylon  thought  very  highly  of  him.  And  so  did  King  Darius,  the 
king  of  the  Medes.  He  thought  so  well  of  Daniel  that  he  set  him  in 
a  very  high  place  and  gave  him  much  power.  This  made  the  princes 
and  the  rest  of  the  king's  advisers  very  jealous.  And  they  planned  how 
to  get  rid  of  Daniel. 

"So  they  persuaded  King  Darius  to  pass  a  law  which  said  that,  for 
a  certain  time,  everyone  must  worship  and  pray  to  the  king  only.  And 
that  anyone  refusing  to  do  so  would  be  cast  into  a  den  of  lions.  Daniel 
knew  it  was  wrong  to  worship  the  king  as  a  God,  and  he  refused  to  do  it. 
So  he  kept  right  on  praying  three  times  a  day  to  the  one,  true  God, 
just  as  he  had  always  done. 

"Then  the  princes  told  King  Darius  about  Daniel.  The  king  felt 
very  sad,  for  he  loved  Daniel  dearly.  And  he  was  sorry  indeed  that 
he  had  ever  passed  such  a  law.  But  it  was  too  late.  For  even  though 
he  was  such  a  powerful  king,  he  couldn't  change  this  wicked  law.  So 
Daniel  was  cast  into  a  den  of  lions. 

"But  Daniel  wasn't  afraid.  He  knew  that  his  God,  whom  he  had 
obeyed  so  faithfully,  would  take  care  of  him.  I  remember  having  seen 
a  beautiful  picture  of  Daniel  in  the  lions'  den.  Through  a  tiny  window 
high  up  in  the  wall  shines  a  bright  light  into  the  den.  And  standing 
in  the  light  is  Daniel,  his  face  is  lifted,  his  back  to  the  lions.  They 
are  slinking  back  into  the  shadows,  quite  harmless.  The  next  morning, 
when  King  Darius  went  to  the  lions'  den,  he  found  Daniel  as  brave  and 
as  strong  as  ever.  Not  so  much  as  a  hair  of  his  head  had  been  hurt. 
The  king  was  so  pleased  at  this  that  he  said  that  he,  too,  would  wor- 
ship the  God  that  Daniel  worshipped — the  God  who  did  such  wonderful 
things  for  his  obedient  children. 

Daniel  is  one  of  the  great  characters  of  the  Bible,  and  we  are 
very  grateful  for  his  example   of  courage  and  obedience. 

The  boys  were  silent  for  a  few  moments.  Then  David  said,  "My 
mind  is  made  up.      I  don't  go." 

"I'm  staying  home,  too,"   added   Robert,   quickly. 

Questions: 

What  is  the  hardest  thing  for  you  in  which  you  must  use  self- 
control? 

Perhaps  one  of  your  chums  asks  you  to  do  something  which  you 
know  you  ought  not  to  do.  They'll  be  pretty  apt  to  ridicule  you  if  you 
refuse.  Anyone  can  do  what  they  are  told,  but  not  eveyone  can  say 
"No"  and  face  the  ridicule  of  his  companions.      Can  you   do  it? 

Think  of  four  instances  during  the  past  week  when  you  needed  self- 
control.  What  do  you  think  of  the  feeling:  Oh  well.  I'll  do  it  just 
this  once  and  start  to-morrow  to  stand  by  my  resolutions? 


324  TE  KARERE  Noena,  1(M_' 

FOURTH  WEEK 

Go  out  of  doors!     'Tis  bere  you'll  find  the  better  things  of  heart 

and    mind. 

PICNICS    ARE    FUN 
Objective: 

First,  to  give  the  children  a  happy  time,  and  second,  to  win  friend- 
ships and  create  interest  in  Primary, 

For    the    Teacher: 

A  lew  children;  a  hike  just  anywhere,  even  in  the  back  yard,  so 
it's  away;  Lunch  baskets — that  is  a  picnic.  But  a  Primary  picnic  is 
different  from  any  other  in  that  it  should  be  planned  with  a  double 
purpose  in  mind  as  indicated  in  the  above  objective.  Often  a  teacher 
who  plays  with  her  class  of  children  can  open  gates  that  months  of 
Primary  meetings  could  not  unlatch. 

Committees: 

Appoint  committees  to  take  care  of  different  phases  of  the  pro- 
gramme.     For   children   welcome   responsibility. 

Lunches: 

An  interesting  picnic  is  enjoyed  where  children  bring  their  own 
lunches.  You  might  suggest  that  they  decorate  their  lunch  baskets  or 
boxes  and  let  the  children  themselves  offer  a  simple  prize  for  the  pret- 
tiest one.  You  will  be  surprised  at  the  interest  shown,  and  the  beauty 
of  the  boxes  and  baskets. 

Time    and    Meeting-place: 

It's  always  advisable  to  meet  at  the  church  or  at  some  central 
place  and  all  start  off  together.  It  is  important,  too,  that  the  children 
know  the  exact  time  the  group  will  leave  so  that  there  will  be  no  dis- 
appointments.     If  you  meet  at  the  church,  have  a  song  and  prayer. 

The    Arrival: 

Upon  arriving  at  the  grounds,  a  short  time  should  be  allowed  for 
rambling  and  playing — for  everyone  will  be  full  of  play.  A  whistle, 
or  a  song  by  the  children   will  call  the  group  together. 

Game   "Come   With    Me." 

All  but  one  of  the  players  stand  in  circle  facing  outward.  The 
odd  one  acts  as  "It,"  runs  around  the  outside  of  the  circle,  and  finally, 
touching  one  player  on  the  back,  says,  "Come  with  me."  They  run 
around  the  circle  in  opposite  directions  and  when  they  meet,  they  clasp 
hands,  swing  each  other  completely  around  and  continue  racing  for 
vacant  place  in  the  circle.  The  one  who  loses  is  "It,"  and  the  game 
continues. 

It  Tastes   Better  Outdoors: 

Have  the  children  get  their  baskets  and  assemble  for  the  lunch. 
Let  them  spread  their  lunch  mats  which  they  made  previously  and  place 
their  baskets  on  them.  A  committee  of  five  children  may  then  choose 
the  prettiest  box  or  basket  and  award  the  prize.  Let  them  enjoy  their 
lunches  after   saying  the   following: 

"Father  of  all  in  heaven  above 

We  thank  Thee  for  Thy  love, 

Our  food,  our  homes  and  all  we  wear 

Tell   of   Thy  loving  care — Amen. 


€  KAR€R€ 


i^viJi/>^^^\aiii'ii)iii//^h-^i^,v^,E^iiiiuij 


I   Thank   Thee 


I  thank  Thee,  Lord,  for  music  s\ 
I  thank  Thee,  too,  for  all  I  i 
I  thank  Thee  for  a  life  of  toil 
That  blessings  on  my  head  recoil. 

I  thank  Thee  for  the  flowers  that  bloom, 
I  thank  Thee  for  a  quiet  room, 
I  thank  Thee  for  an  hour  of  pra; 
When  I  to  Thee  can  bring  my  care. 

I  thank  Thee  for  a  child's  free  laugh, 
I  thank  Thee  for  the  cooling  draught, 
I  thank  Thee  for  my  garden  plot; 
For  there  Thy  name  is  not  forgot. 

I  thank  Thee,  Lord,  for  family  ties, 
I  thank  Thee  that  the  sun  does  i 
I  thank  Thee  for  the  message  sweet, 
That  brings  me  nearer  to  Thy  feet. 

I  thank  Thee  for  the  bees'  dull  drone, 
I  thank  Thee  for  my  humble  home. 
I  thank  Thee  for  the  winter  rain, 
To  freshen  up  the  earth  again. 

I  thank  Thee  for  my  parents,  Lord, 
And  for  Thy  power  and  word  restored ; 
I  thank  Thee,  Lord,  if  I  may  do 
A  little  in  return  for  you. 

H.  OSBORNE,  Manunui. 


Te  Karere 


Nama    12 


Matthew    Cowley  Tumuaki    Mihana 

Kelly  Harris         Etita 

Eru   T.    Kupa       Kaiwhakamaori 

Waimate   Anara  Kaiwhakamaori 


"Ko  tenei  Pepa  i  whakatapva  hei  hapai  ake  i  te  izvi  Maori  ki 
roto  i  nga  whakaaro-nuL' 


"Te  Karere''  is  published  monthly  by  the  New  Zealand  Mission  of  the  Church 
of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints,  and  is  printed  by  THE  BUSINESS  PRINTING 
WORKS  LTD.,  55  Albert  Street,  Auckland,  CI,  N.Z.  Subscription  Rates:  3/-  per 
six  months;  5/-  per  year;  £1  for  five  years;  £2/10/-  for  life.  (United  States  Cur- 
rency:  $1.00   per  year;   $4.00   for  five   years;   $10.00   for   life.) 


Address    Correspondence,    Box    72,    Auckland,    CI,    New    Zealand. 


CONTENTS 

Editorial—  PaSe 

New  Presiding  Patriarch  Appointed   332 

Special    Features — 

This  Christmas ^34 

Greetings       v"° 

Joseph  Smith's  Teachings    ** ' 

Mo  Nga  Kawanatanga  Me  Nga  Ture  Katoa   341 

Notice  to  All  Branch  Presidents   »4 

Church    Features — 

Sunday    School     ™ 

Mutual  Improvement  Association   544 

Primary       <>^/ 

News  from  the   Field    ^-' 


TE  KARERE 


Tihenia.  1(M2 


Editorial  .  . 


NEW  PRESIDING  PATRIARCH  APPOINTED 


At  the  October  Conference  of  the  Church  held  in  Sail 
Lake  City,  Joseph  F.  Smith  III.  was  sustained  as  the  Pre- 
siding Patriarch  to  the  Church.  He  succeeds  the  late 
Hyrum  G.  Smith  since  whose  death  in  1932  only  interim 
appointments  have  been  made  to  this  office. 

Elder  Smith  is  a  direct  descendant  of  Joseph  Smith.  Sr., 
the  first   Patriarch  ol"  the  Church  and   father  of  the   Prophet. 

Mis  own  father  was  the  late  Hyrum  M.  Smith,  a  member 
of  the  Quorum  of  Twelve  Apostles  and  son  of  President 
Joseph  F.  Smith.     The  appointment,  therefore,  of  the  new 

Patriarch   is   made  in   accordance   with   the   revealed   plan   of 

I  'atriarchal    I  Kscent. 

For  many  years  Patriarch  Smith  has  been  a  member 
of  the  faculty  of  the  University  of  Utah  in  charge  of  die 
Department  of  Speech.  I  lis  educational  activities,  both  as 
student  and  instructor,  have  taken  him  to  many  of  the  mor< 
prominent  universities  of  England  and  America:  among 
diem  bein^-  Kin^s  College  of  London.  Oxford  University, 
University  of  Illinois.  University  of  California,  University 
•  if  [owa,  University  of  Wisconsin,  University  of  Minnesota 
and  the  University  of  Alberta,  Canada. 

The  educational  attainments  of  the  new  Patriarch  have 
in  no  way  been  a  detriment  to  his  spiritual  development. 
In  fact  his  scholastic  experience  has  hut  served  to  better 
qualify  him  for  the  various  positions  of  responsibility  he- 
has  so  willingly  filled  in  the  Church  since  his  early  youth. 
He  served  as  a  missionary  in  the  Hawaaian  Islands  from 
1920  to  1922,  and  down  through  the  score  of  succeeding 
years  his  name  has  become  wefl  known  through  the  Stakes 
of  Zion  for  his  accomplishments  as  a  leader  in  the  auxiliary 


Tihema,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


333 


organizations  of  the  Church.  Since  1929  he  has  been  one 
of  the  more  aggressive  and  progressive  members  of  the 
M.I.A.  General  Board. 

The  ecclesiastical,  as  well  as  the  educational,  career 
of  Patriarch  Smith  have  already  added  to  the  illustrious 
name  which  he  bears ;  and  the  keen  sense  of  eternal  and 
spiritual  values  which  he  brings  to  the  sacred  office  to  which 
he  has  been  called  will  set  his  name  in  history  as  one  who 
has  worn  well  the  mantle  of  the  Patriarchs. 

Through  Joseph  F.  Smith  III.  shall  the  children  of  man 
be  blessed. 

M.C. 


CHRISTMAS  AGAIN 

As  the  Christmas  season  comes  upon  us  once  again  God 
grant  that  the  Author  of  Christianity  may  instil  within  the 
hearts  of  all  the  spirit  of  "Peace  on  earth  among  men  of 
good  will."  May  His  light  break  through  the  clouds  of  war 
which  hang  low  over  the  world  and  reassure  us  that  "man  is 
that  he  might  have  joy"  if  he  will  but  return  to  the  job  of 
producing  those  implements  which  bring  joy ;  implements 
which  will  destroy  the  barriers  of  misunderstanding  between 
men  and  nations  and  restore  to  all  the  world  the  binding 
force  of  a  "one  Lord,  one  faith,  one  baptism"  Gospel  of 
regeneration.  May  the  dawning  of  this  Christmas  bring 
with  it  a  hope  of  better  days  ahead,  when  the  plough-share 
which  has  been  withdrawn  from  the  soil  to  plunge  into  the 
heart  of  man  may  be  returned  to  the  work  for  which  it 
was  created. 

God  grant  also  that  we  in  the  New  Zealand  Mission 
celebrate  this  Christmas  Day  by  giving  ourselves  over  to 
the  forces  of  righteousness.  There  is  no  substitute  For 
righteousness  in  a  world  that  professes  Christ. 

To  all  to  whom  ibis  message  may  reach  we  send  our 
love  and  blessings. 

Matthew  Cowley  and  Family. 


334 


TE  KARERE 


Tihetna,  1942 


Elde 


Ha 


THIS  CHRISTMAS 

By  Kelly  Harris 
During  the  past  year  much  has  happened  in  the  world  to  bring 
to  many  of  US  renewed  hope  of  something  better  in  the  future.  At 
tin-  same  time  others  receive  foreshadowings  of  the  not  so  good. 
Yet  in  it  all  is  the  realization  that  the  events  of  the  day  are  results 
Of  actions  past  and  present,  and  of  a  shaping  that  we  cannot  deny 
to   belong   to    an    Immortal    Hand. 

In  this  knowledge  that  Deity  is  exercising  an  ever-omniscent 
influence  is  woven  the  conviction  in  secular  and  religious  life  that  there 
can  only  be  true  peace  in  the  world  when 
mankind  will  return  to  the  full  appreciation  of 
the  coming  of  the  Christ  many,  many  years 
ago  which  is  so  forcefully  and  eloquently  ex- 
pressed in  the  citation  of  that  memorable 
event  by  the  heavenly  messenger — "Peace  on 
earth  among  men  of  good  will."  This  must 
be  so.  Although  the  rendering  of  the  an- 
nouncement of  that  wonderful  birth  as  was 
given  to  the  Magi  and  Shepherds  of  the  East 
is  perhaps  not  verbatim,  yet  who  among  men 
to-day  can  gainsay  the  actuality  of  fact  of  the 
present   interpretation. 

In  a  world  at  war,  when  all  desire  the 
cessation  of  carnage  and  the  murder  of 
lives,  how  can  we  endeavour  to  ensure  the 
continuance  of  the  ideals  that  the  flower  of 
our  manhood  are  dying  for.  How  can  we 
hope  to  live  without  another  generation  being  again  flung  into  the 
maelstrom  of  destruction.  What  hope  have  we  of  the  future?  The 
future  is  dark  unless  we  turn  to  the  light  of  the  world.  "I  am  the 
Light  and  the  Saviour  of  the  World."  And  who  among  men  dare  offer 
a  substitute  remedy  for  the  ills  of  life.  Who  can  make  and  be  the 
sacrificial  Lamb  without  blemish  and  so  take  upon  Him  the  burden  of 
unrighteousness  and  give  to  us  a  newness  of  life,  hope  and  righteous- 
ness? Who  else  but  the  Son  of  God — that  Babe,  whose  birth  anniver- 
sary, celebrated  by  the  known  Christian  world,  is  approaching — Jesus 
Christ  the  Son  of  the  Living  God? 

During  this  season  of  Yuletide,  a  season  of  professed  remembrance 
and  testimony  of  the  Gift  of  God  to  man,  let  us  turn  to  Him  in  our 
hour  of  need  for  more  than  frail  man  has  to  offer. 

As  Christians  in  a  world  of  to-day  we  are  but  followers  of  the 
name  Christ.  As  such  there  is  much  more  to  do.  We  have  a  need 
to  be  more  then  than  Christians.  As  Jesus  was  born  of  mortal  woman 
and  claimed  by  God  as  His  Only  Begotten  in  the  flesh,  and  as  He  is 
God  by  the  things  He  suffered  and  the  righteousness  He  exemplified, 
therein  lies  perhaps  a  new  impetus  to  the  same  God-given  instincts  and 
heritage  vouchsafed  to  mortal  man  of  also  becoming  a  son  of  God, 
by  being  disciples  of  the  Son  of  God  and  not  merely  Christians.  We 
have  need  to  do  more  than  profess.  If  we  have  to  suffer,  then  let  us  not 
suffer  in  vain.  Let  us  suffer  that  righteousness  may  gain  strength  even 
as  we  visualize  to-day  the  growing  strength  of  the  Allied  cause  as  the 
cause  for  righteousness,  or  the  blood  of  our  people  will  cry  to  us  from 
the  battlefields  of  many  climes. 

To  members  of  the  Church  of  Jesus  Christ  of  Latter-day  Saints 
this  time  has  much  to  offer.  Now  is  your  opportunity  to  show  the 
strength  of  the  true  followers  of  the  Son  of  God. 

No  greater  remembrance  or  memoriam  can  be  effected  to  the  hon- 
our of  God  than  that  we  keep  His  commandments — "If  you  love  me, 
keep  My  commandments." 


Tihema,  1942  TE  KARERE  333 

GREETINGS 

By  Elva  T.  Cowley, 
Mission  Supervisor  of  all  Women  Auxiliaries. 

The  holiday  season  is  here  ence  more.  Father  Time  has  again 
ushered  in  that  sacred  day  when  all  thoughts  should  turn  to  the  Prince 
of  Peace,  the  Saviour  of  the  World. 

The  experiences  of  the  past  year,  no  doubt,  have  tempered  the 
thoughts  and  lives  of  many  ana  brought  them  in  more  perfect  tune 
and  greater  harmony  with  their  Creator.  The  experiences  of  others 
have  had  the  opposite  effect  by  destroying  their  spirituality  and  debas- 
ing their  souls.  However,  no  matter  what  the  effects  have  been,  all 
our  desires,  wishes,  or  clever  contrivings  cannot  cancel  the  record 
of  the  last  year.  As  Omar  Khayyam,  the  Persian  tent-maker  and  phil- 
osopher, says:  "The  moving  finger  writes,  and  having  writ  moves  on." 

Our  inertia,  neglect  of  duty,  selfishness,  hatred,  lack  of  co-opera- 
tion, indifference  to  God's  laws,  plus  all  the  good  we  have  accom- 
plished has  been  recorded  in  the  Book  of  Life.  We  cannot  erase  the 
past,  but  the  future  in  a  large  measure  is  in  our  hands.  The  past 
year  with  its  victories  and  defeats,  its  sorrows  and  triumphs,  is  now 
behind  us,  and  another  year  is  about  to  open  to  us  its  opportunities. 
It  is  therefore  for  us  to  resolve  to  first  acquaint  ourselves  with  the 
laws  and  commandments  of  God,  find  out  what  is  expected  of  us, 
live  and  act  accordingly  and  pass  our  light  and  knowledge  on  to 
someone  else.  Never  in  the  world's  history  has  our  Mission  been  more 
important  than  now.  Our  great  task  is  to  find  peace  and  contentment 
in  this  imperfect  sphere,  to  hold  inviolate  the  commandments  of  God, 
prepare   ourselves   for   Life   Eternal   and   assist   others   to   do   likewise. 

The  Lord  said:  "Let  your  light  so  shine  before  men  that  they  may 
see  your  good  works  and  glorify  your  Father  which  is  in  Heaven." 
He  also  tells  us  that  .  .  .  "the  field  is  white  already  to  harvest,  there- 
fore wheso  desireth  to  reap,  let  him  thrust  in  his  sickle  with  his  might 
and  reap  while  the  day  lasts,  that  he  may  treasure  up  for  his  soul 
everlasting   salvation   in   the   Kingdom    of    God." 

In  view  of  these  and  other  sayings  of  our  Lord,  it  is  imperative 
that  we  take  inventory  of  ourselves  and  make  plans  for  the  future. 
A  thinking  and  sane  individual  can  no  longer  stake  his  all  on  material 
things  and  expect  to  obtain  peace  and  joy,  which  is  the  symbol  of 
Christmas.  A  life  of  truth,  of  love,  of  service  can  only  achieve  an 
Eternal  reward.  We  who  have  the*  Gospel  in  its  fullness  must  do  our 
utmost  to  give  that  knowledge  to  our  fellow-men. 

At  this  the  Yuletide  Season  there  might  be  a  few  moments  in 
which  to  plan  our  course.  The  Auxiliary  organizations  of  the  Church 
have   wonderful    opportunities   to    teach    and    spread   the   gospel. 

I  wish  to  extend  Greetings  to  you  all  and  express  my  apprecia- 
tion for  your  services  and  co-operation  dufing  the  past  year.  Also 
to  express  my  gratitude  for  the  successful  Centennial  celebrations, 
for  the  patriotic  work  that  has  been  done,  and  for  the  untiring  efforts 
of  the  officers  and  teachers  who  have  diligently  put  over  the  educa- 
tional work.  May  the  Lord  bless  you  to  meet  all  the  obstacles  courage- 
ously and  to  recognize  opportunity  no  matter  what  the  circumstance 
might  be. 

"Responsibilities  gravitate  to  the  person  who  can  shoulder 
them.    Power  flows  to  the  man  who  knows  how." — Hubbard. 


336  TE  KARERE  Tihema,  1942 

JOSEPH   SMITH'S  TEACHINGS 

Accusers  of  the  Brethren. — I  charged  the  Saints  not  to  follow 
the  example  of  the  adversary  in  accusing  the  brethren,  and  said,  "If 
you  do  not  accuse  each  other,  God  will  not  accuse  you.  If  you  have 
no  accuser  you  will  enter  heaven,  and  if  you  follow  the  revelations  and 
instructions  which  God  gives  you  through  me,  I  will  take  you  into 
heaven  as  my  back  load.  If  you  will  not  accuse  me,  I  will  not  accuse 
you.  If  you  will  throw  a  cloak  of  charity  over  my  sins,  I  will  over 
yours — for  charity  covereth  a  multitude  of  sins.  What  many  people 
call  sin  is  not  sin:  I  do  many  things  to  break  down  superstition,  and 
I  will  break  it  down." — History  of  the  Church,  Vol.    1.  p.  445. 

Adultery. — If  a  man  commit  adultery,  he  cannot  receive  the  celes- 
tial kingdom  of  God.  Even  if  he  is  saved  in  an\  kingdom,  it  cannot 
be  the  celestial  kingdom. — HistioVy  of  the  Church,  Vol.   6,   p.   81. 

Angels. — See   Spirits   and   Angels. 

Apostasy,  The  Sign  of. — I  will  give  you  one  of  the  keys  of  the 
its  of  the  kingdom.  It  is  an  eternal  principle,  that  has  existed 
with  God  from  all  eternity:  That  man  who  rises  up  to  condemn  others, 
finding  fault  with  the  Church,  saying  that  they  are  out  of  the  way  while 
he  himself  is  righteous,  then  know  assuredly,  that  that  man  is  in  the 
high  road  to  apostatasy,  and  if  he  does  not  repent,  will  apostatize  as 
(bid  lives.  The  principle  is  as  correct  as  the  one  that  Jesus  put  forth 
in  saying  that  he  who  seeketh  a  sign  is  an  adulterous  person;  and  that 
principle  is  eternal,  undeviating,  and  firm  as  the  pillars  of  heaven:  for 
whenever  you  see  a  man  seeking  after  a  sign  you  may  set  it  down 
that  he  is  an  adulterous  man.— History  of  the  Church,  Vol.   3,  p.  385. 

Apostates,  Reinstatement  of. — Respecting  an  apostate,  or  one  who 
hat  been  cut  off  from  the  Church,  and  who  wishes  to  come  in  again, 
the  law  of  our  Church  expressly  says  that  such  shall  repent,  and  be 
baptized,  and  be  admitted  as  at  first. — History  of  the  Church,  Vol.  1, 
p.  338. 

Apostles,  The  Authority  They  are  Subject  to. — I  decided  that  the 
High  Council  had  nothing  to  do  with  the  Twelve,  or  the  decisions  of 
the  Twelve.  But  if  the  Twelve  erred  they  were  accountable  only  to 
the  General  Council  of  the  authorities  of  the  whole  Church,  according 
to  the  revelations. — History  of  the  Church,  Vol.  2,  p.  285. 

Apostles,  Duty  of  the  Twelve. — Brother  Joseph  then  addressed 
the  Twelve,  and  said  that  in  all  0*r  counsels,  especially  while  on  trial 
of  any  one,  we  should  see  and  observe  all  things  appertaining  to  the 
subject,  and  discern  the  spirit  by  which  either  party  was  governed.  We 
should  be  in  a  situation  to  understand  every  spirit  and  judge  righteous 
judgment  and  not  be  asleep.  We  should  keep  order  and  not  let  the 
council  be  imposed  upon  by  unruly  conduct.  The  Saints  need  not  think 
because  I  am  familiar  with  them  and  playful  and  cheerful,  that  I  am 
ignorant  of  what  is  going  on.  Iniquity  of  any  kind  cannot  be  sustained 
in  the  Church,  and  it  will  not  fare  well  where  I  am;  for  I  am  determined 
while  I  do  lead  the  Church,  to  lead  it  right. — History  of  the  Church, 
Vol.  5,  p.  411. 

Apostles    Subject    only    to    First    Presidency. — The    Twelve    are    not 

subject  to  any  other  than  the  first  Presidency,  viz.,  "myself,"  said  the 
Prophet,  "Sidnev  Rigdon,  and  Frederick  G.  Williams,  who  are  now  my 
Counsellors;  and  where  I  am  not,  there  is  no  First  Presidency  over  the 
Twelve." — History  of  the  Church,  Vol.  2,  p.  374. 


Tihema,  1942  TE  KARERE  337 

Articles  of  Faith. — We  believe  in  God  the  eternal  Father,  and 
m  His  Son  Jesus  Christ,  and  in  the  Holy  Ghost. 

We  believe  that  men  will  be  punished  for  their  own  sins,  and  not 
ior  Adam's  transgression. 

We  believe  that  through  the  atonement  of  Christ  all  mankind  may 
be  saved  by  obedience  to  the  laws  and  ordinances  of  the  Gospel. 

We  believe  that  the  first  principles  and  ordinances  of  the  Gospel 
are:  (1)  Faith  in  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ;  (2)  Repentance;  (3)  Baptism 
by  immersion  for  the  remission  of  sins;  (4)  Laying  on  of  hands  for 
the  gift  of  the  Holy  Ghost. 

We  believe  that  a  man  must  be  called  of  God  by  prophecy  and  by 
the  laying  on  of  hands,  by  those  who  are  in  authority,  to  preach  the 
Gospel  and  administer  in  the  ordinances  thereof. 

We  believe  in  the  same  organization  that  existed  in  the  primitive 
Church,  viz.,   apostles,  prophets,   pastors,  teachers,   evangelists,   etc. 

We  believe  in  the  gift  of  tongues,  prophecy,  revelation,  visions, 
healing,   interpretation   of   tongues,   etc. 

We  believe  the  Bible  to  be  the  word  of  God,  as  far  as  it  is  trans- 
lated correctly;  wre  also  believe  the  Book  of  Mormon  to  be  the  word  of 
God. 

We  believe  all  that  God  has  revealed,  all  that  He  does  now  reveal, 
and  we  believe  that  He  will  yet  reveal  many  great  and  important  things 
pertaining  to  the   kingdom  of   God. 

We  believe  in  the  literal  gathering  of  Israel  and  in  the  restora- 
tion of  the  Ten  Tribes;  that  Zion  will  be  built  upon  this  (the  American) 
continent;  that  Christ  will  reign  personally  upon  the  earth;  and  that 
the  earth  will  be  renewed  and  receive  is  paradisiacal  glory. 

We  claim  he  privilege  of  worshipping  Almighty  God  according  to 
the  dictates  of  our  own  conscience,  and  allow  all  men  the  same  privilege, 
let  them  worship  how,  where,  or  what  they  may. 

We  believe  in  being  subject  to  kings,  presidents,  rulers  and  magis- 
trates, in  obeying,  honouring,  and  sustaining  the  law. 

We  believe  in  being  honest,  true,  chaste,  benevolent,  virtuous, 
and  in  doing  good  to  all  men ;  indeed  we  may  say  that  we  follow  the 
admonition  of  Paul,  We  believe  all  things,  we  hope  all  things,  we  have 
endured  many  things,  and  hope  to  be  able  to  endure  all  things.  If 
there  is  anything  virtuous,  lovely,  or  of  good  report,  or  praiseworthy, 
we  seek  after  these  things. — History  of  the  Church,  Vol.  4,  p.  540. 

Baptism. — God  has  made  certain  decrees  which  are  fixed  and  im- 
movable; for  instance — God  set  the  sun,  the  moon,  and  the  stars  in  the 
heavens,  and  gave  them  their  laws,  conditions  and  bounds,  which  they 
cannot  pass,  except  by  His  commandments;  they  all  move  in  perfect 
harmony  in  their  sphere  and  order,  and  are  as  lights,  wonders  and  signs 
unto  us.  The  sea  also  has  its  bounds  which  it  cannot  pass.  God  has 
set  many  signs  on  the  earth,  as  well  as  in  the  heavens;  for  instance, 
the  oak  of  the  forest,  the  fruit  of  the  tree,  the  herb  of  the  field — 
all  bear  a  sign  that  seed  hath  been  planted  there;  for  it  is  a  decree  of 
the  Lord  that  every  tree, plant,  and  herb  bearing  seed  should  bring 
forth  of  its  kind,  and  cannot  come  forth  after  any  other  law  or  prin- 
ciple. Upon  the  same  principle  do  I  contend  that  baptism  is  a  sign 
ordained  of  God,  for  the  believer  in  Christ  to  take  upon  himself  in 
order  to  enter  into  the  kingdom  of  God,  for  "except  a  man  bo  horn  o( 
water  and  of  the  Spirit,  ho  cannot  enter  into  the  kingdom  of  God." 
said  the  Saviour.  It  is  a  sign  and  a  commandment  which  God  has  set 
for  man  to  enter  into  His  kingdom.      Those   who   seel*   to   niter   in   any 

(  ( 'ontinued  on  page  343 1 


338  TE  KARERE  Tihema,  1942 

SUNDAY   SCHOOL 

SACRAMENT  GEM 
( ).  happy  hour!   Communion  sweet! 

Whin  children,    friends  and  teachers  meet, 
And.  in  remembrance  of  His  grace, 
Unite  in  sweetest  songs  of  praise. 

CONCERT  RECITATION 
1  Thessalonians  5:  12-13. 

"And  we  beseech  you,  brethren,  to  know  them  which  labour 
among  you,  and  are  over  you  in  the  Lord,  and  admonish  you;  And 
to  esteem  them  very  highly  in  love  for  their  work's  sake.  And  be 
at  peace  among  yourselves." 

KORERO  A  NGAKATJ 
/  Teharonika  5:  12-13. 

"He  mea  ia  tenei  na  matou  kia  koutou,  e  oku  teina  kia  matau 
ki  te  hunga  e  mahi  ana  i  roto  i  a  koutou,  e  tohutohu  ana  i  a  koutou 
i  roto  i  te  Ariki,  e  whakatupato  ana  i  a  koutou;  Kia  nui  whakahara- 
hara  ano  o  koutou  whakaaro  ki  a  ratou  i  runga  i  te  aroha.  me 
whakaaro  ki  ta  ratou  mahi.  Kia  man  ta  koutou  rongo  ki  a  koutou 
ano." 

SUNDAY  SCHOOL  OFFICERS.— Tn  following  the  policy 
oi"  Sunday  Schools  outlining  and  working  their  own  programmes  For 
special  occasions,  we  suggest  that  you  work  such  a  programme  out 
for  the  Christmas  Sunday,  after  consultation  with  your  Branch  Presi- 
dencies. Try  and  remember,  fellow-workers,  that  it  is  unity  and 
CO-operation  we  need  most  these  days,  and  if  it  is  possible  to  work 
under  the  spirit  of  the  Gospel  which  is  exemplified  in  this  month's 
Concert  Recitation  your  work  will  he  blessed  beyond  your  expecta- 
tions.     Third   Sunday — Christmas   Sunday. 

Again  you  arc  reminded  to  complete  your  Reports  for  the  year 
1942,  which  ends  with  the  last  Sunday  in  November,  1942,  and 
forward  to  reach  the  Secretary.  Box  72,  Auckland,  not  later  than 
10th  December,  1942.  The  January  issue  of  Te  Karere  will  bring 
you  a  brief  outline  of  the  Sunday  School  work  as  reported  by  your- 
selves for  the  past  year. 

All  Home  Sunday  Schools  or  Sunday  Schools  that  are  a  part  of 
an  organized  Branch  as  well  as  Branch  Sunday  Schools  are  instructed 
here  to  send  in  your  reports  as  separate  and  individual  organizations. 

LESSONS 

KINDERGARTEN   (4  to  5  years).     Thought:  "Obedience." 
"Obedience    to    Parents." 

"Obedience    to    Authorities"     (Church    and    Country). 
"Some  Incidents  of  Obedience  While  the  Gospel  was  First  Brought 
to    New   Zealand." 


Tihema,  1942  TE  KARERE  339 

PRIMARY    (6  to  9  years). 

"Jesus   Healing  the  Sick  Child"    (Matthew   17:14-18). 
"Jesus  Feeds  Five  Thousand"    (Matthew  14:  15-21). 
"Jesus  and  Nicodemus"    (John   3:1-11). 

CHURCH  HISTORY    (10  to   11   years). 

"Christ  Heals  Sick  Among  Nephites"   (III.  Nephi  17). 

"The  Three  Nephites"  (III.  Nephi  28  or  Story  of  Book  of  Mormon, 

chapter  51). 
"The  Reign  of  Peace"    (IV.  Nephi  1). 

A  and  B  DEPARTMENTS   (12-15,  16-19  years). 

"The  Third  Commandment"    (Exodus  20:7).      Problems:   In  what 

respects  are  profanity  and  slang  alike?  Which  of  the  two — slang  or 
profanity  do  you  consider  most  degrading?  Why?  In  what  way  does 
the  sluggish  brain  use  slang  and  profanity  as  a  support?  How  did 
the  Hebrews  avoid  using  the  name  of  Deity?  What  interpretation  is 
given  to  the  Third  Commandment  as  outlined  in  the  Bible  Dictionary? 

"The  Fourth  Commandment"  (Exodus  20:8-11).  Problem:  How 
may  we  know  what  are  proper  Sabbath  Day  activities? 

"The  Fifth  Commandment"  (Exodus  20:12).  Problems:  Make  a 
list  of  the  "whys"  of  honour  to  parents?  What  are  the  values  received 
from  honouring  parents? 

C  DEPARTMENT    (20  to  25  years). 

"In  Perea"  (Luke  16).  Problems:  What  was  it  that  the  Lord 
commended  in  the  unjust  steward?  What  principles  should  guide  one 
in  finding  the  true  use  of  wealth?  Explain:  "The  law  and  prophets 
were  until  John?"  In  what  way  does  Christ's  teaching  on  divorce 
apply  to-day?  Why  should  a  gulf  exist  between  Lazarus  and  the  rich 
man? 

"In  Perea  and  Bethany"  (Luke  17;  John  11).  Problems:  What 
determines  who  should  be  forgiven?  How  can  faith  be  developed? 
Suggest  reasons  why  Jesus  delayed  His  going  to  Lazarus?  Why  did 
the  Jews  call  a  council  immediately  following  the  raising  of  Lazarus? 
What  is  your  attitude  toward  the  nine  ungrateful  lepers?  Explain: 
"The  Kingdom  of  God  is  within  you."  Why  the  necessity  of  daily 
preparation? 

GOSPEL  DOCTRINE   (All  others  not  already  assigned). 

It  is  hoped  that  all  of  this  class  have  endeavoured  to  discuss  the 
assignment  outlined  in  the  last  issue  of  "Te  Karere." 

"The  Organization  of  Earth  and  Man" — Pearl  of  great  price 
(Moses  1-2;  Abraham  4-5;  Genesis  1-2;  Psalm  104  and  Key  to  Teology, 
chapter  6).  Helps:  The  visions  of  Moses — events  of  the  Creation — 
special  account  of  the  Creation  of  Man. 

"The  Spiritual  Creation"  (Moses  3:  Abraham  3;  D.  &  C.  29:30- 
33;  Genesis  2:5-6;  Numbers  16-22;  Eccle.  12;  Jer.  1:4-5;  Job  38:  4-7; 
Hebrews  12).  Helps:  All  things  first  created  spiritually — created  by 
the  power  of  the  spirit  before  they  were  in  the  earth — the  Father  of 
Spirits — spirits  return  to  God — Jeremiah  chosen  before  he  was  born — 
Sons  of  God  shouted  for  joy — there  was  not  a  man  to  till  the  ground. 

"The  Council  in  Heaven.  The  Fall  of  Man"  (Moses  4;  Abraham 
3;  Revelation  12;  I.  John  3;  II.  Peter  2;  Jude  6;  Isaiah  14;  I).  &  C.  ~M.> : 
36-39;  76:25-27;  Genesis  3;  II.  Nephi  2:22-25).  Helps:  The  rebellion 
of  Satan;  the  temptation  and  the  fall — first  promise  of  a  Saviour. 


340  TE  KARERE  Tihema,  1942 

MAORI  CLASS. 

RATAPU  TUATAH1 
I  ROTO  I  TE  KINGITANGA  t  te  Atua  he  maha  nga  wehewehenga, 
ara  nga  karahe  kua  rite  mai  mo  te  hunga  e  tika  ana  kia  whiwhi 
kei  roto  i  te  whare  o  to  tatou  Matua  he  maha  nga  nohoanga,  a  ko  te 
hunga  anake  i  takatu  kia  whiwhi  e  tukua  kia  tomo  ki  roto.  Ko 
te  whakaaro  he,  ma  roto  nei  i  nga  whakapono  tuturu  i  hua  ake  i  roto 
i  nga  hahi.  ara  i  te  meake  ka  put  a  e  rua  ano  nga  wahi,  nga  turanga  me 
nga  ahua  mo  nga  wairua  o  te  uri  tangata — Ko  te  rangi  me  te  rcin.ua. 
rite  tonu  te  kororia  i  roto  i  nga  wahi  katoa  o  tetahi — rite  tonu  ano 
lioki  nga  w  hakawehi  puta  noa  i  tetahi.  I  runga  i  nga  whakakitenga 
mai  o  naianei  kahore  he  take  o  tera  tu  whakapono.  I  roto  i  te  kupu 
tika  mai  a  te  Karaiti  ka  mohio  tatou  he  maha  nga  rangatiratanga  ara 
nga    kororia. 

Nga   Patai: 

1.  Pehea  te   ahua   i   roto   i  te   kingitanga  o  te   Atua? 

2.  Ko   wai  te  hunga  e   whiwhi? 

3.  He  aha  te  whakapono  a  nga  hahi   mo  tenei? 

4.  E  tika  ana  ranei  tenei  ki  ta  te  Ariki  i  whakaatu  ai? 

RATAPU    TUARUA 

NGA  WEHEWEHENGA  KORORIA— Kua  whakaaturia  mai  e  u 
Atua  i  roto  i  Ana  whakakitenga  mai  nga  tino  rangatiratanga  ara  nga 
wehewehenga  kororia,  kua  rite  mai  nei  i  a  te  Karaiti  mo  nga  tamariki 
a  te  tangata,  ara: — (1)  Ko  te  kororia  o  to  te  tiki-tiki-o-rangi.  Tera 
etahi  kua  whakapau  i  te  kaha  kia  ngohengohe  ki  nga  whakahaunga 
katoa  a  te  Atua,  kua  whakaae  ki  te  whakaaturanga  a  te  Karaiti,  kua 
ngohengohe  ki  nga  ture  me  nga  tikanga  o  te  rongopai,  a  kua  whiwhi 
ki  te  Wairua  Tapu;  ko  ratou  ano  enei  kua  pehia  te  kino  e  a  ratou  mahi 
tapu,  kua  rite  nei  mo  te  kororia  o  runga  rawa,  ko  ratou  no  te  hahi 
Matua,  kua  hoatu  nei  e  te  Matua  ngamea  katoa  i  runga  i  te  ritenga 
o  Merekihereke  kua  meinga  ratou  hei  kingi  hei  tohunga  mo  te  runga 
rawa;  kua  whiwhi  ratou  i  nga  tinana  o  te  kororia  o  tiki-tiki-o-rangi, 
ko  tona  kororia  nei  ko  te  ra,  ko  te  kororia  nei  o  te  Atua,  te  kororia  o 
runga  rawa  i  whakaritea  nei  ki  to  tatou  ra.  Kua  uru  atu  ratou  ki  te 
ropu  whai  kororia,  kua  karaunatia  ki  te  whakateiteitanga  i  roto  i  t? 
rangatiratanga    o    tiki-tiki-o-rangi. 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  He  aha  nga  wehewehenga  kororia  kua  rite   mai   i  a  te  Karaiti 
mo  nga  tamariki  a  te  tangata? 

2.  He  aha  tatou  i  mohio  ai  he  pera  te  ahua? 

3.  Korerotia  ake  nga  ahuatanga  katoa  e  whiwhi  ai  ki  te   kororia 
o   tiki-tiki-o-rangi? 

RATAPU  TUAWHA 
TE  KORORIA  O  TE  RANGI  TU  HAHA.  Kua  korero  tatou  kua 
kite  ko  etahi  ka  whiwhi  ki  tetahi  kororia  tuarua  o  raro  iho,  e  rerek* 
ake  ana  i  to  runga  rawa  penei  me  te  marama  e  rereke  ake  nei  i  to  te 
ra  i  te  takiwa.  Ko  ratou  enei,  ahakoa  he  hunga  tika  ano,  kahore  i  rite 
ia  ratou  nga  mea  katoa  hei  mahinga  e  whiwhi  ai  ki  te  whakateiteitanga, 
i  kapo  na  runga  i  nga  murere  o  te  tangata  a  kore  ana  e  ahei  kia  whiwhi 
e  ngohengohe  ai  hoki  ki  nga  ture  teitei  ake  a  te  Atua,  i  kitea  kaore  ratou 
i  maia  i  roto  i  te  whakaaturanga  a  Ihu  Karaiti  noreira  kahore  e  ahei 
ki  te  whakanuinga  o  te  koreria. 

Nga    Patai: 

1.  I    whakaritea   ki   te    aha   te    rereketanga    o    te    kororia    o 
iho  i  to  runga  rawa?  . 

2.  Ko   wai   ma   tenei   hunga   e   whiwhi   ki   tenei   kororia?      He   aha 
ratou  i  kore  ai  e  whiwhi  ki  to  runga  rava? 


Tihema,  1942  TE  KARERE  341 

MO  NGA  KAWANATANGA  ME  NGA  TURE  KATOA 

(Ko  enei  korero  i  kapea  mai  no  te  Wahanga  134  o  te  Akoranga 
me  nga  Kawenata,  e  pa  ana  mo  nga  Ture  me  nga  Kawanatanga  o 
te  Ao. — Etita.) 

Ko  to  matou  whakapono  mo  te  talia  ki  nga  kawanatanga  me  nga 
ture  katoa  e  kore  pea  c  whakaarohia,  am  e  pohelietia.  Xo  reira 
matou  i  mea  ai  he  mea  tika  kia  whakaaturia  o  niatou  whakaaro 
mo  te  taha  ki  tana  ahua  i  te  mutunga  o  tenei  pukapuka. 

1.  E  whakapono  ana  niatou  ko  nga  kawanatanga  he  mea 
whakatu  e  te  Atua  hei  painga  mo  te  tangata,  a  e  puritia  ana  e  ia  nga 
tangata  hei  whakautu  mo  a  ratou  mahi  e  pa  ana  ki  a  ratou  ano, 
ahakoa  i  te  mahinga  ture,  i  te  whakarerenga  ranei  i  nga  ture,  hei 
painga,  hei  awhina  i  nga  huihuinga  tangata. 

2.  E  whakapono  ana  niatou,  ara  kahore  he  kawanatanga  e 
kaha  te  tu  i  roto  i  te  rangimarie,  ki  te  kahore  nga  ture  i  hanga 
me  te  pupuri  kia  whiwhi  ai  ia  tangata,  ia  tangata  ki  te  tikanga  here- 
kore  o  nga  whakaaro,  me  te  mana  me  te  tikanga  i  runga  i  ena  taunga, 
me  te  tiakanga  i  te  ora. 

3.  E  whakapono  ana  matou  mo  nga  kawanatanga  katoa  e  tika 
ana  kia  whai  apiha  me  nga  kai  whakawa  kia  whakamahi  i  o  ratou 
ture,  a  ko  nga  pera  e  whakahaere  i  te  ture  i  runga  i  te  tika  me  te 
pono,  kia  rapua,  kia  tautokotia  e  te  reo  o  te  iwi  (me  he  mea  he 
iwi  kingi  kore),  ara  ki  ta  kingi  e  pai  ai  ranei. 

4.  E  whakapono  ana  niatou  ko  te  karakia  he  mea  whakarite 
na  te  Atua,  a  kei  raro  katoa  nga  tangata  i  a  ia,  ara  i  a  ta  anake 
mo  te  whakamahi  i  tera,  ki  te  kahore  o  ratou  whakaaro  karakia  e 
mea  i  a  ratou  kia  takahia  nga  tikanga  o  etahi  atu ;  engari  kahore  matou 
e  whakapono  ana  ko  nga  ture  tangata  e  ahei  ana  ki  te  hanga  ture 
mo  te  karakia  me  te  here  i  nga  whakaaro  o  nga  tangata;  he  whaka- 
rite ranei  i  nga  tauira  mo  nga  karakia;  kia  riria  e  te  kai  whakawa  o 
te  ture  nga  mahi  he,  engari  kaua  e  here  i  te  hinengaro;  me  riri  i  te 
he,  engari  kaua  e  pehi  i  te  here-koretanga  o  te  ngakau. 

5.  E  whakapono  ana  matou  kua  takoto  te  tikanga  kia  tautoko 

nga.  tangata  katoa  i  nga  kawanatanga  e  nolio  nei  ratou  i  reira,  i  h 
mea  e  tiakina  ana  ratou  i  roto  i  o  ratou  tikanga  intnrii  e  nga  ture  o 
taua  kawanatanga;  a  ko  te  tututanga  he  ahua  kino  mo  nga  tangata 
i  raro  nei  i  taua  tiakanga,  a  e  tika  ana  kia  whakawliiu  kia  rite  ki  ana 
ahua;  a  ko  nga  kawanatanga  katoa.  e  ahei  ana  ki  te  hanga  ture  kia 
rite  ki  ta  ratou  e  whakaaro  ai  hei  painga  mo  te  katoa,  ahakoa  ra  me 
ata  waiho  te  here-koretanga  o  te  hinengaro. 

6.  E  whakapono  ana  niatou  e  tika  ana  kia  whakahonoretia  nga 
tangata  i  roto  i  o  ratou  turanga  :  ara  nga  kai  whakahaere  tikanga 
me  nga  kai  whakawa  Kua  whakatungia  nei  hei  tiaki  i  te  hunga  hara 


342 


TE  KARERE 


Tihema,  l'MJ 


kore,  me  te  whakawhiu  i  te  hunga  hara;  me  whakahonorc,  me  tau- 
toko  nga  tangala  katoa  i  nga  ture,  ki  te  kahore  hoki  era  kua  kore 
he  rangimarie  me  te  noho  pai  i  tc-  kore  ture,  me  te  kino;  ko  nga  ture 
tangata  i  whakaritea  mo  te  whakatikakita  i  o  tatou  tikanga  motuhake 
me  nga  tikanga  o  te  iwi  nui  i  waenganui  i  nga  tangata  letahi  ki 
tetahi,  ko  nga  ture  tapu  he  mea  homai  i  te  rangi,  hei  whakarite 
tauira  mo  te  taha  wairua,  mo  te  whakapono  me  te  karal  ia.  he 
meatanga  ma  te  tangata  ki  tona  Kai-hanga. 

7.  E  whakapono  ana  matou  ko  nga  kai  whakahaere  Likanga, 
ko  nga  takiwa  me  nga  kawanatanga  e  whai  mana  ana  ki  te  hanga 
ture  hei  tiaki  i  nga  tangata  i  roto  i  te  whakamahinga  o  o  ratou  whaka- 
pono karakia;  engari  kahore  matou  e  whakapono  ana  e  whai  mana 
ana  rat<>u  hei  tango  i  tenei  tikanga  i  nga 
tangata,  hei  whakahaere  rami  i  o  ratou 
whakaaro,  i  te  mea  e  tautokotia  ana  nga 
ture.  a  me  he  mea  kahore  ana  whakaaro 
karakia  e  whakaputa  ake  ana  i  nga  ti- 
kanga tutu. 

8.  E  whakapono  ana  matou  ko  te 
mahinga  i  te  hara  me  whin  kia  rite  ki 
tona  ahua  ;  a  ko  te  kohuru,  ko  te  tutu. 
te  pahua,  te  tahae,  me  te  takahi  i  te  rangi- 
marie, kia  whiua  katoatia  kia  rite  ki  a 
ratou  ake  ahua  kino,  me  ta  ratou  mahi 
kino  i  waenganui  i  nga  tangata,  e  ana 
ture  o  te  kawanatanga  i  mahi  ai  tana  he 
ki  reira;  mo  te  rangimarietanga  o  te  katoa. 
e  tika  ana  kia  oho  ake  nga  tangata  katoa  me  te  whakamahi  i  o  ratou 
kaha  ki  te  kawe  mai  i  nga  tangata  hara  ki  nga  ture  pai  kia  whiua. 

9.  Kahore  matou  e  whakapono  ana  e  tika  ana  kia  whakaurua 
nga  tikanga  karakia  ki  nga  tikanga  kawanatanga,  a  kia  meinga  tetahi 
o  nga  ropu  karakia  kia  whakanuia,  a  ko  tetahi  e  hereherea  ana  i 
roto  i  ona  tikanga  whaka-te-wairua,  me  nga  tikanga  o  ona  mema 
aim  lie  tangata  whenua  kia  whakakahoretia. 

10.  E  whakapono  ana  matou  e  whai  mana  ana  nga  ropu 
karakia  ki  te  mahi  ki  a  ratou  mema  mo  o  ratou  mahi  he  kia  rite  ki 
nga  ture  me  nga  whakariteritenga  o  ana  ropu,  me  he  mea  tana  whaka- 
riteritenga  mo  te  tunga  o  tana  mema:  engari  kahore  matou  e  whaka- 
pono ana  e  whai  mana  ana  nga  ropu  karakia  ki  te  whakawai  nga 
tangata  mo  o  ratou  taonga,  me  te  oranga,  me  te  tango  mai  i  a  ratou 
nga  taonga  o  tenei  ao,  me  te  whakapa  i  tetahi  putake  mate,  ahakoa  ki 
tona  oranga,  ki  tona  tinana  ranei.  kahore  ano  hoki  e  ahei  ki  te  whaka- 
whiu i  a  ratou  ki  tetahi  mamae,  heoi  ano  ko  te  tapahi  alu  i  a  ratou 
i  to  ratou  ropu.  me  tango  i  to  ratou  tunga. 

11.  E  whakapono  ana  matou  e  tika  ana  kia  tono  nga  tangata 
ki  te  kawanatanga  hei  whakatika  i  nga  mahi  he  ki  a  ratou,  me  nga 


SEASON'S 

GREETINGS 
— To  Mission  President 
and  family.  Mere  ll'haa- 
iiaa.  Zimi  Elders,  Nuhaka 
Branch  and  Presidency, 
Mahia  Hist  net  Primary 
Officers,  Teachers  and 
Children.  This  expres- 
sion of  remembrance  and 
aroha  comes  from  Sergt. 
Elsie  Loader,  who  is  also 
the  District  President  of 
the  Mahia  Primary  Asso- 
ciation. 


Tihema,  1942  TE  KARERE  343 

mahi  kino,  i  te  mea  e  meatia  ana  te  kino  ki  a  ratou  ake  ano,  ara 
ko  te  tahi  ki  nga  taonga  me  te  ingoa  pai  e  takahia  ana,  i  nga  wahi 
e  tu  ana  nga  ture  hei  tiaki  i  nga  pera ;  otira  e  whakapono  ana  matou 
e  tika  ana  nga  tangata  katoa  kia  tiaki  i  a  ratou  ano,  me  o  ratou 
hoa,  me  nga  taonga,  me  te  kawanatanga,  i  nga  tukinotanga,  me  nga 
takahanga  i  nga  tangata  katoa  i  nga  wa  e  hiahiatia  ana,  a  e  kore  e 
taea  te  tono  ki  nga  ture,  kia  awhinatia. 

12.  E  whakapono  ana  matou  e  tika  ana  kia  kauwhautia  te 
Rongo-pai  ki  nga  iwi  katoa  o  te  whenua,  he  whakaoho  i  te  hunga 
tika  kia  whakaora  i  a  ratou  ano  i  nga  he  o  te  ao.  Engari  kahore 
matou  e  whakapono  ana  e  tika  ana  kia  whakararuraru  nga  kai  mahi 
te  kauwhau  ranei  i  te  Rongo-pai,  me  te  rumaki  i  a  ratou  i  runga  i 
te  kore  e  whakaae  o  o  ratou  rangatira,  te  mea  ranei  i  a  ratou  kia 
kaua  ratou  e  pai  ki  o  ratou  tunga  i  tenei  ora,  a  ma  reira  e  pa  mai 
ai  te  mate  ki  nga  tangata ;  e  whakapono  ana  matou  ko  nga  whaka- 
raruraru pera  kahore  i  te  tika,  a  e  kino  ana  ki  te  rangimarietanga  o 
nga  kawanatanga  e  tukua  ana  kia  hereherea  nga  tangata  i  roto  i  te 
ponongatanga. 


JOSEPH  SMITH'S  TEACHINGS— 

(Continued  from  payc  337) 

other  way  will  seek  in  vain ;  for  God  will  not  receive  them,  neither 
will  the  angels  acknowledge  their  works  as  accepted,  for  they  have  not 
obeyed  the  ordinances,  nor  attended  to  the  signs  which  God  ordained 
for  the  salvation  of  man,  to  prepare  him  for,  and  give  him  a  title  to,  a 
celestial  glory;  and  God  had  decreed  that  all  who  will  not  obey  His 
voice  shall  not  escape  the  damnation  of  hell.  What  is  the  damnation  of 
hell?  To  go  with  that  society  who  have  not  obeyed  His  commands. 
Baptism  is  a  sign  to  God,  to  angels,  and  to  heaven  that  we  do 
the  will  of  God,  and  there  is  no  other  way  beneath  the  heavens  whereby 
God  hath  ordained  for  man  to  come  to  Him  to  be  saved,  and  enter  the 
kingdom  of  God,  except  faith  in  Jesus  Christ,  repentance,  and  baptism 
for  the  remission  of  sins,  and  any  other  course  is  in  vain ;  then  you  have 
the  promise  of  the  gift  of  the  Holy  Ghost. — History  of  the  Church, 
Vol.   4,  p.   54. 


"Mormonism,"  so-called,  embraces  every  principle  pertaining  to  life  and 
salvation,  for  time  and  eternity.  No  matter  who  has  it.  If  the  infidel  has  got 
truth  it  belongs  to  "Mormonism."  The  truth  and  sound  doctrine  possessed  by 
the  sectarian  world,  and  they  have  a  great  deal,  all  belongs  to  this  Church.  As 
for  their  morality,  many  of  them  are,  morally,  just  as  good  as  we  arc.  .  Ill 
that  is  good,  lovely,  and  praisczvorthy  belongs  to  this  Church  and  Kingdom. 
"'Mormonism"  includes  all  truth.  There  is  no  truth  but  what  belongs  t<>  ///<• 
■Gospel.  It  is  life,  eternal  life;  it  is  bliss;  it  is  the  fullness  of  all  things  in 
the  gods  and  in  the  eternities  of  the  gods.     11:375. 


The  Lord  reveals  a  little  here  and  a  little  there,  line  upon  line,  and  he  will 
continue  to  do  so  until  we  can  reach  into  eternity  and  embrace  a  tidiness  of  his 
<flory,  excellency  and  power.      13:  241. 

Brig  ham    Young. 


344  I  i;  KARERE  Tihema,  1942 

Mutual  Improvement  Association 

M.I. A.  THEME  1942 

Doctrine  &   Covenants  82:10:    "/,  the  Lord,  am 

bound  when  y$  do  what  I  say;  hut  when  you  do  not  what  I 
say,  ye  hare  no  Promise." 

SECOND  TUESDAY: 

FIRST   AID    (All   Classe.) 

EPILEPTIC    FITS 

The   cause    in    most   cases   is   not   known. 

Symptoms. — Face    becomes    pale,    the    eyes    roll,    patient    u'( 
hoarse   cry,   loses  consciousness,   bites  his  tongue,   convulsive   muscu  a 
movements  begin  with  patient  throwing  his  arms  and  legs  and    jerkil 
his   head.      There   is  often    frothing   at    the   mouth.      These   convulsion 
may   last    from   two   to   thirty   minutes.      Patient   is   harmless   except    t  • 
himself.      He  will   bite  his  tongue  and   lips. 

Treatment — Keep  patient  from  injuring  self  by.  placing  a  piec 
of  wood  wrapped  in  cloth  or  a  folded  cloth  between  the  teeth,  to  pre- 
vent biting  himself.  Lay  patient  in  prone  position  with  a  soft  pillow 
or  other  material  under  his  head.  Do  not  try  to  restrain  convulsive 
movements.  Give  no  stimulants.  Patient  will  often  fall  asleep  or 
go  into  quiet  unconsciousness  and  should  not  be  disturbed. 

CONVULSIONS  IN  CHILDREN 

Convulsions  in  children  usually  come  on  without  any  warning. 
In  some  cases  they  are  preceded  by  restlessness,  irritability,  or  slight 
twitchings  of  the  muscles  of  the  face  or  extremities.  The  body  may 
become  stiff,  or  even  bowed  backward ;  all  sorts  of  muscular  spasms 
and  all  degrees  of  severity  may  be  seen.  One  convulsion  seldom  lasts 
for  more  than  a  half  hour.  Convulsions  are  caused  by  indigi 
food,  prolonged  high  fever;  many  diseases  of  children  may  start  in 
this  way. 

Treatment. — Undress  the  child  and  place  him  in  a  hot  bath,  loo 
to  103  degrees,  or  of  the  temperature  the  elbow  will  feel  comfortably 
hot  for  a  half  minute.  A  tablespoonful  of  mustard  to  one  gallon  of 
water  may  be  placed  in  the  bath.  Place  child  in  the  bath  until  body 
is  red,  place  a  cold  cloth  on  the  head.  If  child  cannot  be  placed  in 
bath,  roll  child  in  a  large  towel  wrung  out  of  water  as  prescribed  for 
bath.  Following  this  treatment  an  enema  of  from  one-half  to  one 
glassful  of  warm  soap  suds  is  desirable,  if  a  small  syringe  is  available. 
Following  bath,  put  child  to  bed  between  warm  blankets  and  keep 
perfectly  quiet  to  avoid  another  convulsion.  A  physician  should  be 
called  as  child  may  be  coming  down  with  a  severe   illness. 

HYSTERICAL  ATTACKS 
These  attacks  are  sometimes  mistaken  for  mild  epileptic  fit  or 
fainting.  In  an  hysterical  attack  the  face  does  not  change  colour.  If 
an  attempt  is  made  to  pull  open  the  eyelids  the  patient  will  resist  and 
close  them  more  tightly.  Person  will  always  fall  on  some  soft  place, 
like  a  sofa  or  soft  chair.  An  hysterical  attack  seldom  occurs  unless 
there  is  an  audience  present.  Treat  by  throwing  a  cup  of  cold  water 
in  the  face,  giving  aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia  by  inhalation.  Very 
often  patient  will  recover  readily  if  left  without  an  audience.  How- 
ever,  if  hysteria  continues  indefinitely  call   a  physician. 


Tihema,  1942  TE  KARERE  345 

HEART   FAILURE 

This  is  a  condition  which  the  first  aider  sees  frequently.  Sudden 
death  often  results,  although  this  is  not  always  true.  The  symptoms 
vary  considerably.  However,  the  first  aider  will  best  be  able  to  recog- 
nize the  condition  by  dividing  them  into  three  groups.  (1)  Case  re- 
sembling fainting — pulse  weak,  face  pale,  patient  may  or  may  not  be 
unconscious,  failure  to  recover  rapidly  will  distinguish  the  case  from 
ordinary  fainting.  (2)  Patient  may  be  seized  with  violent  pain  in  the 
region  of  the  heart.  Patient  is  conscious — fear  is  great.  In  these  two 
cases  patient  should  be  kept  very  quiet  in  a  lying  down  position.  Give 
a  stimulant  of  aromatic  spirits  of  ammonia  or  other  warm  drink,  cover 
sufficiently  to  keep  warm  and  call  a  physician.  (3)  The  third  symptom 
of  heart  failure  will  be  marked  by  a  shortness  of  breath,  often  with 
congestion  of  the  face.  These  patients  absolutely  cannot  lie  down. 
Patient  must  be  propped  up  with  pillows  enough  to  allow  him  to  breathe. 
It  may  be  necessary  to  allow  him  to  sit  up  straight.  Call  a  physician 
at  once.  Reassure  the  patient,  as  fear  will  make  condition  worse.  If 
he  carries  a  medicine  that  has  been  prescribed  by  his  physician,  help 
him  to  take  it. 

WOUNDS  AND  FOREIGN  BODIES   IN  THE   EYE 
For  wounds   or  cut  of  the   eyeball — cover  with   a  sterile   dressing 
and  consult  a  physician. 

Where  particles  of  dust  get  into  the  eye,  close  the  eye,  grasp  the 
lashes  of  the  upper  lid  and  pull  them  down  over  the  lower  lid.  This 
gives  the  tears  a  better  chance  to  wash  the  object  out.  If  this  doesn't 
remove  the  object,  lift  the  eyelid  and  with  corner  of  a  sterile  piece 
of  gauze  or  corner  of  a  clean  handkerchief  try  to  remove  object.  It 
may  be  necessary  to  roll  the  lid  back  over  a  pencil  in  order  to  see 
object.  If  object  is  embedded  in  eyelid  do  not  attempt  to  remove  it, 
but  place  a  drop  of  castor  oil  or  olive  oil  in  eye,  bandage  lightly  with 
a  clean,  wet  cloth  and  take  to  a  doctor.  Never  rub  the  eye.  Do  not 
be  rough  or  attempt  to  remove  objects  with  a  toothpick,  match,  pencil, 
etc.  The  eye  is  precious,  and  great  care  must  be  taken  or  eyesight  may 
be  impaired.  Do  not  attempt  to  remove  splinters  or  any  kind  of  objects 
from  the  eyeball,  but  consult  a  physicial  at  once. 

FOREIGN  OBJECTS  IN  THE  EAR 
Insects  often  crawl  into  the  ear.  They  can  be  killed  by  dropping 
a  little  olive  oil  or  mineral  oil  into  the  ear.  The  buzzing  will  cease. 
Have  same  removed  by  a  physician.  Children  often  put  beans,  peas, 
seeds,  or  buttons  into  the  ear.  Any  kind  of  seeds  will  absorb  moisture 
and  swell,  making  their  removal  difficult.  Such  objects  should  never 
be  touched  as  there  is  great  danger  of  seriously  injuring  the  ears.  The 
object  in  all  cases  should  be  removed  by  a  physician. 

FOREIGN  BODIES  IN  THE  NOSE 
For  foreign  objects  in  the  nose  such  as  corn,  beans,  etc.,  drop  a 
few  drops  of  olive  oil  or  mineral  oil  into  the  nose  to  relieve  irrita- 
tion and  have  a  physician  remove  object.  "The  nose  should  not  be 
blown  violently;  nor  should  it  ever  be  blown  with  one  nostril  held 
shut." 

FOREIGN  BODIES  IN  THE  THROAT  OR  WINDPIPE 
Pieces  of  food,  fish  bones,  coins,  false  teeth  and  other  similar 
objects  frequently  become  lodged  in  the  throat  or  upper  windpipe. 
The  throat  is  often  thrown  into  a  spasm  and  severe  symptoms  of  suffo- 
cation are  present.  The  victim's  face  becomes  livid,  be  gasps  for 
breath,  and  has  violent  fits  of  coughing. 


346  TE  KARERE  Tihema,  1942 

Treatment. — Try  to  remove  the  foreign  object  immediately.  Fre- 
quently it  can  be  removed  by  passing  a  finger  down  the  throat.  Avoid 
scratching  of  the  finger  nail  or  pushing  the  body  farther  down.  Objects 
lower  down  cannot  be  removed  this  way,  but  a  slap  between  the  shoul- 
ders will  sometimes  dislodge  the  object.  In  failing  to  remove  object 
in  this  way,  call  a  physician.  If  the  patient  is  unable  to  breathe,  give 
artificial  respiration  by  the  prone  pressure  method. 

Children  often  swallow  such  objects  as  coins,  pins,  tacks  and 
safety-pins  that  go  into  the  stomach.  Do  not  give  a  laxative  in  such 
cases,  but  consult  a  physician  at  once. 

NOSE  BLEED 
Nose  bleed,  particularly  in  children,  often  comes  on  spontane- 
ously; in  adults  having  high  blood  pressure  or  from  an  injury.  Usually 
no  treatment  is  necessary  as  bleeding  will  stop  in  a  few  moments. 
However,  if  bleeding  continues,  place  patient  in  chair  with  head  back, 
loosen  tight  clothing  about  the  neck,  and  apply  a  cold  pack  on  the 
forehead  and  at  back  of  the  neck.  Have  patient  breathe  through  his 
mouth.  A  roll  of  paper  or  gauze  placed  under  the  upper  lip  and 
pressure  applied  lightly  or  holding  the  nostrils  for  a  few  minutes  will 
stop  the  bleeding.  If  these  methods  fail,  call  a  physician  at  once  and  in 
the  meantime  take  a  narrow  piece  of  gauze  or  cotton  and  pack  it 
back  into  the  nose  gently  (not  up).  Leave  an  end  sticking  out  so 
that  the  pack  can  be  easily  removed. 

INTERNAL    BLEEDING 

A  person  in  an  accident  may  suffer  internal  injuries  that  will 
cause  bleeding.  If  bleeding  is  from  the  lungs  a  bright  red  froth  will 
be  coughed  up,  if  from  the  stomach  the  discharge  will  be  dark,  like 
coffee  grounds.  There  will  be  faintness,  cold  skin,  thirst,  feeble,  irregu- 
lar breathing,  sighing,  rapid  pulse.  Lay  patient  flat  on  back  with 
head  turned  to  one  side  to  allow  vomiting.  Keep  patient  perfectly 
quiet  and  warm  and  move  as  little  as  possible.  Do  not  give  stimulants. 
Call  a  physician. 

PAIN  IN  ABDOMEN 

Often  termed  stomach  ache,  particularly  in  children.  May  be 
caused  from  over-eating  or  eating  wrong  food  combinations.  On  the 
other  hand  it  may  be  something  more  serious,  which  a  first  aider  is 
unable  to  determine.  The  patient  may  have  pains  in  the  abdomen, 
tenderness,  nausea  or  vomiting  and  sometimes  diarrhoea. 

Treatment. — Cause  patient  to  vomit  by  placing  finger  on  palate  or 
give  a  warm  glass  of  soda  or  salt  water.  Give  an  enema — do  not 
give  a  laxative — do  not  give  any  food.  Do  not  check  diarrhoea  too 
soon  as  this  is  nature's  way  of  expelling  poison.  Put  patient  to  bed 
and  keep  him  warm.  If  the  tenderness  and  pain  doesn't  clear  up  in 
a  fewT  hours  call  a  physician  as  there  is  danger  of  appendicitis.  Never 
give  a  purgative  as  there  is  danger  of  rupturing  the  appendix,  which 
would  endanger  the  life  of  the  patient. 


My  faith  is  such  that  I  could  lay  a\lxm  all  that  I  possess  sooner  than  ever 
depart  from  the  Latter-day  work.  I  value  all  things  as  nothing  in  comparison 
with  having  the  Spirit  of  God  to  guide  inc. 

I  have  personally  had  sufficient  experience  to  know  that  many  times  the 
very  things  that  to  me  seem  most  hard  and  contrary  to  justice  and  reason, 
J:azr,  in  the  course  of  time,  proved  highly  satisfactory  and  of  great  value. 

— Pres.  Heber  J.  Grant. 


Tihema,  1942  TE  KARERE  347 

PRIMARY 

FIRST  WEEK 

THE   GIFT   OF  JESUS 
Objective: 

To  direct  the  child's  attention  to  babies,  thinking  of  each  one  as 
a  gift  from  God;  and  especially,  to  kindle  in  his  heart  a  love  for  the 
greatest   of   all  gifts  the   Christ-child. 

For  the  Teacher: 

Good  Christmas,  whom  our  children  love, 

We  love  you,  too!    Lift  us  above 

Our  cares,  our  faces,  our  small  desires, 

Open  our  hands  and  stir  the  fires 

Of  helpful  fellowship  within  us. 

And  back  to  love  and  kindness  win  us. 
There  is  no  story  more  lovely  for  the  child  at  this  age  than  the 
coming  of  the  baby  Jesus.  Begin  early  to  read  the  beautiful  story  of 
the  Master  from  the  four  Gospels  in  the  New  Testament.  It  is  out 
of  the  fullness  of  our  own  spiritual  lives  that  we  can  fill  the  hearts  and 
souls  of  others  to  overflowing  with  the  true   Christmas  spirit. 

Conversation: 

Create  the  atmosphere  for  the  story  by  telling  some  incident  about 
the  baby  in  the  home  of  one  of  the  children,  or  by  presenting  the  name 
of  some  little  baby  recently  arrived  in  one  of  the  families.  This  will 
open  the  conversation  and  the  children  will  tell  interesting  things  about 
the  "baby"  at  home.  Put  a  number  of  baby  pictures  on  the  wall,  low 
enough  to  be  easily  seen  by  the  children.  Let  different  ones  go  to  the 
front  and  choose  the  picture  they  like  best  and  tell  why.  If  you  know, 
a  lullaby  sing  it  for  the  children  and  let  them  make-believe  rocking 
the  baby. 

Lesson    Story: 

THE   BIRTH   OF   THE   CHRIST-CHILD 

I  want  to  tell  you  about  a  lovely  Baby  that  came  to  two  good 
people.  Their  names  were  Joseph  and  Mary.  They  lived  in  a  beautiful 
place  called  Nazareth.  The  Lord  loved  Mary  very  much.  She  was 
gentle,  and  all  who  knew  her  loved  her. 

One  evening  while  Mary  was  praying  in  her  garden,  a  strange 
but  wonderful  thing  happened.     As  she  prayed  she  heard  a  sound,  and 

looking  up  she  saw  a  lovely  angel.  The  angel  was  kind  to  Mary  when 
he  saw  that  she  was  frightened.  "Fear  net,  Mary,"  he  said.  "Blessed 
ail  thou  among  women.  The  Lord  loves  you  very  nnirh  and  is  .u'oin.u- 
to  send  you  a  Son,  and  you  shall  call  His  name  Jesus."  Mary's  heart 
was  filled  with  joy.  "Be  it  unto  me  even  according  to  thy  word,"  she 
said. 

The  angel  returned  to  Cxi  who  sent  him.  and  Mary  remembered 
what  the  angel  said.  There  was  a  BOng  in  her  heart  while  she  began 
to  get   ready    for   the    little    baby   Jesus.     She    asked    (>od    to    help    her   to 

take  care  of  the  baby  when   lie  should  come. 

One  day  Joseph,  Mary's  hushand,  took  her  on  ;»  journey  to  another 
village,  the  town  of  Hetldehem.  It  was  a  long  way  from  Na/aieth 
where  they  lived,  to  I'.et  hlehem.  Mary  rode  on  a  donkey,  and  Joseph 
walked    hy    her    side. 

When  Mary  grew  tired  riding,  Joseph  helped  her  down  Prom  the 

donkey    and    let    her    rest. 


348  TE  KXRERE  Tihema,  1942 

It  was  almost  dark  when  they  reached  Bethlehem,  and  they  were 
both  very  tired.  They  went  to  the  inn  or  hotel.  That  was  the  place 
where  strangers  stayed.  But  there  was  no  room  for  them.  Many 
other  people  had  journeyed  to  Bethlehem  that  day.  Joseph  did  not 
care  about  himself  but  he  wanted  a  comfortable  place  for  Mary. 
Joseph  asked  at  the  very  last  inn,  "Have  you  a  place  where  we  may 
stay   to-night?" 

"I  am  sorry,"  said  the  inn-keeper,  "but  every  place  is  crowded." 

Joseph  and  Mary  looked  so  tired!  "Isn't  there  some  place  we 
can  go?"     Joseph  asked  the  inn-keeper. 

"Yes,"  said  the  owner  of  the  inn,  "I  have  a  stable.  It  is  nice 
and  clean  and  there  is  clean  hay  on  which  you  can  make  a  bed." 

Joseph  said,  "Thank  you.  Mary  will  be  glad  to  rest  after  her  long 
journey." 

That  very  night  God  sent  Mary  the  little  Baby  Jesus,  and  all  the 
stable  was  filled  with  the  glory  of  His  coming.  When  Mary  saw  the 
Baby  she  loved  Him.  She  wrapped  Him  round  and  round  in  a  long 
piece  of  cloth  called  swaddling  clothes,  and  because  she  had  no  pretty 
basket  for  Him  she  laid  Him  in  the  manger,  the  wooden  box,  from 
which  the  sheep,  the  oxen,  and  the  donkeys  eat  their  hay. 

Mary  and  Joseph  smiled  as  they  looked  at  Jesus.  Their  hearts 
were  filled  with  joy;  for  Heavenly  Father  had  sent  them  a  wonderful 
gift. 

Picture: 

"The  Arrival  of  the  Shepherds,"  by  Le  Rolle,  may  be  shown  at 
this  time.  The  dim  rafters  of  the  stable,  the  animals,  the  father  and 
mother  and  the  baby  in  the  light,  make  the  picture  a  very  interesting 
one  to  the  children.  No  special  attention  should  be  given  to  the  shep- 
herds until  next  lesson,  when  the  story,  "The  Shepherds,"  is  told. 
While  the  children  are  looking  at  the  picture,  "Silent  Night"  may  be 
played  very  .softly  on  the  piano  or  organ. 

Song: 

There  is  no  more  beautiful  song  than  Luther's  "Cradle  Hymn." 
Sing  it  to  the  children  several  times.  After  having  heard  the  story  and 
studied  the  picture  they  will  understand  and  appreciate  it  and  learn  it 
very  quickly. 

SECOND   WEEK 
THE  GIFT  OF  JESUS 

(Continued) 

Fear  not;  For  unto  you  is  born  this  day  in  the  city  of  David,   a 
Saviour,  which  is  Christ  the  Lord." — Luke  2:  10,  11. 
Objective: 

To  direct  the  child's  love  to  the  Christ-child  and  help  him  to  know 
that  Jesus  was  our  Heavenly  Father's  gift  of  love  to  all  His  children. 

The  story  for  to-day  is  one  of  the  most  wonderful  and  sublime 
stories  in  literature.  The  beauty  of  the  setting  has  no  equal.  The 
hillside,  the  heavenly  messengers  bearing  glad  tidings  to  humble  shep- 
herds watching  their  flocks,  is  beautiful.  There  is  no  story  for  which 
the  teacher  should  be  so  well  prepared.  She  should  fully  appreciate 
and  truly  love  the  message  of  peace  it  carries.  If  this  story  is  told 
at  all,  it  must  be  told  in  the  spirit  of  Christ. 

THE   SHEPHERDS 

On  the  same  night  when  the  little  Lord  Jesus  was  born,  There  were 
shepherds  abiding  in  the  fields,  keeping  watch  over  their  flock  by  night." 
These  shepherds  were  very  careful  of  their  sheep  and  very  tender  of 


Tihema,  1942  TE  KARERE  349 

the  little  lambs.  They  often  stayed  out  with  the  sheep  all  night.  On 
this  night,  the  shepherds  talked  about  the  things  that  the  people  had 
told  them.  One  said,  "They  say  that  Father  in  Heaven  will  send 
Jesus  to  live  on  the  earth." 

"Yes,  and  when  He  comes  He  will  teach  us  how  to  love  each  other 
better  than  we  do  now,"  said  another. 

And  another  s&id,   "I  wish  He  would  come!" 

And  as  they  talked,  a  light  came  in  the  sky.  "And  lo,  the  angel 
of  the  Lord  came  upon  them,  and  the  glory  of  the  Lord  shone  round 
about  them;  and  they  were  sore  afraid.  And  the  angel  said  unto 
them,  'Fear  not;  for,  behold,  I  bring  you  good  tidings  of  great  joy, 
which  shall  be  to  all  people.  For  unto  you  is  born  this  day  in  the 
city  of  David,  a  Saviour,  which  is  Christ  the  Lord.  And  this  shall  be 
a  sign  unto  you;  ye  shall  find  the  babe  wrapped  in  swaddling  clothes, 
lying  in  a  manger,'  and  suddenly  there  was  with  the  angel  a  multitude 
of  angels  praising  God,  and  saying,  'Glory  to  God  in  the  highest,  and 
on  earth  peace,  good  will  toward  men.'  " 

"And  it  came  to  pass,  as  the  angels  were  gone  away  from  them 
into  heaven,  the  shepherds  said  one  to  another,  'Let  us  go  now  even 
unto  Bethlehem,  and  see  this  thing  which  is  come  to  pass,  which  the 
Lord  hath  made  known  unto  us.'  " 

When  all  was  still  the  shepherds  began  to  speak.  "The  angel  said 
that   Christ  the  Lord  is  born,"   said   one. 

"Yes,"  said  another,  "and  he  told  us  that  we  should  find  Him 
wrapped  in  swaddling  clothes  lying  in  a  manger." 

"Let  us  go   to   see   Him,"   they   cried. 

And  so  down  the  hill  to  the  little  town  of  Bethlehem  they  went. 
They  went  to  the  inn,  but  He  was  not  there.  They  went  to  the  stable 
and  there  they  found  the  little  Lord  Jesus  with  Mary  and  Joseph.  As 
they  fell  on  their  knees  about  Him,  they  thanked  God  for  sending  the 
Baby.  They  told  Mary  and  Joseph  of  the  angel's  words  and  of  the 
glorious  song  they  had  heard.      Mary  smiled  and  was  glad. 

Then  the  shepherds  went  back  to  their  sheep,  telling  all  whom 
they  met  that  they  had  seen  the  Christ-child. 

THIRD    WEEK 

"Let  no  man  seek  his  own,  but  each  his  neighbours'  good." — 
1   Cor.    10:  24. 

THE   JOY    OF   GIVING 
Objective: 

To  guide  the  children  into  thinking  and  feeling  thai  great  joy 
comes  from   doing   something   for   others. 

For    the    Teacher: 

Those  who  bring  sunshine  into  the  lives  of  others  cannot  keep  it 
from  themselves. 

Jesus  was  sent  as  a  Christmas  gift  bo  all  mankind.  Therefore,  we 
remember  His  birthday  and  in  gratitude  Pbr  what  He  did,  we  giv< 
to  others.  Care  should  be  taken  to  impress  upon  the  minds  of  the 
children  that  the  greatest  joy  to  be  obtained  in  observing  Christmas 
lies  in  giving  rather  than  in  receiving.  Let  us  strive  then,  to  emphasise 
the  thought,  "What  can  I  do  for  others?"  rather  than.  "What  will  Santa 
Claus  bring  me?" 

Lesson     Story:  ^ 

LOVING— GIV1NC. 

High  up  in  the  steeple  hung  the  Christina    bells.     They  had  hung 
there  many  years.     On  each  Chri  tmas  day  they  had  alwaj 
beautiful   music.     One  day   one   of  the   little   bells  cracked   and   could 


350  TE  KARERE  Tihema,  1942 

ring  no  more.  A  little  new  bell  was  hung  in  its  place.  Christmas, 
was  coming  soon.  "What  shall  I  do?  I  do  not  know  how  to  play  the 
Christmas  music;  I  do  not  know  how  to  ring,"  said  the  little  bell. 

"Never  mind,"  said  the  other  bells,  "you  will  know  when  the  time 
comes.      Just  wait  and  listen,  and  you  will  know." 

So  the  little  bell  waited  and  listened.  The  street  below  was  full 
of  people,  some  coming  this  way  and  some  going  that.  At  night-time 
the  street  was  full  of  lights;  some  were  the  street  lights  and  some 
were  in  the  store  windows;  some  were  on  the  automobiles. 

But  the  little  bell  liked  best  to  watch  the  people  passing,  and  to 
hear  what  they  said,  for  he  was  waiting  to  learn  what  to  ring  on  Christ- 
mas Day.  An  old  man  came  by.  He  was  somebody's  grandfather. 
His  arms  were  full  of  bundles.  The  little  bell  could  hear  him  saying, 
"Now  I  have  something  for  little  John,  and  for  the  baby,  and  won't 
they  be  surprised?"  And  he  laughed.  Then  came  some  boys  and  girls 
hurrying  home  from  school  talking  and  laughing  together.  "O,  I  have 
something  to  give  Mother  and  Father"  said  one.  "And  I  have  some- 
thing for  Grandmother,"  said  another.  The  little  bell  could  hear  them 
each   one  telling  of  what  they  were  going  to  give. 

Soon  came  a  good  mother  walking  past  with  such  a  happy  face 
and  more  packages  than  you  could  count.  There  was  something  for 
everyone  at  home — father,  brothers,  sisters,  baby.  The  little  bell 
watched  them   and  listened   and  thought. 

At  last  Christmas  Day  came  and  the  Christmas  bells  began  to  ring. 
All  the  people  stopped  to  listen  to  the  beautiful  music  of  their  ringing. 
Then  the  little  bell  knew  what  to  say,  and  it  rang  out: 

"Loving — giving — 

Loving — giving — " 
And   all   the    other   bells   sang  the   same   story: 
"Loving — giving — 

Loving — giving^-" 

Game: 

Let  the  children  stand  and  make-believe  ringing  the  church  bells, 
saying   as   they   do   so,    "Loving — Giving,    Loving — Giving — " 

For    the    Children    to    Do: 

Cut  bells  from  red  paper  for  the  Christmas  tree.  Give  each  child 
a  piece  of  red  paper  on  which  has  been  traced  a  bell.  Let  the  children 
cut  the  bells  out  carefully  and  then  put  through  a  hole  at  the  top 
either  a  piece  of  ribbon  or  Christmas  cord  by  which  to  hang  it  on  the 
tree  or  in  the  window.  Let  the  children  who  work  quickly  make  some 
extra  bells  for  the  Christmas  tree. 

As  you  work,  plan  to  do  something  for  someone  in  the  neighbour- 
hood. A  "cheer-basket,"  a  mounted  picture,  or  a  scrap-book  for  a 
sick  child — all  have  fine  possibilities  for  giving  joy.  If  you  find  it 
difficult  to  plan  material  gifts,  take  the  children  in  a  group  and  let  them 
sing  Christmas  songs  for  a  "shut-in"  or  a  class  member  who  may  be 
sick  at  the  time. 

Encourage  the  children  to  make  simple  gifts  for  home-folks. 
Guide  the  conversation  so  that  the  children  will  realize  that  being 
Santa  Claus  does  not  always  mean  giving,  it  meafis  doing.  Help  them 
to  plan  some  happy  surprises  for  the  family. 

When  the  bells  are  finished  write  the  words  "Loving — giving. 
Loving — giving"  on  each  one.      Let  the  children  take  the  bells  home. 


Tihema,  1942  TE  KARERE  351 

FOURTH  WEEK 
THE   CHRISTMAS   PARTY 

(An  exercise  for  fourteen  children,  each  wearing  a  red  letter.) 
M    for  the  mistletoe,  merry  and  bright 
E     for  the  evergreen,  Santa's  delight. 
R     for  room  where  we  hang  up  the  hose. 
R     for  red  ribbons,   for  red  ribbon  bows. 
Y     for  the  youngsters  who  scurry  to  bed. 

C  for  the  candy  canes,  yellow  and  red. 

H  for  holly  that  shines  through  the  pane. 

R  for  the  reindeer  we  seek  for  in  vain. 

I  for  the  ice  of  the  valley  and  hill. 

S  for  the  stockings  for   Santa  to  fill. 

T  for  the  tinsel  that  hangs  on  the  tree. 

M  for  the  music   of  laughter  and  glee. 

A  for  the  absent,  remembered  and  dear. 

S  for  the  season's  glad  greetings  of  cheer. 

THE   STORY  OF  THE  FIRST  CHRISTMAS  TREE 

Hans  and  Gretchen  were  the  children  of  a  poor  woodcutter  in 
Germany.  Their  house  was  small  and  old,  but  it  stood  in  the  midst 
of  a  beautiful  forest. 

In  the  summer  the  children  played  in  the  woods  all  day  long; 
they  climbed  the  trees  and  made  vine  swings.  They  sailed  leaf  boats 
on  the  brook.  They  played  with  the  small  animals  of  the  forest,  and 
loved  them.  They  knew  where  to  find  the  first  flowers  in  the  spring 
and  where  the  best  wild  fruit  grew. 

In  winter,  Hans  and  Gretchen  did  not  always  have  enough  to  eat, 
but  they  usually  had  a  good  fire,  and  they  were  not  often  unhappy. 

One  cold  Christmas  Eve,  after  the  stockings  were  hung,  mother  was 
telling  the  story  of  how  Christmas  came  to  be,  of  the  little  child  in  the 
manger,  the  star,  and  the  shepherd. 

Suddenly,  out  in  the  forest,  they  heard  such  wonderfully  beauti- 
ful music  that  they  threw  open  the  door  in  wonder.  There  on  the  steps 
in  the  storm,  blue  and  shivering  with  cold,  stood  a  little  child.  They 
brought  him  quickly  in  and  rubbed  his  poor  little  hands  and  feet.  They 
warmed  their  breakfast  porridge  and  fed  him  all  he  would  eat.  Then 
they  gave  him  the  very  best  place  to  sit — in  mother's  lap — until  he 
fell  asleep.      They  shared  their  own  bed  with  him. 

In  the  morning  a  most  wonderful  thing  happened.  Hans  and 
Gretchen  awakened,  and  again  they  heard  the  beautiful  music.  It 
seemed  close  to  their  window,  and  they  looked  out  and  saw.  standing 
in  the  snow,  the  little  stranger.  He  was  clothed  all  in  light,  and  many 
angels  sang  around  him. 

Seeing  the  children,  he  smiled  and  said:  "When  you  helped  the 
helpless  you  were  truly  helping  me." 

Then  he  laid  his  hand  upon  a  young  tree  by  the  door  and  said: 

"As   a  token   of  your  loving  spirit,   this   tree   shall    be   ever   ivroen. 
and  the  people  in  many  lands  shall  hang  upon  its  branches  gifts  of  love 
and   good   will   at   Christ  mas   time." 
Presentation   of    Refreshments   by    Santa   Clam: 

After   playing  the   last    game   lead   the   children    into   a   grand   mareh 

which  is  concluded  by  the  children  Pacing  each  other  in  ■  double  circle 

around  I  he  room.  Santa  ClaUB  then  enters  with  pack  on  his  hack  tilled 
with  the  "treat"  for  the  children.  He  runs  between  the  tWO  circles 
thllS   giving   each    child    :i    good    chance    to    sec    him.       When    !<■«•    has    com 

pleted  the  circle  have  the  children  march  pati   him  and  receive  their 

gifts  and   then    into    formation    for  dosing  exercises. 
Song:        One    of    the   rands,    and    "Good    Hvc" 


352 


TE  KARERE 


Tihema,  1942 


NEWS  FROM  THE  FIELD 


MANAWATU    DISTRICT 

By    Polly    Wineera 

Kia  ora,   Katoa!   Katoa! 

We  take  this  opportunity  of  introduc- 
ing- to  you  all  our  new  discovery  in  the 
film  world,  Sgt.  Elsie  Loader,  of  the  Nu- 
haka  Branch.  No  doubt  most  of  you 
have,  by  now,  seen  her  smiling  face  flash 
across  the  screen  whilst  performing  her 
many  canteen  duties  in  camp  down  this 
end  of  the  island.  It  must  have  been  a 
thrill  for  her  family  and  the  folks  back 
home.  Like  mother  like  son  is  a  saying 
so  true,  for  Jimmy  Loader  has  left  the 
Victoria  University  to  don  the  khaki  uni- 
form and  is  now  in  training.  Nuhaka 
has  made  itself  more  than  felt  in  our 
not  so  fair  city  with  the  presence  of  Bro. 
Syd  Christie,  who  visited  us  for  a  few 
days  and  also  Tilly  Whaanga  now  in  the 
officers'  training  school;  his  brother  Ti- 
toko  is  on  the  staff  of  the  Native  Land 
Court,    Wellington. 

The  Porirua  Branch  had  the  pleasure 
of  again  welcoming  the  Mission  President 
and  Sister  Cowley  into  its  midst  on  one 
of  their  "passing  thru"  visits.  Spending 
the  night  at  the  home  of  Sister  Rakapa 
Matiu  Te  Eti  and  attending  Sunday 
School  next  morning,  then  travelling  into 
Wellington  for  Priesthood  meeting  with 
members  of  the  Porirua  Branch.  A  special 
Relief  Society  meeting  was  held,  where 
Sister  Cowley  was  able  to  leave  behind 
her  encouragement  and  a  great  desire  in 
the  hearts  of  the  Sisters  to  achieve 
greater  friendship  and  success  in  their 
duties  than  previously.  The  Priesthood 
meeting  was  conducted  under  the  Branch 
Presidency,  and  a  good  attendance  was 
reported.  We  feel  sure  that  the  words 
left  us  by  our  Mission  President  have 
taken    root    in    our    hearts. 

We  extend  at  this  time  a  very  warm 
and  cordial  welcome  to  Elder  Jay  Larsen 
of  Salt  Lake,  who  visited  the  home  of 
our  Branch  Presidency  on  Sunday,  25th 
October,  and  was  able  to  mingle  with 
the  Maori  Saints  for  the  first  time.  His 
quiet  and  humble  manner  and  ready 
smile  won  him  many  friends  on  his  very 
first  visit;  his  knowledge  of  the  gospel 
and  things  in  general  go  to  show  that  a 
true  Latter-day  Saint  does  not  only  study 
his  gospel,  but  that  he  really  lives  it; 
his  fine  physique  is  also  an  example  of  a 
faithful  observer  of  the  word  of  Avisdom. 
We  hope  to  see  more  of  Elder  Larsen 
whilst  he  is  with  us  and  pray  for  his 
safety  and   well-being  at  all  times. 

Our  District  President,  Bro.  Mane  Tau- 
rau,  has  been  confined  to  a  sick  bed  for 
some  time  now  and  we  sincerely  hope  and 
pray  that  he  will  soon  be  well  again,  for 
his  obsence  is  surely  felt  around  these 
parts.  Bro.  and  Sister  Peneamine  Wi 
Neera  have  been  travelling  to  little  out- 
lying places  and  holding  gospel  conversa- 
tions and  meetings  with  people  who  are 
vitally  interested  in  our  beilef.  That  the 
Lord    may    see    fit    to    make    blossom    the 


seeds  sown  on  these  occasions  is  sin- 
cerely our  prayer.  Sister  WiNeera  ha 
also  visited  the  Wellington  Relief  Society 
meeting  during  the  last  month  and 
praises  the  work  being  done  there  by  the 
Sisters. 

Sister  Rakapa  Matiu  Te  Eti  passed 
away  in  the  Wellington  Hospital  on  Fri- 
day, 30th  October.  During  the  past  year 
she  has  suffered  on  several  occasions  and 
has  not  been  able  to  recover  completely. 
Of  a  very  quiet  and  retiring  personality, 
Sister  Rakapa  will  never  be  forgotten  by 
the  many  Elders  who  laboured  in  this 
and  other  districts  and  whose  home  she 
onened  to  all  missionaries.  Her  testi- 
mony of  the  gospel  will  live  on  with  us. 
She  was  sealed  to  her  late  husband  for 
time  and  all  eternity  in  the  Laie  Temple, 
Hawaii.  The  funeral  service  was  con- 
ducted by  Bro.  George  Katene,  Snr. ; 
speakers  were  Bro.  Peneamine  WiNeera, 
Bro.   Domney,   and   Parata  Pirihi. 

Bro.  Luxford  Peeti  of  Dannevirke  spent 
Labour  Week-end  at  Porirua,  whilst  pass- 
ing through  from  Knox's  College,  Dun- 
edin,  to  his  home.  We  extend  to  him  our 
cordial   invitation   to    visit   us   again   soon. 

Ngati  Poneke,  headed  by  Lady  Pomare, 
was  again  to  the  fore  in  welcoming  home 
another  batch  of  lads  from  the  Middle 
East.  The  Prime  Minister  honoure-d  the 
occasion  with  his  presence,  and  in  ex- 
tending his  welcome  to  the  boys  paid  high 
tribute  to  the  wonderful  work  accom- 
plished by  them  in  the  last  campaigns. 
On  his  visit  to  the  United  States  and  the 
White  House  he  was  thrilled  to  learn 
that  the  Americans  acknowledged  the 
New  Zealander  as  a  great  soldier  and 
fighter  and  deemed  it  a  very  high  honour 
to  fight  side  by  side  with  them.  The 
Minister  for  Defence,  Mr.  Jones,  attended 
with  other  members  and  outstanding  per- 
sonalities and  tribal  representatives.  All 
sneakers  lavished  well-earned  praise  on 
the  Maori  Battalion.  The  returned  boys 
had  news  to  tell  of  their  late  leader,  Lt.- 
Col  E.  T.  W.  Love,  whose  parents  and 
family  were  present,  and  also  of  their 
present  leader,  Lt.-Col.  Baker,  whose  wife 
was  present.  Lieut.  Woods  brought  back 
news  of  Lieut.  George  Katene,  Jnr.,  and 
his  sister,  Wiki,  known  to  all  you  "Te 
Karere"  readers,  who  are  both  well  and 
enjoying  the  protection  of  the  Lord  over 
there  in  the  Holy  Land.  Arthur  and  Her- 
bert Elkington  wish  to  be  remembered  to 
their  folks  in  Madsen ;  Arthur  especially 
is  doing  fine — of  course  he's  losing 
weight.  In     between     speeehes     action 

songs  were  rendered  by  club  members 
and  received  hearty  applause,  and,  of 
course,  there  were  eats  of  all  kinds  set 
down  for  all.  We  wish  to  welcome  home 
Bro.  Len  Nehua  from  North  Auckland 
and  regret  that  he  could  not  take  place 
in  the  reception  prepared  them,  but  he 
can  tell  you  how  happy  he  is  to  be 
home — bet  his  folks  are  happier  though. 
Well  we  hope  you  will  be  out  of  that 
hospital  soon,  Len ;  you  should  be  with 
all  those  nice  girls  visiting  you — why, 
that's  the  best  tonic  for  any  sick  soldier! 


lihema,  1942 


TE  KARERE 


353 


AUCKLAND    DISTRICT 

Reported  by  Mission  Secretary 

Events  of  interest  to  date  are  few  and 
far  between,  only  because  most  happen- 
ing's have  become  so  everyday-like.  For 
instance,  we  used  to  have  Harold  Stokes 
with  us  quite  often;  in  fact,  Harold  was 
always  around,  but  now,  no  more  Harold. 
No  folks,  not  what  you  think.  Worse- 
luck,  Brother  Harold  Stokes  is  now  in  the 
uniform  of  the  R.N.Z  A.F.,  and  the  few 
times  he  has  been  recently  seen  speaks 
well   for   the   life   of   a    soldier. 

A  recent  visitor  to  the  Auckland 
Branch  was  Brother  Lorren  Millhollin 
who,  a  few  days  after  his  first  appear- 
ance, applied  for  baptism,  which  was  per- 
formed,  with  Kelly  Harris  officiating  and 
President  Matthew  Cowley  doing  the 
confirmation.  Brother  Millhollin  is  not 
just  a  new  convert  to  the  Church,  but 
during  his  life  has  mingled  and  lived 
with  the  Saints  wherever  he  has  found 
them,  particularly  so  among  his  folk  in 
Ogden   and   other  parts   of   the   States. 

Additions  to  various  families  have  been 
noticed  and  recorded  in  and  around  the 
district.  Brother  Pat  Rei,  formerly  of 
Auckland  and  now  at  Rotorua,  telegraphs 
announcing  the  arrival  of  a  bonny 
son  to  keep  Irlene  in  order,  on  November 
2,  1942.  Of  course  this  news  did  ih  no 
way  shock  the  editor  as  he  became  the 
proud  father  of  a  son  on  October  29th. 
1942.  Sister  Jean  Martin  (nee  Bilimnn) 
a  day  or  so  prior  to  the  Harris  heir'r, 
arrival,  gave  birth  to  a  lovely  baby  girl. 
If  this  keeps  up,  I  mean  if  the  cycle  of 
prospective  "fathers-again"  is  completed, 
the  future  of  the  Auckland  Branch  Pri- 
mary  Association    is   assured. 

During  the  past  month  President  Wil- 
liam R  Perrott  of  the  Branch  and  Dis- 
trict, has  not  been  able  to  be  with  us 
very  much,  as  his  health  is  certainly  not 
improving  under  the  added  strain  of  more 
responsibility.  We  all  wish  Bro.  Perrotl 
B  speedy  recovery  to  his  full  health  that 
we  may  all  again  enjoy  his  companionship 
and  counsel. 

Two    more    visitors    to    our    Chun  I 
Vice        Lost      Sunday     were     Bros.     M'Intyre 
and     Mack,    and     we    hope    that     their    con- 
tinued  attendance   will   be  afforded   us   for 
ome  <  ime  to  cook 

It     is     pleasing     to     know     thai 

of    the    old     face,    of    the    youn-'er 

lion       -I  ill       visit       with      us      as      mueh      as 

their    du1  ies    permil  bil    a  nd 

Marje  1  mona:  the  old  faithfuls 

still    ai  i  endinfl     meei  Ins        for     \ ' 
are   very   grateful. 

Ait  h.  no1     heard 

' i .- 1 1 1 1 .- 1 1  i    Brani  h.   ye\    I 
Ins    i"    the   be  I    thej     know    ho* 
the    Go  pel    and    fulfil    th 

.  .i   of   i  hem      .i  i    •    the   "  ' 
ene    on    beha  II 
Tatnakj   Sunday    Sehool,   canv     I 


their  Sixpenny  Fund  and  Sunday  SchDol 
report. 

The  Mangere  Branch  is  still  working: 
on  the  Gold  and  Green  Ball.  Latest  re- 
ports from  the  Branch  President,  Teito 
Tangataiti,  is  that  the  Big  Night  will  be 
the    11th    December,    1942. 

President  and  Sister  Cowley  were  ac- 
companied by  Bro.  and  Sister  Alex  Wis- 
hart  and  family  when  they  visited  and 
held  a  Branch  Conference  with  the  Going 
families  at  Maromaku.  Bro.  Wishart  is 
likely    to    be    away    for    a    fortnight. 

Bro.  and  Sister  Ivan  Reid  are  also 
spending  a  week  vacationing  in  Hamilton 
and    Tauranga. 

Brother  and  Sister  Amadio  write  in  and 
tell  of  the  wonderful  things  that  are  hap- 
pening to  them  in  their  travels  and  re- 
port also  of  missionary  work  done  by 
them.  While  in  and  around  Waihi,  they 
met  with  Sister  Florence  Ross  at  Kati 
Kati,  and  there  assisted  in  the  establish- 
ment of  a  Sunday  School  class  under  the 
direction    of    Sister    Ross. 

A  baptism  performed  by  Bro.  Amadio 
on  the  12th  October,  1942,  was  with 
Mrs  Merea  Kaumatua  Jacobs  as  candi- 
date. 

Bro.  Amadio  informs  us  also  that  Sister 
Dorrie  Feil  has  taken  up  war  work  in 
electrical  welding,  and  that  Hepa  (for- 
mer editor)  had  written  him  and  told  of 
his  meetings  with  a  lot  of  the  former 
missionaries. 

HAURAKI    DISTRICT 
Reported    by    Rosie    Watene 

I  te  •">  o  Hepetema,  ka  male  a  Pirimona 
Watene  ki  te  hohipera  i  te  Thames.  Tona 
mate  he  Niumonia.  Ona  tan  e  7C>.  I  te 
fi  o  nga  ra  ka  eke  <>na  iwi  o  Niratimaru 
ki  te  tangihanga  mona  i  te  Kiri  Kiri. 
I  te  ra  0  nga  "matua"  i  runga  i  tona 
ngakau  mahaki,  ngawari  hoki.  he  nui  nflfa 
kupu    mihi    a    ona    iwi    mona.    me    ni 

mihi   hoki   a  ona   boa   pakeha   pure]   paoro 

hoki,    me    ana     hoa     Maori    kura    hoki     i    te 

Tipene.  Mihi  wairua  mai  ki  to  tatou 
hoa.      Ee   tina   pou    no   t«    peka   o    te   Kiri 

Kiri.    a     niema     luatahi     hoki     i     urn     ki     te 

hahi    i    te    tau    1888,    na    Rohepa    Patiha 

i    iriiri.       Koia    hoki    t,.    Timuaki,  tuatoru 

o    te    peka    mo    etahi    lau    maha.       Tokorima 

ona    tamariki,    e    82    nga    mokopuna    kua 
mahue    iho    mo'    i    aia,      Hei    koan 
kau    mona;    kei    roto    katoa    tona    whanau 
i  te  rongopai.     I   •«■  tau   1980  i  haere  atu 
ia   i  te  ope  ki   ie  Temepara   I   Hawaiiki. 

I    'e    -    ■■    ira    ra    ka    nehua    tona    tinana. 

na  Til. i   Reihana  i   whakahaere  te  karakia, 

tehe      i      whakatapu 

Tenei    la    te,    Hautn    a    wmirna    atu    nei    I 
tana  vraka  la  Tainui      Ko  Hoturoa 
te     tangata,     ko     Hotuope     Hotui 
Hotumatapu 
kati  'I'.iv.  bao  il  at  uwhatu 

Hotunui      ii  Maruluahu  Kuriuaua 

P»«  unauroa 

U  at<  n.  Mil. i  I'm \' 


We  tpish  h<  franti  I  build  after  //;<•  pattern  thai 

vealed;  and  in  doing  all  ///-•  laws,  rules   ordina                     ulations 

contained  in  the  Scriptures  "in!  practice  them  as  far  as  possible,  and  th 

learning  anil  intpi  oirii  m                                                         'of  //»<• 

nionlh   <>i   God,      I  J 


354  TE  KARERK  Tihema.  1942 

NOTICE  TO  ALL  BRANCH  PRESIDENTS 

Ii  has  come  to  my  attention  that  some  of  our  brethren  have  been 
performing  baptisms  in  bath  tubs.  If  any  such  baptisms  have  beei\ 
performed  in  your  brances  will  you  instruct  the  parties  to  perform 
this  ordinance  again  and  do  it  in  accordance  with  the  revealed  word 
of  the  Lord. 

I  draw  your  attention  to  Section  20,  verses  72,  73  and  74,  of 
the  Doctrine  and  Covenants,  which  reads  as  follows : — 

"Baptism  is  to  be  administered  in  the  following  manner  unto 
all  those  who  repent : — 

The  person  who  is  called  of  God,  and  has  authority  from  Jesus 
Christ  to  baptize,  SHALL  GO  DOWN  INTO  THE  WATER 
WITH  THE  PERSON  WHO  HAS  PRESENTED  HIM  OR 
HERSELF  FOR  BAPTISM  and  shall  say,  calling  him  or  her  by 
name — Having  been  commissioned  of  Jesus  Christ,  I  baptize  you 
in  the  name  of  the  Father,  and  of  the  Son,  and  of  the  Holy  Ghost. 
Amen. 

Then  shall  he  immerse  him  or  her  in  the  water,  and  come  forth 
again  OUT  OF  THE  WATER." 

You  will  observe  that  the  person  performing:  the  ordinance 
SHALL  GO  DOWN  INTO  THE  WATER  WITH  THE  PER- 
SON BEING  BAPTIZED.  Of  course  this  could  not  be  done  in 
a  bath  tub.  It  would  be  very  difficult  to  completely  immerse  a  person 
in  a  bath  tub,  and  the  immersion  must  be  complete.  Read  also  3 
Nephi,  chapter  11,  verses  21  to  27. 

I  am  informed  also  that  there  have  been  some  baptisms  per- 
formed at  which  the  proper  words  were  not  used.  These  should  be 
done  again  and  ONLY  the  words  contained  in  the  above  revelation 
used. 

If  there  is  any  question  in  your  mind  about  the  words  at  the 
time  a  baptism  is  being  performed  I  would  suggest  that  someone  be 
present  with  a  Doctrine  and  Covenants  who  will  follow  the  words 
in  the  book  and  see  that  the  correct  words  are  used. 

BLESSING  BABIES.  It  is  the  usual  practice  in  the  Church  to 
take  the  baby  to  be  blessed  to  the  Fast  Meeting  on  the  first  Sunday 
of  the  month.  If  this  is  not  possible  the  baby  may  be  blessed  at 
home  by  the  father,  if  the  father  holds  the  authority  of  an  Elder  and 
is  worthy.  If  the  baby  is  blessed  at  home  the  father  should  first  get 
the  permission  of  the  Branch  Presidency  and  then  be  sure  that  a 
proper  record  of  the  ordinance  is  made  and  given  to  the  Branch 
Secretary.  In  some  of  the  branches  I  may  have  suggested  ihat  it 
world,  not  be  necessary  to  FIRST  obtain  the  consent  of  the  Branch 
Presidency.  If  such  was  the  case  I  was  in  error.  The  Branch 
Presidency  shall  supervise  the  administration  of  this  ordinance. 

Matthew  Cowley, 

Mission  President. 


Readers  and  Subscribers 

If  renewals  and  subscriptions  are  received  at  the  Editor's 
Office,  Box  72,  Auckland,  not  later  than  the  10th  of  each 
month,  which  is  the  date  set  for  number  to  be  printed,  your 
receipt  of  the   current  and   subsequent  issues  is   assured. 

Another  thing,  any  change  in  address  should  be  notified. 
We  have  a  large  number  of  returned  mail  because  people  are 
not  there  to  collect  it. 

The  subscription  list  is  way  down  at  the  moment  and  it  is 
hoped  that  those  of  you  who  still  subscribe  will  continue  to  do 
so.  If  Branch  Presidents  will  launch-  a  drive  in  their  branches 
and  communities  to  see  that  there  is  at  least  ONE  "Te  Karere" 
in  EVERY  L.D.S.  home,  I  am  sure  that  the  valuable  contribu- 
tion in  "Te  Karere"  will  be  worth  while. 

As  this  is  the  last  month  of  the  year  1942,  let  us  all  try  to 
do  better  in   1943. 

Let  every  agent  and  reporter  add  to  his  or  her  list  on  the 
subscriptions.  Let  every  Branch  President  appoint  a  corres- 
pondent who  will  send  in  news  if  you  are  not  satisfied  with 
the  present  correspondents  covering  your  communities.  If 
there  is  any  change  in  the  correspondents,  the  Editor  is  indeed 
indebted  to  those  of.  the  past  for  their  loyalty  and  service. 
Not  one  of  you  has  questioned  the  Editor's  right  to  print  or 
not  to  print  any  of  the   material  you  submit. 

We  need  more  news  of  your  activities.  Perhaps  there  is 
nothing   doing  in  the   Branches? 

All  that  is  asked :  More  subscribers — more  news — more 
articles  in   Maori  and   Pakeha. 

All  contributors  are,  however,  asked  to  write  plainly  that 
your  material   may   be   understood. 

Subscriptions  expired  as  was  published  in  last  issue  not 
already  renewed  will  not  be  continued.  Friend,  relative  and 
foe  alike,  and  no  hard  feelings. 


EXPIRATIONS   FOR   DECEMBER,    1942 


Amadio,    Norman — Auckland 
Anaru,    Heni — Awarua 
Akuhata,    Mei     Opapa 
Attenborough,    R.    V.      Air   Force 
Mrs.    K.       Paki    Paki 
arid 

Erueti,    Kawana      Kaikohe 
Fiaeata,  terton 

Hapi,    Mrs.    K.-i     Taradale 
Ella     Opapa 

Hippolite,    Olive      W<  Hi 

Ihaia,    K;m      '.' 

Law  rem  ■ 

Luff,    Rtri.    Alfred      Wellin 

iihi 


Paki,    Myrtle — Wail 

Poutu,    Wikitoria      Waiomio 
Puke,  Hare,  Jnr.  &  Snr.     Taupiri 
Purcell,  ikland 

Potatau,   Tahiv 

i  nunui 
Reihai 
Richard 


SENTENCE   SERMONS. 

This  is  a  world   of  rush  wit] 
It  seems  that  all  who  are  weak  mu 
for  the  strong.     There  is  nothing  that  i 
than  to  contemplate  the  fact  that  we  ai 
where   true   worth   and  honesty   are   all    I 
day   of   reward.      Those   who    in   this   world    seem    to    hu 
thing's  their  own  way  will  be  under  the  necessity  of  sel< 
a  rear  seat  in  that  day. 

No  nation  can,  as  a  nation,  turn  against  the  plan  of  life 
and  salvation  when  it  is  offered  to  her  people  and  continue 
to  prosper. 

*  *  * 

Above  all  things  on  this  earth  I  desire  the  advancement 
of  God's  kingdom,  and  I  sincerely  hope  and  pray  this  desire 
may  always  fill  my  heart. 

*  *  * 

I  do  try  to  feel  another's  pain,  and  to  aid  all  that  I  can 
to  lessen  it,  and  I  pray  to  God  that  my  feelings  in  this  particu- 
lar may  never  change. 

My  experience  is  that  faith  is  really  a  gift  of  God  and 
that  men  who  have  sufficient  faith  to  trust  in  God  come  out 
of  difficulties  financial  and  otherwise  in  a  most  miraculous  way. 

*  *  * 

Never  forget  that  the  true  way  to  be  happy  is  to  do  some- 
thing to  add  to  others'  happiness.  Try  to  forget  self,  and 
joy  here  and  hereafter  will  come  to  you. 

Home  is  not  a  house,  no  matter  how  large  or  how  grand  it 
may  be,  but  home  is  where  love  and  contentment  dwell,  and 
to  the  Saints  where  the  good  Spirit  dwells. 

*  *  * 

Neither  business  nor  politics  brings  the  happiness  that 
one  and  all  experience  in  labouring  for  the  good  of  their 
fellows,  and  in  trying  to  bring  souls  to  a  knowledge  of  the 
truth. 

*  *  * 

Never  make  a  dollar  that  7ou  do  not  pay  the  Lord  His 
share  of  it,  and  be  liberal  with  your  offerings  to  the  poor,  and 
in  all  good  works,  and  you  will  be  happy  and  God  will  bless  you. 

*  *  * 

Let  us  all  do  the  will  of  our  Father  in  heaven  to-day,  and 
we  will  then  be  prepared  for  the  eternities  to  come.  Never 
forget  that  it  is  the  pearl  of  great  price — life  eternal — for 
which  we  are  working. 

*  *  * 

I  plead  with  you  all  never  to  allow  yourselves  to  fall  into 
the  error  of  measuring  the  blessings  of  our  Father  in  heaven 
by  the  financial  success  or  failure  which  may  come  to  you.  It 
has  been  said  that  God  must  have  supreme  contempt  for 
wealth,  judging  by  many  of  those  whom  He  allows  to  have  it 
in  great  abundance.